SCS - Dangerous Waters - Manual - PC

Sonalysts Combat Simulations
Dangerous Waters
User Manual
docs.com
http://www.replacement
The software and documentation are 2004 Sonalysts, Inc. All rights
reserved. Sonalysts and Sonalysts Combat Simulations Dangerous
Waters are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sonalysts, Inc. The
Naval Institute Guide to Combat Fleets of the World 2002 by the U.S.
Naval Institute, Annapolis, Maryland, All rights reserved and the Naval
Institute Guide to World Naval Weapons Systems 1997 by the U.S. Naval
Institute, Annapolis, Maryland, All rights reserved are trademarks of the
U.S. Naval Institute and may be registered in certain countries. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
MANUAL SECTIONS
This manual is divided into sections. Each section contains its
own Table of Contents.
Section 1: Install Guide
1-1
Section 2: Welcome/Getting Started
1-2
Section 3: Main Menu
3-1
Section 4: Multiplayer
4-1
Section 5: Training
5-1
Section 6: Navigation Station
6-1
Section 7: FFG Stations
7-1
Section 8: MH-60R Stations
8-1
Section 9: P-3C Orion Stations
9-1
Section 10: Kilo Stations
10-1
Section 11: Akula Stations
11-1
Section 12: Seawolf Stations
12-1
Section 13: 688(I) Stations
13-1
Appendices
Appendix A: Acronyms
A-1
Appendix B: Terms
B-1
Appendix C: Submarine Max and Mins
C-1
Appendix D: In-Game Sensors
D-1
Appendix E: Credits
E-1
LICENSE
This License does not provide you with title to or ownership of the software
program Sonalysts Combat Simulations Dangerous Waters, (the
Software) but only a right of limited use of the Software, and ownership of
the media on which a copy of the Software is reproduced. The Software,
including its source code, is, and shall remain, the property of Sonalysts, Inc.
You may make one copy of the Software solely for back-up purposes,
provided that you reproduce all proprietary notices (e.g., copyright, trade
secret, trademark) in the same form as in the original and retain possession
of such back-up copy. The term "copy" as used in this License means any
reproduction of the Software, in whole or in part, in any form whatsoever,
including without limitation, print-outs on any legible material, duplication in
memory devices of any type, and handwritten or oral duplication or
reproduction. The manual may not be copied, photographed, reproduced,
translated, or reduced to any electrical medium or machine-readable form,
in whole or in part, without prior written consent from Sonalysts. All rights
not specifically granted in this Agreement are reserved by Sonalysts.
You shall not, in any way, modify, enhance, decode, or reverse engineer the
Software. User-created scenarios may be distributed free of charge, but shall
not be sold, licensed, or included as part of any package or product that is
sold or licensed, without the prior written consent of Sonalysts. You may not
rent or lease the Software or related materials.
You may permanently transfer the Software and related written materials if
you retain no copies, and the transferee agrees to be bound by the terms of
this License. Such a transfer terminates your License to use the Software and
related materials.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Sonalysts and Battlefront.com warrant to the original purchaser that the
media on which the Software is recorded is free from defects in workmanship
and material under normal use and service for 90 days from the date of
delivery of the Software. This warranty does not cover material that has been
lost, stolen, copied, or damaged by accident, misuse, neglect, or
unauthorized modification.
Sonalysts and Battlefront.coms entire liability and your exclusive remedy
shall be, at Battlefront.coms option, either return of the price paid, or
replacement of the media which does not meet the limited warranty described
above. The media must be returned to Battlefront.com with a copy of your
purchase receipt. Any replacement Software media shall be subject to this
same limited warranty for the remainder of the original warranty period, or
thirty days, whichever is longer.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
SONALYSTS AND BATTLEFRONT.COM MAKE NO OTHER WARRANTY OR
REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR ANY WARRANTY ARISING FROM
A COURSE OF DEALING, TRADE USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE WITH
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED MATERIALS, THEIR QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. AS A RESULT, THE SOFTWARE AND RELATED
ii
MATERIALS ARE LICENSED AS IS. IN NO EVENT WILL SONALYSTS OR

BATTLEFRONT.COM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM POSSESSION, USE, OR
MALFUNCTION OF THE SOFTWARE AND RELATED MATERIALS. SOME
STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATION AS TO HOW LONG AN IMPLIED
WARRANTY LASTS AND/OR EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND/OR
EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES
YOU SPECIFIC RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH
VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
iii
iv

6(&7,21
,167$//$7,21*8,'(
Section 1: Installation Guide
1-1
1: INSTALLATION GUIDE
S YSTEM R EQUIREMENTS
MINIMUM SPECIFICATIONS
Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP
550Mhz processor
128 MB RAM
Eight-speed CD-ROM drive
Direct 3D compliant Video Card with 32MB RAM, (with DirectX 9.0b
compatible drivers)
Sound Card with DirectX 9.0b compatible drivers
Desktop Resolution of 800x600 @ 16-bit color depth
590MB hard-drive space for installation
Internet or LAN connection required for multiplayer
R E C O M M E N D E D S Y S TE M
The following upgrades from the minimum specifications are
recommended:
1GHz+ processor
256 MB RAM
Direct 3D compliant Video Card with 64MB RAM, (with DirectX 9.0b
compatible drivers)
1GB hard-drive space for installation
T O I NSTALL S.C.S. D ANGEROUS W ATERS

1. Insert S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters CD disk #1 in your CD-ROM drive.
When the install wizard appears, click INSTALL.
2. The Dangerous Waters Setup Wizard appears. Click NEXT to proceed

to the next step. (You can click CANCEL at any point to exit the Setup
Wizard.)
3. The Choose Destination Location window appears. Click NEXT to

install the game to the default location or select BROWSE to select and
alternative location, then click NEXT.
4. The Setup Type window appears. You must select FULL or TYPICAL
before you can proceed. Click NEXT.
5. The Select Program Folder window appears. Click NEXT to install the
game to the default Program File location or click BROWSE to select
an alternate location, then click NEXT.
1-2
6. The Start Copying Files Window appears providing you with an

opportunity to review your selections for type and locations before
starting the copy process. To change your selections, click BACK. Click
NEXT to continue.
7. A progress bar appears indicting that the files are being copied to your
hard drive. Partway through this process you are prompted to insert
disk #2. Remove disk #1, insert disk #2 then click OK.
8. Near the completion of the copy process you are prompted to insert
disk # 1 again. Remove disk #2, insert disk#1 then click OK.
9. You are prompted to add an icon to the desktop. Click YES or NO as

desired.
10. The Adobe Acrobat Reader information window appears. Click YES.
11. You are prompted to install Voice Command Recognition software.
Click YES or NO as desired.
12. You are prompted to install DirectX 9 if it is not installed. You must
install DirectX 9 to run S.C.S. Dangerous Waters. You are informed if
DirectX 9 is already installed. Click OK.
13. The Initial Skill Level selection window appears. You must select
Novice or Advanced settings as described in the wizard to continue.
Click NEXT.
14. The InstallShield Wizard Complete window appears. Click FINISH.
1-3
1-4

6(&7,21
:(/&20(
*(77,1*67$57('
Section 2: Welcome / Getting Started
2-1
2: WELCOME/GETTING STARTED .............................................................2-3

CONTROLLABLE PLATFORMS .................................................................2-3
U.S. PLATFORMS ............................................................ 2-3
Oliver Hazard Perry (FFG-7) Class......................... 2-3
MH-60R Multi-mission Helicopter ........................... 2-4
P3-C Orion.............................................................. 2-4
Seawolf (SSN 21) Class ......................................... 2-4
Los Angeles Improved (SSN 688(I)) Class ............. 2-5
RUSSIAN PLATFORMS ...................................................... 2-5
Kilo SS & Kilo Improved SS Classes ...................... 2-5
Akula 1 Improved SSN & Akula II SSN Classes ..... 2-5
CHINESE PLATFORMS (PROC)......................................... 2-5
Kilo SS & Kilo Improved SS Classes ...................... 2-5
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...................................................................2-6
ASSUMPTIONS IN MANUAL ................................................. 2-7
Specific Options Settings ........................................ 2-7
Terms defined......................................................... 2-9
GAMEPLAY OVERVIEW ..................................................................... 2-11
GAMEPLAY ................................................................... 2-11
Getting Started...................................................... 2-12
Autocrew............................................................... 2-13
Damage ................................................................ 2-13
Task Bar ............................................................... 2-13
Navigation Station (Brief Overview) ...................... 2-14
Voice Commands ................................................. 2-15
System Menu........................................................ 2-16
PLAYING FROM THE NAVIGATION STATION ........................ 2-17
2-2
2: WELCOME/GETTING STARTED
Now you can command a surface, subsurface or air platform all in one
game! S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters allows you to engage the enemy below
as the commander of an Oliver Hazard Perry Class Guided Missile Fast
Frigate, its MH-60R multi-mission helicopter or a P-3C Orion ASW/ASUW
aircraft. Prowl the ocean depths in a U.S. Seawolf or Improved Los Angeles
Class Nuclear Submarine or seek out enemy targets in a Russian Akula I
Improved or Akula II Nuclear Submarine or an ultra quiet Russian or
Chinese Kilo diesel sub!
Play the campaign from either the Blue (U.S. or U.S. and Russian alliance)
or Red vantage point (Chinese or Chinese and Russian alliance).
Multiplayer missions pit you against players commanding the most capable
submarines at sea or a deadly submarine hunter.
Multiplayer Multi-Station mode allows you to man a specific station aboard
a ship, plane or sub with other players taking the role of other
crewmembers on the same platform! See the Multiplayer section of this
manual.
As the Commander of your platform you can relinquish control of various
stations to your Autocrew or man all stations yourself. Give orders to your
crew via voice commands, use the handy menu commands from the Task
Bar or mouse commands in the Navigation Station. The Task Bar allows
you to perform many maneuvering tasks from any station.
Create your own missions in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters powerful Mission
Editor. Information from the United States Naval Institute is available on all
military ships and planes modeled in the game.
C ONTROLLABLE
PLATFORMS
Controllable platforms include sub classes from three countries and U.S.
Navy ASW surface and air platforms. The following classes are controllable
in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters.
U.S. P L A TF OR M S
Oliver Hazard Perry (FFG-7) Class
Small, sleek and fast, Oliver Hazard Perry class guided missile frigates
(FFGs) are uniquely capable warships, commonly referred to as a "Fleet
work horse," to protect shipping, with particular emphasis as an AntiSubmarine Warfare (ASW) combatant. This ship class was designed to be
cost efficient and therefore lacks a true multi-mission capability.
Nonetheless, these frigates are a tough ship capable of withstanding
considerable damage as demonstrated by the USS Stark surviving a hit by
two Exocet cruise missiles and the survival of USS Samuel B. Roberts after
suffering a mine detonation. A significant combat upgrade for these ships
came about from embarking multi-mission helicopters to extend the combat
reach in terms of both weapons and sensor capabilities. This surface
2-3
combatant is capable of engaging and destroying targets on land, in the air,

and on the sea; remaining at sea for extended periods of time, and
continuing to operate in very rough sea conditions.
MH-60R Multi-mission Helicopter

The MH-60R is an advanced multi-mission helicopter equipped with state of
the art electronics and sonar including Multi-Mode Radar, Electronic
Support Measures, and AQS-22 airborne low frequency dipping sonar
(ALFS). Its Penguin missiles can engage surface combatants and its
Hellfire missiles make it a threat to small surface craft and land targets
alike! With its dipping sonar and the latest in sonobuoy processing the MH60R can quickly detect, localize and attack enemy submarines with Mk 46
or Mk 50 torpedoes!
Its up to date sensors and its mission specific weapon loadouts make this
an excellent combat asset that greatly expands the range of its host surface
combatant.
The MH-60 R is a controllable platform and is embarked on the Perry class
(FFG-7) and other U.S. ships in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters.
P3-C Orion
While its primary mission was originally anti-submarine warfare (ASW) and
maritime patrol, the four-engine turboprop P-3C Orion has increasingly
become a multi-mission platform as evidenced by its invaluable support of
Operation Iraqi Freedom where it provided battlefield surveillance! Utilizing
its long-range and the ability to remain on station for long periods of time,
the P-3C patrolled the battlespace and provided instantaneous reports to
troops on the ground.
Mission roles for the P-3C in addition to ASW now include anti-surface
warfare (ASUW), carrier battle group support, over-the-horizon (OTH)
surveillance and targeting, interdiction operations, and littoral warfare. To
assist in its anti-surface role, new equipment has been installed including
imaging radar and electro-optic sensors. ASW equipment in the P-3C
includes magnetic anomaly detection (MAD) and sonobuoys including
directional frequency and ranging (DIFAR) capability.
The P-3C can carry a variety of weapons depending on its assigned
mission. Weapons include Mk 46 and Mk 50 torpedoes, and SLAM-ER and
Maverick missiles for strike warfare. Mines can also be carried.
Seawolf (SSN 21) Class

Countering the threat of the ultra-quiet non-nuclear subs acquired by third
world countries is now a primary mission of U.S. nuclear attack submarines.
This state-of-the-art U.S. attack submarine is the quietest nuclear powered
submarine currently deployed by any country. With its superior stealth, a
tactical speed higher than any other U.S. submarine, and its hardened sail,
Seawolf stands ready to tackle missions as varied as the insertion of
Special Forces to attacking threats under the polar ice cap. Her Tomahawk
missiles make her a threat to inland targets up to 1,400 nm away and her
Mk 48 ADCAP torpedoes are lethal to subs and ships alike.
2-4
Los Angeles Improved (SSN 688(I)) Class

The backbone of the fleet, the 688(I) class sub is one of the quietest
submarines in operation today and is armed with state-of-the-art weaponry
including Tomahawk land attack missiles and Mk 48 ADCAP torpedoes. Its
hardened sail and bow planes make it available for missions under the ice.
688(I) class subs are available in sufficient numbers to ensure availability
for missions around the world.
R U S S I A N P L ATF O R M S
Kilo SS & Kilo Improved SS Classes
Dubbed The Black Hole by NATO personnel for its uncanny ability to
disappear, the ultra quiet Kilo and its crew stand poised to protect littoral
water from intrusion by enemy submarines and surface ships. Its six
torpedo tubes can be loaded out with the latest in Russian wire-guided and
wake homing torpedoes as well as anti-sub, anti-ship and land attack
missiles making it a deadly opponent. With its anechoic hull coating, two
120-cell batteries providing 9.700 kw/hr and an air regeneration system
providing enough breathable atmosphere for 260 hours of operations with a
full crew, this is not your grandfathers World War II diesel submarine!
Akula 1 Improved SSN & Akula II SSN Classes

Russias counterpart to the U.S. Los Angeles Class, the Improved Akula-I
Class submarine is nearly as quiet as the 688(I). With six additional tubes
external to the pressure hull, it is capable of carrying additional weapons or
decoys.
Quieter than the Akula I Improved the Akula II is the quietest nuclear
powered Russian submarine in existence. At low speed it is reported to be
as quiet or quieter than the United States Improved Los Angeles class
submarine. Also armed with six additional external tubes for weapons or
countermeasures, the Akula-II is a formidable opponent.
C H I NE S E P L A TF OR M S (PROC)
Kilo SS & Kilo Improved SS Classes
Uniquely suited for operations in the South China and East China Seas, five
Russian built Kilo submarines significantly enhance the Peoples Liberation
Army Navy (PLANs) attack submarine fleet. One of the quietest
submarines in operation when operating on battery, it is capable of
detecting an enemy sub at a range far greater than the range at which it
can be detected itself. This extremely capable sub with its loadout of antisub and anti-surface torpedoes and Russian built missiles stands ready to
confront hostile naval forces and deny them access to sea lanes, and costal
and naval facilities!
2-5
H OW
TO USE THIS
M ANUAL
This manual is divided into the following sections. (A separate Mission

Editor manual is found in electronic format on S.C.S. Dangerous Waters
CD 1 in the Manual folder.
Install Guide: Provides minimum and suggested system requirements and
step-by-step instructions for installing S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
Welcome/Getting Started: This is the section you are reading now. This
section defines terms as used in the manual and outlines game settings
assumed in the manual. If your settings do not match those assumed, your
experience will be different than those described in here. This section also
provides a very brief overview of the game, how to get started and an
overview of game elements that are common across all controllable
platforms. You are also directed to the location of full explanations for game
elements when appropriate.
Main Menu: Main Menu options with the exception of Mission Editor and
Multiplayer are described in full here. Mission Editor is fully explained in a
separate manual included on your game CDs. Multiplayer is described in its
own section in this manual.
Multiplayer: How to host or join a multiplayer game is explained. Playing
the game in Multi-Station mode is also described. In Multi-Station mode
several players work together within a single platform, with each person
manning a specific station or suite of stations.
Training: This section provides background needed to effectively use sonar
sensors and the TMA station.
Sonar School: An introduction to sound transmission and sonar terms
and concepts. A description of how to use the Sonobuoy Display
windows (Grams) is found here.
TMA Basics: The principles of Target Motion Analysis (TMA) and how
it works to create a firing solution are covered here.
Navigation Station: The game starts in the Navigation Station regardless
of the platform you are commanding. The Navigation Station functions
virtually the same regardless of Ownship selection. The basics of
Navigation Station functionality are covered here. All other stations are
covered separately according to platform.
FFG Stations: Explains all FFG stations and functionality.
MH-60R Stations: Explains all MH-60R stations and functionality
P-3C Orion Stations: Explains all P-3C Orion stations and functionality
Kilo Stations: Explains all Kilo stations and functionality.
Akula Stations: Explains all Akula stations and functionality.
2-6
Seawolf Stations: Explains all Seawolf (SSN 21 Class) stations and

functionality.
688(I) Stations: Explains all 688(I) stations and functionality
Appendix B: Terms
Appendix C: Submarine Max and Mins
Appendix D: Ownship Sensor Names
Appendix E: Credits: A list of the people who created and contributed to
the production of S.C.S. Dangerous Waters
Mission Editor: S.C.S. Dangerous Waters ships with the robust Mission
Editor used to create the campaign and all missions in the game. The S.C.S
Dangerous Waters Mission Editor User Manual is provided in electronic
(pdf) format in the Manual Directory on S.C.S Dangerous Waters CD #1.
A SSU M PT I O N S
I N M A N U AL
This section defines terms as used in the manual. The writer assumes
specific Options settings are selected in the Options>Game and Crew
screens. If different Game and Crew options are selected, the descriptions
seen here may not match your experience.
Specific Options Settings

You were forced to select Advanced or Novice Settings when you installed
S.C.S. Dangerous Waters. While learning the game neither mode is
perfect. This manual assumes the specific settings for Game and Crew
Options as noted below.
Crew Options Settings

This manual describes what the player must do to use each station;
therefore, it assumes all Autocrew are off. If you have turned on any of your
Autocrew your experience will not be what is described within this manual.
BFrom the Main Menu click Options then Crew. Click the square in
front of the type of platform you are commanding to select the
Autocrew options for that Platform. Click Defaults (Advanced).
This turns off all Autocrew for that platform.
9 Note: There is no Autocrew option for Auto Pilot for the P-3C and the
MH-60R. Because flying is never your primary tasking in air
platforms, Auto Pilot is on by default. When you fly the P-3C or MH60R with a joystick you must switch the Auto Pilot to OFF; however,
the Auto Pilot continues to work until you move the joystick. As soon
as you leave that station to attend to your tasking on other screens,
the Auto Pilot reverts to ON. Turn it OFF again when you return to
the Pilot Station. See Main Menu/Options/Crew for information on
Autocrew for each platform.
2-7
Game Options Settings

While many game options can be considered cheats, some reflect realistic
settings. Selecting Novice Game setting can enhance your enjoyment of the
game while learning, by speeding up weapon and aircraft launch times and
reducing the time needed to repair damage.
If you selected Advanced settings at install or have tweaked any of your
Game Options settings we recommend clicking Defaults (Novice) in the
lower left of the Options>Game screen.
The manual assumes the following settings are selected in Options>Game
screen.
Show Dead Platforms ON: When ON destroyed platforms appear in 3D
and on the Nav Map whether you have detected the platform or not. This
feature is a cheat but provides you with feedback that you really have hit
your target when you have no way of knowing otherwise. While you are
learning the game, this feedback is reassuring that you are doing things
correctly. The dead platform is a Truth object. It represents the actual
identity of the platform and its actual location on the Nav Map and in the 3D
view when the symbol is selected. Its symbol is greyed on the Nav Map to
indicate it has been destroyed. You will continue to see the wire frame or
solution representations as detected by your own sensors as well. (See
Navigation Station/2D Navigational Map for in-depth information on the Nav
Map and its symbols.)
Show Truth OFF: When ON, symbols for all objects in the mission display
on the Nav Map, whether you have detected them or not. Each symbol
appears in the contacts true location and reflects its accurate category and
alliance ID.
Show Allies OFF: When ON this is the equivalent of Show Truth for Allies.
The true locations and platform data for Ownside/friendly platforms appear
on the Nav Map.
Show Link Data ON: Commanders of the FFG, MH-60R and the P-3C will
see the Nav Map (and Geoplot) NTDS symbols for Link participants and all
contacts currently held by Link participants. Submerged subs will not see
Link data on the map at game start. Subs see Link data only when at
comms depth with the radio antenna extended or when the floating wire is
streamed and Ownship is shallow and traveling slow enough to receive
data. Once your sub is out of radio contact Link data are no longer updated.
See Navigation Station/2D Navigational Map section for in-depth
information on the Nav Map, its symbols and Link information.)
Weapon Quick Launch is ON: When OFF weapon reloads reflect realistic
times. When ON weapon reload and launch time units are in seconds
instead of minutes.
Aircraft Quick Launch ON: When OFF the time it takes to launch the
FFGs helicopter reflects a realistic time interval. When ON, aircraft launch
time units are in seconds instead of minutes. (It takes a full hour to launch
your helo when it is not in Alert 30 if this feature is OFF.)
2-8
Quick Damage Repair ON: When OFF damaged equipment repairs reflect
realistic times. When ON, repair time takes seconds instead of minutes.
Enable Wind OFF: When ON, any Wind Region defined in the mission by
the mission creator affects your Ownship aircraft or FFG navigation. Wind
speed and direction are noted in the Task Bar for aircraft and the FFG. See
Note below.
Enable Currents OFF: Any water region defined for a mission can
influence Ownship sub and ship navigation. There is no way to determine
the direction of currents. See Note Below.
9 Note: The wind and currents function basically the same. Wind
affects aircraft and surface ships and currents affect subs and ships.
When enabled, crosswinds or currents push Ownship off course.
Opposing winds or currents slow Ownship, while trailing winds or
currents speed it up. If you order an exact speed via the Task Bar,
your crew takes wind and currents into account in maintaining your
ordered speed, but if you give a specific engine order, your actual
speed may vary. Be aware that the speed readout on the Task Bar
shows forward speed through air or water, not speed over the
ground. If you've ordered an exact speed, your indicated speed may
be higher if you're driving into a wind or current, or lower if you're
riding with a trailing wind or current.
Enable Waveriding ON: When OFF, objects in the water in a high sea
state will not follow waves, but will stay straight and level. This may cause
models to submerge or float above the waves in 3D. This option should only
be disabled to lighten CPU load for performance reasons. For further
information on the Game options see Main Menu/Options/Game.
Default Keyboard Controls Settings

This manual assumes the default keyboard control settings are in effect. If
you have changed your hot key assignments in the Options>Controls page,
the keyboard commands listed in the manual will not be accurate. Click
Defaults at the bottom of the Options>Controls page to return any settings
you have changed to those shipped with the game.
Terms defined
In this manual the following terms are used as defined below:
General Terms
Click: Single left mouse button click
Right-click: Single right mouse button click
Platform Terms
Platform: Any ship, sub or aircraft
Controllable Platform: A ship, sub or aircraft that can be player
controlled in the game.

Ownship: Refers to the current controllable platform regardless of
category. (Controllable aircraft are also referred to as Ownship.)

2-9
Ownside: All platforms assigned to your side by the mission creator.

688(I): Any controllable U.S. Improved Los Angeles class nuclear
submarine.
Akula: Any controllable Akula I Improved or Akula II class nuclear
submarine. All Akula game interfaces are the same. Their weapons,
top speed and noise levels differ.
FFG-7 or FFG: Any controllable U.S. Oliver Hazard Perry (FFG-7)
class surface ship.

Kilo: Any controllable Kilo Project 877 or Kilo 636 class (Russian or
Chinese) diesel submarine. All Kilo station interfaces are the same.
Their weapons, top speed and noise levels differ.
MH-60R or Helo: Any controllable U.S. MH-60R helicopter. The FFGs
embarked MH-60R helo is also referred to as Helo even when it is not

player controlled.
P-3C or P-3: Any controllable U.S. P-3C Orion Update III AIM airplane.
Seawolf: Any controllable U.S. Seawolf (SSN 21) class nuclear
submarine.
VAB: Variable Action Button. Button text and functionality changes
when clicked. The FFG stations contain several VAB panels. The
Seawolf Button Matrix panels are variable action buttons.
In-Game Terms
Category: Refers to a type of platform for example surface,
subsurface, airplane (air) and helicopter (Helo.) Also refers to

stationary (land), weapon (torpedo), missile, and mine.
Confidence: Listed as Low, Medium or High, this refers to how
confident you are that your classification of the contact is accurate.

This is user assigned for contacts detected by Ownship sensors and
Link assigned for Link contacts.
Contact: Anything detected visually or by one of your ships sensors. A
contact is sometimes referred to as a track. A contact, or track, should

not be confused with a tracker.
Gram: Any of the small, rectangular display windows found in the FFG-
7, MH-60R or P-3C platforms that display narrowband and SSP data

transmitted from sonobuoys.
Hook: To select a track symbol on the Nav Map or a Geoplot screen.
Clicking on a track symbol hooks or selects it.

ID: When seen alone, this word refers to the presumed alliance of a
contact (Friendly, Hostile, Neutral, Unknown etc.)

Link: A network of platforms (ships and aircraft) that provide position
reports and sensor contact information via secure two-way UHF or HF

radio transmissions. This assumes satellite transmission so the entire
battlespace is covered if there are Link platforms in all corners of the
battlespace.
2-10
Link Participant: All platforms (and land bases) reporting in your
current Link network. A Link is also modeled for Chinese and Russian
subs when they are Ownship.
Link Contact: A contact reported by a Link Participant.
Tag: A number automatically assigned by the FFG towed array to
detected frequencies. These numbers are internal to the Towed Array

and are not the same as a Track number (Track ID). (Show Tags in the
Nav Map refers to the assigned name of a platform.)
Track: Anything detected visually or by one of your ships sensors. A
track is sometimes referred to as a contact. A contact, or track should

not be confused with a tracker.
Track ID: Each sub interface and the FFG interface refers to
designated contacts with slightly different words. In this manual any

reference to an alphanumeric designation, a Contact ID, or a Track ID
refers to designations assigned when a contact is detected. This is a
letter with a number appended when commanding a sub (e.g. S01,
E01, R01, V01) or a four-digit number when controlling the FFG or
aircraft. Link participants report four-digit Track IDs. All controllable
platforms also have a Track, or Platform, ID.
Tracker: A device used to automatically follow a sonar signal to which
it is assigned. When a tracker is assigned to a sonar contact, called a

track, periodic updates on the contacts bearing are sent to TMA. A
tracker is not a track, but it tracks a track.
G AMEPLAY O VERVI EW
This section contains important information for the player who likes to jump
right in and start playing. If you only read one section of the manual, start
here!
G A M E PL AY
Mission tasking varies depending on the platform you are commanding.
Whether you are tasked to find and destroy an enemy target, drop off
Special Forces, engage or avoid an enemy platform, or track an ultra quiet
submarine, you must be familiar with your platforms capabilities, sensors
and weapons systems in order to best accomplish the assigned task. The
stations for each platform are covered individually later in this manual.
Regardless of the type of platform you control (submarine, surface ship,
helicopter or maritime patrol plane) your goal is to use that platforms
various sensors to detect and identify targets. Using the tools at your
disposal, you must classify the contact to determine whether it is a neutral,
enemy or friendly ship, sub or aircraft, or a pod of whales. If you are tasked
with destroying the contact you must determine its location and if
appropriate its course, and engage the target with an appropriate weapon.
Depending on the type of platform you choose to control, your sensors can
include active and passive sonar, sonobuoys or dipping sonar, Electronic
Support Measures (ESM or EW), a periscope or binoculars, Magnetic
2-11
Anomaly Detector (MAD), or Radar, and Link data from other friendly
platforms in your area.
In every mission you are assigned at least one task considered critical. A
critical task must be completed to ensure a satisfactory mission outcome.
These tasks are laid out in the mission brief or assigned in messages
during gameplay and identified as Critical Goals in Mission Status and in
Mission Debrief. Some tasks are secondary in importance. These are
identified as non-critical goals.
You must complete assigned tasks while keeping your platform out of
harms way. You can man all stations yourself or, if desired, you can use
the Autocrew to assist you with detecting, classifying and targeting
contacts, but bear in mind they are not infallible.
Getting Started
1. Create a player name from the Sonalysts Combat Simulation
Dangerous Waters Main Menu screen.
2. Click Missions.
3. Select a Single Mission Title and a controllable platform. Click OK.
See Main Menu/Missions/Platform Selection Window for
information on selecting a controllable platform.
4. Read the brief then select the weapon icon button at the bottom of the
screen.
5. From the Weapons Loadout screen ensure that your loadout is

appropriate for the mission tasking. If not, change it. Click OK
6. Click OK in the Brief screen to load the mission. The Mission opens in
the Navigation Station.
See Navigation Station for a full explanation of Nav Station
functionality. Information on the NTDS Symbols is contained there

along with other information important to gameplay.
7. Once in the mission, press the function keys to view all the stations or
use the pop-up Stations Menu on the far left of the Task Bar. (All
submarines in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters carry shoulder launched
Surface to Air Missiles. The SAM launcher is accessed from the Sail
[F9] only when the sub is surfaced. The SAM Launcher screen is
unavailable when the sub is submerged.)
See the Task Bar section of the Stations Menu for the platform you
are controlling for full information about Task Bar functionality in

that platform.
8. Learning how the stations work is your first order of business. See the
Station Section of this manual appropriate for the platform you are
commanding.
9. Detect, mark, track and or destroy contacts or complete other tasks as

directed in the Mission Brief.
2-12
10. Press [Esc] then select Mission Status to check your progress in
completing the mission goals.
11. When Mission Goals are complete, press [Esc] and select End Mission.
(To save the mission to complete at a different time select Save or
Save as.)
12. In the Mission Debrief Screen review the complete and incomplete
goals or click REPLAY to see a replay of the mission just completed as
seen from the Nav Map.
13. Click OK to return to the Main Menu. The debrief results for all
missions played by the current Player Name are available in the
Players Log.
Autocrew
Each platform has several Autocrew to assist you. The manual assumes
that all Autocrew are off for the purpose of explaining each stations
functionality. However while you are learning one station it may be useful to
turn ON the Autocrew for other stations. See Main Menu/Options/Crew for a
brief description of all Autocrew. Each platforms Autocrew functionality is
explained more fully at the end of each platforms Stations section.
Damage
On occasion Ownship may incur damage from weapon impact, running
aground, collision or some other means. Depending on the platform, you
may receive a voice message or a text report may appear in the crew
message area.
Whenever damage occurs a ship system may be temporarily or
permanently out of commission depending on the extent of the damage and
the location. The Damage slider in the upper right corner of the station
slides out to reveal a wrench indicating that some portion of that station is
damaged and no longer functioning. A wrench icon replaces the regular
cursor over a button, gauge, switch etc if that portion of the system is
damaged and currently unusable.
Further information is found in the Damage report window in the Task Bar.
Unless instructed on a remedial course of action to repair the damage, for
instance come to Periscope Depth and ventilate, there is nothing you can
do to speed the damage recovery process short of turning on Quick
Damage Repair at game start. If damage can be repaired it occurs
automatically over time. Enabling Quick Damage Repair reduces the
amount of time required to complete the repair.
C O M M O N S T A TI O N S
AND
G A M E E L E M E N TS
Some game stations, elements and functionality are the same regardless of
the platform you choose to command. A brief overview is found below.
Task Bar
The Task Bar is available at the bottom of all stations in the game and
provides a pop-up Stations Menu for switching to other stations and a popSection 2: Welcome / Getting Started
2-13
up Orders Menu for issuing common commands. The Task Bar also
provides a means for performing basic maneuvers and viewing a history of
damage reports, crew reports, radio messages and multiplayer chat
messages. Maneuvering shortcuts and a means for accelerating time in the
game are also available in the Task Bar.
Since subs, ships and aircraft have different stations and modes of
maneuvering, the pop-up Stations and Orders Menus and Maneuvering
Shortcuts are slightly different for each type of platform. The layout of the
Task Bar is the same regardless of platform.
See the Stations section for the desired platform for a description of its Task
Bar elements.
Navigation Station (Brief Overview)

The Navigation station is made up of three distinct areas: the 2D Navigation
Map (Nav Map), the 3D View, and the Digital Data Indicator (DDI). The
position of the Nav Map and the 3D View can be swapped or hidden by
using the controls in the upper right corner of the station. For a full
description of all aspects of the Navigation Station see the Navigation
Station section of this manual.
2D Navigation Map
The game opens at the Navigation Station, or the Nav. Here you see the
Nav Map, a 2D map of the battle space. (You must scroll to see the entire
space.)
NTDS Symbols: Once a contact is detected by one of your sensors or the
Link it appears as a Naval Tactical Display System (NTDS) symbol on the
Nav Map and it is assigned a track number used by the ships systems
when targeting that contact. Since all sensors report a detected contact and
the Link reports contacts, in some cases two or more symbols may overlay
one another if all reporting sensors agree as to the location. Press [Tab] to
move between the contacts and view the DDI information for each
individual contact. (See Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/NTDS
Symbols and Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Contact Designations
for information on the map symbols and track numbering system used in
S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.)
Link Data: If you are commanding the FFG or one of the aircraft in the
mission you will initially see Ownship and then all members of your Link and
within a few seconds will also see all contacts reported by the Link. If you
are commanding a submerged submarine you see only the Ownship
symbol. Because you are not in contact with the Link when submerged you
see no Link contacts. To see Link participants and their reported contacts,
come to communications depth and extend the radio mast or stream the
floating wire from the Radio/ESM station. Each sensor that detects a
contact creates a contact symbol on the Nav Map and a contact ID for the
detection, therefore multiple symbols will be present for a contact held by
more than one sensor. In the subs and the FFG contacts detected by some
of Ownship sensors can be merged in TMA to better localize the contact
2-14
and clean up the map. (See Appendix C: Submarine Max and Mins for a
listing of Comms Depth for all subs.)
3D View
The Navigation Station also contains a 3D window, or 3D View, for viewing
a 3D model of a selected or hooked contact. Until a contact is classified it
appears only as a wire frame object or Area of Uncertainty (AOU) in the 3D
View. Once you classify the contact (or it has been classified by the Link or
the Autocrew) it then appears in the 3D view as a 3D model of that class.
Because contacts can be detected both by the Link and by your own
sensors it is likely that in some cases two 3D objects will appear close
together in the 3D View. See Navigation Station/3D View for more
information.
DDI
Known information on a selected contact is available in the Digital Data
Indicator (DDI) area of the screen. Complete information on the DDI is
found in Navigation Station/Digital Data Indicator (DDI).
Classify Contact Dialog

Once you have detected a contact it is important to determine its class and
alliance to ensure that you do not target friendly or neutral platforms. By
using the libraries available in various stations on all controllable platforms
you can determine the classification of unknown contacts.
Once you have determined the class of a contact and have a guess as to its
alliance you can designate the contacts classification from the Nav Map
using the Classify Contact dialog.
BOn the Nav Map click the desired contact then right-click on the
contact to display the Contact Menu. Select Classify Contact
You must determine the correct classification to enter by using information
gathered at other stations. The stations utilized to determine the
classification of a contact differ between platform types. See Navigation
Station/2D Navigation Station/Contact Menu/Classify Contact As for
complete information on using this feature.
Voice Commands
If you installed the speech recognition software (Microsoft's Speech
Recognition Engine 5.1) when you installed S.C.S. Dangerous Waters
there are a variety of voice commands available during gameplay for each
controllable platform. The document Voice Commands.doc resides on the
S.C.S. Dangerous Waters CD and contains a list of voice commands
recognized by the game.
Voice commands that correspond to keyboard commands can only be
used when the keyboard command is appropriate (e.g., they are

ignored when dialogs are visible.)
Voice commands that correspond to the Task Bars Orders Menu
commands can be used from any station.
2-15
Voice Commands that correspond to a Nav Map right-click menu only
work when on the Nav Map.

Voice commands are only recognized during gameplay and not when
out-of-game screens such as the Options Menu are accessed during

gameplay.
You can train your speech engine by visiting the speech control panel
accessed via the Speech icon in the Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows
ME or Windows XP control panel. You can also improve the accuracy of the
speech engine by adjusting the accuracy vs. performance slider in the
speech control panel.
9 Note: The speech recognition software is not compatible with
Windows 95. If you attempt to install the game on a Windows 95
platform, the option to install the speech recognition software is not
seen.
To utilize voice commands in the game:
1. In the Main Menu select Options>Sound.

2. Under the Speech heading select Enabled and, if desired, Always On.
Always On is only available when Enabled is checked. Both
Options are greyed if you do not have the Speech Engine

installed.
3. When only Enabled is selected on the Options>Sound page press and

hold the speech key while issuing a valid voice command. By default
the speech key is [W].
When the designated speech key is pressed during gameplay,
voice recognition is listening and the speech engine interprets

anything you say. When this key is released, voice recognition is
not listening and it ignores anything you say.
4. When Always On is selected on the Options>Sound page issue a valid

voice command as desired at any point during gameplay.
When the Always On option is checked, the designated speech
key is ignored and the speech engine is always listening to what

you say.
System Menu
The System Menu is available from any in-game station regardless of
platform by pressing [Esc] during gameplay or by selecting System Menu
from the Nav Map Menu. (Click the Nav Map to deselect any contacts then
right-click on the Nav Map surface to display the Nav Map Menu.)
The following options are available:
Resume: Leave the System Menu and resume gameplay.
Options: Displays the Options Menu.
USNI Reference: Displays the USNI Browser
2-16
Mission Status: Displays the Mission Status screen giving you access
to your player name, the mission name, score, elapsed time, the
mission goals and a list of platforms destroyed up to this point in the
game.
Save: Displays the Save Dialog then returns to the game.
Save and Exit: Displays the Save Dialog then exits the mission.
End Mission: Exits the mission without providing an opportunity to
save the mission.
PLAYING
FROM THE
N A VI G AT I O N S T A TI O N
With all Autocrew turned on it is possible to play some aspects of the game
from the Nav Station. Each platform has some elements that require your
presence at specific stations, but with careful planning, and the use of the
Task Bars Orders Menu and Maneuver shortcuts, Voice commands and
the Ownship and Contact right-click menus it is possible to attack hostile
platforms and perform a variety of tasks from the Navigation station. See
Navigation Station/Playing From the Nav.
2-17
2-18

6(&7,21
0$,10(18
3-1
3: MAIN MENU .........................................................................................3-3

CHOOSE PLAYER NAME ......................................................................3-3
MISSIONS ...........................................................................................3-3
SELECTING A MISSION ..................................................... 3-4
The Platform Selection Window.............................. 3-5
Mission Brief ........................................................... 3-6
Weapon Loadout .................................................... 3-7
CAMPAIGN ..................................................................................... 3-11
RUSSIAN REBELLION...................................................... 3-11
CAMPAIGN ORGANIZATION ............................................. 3-12
MULTIPLAYER ................................................................................... 3-13
QUICK MISSION ............................................................................... 3-13
TO PLAY A QUICK MISSION ............................................. 3-13
REPLAYING A QUICK MISSION ......................................... 3-13
MISSION EDITOR .............................................................................. 3-14
PLAYERS LOG ................................................................................. 3-14
OPTIONS ......................................................................................... 3-15
GAME OPTIONS ............................................................. 3-15
3D OPTIONS ................................................................. 3-19
CREW OPTIONS ............................................................ 3-19
Sub ....................................................................... 3-19
Air ......................................................................... 3-20
Helo ...................................................................... 3-21
Surface ................................................................. 3-21
SOUND OPTIONS ........................................................... 3-22
Page 2 of Sound Options:..................................... 3-22
CONTROLS OPTIONS ..................................................... 3-23
Explanation of Controls......................................... 3-23
Changing Hot Key Assignments ........................... 3-24
Program Joystick to fly P-3C and MH-60R ........... 3-24
MULTIPLAYER OPTIONS.................................................. 3-24
SAVING OPTION CHANGES ............................................. 3-24
RESTORING DEFAULT SETTINGS ..................................... 3-24
NOVICE AND ADVANCED DEFAULTS ................................. 3-25
Advanced Defaults................................................ 3-25
Novice Defaults..................................................... 3-25
USNI REFERENCE ............................................................................. 3-25
USING THE BROWSER .................................................... 3-26
PLATFORM-SPECIFIC INFORMATION ................................. 3-27
EXIT ................................................................................................ 3-27
3-2
3: MAIN MENU
From S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters Main Menu you can set your player
name, select single, campaign, multiplayer or quick missions, and access
the Mission Editor to create or edit your own scenarios. From here you can
also access the games options where you adjust game, sound and 3D
settings, view or reassign hot key designations, and set multiplayer options.
The Main Menu also provides access to your current Play log and the U.S.
Naval Institute information on the ships and weapons available in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
Choose Player
Name
Main Menu
C HOOSE P LAYER N AME

Following the opening video, the Main Menu appears. To skip the opening
video, press the spacebar.
Enter your player name in the Edit box at the upper right of the screen.
Previously created player names appear in the drop-down list. If you have
already created a name, click that name in the list. Your player careers
are automatically tracked by the game. See Main Menu/Player Log.
M ISSIONS
Click Missions on the Main Menu to view the Missions screen. From here
Single or Saved missions are selected. The components of the Missions
screen are seen below.
3-3
Select Mission Type
Platform Selection Window
Mission Title Selection Window
S EL EC T I NG
M I S S IO N
The steps for selecting a Single or Saved mission are identical.
1. In the Missions screen click SINGLE or SAVED. Mission names of that

type appear in the Mission Title Selection Window. Stars preceding the
mission name denote level of difficulty, from one star (easy) to four
stars (most difficult).
2. Click the mission title of your choice. A description of the selected

mission appears in the Mission Description window. The tasking
overview for the default controllable platform appears in the Tasking
window. (Alternate tasking may be assigned to other controllable
platforms when they are available in a mission.)
3. Select an option from the Controllable Platform Selector drop-down.

The drop-down contains the list of Controllable Platforms available in
the selected mission. If the drop-down is greyed out, only one
controllable platform is available in the mission. See Platform Selection
Window below.
4. If the Specific Hull Selector is enabled (green) you can chose to

command any named submarine or FFG in the list. Otherwise the
platform shown is the only platform available in the mission.
5. To see another available mission, select a different mission title.

6. Click CANCEL to return to the Main Menu.
7. Click OK if you want to play the selected mission. The Mission Brief
screen appears and displays complete tasking information. You can
view or adjust the weapons loaded out for the selected platform in the
3-4
Weapon Loadout Screen accessed via the weapon icon button at the
bottom of the Mission Brief screen.
The Platform Selection Window

The Platform Selection Window contains a graphic of the selected or default
platform class and two drop-down lists. The upper drop-down list is the
Controllable Platform Selector. The lower drop-down list is the Specific Hull
Selector.
Country Indicator
Selected Platform Graphic
Controllable Platform Selector
Specific Hull Selector
All missions have at least one controllable platform. If the mission designer
has added more than one controllable platform to a mission each
controllable platform can be selected in the Controllable Platform Selector
drop-down.
Controllable Platform Selector
The mission designer decides which of the seven possible controllable
platform classes are controllable in a mission. In some missions the
designer permits some controllable platforms to offer the player a choice of
a specific named hull to command for the task. Asterisks, numbers and
color all indicate additional choices as described below.
Color implications: When the text and drop-down arrow are grey the
platform listed and shown in the graphic is the only type of controllable
platform in the mission. When the Controllable Platform Selector drop-down
arrow is green and the text is not greyed, additional controllable platforms
can be selected.
Asterisks: When an asterisk precedes the Controllable Platform Selector
option, additional options are available as described below:
*Controllable Surface: The Specific Hull Selector is enabled and
allows for the selection of any Oliver Hazard Perry class hull modeled
in the game.
*Controllable Sub: The Specific Hull Selector is enabled and allows
for the selection of any submarine hull regardless of sub class or
3-5
country. The tasking as written applies to whichever sub is selected,

regardless of country.
*Controllable Air: While it is possible to create a scenario with this
option (via the Player Has Choice of Platform option in the Mission
Editor) no numbered or named hulls for aircraft exist in S.C.S.
Dangerous Waters. Therefore only one option appears in the Specific
Hull Selector when an asterisk appears before Controllable Air.
Numbers: Numbers (#1, #2 etc) sometimes follow the text in the
Controllable Platform Selector.
A number following Controllable Air indicates either a) both types of
Controllable Air platforms have been added to the mission and can be
selected in the Controllable Platform Selector or b) two or more air
platforms of the same type have been added to the mission and can be
selected in the Controllable Platform Selector. Each will have a
different location and possibly different loadouts and/or tasking.
When a number follows Controllable Sub, more than one Sub can be
selected in the Controllable Platform Selector.

When a number follows the FFG more that one FFG can be selected in
the Controllable Platform Selector.

9 Note: Missions with more than one controllable platform can be
played as Multiplayer Missions. The number of controllable platforms
in a mission determines the number of players that can play that
mission. A number appears in front of Mission titles in the Multiplayer
Missions screen indicating the number of controllable platforms in
each mission. If the game session has been designated as a MultiStation multiplayer game, the number of Platforms appears before
the Mission Title. See the Multiplayer section of this manual.
Specific Hull Selector
The platform name that appears in the Specific Hull Selector when you click
OK is the platform you command in the mission. When the Specific Sub
Selector is enabled you can chose any platform hull in the list. The tasking
overview that appears in the Tasking Window applies to the platform
selected, even if the platform is from a different country.
Mission Brief
The Mission Brief Screen appears when you click OK in the Missions
Screen. The Mission Brief screen provides the complete tasking brief and
an opportunity to change your weapons loadout. This tasking is also
available during gameplay in the Task Bars Message History window
accessed by clicking the green square history button.
1. Click the Weapons Loadout icon button at the bottom of the Mission
Brief screen to review or alter your platforms loadout to better suit your
mission needs. See Weapons Loadout below.
2. Click OK to begin the mission, or click CANCEL to return to the

Mission Selection screen.
3-6
Complete Mission Brief
Weapons Loadout Icon Button
Weapon Loadout
Depending on the mission tasking you may need to alter your default
weapons loadout. The Weapons Loadout screen is accessed via the
Weapons Loadout icon button in the Mission Brief screen. Here you can
change the weapons loaded in the tubes or the bomb bay or wing pylons,
change the number or type of stored weapons and sonobuoys, and adjust
the loadout of your countermeasures (CMs).
9 Note: The weapons available for each sub class vary. For instance
only one hull (Improved Kilo Hull # 368) of the Chinese Kilos can
carry the Klub Missile series. Only the weapons available on the
specific sub class appear in the drop-down-lists.
3-7
Launcher Location or Stores
Information Window
Weapon Selection drop-down lists

To View or Change Default Loadout:
In the Mission Brief screen click the Weapons Loadout icon button at the
bottom of the screen. The Weapons Loadout screen appears with the
default (top) weapon location button selected in the upper left.
The buttons along the left side of the screen represent the location
of your controllable platforms weapon and CM launchers or

pylons, and provide access to your stowed weapons,
countermeasures (CMs) and, when applicable, sonobuoys. These
buttons vary in number and name depending on the platform you
are commanding.
BClick each button in turn to view or change the current loadout in
that location.
To Change Tube or Pylon Weapons, External CMs
1. Click a location button at the left side of the screen. Select the desired
weapon location. The loadout for a tube or pylon/bomb bay is
represented by a numbered, colored circle or square on a wire frame
representation of the platform. Each number represents a specific
tube/pylon location. The name of the weapon loaded in each location is
seen in a drop-down list associated with each tube or pylon number.
The color of a circle or square on the wire frame coincides with the
color assigned to represent each specific weapon.
2. Click the arrow in a weapon drop-down list associated with a specific

location (tube, pylon, etc) and select a different weapon from the list to
change the weapon loaded in that location.
9 Note: Pylon # 12 on the P-3C in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters is never
available for loadout. The ESM pod is carried there.
3-8
The P-3 Bomb Bay has four separate locations and each must be
loaded out individually. Select Bomb Bay in the left side button menu
then click one of the four semi-circles below the plane graphic to select
the loadout for that bomb bay location.
Bomb Bay locations
3. Click OK to implement all of your changes and return to the Mission

Brief screen.
4. Click CANCEL to ignore any changes you make on any of the

Weapons Loadout screens and return to the Mission Brief screen.
Rack Stowed Weapons, Sonobuoys, Munitions
In addition to weapons loaded in tubes or on other launchers, the subs and
the FFG carry a store of weapons to replace expended weapons and CMs
while underway. The controllable aircraft can carry extra sonobuoys and
CMs to load and launch from internal launchers while airborne. To
designate the number and type of items to be stowed, click the following
buttons in the Weapons Loadout screen:
Subs: Stores
FFG: Ship Stores, MK 13
P-3C: Sonobuoys, CMs
MH-60R: Sonobuoys, CMs
1. Click the desired button. A screen showing the type of weapons,

buoys, and/or countermeasures or other munitions that can be carried
on your platform is displayed. In some platforms the number of items of
3-9
a specific type currently loaded in tubes is visible along with the current
number of weapons of that type in the racks. While some platforms
show both tube and rack loaded items on the same Stores screen, only
rack stowed items can be changed here.
2. Click the right or left facing arrows associated with each item type to
increase or decrease the number of that item stowed.
The slash-separated numbers at the bottom of the Rack Stowed (or
Stowed) column, represent the number of items of that type currently

stowed followed by the total number of items of that type it is possible
to stow. For example if you are commanding a Seawolf class sub the
numbers 48/52 mean that there are currently 48 weapons stowed and
it is possible to stow 52.
In the Kilo, only tubes 5 and 6 allow for wire-guided weapons or the
UUV. These tubes have separate racks to accommodate wire-guided

items. Since the UUV must be wire-guided in order to return sensor
data, the UUV can only be added to Racks 5 or 6 in the Kilo.
In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters sonobuoys descend to preset depths
designated Deep (400 feet) or Shallow (90 feet). You can select
sonobuoys of each preset type for your loadout. BT probes have no
depth preset.
Decrease the quantity of this item stowed
Item Type
Increase the quantity of this item stowed
Total currently stowed / Maximum that can be stowed
3. Make the desired changes to all loadout screens before clicking OK.
BClick OK to implement your changes and return to the Mission
Brief screen.
BClick CANCEL to ignore any changes you made on any of the
screens and return to the Mission Brief screen.
9 Note: The changed loadout is attached to your player name and
becomes that platforms default loadout for all subsequent missions
you play with the current player name until you change the loadout
again.
3-10
C AMPAIGN
Click Campaign in the Main Menu to access the Campaign Selection
screen. From here you select the campaign mission to play and the
platform to command in the mission.
RUSSIAN REBELLION
Struggling with their newfound democracy and being steered by elected
leadership that can ill afford new military initiatives, the Russian Navy is all
but forgotten. The crews and officers do their best to maintain their
cherished vessels but without the necessary resources their conditions
steadily deteriorate. Further, the Russian government is taking steps that
are increasingly authoritarian. In the Russian Far East, the military
responds by staging a mutiny of massive proportions. The Pacific Fleet in
Vladivostok and Petropavlovsk is seized by the newly formed Russian
Rebels. Moscow responds with the mobilization of the Northern fleet from
Murmansk to put down the rebellion and to regain control of the heart of
their Pacific Fleet forces and ports. U.S. intelligence gives an ominous
warning that ballistic missile submarines are among the captured assets
and cannot be found in recent satellite imagery. The U.S. immediately takes
the initiative in this matter of global security and deploys a naval task force
to the Sea of Okhotsk. However, Russian leadership maintains that the
insurgency is an internal matter subject to Russian sovereignty and warns
the U.S. that any direct involvement in the conflict will be considered an act
of aggression. The U.S. government disregards the warning and directs
Navy officials to proceed through International waters to the eastern shores
of Russia. The full mobilization of the U.S. and Russian navies in this
volatile region provides opportunities for rival countries to renew hostilities
and alter the established balance of power. The military forces of China,
Japan, India, and Taiwan are put on full alert as they brace for war.
The Russian Rebellion is portrayed by Moscow as a lawless act by
desperate men resistant to change. However U.S. surveillance and
reconnaissance soon discovers that this rebellion is not so easily explained.
Foreign merchant ships and naval vessels are detected moving covertly
amongst the Rebels and pre-planned alliances are indicated. Perhaps the
intentions of the Rebel forces are not as malevolent as they first appeared.
Russian leadership is consistently quiet when questioned by the U.S. and
maintains the threat that U.S. forces will be attacked if they interfere in what
the Russians insist is an internal conflict. Meanwhile, Chinese forces are
mobilizing. PLAN officials claim that the PRC is merely defending itself from
the potentially devastating and potent force of both Russian government
forces and rogue military assets controlled by the Rebels. However, the
sudden build-up of substantial Chinese forces in the Taiwan Strait
intimidates the Taiwanese and they initiate defensive war plans. The
eastern world is on the brink of war, and the outcome is perilously
uncertain.
3-11
C A M P A I G N O R G A N IZ AT I O N
In S.C.S. Dangerous Waters you have the choice to participate in the
campaign from multiple perspectives. You can control forces from the U.S.,
the Russian Loyalists, the Russian Rebels or the Chinese side, depending
on the mission tasking and objectives. Your decisions have an impact not
only on the direction of the conflict but may also dictate the alliances
between countries. Those alliances will remain persistent for multiple
missions or the entire campaign. However, in many instances the preexisting alliances will be decided dynamically from the start of the
campaign, and you must unravel the story behind the Russian conflict and
determine the true intentions of each side. Make the wrong decision and the
enemy forces you chose to destroy earlier in the campaign will no longer be
available to defend you once the true alliances are revealed.
To begin the Campaign:
1. From the Main Menu, click CAMPAIGN. The Campaign screen

appears.
2. In the upper Campaign Selection Window click the name of the

Campaign you wish to play: Mission names appear in the Mission
Selection Window.
3. To view saved campaign missions click Saved Missions in the

Campaign Selection Window. A list of saved campaign missions
appears in the Mission Selection window.
4. Select the first (or next available) mission in the Mission Selection
window and read the description and tasking.
5. When you have the option to select a platform to play in a mission, the
text and down arrow seen in the Controllable Platform Selector is
green. Click the green arrow and select a different platform. Tasking for
the selected platform appears in the tasking window.
9 Note: To proceed to the next mission, you must successfully
complete all the current missions critical goals. Critical and noncritical goals are listed in the Mission Status screen during gameplay.
The Mission Status screen is accessible from the System Menu.
Press [ESC] or left click on the Nav Map to deselect any objects then
right-click on the Nav Map to access the Nav Map Menu then select
System Menu
6. Click OK to receive the Mission Briefing.

7. The Mission Brief screen appears listing your tasking and offering you
a chance to change your weapon loadout via the Weapons Loadout
icon button at the bottom of the screen.
8. Click OK to start the mission or click CANCEL to return to the

Campaign screen.
3-12
M ULTIPLAYER
Up to thirty players can go head to head via Internet or a local network
connection. Create alliances and play against other alliances or the A.I.
Multi-Station mode permits you and other players to man stations within the
same platform and play as a team. For in-depth information, see Section 4:
Multiplayer in this manual.
Q UICK M ISSION
Quick Mission provides you the opportunity to create a dynamic mission
based on a few basic parameters that you select. Select any controllable
platform to command in the mission, a basic mission type, a level of
difficulty and general world location and quickly create a dynamic mission.
The type of mission depends on the platform you have chosen to
command.
T O P L AY
QUICK MISSION
In the Main Menu click Quick Mission.
1. From the Controllable Platform drop-down list select the platform you
want to command.
2. Click an available Mission Type option to select it.

3. From the Difficulty drop-down list select the desired level of difficulty
Easy, Medium, or Hard.
The number of enemy contacts and their capabilities determine
these levels of difficulty.
4. Click a Mission Location option to select a region of the world for the
mission.
5. Click OK to move to the Mission Brief screen.

6. Click the Weapon Loadout icon button and alter your weapons loadout
if necessary.
7. Click OK to return to the Mission Brief screen then click OK again to

start the mission.
R E PL AY I N G
QUICK MISSION
If you find a Quick Mission that you really enjoyed playing you can play it
again or share it with your friends.
1. In Players Log click SINGLE to view Single missions. Quick Mission

results are included with Single Missions. Find and open the results for
the Quick Mission you just played. Quick missions do not have titles
but are identified by a seed number. (The most recently played mission
is located at the bottom of the list.) See Main Menu/Players Log for
information on how missions are retained in the Log.
3-13
2. Click on the Seed number of the desired mission and make note of the
seed number and all of the parameters (Controllable platform, Mission
type, Difficulty and Region.)
3. Return to the Main Menu then click Quick Mission.

4. Enter the seed number into the Seed field.
5. Select all the same parameters as were initially selected.
6. Click OK to access the Mission Brief then OK to start the mission.
M ISSION E DITOR
The Mission Editor is a powerful tool for creating and editing missions. This
is the same tool used by the developers to create all missions in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters. The Mission Editors functionality is described in full in a
separate PDF file located on CD # 1 of your S.C.S. Dangerous Waters
CDs in the Manual folder.
P LAYER S L OG
S.C.S. Dangerous Waters maintains a log for all player names you create.
The log allows you to access the debrief report of missions attempted by
the player name currently selected.
Missions are grouped by category represented by the text buttons at the left
of the screen: Campaign or Single.
Multiplayer and Quick Mission results are included with the Single
Missions.
The most recently played mission is found at the bottom of the list.
When a mission is played multiple times, the game saves a) the
highest scoring result for that mission and b) the results for the most
recently played mission (if not the highest). So, for a given mission, you
can have at most two entries in the log when that mission is played
more than once.
1. At the left of the screen click the desired text button to select the type
of missions you want to view. A list of all mission titles of that type
undertaken by your current player name is displayed. It may be
necessary to scroll down to see all mission titles.
2. Click a missions title to see the results of that mission. The information
displayed is the same as that displayed on the Mission Debrief screen
at the conclusion of that mission. Slightly different information appears
depending on the Mission Type.
3. Click BACK TO GAME LISTING at the bottom of the mission

information to return to the list of missions. You may need to scroll to
view this text.
4. Click OK or press [Esc] to return to the Main Menu.
3-14
O PTIONS
Selecting Options from the Main Menu displays the Options Menu. The text
buttons at the left of the screen make up the Options Menu and indicate the
type of options that are available. Click the name of the Options page you
wish to view. Some types of options have multiple pages.
9 Note: The options that are selected when you leave a game or
mission remain selected in subsequent missions until you change
them again.
G A M E O PT I O NS
On the Game page you set Game and Nav Map zoom and scroll options.
Some game options can be considered cheats, others set levels of
environmental reality. A check mark in the square preceding an option
indicates that option is ON or selected.
Show Dead Platforms: When ON, all platforms that are 100% damaged
display in their actual locations on the Nav Map and their actual identity is
displayed in the DDI and 3D View. Should the contact be killed by a
platform other than Ownship, the contact symbol displays on the Nav Map
whether you have detected it or not.
If you have detected the contact, the contacts symbol remains on the map
moving at the course and speed designated in the TMA or reported solution
even after the actual ship or object is destroyed. This can result in seeing
two symbols and two 3D models for the same contact when this option is
on.
For example, assume you command a sub and have a contact designated
S01. You have a TMA solution on S01 that places it on bearing 235 at a
range of 4000 yards but the contact is actually on bearing 239 at a range of
5000 yards. Additionally, you have classified S01 as a Krivak class frigate
when it is actually a fishing boat. When you click S01 on the Nav Map the
3D model of a Krivak appears in 3D view.
Now suppose that you fire a torpedo at S01 using your TMA solution.
Because your solution is close to the actual location of the contact the
torpedo picks up the actual contact and destroys it. If you are attached to
the torpedo you will see it go right through your TMA solution in 3D because
it is not in the actual location of the contact. The torpedo proceeds on to the
actual location of the contact and kills it. A symbol for the contact
immediately appears at the actual location of the platform on the Nav Map
and the model of the dead fishing boat appears in the 3D View if you select
the symbol. Your S01 solution symbol and the Krivak model remain on the
map until you go to the TMA station, select S01 and drop it.
If Show Dead Platforms is OFF, you never see in 3D what you have killed.
Based on the sound of explosions and the loss of a signal on a given
bearing you may assume that you have killed something. If you want to
know for sure what you have killed without turning on this feature, go to the
Mission Status screen and scroll down to the Kills section.
3-15
Be aware that if your missile or torpedo does not produce 100% damage,
you will not see the wounded platform. You see explosion debris in 3D if
you are attached to the weapon symbol on the Nav Map. If you can see the
contact from the bridge binoculars, Gun Camera, the Sub periscope, the P3 or MH-60 Pilots station or the P-3s IR Camera you will see the damaged
platform.
Show Truth: When ON, accurate NTDS symbols display for each object in
the mission on the Nav Map at the true location of the entity. When a
symbol is selected in Truth mode, the 3D object assigned to the class
appears in the 3D View and accurate information about the contact is seen
in the Data Display Indicator (DDI). When Show Truth is ON and a symbol
is selected on the Nav Map, the information in the DDI contains no solution
data and the actual name and class of the platform, its true course and
speed and its level of damage are displayed.
When Truth is ON, no Contact IDs are seen in the submarines Fire Control
drop-down lists. You can only engage Truth contacts from the Nav Map
using the Contact Menus Engage With command or by shooting a
Snapshot at the contact from a subs Fire Control Target Display. Truth
contacts can always be engaged by the FFG, P-3C and MH-60R.
9 Note: When Show Truth is ON and Show Link is OFF, no track
numbers appear on the Nav Map. When both Show Truth and Show
Link are ON, the four-digit numbers seen on the Nav Map do not
match the track numbers assigned by OS sensors or the Link that
are seen when only Show Link Data is ON. In the FFG if you assign
contacts to the Target Queue and then turn Truth ON, the targets in
the Queue are cleared. If you assign Truth track numbers to the
Target Queue then turn Show Truth OFF, the Target Queue is also
cleared. Any tracks that have been assigned to a launcher or tube in
one Truth mode are removed when you toggle the state of the Truth
mode.
Truth is OFF by default and must be enabled here or by using the keyboard
command or the Nav Map Menu. The default keyboard command is shown.
BPress [Ctrl] + [Shift] + [T] to toggle the display of truth on the
Navigation Map.
BFrom the Nav Map Menu, select Layers>Show Truth. Select
Layers>Hide Truth to turn truth OFF again.
9 Note: A host in a multiplayer game can turn OFF the Show Truth
capability so no players in the game can use it. See
Multiplayer/Multiplayer Options. In a Multi-Station game the host is
forced to set the truth mode for all players. Every player plays with
the same Truth setting. The Host can still toggle the Truth mode and
this toggles the Truth mode for all players regardless of side. The
host should not do this unless all players approve.
Show Allies: When ON, the true location of Ownside platforms appear at
their actual locations on the Nav Map. Accurate information appears in the
3-16
DDI when the contact is selected. The track numbers that appear for Allies
(your Link participants) are different when Show Allies is ON than they are
when Show Allies is OFF.
Show Link Data: When ON, friendly platforms appear on the Nav Map as
blue symbols of the correct platform type and class. The Link provides a
means for transmitting encrypted data between ships and/or aircraft on
Ownside.
When Show Link Data is ON in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters the location of
all participants in the Link network as well as their contacts appear on the
Nav Map in the form of an NTDS contact symbol. See Navigation
Station/2D Navigation Map for further information on track numbers for Link
participants and their contacts.
Clicking on a Link contact symbol on the Nav Map displays information in
the DDI and the 3D view that is as accurate as the last report. The last
known position of the contact is represented on the 2D Nav. Link data are
reported on a time delay so the locations may not be exact but they are
locations with a high level of confidence. Link information is updated on the
Nav Map as long as the option is ON. When OFF the Link continues to
report but the updates are not seen until you turn the option back ON.
If the Show Link Data option is ON when you leave a mission, it is also ON
at the start of the next mission. Show Link Data is ON by default.
9 Note: Link submarines are not seen in your Link data unless they
are at comms depth with their radio mast extended. If you are
commanding a submarine, you must go to comms depth and deploy
the floating wire or raise the radio antenna to receive the Link data. If
you are commanding a sub, you will only see another sub in a
mission if that sub is at comms depth with his radio mast extended at
the same time you are at comms depth with your radio mast
extended.
BFrom the Nav Map press [Shift] + [Ctrl] + [A] to toggle the display
of Link Data for allied platforms and land sites or select
Layers>Show Link Data (or Hide Link Data) from the Nav Map
Menu.
9 Note: Link contacts do not display in TMA drop-down lists. Some
land sites are designated during mission design as Auto Detect.
These show up on the Nav Map as Source: Link but with no specific
Link source designated.
Weapon Quick Launch: When ON, the time it takes to unload and load
submarine weapons and countermeasures and FFG torpedoes is reduced
as follows:
Weapon unload/load time drops from 16 18 minutes (depending on
the sub) to approximately 35 seconds.

Weapon load time drops from 8 9 minutes (depending on the sub) to
20 seconds.
3-17
Countermeasure unload/load time drops from nearly 6 minutes to 14
seconds.
Countermeasure load time drops from 3 minutes to 8 seconds.
FFG Torpedo reload time is reduced from 30 minutes to 30 seconds.
If Weapon Quick Launch is OFF at the time a weapon reload is started,

turning Quick Launch ON will not alter the reload time of the currently
loading weapon. All subsequently launched weapons will load and Launch
using Quick Launch times.
Aircraft Quick Launch: When ON, launch-time units are measured in
seconds instead of minutes. The time to launch the helo from the FFG
hangar is one hour. 30 minutes to get to Alert 30, another fifteen minutes to
get to Alert 15, ten minutes to get to Alert 5 and five minutes to get to
launch time. Enabling Aircraft Quick Launch reduces this time from 60
minutes to 60 seconds. Aircraft Quick Launch applies to the FFGs Helo
and any other A.I. aircraft in the mission.
If Aircraft Quick Launch is OFF at the time an aircraft launch is ordered,
turning Aircraft Quick Launch ON will not alter the launch time of the
currently launching aircraft. All subsequently launched Aircraft will load
using Quick Launch times.
Quick Damage Repair: When ON, the time required to repair damaged
equipment is measured in seconds rather than minutes. Items that cannot
be repaired are not affected by this option. If a repair has started with Quick
Repair OFF, turning Quick Repair ON will not hasten the repair time of the
current system. Subsequent damage will be repaired quickly.
Enable Tool Tips: When ON the name of the screen, button name or
function and in some cases additional information displays when the cursor
is held over game labels, buttons and entry fields.
Enable Wind: The mission designer determines if wind regions are defined
in a mission. This option cannot be changed once a mission has started.
When Enable Wind is ON, wind affects Ownship navigation. Crosswinds
push your aircraft or FFG Ownship off course. Opposing winds slow your
Ownship and trailing winds speed it up. If you order an exact speed via the
Task Bar, your crew takes wind into account in maintaining your ordered
speed. Note that the speed readout on the Task Bar shows forward speed
through air or water, not speed over the ground. If you've ordered an exact
speed, the indicated speed may be higher if you're heading into a wind, or
lower if you have a trailing wind. Wind speed and direction are noted in the
aircraft and FFG Task Bar. Novice players may wish to turn this option OFF
Enable Currents: The mission designer determines if water regions
(currents) are defined in a mission. This option cannot be changed once a
mission has started. Any water region defined for a mission by the mission
designer produces water currents that affect navigation when Ownship is a
sub or the FFG. Crosscurrents can push your ship off course. Heading
directly into a current slows your ship, while moving with the currents
increases your speed. If you order an exact speed via the Task Bar, the
crew takes currents into account in maintaining your ordered speed, but if
3-18
you give a specific engine order, your actual speed may vary. Note that the
speed readout on the Task Bar shows forward speed through water, not
speed over the ground. If you've ordered an exact speed, your indicated
speed may be higher if you are driving into a current, or lower if you are
riding with a trailing current. There is no way to determine the direction of
currents. Novice players may wish to turn this option OFF.
Enable Waveriding: When ON, the 3D platforms ride the waves
realistically based on the sea state set when the mission was created.
When OFF, objects in the water in a high sea state will not follow waves,
but will stay straight and level. This may cause models to submerge or float
above the waves in 3D. This option should only be disabled to lighten CPU
load for performance reasons.
3D O P TI O NS
These two pages of options allow for setting screen resolution, 3D effects
and testing options. Changes you make can be viewed in the 3D Window.
The following two items bear additional explanation.
BSelect Disable 3D on the second page of options to completely
disable 3D in a mission. The Host in a multiplayer game can
choose to disable 3D for all players or allow them to make their
own choice. See Multiplayer/Multiplayer Options.
BSelect Windowed to run S.C.S. Dangerous Waters in a smaller
window. This is especially useful when reading on-line
documentation.
Tip: If you experience banding or pixilated graphics in your 3D view, try
turning off any anti-aliasing settings you may have adjusted in the DirectX
panel on your computer.
C R E W O P TI O NS
Each controllable platform has several Autocrew options. Each can be
tuned on or off before game start at the option screen. During gameplay,
use the Autocrew slider button, in the upper left of any station that has an
Autocrew, to toggle the state of that Autocrew without returning to the
Options screen. You can also access the Options screen from the System
Menu during gameplay by pressing [Esc] (default hot key.)
Clicking Defaults (Novice) turns ON all Autocrew options.
Clicking Defaults (Advanced) turns OFF all Autocrew options.
Each type of platform has a unique set of Autocrew pages. Click the desired
platform type at the top of the screen to access that platforms options.
When ON (check-marked) Autocrew perform specific game tasks as
follows:
Sub
Use Radar Autocrew: When ON, Radar Autocrew marks and updates
all Radar contacts as long as the Radar is on.
3-19
Use TMA Autocrew: When ON, TMA Autocrew merges contacts,

performs TMA assessment, and enters Firing Solutions for all
designated contacts.
9 Note: When the TMA Autocrew is ON you cannot move the ruler or
enter data into the trial solution fields.
Use Sonar Broadband/Narrowband Autocrew: When ON, the Sonar
Autocrew marks contacts in Narrowband sonar and assigns trackers.
(Trackers appear in both Narrowband and Broadband displays) He
then commences classifying the contact in Narrowband. Once
classified, the contacts symbol on the Nav Map changes shape to
reflect the classification determined by the Broadband/Narrowband
Sonar Autocrew. You must still assign an alliance ID to the contact
from the Contact Menus Designate Category/ID> ID option. See
Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Contact Menu.
9 Note: When Broadband/Narrowband Sonar Autocrew is ON you can
still assign trackers and mark contacts. In some cases you may be
quicker than he is. You can also move the Narrowband Cursor to
designate the area for the Autocrew to search.
Use Sonar Active Intercept Autocrew: When ON the Autocrew
marks all contacts detected in Active Intercept.
Use Fire Control Autocrew: When ON, the Fire Control Autocrew
enters presets appropriate for the contact. The contact must be
categorized (surface or subsurface) and have a firing solution, not just
a line of bearing, before it can be assigned to a tube. Autocrew does
not assign contacts to a tube.
9 Note: Be aware that if you classify a contact as a surface ship when
it is really a submarine, the Fire Control Autocrew enters presets
appropriate for a surface ship. He uses your classification and the
existing TMA firing solution to determine appropriate presets, even if
your classification and firing solution are wrong.
Air
Use Acoustic Autocrew: When ON, Acoustic Autocrew switches
between channels, clears channels as needed to support Directional
mode, and places buoys in Directional mode. Acoustic Autocrew does
not place buoys in Active mode. In Directional mode he marks and
classifies contacts.
Use ESM Autocrew: When ON, Autocrew marks ESM contacts but
does not classify them. (MAD contacts are marked automatically when
the MAD sensor is ON. While MAD shares the station with ESM, it is
not tied to the ESM Autocrew.)
Use Radar Autocrew: When ON, Radar Autocrew marks contacts and
sends position updates to the Nav Map as long as the Radar is ON.
3-20
Use TACCO Autocrew: When ON, TACCO Autocrew enters torpedo

presets appropriate for the selected contact. You must select the
contact and the weapon to be dropped or launched. You cannot enter
torpedo presets when the Autocrew is on.
Use Countermeasure Autocrew: When ON, the Countermeasure
Autocrew takes evasive maneuvers and launches chaff and flares
when a missile is locked on your Ownship aircraft.
Helo
Use ATO Autocrew: When ON, ATO Autocrew enters Penguin missile
and torpedo presets appropriate for the contact. You must select the
weapon to be dropped or launched. You cannot enter presets other
than runout bearing when the Autocrew is on.
Use SENSO Acoustic Autocrew: When ON, Acoustic Autocrew
switches between sonobuoys, places buoys in Directional mode, and
clears channels as needed to support Directional mode. Acoustic
Autocrew does not place buoys in Active mode.
Use SENSO Dipping Sonar: When ON, Autocrew marks contacts in
Passive Mode. Autocrew does not mark Active contacts nor classify
contacts in passive mode.
Use SENSO ESM Autocrew: When ON Autocrew marks ESM
contacts but does not classify them. (MAD contacts are marked
automatically when the MAD sensor is ON. While MAD shares the
station with ESM, it is not tied to the ESM Autocrew.)
Use SENSO Radar Autocrew: When ON, Radar Autocrew marks
contacts and sends position updates to the Nav Map as long as the
Radar is on.
Use Countermeasure Autocrew: When ON, the Countermeasure
Autocrew takes evasive maneuvers and launches chaff and flares
when a missile is locked on your Ownship aircraft.
Surface
Use Acoustic Autocrew: When ON, Acoustic Autocrew switches
between hot sonobuoys, places buoys in Directional mode in Gram
windows A - D (see note below), clears channels as needed to support
Directional mode and marks and classifies Directional contacts.
Acoustic Autocrew does not place buoys in Active mode, classify
contacts in Omni mode or switch receiver modes (Ship, Air or Air/Ship
modes.)
9 Note: On the FFG, only display windows (gram displays) A D can
be set to Active or Directional Mode. If your helo is not aloft and you
or your Acoustic Autocrew want to mark Directional contacts, the
player must set the Receiver mode to SHIP/SHIP. To view Helo
sonobuoy data in Gram windows A D you must SYNC with the
Helo in ASTAC and set Link mode to ACOUSTIC and display
windows A D must be set to AIR/SHIP.
3-21
Use EW Autocrew: When ON EW Autocrew marks contacts. He does

not apply classes or classify the contacts.
Use Towed Array Autocrew: When ON the Towed Array Autocrew
marks contacts, assigns ATF (trackers), and resolves ambiguous
contacts.
Use TMA Autocrew: When ON, the FFGs TMA Autocrew merges
contacts, performs TMA assessment, and enters Firing Solutions for all
designated contacts. When ON, the TMA Autocrew also tears the page
when the OS indicator light reaches the edge of the page.
9 Note: Be aware that zooming in the range when the OS indicator is
close to but not yet at the edge of the page will cause the Autocrew
to tear off the page and lose the lines that were there.
Use Torpedo Control Autocrew: When ON Autocrew enters presets
appropriate for the selected target.
Use Countermeasure Autocrew: When ON the Autocrew launches
chaff and flares when incoming missiles are detected.
S OU N D O P TI O N S
From the Sound options page you can enable voice commands as well as
in-game sound and music options. A list of available English voice
commands is found in VoiceCommands.doc located on both of the S.C.S.
Dangerous Waters CDs in the Manual directory.
Enabled Only: This option is used in conjunction with Voice
Commands. When Enabled Only is ON and the designated speech key
is pressed during gameplay, voice recognition is listening and the
speech engine interprets anything you say. When this key is released,
voice recognition is not listening and it ignores anything you say
BPress and hold the speech key while issuing a valid voice
commands. By default the speech key is [W].
Always On: This option is used in conjunction Voice Commands.
When Always On is selected, the designated speech key is ignored
and the speech engine is always listening to what you say.
BIssue a valid voice command as desired at any point during
gameplay.
Page 2 of Sound Options:

Status Messages: This area reports any sound initialization errors
indicating if the sound engine was successfully initialized and how
many buffers were created. If you are having sound or sound card
issues, check this page for additional information.
Enable Special Effects: This option is enabled only if the current
machine supports this capability. When enabled effects such as reverb,
audio level adjustment and other effects are applied to the sound
during the game. The Special Effects option is used to mute the
3-22
volume of the 3D sound when inside the FFG Bridge and other areas in
the game.
C O N TR OL S O PT I O NS
The Controls pages display the current hot key assignments for the Sub,
Surface, and Air platforms as well as 2D Map, 3D View and General game
functions. This manual assumes the default key assignments are in effect
but you can change key assignments as desired.
Explanation of Controls
While most of the keyboard hot-key options are fairly self-explanatory a few
require further explanation. These are covered below:
General Controls: These are controls that are not specific to the Nav Map
or any specific controllable platform.
Escape Menu: System Menu. [Esc] is the default hot key. The
manual refers to this menu as the System Menu in all places.
Mission Status: Mission Status screen provides information about the
current game during gameplay (player name, controllable platforms,
current status of goal completion.). Mission Status is accessed via the
System Menu during gameplay.
Keyboard Course/Speed /Depth or Altitude Change: These options
provide a means for entering an exact number in the Task Bars
Course, Speed, and Depth (Alt) fields rather than clicking on the digits.
Press the keyboard combination for the desired option. When the digits
in that field change color quickly enter the desired digits via the
keyboard.
Map Controls: These options control Navigation Map functionality.
Hide/Show Entity Truth: Shows the true identity and location for all
platforms in the game. See Options>Game>Show Truth
Terminate Action: This refers to canceling the creation of a Map
Object (such as a navigation mark, range circle, or waypoint insertion)
prior to the placement of the object. When one of those options is
selected the cursor changes shape until the action is completed.
Terminate Action causes the cursor to return to normal.
Add Manual Solution: A manual solution places a yellow NTDS
Symbol indicating an Unknown Category/Unknown ID on the Map at
the location of the cursor. For more information on how to use a
Manual Contact see Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Nav Map
Menu/Add Manual Solution.
Promote to Link: Select this option to provide the link participants with
your position report and assessment of the selected contact. This is
most useful in Multiplayer games although you may want to use it in
single player games if you want the Link participants to attack a contact
you designate as hostile. See Navigation Station/2D Navigation
Map/Contact Menu/Promoting a Contact to Link.
3D Options: These controls refer to the 3D view on the Navigation Station.
3-23
Toggle Cinematic Camera: When this option is activated it jumps the

3D view to wherever the action is (a missile launch, missile hit etc.)
Changing Hot Key Assignments

To change hot key assignments from the Options>Controls pages:
1. Double-click the text of the option you want to change. The option is
highlighted and the text changes color.
2. Press the desired new key or key combination. An alert message

appears if that key or key combination is already assigned to another
command and displays the name of the command currently assigned
the key(s) you pressed.
3. Click YES to swap the two key assignments. Click NO to maintain the
current hot key settings.
4. Click OK at the bottom of the Options Menu to accept all changes.

Click CANCEL to ignore all changes and retain your original settings.
Program Joystick to fly P-3C and MH-60R

1. Ensure that the joystick is attached to the computer according to the
joystick instructions.
2. From the Controls page click AIR/HELO to select it. A check mark
indicates the option is selected.
3. Double click a line option in the list then move the joystick control as
desired to associate that movement with the selected option. Items with
no hot key assignment are options that relate to a Joystick only.
4. Continue until all listed options have been associated with a

movement.
M U L T I PL A Y E R O P TI O N S
Multiplayer options are only available to the host in a multiplayer game
during the setup for a multiplayer game. Options you set here are enabled
when you host a Multiplayer game. If you join a Multiplayer game any
options you set here are disabled. When you host you can also set these
options from the Gameroom. Multiplayer Options are explained in full in the
Multiplayer section of this manual. See Multiplayer/Multiplayer Options.
S A VI N G O PT I O N C H A N GE S
To save options changes: Click OK to apply all changes made on any
page. The Options Menu closes.
To exit the Options Menu without enabling any changes: Click
CANCEL. The Options Menu closes.
R E S T OR I N G D EF AU L T S ET TI N GS
Default settings can be restored by option type. (Game, 3D, Crew, Sound,
Controls and Multiplayer.)
3-24
BSelect the desired type of option then click Defaults at the bottom
of the page to set that type of options to the default settings
shipped with the game. Each option type has a separate Defaults
button. Some Options have Novice and Advanced Settings. See
Novice and Advanced Defaults below.
There are six pages of Controls options. (General, Map, 3D, Sub, Air/Helo,
Surface) The defaults can be restored to each page individually. Likewise,
the multiple pages of Crew options can be set by individual platform. Crew
Options defaults have both Novice or Advanced settings. See below.
N O VIC E
AND
A DV A N C E D D EF AU L TS
The first time you run S.C.S. Dangerous Waters you will notice that some
Game and Crew options are turned on or off at game startup depending on
whether you selected Novice or Advanced settings during game installation.
BTo switch from one setting to the other or to restore the original
settings if you have altered them select Defaults (Novice) or
Defaults (Advanced) as desired from each page that contains
those options.
If a page has only one Defaults button, the default options are the same for
both novice and advanced players.
9 Note: This manual assumes Advanced CREW options and Novice
GAME options are selected. If you have selected other Options
settings, your game experience will be slightly different than
described in this manual.
Advanced Defaults
Game options: Turns ON Show Link Data, Enable Tool Tips,
Enable Wind, Enable Currents, and Enable Waveriding. All other

Game options are OFF.
Crew options: Turns OFF all Autocrew.
Novice Defaults
Game options: Turns ON Show Dead Platforms, Show Link Data,
Weapon Quick Launch, Aircraft Quick Launch, Quick Damage

Repair, Enable Tool Tips and Enable Waveriding. All other Game
options are OFF.
Crew Options: Turns ON all Autocrew options.
USNI R EFERENCE
Data from the U.S. Naval Institute (USNI) was used as the source for the
information in the in-game USNI Reference browser, and for the
performance parameters used in the game databases. Any deviations from
USNI data for gameplay purposes are noted in the browser entries.
3-25
U SI N G
TH E
B R OW S E R
To access Reference Information from the Main Menu:
1. Click USNI REFERENCE on the Main Menu. The Information Browser

opens.
2. Click the desired country and platform name or the desired weapon
type and the weapon name about which you want to learn more. The
browser shows the text entry by default.
3. Click TEXT, PHOTO or 3D at the left to view the designated type of

entry.
4. Press the right and left arrow keys to page through the text, photo or
3D entries of a given type for the selected country or weapon type
5. Click the house (home) icon to return to the table of contents.

6. Click OK to return to the Main Menu.
To manipulate the 3D object in the browser:
BPress the spacebar or any arrow key to stop the rotation of the 3D
object.
BPress [S] to start the object rotating again.
[Ctrl] + Click and drag or right-click and drag: Zooms in/out on the
selected object.
[Ctrl] + Arrow Keys or click and drag: Rotates the camera above, under
and around the object.
Select Country or Weapon Type
Show Table of Contents
Select specific platform or weapon
Close Browser
3-26
To display the browser from any screen during gameplay:

BPress [Esc] to access the System Menu or click the Nav Map the
right-click to display the Nav Menu and select System Menu from
the Nav Map Menu. Select USNI Reference.
BClick OK to close the browser and return to the game.
P L A TF OR M -S P E C I F I C
I NF OR M AT I O N
You can quickly access information on a selected contact in the game or in

the Mission Editor.
During Gameplay:
BSelect the contact on the Nav Map then press [Alt] + [I].
The USNI Browser opens to the entry for the selected platform. Be aware
that the browser provides information on the platform as classified by you. If
you select a contact you have classified as a Kirov, the browser entry for
Kirov is displayed, even if the contact is really a Slava.
9 Note: If Show Truth is ON, the browser displays the correct entry for
a selected contact.
BClick OK to return to the game.
In Mission Editor:
BAssign a country, class and name to the platform. Select the icon
on the map and press [Alt] + [I]. The browser opens to information
on the selected platform.
BClick OK to return to the Mission Editor.
9 Note: No USNI information is available for land buildings, civilian
aircraft and sailing vessels. During gameplay and in the Mission
Editor, the browsers Main Menu displays if you attempt to access
platform-specific information about a contact that has no browser
entry.
E XIT
To exit the Main Menu:
BClick EXIT. An S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters message box appears
asking you to confirm that you want to leave the game.
BClick OK to exit to Windows.
BClick CANCEL to return to the Main Menu.
Tip: Press the spacebar or click the screen to bypass the credits.
3-27
3-28

6(&7,21
08/7,3/$<(5
4-1
4: MULTIPLAYER ........................................................................................4-3
TO HOST A MULTIPLAYER GAME ...........................................................4-3
Gameroom (Multiplayer Host Options).................... 4-3
TO JOIN A MULTIPLAYER GAME ............................................................4-4
LOBBY ............................................................................ 4-5
GAMEROOM (MULTIPLAYER JOIN OPTIONS) ....................... 4-6
MULTI-STATION MODE .........................................................................4-7
MULTI-STATION MODE (HOST OPTIONS)............................ 4-7
MULTI-STATION MODE (JOIN OPTIONS) ............................. 4-9
MULTIPLAYER OPTIONS ..................................................................... 4-10
MULTIPLAYER DEFAULT SETTINGS .................................. 4-12
To set Novice Settings: ......................................... 4-12
To set Advanced Defaults:.................................... 4-12
CHAT.............................................................................................. 4-12
GAMEPLAY DIFFERENCES IN MULTIPLAYER........................................... 4-13
PROMOTING CONTACTS TO THE LINK ............................... 4-14
To Promote a Contact to the Link ......................... 4-14
MH-60R MULTIPLAYER GAMEPLAY DIFFERENCES............ 4-14
FFG MULTIPLAYER GAMEPLAY DIFFERENCES .................. 4-15
ASTAC Station Differences................................... 4-15
Navigation Station Difference ............................... 4-16
Weapons Coordinator/Target Queue.................... 4-16
SUBMARINE MULTIPLAYER GAMEPLAY DIFFERENCES ........ 4-16
MULTI-STATION DIFFERENCES ........................................ 4-17
MULTIPLAYER WARNING AND ERROR MESSAGES ................................. 4-17
4-2
4: MULTIPLAYER
S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters allows you to host or join multiplayer games on
a local area network or over the Internet. New in S.C.S. Dangerous
Waters is Multi-Station mode. In a Multi-station game a team of players are
assigned stations on a single platform each taking one or several stations to
man as desired.
A multi-manned platform can play against the AI (Artificial Intelligence) or
against other multi-manned platforms in a multiplayer Multi-Station game.
See Multiplayer/Multi-Station Mode for instructions on setting up a
multiplayer game in Multi-Station mode.
T O H OST
M ULTIPLAYER G AME
As Host you select the mission, players and options available to all players.
You decide if the session is a regular Multiplayer game or a Multi-Station
game by selecting (or deselecting) the Host Multi-Station game option at
the bottom of the Configuration screen. See Multiplayer/Multi-Station Mode
later in this section. Multiplayer mode is covered here.
1. From the Main Menu, click MULTIPLAYER to reach the Multiplayer

CONFIGURATION screen
2. Click HOST. Host options appear on the Multiplayer Configuration

screen.
3. Enter a name for your game in Session Name.

4. If desired, click the appropriate check-box to select either or both of the
following. A checkmark indicates the item is selected.
BSelect Require Password to Connect then enter a password in
the Password field.
BSelect Host Multi-Station game to make platform station
selection available in this session. See Multiplayer/Multi-Station
Mode later in this section.
Tip: Be sure to share the password with fellow players prior to starting the
mission.
5. Click OK to enter the CONNECTIONS screen.

6. Click the desired connection mode to select it.
7. Click OK to enter the GAMEROOM.
Gameroom (Multiplayer Host Options)

As players join the game their names appear in the Name column of the
Gameroom. (Host options for Multi-Station Mode are covered later in this
chapter. See Multiplayer/Multi-Station Mode (Host Options).)
4-3
1. Click MISSION SELECTION to display the Multiplayer Missions

screen. (All Single missions with more than one controllable platform
are available to play in the Multiplayer Missions Screen).
2. Select a mission from the list of titles. The number of possible

PLAYERS in a mission is shown before the mission title. The number
of stars indicates the level of difficulty of the mission.
3. Select a platform to command from the Controllable Platform Selector

and Specific Hull Selector list. While a platform appears by default, that
is not your selected platform until you select it. For more information on
platform selection and the Controllable Platform Selector and Hull
Selector see Main Menu/Missions.
4. Click OK to apply your selections and return to the Gameroom.

5. Brief and Weapon Loadout buttons are now selectable and the name of
the submarine you selected appears in the Platform column following
your player name.
BClick BRIEF to read the tasking for this mission.
BClick WEAPON LOADOUT to adjust your platforms loadout based
on the tasking.
6. The Host determines which options are allowed in a multiplayer game.

BClick OPTIONS to set the options that are available to all players
in this multiplayer game. See Multiplayer/Multiplayer Options later
in the chapter.
BClick OK to apply your selections and return to the Game Room.
BClick CANCEL to return to the Game Room without changing any
Options.
7. When all desired players have joined and indicate they are ready to
start, click PLAY.
8. To deny game access to a specific player, select the players name

then click REFUSE PLAYER.
T O J OIN
M ULTIPLAYER G AME
This section covers joining a multiplayer game. Steps for joining a MultiStation game appear later in this chapter. See Multiplayer/Multi-Station
Mode/Multi-Station (Join Options).
1. From the Main Menu, click MULTIPLAYER to reach the Multiplayer

screen.
2. In the CONFIGURATIONS screen click OK to search for all open

sessions. If you know it, enter a specific Host name or IP address in
the edit field to access the game hosted by that computer. Click OK.
The CONNECTIONS screen appears.
3. Click the desired type of connection to select it then click OK to enter

the Lobby.
4-4
L OB B Y
The Lobby screen is divided into three sections or windows:
The SESSION window displays the names of any hosted sessions. The
highlighted name is the selected session.
The letters MS appear after the Session Name when the session is a
Multi-Station game.
The letter Y appears after a session name under the padlock icon if a
password is required to join the selected session. An N indicates that

no password is required.
Player/Max: The number of players currently connected is followed by
the total number of connections supported by S.C.S. Dangerous

Waters.
The Ping rate to the host is shown in the PING column.
The PLAYERS window displays the names of those players connected to

the selected session.
The MISSION DESCRIPTION window displays a description of the mission
if the selected Session Host has selected a mission.
1. Click the name of the game session you want to join.

2. Click OK to enter the Gameroom.
If you do not have the selected scenario or have a different version
of the scenario the host computer notifies you and offers to send it
to you. Click OK in the message box to transfer the scenario and
enter the Gameroom. If you click CANCEL in this message box
you enter the Gameroom but the only available option is Cancel.
9 Note: The scenario transferred by the Host is sent to your Incoming
directory. The incoming file does not overwrite a mission by the
same name that exists in your Scenario directory. If the Host
changes the mission and sends it again, this new (changed) file will
overwrite the version in the Incoming directory.
4-5
Join
Hosted Session Names
Session is a Multi-Station Game (MS)

Password required (Y/N)
Connected Players
G A M E R O O M (M U L TI PL AY E R J OI N O PT I ON S )
Once the Host has selected a mission, the options at the left of the
Gameroom screen are selectable.
9 Note: If the host has not selected a scenario before you enter the
Gameroom and subsequently selects a mission that you dont have
or that is different from your version, you are notified via an error
message that the host can send you the scenario. Click OK to
continue. This scenario is placed in the Incoming directory, not in the
Scenario directory.
1. Click PLATFORM SELECTION to select a platform to command in the

mission. The Multiplayer Missions screen appears showing the name
of the selected mission. The number of stars at the beginning of a row
indicates the level of mission difficulty. (One star is easiest, four stars is
most difficult). The number of possible players in the mission precedes
the name of the mission.
2. From the Controllable Platform Selector dropdown list in the upper

right, select a controllable platform. Platforms selected by other players
are unavailable and list a players name in parentheses.
3. When you have made your selection click OK to return to the

Gameroom.
4. Click OPTIONS to select or view the Multiplayer options allowed by the

Host. Set any allowable options in the Game, Crew or 3D Options
pages as desired.
4-6
Be aware that the host controls which options may be set, must be
set or cannot be set. If the host disallows Show Truth, you will not
be able to see truth even if you have Show Truth enabled in your
game options. See Multiplayer/Multiplayer Options later in this
section.
5. Click BRIEF to read the tasking for this mission.

6. Once you have selected a platform to command click WEAPON
LOADOUT to adjust your platforms weapons loadout.
BClick OK in the Weapon Loadout screen to accept any changes
you want to implement. Click CANCEL to negate any changes you
made.
7. Click READY to notify the host you are ready to play. If you need to unready to adjust your loadout, click READY again to return to the
Gameroom. Clicking Cancel takes you back to the Lobby.
M ULTI -S TATION M ODE

In Multiplayer Multi-Station mode two or more players can man different
stations on the same platform and play against platforms manned by the AI
or other teams of players manning a single platform. Each player assigned
to a single platform is responsible for one or more stations as assigned or
selected. If for example, FFG Player 1 is assigned the Towed Array Station
on the FFG, FFG Player 2 cannot access the Towed Array Station and
cannot use voice, keyboard or right-click menus to access the Towed Array
station or make any changes there. Player 2 has access only to his own
assigned stations.
Players assigned to the same platform should agree on station assignments
although it is possible for any player on a given platform to unassign and
reassign stations to other platform members. Any player assigned to a
platform can adjust the Weapons Loadout.
9 Note: If a player in a Multi-Station game drops out, his stations
remain unmanned.
M U L T I -S T AT I O N M O DE (H OS T O PT IO N S )
The Host in a multiplayer game decides if the mission is to be played in
Multi-Station mode. The host is forced to decide if all players play with Truth
on or OFF. Players do not have a choice and the host must pick one mode
or the other.
1. In the Main Menu, select MULTIPLAYER.

2. The CONFIGURATION screen appears. Enter a Session Name. If
desired, indicate if a password is required to join and enter the
password.
4-7
3. Click the square in front of Host Multi-Station game if no check mark

is visible there. When a check mark appears in front of the Multi-Station
option, click OK.
4. Select a connection type from the CONNECTIONS screen then click

OK.
5. The Gameroom appears. Click MISSION SELECTION to access the

Mission Menu and Controllable Platform Selector.
6. The Mission Menu now lists mission titles as before but the number of
Platforms in a mission now appears instead of the number of Players.
Select a mission and a platform from the Controllable Platform
Selector. Click OK to return to the Gameroom.
Each platform in the mission can be selected as a Multi-station
platform. In a mission with 4 platforms, each of the platforms can

be played in Multi-Station mode so only the number of platforms
and stations on those platforms limits the number of players.
7. Click ASSIGN STATIONS. IN the Stations dialog that appears, click

your player name to select it if it is not already selected. Click the name
of a station on the right then click the left facing arrow in the center of
the dialog to assign that station to the selected name. Select as many
stations as desired or as agreed upon with fellow team members. Click
OK.
Other players manning the same platform can access that
platforms ASSIGN STATION dialog one at a time. Click OK

following your selection to free the dialog for other players to select
stations.
A message appears informing you which stations are currently
unassigned. All stations must be assigned before game start.

9 Note: If a player manning stations on your platform drops out of the
game, his stations are not accessible. Functions performed at that
station can no longer be performed.
8. Click OPTIONS then Multi-player Options to set options that are

available to or forced upon other players. See Multiplayer/Multiplayer
Options.
Because track numbers differ when Show Truth is ON, all players in a
Multi-Station game are forced to play with the same Truth setting to
avoid confusion. The host determines if Truth is ON or OFF for all
players.
9 Note: In Multi-Station mode it is important not to force the player to
have Autocrew ON. The player could be left with nothing to do at his
station since some Autocrew functions lock out any player interaction
at the station. It is recommended that you force the players to have
all Autocrew Options OFF for Multi-Station games or leave him with
the possibility of turning Autocrew ON or OFF as desired.
4-8
9. To deny game access to a specific player, select the player name and
click REFUSE PLAYER.
10. When all players have clicked READY, click PLAY.

9 Note: You are prevented from starting a Multi-Station mission until
each station on every platform is assigned. The Host is notified of
unassigned stations on any platform when he clicks PLAY. The Host
must then notify players via chat to assign all stations on the
indicated platform(s). The Host cannot assign stations to platforms
other than his own.
M U L T I -S T AT I O N M O DE (J OI N O PT I O NS )
There is no way to tell if a game is a Multi-Station game from the Lobby or
when you initially enter the Gameroom. Multi-Station games are identifiable
from the Mission Selection screen. In Multi-Station mode the number of
Platforms is listed in the column in front of the mission name instead of the
number of Players. Additionally a platform already selected by one player is
still selectable by other players. No player names are attached to a
platform.
1. Select a Host in the Lobby.

2. In the Gameroom, notice which players are currently assigned to a
specific platform if you want to team with specific players. Click
MISSION SELECTION.
To join a platform as part of that platforms team, select the
desired platform name in the Controllable Platform Selector.

If other controllable platforms are available in the mission, select a
different platform and wait for other players to join your platforms
team. If no one else joins your team you must assign all stations to
yourself.
3. Click OK to apply your platform selection and return to the Gameroom.

4. Click ASSIGN STATIONS. Ensure that your player name is selected in
the Stations dialog. Select a station name on the right then click the
left-facing arrow in the center of the dialog to assign that station to
yourself. Select as few or as many stations as agreed upon with your
teammates. Click OK to accept your station assignments and return to
the Gameroom.
If another member of your team is selecting station assignments,
you are prevented from accessing the Assign Stations screen until
he has completed his selections.
You can select a station assigned to another player on your
platform and move that station into the unassigned side by clicking
the right-facing arrow. All stations must be assigned before the
Host can start the game. The Host can only change station
assignments for the platform he is on.
4-9
5. Click OPTIONS then Multiplayer Options to see which options the host
has set. Set any options he has allowed. See Multiplayer/Multiplayer
Options.
6. The WEAPON LOADOUT button is only enabled if you are assigned

the appropriate station on your selected platform. If you are assigned
one of the stations noted below, the button is available. Click to alter
your weapon loadout based on the Mission Brief.
P-3: TACCO
MH-60: ATO
Subs: Fire Control
9 Note: The FFG always plays with the default loadout. No player has
access to the Weapon Loadout.
7. Click READY to notify the host that you are ready to play. The Host will
notify you via chat if all stations on your platform are not assigned.
Click READY again to return to the Gameroom. Be aware that clicking
Cancel returns you to the Lobby. Click ASSIGN STATIONS and
ensure that all stations are assigned to someone on your team, and
then click READY again.
M ULTIPLAYER O PTI ONS

In the Gameroom click OPTIONS to display the buttons used to access
Multiplayer Options and other Options pages available in S.C.S.
Dangerous Waters. From Multiplayer Options the host sets specific options
that apply to all players. Only the host can set options in the Multiplayer
Options pages but those joining the game should view the Multiplayer
Options pages to see which options the host has set and/or allowed.
The host can:
Force all players to use specific options.
Prevent all players from using specific options.
Allow players to use specific options if they so choose.
The Multiplayer Options contains three pages of options.

BClick the right and/or left facing double arrow button in the lower
corners of the options screen to page through all options.
Each Multiplayer Options page contains two columns of check boxes.
If the host checks a box in the first column it indicates his desire to control
the option setting that follows in that row. The second column contains
check boxes associated with options from the Game, Crew and 3D pages.
When the host selects a box in the Controlled by Host column he can either
force or prevent the player from using the option that follows in that row.
If the host does not select a box in column one, the joining player is free to
set the option in that row from the appropriate Option page if he so desires.
4-10
Controlled by Host:
Settings:
Checked
Checked: All players forced to use this option.
Checked
Blank: Players prevented from using the option.
No check
X: Players can set this option if desired.
Note: The joining player can only view what the host is setting in the
Multiplayer Options screen. Joiners must visit the Options Game, Crew or
3D pages to set any allowable options. In the Gameroom click Options
then the type of Options you wish to view.
Host controls the option in this row
All players forced to use this option
All players prevented from using this option

Any players can set this option on Game options page if they so desire
Host Controlled Options

The host may, if he chooses, control the following options by selecting or
deselecting check boxes as described above:
Autocrew options: When the Host enables an Autocrew option,
players can set that specific option in Options>Crew. (See Main

Menu/Options/Crew for a brief description of all Autocrew options.)
Game options: When the Host enables a Game option, players can
set that specific option in Options>Game. (See Main

Menu/Options/Game for a brief description of all Game options.)
Tip: Do not prevent players from seeing Link Data. Unless Show Link Data
is enabled, a player driving the FFG will not be able to see the radar returns
from his deployed helicopter.
9 Note: In a Multi-Station game, the host must force all players to play
with Truth ON or OFF. He is not permitted to allow players to
choose. This is because Truth track numbers are different than
tracks marked by the Link and OS Sensors. If some players on a
platform are viewing Truth track numbers and some are viewing Link
and OS sensor assigned track numbers, confusion ensues and
difficulty assigning a track to a weapon can occur.
Disable 3D option: When the Host disables 3D, the 3D View window
does not appear in the Navigation Station for any player in the game
4-11
regardless of platform. The 3D view in Periscope, Bridge, Sail Bridge,

Machine gun and Pilot station all function as usual.
Allow Engage With Menus option: When the host disallows Engage
With menus no player in the game can use the Nav Maps right-click
Engage With menus to engage contacts. Because the Engage With
menus do most of the work for you and prevent you from firing at
contacts that are out of range, many consider it a cheat. To level the
playing field, it can be disallowed in Multiplayer and Multi-station
games.
Disable Multiplayer Options during Game option. When this is
selected no player is allowed to change the state of any Multiplayer

options during gameplay.
M U L T IPL A Y E R D EF AU L T S E TT I N GS
The host can set default options if he so chooses. Joining players cannot
set Multiplayer defaults.
To set Novice Settings:

BClick DEFAULTS (NOVICE). By default no Controlled by Host
options are selected.
BTo see suggested defaults, click in every Controlled by Host option
in the first column. The suggested settings appear check marked
in the Second column.
To set Advanced Defaults:

BClick DEFAULTS (ADVANCED). The host controls all options and
the only options enabled in the Settings column are those that give
players the most realistic experience. 3D is disabled in the Nav
Station and Options cannot be changed during gameplay.
Tip: If you are joining a game, make sure that you visit the Multiplayer
Options page to see which options your host has allowed. You can set
allowable options from the Gameroom Options menus.
C HAT
The Chat feature is available in the Gameroom and during gameplay.
To chat in the Gameroom:
1. Type a message in the Chat Box at the bottom of the screen then
press [Enter] or click SEND.
2. Messages appear in the Message window above the Chat Box.

Messages sent from the Game Room chat appear to all players in the
Game Room and in the Assign Stations screen when in Multi-station

mode.
Messages sent from players in the Assign Stations dialog only appear
to players currently on the same platform in the Gameroom and to the

4-12
sender in the Assign Stations screen. These messages are appended

with [Platform] indicating that only players on the same platform as
the sender received that message.
Message
Window
Chat Box
In-Game Chat:
1. Press [T] to compose a message to be sent only to members of your

team (same platform). This is available only in Multi-Station mode.
Platform specific messages are trailed by "[Platform]" in the chat
message window in the Gameroom, Assign Stations dialog, and ingame.
2. Press [D] to compose a message to be sent to all members on

Ownside.
3. Press [A] to compose a message to be sent to all players in the game.

4. Press [Enter] to send your message.
5. All in-game chat messages appear in the Multiplayer Chat History
window. Click the yellow triangle History Selection Button to display the
Multiplayer Chat messages.
Note: The yellow triangle flashes in the Task Bar to notify you that you
have a chat message if you are viewing a different history.
G AMEPLAY D IFFERENCES
IN
M ULTIPLAYER
While gameplay is mostly the same in a multiplayer game, some features

respond differently or not at all in multiplayer games. These are described
briefly below:
Pause in Multiplayer:
Only the host can pause a multiplayer game.
If the host minimizes the game, the game is paused for all players. As
soon as he maximizes the game window, the game resumes.

9 Note: It is possible to run the game in windowed mode. This allows a
player to work on other tasks without minimizing the game. See Main
Menu/Options/3d/ Windowed for more information.
Time Acceleration is not available in multiplayer.
Save Game is not available for multiplayer games.
Exiting/Host Exits: When the host exits from a Multiplayer game, he
returns to the Gameroom. Only the players from the original session can
see him there. The session is not available to new players. To add new
4-13
players, the Host must back out of Gameroom to the Connections station
and click OK to start a new session. Original players will have to join that
new session along with any new players.
Exiting/Client player exits: If a player exits a game before the host, that
player is out of the game session, and can only be accepted back if the host
starts a new game session.
P R O M OT I N G C O N T AC TS
T O TH E
L I NK
While AI driven Link participants always share their Link data with you,
player controlled platforms that are part of your Ownside Link must
specifically promote a contact to the Link before you can see it. You must
do the same before they can see your contacts. A submarine player has an
additional handicap in that he must be at comms depth with his radio mast
raised before his own location can be seen by other Link participants and
before he can promote a contact to the link.
To Promote a Contact to the Link

1. Select one of your local contacts (contacts detected by one of your
Ownship (OS) sensors).
2. Ensure that you have provided as much information as possible about

the contact. This should include the platform type and ID. Create an
accurate TMA solution if possible (FFG and Subs).
3. When your contact symbol reflects its category (ship, air, sub, land)
and ID (hostile, unknown, neutral etc.) and a solution, select it and from
the right-click Contact Menu select Promote To Link.
The contact symbol along with the track number assigned by your
reporting sensor is now visible to other air and surface Link

participants. Ownside submarines will only see the promoted contact if
they are at comms depth with their radio mast extended at the time of
the promotion.
Since submarines have a unique track numbering scheme, the four-
digit equivalent of the subs alphanumeric is broadcast to the Link. This

number is seen in parentheses next to the time promoted in the Nav
Stations DDI for the promoting submarine.
MH-60R M U L T I PL AY E R G A ME PL AY D IFF ER E NC E S
When Ownship is the MH-60R and you are the deployed helo of a FFG
manned by another player in a Multiplayer or Multi-Station game, some
sharing of control may be requested by the FFG (SHIP). You will notice
lights flashing on the LINK Panel of the ATO station.
LINK / NAV CONTROL: The FFG can request control of the helo from you
in order to enter waypoints for you to follow. At any point you can take back
Nav Control by clicking HELO in the ATO Station.
4-14
When the SHIP requests Nav Control, the SHIP and HELO lights on
the LINK Nav Control panel both flash until you switch the toggle to
SHIP mode giving the SHIP waypoint control.
When the SHIP has control and has placed waypoints for you to follow
(Flight, Buoy, or Weapon) you cannot add waypoints of your own. You
can still order course, altitude and speed changes that will deviate from
the flight path entered by the FFG.
BTo return to the flight path and waypoints entered by the FFG,
select FOLLOW WAYPOINTS from the Orders or Ownship Menus
Navigate option.
You can still drop buoys and torpedoes before you reach the assigned
drop point (which may annoy the FFG player since you have a limited
number of these items.) If the FFG has ordered weapon or buoy drop
waypoints and you elect to drop all torpedoes or buoys of the
requested type before the appropriate waypoint is reached, the
waypoint is removed from the Nav Map and the Geoplot of both the
Helo and the FFG.
If you are flying the Helo with a joystick, you still have control as usual.
It will be up to you to fly to the waypoints assigned by the SHIP. It you

leave the pilot station Auto Pilot comes on automatically. You must
select Follow Waypoints from the Orders>Navigate menu or from the
Nav Maps Ownship>Navigate menu to set OS to follow the FFG
designated waypoints.
LINK / DATA LINK: As long as SYNC is established, the FFG chooses
which type of data (Radar or Acoustic) to receive from your Helo. You may
notice that the DATA LINK switch moves from RADAR to ACOUSTIC
without your interference. The FGG is receiving the selected type of data.
You do not need to have your Acoustic station processing data for the FFG
to receive Acoustic data, but you must have your RADAR on before he can
view your radar contacts. Watch for Chat messages or note that the
RADAR mode is selected in ATO, then make sure that your Radar is on.
FFG M U L T I PL AY E R G AM E PL AY D I F F E R E NC E S
In Multiplayer or Multi-Station games you may encounter occasions when
your MH-60R Helo is deployed at mission start and manned by another
player or a team of players. This results in some differences in the ASTAC
station relative to Helo Control, Link Mode and Helo Recovery,
ASTAC Station Differences

HELO CONTROL: You may wish to request control of the deployed MH60R manned by another player so you can place specific flight, buoy drop
or torpedo drop waypoints or view his radar returns. The steps for
requesting Ship control of the deployed helo are the same as in Single
player.
From the ASTAC Geoplot select your deployed Helos symbol to establish
SYNC. The HELOCONTROL and LINK MODE buttons are enabled. Click
4-15
SHIP. In Single player you automatically are granted ship control of the
Helo. In a Multiplayer game, however, control of the Helo is not guaranteed.
You must wait for the player in the ATO Station on the MH-60R to agree to
this request and switch his NAV CONTROL switch to the SHIP position.
The Helo player does not have to relinquish control if he doesnt want to. If
he does not move the switch, you cannot place any waypoints for him to
follow. Additionally, the Helo player can take back Nav Control of his
platform at any point. He does not have to request permission to take back
Nav Control. He just flips the switch.
LINK MODE: Once SYNC is established you can choose to receive Radar
or Acoustic data from your deployed Helo. You do not need his permission
to view Acoustic data. Acoustic is selected by default and can be processed
at your Acoustic Station even if the player in the Helo is not processing
sonobuoy data. While you can set the mode to Radar, if the player in the
helicopter has his radar off, you are not receiving helo radar data until the
Helo player turns his Radar ON. You must coordinate with the player in the
helicopter to turn on the radar via chat or some other means of
communication if he has not observed the blinking lights in ATO. Helo
Radar contacts are automatically processed and marked as FFG local
contacts as long as REMRO is ON.
HELO RECOVERY: If another player or team of players mans your
deployed Helo, the RECOVER button in HELO STATUS is disabled for that
Helo. The Helo player must select Navigate>Return to Base from the
Ownship or Orders Menu or land manually with a joystick if he wants to
return to the flight deck.
Navigation Station Difference

When another player mans your deployed helo, the Contact Menus
Engage With> Helo 1 (or 2) [X] Missile options are not available. You can
still place torpedo waypoints with the Helo players permission. See ASTAC
Differences above.
Weapons Coordinator/Target Queue

In a Multi-Station Game, the player manning the Weapons Coordinator
Station places contacts in the Target Queue for use by the players manning
the Weapons Control and Torpedo Control Stations. If the Weapons
Coordinator drops a contact from the Target Queue the track disappears
from the Target Queue in all three stations. If the dropped track was
assigned to a weapon, all references to the track are removed. The
assignment is lost. If the track was assigned to a torpedo, the weapon is
now assigned to the bearing of the dropped track instead of the track
number.
S U B M AR I NE M U L TI PL A Y ER G AM E PL AY D I F F E R E NC E S
In Multiplayer or Multi-station games submarines have a few differences
related to the Link. Submarines are frequently out of communication with
the rest of Ownside. At the start of a mission no one in your Link knows
where you are and you do not know where your Link participants are
4-16
located until you come to communications depth (comms depth) and raise
your radio antenna.
While you can stream your floating wire and download the location of all
surface and air Link participants and their contacts, they will not see you
unless you come to comms depth and raise your radio antenna. See
Appendix C: Submarine Max & Mins for comms depth information for all
controllable submarine classes. Other Ownside submarines in the mission
are not seen in your Link data unless they are at comms depth with their
radio antenna extended at the same time you are receiving Link data. You
must be at comms depth with your radio mast extended to promote a
contact to the Link.
M U L T I -S T AT I O N
DI F F E R E NC E S
In addition to the differences mentioned above, several other differences

are encountered in a Multi-Station game. These are noted below.
Task Bar Maneuver Shortcuts: In Multi-Station, course, altitude/depth
changes and speed changes in the Task Bar can only be entered by the
player controlling the Pilot, Ship Control or Bridge Station.
Task Bar Orders Menu: Orders Menu Shortcuts are only available to the
player assigned to the applicable station.
Task Bar Stations Menu: Station Icons for stations not assigned to a
player are unavailable to that player.
Nav Map Ownship Menu: Ownship Menu shortcuts are only available to
the player responsible for that functionality.
Keyboard Function Keys: Functions keys for accessing stations not
assigned to a player are disabled.
Voice Commands: Only voice commands applicable to a players assigned
stations are functional.
M ULTIPLAYER W ARNING
AND
E RROR M ESSAGES
It is possible for experienced players to customize S.C.S. Dangerous

Waters database, doctrine, interface and scenario files. Since it is
imperative all players in a multiplayer game share the same version of
certain files, you may occasionally receive warning and error messages.
These messages inform all players when specific files differ from the hosts
file. Anyone running a different version of S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters is
informed their version does not match that of the host.
Listed below are the messages most likely to occur, an explanation of why
the message was received, and a suggestion for remedying the situation.
These messages do not prevent the named client from joining the game.
9 Note: The Host may want to refuse players who refuse to play with
the same files as the host. Files altered by an experienced player
can give that player amazing advantages!
4-17
MESSAGE: ErrorThis client has different databases than the host.

EXPLANATION: This error appears when one or more of the clients
database files are different from the same files on the hosts computer. All
other players receive the text as a chat message that follows the name of
the player whose files are different.
REMEDY: The client should copy the database files from the host player.
The database files are located in the Database directory where S.C.S. Dangerous Waters is installed. The client may want to make a copy of his
original files before replacing them with the hosts files.
MESSAGE: WarningThis client has different doctrine files than the host.
EXPLANATION: This warning alerts all players when the doctrine files of
the host and the named client are different. All other players receive the text
as a chat message that follows the name of the player whose doctrine files
are different. The message alerts players that either the host or the named
client may have an unfair advantage over those players who have not
modified their doctrine.
REMEDY: The client should copy the hosts doctrine files. The doctrine files
are located in the Doctrines directory where S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters is
installed. The client may want to make a copy of his original files before
replacing them with the hosts files.
MESSAGE: This client is running a different language version than the
host.
EXPLANATION: This message appears on the clients lobby screen when
selecting a host. This is an informational message and may explain
scenario difference messages later.
REMEDY: N/A
MESSAGE: Client interface files are different than the hosts files.
EXPLANATION: This warning alerts all players when the interface files of
the host and the named client are different. The message alerts players that
either the host or the named client may have an unfair advantage over
those players who have not modified their interface files.
REMEDY: The client should copy the hosts Interface files. The Interface
files are located in the Interfaces directory where S.C.S. - Dangerous
Waters is installed. The client may want to make a copy of his original
interfaces files before replacing them with the hosts files.
MESSAGE: WarningRequested scenario is different possibly due to
language differences between client and host.
EXPLANATION: This message appears on the clients screen when the
host selects a mission and the clients scenario file for the selected game is
4-18
different than the same file on the hosts computer. A chat message is also
sent to all connected players to inform them of this discrepancy. This
message will only appear if the clients S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters is
running a different language than the host and the scenario is different.
REMEDY: The client can copy the hosts scenario file or the game can be
continued as normal. The host can decide whether this is a trusted client
using a different language scenario file.
MESSAGE: Error: Your game dropped multiplayer messages!
EXPLANATION: This message appears as an incoming Chat message in
the rare event that your computer is running too slow to keep up with
incoming multiplayer messages. When this occurs the state of entities in the
game may appear different on different computers and ships could head off
in different directions.
REMEDY: Ensure that no other programs are running at the same time as
S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters. Also, ensure that no other programs are
sharing the Internet connection or slowing it down for some reason.
4-19
4-20

6(&7,21
75$,1,1*
Section 5: Training
5-1
5: TRAINING ..............................................................................................5-3
SONAR SCHOOL .................................................................................5-3
SONAR ........................................................................... 5-3
Passive Sonar
5-3
Active Sonar
5-3
High Frequency Active Sonar
5-4
ACOUSTIC SIGNALS ......................................................... 5-5
Signal Strength
5-5
Noise
5-5
Broadband Signals
5-5
Narrowband Signals
5-6
UNDERWATER SOUND PROPAGATION ................................ 5-6
Thermal Layers
5-7
Sound Speed Profile (SSP)
5-7
Generating a Sound Speed Profile (SSP)
5-8
Utilizing Thermal Layers
5-9
SONAR SYSTEMS ............................................................ 5-9
Towed Arrays
5-10
Surface Ship Hull Sonar
5-10
Submarine Spherical/Cylindrical Bow Arrays
5-10
Submarine Hull/Conformal Arrays
5-10
Submarine Flank Arrays
5-11
Sonobuoys
5-11
Sonobuoys in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters
5-13
Sonobuoy Data Display Windows (Grams)
5-14
Dipping Sonar
5-19
CAVITATION IN SUBMARINES ........................................... 5-19
TMA BASICS ................................................................................... 5-20
WHAT IS TMA?.............................................................. 5-20
HOW DOES TMA W ORK? .............................................. 5-20
TMA TOOLS ................................................................. 5-23
Submarines TMA Tools
5-23
FFG TMA Tools
5-23
The TMA Display Board (Subs)
5-24
The TMA Plot (FFG)
5-25
Merging and Dropping Contacts
5-25
The TMA Ruler
5-26
TMA Dot Stack (Subs only)
5-28
Trial Solution Area
5-28
Entering a Firing Solution
5-28
Lines of Bearing (LOBs)
5-29
Contact ID Naming Conventions
5-30
TMA ON UUV SENSOR CONTACTS ................................ 5-31
Section 5: Training
5-2
5: TRAINING
This section contains information needed to successfully complete some
S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters game tasks. To effectively use the various
stations you encounter in the game it is helpful to have some background
and general information about why you need various stations and what
happens there.
S ONAR S CHOOL
Subs, ships and aircraft all use Sound Navigation And Ranging (Sonar) to
detect submarines, although sonar also detects surface ships in the area.
All controllable platforms in Dangerous Waters have some form of sonar
capability. These are described later in this section.
S O N AR
A sonar array is an interconnected group of hydrophones or transducers
that focus either the transmission or reception of sound. There are two
types of sonar: passive and active. Each has an important place in antisubmarine warfare.
Passive Sonar
A passive sonar system can only listen. A hydrophone (sensor) or a set of
hydrophones is positioned to receive sounds produced by sources in the
water. Its major purpose in this game is to detect and help classify
submarines and ships. Depending on environmental conditions passive
sonar can detect contacts several miles away; however, you can only
determine the direction, or bearing, of the contact. The distance, or range,
to the contact is not immediately known. It is helpful to know the range to
successfully target the contact.
By tracking a contact over time with passive sonar you can fairly accurately
determine a contacts bearing, range, course, and speed by using a
process called Target Motion Analysis (TMA). See Training/TMA Basics.
Active Sonar
An active sonar system transmits a high-energy acoustic signal or ping.
Any object in the area reflects the transmitted signal and the sonar sensors
pick up the returning echo. The time from the initial transmission to the
reception of the echo accurately reveals the range to the contact and the
direction of the returning echo indicates the bearing.
Active sonar quickly provides range information but the active transmission
can also be received by enemy ships and used to locate the transmitting
sensor. Because of this risk submarines should use active sonar only as a
last resort for determining a targets range. Using TMA on passive sonar
contacts is a safer approach to localization when time permits.
Section 5: Training
5-3
Tip: When commanding an aircraft do not use sonobuoys in active mode

unless you are very sure where the submarine is. The submarine can
detect active sonobuoys outside active detection range and evade.
High Frequency Active Sonar

High Frequency Active Sonar (HFAS) is usually a separate system from the
lower frequency active sonar that is a part of the platforms integrated
sonar suite. It produces higher frequency transmissions that have shorter
wavelengths than those of medium frequency (MF) active sonars. These
transmissions provide excellent bearing and range resolution for contacts in
the vicinity of Ownship. HFAS does not have the range of MF active sonar
and also is less likely to be counter detected at longer ranges because HF
sound is absorbed more quickly than lower frequency transmissions.
Because of its high resolution, HFAS is the sensor of choice for traversing
minefields or navigating under the ice when commanding a submarine with
that capability. It also can be used for rapid localization (range and bearing)
of a close-in contact when counter detection is no longer a consideration,
as when coming to periscope depth noncovertly or when a quick firing
solution is needed for a close aboard enemy.
As modeled in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters, the HFAS marks all contacts it
detects at one time, placing a HF Sonar marker on the Nav Map at the
location of each return. Additionally, the active returns display an outline of
the detected object on the High Frequency Active Sonar display, providing
a visual image of the detected object. A HFAS contact is not assigned a
track number and consists only of a marker placed at the location of the first
detection. To update the location, delete the current marker and mark the
contacts again. Marking contacts in HFAS is described below:
FFG: In the Hull Sonar Station [F4] click ACTIVE mode then click High
Frequency. Click BACK to access the MARK button. Click on a contact on
the display and then click MARK.
Kilo: In the Periscope Station [F8] click the screen transition button at the
top of the screen to access the High Frequency Sonar console. Contacts
appear in red. Click the display once to mark all currently detected contacts.
Akula: In the Periscope Station [F8] click the Under Ice/High Frequency
button. In the High Frequency console, ensure that FORWARD LOOKING
is selected for mine detection. Select UPWARD LOOKING to find a polynya
during under ice operations. Click the display once to mark all currently
detected contacts.
Seawolf: In the Sonar Suite [F2] click the ACTIVE Sonar icon button. Click
FREQUENCY in the matrix button panel. Click HIGH and then click BACK.
Contacts appear as orange dots or an outline depending on the range to
the contact. Click on a contact in the display then click MARK.
688(I): In the Ship Control Station [F1] click the toggle switch to the ON
position on the High Frequency Display in the center of the screen. Click
the display once to mark all currently detected contacts.
Section 5: Training
5-4
A C OU S T I C S I G N AL S
Passive sonar is used to detect and determine the location of the sources of
acoustic energy, or sound, in the water. The ocean has numerous sources
of acoustic energy including seismic events, biologics such as whales and
shrimp, and waves, as well as noise generated by ships and submarines.
The sound that is ever present in the water and doesnt appear to come
from a specific contact is known as background or ambient noise. Ships,
subs and other acoustic contacts emit energy, or signals, that stand out
against this backdrop of ambient noise when processed by a sonar system.
Detection ranges for sonar arrays are influenced by the strength of the
signal being detected and the amount of background noise interference
between the contact and the sensor. This is called the Signal To Noise
Ratio (SNR). Directional sonar increases SNR by focusing the sonar beam
into a smaller area pointed at the target.
Signal Strength
The amount of noise a contact generates is known as its signal strength.
Depending on the sonar display, a signal appears as a line, a spike, or a
dot. Thick lines, tall spikes and larger, darker dots indicate stronger signals.
The signal strength generated by a contact is influenced by the type of
contact it is (loud merchant ship or quiet diesel sub), its range and its
speed.
In general loud, fast contacts generate a strong signal while quiet contacts
generate a faint signal. Distant contacts can be faint while close contacts
are stronger. However, a faint signal doesnt always mean a distant contact.
It could be a quiet submarine close by traveling at a slow rate of speed
while a strong signal could be a merchant ship at a greater distance
traveling at a high rate of speed.
Noise
The amount of noise detected by your sonar sensors is influenced by the
speed of your Ownship as well as several environmental factors. The noise
generated by Ownships movement through the water increases as your
speed increases. The more noise you generate the less your sensors can
detect. It is possible that all signals can be lost in the noise if you travel fast
enough.
The wave action of a high sea state also generates background noise that
can influence signal detection. Thermal layers, discussed later in this
section, can significantly reduce the ability of signals to travel through the
water.
Broadband Signals
Sonar systems detect acoustic signals in the broadband and narrowband
frequency ranges. Contacts of interest emit both broadband and
narrowband signals.
Section 5: Training
5-5
Passive broadband (PBB) acoustic sources, which can be generated by a

ships movement through the water and its propeller and shaft, emit
acoustic energy over a wide range of frequencies. The broadband display
shows all contacts that emit acoustic energy that fall within the broadband
range. A broadband sonar receiver is used primarily to detect and track
contacts for TMA and also can contribute to classification through both
DEMON and aural analysis.
Narrowband Signals
Passive narrowband (PNB) sources emit energy at a distinct frequency. A
narrowband acoustic source is typically generated by a specific piece of
equipment on a ship such as a pump or a motor. Because it is possible to
detect a contact at a longer range by searching for a distinct frequency it is
sometimes helpful to start the search for contacts in narrowband sonar. The
increased detections are possible because narrowband focuses the sonar
in frequency, rejecting ambient noise that is outside the frequency band of
the target signature.
Additionally, the specific frequencies emitted by a contact are unique and
readily identifiable; therefore, narrowband frequencies can be used to
classify contacts. The specific frequencies associated with a ship are known
as its sonar signature, sometimes called its sound profile. Sonar systems
access a library of known sonar signatures or profiles to aid in the
classification process.
Contacts can be classified in each submarines Sonar Narrowband Station,
and in the Acoustic Station on the FFG, P-3C and the MH-60R platforms.
The MH-60s dipping sonar in passive mode can also be used to classify
contacts.
Tip: Use Narrowband sonar for detection and classification of contacts.
U N D E R W A TE R S OU N D P R O P A G AT I O N
Sound travels in waves of alternating high and low pressure created when a
vibrating object disturbs the air or water around it. While sound in air
generally travels in a straight line until it is reflected or simply fades away,
sound in water tends to bend depending on conditions in the water it is
traversing.
The speed of sound in the ocean is related to temperature, salinity, and
depth. Salinity usually does not change for a given ocean area. Increasing
depth or increasing temperature tends to increase the speed of sound.
Temperature may increase or decrease with depth near the surface,
depending upon atmospheric conditions, but eventually begins to decrease
until a depth of about 3000 feet, where it becomes nearly constant
(isothermal). While the temperature is decreasing with depth, the speed of
sound will also decrease unless the change in temperature is very small.
But at deep depths, the speed of sound increases with depth.
Section 5: Training
5-6
In the ocean, acoustic energy travels along paths that are determined by
changes in the speed of sound through the water. Sound waves are
refracted (bent) away from a region where the speed of sound is increasing.
Thermal Layers
Sometimes conditions in the ocean give rise to an effect known as the
layer. As the surface of the ocean cools late in the day, a region of
increasing temperature near the surface creates a layer where the
temperature increases with depth. At the layer depth the normal cooling
with increased depth resumes, so that the layer depth is the depth with the
greatest temperature. Sound energy bends away from the layer, so that a
contact is much harder to detect if it is on the opposite side of the layer
depth from the sonar array. Very little sound energy passes through this
layer depth, especially at higher frequencies.

Locating a thermal layer in your area of operation can help you to avoid
detection or even an incoming torpedo if you are in a sub. If you are in a
ship or aircraft, knowing the depth of the layer can also alert you to the
need to adjust the depth setting of sonobuoys to detect a contact that might
be lurking on the other side of the layer. A Sound Speed Profile (SSP) is a
useful tool in determining the location of a thermal layer in your area of
operation. The SSP contains a graph (and in the subs also a table)
depicting the speed of sound at different depths. The profile is generated
from information provided by an Expendable Bathythermograph (XBT or
BT) probe.
There are three types of ocean environments modeled in Dangerous
Waters: Bottom Limited, Surface Duct and Convergence Zone.
Bottom Limited
In a bottom limited ocean environment, the water depth is not great enough
for the isothermal region to be present. Instead, the temperature decreases
with depth all the way to the bottom. This means that sound waves are bent
toward the bottom, and any sound detected beyond direct path range will
have one or more bottom bounces, losing energy with each bottom bounce.
In addition, background noise is high since the surface noise bounces off
the shallow ocean floor and propagates for some distance.
9 Note: If a mission designer designates the area as bottom limited
there will be no layer in the mission regardless of the depth of the
ocean in the area. Surface Duct is the default environment for usergenerated missions in the S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters Mission
Editor.
Surface Duct
Sound speed increases down to the thermal layer in a surface duct, then
decreases to the bottom. While detection ranges are roughly the same
Section 5: Training
5-7
above and below the layer, detection ranges are cut roughly in half across
the layer.
Convergence Zone
In some deep ocean environments, the bending of sound energy results in
rings around a sound source where the sound rays are focused, so that the
propagation loss is reduced by large amounts. These areas are called
convergence zones (CZ), and when present, occur at intervals of 20 to 35
nm depending upon surface temperature. The CZ width is typically 5 to 10
% of the CZ range. Between the convergence zones, bottom paths usually
prevail, so that contact is not maintained for any but the loudest contacts.
This results in a characteristic condition where a contact will be held at a
high SNR while in the CZ and then lost for 30 minutes or more before
appearing as a direct path contact or possibly not being detected until it
has passed the closest point of approach and is again in the CZ as an
opening contact.
Generating a Sound Speed Profile (SSP)

The FFG-7 and controllable aircraft deploy Bathythermograph Sonobuoys
called simply BT sonobuoys. Once the buoy hits the water it deploys a
probe that descends at a constant rate and transmits the sound speed data
it collects to the deploying ship or aircraft. BT sonobuoys are launched in
the same manner as all other sonobuoys.
XBT probes are launched from submarines somewhat like a
countermeasure. The probe rises to the surface before it begins to drop at a
constant rate and starts returning data. If the sub is deep it may be some
time before data begins to appear. The temperature data gathered by the
XBT probe is transmitted to the sub where the returning data is plotted at
Sonar SSP station.
To launch a BT Sonobuoy in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters:
FFG-7: BT sonobuoys are launched from the ASTAC Station.
MH-60R: Sonobuoys are launched from the ATO Station.
P-3 C Orion: Sonobuoys are launched from the TACCO/Sonobuoy
station.
In the above platforms the SSP graph appears in a Sonobuoy Display
Window (gram) in the Acoustic Station once you tune to the channel
receiving data from the BT sonobuoy. The depth of the layer appears in
the top line of the display following the LAYER label.
Tip: To determine the channel number for a specific sonobuoy, visit the
Nav Map. The channel number for a buoy is noted beside its NTDS symbol
on the Nav Map and is shown in the DDI when a buoy symbol is selected.
Below is a view of a Sound Speed Profile from a BT sonobuoy launched by
a MH-60R and processed by the FFG with the location of the layer
identified. In S.C.S. Dangerous Waters the SSP depth data displays in feet
Section 5: Training
5-8
on the horizontal (X) axis. In the subs, depth data displays on the vertical
axis in feet.
Layer Readout in feet
To Launch an XBT from a Sub: XBTs are launched from the Sonar Suites
SSP Station.
The Sound Speed Profile displays in graph and table form at the SSP
station.
Utilizing Thermal Layers

Understanding the effects of thermal layers on sound propagation is very
important when using sonar or attempting to limit sonar detection of
ownship. Since sound waves bend away from the layer, it acts as a screen
to shield your sub from sonar on the other side of the layer. This bending
also lessens the ability of your sonar to detect a contact on the other side of
the layer. When commanding a submarine it is wise to stay below the
thermal layer to avoid detection by surface ships or submarines operating
above the layer. If an enemy sub is also below the layer it may be prudent
to move above the thermal layer to decrease the likelihood of being
detected. There are no clear-cut rules for utilizing the layer since how you
use the layer depends on whether you hope to remain undetected or
maximize your sonar range.
When commanding the FFG or an aircraft it is important to know the
location of the layer so you can set your sonobuoys to the correct depth to
optimize the probability of detecting a submarine.
S O N AR S Y S TE M S
Every controllable platform has at least one sonar or sonobuoy system.
Trackers available on the FFGs and submarine sonar systems work
directly with the Target Motion Analysis and Fire Control systems to help
assure accurate localization and targeting data.
Sonobuoy systems both in passive and active mode are used to determine
the location of subsurface contacts using a process called triangulation.
Tip: To determine the location of a contact in S.C.S. - Dangerous Water,
view the intersection of the lines of bearing from three sonobuoys on the
Nav Map. The intersection fairly accurately pinpoints the location of the
contact. The depth of the contact is still unknown.
Section 5: Training
5-9
Each sonar system or array has a specific alphanumeric designation or

name. However, an array is frequently referred to by its shape or location
on the platform.
Towed Arrays
A towed array is a linear array dragged behind a ship or sub. It is a passive
sonar system used by both submarines and surface ships.
FFG-7: The FFG-7 utilizes the AN/SQR-19 Tactical Towed Array Sonar
System (TACTASS) for broadband and narrowband detection and tracking.
In the case of the FFG-7 the array is towed a mile behind the ship, thus, the
ship does not interfere with the arrays ability to search any part of the
environment (masking.) TACTASS provides full 360 detection.
Subs: The number of towed arrays and their capabilities vary from sub to
sub.
Towed arrays are for both broadband and narrowband detection and
tracking in the subs. They are used at low to medium speeds and optimized
for lower frequencies.
Because a sub masks a certain amount of the environment from a submounted or towed array no individual sub-mounted sensor provides full
360 detection. Together the subs arrays provide omni-directional detection
capabilities
9 Note: No towed array is modeled for Kilos in Dangerous Waters.
Surface Ship Hull Sonar

The FFG-7 is equipped with the SQS-56 active-passive hull sonar. Located
at the bow of the ship this sonar is primarily used in active mode since its
passive sonar capability is limited. Passive mode supports detection of
broadband contacts and has no narrowband capability.
Submarine Spherical/Cylindrical Bow Arrays

Arrays housed in the bow of a submarine are usually spherical or cylindrical
in shape. These bow arrays can track broadband as well as narrowband
contacts.
At higher speeds, there is some degradation of performance because of
flow noise caused by the water moving across the surface of the array. The
bow array is not as sensitive to low frequencies, so its not the array of
choice for low frequency, narrowband contacts.
Submarine Hull/Conformal Arrays

The hull/conformal array, also near the bow of the ship is a linear array
conforming to the shape of the hull. It provides low speed capability to
detect low frequency narrowband contacts). As such, its primary use is for
classifying targets.
Section 5: Training
5-10
Submarine Flank Arrays

A flank array is a flat rectangular panel on the side of the sub.
Seawolf Wide Aperture Array (WAA): The WAA consists of three flank
arrays on each side of the Seawolf class submarines. In S.C.S. Dangerous Waters the Seawolfs WAA can provide rapid passive
localization (RAPLOC) for sonar contacts within a 15 kyd range. See
Seawolf Stations/Seawolf Sonar Suite/Seawolf Broadband Station for
information on how to use the WAA to determine the range of a contact.
Kilo: Some Kilos carry the MG-53 passive sonar set. There is some
thought that this may be a flank array while others believe it is an active
intercept set.
9 Note: For gameplay purposes a passive sonar flank array and active
intercept are modeled for the Kilos in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters.
Sonobuoys
Sonobuoys are part of an acoustic system used by naval forces to detect,
localize and classify hostile submarines. Some sonobuoys are used to
determine specialized information regarding environmental conditions in an
area of interest.
Sonobuoys can be dropped into the ocean by ASW aircraft and also over
the side (OTS) by ships. The sonobuoy deploys a floating transmission unit
and its hydrophone array descends to a preset depth on a cable.
9 Note: The sonobuoy cylinder is discarded when the contents are
deployed and drops to the bottom. In the game the 3D sonobuoy
object is depicted as a floating cylinder in the water making it easier
to find the 3D object in 3D View.
When the sonobuoy's submerged sensors detect acoustic energy in the
water the information is sent up the cable to the buoy's radio transmitter.
The monitoring platform receives the transmitted data and it is processed,
analyzed and recorded for further analysis or replay.
In the game sonobuoys dropped by any controllable platform have a life
span of two hours and can be scuttled by the player at any time while the
receiver is tuned to the transmitting channel.
Sonobuoys can be active, passive or special purpose. Within those types
several modes may be available. All three types are modeled in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
9 Note: In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters when a contact detected by a
buoy in passive mode is marked, a white line appears on the Nav
Map and extends from the buoy along the line of bearing where the
contact is detected. Contacts marked in passive mode result in LOB
ending with a symbol for and unknown category/unknown alliance at
Section 5: Training
5-11
the default range of 10 nm from the buoy. Contacts marked by a

buoy in active mode appear on the Nav Map at the end of a white
LOB ending with the unknown/unknown symbol at the range
reported by the active return.
Passive Sonobuoys
Passive sonobuoys deploy hydrophones that listen for sound energy
created by ships and submarines and report bearing and/or target signature
information about the sound source. A passive sonobuoy buoy can have
directional or omni-directional hydrophones or both.
Omni-directional hydrophones detect and relay information about a
specific frequency band. They cannot determine the bearing to the
contact; they only indicate that something is out there. Generally, omnidirectional sonobuoys have a short detection range, so that detection
indicates a nearby submarine.
Directional hydrophones provide a bearing to detected sound energy
but not a range.
By dropping a pattern of directional sonobuoys the location of the
sound source can be identified by a process called triangulation. In
S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters the intersection of three or more sonobuoy
LOBs can indicate the location of the sound source. The U.S. Navy's
DIFAR, LOFAR and VLAD sonobuoys are examples of passive
sonobuoys. All three are modeled in the game although LOFAR are not
carried by the controllable platforms. DICASS can operate in Omni and
Directional passive modes as well as in Active mode.
In S.C.S. Dangerous Waters when a buoy is hot (detecting and
transmitting information) the Nav Map symbol for the buoy has a red dot in
the center.
Tip: Passive buoys should be used for the initial detection and classification
of submarine contacts. This keeps the target sub in the dark as to the
presence of the deploying aircraft.
Active Sonobuoys
Active buoys emit an acoustic ping into the water. By examining the return
echo the exact range of the target can be established. Some active buoys
return both bearing and range, some only range. Ships and aircraft in S.C.S
- Dangerous Waters carry the DICASS sonobuoy. As modeled, it returns
both range and bearing to the contact.
Active sonobuoys are typically used a) to determine the location of a
submarine contact when the ASW aircraft is in attack mode, b) when
localization information is needed quickly, c) when environmental conditions
make it difficult for passive buoys to collect the necessary data and/or d)
when the contact is extremely quiet.
Section 5: Training
5-12
The U.S. Navys DICASS Sonobuoy has an active mode and is modeled in
Dangerous Waters. Additionally DICASS has both Omni and Directional
passive modes.
Special Purpose Sonobuoys

The Bathythermograph sonobuoy is used to measure the speed of sound
through the water at various depths and temperatures and sends a reading
of sound speed versus depth to the deploying unit. This information is
useful in determining the location of thermal layers in the area of interest.
Sonobuoys in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters

In S.C.S - Dangerous Waters sonobuoys have the following properties.
Lifespan: 2 hours from the time of deployment.
Buoys can be scuttled, or sunk, at any time by clicking the Scuttle VAB
in the gram display when the Display Window is tuned to the

transmitting channel.
Depth: All buoys (except BTs) are designated either Deep or
Shallow when selected for launch.

Shallow:
90 feet
Deep:
400 feet
Detection Range: Whether or not a buoy detects a contact depends on

target type, sensor and target depth, water depth, sea state, target speed,
target aspect, bottom type, and other factors. Given the buoy sensitivities
modeled in the game, the VLAD will generally detect contacts at a much
greater range than a DICASS or DIFAR buoy,
As a point of reference, assuming the same environmental conditions, the
DICASS might be expected to detect a contact at 3000 yards, while the
VLAD will be able to detect it at 8,000 yards. The maximum detection range
in passive mode for any buoy is approximately seven nautical miles.
Transmitting Range: Platforms within line of sight of buoys placed by
Ownside can detect sonobuoy transmissions. For the FFG detection range
is approximately 12 nautical miles. Aircraft detection ranges vary based on
the aircrafts altitude.
The following sonobuoys are modeled in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters:
DIFAR (Directional Frequency and Ranging) Sonobuoy

Sensors: Four directional hydrophones and one omni-directional
hydrophone
Primary Use: Search, detection and classification of submarines.
VLAD (Vertical Line Array Directional Frequency Analysis and

Recording)
Sensor: Directional passive sonar (Same as DIFAR) plus array of eight
omni-directional hydrophones.
Section 5: Training
5-13
Primary Use: Signal detection in areas of high ambient noise.

Tip: When a high sea state increases the level of background noise, VLAD
should be your buoy of choice.
LOFAR (Low Frequency Analysis and Recording) Sonobuoy:

Sensors: Omni-directional hydrophone
Primary Use: Gathering data on ambient noise levels.
9 Note: LOFAR buoys are not carried by controllable platforms in
S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters but can be placed in scenarios by
mission creators. They can be picked up by buoy processors and
may appear in gameplay.
DICASS (Directional Command Activated Sonobuoy System)

Sensor: Active sonar (Passive directional and omni-directional modes
are possible)
Primary Use: Active mode provides range, bearing
BT (Bathythermograph) Sonobuoy
Sensor: Thermistor temperature probe.
Primary Use: Determining the location of thermal layers.
Tip: As modeled in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters, VLAD sonobuoys have a
longer passive detection range than other sonobuoys modeled in the game.
DICASS buoys have the shortest passive detection range but also have
active sonar capability. Use VLADs to make initial detections and DIFAR to
narrow the search. When you are certain there is a contact of interest in a
specific area, use a DICASS buoy in active mode to pinpoint the target.
Sonobuoy Data Display Windows (Grams)

The FFG-7, MH-60R and the P-3C all process sonobuoy data. In these
platforms sonobuoy data are received in the Acoustic Station and display in
CRT Display Windows. Sometimes these display windows are referred to
collectively as grams, although technically that term usually applies to
LOFAR gram data that displays in the window. In the game interfaces some
sonobuoy display interfaces are labeled GRAMS regardless of the type of
data displayed.
Sonobuoy data display windows (grams) default to Omni mode. A
sonobuoy in Omni mode returns non-directional frequency data, and
requires one display window. Directional mode, which returns received
frequencies and bearings, requires two windows. Active (pinging) mode
returns bearing and range data, and requires three windows.
BTo free other display windows for use by sonobuoys set to
Directional or Active modes, set the required number of supporting
windows to channel 00. Then change the mode in the active
Section 5: Training
5-14
channel to Directional or Active. (Turn Acoustic Autocrew OFF or

he may change your channel selections.)
Sonobuoy Data Display Window Functionality

In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters a sonobuoy has a lifespan of two hours from
the time of deployment. When the buoy is out of transmitting range or has
lost its connection, a message displays in the gram window indicating that
the connection has failed and NO DATA is being received on the selected
channel. If the buoy has not timed-out, changing course could bring you
back within range, particularly when in an aircraft.
Buoys that are hot (detecting sound data) appear in the Nav Map with
a red center. Buoy symbols disappear from the Nav Map and Geoplot
when they have timed out.
The FFG Acoustic Station Display Windows are seen here. Their Variable
Action Buttons are digital and contained within the Display Window. The
Sonobuoy Display Windows for the P-3C are similar but have green text. In
the MH-60R Acoustic Station, the text labels are the same but the push
buttons that control the functionality are outside the display window next to
the label.
BIn the MH-60 click the button next to the desired text.
BIn the FFG and P-3 click the text of the desired digital button.
In the FFG buttons rimmed in grey are disabled.
In the P-3C buttons with no rim are disabled.
9 Note: Setting a buoy display to Directional or Active mode requires

supporting windows. Each platform is slightly different. In the case of
the FGG, directional and Active modes can only be set in windows
A- D. See the Acoustic Station section for the FFG, P-3C, and MH60R for information on how each platform handles changing mode
and freeing supporting windows.
Omni Mode Display: In Omni mode detected signals appear as lines in a
waterfall display moving from bottom to top above the number indicating
the detected frequency. A sixty-second record is visible.
Time and Frequency at location of the cursor
Omni Mode
Directional Mode Display: Dots indicate detected frequencies on a

specific bearing. The bearing-frequency cursor consists of a short vertical
line on a horizontal bearing indicator. Click on a specific frequency dot to
select it then click MARK. The track number assigned displays in the top
Section 5: Training
5-15
row. Selected frequencies can be marked but no trackers can be assigned

to sonobuoy data. If a frequency is marked, the assigned Track Number
appears when the cursor is held over the dot.
Bearing-Frequency Cursor
Track # of contact under cursor
Directional Mode
Active Mode Display: Once activated, the buoy transmits continuously.

Returns fill in from left to right and contacts appear as bright spots in the
noise background. Click on the contact to select it with the square cursor.
(The cursor appears once the display is clicked.) Once a track number is
assigned it displays in the top row when the contact is selected. Click XMIT
to begin active transmissions.
Active Mode Selection Cursor
Active Mode
Track Number
BT Display: The BT sonobuoy returns the speed at which sound travels at

varying depths. This information pinpoints the depth of any thermal layer in
the area. The layer depth appears in the LAYER: field in the top row. There
is no alternate mode. The only user functionality is to scuttle the buoy.
Sonobuoy Data Display Window Labels

Top Line Readouts (From left to right:)
Buoy Name: DICASS, DIFAR, VLAD, LOFAR or BT
Buoy Depth: (D) = Deep; (S) = Shallow
Buoy Sensor Mode: Omni, Directional or Active; SSP
Track Number: When the selected contact or frequency is marked, the
track number appears here.
Section 5: Training
5-16
Cursor Location:
Omni Mode: Seconds; Frequency
Directional Mode: Degrees; Frequency
Active Mode: Degrees; Yards
BT: Sound Speed in Meters per second
X /Y Axis
Omni Mode: Y: Time in seconds; X: Frequency
Directional Mode: Y: Degrees; X: Frequency
Active Mode: X: Degrees; Y: Yards
BT: X: Sound Speed (not labeled); Y: Depth
Sonobuoy Data Display Window VABs

Variable Action Buttons (VABs) are present on the right side of all gram
Data Display Windows.
In the FFG and P-3 these are digital buttons contained within the window
itself.
In the MH-60R these are push buttons on the right side of a label. When a
buoy is in Active mode on the MH-60R, the XMIT Button appears on the left
side of the gram. The Library VAB set includes Filter and Arrow buttons on
the left side of the display window.
The following button labels are seen in all Sonobuoy Display Windows.
MODE: Click to cycle through available modes. If there are insufficient
empty windows to support Directional or Active mode, the mode cannot be
changed. Directional mode requires one empty window. Active mode
requires two empty windows. (Empty=Set to channel 00.)
When ON, Autocrew sets displays to Omni and Directional Mode only.
Mode is disabled when there are no alternative modes and when the
gram window is supporting Directional or Active mode.

SCUTTLE: Click to scuttle the buoy. The buoy no longer transmits and its
symbol is removed from the Nav Map. Clicking Scuttle in a window
supporting a buoy in Active or Directional mode scuttles the buoy it is
supporting.
Omni and Directional Mode VABS

In addition to Mode and Scuttle the following VABs are available for Omni
and Directional modes:
LIBRARY: Click to access the ships sound signature profile database. See
Classifying a Contact with the Acoustic Library later in this section. The
following button set is revealed when LIBRARY is clicked.
When a display window is in OMNI mode while supporting a channel in
Directional mode, the Library button is not available.

Section 5: Training
5-17
MARK: (Directional mode only) Click on a contact to select it then click

MARK to assign a track number and reports a line of bearing to the
Nav Map and TMA.
FILTER: Click to filter out all but the most likely library profile matches.
Button or label is illuminated when ON.
BACK: Click to return to the previous VAB set.
Arrows: Click the right and left facing arrow buttons to cycle through
the available sound profiles.
Active Mode VABs
In addition to Mode and Scuttle, the following VABs are available when
Active mode is selected.
MARK: When the buoy is actively transmitting, click a detected contact
to select it then click MARK to assign a track number and send bearing
and range data to the Nav Map and TMA.
XMIT: Click to start active transmission. Once activated the buoy
continues to ping at a set interval. There is no need to click XMIT
again.
Classifying a Contact with The Acoustic Library

The library provides a means to compare the detected frequency profile in
the waterfall display with recorded profiles of a variety of ship classes and
weapons. The Library is available in Omni and Directional modes.
BClick LIBRARY to display the Library VAB set. Click BACK to close
the Library.
Click to cycle the library profiles
The CLASS name of the selected library profile appears in place of the
cursor data in the top line of the display.
The frequencies that make up the selected Library profile are represented
by V-shaped Profile Frequency Indicators above the waterfall at the location
of the frequencies that make up the sound profile of the ship or weapon
named in the selected profile.
BFilter OFF: Click the left or right facing arrows to click through all of
the profiles in the database.
BFilter ON: Click the left or facing arrows to view the profiles that
most closely match the detected profile. When four or more lines
(Omni mode) or dots (Directional mode) are visible, the list is
narrowed to one or a very few options.
Section 5: Training
5-18
Omni Mode: When the profile frequency indicators line up closely with the
signals in the waterfall it is a good indication that the contact might be that
of the class indicated in the top row.
Contacts cannot be marked in OMNI mode. No information is available on
the contacts location, only that it is out there and an educated guess as to
what it is. If you have marked many contacts on the Nav Map, you may not
immediately know to which contact you should apply the classification
determined in the Omni Mode Library.
BWhen a good match between the detected profile and the library
profile is found, take note of the class or weapon name in the top
line and use that information to classify the contact using the rightclick Contact Menu from the Nav Map when you have determined
the contact to which the classification belongs.
Directional Mode: Dots indicate frequencies detected on a specific
bearing. When at least four dots are present on a specific bearing, click on
a dot to select the contact on that bearing. The name of a class in the
LIBRARY appears on the top row. There may be other classes that are
similar to the detected frequency profile in the Library profiles available for
viewing.
1.
Turn on the Filter if it is not on.
2.
Click the left and right-facing arrow buttons to cycle through the
available classes in the profile library.
3.
Click on a dot in the display then click MARK to apply the selected
class to the contact. The classification then appears in the DDI when
the track is selected on the Nav Map or Geoplot.
Dipping Sonar
Dipping sonar is a hydrophone lowered on a cable into the water from a
helicopter. A hydraulic winch is used to raise and lower the sensor to
varying depths. The helicopter can hover over a specific area of interest
keeping a passive or active sensor at a relatively precise location. The
helicopter must maintain a low altitude and speed to ensure that the sensor
reaches the desired depth and that the sensor is not damaged or lost. (An
altitude of fifty feet and a speed of zero are recommended.) See MH-60R
Stations/Dipping Sonar Station for complete instructions on using this
feature in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters.
C A VI T A TI O N
IN
S U B M AR I NE S
Submarines experience a noisy event known as cavitation when their

propellers move so fast that low pressure bubbles form and collapse in the
water around the propeller. Your sub's speed and depth influence the
occurrence of this phenomenon. In general, increasing speed tends to
increase the likelihood and strength of cavitation, while going deeper
reduces the likelihood.
When at all possible, avoid cavitation. The resulting noise alerts the enemy
to your presence and can pinpoint your bearing. Your crew alerts you to the
Section 5: Training
5-19
fact that the ship's propellers are cavitating. When near the surface, lower
your speed to reduce the possibility of cavitation.
TMA B ASICS
This section provides an overview of the principles behind Target Motion
Analysis (TMA). It explains what it is, a bit about how it works and what you
do with the information gathered in TMA. The FFG-7 and all submarines in
S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters have TMA capabilities. Information on how to
use TMA within a specific platform is found in that platforms Stations
section in the TMA sub-section.
9 Note: To use the TMA station effectively a basic understanding of
the TMA functionality found here is imperative.
WH AT I S
TMA?
At the TMA station, bearing returns from your ships sensors are
manipulated and analyzed to determine a contacts bearing, range, course
and speed. This information, called a target solution, a firing solution or
simply the solution, is necessary to accurately target a contact with your
ships weapons.
The contact designation number for each contact detected and marked by
you or your Autocrew appears in a drop-down list at the TMA station.
Selecting a contact designation from the list displays a history of the
reported lines of bearing (LOB) to that contact on the TMA Board (Subs) or
TMA DRT Plot (FFG).
H O W D O E S TMA W O R K ?
Target Motion Analysis is a process by which a contacts course and range
are estimated using timed bearing readings and an estimate of the targets
speed. At the TMA Station you examine available sensor data on a contact
and develop possible or trial solutions.
While the examples shown here refer to submarines, the principles are the
same for surface ships.
Suppose your ship is stationary and one of your passive sonar sensors is
tracking an unknown contact. If at two-minute intervals you could draw a
line from your ship along the bearing at which the contact is detected, it
would look something like the diagram below.
Section 5: Training
5-20
When using passive sonar, the exact range of the contact is not known.
Several solutions for the target might match this bearing fan. For example,
the contact could be close to you moving at 5 kts or twice as far from you
and moving at 10 kts. If you know the speed at which the contact is
traveling, its range and course can be estimated.
Section 5: Training
5-21
A new factor influences the bearing rate (change in bearing over time)
when your ship is moving as well. However, the principle remains the same.
A concept that many commanders find helpful is that of lead and lag
courses (legs) for Ownship. A lead course is one where Ownships course
and the targets course are on the same side of the line of bearing. With a
lag course, the targets course and Ownships course are on opposite
sides of the line of bearing. In the drawing below, Ownship has a lead
course on possible solution A and a lag course on possible solution B.
Point C where the lines of bearing cross indicates the maximum range for
lead course contact A and a minimum range for lag course contact B.
As you can see in the drawing, you cannot initially be sure whether you are
leading or lagging a contact. You can determine this after you turn your ship
to a course on the opposite side of the line of bearing.
By changing your ships contribution to the bearing rate you can

mathematically reduce the number of possible solutions for the available
data. You do this by changing the course and/or speed of your ship. The
more you change your ships contribution to the bearing rate, the more
dramatic the change in the data. In most cases the leg with the larger
bearing rate indicates a lag course. For a broadband contact, this may be
easier to see on the sonar waterfall display.
If the contact maintains its course and speed and the sonar bearings are
very accurate (they may not be for weak contacts), two or three Ownship
maneuvers, or legs, will result in a single possible solution if the maneuver
produces a moderate change in bearing rate. If large changes in own ships
speed across the line of bearing produce only a small change in bearing
rate, then the contact is likely distant.
Section 5: Training
5-22
Use all available information when creating your trial solutions. If an

intelligence message informs you the contact is on a specific course, enter
that value in the Course trial solution field and lock that field. Knowing a
second value, such as speed, eliminates a large number of possible target
solutions. Once a contact is classified, determine its speed using the
DEMON function in Sonar. See the Stations/Sonar/Demon section of the
manual for the desired platform for information on using the DEMON
interface.
TMA T O OL S
The TMA tools are the same in all classes of controllable submarines in
SCS-Dangerous Waters. The FFGs TMA tools are visually and functionally
different but the principles of TMA remain the same. The tools are
described here.
Submarines TMA Tools

The TMA Station in submarines consists of a TMA board, a ruler, also
known as a speed strip, trial solution fields used for entering possible or trial
solution elements (bearing, range, course, and speed) and a means for
entering a firing solution to the Fire Control System. The TMA stations in
the submarines also contain a dot stack that the FFG-7 does not have.
FFG TMA Tools

The FFGs TMA Plot resembles a Dead Reckoning Tracer (DRT). The TMA
Plot appears as a large sheet of paper, a set of rulers indicating various
Section 5: Training
5-23
speeds, Ownship Indicator light, a TRACK UPDATE REPORT notebook

used for entering trial solutions elements (bearing, range, course, and
speed), and a means for entering a firing solution.
9 Note: This training portion of the manual deals primarily with the
Submarine TMA since all of them work the same way. The FFGs
TMA Station functions a little differently. See FFG Stations/FFG TMA
Station for information on using the FFGs unique TMA. However,
FFG commanders should read this entire TMA training section to
learn the basics.
The TMA Display Board (Subs)

The subs TMA Display Board is located in the upper left area of the TMA
Station. The board displays a representation of Ownship, a history of
bearing data for a selected contact, a TMA ruler and an error dot stack.
These tools are used to analyze sensor inputs. The Akulas TMA board
components are seen and described below.
Dot Stack
TMA Ruler
Ownship Symbol
Bearing Lines
When a contact is selected from the track selection drop-down list, the most
recent sensor information for that contact is displayed on the TMA Board.
The information consists of a line of bearing extending from a point
representing Ownships position at the time of the report. If a tracker is
assigned to the contact, every two minutes the latest line of bearing is
added to the board. Over time these lines provide a history of bearing
changes that provides valuable information.
Dragging and positioning the ruler across the lines of bearing allows you to
test out possible solutions. The dot stack in the subs provides a visual cue
as to the accuracy of your trial solution. The oldest bearing lines are deleted
Section 5: Training
5-24
after a set amount of time. (In the subs right-click on the TMA board to set
the level of time history desired: 10, 20, 60 minutes or 4 hours) The tools
used on the TMA board and the specifics of this process are described
below. Learning TMA is not easy. If necessary, pause the game while you
attempt to develop an accurate solution.
The TMA Plot (FFG)

The TMA plot looks and functions a bit differently in the FFG. The plot
represents a Dead Reckoning Tracer (DRT). The white dot (initially in the
middle of the plot) is a light representing Ownships position. The light
moves along under the plot representing Ownships course and speed.
When the light reaches the edge of the paper the sheet must be torn off and
all lines of bearing previously displayed are lost. They do not reappear
when the contact is re-selected. You must create new ones by re-marking
the contact if no tracker is assigned or waiting for the trackers next twominute report.
Once a contact is selected in the dropdown list, its lines of bearing remain
on the TMA plot until the page is torn off. The lines are not removed when a
new contact is selected as they are on the submarine TMA board. Each
time a contact is marked, a line of bearing is added to that contacts record.
The time that the mark was made (in minutes into the mission) displays at
the end of each line of bearing.
Since all LOBs remain on the plot when a different contact is selected, you
must click on an LOB to determine which contact ID that line belongs to.
More on the FFGs TMA functionality is found in FFG Stations/FFG TMA
Station.
Merging and Dropping Contacts

A contact detected by two sources can be merged (and split apart again) at
the TMA station. Merging contacts cleans up clutter and helps you better
localize the contact. The Subs and the FFG handle this function slightly
differently.
Merged Contacts in the Subs: Merging two contacts results in the data
from both sensors being reported as a single merged contact in TMA and
on the Nav Map in the Subs. The dual bearing reports on the merged
contacts provide additional information and the location where the bearing
lines from the two sensors intersect can be a good indication of the range to
the contact. When contacts are merged in a submarine TMA station, the
resulting contact is given an M (Master) designation. To split a merged
contact back into its original components select it in the SELECT list and
click Split. The tracks are split and revert to their original track numbers.
Merged Contacts in the FFG: When two contacts are merged, the merged
contact retains the number of the contact showing in the upper Track
Update Report. The contact number seen in the lower Track Merge Report
is no longer seen in the Track selection dropdown. There is no indication
that a track is merged except that when the track number is selected in the
TMA Track Update Report, data from the merged sensor reports updates
Section 5: Training
5-25
as you watch. When FGG contacts are split they revert to their original track
numbers.
The TMA Ruler

Be it the FFGs flat ruler or the submarines digital speed strip ruler, the
TMA ruler is used to indicate your best estimate of the contacts course and
speed. Its location on the board relative to Ownship indicates your estimate
of the range of the contact.
TMA ruler is used to determine your best guess as to the course and speed
of the contact. By adjusting the location and orientation of the ruler to fit the
lines of bearing to a selected contact, the speed and course of the contact
can be estimated and the suspected range to the contact and its suspected
course are entered into the trial solution based on the rulers location on the
board or plot and its orientation.
Known or trial values for solution elements can be entered directly into the
appropriate fields and the ruler moves to reflect those values. Any portion of
the solution (range, bearing, course, speed) can be locked as different
portions of the solution are verified.
Subs Speed Strip Ruler:

With each new bearing line that appears on the TMA Board an
additional tick mark is added to the ruler. Each tick mark is associated
with a dot in the stack in the upper left of the screen. Moving the ruler
and adjusting the location of the tick marks allows you to line up the
dots along the center vertical line.
When TMA Autocrew is off, the first time a contact is selected from the
selection list, the speed strip appears at the end of the most recent line
of bearing facing Ownship. It stays on that LOB until moved. For
passive contacts this is a default range and not indicative of the actual
range of the contact. When the end tick is on the correct LOB, the
bottom dot in the stack is on the centerline of the dot stack.
The ruler components and functionality are described below:
The arrowhead on the ruler indicates the course of the contact.
The length of the ruler represents the current estimate of the contacts
speed: the longer the ruler, the faster the estimated speed.
The distance of the ruler from the Ownship marker represents the
contacts estimated range at the time of any given LOB.

Each tick mark represents a specific interval of time. (Towed and Bow
arrays update every two minutes while radar and continuous active
sonar update with every sweep or ping.) The tick mark at the end of the
ruler represents the initial or oldest information.
The estimated current bearing of the contact is a point just ahead of the
arrowhead. The last reported bearing is represented by the tick mark

closest to the arrowhead.
Section 5: Training
5-26
Manipulating the Speed Strip Ruler:

Adjusting length and direction: Click and drag the end mark or the
arrowhead to adjust the length or direction of the ruler.
Positioning Tick marks: The tick mark closest to the arrowhead
should be placed on the most recent bearing line. The end tick mark
should be positioned on the initial or oldest bearing line.
Using the Handle: A circle appears at the center of the ruler when
more than one tick is present and speed is more than zero. The circle
acts as a handle. Click the handle and drag the entire ruler to another
location. The handle maintains the current course and speed settings
of the ruler and adjusts range and bearing.
Initial bearing at time T, T+2,
Grab Handle
T+4,
T+6, (Most recent sensor return)
Arrowhead/Course Indicator
Speed Strip Ruler showing returns sent every two minutes from a sonar
tracker.
FFGs Ruler:
The FFG has a separate ruler for each unique speed. Click or right-click the
digits in the SPD field of the trial solution area or click the up and down
arrow to the left of the SPD label to select a speed ruler with tick marks
representing the selected speed. FFGs Ruler functionality is described
below
The ruler appears on the plot only when a contact is selected in the
track update report and there are LOBs on the plot.

The arrows on the ruler indicate the suspected course of the contact.
Click the center of the ruler to move the entire ruler in its current
orientation.
Click on an end of the ruler to rotate the ruler on the axis of the other
end.
If a range greater than that of the viewable range is entered into the
RNG field the ruler disappears from the TMA Plot. Enter a smaller
range or reselect the contact from the dropdown list.
A tiny circle indicates the probable location of the contact at this time,
given the speed, range, course and time at the last reported LOB.
Section 5: Training
5-27
TMA Dot Stack (Subs only)

The dot stack in the upper left corner of the Submarines TMA plot is a
graphical representation of the error between tick marks and bearing lines.
The dot at the top of the stack is associated with the most recent bearing
line. The analysis is probably correct when the top most dots are on the
centerline. This process is called stacking the dots. The FFG has nothing
similar to the dot Stack.
Trial Solution Area

As the ruler or speed strip is manipulated to determine a possible solution
for a contact, the fields in the trial solution area are populated with the
values represented by the rulers location and orientation. Entering a value
directly into one of the solution fields reorients the ruler to reflect the value
entered. (No entry can be made in the FFG s trial solution bearing field.)
Entering a Firing Solution

Once you are confident that you have a plausible firing solution for the
contact you have been analyzing, you can send the solution to the fire
control system.
BSubs: Click ENTER SOLUTION (ENTER SOLN in Seawolf).
BFFG-7: Click ENTER at the lower right corner of the TRACK
UPDATE REPORT notebook.
For complete instructions for performing TMA in the FFG-7 see FFG
Stations/FFG TMA Station.
Tip: Be sure that you dont rush the TMA process. Before sending a report
to the Fire Control system ensure that you have analyzed and manipulated
bearing reports for some time and maneuvered Ownship as much as
needed to eliminate all but a few possible solutions.
Section 5: Training
5-28
Lines of Bearing (LOBs)

The color of each line of bearing (LOB) on the TMA board or Plot is an
indication of which sensor detected the contact.
Submarine LOB Colors

Bow sonar array:
White
Hull/Flank/Conformal array:
Blue
Towed sonar arrays:
Purple
Active sonar:
Green
Periscope or ESM:
Red
Radar and Active Intercept:
Yellow
UUV passive sonar
White
UUV active sonar
Green
9 Note for Sub Commander: When a sonar tracker is assigned to a

contact, bearing updates are automatically sent to the TMA board.
While radar, ESM/EW, single-ping active sonar and periscope
contacts appear in the list, these contacts are not updated on the
TMA board unless you physically mark them again. The history for
these contacts may contain only one line. Your Radar Autocrew,
when activated, sends updates for radar contacts as long as the
radar is on.
FFG LOB colors

Hull sonar, passive:
White
Hull sonar, active
Green
Towed Array:
Purple
Sonobuoy, passive:
White
Sonobuoy, active:
White
EW:
Red
Lookout:
Red
Radar
Yellow
9 Note for FFG-7 Commander: When an ATF (Automatic Tag Follow)

tracker is attached to a passive sonar contact in Towed Array,
bearing updates are sent automatically to TMA. If the ATT
(Automated Target Tracker) tag is assigned to a single track in
Active Sonar, bearing and range data are sent automatically to TMA.
Contacts marked by active sonar (Hull Sonar or sonobuoys) or
reported by the Lookout or FFG Radars appear in the Track list and
appear on the TMA Plot with a tiny x at the end of the line of bearing
at the reported range. The x only appears on the TMA Plot if the end
of the LOB is visible in the currently selected TMA Plot range scale.
Section 5: Training
5-29
Contact ID Naming Conventions

As tracks are detected and marked by various ship sensors they are
assigned a contact ID or contact designation. Once marked, applicable
Contact IDs appear in the SELECTED TRACKS dropdown list at the TMA
Station where they can be selected and the available data on them is
analyzed on the TMA Board or Plot. The conventions used to number
contacts in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters are explained briefly below. See
Navigation Station/ 2D Navigation Map/Contact Designations for a full
description.
Submarine Contact IDs: The submarine Contact IDs give you a clue as to
which sensor has detected each contact. The first letter of the contact
designation represents the source of the data: S for Sonar, R for Radar, V
for visual (Periscope and Stadimeter), and E for ESM. TMA bearing lines
are color coded to indicate the reporting sensor. Contacts detected by a
submarines sensors are given an alphanumeric contact designation. The
first contact detected by Ownships sonar is S01 and the second is S02.
The first contact marked by Ownships ESM sensor is designated E01, the
fourth contact marked by a subs Radar is R04, the third visual contact
marked in the periscope is V03, etc. Each sensor maintains its own list.
When two contacts are merged, the merged contact is designated with an
M. Merged contacts are numbered sequentially as they are created.
Link contact numbers do not appear in the TMA list. Contacts marked by
the ships bow, hull and towed array sonar, ESM, Active Intercept, Radar
and Periscope all appear in the TMA track list and can be manipulated and
merged.
FFG Contact IDs: Your Platform ID number determines contact IDs for
contacts marked by your FFG-7 sensors. In Single Player games, your
Ownship Platform (Track) ID is always 1001. All tracks marked by any of
your sensors are numbered sequentially from that number regardless of the
sensor. The first contact marked is 1002 and numbering continues through
1299. In multiplayer games, each players Ownship is assigned a platform
ID as the game is loaded starting with 1001. The next player ID is
incremented by 300, so the next players Ownship ID is 1301, the next
1601, etc., up to 30 players. Each players contacts are numbered based on
their Platform ID up to 298 contacts.
Link contact numbers do not appear in the TMA list. Contacts marked by
the FFGs towed array, hull sonar, EW sensor and sonobuoys appear in the
FFGs TMA track list. For gameplay purposes contacts marked by the FFG
Lookout and radars also appear in TMA so that you can merge them with
contacts detected via your passive sensors. This helps clear up the Nav
Map and eliminates multiple occurrences of 3D models in one location.
Section 5: Training
5-30
TMA
ON
UUV S E NS O R C O NT AC TS
All controllable submarines can carry Unmanned Underwater Vehicles

(UUVs). UUVs in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters have sonar capabilities only
and cannot launch weapons. The lines of bearing for contacts detected by a
UUV are drawn from the location of the UUV at the time of the report, not
from Ownships location. TMA on UUV contacts is performed as for any
other sonar contact in active or passive mode.
Section 5: Training
5-31
Section 5: Training
5-32

6(&7,21
1$9,*$7,2167$7,21
6-1
6: NAVIGATION STATION
6-3
2D NAVIGATION MAP ........................................................................6-4
NAV MAP LEGEND
6-4
6-5
NTDS SYMBOLS
Colors ..................................................................... 6-5
Alliance IDs............................................................. 6-5
Symbol Shape ........................................................ 6-6
6-7
OWNSHIP AND LINK PARTICIPANT PLATFORM IDS
CONTACT DESIGNATIONS (CONTACT/TRACK IDS)
6-7
Contact IDs When OS is a FFG, P-3C or MH-60R . 6-8
Contact IDs When OS is a Submarine.................... 6-8
AI Link Participant Contact IDs ............................... 6-9
6-10
OWNSHIP CONTACTS WITH LINES OF BEARING (LOB)
CONTACTS WITH NO LINE OF BEARING
6-11
6-13
CONTACT CLASSIFICATION
6-14
NAV MAP MENU
6-17
CONTACT MENU
Promoting a Contact to the Link............................ 6-20
6-22
OWNSHIP MENU
DIGITAL DATA INDICATOR (DDI)....................................................... 6-23
3D VIEW ........................................................................................ 6-25
W IRE FRAMES
6-25
6-25
3D MODELS
CONFIDENCE INDICATOR
6-26
6-26
3D VIEW CONTROLS
6-27
DISABLING AND HIDING 3D
PLAYING FROM THE NAV .................................................................. 6-27
6-27
ATTACKING TARGETS FROM NAV
Using the Contact Menu: ...................................... 6-28
Using the Orders or Ownship Menu...................... 6-28
6-28
OWNSHIP W AYPOINTS
To Place a Waypoint on the Nav Map................... 6-29
To Add a Single Waypoint .................................... 6-29
To Add a Waypoint Loop ...................................... 6-29
Some Restrictions................................................. 6-30
Applying Waypoint Properties............................... 6-30
6-30
VOICE COMMANDS
Using Voice Commands ....................................... 6-31
6-2
6: NAVIGATION STATION
All missions begin in the Navigation Station. The components of the
Navigation Station are the same across platforms and are explained here.
For descriptions and functionality of the rest of a platforms stations, see the
desired platforms Stations section. Information about any Navigation
Station menu or feature that is unique to a specific platform is found within
that platforms abbreviated Navigation Station section.
The Navigation Station, the Nav for short, consists of the 2D Navigation
Map (Nav Map), the 3D View, and the Digital Data Indicator (DDI). It is
from here that you view water depth contours, nearby land features, and all
contacts you have marked with your sensors, and set or change the
classification for the contacts you have detected. When Show Link Data is
on, contacts reported by Ownside Link participants in the mission are also
visible on the map.
Many aspects of the game can be played from the Nav by utilizing your
Autocrew, the Nav Map, Ownship and Contact Menus, the Task Bars
Orders Menu and voice commands. See Playing From the Nav later in this
section.
DDI
2D Navigation Map
Nav Map Legend
3D View
NTDS symbols
6-3
2D N AVIGATION M AP
The 2D Navigation Map (Nav Map) represents the 600 by 600 (nm) battle
space. Not all of the battle space is visible. You must scroll up or down to
view the hidden portions. Be aware that some contacts could be hidden
behind the 3D window or above or below the visible area.
BClick and drag in the Nav Map to view the hidden area.
BUse the arrow keys to scroll the map in the direction indicated by
the arrow.
BPress [=] or [-] to zoom on the keyboard to zoom in and out on the
Nav Map.
BPress [CTRL] and click a map location to zoom in on that spot.
BPress [CTRL] and right-click the map to zoom out.
BUse the mouse wheel to zoom in and out.
BFor a full list of Nav Map related keyboard commands during
gameplay, press [ESC] to display the System Menu, then select
Options. From the Options Menu click Controls then select the
Map checkbox to see the Map page.
The Nav Map displays Naval Tactical Data System (NTDS) symbols for
Ownship and detected contacts and a Map Legend is located in the lower
left corner. When a NTDS symbol is selected on the map, the Digital Data
Indicator (DDI) overlays the upper left corner of the map with information
about the selected contact. See Navigation Station/Digital Data Indicator
(DDI).
The 3D View and view controls appear in the upper right corner of the
station. See Navigation Station/3D View.
Clicking on a Nav Map NTDS symbol selects it. Clicking on the Nav Map
deselects any selected symbol. Right-clicking on the map when nothing is
selected displays the Nav Map Menu, which provides a means for filtering
the symbols and user-placed map objects that appear on the map as well
as a means for adding navigational aids and information to the map. Rightclicking on the selected Ownship symbol (a blue circle with cross bars in the
center) reveals the Ownship Menu; right-clicking on a selected contact
symbol displays the Contact Menu. The Ownship and Contact Menus are
nearly identical across platforms and the common menu options are
covered in this section. Any menu item that is platform specific is covered in
the specific platforms Navigation Stations section.
N A V M AP L E GE N D
The lower left corner of the map provides the following information:
Latitude and Longitude: At the location of the cursor.
6-4
Depth/Height: Displays the depth of the water or the altitude of the
land at the location of the cursor.

Range scale: In nautical miles and yards (when the scale is less than
1 nm.)
Ice Coverage: As a percentage when ice is present at that map
location.
BPress [SHIFT] and X to toggle the display of the latitude and
longitude, depth and when visible, the Ice coverage info.
BPress [SHIFT] and Z to toggle the display of the range scale.
NTDS S Y MB OL S
Ownship and contacts are displayed on the 2D Map as Naval Tactical
Display System (NTDS) symbols. These symbols use shape and color to
convey a platforms category (surface, sub surface, helo, airplane etc) and
its alliance ID (friendly, hostile, neutral etc), referred to simply as ID in the
game.
Colors
S.C.S. Dangerous Waters uses the following colors to denote side
alliances.
Color:
ID:
Blue
Ownside/Friendly/Assumed Friendly
Orange
Allied
Red
Hostile/Assumed Hostile
Yellow
Unknown
Green
Neutral
When a platform is destroyed, its symbol turns a shade of grey depending

on its alliance. Destroyed platforms belonging to Ownside appear as a light
shade of grey while all other destroyed platforms display as a dark shade of
grey. When Show Dead Platforms is ON in the Options>Game screen,
symbols for 100% destroyed platforms appear in an appropriate shade of
grey on the 2D Map in their true location whether you have detected them
or not.
Alliance IDs
S.C.S. Dangerous Waters uses the following definitions when assigning
alliances to contacts in missions.
Friendly
Contacts that are either Ownside or

allied to Ownside are designated
Friendly.
Assumed Friendly
Contact is most likely friendly.
6-5
Hostile
All platforms, weapons, and land-based

sites identified as belonging to
countries hostile to Ownside.
Assumed Hostile
Contact is most likely hostile.
Neutral
All platforms allied with neither Friendly

or Hostile sides.
Unknown
Any contact not yet identified as

Friendly, Hostile, or Neutral.
Symbol Shape
The shape of a symbol provides important information concerning the
contacts category or type. Symbols for ships, submarines, airplanes and
missiles have a different symbol shape depending on its alliance. Some
symbols are the same shape regardless of alliance. In those cases, you
must rely on the color of the symbol to determine the alliance of the contact.
See Colors above.
Symbol
Object
Symbol
Object
Ownship
Missile, Ownside/
Friendly
Unknown
Missile, Hostile,
Unknown
Submarine,
Ownside/Friendly
Torpedo
Submarine, Hostile
Helicopter
Submarine,
Unknown
Mine
Submarine, Neutral
Land-based Object
Aircraft, Ownside/
Friendly
Downed Pilot
Aircraft, Hostile
Explosion
Aircraft, Unknown
Special Forces
Team
Aircraft, Neutral
UUV (Unmanned
Underwater)
Surface Ship,
Ownside/ Friendly
DSRV (Deep
Submergence
Rescue Vehicle)
Surface Ship,
Hostile
Biologic
6-6
Surface Ship,
Unknown
Sonobuoy]
Surface Ship,
Neutral]
O W NS H I P
AND
L I NK P AR TI C I P A N T P L AT F O R M ID S
In S.C.S. Dangerous Waters the platform you are commanding is referred

to as Ownship regardless of the type of platform. Ownship can be a sub,
ship, airplane or helicopter. All platforms on Ownside belong to a
communication network referred to simply as the Link in this manual.
Ownside platforms (blue symbols) send periodic reports to the Link sharing
their own location plus the location, suspected alliance ID and track number
of each contact they detect. Platforms that report in the Link are referred to
as Link participants. Link functionality is modeled for each Ownside in a
Multiplayer game. Each controllable platform is part of a Link that includes
all platforms assigned to the same side.
Unknown, neutral and hostile contacts detected by Link participants are
called Link Contacts. The numbering paradigm for Link Contacts is
described below. See Contact Designations (Contact/Track IDs) below.
Ownship and Link participants are assigned a unique four-digit platform
(Track) ID number. These platform IDs are visible on the Nav Map and in
some other stations when Show Link Data is on. The four-digit number
appears beside the appropriate NTDS symbol on the Nav Map. (See
Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Nav Map Menu below or Main
Menu/Options/Game for information on Show Link.)
In Single Player mode, Ownship Platform ID (track number) is always
1001 regardless of the controllable platform you are commanding.

In Multiplayer mode your Ownship ID always ends with 01 but the first
two numbers will vary depending on the number of players in the game
and the order in which your platform is loaded into the game. Each
Ownship platform ID is unique and separated by 300 digits. The first
Ownship loaded in the game is always 1001. All players in multiplayer
game, regardless of side, are part of this numbering system. You only
see Platform (Track) IDs for platforms in your Ownside Link when
Show Link Data is ON. Submarines only see Link data when at comms
depth with the radio antenna extended or the floating wire deployed.
In a Multi-Station multiplayer game all players on the same platform
see the same Platform ID for Ownship.

AI Link Participants always have platform IDs that begin with 0
regardless of mode or side.
C O N T AC T D E S I G N A TI O NS (C O N T AC T /T R AC K ID S )
When a contact is designated or marked by an Ownship (OS) sensor it is
given an alphanumeric or a four-digit Contact ID used to identify the
6-7
contact on the Nav Map, TMA station, Fire Control and other stations in the
game. The form of the designation, called a Contact ID (also Track ID or
track number) depends on the type of controllable platform you are
commanding. The format used by submarines in the game differs from the
format used by the surface and air platforms.
9 Note: The numbering system described below assumes Show Link
is ON and Show Truth is OFF. When both are ON, only Truth track
numbers display and are different from those you see when Show
Truth is OFF.
Contact IDs When OS is a FFG, P-3C or MH-60R

Single Player Mode: When the FFG, the P-3C or the MH-60R is your
Ownship your platform ID is always 1001. Each track marked by one of
Ownships sensors is numbered sequentially based on Ownhips ID
number. The first contact marked is 1002, the second 1003up to 1299).
Multiplayer Mode: In Multiplayer games the first player-controlled platform
that loads is assigned platform ID 1001 and his tracks are numbered as
described above. The next available player-controlled Platform ID number
is 1301. Tracks marked by that player-controlled platform are numbered
sequentially from the OS platform ID (in this case 1302, 1303 up to 1599
etc.).
When the FFG, P-3 or MH-60R is Ownship, each player sees the tracks
that he marks with his Ownship sensors and any tracks reported by AI Link
participants. He does not see any contact marked by any other playercontrolled member of his Link until the other player promotes the contact to
the Link. Once a contact is promoted, players in the Ownside Link see the
symbol and the track number. See Navigation Station/2D Navigation
Map/Contact Menu/Promoting a Contact to Link.
Only contacts that you mark with your sensors are assigned numbers
from your track number allotment. Buoys and weapons launched by

Ownship are not numbered from this allotment but have track numbers
that start with 0.
When Ownship is a FFG and you launch your embarked AI helicopter
(or the AI helicopter is airborne at mission start) the helicopter is

numbered as an AI Link participant and has a track ID that starts with
0. See Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Contact Designations/AI
Link Participant Contact Designations below. Player-controlled MH60Rs are always airborne at game start and have track numbers as
described above.
Contact IDs When OS is a Submarine

Single Player Mode: When a submarine is your Ownship, its Platform ID is
1001 as with other platform types, but contacts marked with OS sensors
have alphanumeric designations consisting of a letter followed by two digits.
The letter in the contact ID represents the Ownship sensor that is reporting
6-8
the data. The numbers indicate the order in which the contact was marked
by that sensor.
S for Sonar (passive, active, UUV)
R for Radar
V for visual/periscope
E for ESM
M for contacts merged in TMA
The first sonar contact detected by a submarine Ownship is S01 the second
is S02 etc. The first ESM contact is E01 etc. A submarine can mark a total
of 298 contacts within this numbering system.
Submarines in Multiplayer Mode: As with the surface and air platforms,
your submarine Ownship Platform ID is determined by the order in which
your controllable platform is processed when the game loads. This is
described in Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Ownship and Link
Participant Platform IDs. During gameplay you see alphanumeric contacts
as described above. However behind the scenes, all tracks marked by your
submarine Ownship are also assigned a four-digit track number following
the track numbering scheme used by the FFG and controllable aircraft.
When you promote one of your contacts to the Link, it is the four-digit track
number that is seen by other players in your Link. When you select the
promoted contact on the Nav map, the four-digit number seen by the other
Link participants on their Nav Maps appears in parentheses in the
Promoted field in the DDI following the time at which the contact was
promoted. See Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Contact
Menu/Promoting a Contact to the Link.
AI Link Participant Contact IDs

Each AI controlled Link participant automatically reports his own position
and the position and classification of any contacts he detects. The Link
takes the first instance of an AI report so if all AI Link participants detect a
given contact, the first Link participant to report it is credited with the report.
Subsequent reports by other AI participants are ignored. This helps reduce
map clutter.
9 Note: When you are commanding a submarine in S.C.S.
Dangerous Waters you see Link data only when your ship is at
comms depth with the radio mast extended or the floating wire
streamed. In order to see the location of an AI submarine in your
Link, the AI sub must also be at comms depth and reporting data at
the moment that you are downloading Link data. The chances of this
are slim since you have no control over AI submarines. It is highly
likely that you will never know the location or existence of other
Ownside subs in a single player mission. In Multiplayer games you
can communicate with players on your Ownside via Ownside chat
messages and arrange to come to comms depth and extend your
radio masts at the same time. You must have your radio mast
6-9
extended to transmit your location to other Link players. The wire

does not transmit.
AI Link participants and their reported contacts are assigned four-digit
ID numbers that begin with 0.

LINK appears in the DDI Source field when a contact reported by an AI
Link participant is selected on the Nav Map. The track number of the AI
Link participant that reported the contact follows in parentheses.
Tip: To easily differentiate between OS contacts and Link Contacts on the
Nav Map, select Layers>Hide Link Data from the right-click Nav Map Menu.
Only Ownship detected contacts are now visible on the map. You can also
press [Tab] to move the selection cursor between symbols on the Nav Map.
Check the Contact field at the top of the DDI and the Source field at the
bottom of the DDI to determine the track number and source of the report.
O W NSH I P C O N T AC T S
WI TH
L I N E S OF B E A R I N G (LOB)
Some Ownship sensors report only a line of bearing to a contact. Such a

contact first appears on the Nav Map as a symbol at the end of a colored
Line of Bearing (LOB). The default length of the LOB depends on which
sensor has detected it. The NTDS symbol in use is usually the yellow
unknown symbol indicating Unknown Category and Unknown ID (alliance)).
See NTDS Symbols above. The Contact ID number accompanies the
symbol on the Nav Map. The color and default lengths for lines of bearing
are shown below.
Passive Sonar Contacts: All passive LOBs are 10 nm long
Sphere/bow /Cylindrical (Subs); Hull (FFG): White LOB
Hull/Conformal (Subs): Blue LOB
Towed Array: Purple LOB
UUV passive sonar contacts (Subs only): White LOB 10 nm
from the UUV.
Sonobuoys (Directional mode): White LOB 10 nm from the
buoy.
Dipping Sonar (helo) Passive: Blue LOB 10 nm from sensor
Active Sonar Contacts: Green LOB at the range reported by the
sensor.
UUV active sonar contacts (Subs): Green LOB at the range from
the UUV reported by the sensor.
Sonobuoy (Active Mode): White LOB at range (from buoy)
reported by the sensor.
Dipping Sonar (helo) Active: Green LOB at range reported by
the sensor.
ESM/EW Contacts: Red LOB 20 nm long.
Visual (Periscope) contacts (Subs): Red LOB 10 nm long.
6-10
IR Camera Contacts (P-3): Magenta LOB at the range reported by the

camera.
Radar Contacts (Subs): Yellow LOB with the symbol located at the
range reported by the sensor.
9 Note: Contacts detected by the FFG Radar or detected visually by
the FFG Lookout, the P-3C and the MH-60R, as well as Link
contacts appear on the Nav Map with no lines of bearing. A contact
for which you have created a TMA solution (subs and FFG) also has
no LOB once the solution is entered in the system.
C O N T AC T S
WI TH
NO LINE OF BEARING
Depending on which platform you are commanding you may see many
contacts that have no lines of bearing. Contact symbols that appear on the
Nav Map with no lines of bearing indicate that you, your Autocrew or
members of your Link have determined and entered a solution for the
contact.
A solution is your best guess as to the location (bearing and range), speed
and heading of the contact. For the FFG and the subs, a solution for some
Ownship-detected contacts are created and entered in the TMA station.
See Training/TMA Basics or the FFG Stations/FFG TMA Station or the TMA
Station portion of the manual in the appropriate subs Stations section. In
the game context, a solution is where you think the contact is. Truth is
where the contact is in actuality. Show Allies displays the Truth location for
all Ownside platforms. Show Truth shows the actual location, speed and
course of every contact in the game. Solutions are represented on the Nav
Map by NTDS symbols that have no line of bearing. Some symbols appear
at the proper location (range and bearing from the detecting sensor) but no
speed or course is known. These contacts retain a line of bearing until a
solution is entered. Aircraft in the game have no means for entering a
solution. Place a manual solution at the suspected location and classify it.
There is no way to assign a speed or course to a manual solution in the P3C or helo in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
When Show Link Data is ON, the participants in your Link network provide
fairly accurate solution information for their own location as well as the
location of any contacts they are detecting. These solutions appear on the
Nav Map with no lines of bearing. The solution for a Link reported contact is
usually fairly accurate as long as the contact is regularly updated.
9 Note: This manual assumes that Show Link Data is ON and Show
Allies and Show Truth are OFF. Link participants appear as Truth
objects on the Nav Map when Show Allies and Show Truth are on.
Track numbers in use for truth objects differ from those assigned by
Link participants and Ownship sensors when Show Truth is OFF
during gameplay.
6-11
Submarines: When TMA Autocrew is OFF, nearly all of Ownship detected

contacts retain their lines of bearing until you develop a firing solution for
the contact at the TMA Station. See Training/TMA Basics and the TMA
Station section for the desired submarine for more information on creating
TMA solutions.
Once your TMA solution is entered at the TMA Station, the contact symbol
appears on the Nav Map at the location designated in the solution. The line
of bearing disappears and the symbol begins moving on the Nav Map on
the course and at the speed entered in the solution.
Visual contacts marked in the submarine periscope have a line of bearing
on the Nav Map. You must use the submarines Stadimeter to determine
the contacts range and course and enter that data as part of the TMA
solution for the contact before its LOB is removed.
Link contacts are only visible when at comms depth and when the floating
wire is deployed or the radio antenna is extended. Link data automatically
appears on the Nav Map under these conditions if Show Link Data is
enabled in the Options>Game screen or via the Nav Map Menus
Layers>Show Link Data option. Once the sub submerges, the Link contacts
are not updated but remain on the map moving on the course and speed
designated in the solution provided by the Link participants. Select the
contact and check its age in the DDI. Show Link Data is on by default, but
at game start no Link contacts appear on the Nav Map because no sub
begins a mission with the floating wire or radio mast deployed.
9 Note: In the subs, only a snapshot can be fired at a contact that has
a line of bearing, and then only if the contact has been designated as
a surface or subsurface platform so the system knows the weapon is
appropriate for the contact.
FFG: The FFGs Radar, when on, reports contacts on the Nav Map with no
line of bearing. The FFGs Forward and Aft Lookouts report all visual
contacts as soon as they are detected. These also appear with no line of
bearing because the Lookout provides a solution based on his observation.
He also categorizes the contact (surface, air, etc.) and may also classify it
(Fishing Boat etc.) if it is close enough to Ownship. Contacts detected by
the deployed helo are processed by REMRO and appear on the Nav Map
as an Ownship contact. Helo and ship dropped sonobuoys are processed in
the ships Acoustic station. A buoy contact marked in Directional or Active
mode appears on the Nav Map and in TMA with a line of bearing from the
location of the sonobuoy. The FFGs Towed Array, Hull Sonar and EW
sensors also report contacts that appear at the end of a line of bearing.
These contacts must be manipulated in the TMA Plot to determine a
probable solution. When the solution is entered at the TMA Station, the
contacts symbol appears on the Nav Map without a line of bearing and
moves on the course, speed, range and bearing from Ownship designated
in the entered solution. Contacts reported by OS helo appear on the Nav
Map as solutions with no bearing lines.
6-12
When you select the NTDS symbol for your FFG Ownship or your deployed
Helo, the DDI contains no Solution area. Instead the actual (true) class,
course, speed, and % of damage appears in the DDI when they are
selected. The actual altitude of your helo is also displayed. Your ships
systems report your ships exact location and that of your helicopter even
when the helicopter is over the horizon; however, you lose Sync with the
helo when it is over the horizon. (See FFG Stations/ASTAC Station for
more information on Helo Sync.)
P-3C and MH-60R: All surface and air contacts that are visually detected
and contacts marked with radar appear as solutions on the Nav Map. When
radar Autocrew is ON, radar contacts are updated every two minutes.
Sonobuoy and ESM contacts appear on the Nav Map at a default range at
the end of a Line of Bearing. In the P-3C contacts marked with the IR
camera also appear at the end of a line of bearing at the range reported by
the camera. (See Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/NTDS Symbols.)
There is no TMA Station in the P-3C or MH-60R thus, there is no way to
create a solution for LOB contacts. If the map becomes too crowded select
the contact and right-click on it to display the Contact Menu. Select Drop
Track from the Contact Menu to remove the contact and its LOB from the
Nav Map. If the reporting sensor is still creating reports, the symbol will
return on the next report.
You can also select Add Manual Solution from the Nav Map Menu then
click the spot along the bearing line where you think the contact is located.
The manual solution can be classified but it will not move on the map like a
TMA solution since there is no way to enter the course and speed for the
solution. Manual solutions can be targeted.
Link Contacts: Link reported contacts never have a line of bearing. They
always appear on the Nav Map as a solution, usually a fairly accurate one.
Link participants continue to report contacts and update their solutions even
if Link data is hidden as long as the reporting platform has not been
destroyed. These contacts reappear when Show Link Data is selected
again.
C O N T AC T C L A S S I F I C A TI O N
Classification is the process of determining the category of the contact
(surface ship, submarine, air etc.), its specific named class and its alliance
ID (Friendly, Hostile, Neutral etc.) Additionally you can assign a level of
confidence to indicate how certain you are in the classification you have
assigned (Low, Med, or High).
The symbol for a contact changes shape once it is categorized. In some
cases the shape of the symbol indicates its ID as well as its category. (See
Navigation Station/2D Nav Map/NTDS Symbols earlier in this section). You
can assign a category, ID or a level of confidence individually to a selected
contact from the Contact Menus Category/ID option or select a specific
class and ID from the Contact Menus Classify Contact option described
below.
6-13
Narrowband sonar and sonobuoys in Omni or Directional Mode, ESM/EW

or the Stadimeter in submarines all provide a means for determining the
class of a contact. In some of these stations the category and class is
applied to the contact when it is marked. These stations are covered
individually within each platforms Stations section. (For information on the
Contact Menu options see Navigation Station/2D Navigational Map/Contact
Menu.)
Link contacts represent solution information provided by participants in your
Link network and usually include a classification. If you attempt to change
the classification of a Link contact or of a contact detected visually by your
P-3 or MH-60R crew or by the FFG Lookout, the classification reverts to the
designation generated by the reporting platform or sensor on the next
report. Only contacts detected by your Ownship sensors can be classified.
N A V M AP M E NU
Right-clicking on the 2D Map surface when nothing is selected displays the
Nav Map Menu. The Nav Map Menu contains a variety of tools that allow
you to customize the Nav Map interface by adding markers and labels and
filtering which symbols, text or other map aids display there. The Nav Map
Menu items are described below.
Filters: Displays a submenu of filters to toggle the display of specific map
objects.
ID: Displays a submenu of options relating to the ID (presumed
alliance) of a contact.
Show/Hide Threats: Toggles the display of all contacts designated
Threat.
Show/Hide Allies: Toggles the display of all contacts designated as
Ownside Allies.
Show/Hide Neutrals: Toggles the display of all contacts designated
Neutral.
Show/Hide Unknowns: Toggles the display of all contacts
designated Unknown.
Tip: If Show Truth is ON and contacts you expect to see do not appear on
the Nav Map check to see if you have inadvertently turned off the display of
one or more of the alliance IDs.
Hide/Show Tags: Toggles the display of the nametags of all platforms
and weapons next to the appropriate symbol. The nametag that
displays is that of your classification for each contact, which may or
may not be correct. Link designations have a high probability of
accuracy.
Hide/Show Tracks: Toggles the display of all alphanumeric and fourdigit contact IDs.
Hide/Show Marks: Toggles the display of all markers you have placed
on the map. See Drawing Tools below.
6-14
Hide/Show Area Circles: Toggles the display of any area circles you
have placed on the map. See Drawing Tools below.
Hide/Show Lines: Toggles the displays of any lines that appear on the
Nav Map. Lines cannot be entered by the user during game play but
may have been added by the scenario developer in Mission Editor.
Hide/Show Labels: Toggles the display of any labels you have placed
on the map. See Drawing Tools below.
Layers: Displays a submenu of options used to toggle the display of
several GAME Options.
Show/Hide Link Data: Link Data is visible by default. Selecting this
option toggles the display of the NTDS symbols representing contacts
detected by Link participants and Link participants themselves. When
Hide Link Data is selected, all contacts detected by participating
members of the Link do not display on the Nav Map. If Hide Allies is
also selected, Link participants disappear as well. As modeled in
S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters the Link is secure, two-way, real-time data
transmission between Ownsides ships, aircraft, subs and satellites.
This sharing of information results in fairly accurate position, ID,
Category and classification of any contacts detected by Link
participants.
Submarines are not on the link until they are at comms depth with an
appropriate communications mast deployed to receive or send Link
data.
9 Note: In Single Player S.C.S. Dangerous Waters missions, Link
participants report all contacts to Ownship. However, Ownship
contacts are not automatically reported to the Link. If you want to
notify the A.I. platforms in the Link of a specific contact that you hold,
you must right-click on the contact and select Promote to Link from
the Contact Menu. Be aware that if you promote the contact as
hostile, Link participants may attack it whether you want them to or
not. In Multiplayer games, players on Ownside do not automatically
share contacts with other members of the Link. Each player on the
same side must promote his own contacts to the Link before other
players in his Link can see them. AI Link participants still share their
contacts automatically. When separate players man the FFG and its
deployed Helo, the FFG REMRO marks contacts detected by the
deployed Helo as FFG contacts when REMRO is ON. See FFG
Stations/ASTAC Station and FFG Stations/Weapons Coordinator
Station.
Show/Hide Truth: Truth is hidden by default. Select Show Truth to
display the true location and identity of all platforms and objects in the
game on the Nav Map and in the 3D View. See Main
Menu/Option/Game/Show Truth. Be aware that turning Truth ON and
OFF clears the Target Queue on the FFG and removes any assigned
targets from the launchers. Track numbers that display when Show
6-15
Truth is ON are different from the ones marked by OS Sensors or

reported by the Link when Show Truth is OFF.
Show /Hide Allies: Toggles the display of the symbols representing
Link participants. These symbols represent the true location and
identity (Truth) for all platforms on Ownside and any platforms
designated as allied with Ownside during mission creation. See Main
Menu/Options/Game/Show Allies and Show Truth for more information.
Show/Hide Country Borders: Select this option to toggle the display
of country land borders on the Nav Map.
Drawing Tools: Displays a submenu of tools for creating Nav Map aids
Add Mark: Select this option then click the map to place a marker at
the clicked location. Double-click the marker to add a label to the
marker. You can also place the cursor at the desired location and press
[Enter] to place a mark at that location.
BClick on the mark and press [Delete] to delete the marker and the
Label.
Add Area Circle: Select this option, click the map to place the center
of the circle, then drag the cursor to define the radius of the circle. Click
again when the circle is the desired size. Double-clicking on the center
of the circle displays a dialog allowing you to change the radius of the
circle and create a label. Click the digits to increment the value. Rightclick to decrease the value.
BTo delete an area circle, click the center point of the circle and
press [Delete].
Add Range Circle: Range circles can be added to Ownship and any
platform symbol. Select this option then position the cursor over
Ownship or the desired contact. The cursor changes shape when it is
over a valid contact. Click the contact and drag the circle to the desired
size. Click again to place the circle.
BTo delete a range circle, select then right-click the platform to
display the Contact Menu, then select Remove Range Circle.
Add Manual Solution: Select this option then click the map to manually
add the yellow contact symbol for Unknown Category/Unknown Alliance ID
to the Nav Map. This option might be used when you suspect a contact is at
a certain location. (This option is not available when Show Truth is ON.)
Once entered, a manual solution contact can be classified and fired upon.
When Ownship is a submarine, the designation for a manual solution
starts with Z and is followed by a two-digit number up to 99.

When Ownship is the FFG or either of the aircraft the track designation
for a Manual Solution is a four-digit track number based on Ownships

Platform ID.
The DDI lists Manual in the Source field when a manual contact is
selected.
6-16
When OS is a sub or a FFG, a Manual Solution track designation can
be selected in the TMA station and given a course and speed. Once
these are entered in the TMA station, the contact moves on the
designated course and speed.
System Menu: Select this option to display the System Menu. The System
Menu is not a submenu but a separate menu. By default, pressing [Esc]
also brings up the System Menu. The game is paused when the System
Menu is selected. The following options are available:
Resume: Select this option to leave the System Menu and resume
gameplay.
Options: Displays the Options Menu.
USNI Reference: Displays the USNI Browser.
Mission Status: Displays the Mission Status screen giving you access
to your captain name, mission name, score, elapsed time, the mission
goals and a list of platforms you have destroyed up to this point in the
game.
Save: Displays the Save Dialog then returns you to the game.
Save and Exit: Displays the Save Dialog then exits the mission.
End Mission: Exits the mission without providing an opportunity to
save the mission.
C O N T AC T M ENU
Once a contact appears on the map, select it by clicking on its symbol then
right-click on the selected contact to display the Contact Menu. From this
menu you can assign a classification to the contact as well as attack it or
find information about it as described below.
9 Note: Some options only appear when a specific type of platform is
Ownship.
Engage With: Displays a menu of weapons appropriate to engage the
selected target. What appears in this menu depends on current weapons
loaded on Ownship. If only weapons inappropriate for the target remain, the
Engage With option does not appear. This option also is not available under
the following conditions:
When the contact is designated as Friendly or allied (blue or
orange symbol),
When the category of the selected contact is unknown.
When no weapon appropriate for the selected contact is currently
loaded in a tube or launcher

From the Nav Map you can engage a Link reported contact but not a Link
participant.
BSelect the desired weapon from the list to launch it at the contact.
Some weapon names are greyed out if the certain specifications
6-17
are not met for launch. These are described in the Stations section
for the appropriate platform.
Spec Ops: (Submarine Ownship only) Displays a submenu of Special
Operations options. The DSRV and/or Special Forces Unit is added to a
subs loadout during mission creation and cannot be added from the
weapons loadout screen. These options are greyed out if the conditions
described below are not met.
Deploy DSRV: Select this option to Deploy the Deep Submergence
Rescue Vehicle to travel to the selected contact. The DSRV is a mini
submarine used to rescue crewmen from downed submarines. This
option is only selectable when the following conditions are met:
The DSRV is present on the subs hull. (The DSRV is only
available if the mission creator added it to the mission.)

The selected contact is a submerged submarine.
Ownship depth is greater than periscope depth.
Ownship speed is 3 kts or less.
Deploy Special Forces: This menu is greyed out until speed and
depth requirements are met. It is available only in the Contact Menu for
surface ships and landbased (Category: Stationary) targets such as
buildings or the floating Oil Rig, and only under these conditions:
Ownship has Special Forces aboard. (Special Forces are only

Ownship is traveling at periscope depth or less and at 3 kts or
less.
Designate Category/ID: Displays a submenu of options that permit you to
change how the selected contact looks on the Nav Map and in 3D view.
This menu option does not display for Ownside tracks when Show Allies is
on or for any track when Show Truth is on. See Main
Menu/Option/Game/Show Truth.
Platform Category: Select the desired option to assign that platform
type to the selected contact: Surface, Submarine, Air, Helo, Unknown,
Stationary, Mine, Weapon (torpedo) or Missile. The contacts symbol
changes shape to that of the designated platform type.
ID: Select the desired option to assign that alliance ID to the contact:
Friendly, Assumed Friendly, Hostile, Assumed Hostile, Neutral or
Unknown. The contacts symbol changes color to that of the
designated ID and the selected option appears in the ID field in the DDI
when the contact is selected. See NTDS Symbols /Colors.
Confidence: Select the desired option to assign the level that best
describes how confident you are in the accuracy of your classification.
(Low, Medium or High.)
Classify Contact: Selecting this option displays the Classification Dialog.
This option does not display for allies or when Show Truth is on. See Main
Menu/Option/Game/Show Truth.
6-18
Once you have a good idea of a contacts class use the Classification
Dialog to assign that classification to the contact and designate a level of
confidence in your assessment.
1. From the class list, select the desired class name. To narrow your
search, use the Sort By: drop-down to eliminate all platform types but
the type for which you want to search: Submarines, Surface Ships,
Aircraft and Helo.
2. Click the desired class name to assign that class name to the contact.
Information and a photo of the selected class appear on the right side
of the dialog box.
3. Click LOW, MED or HIGH to indicate your level of confidence in this

classification. The classification name and your level of confidence
appear in the DDI whenever the contact is selected on the map.
4. Assign an alliance ID to the contact. Click Assumed Friendly, Friendly,

Assumed Hostile, Hostile, Neutral, or Unknown.
5. Click the OK check to accept the classification. Click CANCEL X to

return to the game and negate your changes.
6. When you click OK your classification is applied to the contact and the
contacts symbol appears as that of the specified platform type.
7. When you click a classified contact in the Nav Map, a 3D model of that
platform class appears in the 3D view. The 3D view displays whatever
class you have assigned, whether the classification is correct or not.
Drop Track: Select this option to remove the NTDS symbol of any contact
detected by your OS sensors from the Nav Map and from the TMA contact
list. If you drop a Link track the Link will report it again if it is still able to
report. If the track is assigned to a launcher when the track is dropped, the
launcher returns to its unassigned state. If a track is assigned to a weapon
in a torpedo tube or pylon when the track is dropped, the weapon remains
assigned to a default runout bearing or the bearing of the dropped target
depending on the platform.
Promote to Link: Select this option to provide the Link participants with
your solution assessment and classification of the selected contact. See
Promoting a Contact to the Link below. (If you are commanding a
submarine, this option only appears in the Contact Menu when you are at
comms depth for your submarine and have the radio antenna raised.) This
option only appears for contacts marked by OS sensors and Manual
Solutions. You cannot promote a Link contact or Link participant.
Show/Hide History: Select this option to toggle the display of the contacts
dot trail on the map indicating the movement of this contact as you have
tracked it with your sensors.
Platform Reference: Displays the USNI Reference entry for the selected
contact as classified by you. If you classify the contact as a Kirov, the entry
for Kirov appears, even if the contact is really a cruise ship. If you have not
classified a contact, no information appears.
6-19
9 Note: USNI Reference provides information on military ships, military

aircraft and civilian ships as modeled. No information is available for
civilian aircraft and sailing vessels or buildings.
Remove Range Circle: If a range circle has been added to the contacts
symbol, this option becomes available. Select this option to remove the
range circle.
Promoting a Contact to the Link

One task that can only be accomplished at the Navigation Station is the
sharing of your local contact data with other members of your Link. Local
contacts are contacts detected and marked by Ownships sensors. As
modeled in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters the Link is a network of ships, subs,
aircraft and buildings belonging to Ownside. The entities in the Link share
position reports and sensor contact information via secure transmissions.
What is reported to you by the Link depends on whether you are playing a
single or multiplayer game. In both cases you must report your own local
contacts individually to the Link.
Single Player Mode: In single player S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters games,
the games Artificial Intelligence (AI) controls all Link participants. The Link
automatically reports all contacts they detect to Ownship. (If you are
commanding a sub, you must come to comms depth and raise the radio
mast or extend the floating wire to see the Link data on the Nav Map.)
When Show Link Data is ON (it is on by default) you see members of the
Link at their last reported position as well as the contacts they have
detected. The AI Link has its own numbering system. Link participants, as
well as their reported contacts, are assigned IDs that begin with 0.
Ownship contacts are not automatically reported to the Link. It is possible
that you hold contacts that are unknown to the Link platforms in the area. If
you are controlling an aircraft, you may be tasked to report your contacts to
the Link so that other platforms in the Link can target the contacts. To share
a local contact you must promote it to the Link. (See steps below.) If you
promote the contact as hostile, the AI Link participants will attack it. Link
participants will attempt to ID any platforms you promote as unknown.
Multiplayer Mode: In Multiplayer games, Link participants that are
controlled by other players do not automatically share Link data. (AI
controlled Link platforms continue to send Link data automatically.) Each
player on the same side must promote his individual contacts to the Link.
When you promote a contact to the Link, other players in your Link see a
contact symbol on their Nav Map at the longitude and latitude of the contact
at the time of the promotion. If you have determined a solution for the
contact in the TMA station (Subs and FFG only) that solution is also
uploaded to the Link and the contact will move on the map at the promoted
course and speed.
Subs must be at Comms Depth and have the radio mast extended to
promote a contact. Link data can be downloaded via the floating wire
but cannot be uploaded (promoted) through the wire. (Comms depth
6-20
varies by sub class. Check Appendix C: Submarine Max & Mins for a
listing of comms depth for each controllable class.)
Each controllable platform in a Multiplayer game has its own set of Ownship
contact ID numbers. Up to 298 tracks detected and marked by each
Ownships sensors are assigned Contact IDs based on Ownships ID.
(Platform 1001 assigns track numbers 1002 1299. Platform 1301 assigns
track numbers 1302-1599; Platform 1601 assigns track numbers 1602
1899 etc.)
The AI Link participants and the contacts they report use a separate set of
track numbers which all begin with 0. When you promote a track to the Link,
the track number that appears on the Nav Maps of other player-controlled
Link participants is the same number you see on your Nav Map if you are
commanding a P-3, MH-60R helicopter or a FFG. If you are commanding a
sub, the track numbers you see on the Nav Map for your Ownship contacts
have three digit-alphanumeric assignments. The track is promoted with its
four-digit number that is assigned behind the scenes every time you mark a
contact. These numbers follow the same format as the surface and air
contacts. The numbers are sequential based on your platform ID. All Link
participants see the same four-digit number for your promoted contact. The
promoted contact number appears in parentheses after the time of
promotion in the Promoted field in the DDI when you select that contact.
See Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/ Contact Designations
(Contact/Track IDs)/Contact IDs When Ownship is a Submarine.
Multi-Station Mode: Any member of the crew on a Multi-Station platform
can promote a contact to the Link. All players on the same platform share
the same Platform ID.
9 Note: The Link is modeled for all countries with controllable platforms
in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters. Any controllable platforms in a
multiplayer mission that are assigned the same side during mission
creation are part of that sides Link. If a mission is created that
assigns Chinese, Russian and U.S. controllable platforms to the
same side, all of those platforms are part of the same Link in that
mission.
To Promote a Contact
1. Classify the contact to the best of your knowledge; create a TMA

solution for the contact if possible.
2. If you are commanding a submarine, come to communications depth

(comms depth) maintain a speed of 10 knots or less, then raise the
Radio Mast. (Comms depth varies by submarine. See Appendix C:
Submarine Max & Mins for depth and speed information for safely
raising the Radio Mast in your specific submarine class.)
3. Select the contact you want to share with the Link, then right-click on it
to display the Contact Menu.
4. From the Contact Menu, select Promote To Link. The Promote to

Link option is only available on contacts marked by your own sensors.
6-21
It does not appear for AI or player-promoted Link contacts.

(Submarines can only promote a contact to the Link if they are at
comms depth with the Radio Mast extended. Until those conditions are
met, the menu option is not visible.)
When the contact is successfully promoted to the Link a new field
labeled Promoted: appears in the DDI when the promoted contact is

selected. The time in game at which the contact was promoted (or
updated) appears in this field.
You will have no other indication in a single player game that your
contact has been promoted.

See Multiplayer Mode above for information on promoted track
numbers in a Multiplayer game.

Updating Data for a Promoted Contact
When you promote a contact to the link, you also promote any available
solution data you have for that contact. Solution data is entered from the
TMA Station (subs and FFG only) and is also provided by your lookouts.
The contact symbol for your promoted contact appears at the appropriate
location on Nav Maps (and Geoplots) of your Link Participant players. The
contact moves on the map on the course and speed contained in the
solution you entered for the contact until you update it. If no TMA solution
data is promoted, as with a manual solution, the symbol does not move on
the map.
While your local contact may be constantly updated by your lookout or in
the TMA plot, the solution for the contact you promoted to the Link is not
automatically updated with your new TMA solution on the screens of your
Link participant players. If you have refined your TMA solution or you notice
that your lookout is placing the contact on a new course, select the contact
again then select Promote to Link again. This sends your updated position
data to your Link participants. The time of the update replaces the previous
time in the Promoted field in the DDI.
O W NSH I P M E NU
Right-clicking on the selected Ownship symbol on the Nav Map displays a
set of options specific to Ownship. Ownship and Orders Menu options are
nearly identical and vary by platform type.
The Orders/Ownship Menu options that are unique are covered in each
platforms Stations section in the Task Bar/Orders Menu portion of the
manual. The Ownship Menu has several options that require the use of the
Nav Map and are not available in the Orders Menu. The following Ownship
Menu items are the same from platform to platform.
Navigate: The following menu items appear only in the Ownship Menu, in
all platforms.
Enter Waypoints (Enter Fly-to Waypoints): Select this option and
click the Nav Map to add waypoints to the map. Continue to click to
add new waypoints. Right-click the Nav Map or press [End] to stop
6-22
adding waypoints. A submarine, FFG and P-3C Ownship will continue

along the same course once the last waypoint is reached. The Helo
Ownship speeds up between waypoints then hovers when the last
waypoint is reached (unless you have added alternate speed
instructions to the last waypoint via the Waypoint Properties dialog.)
Remove Waypoints: This menu option only appears when waypoints
have been added to the Nav Map. Select this option to remove all OS
Waypoints from the map.
Hide/Show Waypoints: This menu option only appears when
waypoints have been added to the Nav Map. Select the Hide
Waypoints option to hide all OS Waypoints on the map. When
waypoints are hidden the Show Waypoints option is activated.
Follow Waypoints: This option only appears if waypoints are assigned
and you have ordered Ownship on a course that deviates from the
waypoint path. Selecting this option orders Ownship to once again
follow the waypoints.
Change Course: Select this option then click the Nav Map to change
OS course to the bearing clicked.
Show/Hide History: Select this option to display the track history of
Ownship. Dots appear on the Nav Map indicating OS course since the start
of the mission. Select Hide History to remove the dot track.
Platform Reference: Select this option to display the USNI Browser
Reference for Ownship. Click OK in the USNI Browser to close the browser
and return to the Nav Map.
D IGITAL D ATA I NDICATOR (DDI)

The Digital Data Indicator (DDI) provides information about the contact
selected on the Nav Map. The number of fields in the DDI depends on the
selected contact and whether or not the symbol represents a solution or
Truth. Truth shows the actual position of the contact on the Nav Map and
the true class of the contact is displayed in the DDI. Truth is considered a
cheat. When Show Allies is on, all members of Ownside and its allies
appear in their actual locations as Truth objects. See Main
Menu/Options/Game/Show Truth and Show Allies for more information.
When you, your TMA Autocrew or the Link participants enter or report a
solution for a contact, the solution fields of the DDI contain data when that
contacts symbol is selected. The solution section contains the current firing
solution that is used by Ownships weapons system when targeting the
selected contact. When a submarine or the FFG is Ownship, the firing
solution is set when you enter a solution from the TMA station. (See
Training/TMA Basics or TMA Station for the desired platform. The Link
participant that reports the contact also provides solution data.
Bear in mind that the information in the DDI is only as accurate as the
classification and TMA solution you or your Autocrew have entered for
Ownship detected contacts. It represents your current best guess about
6-23
the selected contact. Link reported contacts have a high degree of

accuracy. (The P-3 and the MH-60R have no TMA station.) Solutions
provided by the AI Link are fairly accurate.
When a solution contact is selected on the 2D Nav Map the following
information is available:
Contact: Displays the Contact ID (Track ID) number: S01, R01, E01, V01
etc. (subs) or a four-digit number for contacts reported by the FFG, Link,
and aircraft.
ID: Displays presumed alliance: Friendly, Hostile, or Neutral as designated
by you or the Link or your Autocrew.
Category: Displays the reported or assigned platform category: Surface,
Submarine, Air, Stationary (land contacts) etc.
Class: Displays the specific ship or aircraft class as designated by you,
your Autocrew or the Link reporter.
Confidence: Displays the current level of confidence in the classification as
designated by you, your Autocrew or the Link reporter.
SOLUTION: The information in the three rows of the solution section
represents the last solution entered in TMA station by you or your TMA
Auto Crewman or the reporting Link Participant. These fields are blank until
a solution has been entered in TMA.
Bearing: Displays the bearing to the contact as designated in the TMA
solution or reported by the Link.
Range: Displays the current estimate of the range to the contact.
Course: Displays the estimated course of the contact.
Speed: Displays the estimated speed of the contact.
Bearing Error: The average of the bearing error that is displayed in
the TMA dot stack.
Bearing Rate: Represents the change in contact bearing over time. A high
bearing rate could indicate that the contact is close. The contact could also
be farther away but moving very rapidly. An L or R (for left and right)
precedes the bearing rate number. If looking down the line of bearing, an L
means that the contact is moving to the left, R means that it is moving to the
right.
Promoted: This field only appears when the selected contact has been
promoted the to the Link. The time of promotion displays in this field. The
Promote to Link option in the Contact Menu is a means of sharing your
contacts with all other Ownside platforms in the area. It is especially useful
during multiplayer missions. When you promote a contact when a
submarine is Ownship, the three-character alphanumeric contact ID is not
viewed by other players. Instead a 4-digit Contact ID is assigned to the
contact based on your hull number and this number appears in parentheses
after the time of promotion. Other players see the 4-digit number beside the
promoted contacts symbol. If you update a contact by selecting it and
promoting it again, the time of the update is seen here.
6-24
Age: Displays the amount of time that has passed since the last report from
the Source sensor.
Source(s): Displays sensor input for this contact. When the source is a Link
participant, the track ID of the detecting platform appears in parenthesis.
9 Note: When Show Truth is on, the DDI displays the selected
contacts actual name, class, course, speed, altitude/depth and
percentage damage.
3D V IEW
The 3D View contains a 3D representation of the contact currently hooked
(selected) on the 2D Nav Map. What appears in the 3D View depends on
how far along you are in the contact classification process.
W I R E F R AM E S
Contacts detected by some of Ownship sensors display on the 3D View as
wire frames of varying shapes when the contact symbol is selected in the
Nav Map.
Sphere: Until a contact is assigned a category or class it appears as a wireframe ball an Area of Uncertainty (AOU) in the 3D view. This indicates
only that something has been detected in this area.
Generic Sub, Ship, or Aircraft: When you designate a category for the
selected contact using the Contact Menus Designate Category/ID
>Category or Classify Contact option, a generic model of the selected
platform type is seen in the 3D View.
Box Corners: When you assign an alliance ID to a contact using the
Contact Menus Designate Category/ID >ID or Classify Contact option, box
corners of the color representing the assigned alliance surround the model.
3D M O DE L S
Until a specific classification has been assigned to a contact, no specific 3D
model can be displayed. As soon as a contact is classified as a specific
class of ship or aircraft, the 3D View displays the 3D model in use for the
specified class. Contacts reported by the AI Link participants usually include
a classification; therefore these contacts usually display a 3D model of a
specific class when a Link contact is selected. Ownship and Link
participants never appear as wire frames.
For solutions created in the FFG or submarine TMA station, the location of
the Nav Map symbol and the 3D object coincides with the location of your
TMA solution. That location is only as accurate as your TMA assessment.
Be aware that if your classification (or the classification provided by your
Autocrew) is incorrect, the model shown will be of the incorrect assignment.
If the Link participant classifies a contact as one category or class and you
classify it as another, both 3D models will be present in the 3D view for that
6-25
contact. If you agree fairly precisely on the location of a contact the 3D

models may overlap.
When Show Truth is off, what appears in the 2D Nav Map and 3D view
represent solutions. Solutions are your best guess as to the identity and
location, course and speed of a contact. When Show Link is ON Link
participants also provide solution data. The Ownship FFG Lookout and the
Aircraft spotters provide solution data on contacts they detect visually.
Models for solutions have no wakes in 3D view.
3D View is on by default in the small retractable window in the upper right of
the Nav Station. Purists may wish to turn off 3D in the Nav Screen. See
Navigation Station/3D View/Disabling and Hiding 3D.
Note: 3D weapon models appear only on Ownships 3D model.
C O NF I DE NC E I N D I C AT OR
Above the 3D model is a Confidence Indicator denoting the level of
confidence placed in the assigned classification and/or solution information.
The color of the chevrons and associated text indicate the level of
confidence you have in your classification or categorization of the contact.
For contacts you classify yourself the default confidence level is LOW.
Frequently the Link participants report a high level of confidence in their
assessment.
BTo change the Confidence Indicator, select the contact then rightclick to display the Contact Menu. Select Designate
Category/ID>Confidence or select Classify Contact and select
the desired level of confidence (Low, Medium or High)
9 Note: When Show Truth is on, the Confidence Indicators are not
shown. Ownship never displays a confidence Indicator.
3D V I E W C ON TR OL S
The position of the 3D View and the 2D Map can be switched to provide a
larger 3D view.
BPress [Ctrl] + [M] to swap the position of the 2D Map and the 3D
view.
Or click the swap window button next to the up arrow in the upper right
corner of the Navigation Station.
Use these keys adjust the 3D view.
BClick the 3D model and drag the mouse to rotate the angle of your
view.
BPress [Ctrl] and click and drag or use the mouse wheel to zoom in
and out.
6-26
BPress [Ctrl] + [+]: to zoom in on the selected object or last camera

position if nothing is selected in the 2D Map
BPress [Ctrl] + [-]: to zoom out on the selected object or last camera
position if nothing is selected in the 2D Map.
BPress [Ctrl] + the arrow keys to rotate the camera around and
above and below the selected model.
DISABLING
AND
H I D I N G 3D
Some game purists may prefer to disable the Nav Map 3D View completely.
This is done prior to game start on the Options>3D page. You can also hide
3D from within the game without disabling it completely. A 3D view is
always visible from the Pilot Station in the aircraft, the FFG Bridge and
Machine Gun View, and from the Sail Bridge and the Periscope Stations in
the submarines.
BPress [Ctrl]+ [A] to hide the small window. Since 2D and 3D can be
swapped, whichever view is in the small window is hidden.
BOr click the up arrow in upper right of the Navigation Station to
hide the small window. The arrow changes to a down arrow. Click
the small down arrow to display the small window again.
P LAYING F ROM
THE
N AV
With all of your Autocrew activated and Show Link Data selected it is
possible to play many aspects of the game from the Navigation Station.
Using a combination of voice and menu commands you can navigate, track,
classify and attack enemy ships, launch Special Forces (subs only), and
read your message traffic. You must still visit the other stations to perform
some tasks.
A TT AC KI N G T AR GE TS
FR O M
N AV
When a hostile, neutral, or unknown surface, submarine or air contact

symbol is present on the Nav Map, it can be attacked using the Contact
Menu. When a submarine is Ownship, surface and submarine contacts can
also be attacked using the Fire Tube command in the Orders and Ownship
Menus. All of these menus are only available when certain parameters are
met.
Contacts designated as belonging to Ownside or contacts from sides
designated as Allied when the mission is created have no Engage

With menu. Ownside contacts are blue; symbols for Allied contacts are
orange in color.
The Engage With menu does not appear for symbols that have no
category (sub, surface, air, stationary) assigned. The system must

know what category (type) of platform is selected to determine the
appropriate weapons to display. (The game does not allow you to fire a
torpedo at an aircraft.)
6-27
Using the Contact Menu:

1. Click on the symbol of a hostile, neutral or unknown sub, surface or air
contact to select it then right-click on the symbol to display the Contact
Menu.
2. Select Engage With. A submenu of weapons appropriate for the target

is displayed.
If you have no weapon appropriate for the target, the Engage With
option is unavailable.
If the parameters for firing a weapon have not been met, the menu
option is greyed. See information on specific weapon parameters

in the Stations section for the desired platform in the Fire Control
Suite (subs), FFG Weapons Control or FFG Torpedo Control
Stations, P-3C TACCO Station or MH-60R ATO Station.
3. Select the desired weapon to fire it at the selected target.

If the Fire Control Autocrew is ON, presets are entered for the
weapon based on the firing solution information and the platform

classification.
If the Fire Control Autocrew is OFF, weapons fired from the Nav
Station use the default weapon settings.
Using the Orders or Ownship Menu

When a submarine is Ownship an additional method of attacking a preselected contact with a torpedo is available in the Orders or Ownship Menu.
Fire Tube: If you have assigned a target to a torpedo tube in the Fire
Control Launch Panel (subs) or the FFG Torpedo Control Station, this menu
option is available on the Orders and Ownship Menus. If no target is
assigned to a tube, this option is unavailable.
BSelect the desired tube to fire the weapon at the target assigned to
that tube in the Fire Control Stations Target Display.
9 Note: UUV sensors do not require a target so they can be launched
at any time if they are loaded in a tube. Be aware that OS speed
must be 4 knots or less for a successful launch of a UUV sensor.
The UUV has a max speed of 5 knots. If the ship collides with the
UUV the UUV is destroyed.
O W NSH I P W A Y P O I NT S
Sometimes it is nice to ensure that your platform steers the desired course
without your constant attention. Placing waypoints on the map automatically
activates the Auto helmsman or Autopilot. In the subs and the FFG this is
not a crewman that you turn on and off, he is automatically on as soon as
waypoints are entered. The Auto Pilot in the P-3C and MH-60R is a
selectable option and performs as described in the P-3C Stations/Pilot
6-28
Station and MH-60R Stations/Pilot Station. (The Auto Pilot is always on if

you are not on the Pilot Station.)
9 Note: The Auto Helmsman or Auto Pilot follow the waypoints as
soon as they are placed on the Nav map and follow them until you
order a course change by some other means. To resume following
the waypoints select the Ownship Symbol on the Nav Map or the
Orders Menu and select Navigate>Follow Waypoints.
FFG and Subs: Place waypoints through a tricky strait, around islands or
set them to take you toward a specific destination.
P-3C/MH-60R: Waypoints are useful for creating a search pattern. If
traveling over land, the autopilot automatically adjusts the altitude as
needed, always returning to the original ordered altitude when possible.
When the last waypoint is reached the P-3C continues on the same course.
The MH-60R speeds up between waypoints then hovers over the location
of the last waypoint (unless you have added alternate speed instructions to
the last waypoint via the Waypoint Properties dialog.) When you are
extremely busy you might want to set the aircraft to follow a waypoint loop.
See To Add a Waypoint Loop below.
To Place a Waypoint on the Nav Map

1. Press [Insert] or select Add Waypoint from the Ownship Menu.
2. Click the map to place a waypoint.
3. Continue to click the map until the desired waypoints have been
placed.
4. Right-click the map or press [END] to stop the process.
To Add a Single Waypoint

BPress [Ctrl] + [Insert] then click the map to inset a single waypoint
is added after Ownship.
BPress [Alt] + [Insert] to add a single waypoint after the last
waypoint
BPress [Shift] + [Insert] to add a waypoint after a selected waypoint.
If no waypoint is selected, the waypoint is added after the last
waypoint.
To Add a Waypoint Loop

1. Layout the waypoints as usual using [Insert] or [Ctrl] + [Insert] or an
Ownship Menu command. Right-click or press [End] to place the last
waypoint.
2. To create a loop from the last waypoint to another existing waypoint,

select the last waypoint then press [Alt] + [Insert] and continue to hold
down [Alt] as you click on or near the waypoint you would like Ownship
to loop back to once it reaches the last normally placed waypoint
6-29
The line to this point disappears so there is no indication that the
waypoint path will loop.

The loop point does not have to be the first waypoint. You can lay
out a set of points to transit to an area you want to loop around.

When you reach the first waypoint in the loop, it will be cycled
around to the end of the waypoint path instead of being deleted.

The display will update properly to reflect the new ending segment.
Loop waypoints can be deleted or moved as normal waypoints.
You can insert a single waypoint in between looped waypoints but

they will not be added to the cycled loop. Ownship will detour off to
the inserted point but the new waypoint will be deleted when it is
reached. To add new loop points, you must create a new loop.
Some Restrictions
Waypoints cannot be added or moved over land or water too shallow
for a submarine if OS is a sub.

Waypoints cannot be added or moved in such a way as the direct path
to the previous or next waypoint crosses land or water too shallow for a
ship or submarine.
Applying Waypoint Properties

You can fine tune the precise location of a waypoint and set a specific
speed, and/or depth or altitude change for Ownship (depending on the
platform) from the Waypoint properties dialog.
1. Double-click on a waypoint to open the Waypoint Properties dialog.

2. Click or right-click on the digits to set the precise latitude and/or
longitude coordinates for the selected waypoint.
3. Select the desired compass heading from the drop-down list.

4. Speed/Depth/Altitude: Click/right-click the digits to enter the desired
change for Ownship to implement upon reaching the waypoint.
V O IC E C OM M A N DS
There are a variety of voice commands available during gameplay if you
installed the speech recognition software when you installed S.C.S. Dangerous Waters. Voice commands behave similarly to their available
keyboard or menu option counterparts and can only be used where the
keyboard or orders command is appropriate (e.g., they are ignored when
dialogs are visible). Voice commands are only recognized during gameplay.
You can train your speech engine by visiting the speech control panel
accessed via the Speech icon in the Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows
ME, or Windows XP control panel. You can also improve the accuracy of
the speech engine by adjusting the accuracy vs. performance slider in the
speech control panel.
6-30
9 Notes: The speech recognition software is not compatible with

Windows 95. If you attempt to install the game on a Windows 95
platform, the option to install the speech recognition software is not
seen.
9 The document Voice Commands.doc contains a list of voice
commands recognized by the game and resides on the CD in the
Manual folder. The Microsoft's Speech Recognition Engine 5.1
resides on S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters CD1 in the MSSpeech folder
if you choose to install it manually.
Using Voice Commands

1. Select Options>Sound.
2. Under the Speech heading select Enabled and, if desired, Always On.
Always On is only available when Enabled is checked.
9 Note: Both options are greyed if you do not have a speech engine
installed.
When ENABLED ONLY is selected on the Options>Sound page:
BPress and hold the speech key while issuing a valid voice
commands. By default the speech key is [W].
When the designated speech key is pressed during gameplay, voice
recognition is listening and the speech engine interprets anything you

say. When this key is released, voice recognition is not listening and it
ignores anything you say.
When ALWAYS ON is selected on the Options>Sound page:
BIssue a valid voice command as desired at any point during
gameplay.
When the Always On option is checked, the designated speech key is
ignored and the speech engine is always listening to what you say.
6-31
6-32

6(&7,21
))*67$7,216
Section: 7 FFG Stations
7-1
7: FFG STATIONS.......................................................................................7-5
FFG TASK BAR ...................................................................................7-5
STATIONS MENU ............................................................. 7-5
ORDERS MENU ............................................................... 7-6
DAMAGE REPORT W INDOW .............................................. 7-8
HISTORY W INDOW ........................................................... 7-9
MANEUVER SHORTCUTS AND GAME READOUTS .................. 7-9
TIME COMPRESSION SCALE .............................................. 7-9
FFG BRIDGE [F1] ............................................................................ 7-10
SHIP HANDLING ............................................................. 7-10
FLIGHT CONDITIONS ...................................................... 7-11
TOW /COUNTERMEASURES.............................................. 7-13
BRIDGE W INGS/BINOCULARS .......................................... 7-14
FFG ACOUSTIC STATION [F2]........................................................... 7-15
FFG SONOBUOY DATA DISPLAY W INDOWS ..................... 7-16
Sonobuoy Modes .................................................. 7-17
FFG ASTAC STATION [F3].............................................................. 7-18
GEOPLOT ..................................................................... 7-18
ASTAC VAB PANEL ..................................................... 7-19
Digital Display Indicator (DDI) Area ...................... 7-19
Helo Control.......................................................... 7-20
Link Mode ............................................................. 7-21
Helo Fly To Commands ........................................ 7-21
LINK STATUS....................................................... 7-22
Launching a Helicopter ......................................... 7-24
Recovering a Helicopter........................................ 7-25
OTS BUOY ........................................................... 7-25
Activating and Scuttling Buoys.............................. 7-26
Display Settings .................................................... 7-27
FFG HULL SONAR STATION [F4]........................................................ 7-27
HULL SONAR DISPLAY W INDOW ...................................... 7-28
Active Mode: Single Beam/Omni Modes............... 7-28
Active Mode: High Frequency............................... 7-28
Passive Mode Display........................................... 7-29
HULL SONAR DDI.......................................................... 7-29
HULL SONAR MAIN VAB PANEL (ACTIVE MODE) .............. 7-30
SONAR MODE SELECTION VAB PANEL............................ 7-31
Sonar Mode Selection VABs: Active Options........ 7-32
Sonar Mode Selection VABs: Passive Options..... 7-33
PASSIVE MODE MAIN VAB PANEL................................... 7-33
FFG NAVIGATION STATION [F5] ....................................................... 7-33
FFG OWNSHIP/ORDERS MENUS ..................................... 7-33
FFG CONTACT MENU .................................................... 7-34
FFG TOWED ARRAY STATION [F6] .................................................... 7-35
TOWED ARRAY STATION NAVIGATION BUTTONS ............... 7-36
FFG TOWED ARRAY: BROADBAND ................................. 7-36
FFG-7 Broadband Tag Summary ......................... 7-38
7-2
Whiz-Wheel .......................................................... 7-38

FFG Broadband Waterfall Displays ...................... 7-39
Marking Contacts in Towed Array: Broadband ..... 7-39
Assigning an Automatic Tag Follower (ATF)......... 7-40
Towed Array Broadband DDI................................ 7-40
Towed Array Broadband VAB PANEL .................. 7-40
Determining a Contacts Speed using DEMON: ... 7-41
LOFAR SEARCH SUMMARY ........................................... 7-42
LOFAR Search DDI .............................................. 7-43
LOFAR Search VAB Panel ................................... 7-43
SINGLE BEAM ALL BAND DISPLAY ................................... 7-44
Frequency Profile Library...................................... 7-45
Single Beam Mode DDI ........................................ 7-46
Single Beam VAB Panel ....................................... 7-46
FFG ELECTRONIC WARFARE (EW)[F7] ............................................. 7-47
EW SCOPE .................................................................. 7-47
TO Mark a Contact in EW ..................................... 7-47
To Apply a Class Name to a Contact in EW ......... 7-48
To Classify a Contact............................................ 7-48
Aircraft Class Designations................................... 7-48
EW DDI ...................................................................... 7-49
EW VAB PANEL ........................................................... 7-49
FFG WEAPONS COORDINATOR STATION [F8] ................................... 7-49
WEAPONS COORDINATOR GEOPLOT DISPLAY.................. 7-50
RADAR OPERATION ....................................................... 7-51
REMRO ................................................................ 7-51
PLACING CONTACTS IN THE TARGET QUEUE .................... 7-52
WEAPONS COORDINATOR DDI ....................................... 7-52
WEAPONS COORDINATOR VAB PANEL ............................ 7-53
TARGET QUEUE Controls ................................... 7-53
Geoplot Controls................................................... 7-54
Radar Controls...................................................... 7-54
CLASSIFY ............................................................ 7-54
FFG TMA STATION [F9] .................................................................. 7-55
THE TMA PLOT ............................................................ 7-56
TMA Speed Rulers ............................................... 7-57
Cursor Position and Solution Readout .................. 7-58
Ownship Course and Speed Indicator Light.......... 7-59
Lines of Bearing.................................................... 7-59
Tearing Edge ........................................................ 7-60
TMA ON FFG CONTACTS WITH A REPORTED RANGE ....... 7-61
TMA ON FFG PASSIVE SONAR AND EW CONTACTS ......... 7-62
TRACK UPDATE REPORT ................................................ 7-64
TRACK MERGE REPORT ................................................. 7-64
To Merge a Track ................................................. 7-65
TRACK SPLIT REPORT.................................................... 7-65
To Split Merged Tracks......................................... 7-65
TRACK DROP REPORT ................................................... 7-65
To Drop a Track.................................................... 7-65
7-3
RANGE SCALE............................................................... 7-66

FFG WEAPONS CONTROL STATION [F10] ......................................... 7-66
WEAPONS CONTROL GEOPLOT ....................................... 7-66
WEAPONS CONTROL DDI............................................... 7-67
MISSILE CONTROL PANEL .............................................. 7-67
To Launch an SM-2 Missile: ................................. 7-69
To Launch A Harpoon Missile:.............................. 7-70
GUN CONTROL PANEL ................................................... 7-71
Engaging a Target With the Mk 75 Gun................ 7-71
HARPOON PLAN PANEL .................................................. 7-72
To Create a Harpoon Plan: ................................... 7-73
Harpoon Minimum and Max Range ...................... 7-75
CIWS PANEL ............................................................... 7-76
To Manually Engage Contacts with the CIWS: ..... 7-76
Placing CIWS in Auto and Full Auto Mode............ 7-77
Reloading the CIWS ............................................. 7-77
FFG TORPEDO CONTROL STATION [F11]........................................... 7-77
TORPEDO CONTROL DISPLAY ......................................... 7-78
TORPEDO CONTROL PANEL ............................................ 7-79
FIRING A TORPEDO ........................................................ 7-81
Targets with Solutions........................................... 7-81
Manual Mode and Tracks with LOBs .................... 7-81
Loading an Empty Tube:....................................... 7-82
FFG MACHINE GUN STATION [F12] ................................................. 7-82
MACHINE GUN VIEW ...................................................... 7-83
Firing the Machine Gun......................................... 7-83
FREE LOOK VIEW .......................................................... 7-84
BINOCULARS ................................................................. 7-84
FFG AUTOCREW ............................................................................. 7-84
FFG COUNTERMEASURES AUTOCREW ............................ 7-84
FFG ACOUSTIC AUTOCREW ........................................... 7-85
FFG EW AUTOCREW .................................................... 7-85
FFG LOOKOUT ............................................................. 7-85
FFG TMA AUTOCREW .................................................. 7-85
FFG TORPEDO CONTROL AUTOCREW ............................. 7-86
FFG TOWED ARRAY AUTOCREW .................................... 7-86
7-4
7: FFG STATIONS
The Oliver Hazard Perry (FFG 7) class surface ship is modeled in S.C.S.
Dangerous Waters. Referred to simply as the FFG in this manual, its
stations are described and explained in this section.
9 Note: The default view when entering a mission is the Navigation
Station. The Navigation Station with its 2D Nav Map and 3D view
functions the same on every controllable platform and is covered
only once in the manual. See Navigation Station. Some Nav Station
information unique to the FFG is contained in the abbreviated FFG
Navigation Station section later in this section.
FFG T ASK B AR
The task bar is similar for all platforms but there are a few features unique
to the FFG. The FFG Task Bar menus, windows, readouts and maneuver
shortcuts are described here.
Stations Menu
Expand/Contract History Window
Wind Speed/Direction
History Selection Buttons
Damage Report
Orders Menu
Course Shortcut
Depth Below Keel
History Display Window
Speed Shortcut
Game Time/Pause Indicator

Time Acceleration
S T AT I O NS M E NU
Click the Stations Menu button to expand the Station selection menu.
Select an icon to jump to that station.
Bridge [F1]
ASTAC [F3]
Nav [F5]
Electronic Warfare [F7]
TMA [F9]
Torpedo Control [F11]
Acoustic [F2]
Active [F4]
Towed Array [F6]
Weapons Coordinator [F8]
Weapons Control [F10]
Machine Gun [F12]
7-5
O R D E R S M E NU
The Orders Menu and the Ownship Menu contain the same options. To
reveal the Ownship Menu click on the Ownship NTDS symbol on the Nav
Map, the right-click on the selected symbol. These menu options are
described below:
Navigate: Displays a submenu of navigation options.
Order Rudder: Displays a submenu of rudder commands. In addition
to the numbered commands the following selections set these rudder
positions.
Standard (Left /Right): Orders 15 Degrees
Full (Left/Right): Orders 20 degrees
Hard (Left/Right): Orders rudder to max (right or left) position.
Change Speed: Displays a submenu of engine order options.
Selecting an option sets a preordained number of engine revolutions.
The resultant ship speed will depend on seastate, wind and current.
In a calm sea with wind and currents turned off, these settings result in
the following speeds:
Engines Ahead Flank: 29 knots
Engines Ahead Full: 20 knots
Engines Ahead Standard: 15 knots
Engines Ahead 2/3: 10 knots
Engines Ahead 1/3: 5 knots
Engines All Stop: zero knots
Engines Back1/3: 3 knots
Engines Back 2/3: Reverse speed of 5 knots
Engines Back Full: Reverse speed of 10 knots
9 Note: Backing up when the Towed Array is deployed cuts the array.
Autocrew: Displays a submenu of all FFG Autocrew. A checkmark
indicates the option is ON. Select the object to toggle its state.
Auto-Countermeasures: When ON chaff and flare countermeasures
are launched when appropriate. This slider button for this for this
Autocrew is located in the Bridge Station.
Acoustic/Sonobuoys: When ON, the Autocrew sets sonobuoys to
directional mode and marks contacts in the FFGs Acoustic Station.
EW: When ON, the Autocrew marks contacts in the Electronic Warfare
Station. Autocrew does not classify EW contacts. You must do that
yourself.
7-6
Towed Array: When ON, the Autocrew marks broadband contacts in

the Broadband Towed Array Station.
TMA: When ON, this Autocrew merges contacts and creates firing
solutions for contacts in the Track list in the TMA station. You are
prevented from dragging the ruler when TMA Autocrew is ON
Torpedo Control: When ON Torpedo Autocrew enters presets
appropriate for the selected target.
9 Note: The FFG follows waypoints when they are added to the Nav
Map. Waypoints act as an Auto-helmsman even though there is no
separate Autocrew for this function. When waypoints are added the
FFG follows the waypoints until you order a different course. The
waypoints remain and selecting Follow Waypoints from the Ownship
or Orders Menu will once again return the ship to the designated
waypoint course.
Sensors: Selecting this option displays a submenu of the FFG s sensors.
Towed Array: Select this option to display the Towed Array Options:
Stream: Select this option to stream the Towed Array.
Retrieve: Select this option to retrieve the Towed Array.
Stop: Select this option to stop streaming or retrieving the towed
array at its current length.
Surface Radar: Select this option to toggle the state of the Surface
Search Radar. A check mark indicates the radar is ON.
Air Radar: Select this option to toggle the state of the Air Search
Radar. A checkmark indicates the radar is ON.
Secure All: Select this option to turn off all radars and retrieve the
towed array.
Flight Deck: Selection of this option displays a submenu of Flight Deck
options. A checkmark indicates the option is selected.
Green Deck: When selected, Ownships helicopter can be launched or
retrieved.
Red Deck: When selected, Ownships helicopters can neither land nor
launch.
Countermeasures: Selection displays a submenu of countermeasure
options. The number in parentheses indicates the remaining number of
countermeasures of that type. Chaff and Infrared flares are used to confuse
incoming missiles.
Port or Starboard Chaff: Select an available option to launch chaff.
Items are greyed if all tubes on the indicated side are empty. Reload
tubes at the Bridge Countermeasure panel. You must reload chaff
before the option is reactivated.
Port or starboard Flares: Select an available option to launch a flare.
Items are greyed if all tubes on the indicated side are empty. Reload
7-7
tubes at the Bridge Countermeasure panel. You must reload flares

before the option is reactivated.
Nixie Torpedo Decoy: Selecting this option displays controls for
deploying the towed torpedo decoy.
Stream: Select to start streaming the cable.
Retrieve: Select to retrieve the cable.
Stop: Select to stop streaming or deploying the Nixie cable. It is
best to keep the decoy as far from Ownship as possible.
OTS Sonobuoys: Displays a submenu of available sonobuoys. The
number of remaining buoys of each type follows the buoy name. Select a
buoy name to deploy a buoy of that type and depth. Only one type of Buoy
is available at a time. Switch to a different type of buoy at the ASTAC/OTS
Buoy Panel. If no buoy is loaded in the OTS Buoy Panel, all options are
grey.
[Buoy name] Shallow = 90 feet
[Buoy name] Deep = 400 feet
CIWS: Selection of this option displays menu controls for the Phalanx Close
In Weapons System (CIWS). A checkmark indicates that option is currently
selected. From this menu you can place the CIWS in Auto, Full Auto or
Hold Fire. You must be at the Weapons Control CIWS Panel to acquire and
engage a contact manually.
Hold Fire: Select to stop the CIWS when firing or to prevent the CIWS
from firing.
Auto: Select to set the CIWS in Auto mode. In AUTO mode the CIWS
automatically engages incoming tracks with speed in excess of 200
knots.
Full Auto: Select to set CIWS to Full Auto Mode. In full Auto mode the
CIWS automatically engages any track within range of the CIWS
Radar. (This includes friendly platforms.)
D A M A GE R E P OR T W I N D OW
The Damage Report Window lists damage that occurs at any station. Some
damage is repaired over time. When damage is repaired a message
appears here. An audible voice message may also be heard. Each entry
lists the time in the mission when the damage occurred, the type of damage
and an estimate of time until the damage is repaired or an indication that
the damage cannot be repaired. If damage is severe it cannot be repaired
during the course of a mission.
BClick the wrench button in the Task Bar to open/close the window.
7-8
H I S T OR Y W I ND O W
Displays the type of history selected by buttons to the left of the window.
History Selection Buttons: A lit button indicates the currently selected
History type. If there is a new message in any other history type, that types
selection button flashes until that button is selected.
Crew Report History: Lists all orders as acknowledged by crewmembers.
Radio Traffic History: Lists all radio messages received. The original
mission tasking is also seen here.
Multiplayer Chat History: Displays a history of multiplayer chat messages.
M A N E U V ER
SH OR TC U T S A N D
G A M E R E AD OU TS
WIND: Readout of Wind Speed and Direction. Values other than zero
appear here only when the mission designer has created a Wind
Region in the current mission and Enable Wind is selected in
Options>Game prior to the start of the mission.
KEEL: Readout of depth below the keel.
SPEED: In knots. Maneuver Shortcut--Click or right-click digits to
change speed to the value entered.
COURSE: In degrees. Maneuver Shortcut--Click or right-click digits to
change course to the value entered.
9 Note: Be aware that wind and currents affect Ownship course and
speed. It may not be possible to achieve the ordered course or
speed if the wind and currents are strong. Wind and currents can be
turned off/on in the Options>Game page prior to mission start.
TIME: Displays the time of day in the mission based on a 24-hour
clock. When the game is paused, the time display is replaced by the
word PAUSED.
BPress [P] to pause the game. Press [P] again to resume the game.
BClick the numbers in the Time display to pause the game. Click
PAUSED in the time display to restart the game.
T I M E C OM PR ES SI O N S C AL E
In addition to real time, S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters supports four levels of
time compression. The time scale displays in the far right of the Task Bar. A
stack of colored bars represents the level of time compression.
At real time, a single green bar is displayed.
At twice real time a lime (yellow/green) bar appears above the green
bar.
At four times real time a yellow bar is added to the stack.
At eight times real time an orange bar is added.
7-9
At up to sixteen times real time (depending on system capability) a red
bar appears at the top of the stack.

BPress [.] or [,] or click/right-click on the scale to toggle through all
the time scales
9 NOTE: Time compression is not available in Multiplayer missions.
FFG B RIDGE [F1]

The Bridge consists of five areas: Ship Handling, Flight Conditions,
TOW/Countermeasures, and the Port and Starboard Bridge Wings where
binoculars are located. The default view on entering the Bridge is the Ship
Handling console. Some ship handling capability is retained regardless of
which portion of the Bridge is accessed.
BClick the transition button at the edge of the console to move to
the indicated console or wing section of the Bridge.
S H I P H A N DL I NG
The ships course and speed are controlled from this portion of the bridge
console.
To Flight Controls
Auxiliary Power Unit Direction Dials
Course Indicator
Rudder Indicator
APU Controls
Ordered Course
Throttle Controls
Ordered Speed
To TOW/Countermeasures
Bridge: Ship Handling

Course Indicator: In the Course Indicator the orange needle indicates the
current course. The black needle indicates the ordered course.
BTo order a new course heading, click the desired bearing on the
Course Indicator dial.
Digital Ordered Course Readout: The digital ordered course readout
displays the course currently ordered in the Task Bar or the Course
Indicator.
BTo order a new course in the Digital Ordered Course Readout,
click on a digit to increment the number; right-click to decrement it.
7-10
Port and Starboard APUs: The Auxiliary Power Units (APUs) are small
electric propellers used for fine steering control when making a pier landing
or getting underway. Each unit can be individually raised, lowered, and
energized by the mechanical rotary switches and the propellers can be
oriented in any azimuth by means of the direction dials. An APU is lowered
as needed and the directional dial is used to aim the propeller in the desired
direction. The arrow on the directional dial points in the direction of thrust.
To use APUs:
1. Reduce ships speed to 5 knots or less before lowering the APU.

2. Click the desired text to move the rotary switch to that position.
3. Click the Direction Dial to indicate the desired direction of thrust for that
unit.
4. Energize the desired unit. (The motor cannot be turned on until the
motor is lowered.) Raising the motor turns it off.
5. Click the Direction Dial as needed to fine-tune the ships movement.

6. Make sure to raise the unit before increasing speed beyond 5 knots.
Rudder Indicator: When a course change is initiated by means of the task
bar or the course dial, the rudder indicator moves accordingly. If preferred,
the rudder indicator can be used directly to change course.
BClick the desired number in the Rudder Indicator to order a Rudder
change. The black needle indicates the ordered rudder position
and orange the actual position.
BClick 0 in the Rudder indicator or click in the Course Indicator to
reset the rudder.
Throttle: The throttle control levers control engine rpm and propeller pitch.
Adjusting the RPMs affects Ownship speed. Setting a negative pitch slows
Ownship and eventually causes OS to back up.
BClick and drag on a lever to move both sides of the throttle in
unison.
BRight-click on a throttle lever to move it independently.
F L I GH T C O N DI TI O N S
The Flight Conditions portion of the Bridge Console is accessed by clicking
the transition button at the left edge of the Ship Handling console or on the
right side of the console when on the Port Bridge Wing. The Course
Indicator, Port APU and Rudder Indicator remain visible when viewing the
Flight Controls.
7-11
To Port Bridge Wing
To Ship Handling
Relative Wind Direction Indicator
Flight Deck Status
Bridge: Flight Conditions

WIND ENVELOPE: The Wind Envelope display is used to determine when
wind conditions are acceptable for helicopter landing and takeoff
operations. Each line, or ring, in the wind envelope represent 5 knots of
wind. The red needle indicates the relative wind direction. When the needle
is outside the envelope, helicopter operations (helo ops) cannot be
conducted safely. The slightly smaller shaded area shows the envelope for
night ops. There are no conditions under which flight ops can be conducted
safely when relative wind speed is in excess of 45 knots.
Below the Wind Envelope is a digital readout of the relative wind direction
and speed.
BIf the red needle is outside the wind envelope, turn the ship until
the needle position indicates a safe condition for helo operations.
PITCH AND ROLL: The ship pitches and rolls depending on the sea state.
When the pitch exceeds 5 degrees and/or roll exceeds 10 degrees, flight
operations cannot be conducted safely. View the pitch and roll bubble
indicators to help determine if it is safe to set Green Deck.
9 Note: Wind Envelope and Pitch and Roll are only activated when
Enable Wind and Enable Currents are selected in the Options>Game
screen. These options are not available once the mission has
started. They must be set prior to loading the mission.
GREEN DECK / RED DECK (Flight Deck Status): A flight deck status of
Red Deck indicates unsafe flight conditions or that all preparations for
helicopter operations (helo ops) have not yet been met. Set Green Deck
when all conditions indicate helo ops can be conducted safely.
BClick GREEN DECK to permit the helicopter to launch or land.
BBe sure to check the weapons control station to ensure that CIWS
is not in Full Auto mode. The CIWS will take out the helo as soon
as it launches if CIWS is in Full Auto mode
7-12
Tip: The helicopter LAUNCH command is not available until Green Deck is
set. Likewise the helo will not land until Green Deck is set.
T O W /C OU N TE R M E A S U R E S
The Tow and Countermeasures Console consists of the Tow Panel and the
Countermeasure Panel. Access to the Starboard Bridge Wings is found at
the far right of the Countermeasure Panel. The throttle portion of the Ship
Handling Console remains visible.
To Ship Handling
Tow Panel
Countermeasure Panel
To Starboard Wing
Bridge: Tow and Countermeasure Console

The Tow Panel: The Tow Panel contains switches to stream and retrieve
the Towed Array and the towed Nixie Torpedo Decoy. The towed array
panel also contains a digital readout of the scope (length) of towline
currently deployed.
BClick the text of the desired action to move the switch to that
position. (The arrays can also be streamed and retrieved from the
Orders and Ownship Menus.)
The Nixie Torpedo Decoy is a noisemaker dragged far behind the ship.
It should be deployed only when there is a torpedo in the water.

Backing up when the towed array and/or towed Nixie are deployed will
sever the towline.

Countermeasure Panel: The Countermeasures Panel contains
pushbuttons to launch and reload tubes in the countermeasure launchers.
An illuminated button indicates that tube is ready for launch. The button is
dark when the tube is empty, and blinks while it is being reloaded. The
window above each button displays what is loaded (or currently being
loaded) in the tube.
BClick the text in a window to cycle through the countermeasures
available for reload in that tube or to change the current loadout to
a different countermeasure. Chaff and Infrared Flares are
available.
BClick an illuminated button to launch the countermeasure in that
tube.
7-13
B R I D GE W I N G S /B I N O C U L AR S
A visual scan of the 3D environment is possible from the port and starboard
bridge wings. When a contact of interest is located, binoculars provide a
closer examination. The binoculars are accessed from either the Port or
Starboard Bridge Wings.
3D View
Binocular icon button
Transition button to Bridge
Bridge: Starboard Bridge Wing

Bridge Wings: When on either Bridge Wing the Ship Handling Console
panel is available.
BClick and drag in the Bridge Wing 3D view to pan in the Free Look
view
BClick the binocular button at the right of the screen to access the
Binoculars.
BClick the transition button at the edge of the console to return to
the Bridge.
Binoculars: The binoculars provide magnification from 2X to 16X. LLTV
(Low Light TV) mode is available for night use.
BFor an enhanced view of a visual contact of interest, click the
binocular icon at the right of the Bridge Wing screen to access the
Binoculars.
BClick and drag in the Binocular view to pan the view. Bearing is
relative to Ownships heading.
BClick the plus and minus buttons to increase or decrease
magnification.
7-14
BClick the Free Look button in the upper right of the screen to return
to Bridge Wing Free Look view.
BClick the Transitions button at the edge of the screen to return to
the bridge view.
FFG A COUSTIC S TATION [F2]

In the Acoustic Station incoming data from up to eight sonobuoys is viewed
in eight CRT Sonobuoy Data Display Windows (grams). Sonobuoys must
be deployed and an appropriate channel selected before any data appear in
the Acoustic Data Display Windows. When Acoustic Autocrew is on he sets
channels for you.
The FFGs Over The Side (OTS) sonobuoys are launched from the
ASTAC Station [F3].

Your embarked helicopter is launched and ordered to drop sonobuoys
from the ASTAC Station [F3].

Ownside sonobuoys that are placed in the mission by the mission
designer are also available for processing.

On the 2D Nav Map, the channel on which a buoy is transmitting
appears beside the buoy icon and displays in the Data Display
Indicator (DDI) when a buoy symbol is selected.
Selected Receiver Mode
Sonobuoy Sensor Mode Selector
Sonobuoy Data Display Window
Channel Selector
Platform Receiver Mode Selector
FFG: Acoustic Station

The Acoustic station labels and hardware are described here. The
Sonobuoy Display Window (Gram) functionality is described in
7-15
Training/Sonar School/Sonar Systems/Sonobuoys/Sonobuoy Data Display

Windows (Grams).
MODE: The Data Display Windows (grams) in the column below this label
show data from sonobuoys within range of Ownship (SHIP) or the deployed
Helo (AIR) as selected in Receiver Mode at the bottom of the screen. The
selected mode (SHIP or AIR) displays in the readout to the right of the
label.
RECEIVER MODE: This switch selects which platforms sonobuoy data
appear in the data display columns. The selected mode displays in the
MODE field at the top of the display windows.
AIR mode: All eight channels are reserved to process buoy data sent
via Link by your deployed helo.
SHIP mode: All eight channels are reserved to process buoy
transmissions within range of the FFG's receiver.
AIR/SHIP mode: (Default Receiver Mode) Channels A - D are used to
process incoming data from the deployed helo, and channels E - H are
used for buoy data within range of the FFG's receiver.
FREQUENCY ALERT: This feature sets buoys in Omni mode to notify the
player when signals matching player-specified frequencies are detected.
When enabled, any match received causes an audible alarm and a crew
report.
ENABLE: Click to begin monitoring for the frequency entered in the Freq
1/Freq 2 fields to the right of the button. The button flashes when the
designated frequency is detected.
FREQ 1/FREQ 2: Sets a frequency to monitor when the associated Enable
button is clicked.
B Left or right-click on a digit field to increment or decrement the
number to set the frequency of interest.
BClick ENABLE to set the system to alert you when the designated
frequency is detected. The alert indicates only that the frequency
has been detected, not which gram contains the detected
frequency.
CHAN: Channel to which the associated Data Display Window is set. A
sonobuoy transmits data on a specific channel. Click or right-click on a digit
to increment or decrement the number.
FFG S O N OB U O Y D A T A D I S P L A Y W I N D OW S
In S.C.S - Dangerous Waters the Sonobuoy Data Display Window (Gram
display) functionality is identical within platforms with sonobuoy capability.
Information on Sonobuoy Data Display Windows and Frequency Alerts is
found in Training/Sonar School/Sonar Systems/Sonobuoy Display Windows
(Grams). Information specific to the FFGs Acoustic Station is contained in
this section.
7-16
The FFGs sonobuoy processor can handle 8 different channels of

sonobuoy data at once. Buoy data can take up multiple channels depending
on the sensor mode (Omni, Directional, or Active) to which the receiver is
set.
The eight channels are designated A-H.
Only channels A-D can be set to Directional or Active mode.
The receiver has 3 modes, set by the rotary switch at bottom left.
When AIR is selected, all eight channels are reserved to process buoy
data sent via Link by your deployed helo. If your helo is not deployed, if
you do not have SYNC with the deployed helo, or if the deployed helos
LINK STATUS is set to RADAR, text messages appear in the windows.
When SHIP is selected, all eight channels are reserved to process
buoy transmissions within range of the FFG's receiver. Select the

appropriate channel to receive data from the desired buoy.
AIR/SHIP mode: (Default Receiver Mode) Channels A - D are used to
process incoming data from the deployed helo, and channels E - H are
used for buoy data within range of the FFG's receiver. Mode labels
appear at the top of each bank of displays to show in which mode each
bank is set.
Tip: In Air/Ship mode, data received by the ship cannot be processed in
Directional or Active mode. If the helo is not sending data, leave Receiver
Mode set to SHIP to keep Channels A-D available for Active and Directional
processing of transmissions received by the FFG.
The FFG carries four types of sonobuoys: DICASS (active, directional, and
omni modes), DIFAR (directional and omni modes), VLAD (directional and
omni modes) and BT (bathythermograph) sonobuoy. It can also tune to
LOFAR buoys placed by the mission designer. Buoys are described in
greater detail in Training/Sonar School/Sonar/Sonobuoys.
Sonobuoy Modes
Sonobuoys have different sensor detecting and reporting capabilities.
Depending on the buoy, up to three modes are available. By default each
sonobuoy is set to Omni mode. Clicking the MODE button in the Data
Display Window cycles through the available modes. Some modes require
supporting displays as noted below. If the required extra displays are not
set to channel 00, the mode cannot be switched. (Turn Acoustic Autocrew
off before attempting to switch channels to 00 or he will change them back.)
Omni mode (Passive) returns received non-directional frequency data.
Omni mode is useful for classifying the source of a signal and alerting you
to the fact that there is something out there. All sonobuoys (except BTs)
default to Omni mode, which requires one channel.
Directional mode (Passive) returns received frequencies and bearings and
requires two channels. The selected channel must be set to Directional
mode in Data Display Windows A D. There must be one empty window
available in either bank of windows to handle supporting data. (One window
7-17
displays Directional data received on the selected channel, the supporting

window receives OMNI data from the buoy.)
Active (pinging) mode returns bearing and range data, and requires three
channels. Selected Channel must be set to ACTIVE in Data Display
Windows A D. There must be two empty windows available in either bank
of windows to handle supporting data. (One window displays active returns
when transmitting, the other two list data relative to the gram display they
are supporting.)
If Receiver Mode is set to AIR/SHIP ship sonobuoys can be in Omni mode
only. Air data occupies the A D windows necessary to set Direction and
Active modes.
9 Note: Sonobuoy Display Window functionality, labels, buttons/VABs
and the Library are explained in Training/Sonar School/Sonar
Systems/Sonobuoys.
FFG ASTAC S TATI ON [F3]

ASTAC stands for Anti-Submarine/Anti-Surface Warfare Tactical Air
Controller. The ASTAC console is used mainly to direct the in-flight
helicopter(s) during an ASW search. The ASTAC assigns helicopter fly-to
points that designate the helos course, sonobuoy and/ or weapon drop
points.
Geoplot
DDI Area
Current range scale
VAB Panel
ASTAC Station
G E OPL O T
The Geoplot in ASTAC is used to plot waypoints for the helicopters flight
path, and for sonobuoy and weapon drop locations. Ownship, the deployed
7-18
helicopter and all contacts detected by Ownship, the helo and Link
participants can be seen on the Geoplot.
Changing Geoplot Range: The range scale in the Geoplot can be
adjusted to 5, 10, 20, 40, 80 or 120 nautical miles.
B[Ctrl] + Left-click in Geoplot zooms in. [Ctrl] + Right-click in Geoplot
zooms out.
BMouse wheel forward in Geoplot to zoom in. Mouse wheel
backward in Geoplot to zoom out.
BClick DISPLAY SETTINGS in VAB Panel and click desired range
setting. Click BACK to return to previous VAB Panel.
ASTAC VAB P AN EL
The VAB Panel consists of the upper DDI Area where specific information
about a contact hooked in the Geoplot is available and the lower Variable
Action Buttons (VABs), which are used to direct helicopter operations.
9 Note: Green text indicates a selected button.
Digital Display Indicator (DDI) Area

The following information on a contact selected in the ASTAC Geoplot is
available in the DDI.
Track: Track number of the selected contact
Brg: True bearing from Ownship.
Rng (yd): Range (in yards) from Ownship.
Spd: Speed in knots
IFF: Identification Friend or Foe. Aircraft only are identified as Civilian,
Friendly or Unknown.
Source: The sensor source reporting the selected contact.
ID: Alliance as assigned by the player. Pending indicates Unknown or
not yet specified.
Category/Class: Category indicates the type of platform (Surface, Air,
Sub). Actual class name appears for Ownship and Ownships
helicopter or for all platforms when Show Truth is ON.
CPA Brg: Projected true bearing of the selected contact when it
reaches its closest point of approach (CPA) to Ownship (given current
course and speed of Ownship and selected contact.)
CPA: Rng (yd): Projected range of the selected contact when it
course and speed of Ownship and speed selected contact.)
Crs: Course of selected contact.
7-19
ASTAC DDI
Select SHIP to
Control Helo via
Fly To
Commands
Mode of Data
Reported by
Deployed Helo
Helo Fly To
Commands are
only available
when Helo
Control is set to
SHIP
Helo is Synched
with ship and
sending data
Click to view
status of
embarked
helicopters
Click to display
Over The Side
Buoy Launch
Panel
Click to set
range in
Geoplot display.
Helo Control
Helo Control options are only available when a helicopter is airborne and
the helicopter symbol is selected on the ASTAC Geoplot. By default the
helicopters AI pilot is in control when the helo is launched. Control of the
helicopter must be transferred to the ship before the ASTAC can set
waypoints or order sonobuoy or weapon drops.
BTo SYNC the Helo and Ownship, click the helicopter symbol for
Ownships deployed helo on the Geoplot.
SHIP: Click to transfer control of the airborne helicopter to the ship
(ASTAC). When SHIP has control, Helo Fly To Commands are enabled
and flight, weapon and sonobuoy waypoints can be placed for the helo
to follow. The button flashes for a few seconds then lights steadily
when control is transferred to SHIP.
HELO: Click to transfer control of the airborne helicopter from the ship
to the helicopter AI. The button flashes for a few seconds then lights
steadily indicating that HELO control has been passed to the Helo AI.
7-20
9 Note: In a Multiplayer game when another player or a team of

players controls the deployed helo, click the SHIP button to request
Helo control. The SHIP button flashes until the Helo player switches
the Nav control switch to the SHIP position. That may not happen
immediately or at all if the helo player does not wish to relinquish
control. The Helo player must be on the ATO station to see the
blinking button. If he is not there, it may be some time before he is
aware of your desire to take control. You may want to send a chat
message to alert him to your request. To revoke the request click
SHIP again. The Helo can regain control immediately as he desires.
He does not need to ask permission.
Link Mode
When the helicopter is synched with Ownship, data can be passed from the
helicopters radar or deployed sonobuoys. Link Mode options are not
available unless the ship and helo are synched and your OS Helo symbol is
selected in the Geoplot.
ACOUSTIC: Click to receive sonobuoy data from the deployed
helicopter. (Sonobuoys must be in the water and within reporting range
of the helicopter for data to be passed.) Returning acoustic data from
helo-dropped sonobuoys are displayed in the Sonobuoy Data Display
Windows (Grams) in the FFGs Acoustic Station. [F2]
RADAR: In a single player game, your deployed helo is in EMCON
(Emissions Control) until you order the Helo to radiate. Click RADAR to
order your deployed helo to begin radiating and begin receiving the
Helos radar data.
To process the Helos radar data, go to the Weapons Coordinator
Station [F8] and click REMRO. Helo radar detections are

automatically marked as local (FFG) contacts as long as REMRO
is ON.
9 Note: In a Multiplayer game when another player or a team of
players controls the deployed Helo, the player controlling the Helo
must turn his Radar ON before you can receive his data when you
switch to RADAR mode. The Helos acoustic data passes
automatically to you when you select ACOUSTIC whether the Helo is
processing buoy data or not.
Helo Fly To Commands

When SHIP is selected in HELO CONTROL and the helicopter symbol is
selected in the Geoplot, WAYPOINT, BUOY and TORPEDO buttons are
activated.
WAYPOINT: Flight Waypoints are marked with an F. This option is
used to assign a specific flight path for the helicopter. Click
WAYPOINT. A waypoint marked with an F appears on the Geoplot
extending from a short line extending due north from the helicopter
symbol.
7-21
BOUY: Sonobuoy drop points are marked with a B. A sonobuoy is

dropped when the helicopter reaches that location.
BClick BUOY. The Buoy Stores and selection panel appears.
BClick the desired type of buoy then click SELECT. A buoy drop
point appears after the last fly-to point or is inserted after a
selected waypoint/drop point. (The number of buoys of a type that
are assigned to waypoints appears in parenthesis after the count
number. The count updates once the buoy is dropped.)
TORPEDO: Torpedo drop points are marked with a T. Click
TORPEDO. A Torpedo drop point appears on the Geoplot. The number
of torpedoes assigned to a waypoint appears in parenthesis after the
number of torpedoes on-board. In the Helo Status Loadout Window.
Torpedoes dropped by OS helo are set to circle search.
9 Note: Be aware that the helicopter carries at most three torpedoes.
You can place as many weapon waypoints as the helo has
torpedoes.
The first fly-to point appears on the Geoplot at the end of a short line
attached to the helicopter. Each new fly-to point appends to the last one.
BTo insert a waypoint or drop point in the middle of the existing
flight path, click the waypoint/drop point immediately prior to the
desired location then insert a new waypoint or drop point as
described above.
BClick and drag a waypoint/drop point to move it to the desired
location. You may need to zoom in to be able to select the
waypoint in order to drag it.
9 Note: The embarked helicopters can be loaded out with missiles.
See FFG Stations/ASTAC Station/Helo Status/Loadout. Only the
helos torpedoes and buoys can be launched from ASTAC. The only
way to order the helicopter to fire missiles at a target is to use the
Contact Menu on the Nav Map and select Engage With> Helo 1 (or
Helo 2): Hellfire (or Penguin) if they are loaded out with that missile.
The helo will engage the selected contact with the designated missile
when the target is within range. Penguin missiles can only target
surface ships, not land targets. Your deployed helo will not attack
contacts he has identified as friendly or neutral even if you tell him to.
LINK STATUS
NO SYNC / SYNC: When an OS Helo is in-flight, click the helicopter
symbol on the Geoplot to initiate SYNC. When synchronized, data from
the helicopter is transferred to the ship. This light is only lit when the
helo symbol is selected in the Geoplot.
When Helo Control is set to SHIP, the Helo symbol must be selected
on the ASTAC Geoplot for the Link Mode and Helo Fly To Points to be
enabled. If any other contact is selected, those options are unavailable
until the Helo symbol is again selected on the Geoplot.
7-22
BOnce Sync is established and a symbol other than the helo is

selected in the Geoplot, click the SYNC light to quickly re-select
the helo in the Geoplot and activate all helo control options.
HELO STATUS: Click HELO STATUS to display a separate panel of
information on the status of both embarked helicopters. This panel also
provides a means of selecting a weapons loadout for each embarked
helicopter and for launching and retrieving helicopters.
Click to select the desired helo.
The selected option in green.
Current Location/Status of
selected helicopter
Indicates if the helo is Currently
Synched or Not Synched (Sync or
No Sync)
Select the type of mission;
appropriate weapons are loaded
Weapons in selected load out
Current Alert Status. Green

indicates assigned status.
When lit Click LAUNCH to launch

Helo.
Click BACK to return to previous
VAB Panel
Labels and areas of the Helo Status Panel are described below:
HELO 1/HELO 2: Click to view the Helo Status Panel for the selected
helicopter.
Location of Helicopter: Below the helo buttons is seen the current
location of the selected helicopter. (Hangar, On Deck, In Flight, Over
Horizon, Down etc.)
SYNC / NO SYNC: A helo can only be assigned waypoints, transfer
data, or be recovered if SYNC is established. Sync is two-way
communication between the helo and the ship.
LOADOUT: Click the desired mission type to select weapons
appropriate for the mission: ASW (Anti-submarine Mission) ASUW
(Anti-surface Mission) STRIKE (Land attack mission.) When the Helo is
in-flight, the number of weapons assigned to waypoints follows the
number of weapons remaining. See FFG Navigation Station/Contact
7-23
Menu/Engage With Helo 1 (or Helo2) for information on the loadouts

and how to fire your Helos missiles.
9 Note: 3D weapon models appear only on Ownships 3D model.
Weapons do not appear on the embarked helicopter model when it is
aloft or on deck.
ALERT: These numbers indicate the launch status for the selected
Helo. The launch status indicates the number of minutes it will take to
get the helicopter airborne. When the helicopter is in the hangar with
no alert status set, all digits are orange and the helo is an hour away
from launch.
BClick an orange Alert Status number to set the helicopter to that
status. The numbers blink until that status is achieved. The
number is green when the helo is in that numbered alert status.
Alert 30: Helo is in the hanger, pilot standing by. It will take thirty
minutes to launch the helo once it achieves Alert 30 status. Both
helicopters can be in Alert 30 status at once.
Alert 15: Helo is on deck, manned but the blades are not spinning.
A helicopter in Alert 15 can be airborne in 15 minutes once Launch
is clicked. Be aware that an in-flight helicopter cannot be retrieved
if the on-board helicopter is in Alert 15 or Alert 5 status. Only one
helo at a time can be in Alert 15.
Alert 5: Helo is on deck and blades are spinning. The helicopter
can be airborne in 5 minutes when LAUNCH is clicked if it is in
Alert 5 Status. Beware that leaving the Helo in Alert 5 expends
fuel.
9 Note: The LAUNCH button is enabled only when GREEN DECK is
set.
Tip: Turn on Aircraft Quick Launch in the Options>Game screen to reduce
the Alert status times from minutes to seconds.
LAUNCH / RETRIEVE: Click the available button to Launch the
selected embarked helo or retrieve the selected in-flight helo. An
orange button can be selected.
If you have ordered your in-flight helo recovered, only Alert 30 can
be set for the helo in the hangar.

If the Helo in the hangar has been ordered to launch the Recover
button for the in-flight aircraft is disabled until after the other helo is
airborne.
Launching a Helicopter
From the Bridge Stations Flight Conditions panel:
1. Click Green Deck.

From the ASTAC Stations Helo Status panel:
7-24
2. Click LAUNCH. (The LAUNCH button is not enabled unless Green

Deck is set.) If the helicopter is in the hangar and no alert status has
been set, it takes sixty minutes from the moment you click LAUNCH to
get the helo airborne. (If Aircraft Quick Launch is selected in the
Options>Game menu, the time it takes to launch is set in seconds
instead of minutes.)
3. When the helo completes the countdown, the helo will launch
automatically if GREEN DECK is set.
4. The Flight Deck must be set to Green Deck before a helicopter can be
launched or recovered. Set Green Deck from the Bridge Flight
Conditions panel or from the Orders Menu or with a voice command.
Alternately, you can leave the flight deck in Red Deck status and click
5. This will take the Helo to Alert 5 status (on deck, blades spinning,
ready to launch within 5 minutes. Then when you want to launch, set
Green Deck and click LAUNCH.
Tips: Check the Wind Envelope and the ships pitch and roll from the Bridge
Station to ensure that safe flight conditions exist. Launching when Flight
Conditions are unfavorable could result in a crash of the helicopter.
Plan ahead! If you do not have Aircraft Quick Launch enabled, it takes an
hour to get one helo airborne when no alert status is set. Set both the
helicopters to Alert 30 at mission start. (You may want to set one helo to
Alert 30 and one to Alert 15.)
Recovering a Helicopter
Once a helo is airborne the LAUNCH button becomes the RECOVER
button.
BClick RECOVER to order an In-flight helo to land on Ownship.
If you have ordered your other helo to Alert 15, Alert 5 or Launch
status, the RECOVER button is disabled until the other helicopter is

launched.
Once RECOVER is selected, the helo disregards all subsequent orders
until you cancel the RECOVER order. Click the flashing RECOVER
button to cancel the order.
In a Multiplayer game you cannot use the RECOVER button to retrieve
your airborne helicopter if another player is manning the helo. It is up to

the player to return to the ship if he so desires. AI. driven helicopters
function identically in single and multiplayer games.
OTS BUOY
The FFG-7 carries four types of Over The Side (OTS) sonobuoys. Click
OTS BUOY to access Over The Side Sonobuoy Launch Panel.
7-25
To Launch OTS
Sonobuoys:
Buoys available. Numbers
decrement as stores are
depleted. S: Shallow, D:
Deep.
Click the buoy name to cycle

through list of available
buoys. Stop clicking to load
the type of buoy currently
displayed.
The Launch button lights in a
few seconds.
Click the lit LAUNCH button
to launch the sonobuoy
named in TYPE field above.
Click CANCEL to return to

the previous VAB Panel.
FFG OTS Sonobuoy Launch Panel

Sonobuoy data displays in the Acoustic Station.
Activating and Scuttling Buoys

Any Ownside launched DICASS buoy can be activated from the ASTAC
Station. Any type of buoy belonging to Ownside can be scuttled from the
ASTAC station as long as the buoy symbol is present on the Geoplot.
1. Click a buoy symbol on the ASTAC Geoplot. The Buoy

Activation/Scuttle Panel Appears in the VAB Panel.
2. Click ACTIVATE to set a selected DICASS Buoy to Active Mode and

start it pinging. There is always a time delay after a buoy is dropped
before an OTS or Helo dropped buoy can be set to activate. It must be
in the water long enough to have deployed the cable. Only DICASS
buoys have an active mode. The ACTIVATE button is greyed unless a
DICASS Buoy is selected.
3. Click SCUTTLE to delete the selected buoy. The symbol is removed

from the Geoplot and the Nav Map and no longer sends signals to the
acoustic station.
4. To exit the Buoy Activation Panel, click on a different symbol on the

Geoplot.
7-26
Display Settings
Click DISPLAY SETTINGS to access a panel of Geoplot display range
settings.
Numbered buttons: Click the number of the desired display range.
CENTER OS button: Click to center the Ownship symbol in the center
of the Geoplot.
CENTER HOOK button: Click to center the symbol currently selected
in the Geoplot.
FFG H ULL S ONAR S TATION [F4]

The FFG-7 is equipped with the SQS-56 active-passive hull sonar. The Hull
Sonar Station is used mainly to control active sonar emissions and view
returns in the Sonar Display Window. The active sonar operates in 4
different modes: Single Beam, Omni-directional, Omni-directional
Rotational, and High Frequency.
The symbol for a contact marked in with active sonar appears on the Nav
Map at the end of a green LOB at the range reported by the sensor. Only
one tracker (Automated Target Tracker) is available in Active Sonar.
Passive sonar mode is also available. Passive sonar mode supports
detection of broadband contacts and has no narrowband or tracking
capability.
Hull Sonar Display Window
Bearing-Range Cursor
Hull Sonar DDI
Hull Sonar Single Beam Main VAB Panel
7-27
H U L L S O N AR D IS PL AY W I ND O W
The mode and transmission type selected in the Mode Selection VAB Panel
determines what appears in the Hull Sonar Display window. The format
varies as described below:
Active Mode: Single Beam/Omni Modes

When single beam, omni or omni rotational mode is selected, the Y
(vertical) axis of the Active Sonar Display is range, from 0 at the bottom to
the selected range at the top and the X (horizontal) axis is relative bearing
from 180 to 180, with 0 at the center.
Unlike the submarine interfaces, the FFG-7 active sonar display is not
interlaced; each ping fills the entire display, fading older returns as it draws
in the window.
BClick RANGE SCALE in the VAB Panel to set or view the display
range.
The Sonar Display in Active Mode contains a box cursor attached to a
bearing indictor line.
1. Click MODE then click ACTIVE.

2. Click SINGLE BEAM, OMNI, or OMNI ROTATIONAL as desired.
3. Click BACK.
4. Click XMIT to transmit in the selected mode. (The current selected
mode appears in the top line of the DDI.)
5. Click a contact on the display or click and drag the square cursor in the
Sonar Display Window to center the box on a contact.
6. Click MARK to send a single bearing and range report to the Nav Map
and the TMA Station.
7. If desired click ASSIGN ATT to assign a tracker to the contact. The

tracker assignment appears in the DDI on the next transmission. (Click
UNASSIGN to remove the tracker from the contact.)
The bearing and range at the location of the cursor displays in the DDI area
in the right-hand CRT, as well as any marked track under the cursor.
Active Mode: High Frequency

When High Frequency is selected, the Sonar Display Window depicts the
outline of underwater contacts directly in front of the ship.
1. Click MODE then ACTIVE.

2. Click HIGH FREQUENCY then BACK.
3. Click on any contact on the map. There is no background noise.
4. Click MARK. All contacts detected by the High Frequency Sonar are
marked on the Nav Map when the MARK button is clicked once.
7-28
High-frequency contacts are not given contact numbers and do not
appear in TMA. They appear as a Map Marker with the label HF

Sonar Mark at the exact location of the detection.
Passive Mode Display

When passive mode is selected, detected broadband data appear as bright
lines in a waterfall display in the Sonar Display Window. The cursor
appears as a line above the waterfall. Contacts can be marked only; no
trackers can be assigned in passive mode.
1. Click MODE then PASSIVE.

2. Click BACK. The only available VAB buttons are MARK and MODE.
3. Click on a contact line in the display window to move the cursor to that
bearing. (Bearing shown is relative bearing.)
4. Click MARK to send the bearing data to the Nav Map and TMA Station.
5. Click MODE to return to the Mode Selection VAB Panel.
6. Click ACTIVE to return to the Active Mode Selection Panel.
9 Note: In heavy seas, you may notice gaps in noise in the Passive
Display. These occur when the bow sonar breaks the surface of the
water.
H U L L S O N AR DDI
The Hull Sonar DDI area of the VAB Panel provides the following
information.
Mode: Current sonar mode and transmission interval (when
applicable).
Crsr Track: Displays the track number of any marked contact at the
bearing-range cursor location.
Brg: Relative bearing at the location of the cursor.
Rng: Range (in yards) at the location of the cursor.
ATT Track: Shows the Automated Target Tracker number when the
ATT is assigned to a contact. See Assign ATT below. (Track number
appears here on the next sensor return.)
Brg: Relative bearing to the contact to which the ATT is assigned.
Rng: Range (in yards) to the contact to which the ATT is assigned.
When High Frequency is selected, only cursor bearing is reported in
the DDI. When the contact is marked, the range to the contact is
displayed in the (cursor) Rng field.
When Passive Mode is selected only cursor bearing is available in the
DDI when a contact line is clicked.
7-29
H U L L S O N AR M A I N VAB P A N E L (A C TI VE M O DE )
By default Active Mode Single Beam/Single Ping is selected in main VAB
panel. Beam centering options are only available when Single Beam mode
is selected. All other button options seen here are also available for Omni
and Omni Rotational modes.
Current
Transmission
Mode and
interval
Hull Sonar
DDI Area
Mode
Selection
Single Beam
Options
Mark
Selected
Contact
Transmit in
selected
mode.
View or
change
current Hull
Sonar
Display
Window
Range
Scale
Assign (or
Unassign)
ATT
Tracker to
selected
contact
When
green,
active sonar
is in
standby.
Hull Sonar Default (Main) VAB Panel: Active Mode

Shown above is the Active Mode Main VAB Panel with SINGLE BEAM
selected by default. This default Active VAB panel is described below:
MODE: Click to display the Sonar Mode Selection VAB Panel. Here
alternate sonar modes are selected (three active modes or the passive
mode). If an active mode is selected, select a transmission mode: single or
continuous pings.
RANGE SCALE: Click to display the Range Scale Selection Panel. In
the Range Scale Selection Panel click a button to choose the range
scale desired for the Active Sonar Display Window (2, 5,10. 15 or 20
KYDs). Click BACK to return to Active Mode Main VAB Panel. When
BACK is clicked, any active transmission is stopped. You must click
XMIT to initiate transmission.
7-30
CENTER BEAM: (Single Beam Mode only) Centers the transmitted

beam on the bearing selected in the digital readout.
BClick the + or to select the desired bearing then click XMIT.
CENTER ON CURSOR: (Single Beam mode only): Focuses
transmitted beam in the bearing where the cursor is located.
BClick in the Active Sonar Display to move the cursor to the desired
bearing location.
BClick CENTER ON CURSOR then click XMIT.
MARK: Click to send a single bearing and range report to the Nav Map
and TMA Station for the contact under the cursor.
XMIT: Initiate transmission in the selected transmission mode and
interval.
ASSIGN ATT Click to assign the Automated Target Tracker (ATT) to
the selected contact. When assigned, the ATT follows the target and
automatically marks a new bearing and range with each return. The
track, bearing, and range are updated in the DDI. (One Automated
Target Tracker is available.) If the track to which the ATT is assigned is
not selected, the ASSIGN button is available. Select a different contact
and click ASSIGN ATT to automatically reassign the ATT to the new
track.
UNASSIGN: This text is visible only when the ATT is assigned and the
track to which the ATT is assigned is selected. Click to un-assign the
Automated Target Tracker.
STANDBY: Click to stop continuous active sonar transmission. Green
text indicates the active sonar is in standby mode.
S O N AR M O DE S E L E C TI O N VAB P A NE L
Selecting MODE In the Main VAB panel displays the SONAR Mode
Selection VAB Panel used to select the desired sonar mode - Active or
Passive - and the transmission intervals for Active Mode. Different VABs
are activated depending on whether Active or Passive mode is selected.
7-31
Active Selected
Click To Select
Passive Mode
Transmission
intervals
Active Modes
To Main VAB
Panel
Sonar Mode Selection VAB Panel
Sonar Mode Selection VABs: Active Options

The following buttons are available in the Sonar Mode Selection Panel
when Active Mode is selected.
ACTIVE: Selected mode (Green)
PASSIVE: Click to switch to Passive Mode Selection VAB Panel
Active Mode Options
SINGLE BEAM: Focuses transmission of all acoustic energy on a
single beam. (Click BACK to select the beam bearing on which to
focus.)
OMNI: Transmits acoustic energy in all directions.
OMNI ROTATIONAL: Transmits acoustic energy one beam at a time
in quick rotation until all directions are covered.
HIGH FREQUENCY: Transmits high frequency acoustic energy
directly ahead of the ship. This mode is used to avoid mines and
icebergs.
Active Transmission Interval Options
SINGLE PING: Transmits a single emission of acoustic energy (one
ping) when XMIT is clicked.
CONTINUOUS PING: Transmits continuous emissions of acoustic
energy when XMIT is clicked.
BACK: Returns to Main VAB panel where detected contacts can be
marked.
7-32
9 NOTE: The selected transmission mode and interval type appear

together in the top line of the DDI area.
Sonar Mode Selection VABs: Passive Options

Only three buttons are active when Passive is selected:
ACTIVE: Click to access Active Mode Selection VAB Panel.
PASSIVE: Selected Option (Green)
BACK: Click to access the Passive Mode Main VAB Panel.
P A S S I VE M OD E M AI N VAB P AN EL
The only functionality in passive mode is the ability to mark contacts. When
Passive is selected in the Sonar Mode Selection Panel, click BACK to
access the Passive Mode Main VAB Panel. These two buttons are enabled.
MODE: Click MODE to access the Mode Selection VAB Panel.
MARK: Click MARK to send a bearing report on the selected contact to
the Nav Map and TMA and assign a track number to the contact.
FFG N AVI GATION S TATION [F5]

The Navigation Station (Nav) with its Nav Map and 3D View is the default
station when entering a mission. The Navigation Station functionality is the
same regardless of controllable platform and the basic information on the
Nav is covered only once in this manual. See Navigation Station. Menu
functionality unique to the FFG is contained here.
FFG O W N S H I P /O R DE R S
M E NU S
To access the Ownship Menu, click the Ownship NTDS symbol on the Nav
Map to select it, then right-click on the selected symbol. The majority of the
FFGs Ownship Menu items are identical to those in the Task Bar Orders
Menu. See FFG Stations/FFG Task Bar/Orders Menu for a description of
those menu items. The rest of the Ownship Options require the use of the
Nav Map. With the exception of the option below, Ownship Menu options
are the same from platform to platform and are described in Navigation
Station/2D Navigation Map/Ownship Menu.
Fire Tube [X]: This option appears in the Ownship Menu only when a
target is assigned to a tube and the tube is readied to fire in the Torpedo
Control Station. When all that is left to do is fire the tube, this option is
available. Select the option to fire the weapon in the tube at the preselected contact.
9 Note: In the Torpedo Control Station, you are not prevented from
assigning a torpedo to a target that is out of range of the torpedo.
This option fires the weapon as assigned and preset in the Torpedo
Control Station.
7-33
FFG C O N T AC T M E NU
The Contact Menu appears whenever you right-click on a contacts NTDS
symbol on the Nav Map. Most menu items are the same from platform to
platform however there are several options that are unique to the FFG. The
following Contact Menu options are available when you are commanding
the FFG in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters.
Engage With: These menu options are available when you select and rightclick on a valid contact symbol. The contact must be categorized as a
surface, sub, air or land contact (it can not have the unknown category
symbol) before any Engage With options are available. This option is not
available if the contact is a member of Ownside. Depending on what is
currently available in the FFGs weapons loadout and what is within range
of the weapon, the following may appear:
MK 13: Harpoon: The Harpoon targets surface ships and has a
standoff range of 5 nautical miles. If the selected contact is closer than
5 nautical miles, the Harpoon option is greyed out. The Harpoons
maximum range is modeled as 70 nautical miles.
MK 13: SM-2: While primarily a surface to air missile, the SM-2 can
also be fired at surface contacts. A maximum range of 81 nautical
miles is modeled for this weapon.
76mm Gun: The gun can target surface and land contacts within 10
nautical miles of Ownship.
Tube [X]: MK 50 Torpedo: This weapon can target submarines and
surface ships within 7 nautical miles of Ownship.
Tube [X]: MK 46 Torpedo: This weapon can target submarines and
surface ships within 6 nautical miles of Ownship.
9 Note: Torpedo options are greyed if the selected contact exceeds
the range of the torpedo. A specific tube is unavailable if it is empty
or that bank of tubes is currently reloading in the Torpedo Control
Station.
Helo1 and/or Helo 2: When the FFGs embarked helicopters are inflight they can be ordered to attack contacts using the Engage With
menu. Be aware that your deployed helo will not attack contacts he has
identified as friendly or neutral even if you order him to do so using this
Engage With command. These options are not available in a
multiplayer game when a player mans your deployed helo.
Hellfire Strike: This missile can target land contacts within range
of the in-flight helicopter. (It cannot target surface ships.) When
this option is selected the in-flight helo flies to and engages the
selected target. The helicopter carries a pod containing 4 Hellfire
missiles when a STRIKE is assigned as the loadout in HELO
STATUS.
Penguin: This missile can target surface ships within range of the
in-flight helicopter. When this option is selected the in-flight helo
7-34
flies to and engages the selected target. The helicopter carries one
Penguin missile in addition to two MK 50 Torpedoes when ASUW
is assigned as the loadout in HELO STATUS.
MK 50 Torpedo or MK 48 ASW Torpedoes: The MK 50 can
target subs and surface ships within range of the in-flight
helicopter. The torpedo is set to circle search. The FFGs AI driven
helo also carries one MK 48 AWS torpedo that can only target
submarines. When this option is selected the in-flight helo flies to
and engages the selected target. The helicopter carries two MK 50
torpedoes and one MK 48 ASW torpedo when ASW is assigned as
the loadout in HELO STATUS.
9 Note: the only way to launch the FFGs embarked helicopters
missiles is with this command. Only the MK 48s carried by the AI
driven helo are restricted to submarine targets. All other MK 48
Torpedoes can target surface ships as well as submarines. Hellfire
missiles launched by player controlled MH-60s can target surface
ships as well as land targets. Only the Hellfires on the AI driven helo
are restricted to Strike only.
OS Helicopter Contact Menu Options: When you click on the NTDS
symbol of your deployed MH-60R helicopter the following options are
available,
Data Link: These options are shortcuts to the ASTAC Helo Control
Options. See FFG ASTAC Station for full information on these options.
Link Control: Select Ship or Helo control. The selected option
determines who has flight path control over the deployed helo.
When SHIP has control, you can place flight, weapon and
sonobuoy waypoints for the helo to follow in from the ASTACT
station.
Link Data: Select Radar or Acoustic. This sets the type of data to
receive from the deployed helicopter.
Recover: Click to order the selected helo back to the ship. The Helo
disregards any subsequent orders until you cancel the Recover order.
BTo rescind the Recover order, select the ASTAC Station then click
HELO STATUS. Click the flashing RECOVER button to cancel the
Recover order.
FFG T OWED A RRAY S TATION [F6]

The Towed Array Station is used to detect, mark, track and classify
contacts of interest. At this station DEMON processing is also available,
which is used to determine the speed of a contact. The Frequency Profile
Library in the Single Beam display mode provides for classification of
contacts that match known sound signatures.
The FFG utilizes the AN/SQR-19 Tactical Towed Array Sonar System
(TACTASS). The towed array is dragged a mile behind the ship. Because of
7-35
the great distance, the ship itself does not mask any part of the
environment, thus the FFGs towed array provides 360 detection.
9 Note: Be aware that Ownship always appears as a contact on the
FFGs towed array. In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters TACTASS
provides 360 detection even if the array is not fully deployed. The
array is always modeled as level even when it appears to droop in
the 3D View.
The towed array (TA) automatically tags frequencies and assigns a
number to them. These numbered tags represent every frequency that the
TA is currently detecting and information about each tag appears in the Tag
Summary window in the upper left of the screen when in Broadband mode.
The rest of the FFGs systems (the Nav and the TMA Station) know nothing
about a tag or the contact it represents until it is marked by you or the
Autocrew or assigned an Automatic Tag Follower (ATF) to track its
movements. Once marked, the contact is assigned a track number.
9 Note: Remember: the four-digit track number generated when a
contact is marked in the towed array and used by the Nav Map, TMA
and other stations is not the same as the two-digit tag number
associated with the marked frequency in the Towed Array Station.
The Towed Array Station provides access to three display modes for the
purpose of marking, tracking, and classifying tags of interest: Broadband,
LOFAR and Single Beam.
T O W E D A R R A Y S T A TI O N N AV I G AT IO N B U TT O NS
Common to all display modes at the FFGs Towed Array Station are the
Navigation buttons below the Towed Array Variable Action Button (VAB)
Panel.
BROADBAND: Click to select BROADBAND display mode.
LOFAR SEARCH: Click to select LORAF SEARCH display mode.
SINGLE BEAM: Click to select SINGLE BEAM display mode.
FFG T O W E D A R R AY : B R O A DB A N D
The FFGs Broadband display mode consists of six areas: the Tag
Summary in the upper left corner, the circular Whiz-wheel, the Waterfall
Display, the DDI Area, the VAB Panel and the Towed Array Navigation
Panel. In broadband mode frequencies are detected, marked, Automatic
Tag Followers (ATF) (trackers) are assigned, and ambiguous bearings are
resolved.
Until the towed array is deployed, no contacts appear in the waterfall.
Towed array contacts do not appear immediately when you deploy the
array. If the towed array is not already deployed at the beginning of the
mission, you can stream it from the Bridge in the Tow and Countermeasure
Panel or via the Orders or Ownship Menus Sensors>Towed Array option.
7-36
Because of the physics of the towed array construction, the actual contact
and an ambiguous contact, a mirror image of each actual contact, is
reported to the system. The actual and ambiguous contact bearings shown
in the Tag Summary are in relative bearing. Relative bearing assumes
ship's heading is at 000. Because of the arrays conical beams, the two
bearings, one to starboard and one to port, will be equally spaced from the
ship/TA heading (mirrored). The bearings are always measured clockwise.
So, the starboard bearing will fall between 000 and180, and the port
bearing will always be between 180 and 360.
Resolving which contact is the actual contact and which is the mirrored
contact is part of your task in the Broadband mode. Unresolved bearings
are reported as port and starboard bearings simultaneously (for example
270 (port), and 090 (starboard)) in the tag summary. To determine which
bearing is the actual contact, maneuver the ship. If Ownship turns to the
right, the signal from a contact on the starboard (right) side of the towed
array moves up the waterfall display (for Ownship turns to the left the signal
moves in the opposite direction.) When you determine which is the actual
bearing to the contact, resolve the bearing to remove the ambiguous
reading. (See RESOLVE in the VAB panel description below.)
A symbol for both the actual and ambiguous contacts appears on the Nav
Map until the contact is resolved. Once resolved, only the contact located in
the position as resolved (Port or Starboard) appears on the Nav Map. On
the TMA plot the lines of bearing remain on the plot as drawn for both
contacts, (If both have been previously viewed in TMA) but the Contact ID
for the ambiguous contact is removed from the track selection dropdown
list. If you decide you resolved incorrectly and select the contact in the Tag
Summary and resolve it as the opposite location, the previously removed
contact is returned to the Nav Map and the now ambiguous contact is
removed. The previously deleted Track ID is returned to the TMA Track
selection list (at the bottom) and the ambiguous Track ID is removed.
Tag Summary
Whiz-wheel
VAB Panel
Waterfall Display
DDI Area
Navigation Buttons
7-37
FFG-7 Broadband Tag Summary

The towed array system automatically tags all frequencies giving each a
sequential tag number (01 99). Each tag number appears in the scrolling
Tag Summary list along with information relative to each tagged frequency.
Any given contact may have 4 or 5 tags depending on how many
frequencies are detected. Selecting a Tag Summary moves the waterfall
cursor to highlight the appropriate trace and DDI information changes to
reflect the selected summary. The following information is available in the
Tag Summary.
TAG: A two-digit number is automatically assigned to a frequency
detected by the towed array. The towed array keeps track of up to 99
frequencies. This tag number is used only in the Towed Array Station.
A four-digit track number is assigned to the contact whenever it is
marked in the Towed Array Station. An asterisk appears before this
number when an Automatic Tag Follower (ATF) (tracker) is assigned to
a tag. All tags assigned an ATF are promoted to the top of the tag
summary.
BEAM: This number indicates which of the towed arrays 22 conical
beams is currently detecting the selected contact.
SNR: Signal To Noise Ratio of this contact. Larger numbers indicate a
stronger signal.
BRG P: Actual (or ambiguous) port bearing of the contact. If actual
bearing is resolved to be the starboard contact, this field is empty.
BRG S: Actual (or ambiguous) Starboard bearing of the contact. If
actual bearing is resolved to be the port contact, this field is empty.
TRACK: Lists the Track number assigned to this Tag once the contact
has been marked or assigned an ATF.
9 Note: Notice that two track numbers flash in this field when a track is
marked. Because of the way the towed array processes signals, two
track numbers are assigned when a Towed Array contact is marked.
One number represents the bearing of the actual contact and the
other an ambiguous (mirrored) bearing. The track numbers are
consecutive and will continue to flash until you resolve the bearing
ambiguity via the RESOLVE function. See Towed Array Broadband
VAB Panel/Resolve later in this section.
BRG RATE: Bearing rate of the contact. The bearing rate is only
present once the actual bearing is resolved via the RESOLVE button in
the VAB Panel.
Whiz-Wheel
The circular whiz-wheel helps the operator visualize the towed array
heading and the beams on which signals are being received. The inner
loops represent the 22 beams of the towed array. A signal at relatively short
range is likely to overlap more than one beam.
7-38
The outer bearing circle rotates to show the true heading of the towed
array. The heading at the 12 oclock position is the arrays heading. This will
be close to Ownships heading once Ownship is on a steady course but
since the array is towed a mile behind the ship, the arrays heading is
affected by currents and will rarely be exactly the same as Ownships
heading.
When a contact is selected in either the Tag Summary or the waterfall
display the triangular cursor moves to indicate the beam detecting the
contact.
FFG Broadband Waterfall Displays

The FFGs broadband waterfall display consists of two areas with data
scrolling sideways from left to right. Contacts appear as darker orange lines
on a background of orange noise. Stronger contacts are thicker and
darker than faint contacts. A tic mark (tag) appears next to any contact in
the waterfall with a signal to noise ratio over one.
The waterfall displays share a bearing cursor that can be moved to the
desired location by clicking and dragging it or by simply clicking on a
location in the left half of the display. The cursor is linked with the whizwheel so moving the cursor in one display moves it to the approximate
location in the other. Clicking on a Tag number in the Tag Summary selects
that frequency tag and moves the cursor to that bearing in the waterfall
display. The location of the cursor in the outer numbered portion of the
Whiz Wheel approximates the starboard side of the conical beam detecting
the selected frequency.
Marking Contacts in Towed Array: Broadband

Towed array tag data is local to the Towed Array Station until the tag is
marked or an ATF is assigned. Marking a tag sends two bearing reports to
the Nav Map and the TMA station: the bearing of the actual contact and the
bearing to an ambiguous contact, the mirror image of the actual contact.
Your task is to determine which bearing is the real one and resolve the
ambiguity. (See RESOLVE VAB below.)
BTo mark a contact (tag), select the tag number in the Tag
Summary or click on a trace line in the waterfall then click MARK
in the VAB Panel. (Clicking ATF also marks the contact but also
assigns an Automatic Tag Follower.)
Two consecutive track numbers are assigned and appear in the Tag
Summary. One number indicates the actual bearing to the contact and
the other the bearing to the ambiguous contact. Contacts marked by
Ownship sensors are assigned four-digit track numbers. Both of the
assigned four-digit track numbers appear in the Tag Summary in the
TRACK column. The two consecutive numbers alternate in the track
column until the contact ambiguity is resolved.
7-39
Assigning an Automatic Tag Follower (ATF)

Automatic Tag Followers (ATF) can be assigned to up to eight frequency
tags in the FFG Towed Array system. When an ATF is assigned, data on
that contact is continuously sent to the Nav Map and TMA plot. In the Tag
Summary an asterisk appears in front of the tag number for every frequency
that is assigned an ATF. On the Nav Map the contact symbol moves based
on each two-minute report from the Towed Array or the TMA solution you
have entered for the contact.
9 Note: When contacts are very close to OS the bearing may seem off
if measured from Ownship on the Nav Map or the TMA Plot.
Remember that the towed array is dragged a mile behind the ship
and the bearing is measured from the towed array, not the ship.
1. Click the tag summary of the desired frequency tag or click on the tag
marker (short line) associated with the desired contact trace in the
waterfall display to select it.
2. Click ASSIGN ATF. An asterisk appears next to the tag number in the
Tag Summary and the assigned track numbers flash beside the tag
marker in the waterfall. The two numbers are the track numbers for the
real and ambiguous bearings associated with that detection. These
track numbers are seen on the Nav Map next to the unknown/unknown
symbols generated at the end of magenta colored lines of bearing. The
track numbers associated with the marked contact also flash in the
TRACK field in the Tag Summary.
3. If all eight ATFs are already assigned, the oldest assigned ATF is
dropped to free the follower for a new assignment.
4. To un-assign an ATF, click the track number in the waterfall and drag
the number out of the waterfall.
Towed Array Broadband DDI

In the Broadband mode the following data is available in the Digital Data
Indicator:
ARRAY HDG: Current heading of towed array.
ARRAY DPTH: Depth in feet of the towed array.
CRSR BRG: Relative bearing at the location of the cursor.
CRSR BEAM: Number of the array beam at the location of the cursor.
Towed Array Broadband VAB PANEL

In Broadband display mode the VAB Panel provides the following button
options:
MARK: Click to mark the selected tag (waterfall) contact. This assigns
a track number to both the real and mirrored contact and sends a
bearing report to the Nav Map and the TMA plot. The two track
numbers alternate (flash) next to the trace line in the waterfall and in
the TRACK field in the Tag Summary for the selected contact.
7-40
ASSIGN ATF: Click to assign an Automatic Tag Follower to the

selected tag frequency. Bearing data is updated on the Nav Map,
Geoplot and TMA stations as long as the ATF is assigned. If the
contact was not already MARKED, assigning an ATF also marks the
contact.
RESOLVE: Click to display the PORT and STBD (starboard) buttons in
the VAB Panel. IF for example you have determined that the actual
contact is to the port of Ownship, click PORT to resolve the ambiguity
and designate the contact on the port side of the ship as the actual
contact. The bearing data appears only in the Port column in the Tag
Summary and the bearing rate is now noted for that contact in the Tag
Summarys BRG RATE field. The contact at the designated bearing is
now the only contact that appears on the Nav Map. In the TMA Plot the
bearing lines remain for both contacts but only the track number for the
resolved contact appears in the selection list. If you decide not to
resolve the contact at this time, click RESOLVE to return to the Main
VAB panel.
9 Note: The Towed Array reports a contact bearing as well as its
mirror image. The mirror image is called the ambiguous contact or
bearing. Your task is to resolve the ambiguity and determine which
bearing is the true one. Once you determine which bearing report
represents the true contact, designate the contact on the appropriate
side of the towed array as the true contact using the RESOLVE
feature.
DEMON: Click to display the DEMON Processing controls. DEMON
stands for Demodulated Noise and is used to determine the speed of
surface and submerged contacts.
Determining a Contacts Speed using DEMON:

To determine a surface or sub-surface contacts speed accurately, you
must have classified the contact in the Towed Array Single Beam All
Band search, the Acoustic Station, the EW Station or visually. The
number of turns per knot (TPK) produced by a specific class of ship or
sub is listed in the USNI Browser Information for that class.
1.
Classify the contact and look up the USNI information for that ship
class. Make a mental note of the TPK information listed in the text
file.
2.
Click DEMON in the Towed ARRAY Broadband Station to access

the Demon Processing Controls.
3.
Place the cursor on the desired contact line in the Waterfall. The
system automatically determines the required frequency
information and places it in the FRQ field in the DEMON DDI.
4.
Click TPK + and TPK - until the TPK number noted in USNI for the
class appears in the TPK field.
5.
When the number is entered the number listed in the SPD field in
the DEMON DDI is the approximate speed of the contact, given
7-41
that your classification is correct and you have selected the correct
contact in the waterfall. Enter that speed in speed entry at the TMA
Station for the appropriate contact.
DEMON
DDI
Speed
Select
the
desired
contact
line
Click to
enter the
TPK
information
found in
the USNI
Browser
for the
contact
class.
Click to
close
DEMON
Processing
Controls
DEMON Processing Controls
LOFAR S E AR C H S U M M A R Y
Frequency signals on any of the 22 beams of the FFGs towed array are
seen in the LOFAR Search Summary. The display is mostly informational.
Frequencies that are associated with a contact are assigned a single tag
number. The only interaction is changing the time scale for the display and
the selection of a beam to view in Single Beam All Band display mode.
7-42
Individual beam waterfall displays
LOFAR DDI
The following actions can be taken in LOFAR Search mode:

BHold the cursor over a frequency signal to show that frequency in
the LOFAR SUMMARY DDI. Click in a display to note the tag
numbers assigned to the detected frequencies seen there.
BClick a beam waterfall display to select it; the beam is highlighted
to indicate its selection. Click SINGLE BEAM to view the selected
beam in Single Beam All Band display mode. The tag numbers of
each frequency appears above the waterfall lines.
BDouble click on a beam display to switch to the Single Beam All
Band display mode with that beam selected or select the beam
and click SINGLE BEAM.
LOFAR Search DDI

ARRAY HDG: Current heading of the towed array.
ARRAY DPTH: Current Depth of the towed array in feet.
CRSR BEAM: Beam number at the location of the cursor.
CRSR FREQ: Frequency at the location of the cursor.
CRSR TRACK: Assigned track number associated with the trace line
at the location of the cursor.
LOFAR Search VAB Panel

LONG TIME SCALE: Click to set waterfall data update rate to every 12
seconds for 8 minute averaging.
SHORT TIME SCALE: Click to set waterfall data update rate to every 6
seconds for 5 minute averaging.
7-43
Changing time averaging changes the update rate, but does not
refresh the display. The change is in effect for all beams.
S I N GL E B E A M A L L B A N D D I S PL A Y
The Single Beam display mode is used to match received frequencies to
sound frequency profiles of known classes found in the Frequency Profile
Library. This is useful for classifying contacts.
The beam data seen in Single Beam is selected in the LOFAR Search
Screen either by double-clicking on the desired beam or selecting the beam
then clicking SINGLE BEAM.
In the Single Beam display, frequency data from a single beam appears in
three separate waterfalls. The x-axis in each waterfall is frequency,
increasing from 0-399hz in the top waterfall, to 400-799hz in the middle
display, and 800-1199hz in the bottom waterfall display.
The y-axis is time, with most recent data at the bottom, scrolling up as it
ages. This display shows 90 seconds of data with 1-second updates. The
frequency under the single vertical cursor displays in the DDI in the Cursor
Freq field.
The tag number associated with frequencies deemed to be from the same
contact appear above the trace lines in the waterfall next to a frequency
marker and a tag marker.
The frequency marker is a small block that is an indication of the strength of
the signal. A detection with a strong signal to noise ratio has a larger
marker. The marker may appear even when a trace line is not visible in
Single Beam. The trace may be visible in LOFAR because of the longer
time averaging. Sometimes tag numbers appear over each other when two
similar frequencies are detected on the same beam.
Frequency Profile Library and Controls
Single Beam DDI
Single Beam VAB Panel
7-44
Tagged frequencies on the selected beam
FFG Towed Array Single Beam
Frequency Profile Library

The Frequency Profile Library is used to determine the classification of a
contact based on the frequencies it emits. The ships computer has a library
of sound profiles (frequency profiles.) When a ship, sub or torpedo is
selected in the library, the sound profile for that class is represented by a
caret at a specific frequency at the bottom of the Single Beam display
windows.
When the frequency lines in the detected contact closely match the carets
indicating a known class profile, there is a likelihood that the contact you
are detecting is of the class in the profile. Many profiles are similar so there
is some likelihood of error. Matching four or more lines to a known profile
increases the likelihood of an accurate classification.
FILTER: Toggles the Automatic Filter On and Off. Green indicates the
Filter is on. The only names that that appear in the list are of those with
a similar frequency profile to that in the selected beam. When OFF all
known profiles are in the list.
APPLY: Click to apply the class indicated in the Filter list to the tag
(contact) currently seen in the Single Beam for the selected trace. This
automatically applies the selected class to this track when it is selected
in the Nav Screen DDI and applies that 3D model to the contact when it
viewed in the 3D View.
9 Note: The tag must be marked and a trace line must be selected in
the Single Beam display before a class can be successfully applied.
Classifying a Contact with the Frequency Profile Library
The contact must have at least three detected frequencies before a
classification is possible. When no lines are visible the profile Library is not
available.
1. Click on a contact (frequency line) to select it. The vertical cursor line
appears below the contact in the waterfall display.
2. Click MARK to assign a track number to the selected contact and send
data to the Nav Map and the TMA station.
3. Click FILTER to weed out all but the profiles that most closely match
the currently detected frequencies. Carets at the bottom of a display
window represent the frequencies that make up the sound profile of the
selected class.
4. Click in the Library list then press up and down keyboard arrow keys to
scroll through the list of profiles. Note the location of the carets in the
display window as each profile is selected.
7-45
5. Compare the location of the carets with the trace lines of the detected
contact. When the carets line up exactly with the detected frequencies
in the display windows, it is likely that the detected contact is of the
class selected in the profile library. (Beware that some classes have
very similar profiles so the process is not 100% foolproof.)
6. Click on a trace line to select it. A short line cursor appears under the
trace indicating it is selected.
7. Click APPLY to assign the class of the currently selected profile to the
selected contact. The class name appears in the DDI when the contact
is selected on the Nav Map. The appropriate 3D model is also used in
the 3D view whenever the contact is selected.
Profile Controls
Profile Library
Profile indicators for FOXTROT (selected in the Profile Library)
FFG Towed Array - Single Beam Profile Library
Single Beam Mode DDI

ARRAY HEADING: Current heading of the towed array.
ARRAY DEPTH: Current Depth of the towed array in feet.
CRSR FREQ: The frequency at the location of the cursor.
CRSR TRACK: If the frequency has been marked (assigned a track
number) the track number appears in this field when the cursor is held
over the trace line.
SLAVED TO TAG: The display can be set to follow a tag to other
beams The tag number of the frequency the display is currently
following is seen here when a tag is slaved.
BEAM: The beam number currently viewed.
Single Beam VAB Panel

MARK: Click to mark the selected frequency tag and send the Beam
bearing information to the Nav Map and TMA stations.
ASSIGN ATF: Click a frequency trace line in the display then click
ASSIGN ATF to assign an Automatic Tag Follower (ATF) to the
7-46
selected contact (or frequency). A tag follower automatically updates

information on the assigned target to the Nav Map and the TMA
station.
SLAVE TO TAG/UNSLAVE FROM TAG: Click on a detected
frequency trace line (Tag) then click SLAVE TO TAG to assign the
display to follow that Tag if/when it moves to a different beam. When a
Tag is slaved, the VAB changes to UNSLAVE FROM TAG whenever
the cursor is over that contact.
BClick UNSLAVE FROM TAG to free the display from following that
specific Tag.
FFG E LECTRON IC W ARFARE (EW)[F7]

The Electronic Warfare (EW) station is used to mark and classify
electronically detected contacts. Each type of radar emits recognizable
signals. Once an emitter is detected, a list of ship or aircraft classes known
to have that emitter is provided in the Known Classes list. Contacts can be
marked immediately. Once the probable ship or aircraft class and alliance
classification of a contact is known, it can also be classified in the EW VAB
Panel.
Selection Cursor
EW Scope
EW DDI
EW VAB Panel
EW S C O PE
Each sweep of the EW antenna displays on the EW Scope any detected
radar emissions on the bearing indicated. Contacts are seen as narrow
wedges of orange varying in size and intensity depending on the strength of
the contact. The triangular cursor is used to select a contact for further
examination and classification on the VAB Panel.
TO Mark a Contact in EW
1. Click on a contact in the scope to select it.
7-47
2. Click MARK to assign a track ID to the contact and send bearing data
to the Nav Map and TMA stations.
To Apply a Class Name to a Contact in EW

1. Mark a contact as described above.
2. Scroll in the Known Classes list to find the probable country/class of
the contact.
The two-digit code that appears in front a class name represents
the country for that instance of the class.

The letter-code after aircraft class names represents the
designation of the aircraft (See list below.)
3. Click the class name in the list to select it. The APPLY CLASS button is
activated.
4. Click APPLY CLASS to apply this class designation to the contact.

Class name assigned here appears as the DDI class field here and in
the Navigation Station DDI. The 3D model associated with that Class
name is used for the contact whenever the contact is selected on the
Nav Map.
To Classify a Contact
1. Click on a contact in the scope to select it.
2. Click CLASSIFY.
3. Click one of the alliance designations listed. (Be aware that designating
a contact as HOSTILE or UAH (Unknown Assumed Hostile) can result
in attacks on the platform by Ownsides Link participants.) See EW
VAB Panel/Classify below.
4. Click RETURN to activate the designation and display the EW VAB

Panel.
9 Note: The CLASSIFY button is not available if Show Truth is on
Aircraft Class Designations

The following abbreviations are in use following Aircraft names in S.C.S.
Dangerous Waters.
AEW: Airborne Early Warning
ASW: Anti-Submarine Warfare
ER: Electronic Reconnaissance
EW: Electronic Warfare
F/A: Fighter Attack
H: Helicopter
Hyb: Hybrid
MP: Maritime Patrol
7-48
UAV: Unmanned Aerial Vehicle
EW DDI
Information relative to the selected contact appears in the EW DDI.
Crsr Brg: Bearing at the location of the cursor
Track: Track number of the selected contact. Track numbers are
assigned when a contact is marked.
ID: Displays the (alliance) classification selected via the CLASSIFY
VAB below.
IFF: Identification Friend or Foe. This field displays Friendly, Civilian or
None.
Class: Displays the class name designated with the APPLY CLASS
button.
Emitter: Displays the name of the detected emitter. (The USNI
browser lists sensors in use by most platform classes.)
EW VAB P AN EL
MARK: Click to mark the contact selected in the Scope. This assigns a
track number and sends bearing information to the Nav Map and the
TMA station.
APPLY CLASS: Click to apply the class name selected in the Known
Class list to the contact selected in the Scope. This button is not active
unless a name is selected in the list.
CLASSIFY: Click to designate an alliance ID to the selected contact.
(This button is not available if Show Truth is ON.)
PENDING: Default classification. Equates to Unknown.
UAH: Click to designate the selected contact as Unknown
Assumed Hostile.
UAF: Click to designate the selected contact as Unknown
Assumed Friendly.
HOSTILE: Click to designate the selected contact as Hostile.
FRIENDLY: Click to designate the selected contact as Friendly.
NEUTRAL: Click to designate the selected contact as Neutral.
RETURN: Click to return to the EW VAB Panel.
KNOWN CLASSES: Lists all classes known to use the detected
emitter. Select a name in the list and click the enabled APPLY CLASS
button to assign that class designation to the selected contact.
FF G W EAPONS C OORDINATOR S TATION [F8]

The Weapons Coordinator examines all available contact data and assigns
contacts to the Target Queue for engagement at the Weapons Control
7-49
Station. Here the surface search and air search radars are activated and
processed data is viewed.
Geoplot
Weapons Coordinator VAB Panel
DDI
Target Queue
Radar Mode Selectors
W E AP O N S C OO R D I N AT O R G E OP L O T D I S P L AY
The Weapons Coordinators Geoplot functions a bit differently than other
FFG Geoplots. The view can be zoomed but it cannot be panned. It is
always centered on either Ownship or its deployed helo. (The helo can only
be centered if sync has been established and OS has control of the helo.)
9 Note: While the Air (ADT) and Surface Search (SDT) radars are
turned on and off here, you never see the actual raw radar returns.
Only the processed returns are visible on the Weapons Coordinator
Geoplot. The sweeps are used to indicate a) that a particular radar is
ON and b) the nominal range of the activated radar.
All contacts detected by OS sensors as well as Link contacts (when Show
Link Data is selected) appear on the Weapons Coordinator Geoplot. When
OS is synced (linked) with its in-flight helicopter, the helo can be set to send
its radar data to the FFG where the information is processed and detections
are marked as FFG contacts. The type of data the helicopter sends is set in
LINK MODE in the ASTAC Station. See REMRO below.
To change the range scale in the display use one of the following methods:
BClick DISPLAY SETTINGS then click one of the range buttons in
the range VAB Panel
BWith the cursor in the Geoplot roll the mouse wheel up to zoom in
or back to zoom out.
BWith the cursor in the Geoplot press [CTRL] then click the display
to zoom in or right-click to zoom out.
7-50
Clicking on a contact symbol in the Geoplot provides known information on

the contact in the DDI.
9 Note: The Geoplot range defaults to 40 nm. There may be Link
contacts that are seen only when the range is zoomed out. If you are
pressing [Tab] to move between contacts and the selection box is
not visible on the Geoplot, check the DDI to make sure something is
selected then zoom out until you can see the selection cursor.
R A D AR O PER A TI O N
The Air Search and Surface Search radar scopes are not modeled as
player interfaces in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters, but the radars are turned
on and off by the Weapons Coordinator. Contacts processed by the radars
when they are on are automatically reported to the Nav Map and all
Geoplots. In S.C.S. Dangerous Waters radar reports are sent to TMA to
allow for merging with passive contacts. (This cleans up the Nav Map.) The
FFGs air and surface search radars are off by default. Orange text on a
button indicates that radar is OFF.
BClick ADT (Air Search) and/or SDT (Surface Search) to toggle the
state of the specific radar. (Green indicates the radar is ON.)
If Show Link is ON, the symbols representing the Link reported
contacts and the radar returns are located on or nearly on top of

each other. Contacts detected by other OS Sensors also appear
on the Weapons Coordinator Geoplot thus it is possible to see
contacts with lines of bearing.
The sweep seen in the Geoplot when a radar is on indicates
nominal the range of the radar.
REMRO
The REMRO (Remote Radar Operator) button is not active unless an
Ownship helo is aloft, sync has been established, OS has Helo Control and
the helo has been set to send radar data to the ship as described below:
To enable REMRO
1. Select the ASTAC Station [F3].

2. In the ASTAC Geoplot select the OS helo symbol. SYNC is
established.
3. IN LINK MODE click RADAR. This orders your Deployed Helo to begin
radiating.
4. Return to the Weapons Coordinator Station [F8] then click REMRO to

receive the see the helos Radar data. (In Multiplayer games when
another player is controlling your in-flight helo, the helo player must
turn the RADAR on before you can receive his data.)
5. Detected contacts are automatically marked as Ownship contacts as

long as REMRO is ON.
7-51
9 Note: Radar sends an update to the Geoplot and Nav Map every two
minutes as long as the radar detects the contact.
P L AC I N G C O N T AC T S
I N TH E
TARGET QUEUE
The primary purpose of the Weapons Coordinator console is to place

appropriate targets in the Target Queue for prosecution from the Weapons
Control Station. Unlike the controllable submarines, contacts need not be
categorized by type (Air, Surface, Subsurface) in order to appear in the
Target Queue. Unknown contacts as well as Link contacts and even Link
participants can be placed in the queue.
9 Note: Be aware that any contacts currently in the Target Queue are
cleared if you toggle Show Truth. These contacts are not returned to
the queue when the mode is returned to the original setting. You
must re-enter the contacts.
1. Select a contact in the Geoplot. (If you are having difficulty selecting a
contact see the TIP below.) When the selected contact is a valid target
the ENGAGE button is activated. (The button is greyed when a nonvalid contact is selected, for example OS helicopter and sonobuoys.)
2. Click ENGAGE. The Track ID of the contact is added to the Target

Queue and is now available for weapon assignment in the Weapons
Control Station.
3. Select a Track ID in the list and click

DISENGAGE to remove it from the Queue.
HOLD to notify the Weapons Control Station not to fire on this
contact. (You are not prevented from firing on a contact that has a
hold. This is used in Multiplayer Multi-Station mode to notify the
Weapons Control player to check with the Weapons Coordinator
before engaging the contact.)
BREAK ALL to remove all contacts from the Target Queue.
9 Note: Submarine contacts must be added in the Weapons

Coordinator Station to be available in the Target Queue in the
Torpedo Control Station.
Tip: Because scroll and zoom are limited in the Weapons Coordinator
Geoplot it is difficult to select separate symbols when multiple sensors are
reporting the same contact. Press [Tab] to move between contacts. Check
the DDI for the source of the report to determine when an OS reported
contact is selected. If the Geoplot is zoomed the selected contact may be
off the screen. Zoom out before tabbing. From the Nav Map your can also
Hide Link Data to better see your own contacts.
W E AP O N S C O OR D I NA TO R DDI
The following information is available in the DDI on a contact selected in the
Weapons Coordinator Geoplot:
7-52
Track: Track number of the selected contact.

Brg: True bearing of contact.
Rng: Range in yards from Ownship.
Spd: Speed in knots.
IFF: Identification Friend or Foe. Aircraft only are identified as Civilian,
Friendly or Unknown.
Source: The sensor or other source reporting the selected contact.
ID: Alliance as assigned by the player. Pending indicates unknown or
not yet specified.
Class/Category: Type of platform (Surface, Air, Sub). Actual class
name appears for Ownship and Ownships helicopter at all times and
for all platforms when Show Truth is ON.
Any contact detected by the surface search radar is assigned
Category: Surf. Any contact detected by the Air Search radar is

assigned Category: Air. If the radar misclassifies a contact, select
the contact and click CLASSIFY. Then click AIR or SURF as
appropriate.
CPA Brg: Projected true bearing of the selected contact when it
course and speed of Ownship and selected contact.)
CPA Rng: Projected range of the selected contact when it reaches its
closest point of approach (CPA) to Ownship (given current course and
speed of Ownship and speed selected contact.)
Crs: Course of selected contact.
W E A P O N S C O OR D I NA TO R VAB P A NE L
The weapons coordinator activates the RADAR and manipulates and
selects contacts in the Geoplot for placement in the Target Queue. The
following buttons are used to place contacts in the Target Queue or remove
them from the queue. A target in this queue is easily targeted in the
Weapons Control Station.
TARGET QUEUE Controls

ENGAGE: Click to place the selected contact into the Target Queue.
When the selected contact is already in the Target Queue, the
DISENGAGE button is active. This button is not activated if no contact
or an invalid target is selected (OS, OS Helo, sonobuoys, torpedoes).
DISENGAGE: Click to remove the selected contact from the Target
Queue.
HOLD FIRE: Click to place a Hold Fire on this target. Brackets appear
around track numbers in the Target Queue when a hold fire is ordered.
Click again to remove the Hold Fire designation.
The Hold Fire designation can be over-ridden in Weapons Control
[F10] but serve as a reminder for the Weapons Control player in

7-53
Multi-Station mode to check with the Weapons Coordinator before

engaging this target.
BREAK ALL: Click to remove all targets from the Target Queue.
TARGET QUEUE: Lists the track numbers of all contacts designated
with the ENGAGE button. Targets designated here appear in the
Target Queue in the Weapons Control Station [F10]. Surface and
subsurface contacts placed in the list appear in the Torpedo Station
Target Queue.
NO SYNC/SYNC: Indicates the current state of link between Ownship
and Ownships airborne helicopter. (Sync is set in the ASTAC station.)
Geoplot Controls
CENTER OWNSHIP: Click to center Ownship in the Geoplot. (Ownship
is always centered unless the OS helicopter is centered.)
CENTER HELO: Click to center Ownships helo in the Geoplot. The
helo can only be centered when Sync is established from the ASTAC
station.
DISPLAY SETTINGS: Click to display the Geoplot range selection
buttons.
Range Buttons: Click to set the effective radar range for the
selected radar (10, 20, 40, 80, or 160 nautical miles.) (The surface
radar (SDT) has a maximum range of 40 nm.)
BACK: Click to return to the previous VAB Panel.
Radar Controls
Each of the Radars is represented by an individual single-sweep. The
length of the sweep represents its nominal range. Ownships air and
surface search radars emanate from the OS symbol. REMROs single-line
sweep emanates from the helicopter symbol.
ADT: Click to turn ON/OFF the air search radar (AN/SPS-49.)
SDT: Click to turn ON/OFF the surface search radar (AN/SPS-55.) The
maximum range of the surface radar is 40 nautical miles.
REMRO: (Remote Radar Operator) Click to view the sweep and from
your in-flight helicopter. This option is only available when the helo is
aloft and SYNC is established in the ASTAC Station. The in-flight
helicopter must be set to RADAR in the Link Mode section of the
ASTAC VAB Panel.
Green text on these buttons indicates the radar is ON. Contacts
are no longer updated when a Radar is off.
CLASSIFY
The Classify function in the Weapons Coordinator Station is used to classify
a contact selected in the Geoplot. Only contacts detected by Ownships
7-54
sensors can be classified. When a Link or Truth contact is selected, the

Classify button is unavailable.
CLASS (Category): Class is selected by default. Click the desired
category to assign that category to the selected object or platform. The
selected name appears in the Category field in the DDI. The selection
affects the shape of the NTDS symbol shape on the Geoplot and Nav
Map.
9 Note: The Category label in the Weapons Coordinator DDI changes
to Class when Truth objects are selected. (Ownship and OS
helicopters are always reported as Truth.) See Main
Menu/Options/Game/Show Truth for information on the Truth
objects. When Show Allies is selected in the Game Options screen,
any selected allied contact is reported as Truth. When Show Truth is
selected in the Game Options, the true class of any selected object
appears in the Class field of the DDI.)
STATUS (ID): Click STATUS to display a selection of alliance IDs.
Click the desired alliance designation to assign it to the selected
contact. This choice displays in the ID field in the DDI when this contact
is selected.
BACK: Click to return to the Main Weapons Coordinator VAB panel.
FF G TMA S TATION [F9]

Target Motion Analysis (TMA) is used to determine the most likely bearing,
range, course, and speed of surface and subsurface contacts within range
of the ships sensors. This information, also called a solution, is used to
accurately target hostile contacts and also to avoid collision with other
vessels. TMA is not simple. The basic steps for performing TMA are found
in Training/TMA Basics in this manual. A description of the FFGs TMA
station and information on using the FFGs unique TMA Plot are found here.
Until you get the hang of TMA you might want to turn your TMA Autocrew
on while you are at other stations.
7-55
TMA Plot
Speed Ruler
Tearing Edge Trial Solution Area
Lines of Bearing
Ruler well
Ownship Course and Speed Indictor Light
FFG TMA Station
T H E TMA P L O T
The TMA Plot in the FFG is modeled after a Dead Reckoning Tracer (DRT.)
It plots bearing and range returns (when available) of contacts detected and
marked by Ownships sensors. Unlike the digital TMA displays in the
submarines, the FFG in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters does it the old
fashioned way, on paper. A speed ruler is used to determine the most likely
speed, course and range of the contact.
A contact must be selected in the TRACK drop-down list on the Track
Report Update tablet and at least one line of bearing must be visible on the
TMA Plot before a speed ruler is visible. A contact must be marked by one
of Ownships sensors before it appears in the track list.
9 Note: Normally visual and radar contacts would not be marked on
the TMA plot; however, in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters the track
numbers for all contacts marked by your FFG sensors appear in the
TMA list to facilitate merging tracks and cleaning up the 3D View.
Link participants and Link contacts do not appear in the TMA track
list.)
Automatic Updates: When a contact is assigned a tracker (an ATF in the
Towed array or the ATT in Hull active sonar) update reports are sent to
TMA every two minutes. When the Towed Array and EW Autocrew are on,
7-56
updates are also sent to the TMA station. Contacts marked by the FFG
Lookout and radar (when it is on) are also updated every two minutes.
Manual Updates: Since there are a limited number of trackers that can be
assigned to contacts in the FFG, you may want to manually re-mark
contacts that have not been assigned trackers. If a two-minute interval has
not passed before you re-mark a given contact, a new line will not appear
on the TMA plot for that contact. Be sure to wait a full two minutes. Note the
time on the most recent LOB when deciding when to re-mark a contact.
Viewing Updates: While tracks that have been assigned trackers or are
updated by Autocrew are always being updated, the newly reported LOBS
are only added to the plot when the track is reselected. If a track is selected
in the dropdown list its updates appear as you watch.
TMA Speed Rulers

The FFGs TMA speed ruler is depicted as a clear plastic ruler with fixed
tics indicating two-minute intervals at the speed indicated on the ruler. The
FFGs speed ruler does not stretch as the digital speed strips in the
submarine TMA stations; it must be swapped to try different speeds. A ruler
is swapped by selecting a different speed in the SPD field in the Track
Update Report.
Course Direction
Indicator arrows
Using the FFG TMA Speed Ruler
1. Click on the center of the ruler and drag it to move the ruler to a new
location.
2. To move an end of a ruler, click and drag the desired end of the ruler.
7-57
3. To select a different speed ruler click or right-click in the in the speed

field of the Track Update Report.
4. To indicate course: Arrows on either side of the selected speed noted

on the ruler indicate course direction. It is not necessary to have the
extreme left tic be on the oldest line, just be aware that the course of
the track is indicated by the arrows. Click and drag the end of the ruler
to place it in an orientation that depicts your best guess as to the
course of the contact.
5. Note the location of the tiny circular Current Position Indicator. Given
the course, range and speed indicated by the ruler position, and the
last sensor report, the tiny circle marks the probable current position of
the contact.
Current Position Indicator
9 Note: The towed array picks up low flying aircraft. When the TMA
Autocrew is ON you may see ruler speeds in excess of 50 knots.
This is the Autocrews attempt to analyze the data from the detected
aircraft.
Cursor Position and Solution Readout

In the upper right corner of the TMA Pot is a readout of the cursor bearing
and range. Once a solution is entered for the selected track the entered
range, bearing, speed and course of the contact appear beneath the Cursor
location information whenever that contact is selected. See Training/TMA
Basics for information on generating solutions.
7-58
Solution
entered in
Track Update
Report for
the selected
contact.
Ownship Course and Speed Indicator Light

A bright pinpoint light shines through the TMA Plot paper to represent
Ownship position. This light moves corresponding to Ownships course and
speed; when the light reaches the edge of the paper, it begins blinking. The
sheet must be removed to again center the OS light in the center of the
TMA Plot. Click TEAR HERE to remove the sheet.
Be aware that all contact bearing lines, the track history of all contacts, is
lost when the page is removed. When TMA Autocrew is on he automatically
tears the sheet when the light reaches the edge of the paper. You must
remark contacts that are not assigned ATF or ATT trackers and re-select a
Contact ID before new LOBs appear on the plot.
The scale of movement of the Ownship marker is changed by selecting the
desired range (in nautical miles) with the RANGE SCALE switch at lower
right of the TMA Station.
Lines of Bearing
When a contacts track number is selected in the Track Update Report, the
bearing data for that contact appears on the TMA Plot as a line of bearing
or multiple lines of bearing. Depending on the sensor, reports update at
regular intervals. Towed Array passive sonar contacts update every two
minutes when an ATF tracker is assigned. Active Sonar has one tracker
(ATT) that, when assigned, sends a report every two minutes.
9 Note: In S.C.S. Dangerous Waters the FFGs radar, when ON,
reports a contact to the TMA Plot as a line of bearing ending with a
tiny x at the range of the contact. The Lookouts visual reports are
also reported to the TMA Plot. This allows you to merge visual and
radar contacts, which provide range information, with passive
7-59
contacts, which consist of a line of bearing in order to clean up the

Nav Map. Radar reports are updated in two-minute intervals.
Lookout reports also update with an LOB every-two minutes;
however, because the Lookout reports frequently, a tiny x at the
reported range appears on the TMA screen between LOB reports.
This gives you an indication of the contacts course.
Sensor data is color-coded according what type of sensor is reporting the
contact. LOB colors are shown in the chart below:
FFG LOB colors
Towed Array:
Magenta
Active Sonar:
Green
Hull Passive Sonar:
White
Sonobuoy, Passive:
White
Sonobuoy, Active:
White
EW:
Red
Radar:
Yellow
Lookout:
Red
Each LOB is time stamped with the time in the mission at which it was
marked or reported. The time stamps appear on the TMA Plot beside
each LOB. It is sometimes difficult to view all the times when zoomed
out all the way.
When the contact is within the currently displayed range scale, lines of
bearing reported by active sonar, the lookout, and radar end with a tiny
x at the range reported.
BClick on a Line of Bearing to see the track number associated with
the bearing report.
BRight-click on a line to erase it. A faint remnant remains, as does
the time stamp.
Tearing Edge
When the Ownship Course and Speed Indicator light reaches the edge of
the paper it is necessary to tear off that sheet and reset the Ownship
marker to the center of a clean page.
BClick TEAR HERE to center the Ownship Course and Speed
Indicator on a clean piece of paper in the TMA Plot.
Be aware that tearing off the page removes the line of bearing
history for all contacts. After the sheet is torn, you will need to
remark manual contacts before they will again appear on the TMA
plot. Tracks that are assigned ATF and ATT trackers, screens with
activated Autocrew, and Lookout and Radar sensors will
automatically begin to send new reports after a two-minute
interval.
7-60
When Autocrew is on he will automatically tear the paper when
Ownship reaches the edge of the paper. If you zoom the display
such that the Ownship Course and Speed Indicator is off the paper
while Autocrew is on, he automatically tears the sheet.
Tip: If you have a good solution for a contact, be sure to enter it before
tearing off the sheet. Be aware that once entered a solution stays in effect
even after the sheet is torn off. Once the sheet is replaced, you can refine
the solution by changing the digits in the trial solution area and clicking
ENTER again.
TMA
ON
FFG C O NT A C TS
W I TH A
R E P OR TE D R A N GE
The sensors that provide range data, in addition to bearing information, are
the Hull sonar and sonobuoys in Active mode, the forward and aft Lookouts,
and Air Search and Surface Search Radars. Contacts marked by these
sensors appear on the TMA Plot as a bearing/range pair. What you see is a
bearing line ending with a tiny x at the detected range of the contact for
each report from these sensors.
If the targets bearing and range are known at two different times, as may
be the case with these sensors, the solution can be found by connecting
dots and creating a line with the ruler for course and speed.
A sonobuoy in active mode provides returns from the location of the buoy
rather than from Ownship on the TMA plot. Hull active sonar, Lookout and
Radar contacts, appear at the end of a line of bearing from the location of
the Ownship indicator light at the time of the report.
To determine a solution for contacts with a reported range
1. Identify and mark a contact with active sonar either at the Hull Sonar
Station or from returns from a DICASS buoy in active mode. (See FFG
Hull Sonar and FFG Acoustic Station sections of this manual for more
information on marking contacts in those stations.) Lookout and Radar
contacts are marked automatically. Find the track number of the
contact in the TRACKS dropdown in the Track Update Report tablet at
the TMA Station.
Only contacts detected by Ownships sensors appear in the list.
The track numbers for Link participants and Link Contacts do not
appear in the TMA list.
Active sonar returns from the hull sonar and sonobuoys appear on
the TMA Plot with green lines of bearing.

Radar contacts appear on yellow lines of bearing.
Lookout contacts appear on red lines of bearing.
When these sensors report a range, the line of bearing ends with a
tiny x at the range reported. The x appears only if the range is

within the current TMA Plot range scale setting.
7-61
2. One ATT (tracker) can be assigned to an active contact in the Hull

Sonar active mode. If no ATT is assigned to the track, mark the contact
again after a two-minute interval. Continue to mark the contact at twominute intervals to accumulate several bearing lines. Toggle back and
forth between the TMA and your chosen sensor.
3. The Lookout and Radar lines of bearing update automatically at twominute intervals. The Lookout also sends tiny x marks with no attached
line of bearing between the two-minute intervals.
4. Zoom the TMA Plot range if possible to get as clear a view as possible
of the x marked ends of the bearing lines. Because of the restrictions of
the FFG TMA plot, it is often not possible to zoom in and still see the
ends of the lines.
5. Click in the Speed field of the Track Update Report to change the
speed of the ruler until you find a ruler with tics that line up with the x
marks at the ends of the lines.
6. Position the tic edge of the ruler along the x marks at the ends of the
bearing lines such that the direction arrows are pointing in the direction
the contact is heading.
BClick the center of the ruler and drag it to move the entire ruler in
its current orientation.
BClick an end of the ruler to drag that end. Make sure the arrows on
the ruler are pointing in the direction of the most recent LOB.
7. Change the ruler speed as needed until you find one that best matches
the end points of the x marked lines of bearing. When you have the
best match, click ENTER under the folded corner of the Track Update
Report at the bottom right of the tablet to enter your solution.
The solution (consisting of the speed, course, range and bearing indicated
by the ruler and its position) is entered in the system and appears in the
upper right of the TMA Plot whenever the contact is selected.
On the Nav Map, the LOB for that contact is removed and the contact
symbol now moves on the course and at the speed dictated by the solution
you entered.
TMA
ON
FFG P A S S I V E S O N AR
A ND
EW
C O NT AC T S
A more complex situation arises when only the contacts bearing is known,
as is the case with passive sonar and EW reports. In the FFG up to eight
ATF trackers can be assigned to passive contacts in towed array. If your
EW Autocrew is on, EW contacts are reported to TMA automatically; if OFF,
you must mark the contacts and update them yourself. There are no
trackers of any kind for sonobuoys or hull passive sonar contacts.
Contacts detected by a sonobuoy in passive sonar mode are displayed
from the location of the sonobuoy on the TMA board and in the Nav Map
and Geoplots. Towed array contacts display from the location of the towed
array (approximately a mile behind of the ship.)
7-62
To perform TMA on passive sonar contacts:
1. Select a contact to analyze. Passive contacts have colored LOBS as

noted: EW: Red; Hull passive and passive sonobuoys: White;
Towed Array: Magenta. The lines of bearing end at a default range.
The length of the default line is not an indication of the actual range of
a passive contact. You must determine that for yourself. The contact
may be beyond the default range of the line. You can position the ruler
beyond the LOBs if you suspect that is the case.
2. When you have several lines of bearing, determine if the Lookout has
reported the contact or if you have the same contact on active sonar or
radar, and merge them. This can be very useful if you have a good
range from active sonar and a good bearing history from EW or
passive sonar. When a contact is merged, both reporting sensors
update at about the same time when the merged contact is selected in
the TRACK list. Updates are only seen for the contact that is selected.
The FGG is noisy making it difficult to hide your location from a
sub, which is no doubt aware of your presence long before you are
aware of his. Because of that, using your active sonar is not the
disadvantage to you as it is to a sub that is trying to maintain
stealth.
3. Enter any known data in the trial solution data fields. If you have
additional data on the contacts range, or course, for example from an
intelligence message, enter it in the appropriate solution field. If you
have determined the contacts speed using DEMON, enter that speed
in the solution field.
4. Select a speed for the ruler and position the ruler to create possible
solutions for the LOB data you see. The current ruler position is
reflected in the BRG, RNG, CRS and SPD fields in the Trial Solution
Area in the Track Update Report.
5. If you are sure about one aspect of the solution (e.g. range) enter that
value directly into the Range field then lock the field. That keeps you
from dragging the ruler to a different range. To lock a field, click the
check box associated with the field.
6. When you think you have a plausible solution click ENTER at the
bottom right corner of the Track Update Report.
The solution is entered into the system. The system tracks the
estimated position of the contact based on this solution and uses

that estimated location when targeting the contact. The LOB is
removed from the contact on the Nav Map and the map symbol
moves at the course and speed designated in the solution.
7. Change course and/or speed. When analyzing passive contacts it may

be necessary to maneuver to gain additional information. Changing
your course and/or speed can refine the TMA solution. This changes
the relative motion between your ship and the contact. After steadying
on the new course and/or speed, adjust the ruler to achieve the best fit.
7-63
This second leg should help to eliminate solutions that are

unreasonable. A third leg or more will refine the solution further.
Remember that the Towed array is dragged a mile behind the
ship. It will take some time for it to straighten out.

If one TMA solution does not fit the entire observed bearing data,
consider the fact that the contact itself may have changed course
and/or speed. You my want to disregard the earlier lines of bearing
and concentrate on the most recent returns.
Tearing the sheet removes the data for all contacts. Reselecting a
contact does not return old data to the plot. You must mark
contacts again. If trackers are assigned, they will begin updating
again after a two-minute interval.
T R A C K U PD A TE R EP OR T
The fields of the Track Update Report sheet are described here:
TRACK: Displays the track number of contacts detected Ownships
EW, Towed Array, Active and Passive Sonar sensors and sonobuoys.
BRG: Displays the true bearing to the contact as of the last sensor
report.
RNG: The range (in yards) from Ownship based on the location of the
ruler on the most recent Line of Bearing.
CRS: The course of the track based on the direction of the Speed
Ruler.
SPD: Indicates the current speed in knots in use on the Speed Ruler.
Changing the digits in this field results in new speed ruler on the TMA
Plot. The speed indicated on the ruler is the speed that is entered into
the solution.
BClick the up and down arrows to the left of SPD to select a ruler
that indicates a higher or lower speed.
ENTER: Under the upturned corner of the Track Update Report sheet
click ENTER to enter the solution indicated by the placement of the
speed ruler.
T R A C K M E R G E R E P OR T
When different sensors detect the same contact it is sometimes helpful to
merge those contacts to help reduce clutter on the Nav Map and merge all
incoming data into one TMA solution. With information from more than one
sensor displayed together on the TMA Plot it is sometimes easier to
pinpoint the exact range.
The lower tablet provides the means for Merging, Splitting and Dropping
tracks by using the tabs described here. The components of the Track
Merge report are described here:
TRACK: Displays the track number of the Track selected in the upper
Track Update Report TRACK dropdown list.
7-64
MERGE Dropdown: Displays all track numbers but the one listed in
the TRACK field. Select one of these tracks to merge with the track
listed in the TRACK field.
MERGE corner: Click this text that appears under the folded corner of
the page to complete the merge of the two tracks selected in the
TRACK field and the MERGE dropdown.
To Merge a Track
1. Click the MERGE tab in the lower tablet.
2. Select the primary track from the TRACK dropdown in the Track
Update Report sheet. This automatically places the primary track
number in both the Track update Report and the Merge Track Report
TRACK Fields.
3. Select a secondary track from the MERGE dropdown list to merge with
the primary track.
4. Click MERGE in the folded corner of the Merge Update Report sheet to
perform the merge. The track that was selected in the merge dropdown
no longer appears in the Track list. The returns from the reporting
sensors of both the primary and secondary tracks now list the track ID
number of the primary track.
T R A C K S P L I T R E P OR T
Occasionally you may have merged two contacts in error or desire to
split a merged contact back into two separate components.
To Split Merged Tracks

1. Click the SPLIT tab in the lower tablet.
2. Select the merged track to be split in the TRACK dropdown in the
upper Track Update Report. This automatically places that merged
track number in the Track Field of the lower tablet.
3. Click SPLIT under the folded corner of the sheet to perform the split.
The merged track is split into its original components and their original
track numbers are restored.
T R A C K D R O P R E PO R T
Occasionally you may want to drop a contact that is of little interest or is
moving out of range.
To Drop a Track
1. Click the DROP tab in the lower tablet.
2. From the TRACK dropdown in the upper Track Update Report select
the Track number to be dropped. This places the track number in the
TRACK field in the lower Track Drop Report sheet.
3. Ensure that the track you want to drop is the one that appears in the
Track Field.
7-65
4. Click DROP under the folded corner of the sheet to perform the drop.
The Track number is removed from the system. The track may
reappear if you or your Autocrew remark it.
R A N GE S C AL E
The control switch in the lower right of the station interface controls the
range that appears in the TMA Plot. Click the number of the desired scale.
Numbers indicate nautical miles. Because the TMA plot can only be
zoomed in on dead center, the ends of the lines of bearing are frequently
out of view when zoomed.
FFG W EAPONS C ONTROL S TATI ON [F10]

The Weapons Control Station is used to launch SM-2 and Harpoon
missiles, and train and fire the Mk 75 (76 mm) gun and the Close In
Weapons System (CIWS). The Weapons Control VAB panel has four
modes, Missile Control, Gun Control, Harpoon Planning and CIWS Control.
These modes are navigable by buttons at the bottom of the VAB Panel. The
default view is Missile Control. Common to all modes is the DDI, the Target
Queue and the navigational buttons.
9 Note: Be aware that any contacts currently in the Target Queue and
all assigned targets are cleared if you toggle Show Truth. These
contacts are not returned to the queue when the mode is returned to
the original truth setting. You must re-enter the contacts.
Geoplot
Weapons Control VAB Panel
DDI
W E AP O N S C O N TR OL G E OPL O T
Ownship and all contacts inside the selected range scale including those
reported by Link participants and the Link participants themselves appear
on the Geoplot. Geoplot symbols may periodically jump or move when
updated by Link sources.
7-66
BUse the mouse wheel or press [CTRL] plus left and right mouse
clicks to zoom in and out when the cursor is in the Geoplot.
BClick and drag in the Geoplot to pan the display. Be aware that
you can drag all selected contacts entirely out of the display and it
can be difficult to find them again.
When a contact is selected in the Geoplot, information on the contact is
seen in the DDI at the top of the VAB Panel. Cursor bearing and range is
displayed in the DDI whenever the mouse is in the Geoplot display.
W E AP O N S C O N TR OL DDI
The following information is available on a contact selected in the Geoplot.
Track: Track number of the contact.
Source: Name of the reporting sensor.
Brg: True bearing of contact as reported by sensor or as entered at the
TMA solution.
Rng: Range of contact as reported by the sensor or as entered in the TMA
solution.
Crs: Course of contact as determined by the reporting sensor or as entered
in the TMA solution.
Spd: Speed of the contact as determined by the reporting sensor or as
entered in the TMA solution.
M I S S I L E C O NTR OL P A NE L
Depending on the missile selection, different button modes appear. The
following button configuration is seen by default in Missile Control Mode:
7-67
DDI
CAS Fire Control

Radar
Click to load an
SM-2 in the
launcher.
Displays Track
number of selected
SM-2 or gun target
when ASSIGN is
clicked.
Click to load a
Harpoon in the
launcher.
STIR Fire Control

Radar
Select a
previously
created Harpoon
Plan.
Displays Track
number of selected
SM-2 target when
ASSIGN is clicked.
Weapons
Control Modes
Create a Harpoon
Plan
TARGET QUE: Lists all contacts designated as high priority targets by the
Weapons Coordinator. Targets can be selected directly from the Weapons
Control Geoplot and do not need to be in the Target Queue.
STORES: Lists the current number of SM-2 and Harpoon Missiles.
RAIL STATUS: Indicates the status of the missile launcher. Text in the
Status field changes according to which missile is selected. Status is
EMPTY until SM-2 or HARPOON is loaded.
9 Note: You cannot fire a Harpoon or SM-2 missile at a target that is
behind Ownship.
SM-2: Click to load an SM-2 missile. Several Variable Action Buttons
(VABs) appear during the launch procedure of an SM-2 missile. The
complete steps needed to successfully launch an SM-2 describe the
VABS that appear in the process.
7-68
HARPOON: Click to load a Harpoon missile. The HARPOON button is

disabled unless you have created a HARPOON PLAN in the Harpoon
Plan Panel.
9 Note: Be sure to understand the steps before clicking HARPOON.
The Harpoon must be launched or jettisoned once it is warmed. It
cannot be returned to stores.
HARPOON PLAN: Click arrow to cycle through all available Harpoon
Plans. The assigned track appears in parenthesis following the plan
number. Plans with no assigned track are greyed out. Select a Plan number
to assign to the Harpoon on the rail. The next Harpoon that is launched
follows the plan selected here. A Harpoon Plan is created in the Harpoon
Plan Panel. Click the HARPOON PLAN button in the Weapons Control
Navigation buttons to access the Harpoon Plan Panel.
CAS STATUS/ STIR STATUS: Two fire control radars are available on the
FFG: CAS (Combined Antenna System) and STIR (Separate Track &
Illumination Radar). CAS can guide SM-2 missiles or control the gun. STIR
can only guide the SM-2 missile. A fire control radar can track only one
target at a time. The Harpoons do not require a fire control radar
assignment.
Both the CAS and STIR STATUS areas allow for assigning (and deassigning) a radar system to a target and for shutting down the missile once
it is launched.
Current Tgt: Lists the track number of the target assigned to the
specified radar.
ASSIGN: Click ASSIGN to assign the target selected in the Geoplot or
in the Target Queue to the specified radar. VAB changes to
DEASSIGN. Fire Control Radar begins illuminating the target.
DEASSIGN: Click DEASSIGN to turn off the fire control radar and unassign the target. Once the missile is launched this VAB changes to
CWI.
CWI: (Continuous Wave Illumination) CWI replaces the DEASSIGN
button in the CAS or STIR STATUS area once the missile it is guiding
is airborne. Turning off radar illumination signals the missile to shut
down. Once clicked, the assigned missile is destroyed and the CWI
button returns to its ASSIGN state.
To Launch an SM-2 Missile:

1. Select a target from the Target Queue or click on a target on the
Geoplot.
2. In the RAIL STATUS area click SM-2. This initiates the loading and
warming process. Current progress status flashes in the RAIL STATUS
area ending with READY SM-2. The RETURN button is activated.
BClick RETURN to return the missile to stores. The missile can be
returned at any point before launch.
7-69
3. When ready to launch the missile click ASSIGN in the STIR STATUS
areas. This assigns that fire control radar to the target selected in the
Target Queue or the Geoplot. The ASSIGN button changes to
DEASSIGN. (While the SM-2 can be guided with both the STIR and the
CAS, the STIR cannot be used with the Gun, therefore assign the STIR
to an SM-2 first to leave the CAS available for the gun. You are
prevented from assigning an SM-2 to the CAS unless the STIR is
currently guiding an SM-2 in the air.) Click DEASSIGN to turn off the
fire control radar and de-assign the selected target.
9 Note: The fire control radar begins radiating as soon as the target is
assigned and can be picked up by enemy ESM. That announces you
have hostile intent.
4. Once a fire control radar is assigned to the target, the FIRE button is
activated. Click FIRE. The COMFIRM VAB appears. (If a radar is
assigned to the target before the missile is loaded, the fire button
enables as soon as the missile loads.) If the FIRE button never enables
when you have a target assigned, the target may have already been
destroyed.
5. Click CONFIRM within five seconds to launch the missile. RAIL

STATUS updates to FIRING SM-2 until the missile is away. If you fail
to click CONFIRM in the allotted time, the FIRE and RETURN buttons
are reactivated.
6. The missile can be shut down once it is airborne. Click CWI in the STIR
STATUS area. This turns off the Continuous Wave Illumination (CWI)
and signals the missile to shutdown.
If you wish to launch another SM-2 missile while the STIR is
guiding the current missile, assign a target to the CAS. The

process is that same as described above.
Tip: The STIR can only guide SM-2 missiles while the CAS can guide both
SM-2 missiles and the gun. By using the STIR to guide the SM-2, you leave
the CAS available for gun engagements. You are prevented from assigning
an SM-2 to the CAS unless the STIR is currently guiding a missile. The
Harpoon has a builtin radar and does not use the CAS or STIR.
To Launch A Harpoon Missile:

1. Click the HARPOON PLAN navigational button and create a Harpoon
Plan for the desired target. (See FFG STATION/Weapons Control
Station/Harpoon Plan Panel for information on creating a Harpoon
Plan.)
2. Click the MISSILE CONTROL button.

3. Select the desired Harpoon Plan number by clicking the down arrow in
the Harpoon Plan area of the Missile Control Panel.
4. Click HARPOON in the RAIL STATUS area. The missile can be

returned to stores only until it begins warming.
7-70
5. Click RETURN to return it to stores. Once it begins warming it must be

launched or jettisoned.
6. When the Harpoon is READY, click FIRE.

7. Click CONFIRM within five seconds to proceed with the launch of the
weapon.
8. To jettison the missile click JETTISON.

9. Click CONFIRM within five seconds to jettison the weapon.
9 Note: The Harpoon has a standoff range of 5 nautical miles. It
cannot be fired against targets closer than five nautical miles to
Ownship.
G U N C O NT R O L P A N E L
The Gun Control panel targets and fires the Mk 75 (76 mm) gun. When
Ownships course is such that the gun cannot physically engage the target,
nothing happens when FIRE is ordered. The steps involved in firing the gun
describe the areas and buttons found in the Gun Control VAB Panel.
9 Note: As modeled in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters, the gun has a
range of 10 nm (approximately 20,250 yards.)
Engaging a Target With the Mk 75 Gun

1. From the Weapons Control Station click GUN CONTROL to access the
Gun Control VAB panel. The gun can only engage targets to port and
starboard and cannot fire on targets within two no-fire zones fore and
aft of Ownship. The no-fire zones appear on the Geoplot as two cones
filled with wavy lines.
2. Select a track number in the Target Queue or select a contact on the

Geoplot that is not in the no-fire zone.
3. Click ASSIGN in the CAS STATUS area to assign the target to the fire
control radar. The VAB changes to DEASSIGN. (The STIR can only be
used with the SM-2 missile.)
9 Note: If the CAS is currently guiding a missile, this button changes to
CWI (Continuous Wave Illumination.) Clicking CWI shuts down the
radar and causes the missile to self-destruct. When CWI is clicked or
when the missile reaches its target this VAB reverts to ASSIGN. If
the CAS was previously assigned to a contact, you may need to
DEASSIGN the previous contact to assign the desired contact.
4. Click HOLD FIRE to activate the SINGLE FIRE and RAPID FIRE
VABs.
BClick SINGLE FIRE to fire a single shot.
7-71
BClick RAPID FIRE to fire continuously. The gun continues to fire

until RAPID FIRE is clicked again or HOLD FIRE is selected or
you run out of munitions. The gun is reloaded automatically.
5. Follow the trajectory of the shot in the Camera view. Click the
CAMERA slider at the left of the screen to display the Camera view. (If
the selected contact does not appear in the camera, it is possible that
the contact is not where you think it is or that the contact has been
destroyed. Check the age of the contact in the Nav Map DDI. If it has
been some time since the contact was last updated this can indicate
that either the contact is out of sensor range, no tracker is assigned, or
the contact has been destroyed and has sunk, thus it cant be
updated.)
6. If the round misses the target, adjust the trajectory in the Manual
Correction area.
7. Click DEASSIGN to turn off the fire control radar and un-assign the
target from CAS when done firing.
MANUAL CORRECTION: If there is no wind and neither ship is moving,
the gun hits the target without correction. Such conditions are rare. Given
wind and ship movement, the trajectory may require manual adjustment.
1. Follow the shell trajectory and resulting splash in the camera view to
determine the need for adjustment.
2. In the Manual Correction area Click + or as needed to adjust the

bearing (Brg) and range (Rng) of the next shot. Correction is basically
trial and error.
CAMERA View: The camera view follows the shell trajectory.
BClick CAMERA slider at the left of the station to display the
Camera. You cannot pan in the 3D camera view. Your view is of
the guns view. Press [Ctrl] + [+] and [-] to zoom the camera view.
BClick the left and right facing arrows below the camera view to
switch between the Gun Turret view and the Helo Forward
Observer View. That view is only available when a Helo is aloft
and SYNC has been established.
BClick XCAMERA to retract the camera view.
HARPOON PLAN PANEL

The Harpoon Plan Panel is used to set the flight path and create enable
and shutdown presets for Harpoon missiles. A plan is specific to a selected
target. The plans created in the Harpoon Plan Panel are available for
selection in the Missile Control Panel. The steps for creating a Harpoon
Plan explain the VABs and areas of the Harpoon Plan Panel. Up to four
Harpoon Plans can be created. The FFG carries a maximum of four
Harpoons. The FFGs fire control radars are not needed for a Harpoon
launch. The missile has its own weapon radar and follows the course
specified in the plan.
7-72
Plan Target Area
Track number of
assigned contact.
APPLY button only
enables when the
selected contact is
within the Min and
Max range of the
missile.
Click to select
desired plan
number.
Apply Auto Presets
To Create a Harpoon Plan:

1. Click a number (1 4) in the PLAN SELECT area to create presets for
that plan number.
A Plan Paddle appears on the Geoplot at the end of a missile
flight path attached to the OS Symbol.
7-73
Shutdown range (S)
Flight Path Waypoint (F)
Missile Enable Range (E)
Plan Paddle
Harpoon Plan Paddle

There is one waypoint in the flight path marked with a tiny F. The
pointed end of the paddle, representing the missiles enable point

is marked with a tiny E. The flat end of the paddle, representing
the missiles shutdown range, is marked with a tiny S.
BClick the square next to the F, E or S to select it then drag the
square to adjust the paddle position or dimensions. (The Harpoon
has a minimum enable range of 5 nautical miles in S.C.S.
Dangerous Waters. The range to the enable point cannot be
placed closer than 5 nautical miles. The paddle will jump to an
acceptable range if you attempt to move it closer than its minimum
enable range.)
2. Click a track number in the TARGET QUEUE or click a contact on the

Geoplot to select that track as the target for this plan. The APPLY
button is enabled.
9 Note: If the APPLY button does not enable, the range of the selected
contact is either too close or too far from Ownship. See Harpoon
Minimum and Maximum Range below.
3. Click APPLY in the PLAN TARGET area. The assigned track number
appears below PLAN TARGET. This locks in the selected track as the
target for this plan. If APPLY is not clicked any changes made to the
presets are lost when a new plan or a different navigational button is
selected.
7-74
4. Click AUTO PRESET to set a computed intercept course, enable

range, shutdown range, default waypoint, and seeker pattern. The Plan
Paddle moves to encompass the selected track.
5. While you can click or right-click on the numerals in the PRESETS area
to adjust any of the settings it is easier to click the E, S or F squares in
the Plan Paddle on the Geoplot to adjust the enable, shutdown or
waypoint range. Moving the paddle automatically updates the numbers
in the Preset Panel. Be aware that the presets numbers constantly
update to reflect Ownships movement and the projected course and
speed of the target. The preset fields are described below.
6. To set a different target for this plan, select a different contact and
press APPLY. Manually move the Plan Paddle or click AUTO PRESET
again to move the paddle automatically to cover the new target.
7. Click MISSILE CONTROL. Select the plan number from the

HARPOON PLAN area. See FFG Stations/Weapons Control
Station/Missile Control Panel/To Launch A Harpoon Missile.
Harpoon Plan Presets
Enable Rng: This field shows the range at which the missiles radar
enables and begins searching. Minimum enable range is 5 nautical
miles. The enable point is identifiable on the Geoplot as a tiny square
with a tiny E at the pointed end of the Plan Paddle. Click the tiny
square and drag to the desired location. If you attempt to move the
enable range closer than its 5 nautical mile minimum, the paddle
automatically repositions such that the minimum enable range is
accounted for. Try moving the flight waypoint further away from
Ownship.
Shutdown Rng: This field shows the range at which the missile shuts
down automatically. This number indicates yards beyond the Enable
Range. The shutdown range is identifiable on the Geoplot as a tiny
square with a tiny S. Click the tiny square and drag to the desired
location.
Waypoint Rng: This field shows the range of the flight path waypoint.
The point is identifiable on the Geoplot as a tiny square with a tiny F.
Click the tiny square and drag to the desired location.
Seeker Pattern: Defines the weapons search pattern as Narrow or
Wide. Click the text in the Seeker Pattern field to switch between
options.
Harpoon Minimum and Max Range

The selected target must be within the Harpoons minimum enable range (5
nm) and maximum range (70 nm) from Ownship. If the selected contact is
too close or too far from Ownship the APPLY button will not enable.
If your manipulation of the flight waypoint or shutdown range creates a total
distance that exceeds the maximum range of the missile, the Plan Paddle
and/or flight path resize to fit its min and max range window. During the
resizing process the flight path jumps on the Geoplot.
7-75
CIWS P A NE L
The CIWS Panel is used to target and fire the 20-mm Mk 15 Phalanx
gatling Close-In Weapons System (CIWS). The Phalanx targets incoming
air contacts as assigned in manual mode or in one of two auto modes. The
CIWS tracks targets with its own independent radar system.
9 Note: When Show Truth is OFF, the contacts you see in the
Geoplots represent solutions. Solutions are your best guess as to the
location, course, and speed of the contact as provided by your OS
sensors, the Link or your own TMA assessment. If the solution data
for a contact is in error or is old, is possible that the contact you
select to target on the Geoplot or in the Target Queue is not at the
location seen in the solution or that the contact has been destroyed
since it was first reported. In this case, the fire control radar will not
acquire the selected target since it is not on the selected bearing.
Solutions are not automatically removed from the Nav Map, Geoplot
or TMA plot when they are destroyed. They proceed at the last
reported course and speed.
To Manually Engage Contacts with the CIWS:

1. Click HOLD FIRE to activate the CIWS VABs.
2. Select a target in the TARGET QUEUE or click a contact on the
Geoplot.
3. Click ACQUIRE and wait until the HOOKED bearing and the
ACQUIRED bearing match (or nearly match) indicating that the CIWS
is tracking the desired target.
Once you click ACQUIRE the radar remains locked on the
acquired contact even if you click on a different contact. To acquire

a different contact click ACQUIRE (or HOLD FIRE) again, to
deselect the current contact, select the new contact and repeat the
steps above.
9 Note: The maximum range of the CIWS projectile is modeled at
approximately 2 nautical miles (4050 yards). The CIWS radar can
detect contacts at a greater distance than the projectiles maximum
range. The Fire Control radar can pick up contacts between 2.5 and
3 nautical miles from Ownship (6,076 5,063 yards.)
4. When the numbers match (or are within a few degrees), click ENGAGE
to begin firing.
The ENGAGE button is greyed if the selected contact is out of
range of the CIWS Radar or in the no-fire zone.

Contacts in the no-fire zone: The CIWS is located at the back of
the ship and cannot target contacts in front of the ship that are
within a no-fire zone (15 degrees either side of Ownships bow.)
The no-fire zone is represented on the Geoplot as a cone
containing wavy lines extending in front of the Ownship symbol. If
7-76
you have acquired and are engaging a target that moves into the
no-fire zone, the gun ceases to fire. The radar continues to track
the target and the gun will begin firing again if the contact is still
within range when it emerges from the no-fire zone. Dashes
appear in the ACQUIRED field when the contact is in the no-fire
zone. The STATUS field continues to show ENGAGING during
this entire evolution, even when the CIWS is not firing.
Contacts within range of CIWS Radar: If the selected contact is
outside of the no-fire zone and within range of the CIWS radar but
not yet within range of the CIWS projectiles, clicking ENGAGE
assigns the radar to track the selected target and the CIWS begins
firing at the contact as soon as it is within range of the CIWS
projectiles. In this case, the STATUS field lists IDLE rather than
ENGAGING until the contact is under fire.
5. Click HOLD FIRE to stop firing.
Placing CIWS in Auto and Full Auto Mode.

Click the green HOLD FIRE button to access the AUTO mode VABs.
BClick AUTO to set CIWS to automatically engage air tracks for
contacts that are incoming in excess of 200 knots.
BClick FULL AUTO to set CIWS to automatically engage any air
track within range of the CIWS Radar.
9 Note: In FULL AUTO mode CIWS engages friendly as well as hostile
aircraft and missiles in range.
Remember that solution data does not go away by itself in the Nav
Map or Geoplots. If the CIWS is in Auto or Full Auto and stops

firing before running out of bullets, it is likely that the contact has
been destroyed. The contact may also have exceeded the range
of the CIWS.
Reloading the CIWS

The CIWS reloads automatically when it runs out of bullets if there is a
remaining magazine. If Weapon Quick Launch is OFF, the reload process
takes 20 minutes. If Quick Launch is ON the CIWS reloads in 20 seconds.
FFG T ORPEDO C ONTROL S TATI ON [F11]

In the Torpedo Control Station torpedoes in specific tubes are selected,
assigned to a target and presets are entered. The circular Torpedo Control
Display at the left of the screen helps the operator visualize the best course
to steer and gyro setting for an effective shot. The Torpedo Control Panel
on the right side of the station provides the means to select targets, view
the target solution and enter presets for the weapon.
9 Note: Be aware that any contacts currently in the Target Queue and
all assigned targets are cleared if Show Truth is toggled. These
7-77
contacts are not returned to the queue when the mode is returned to
the original setting. You must re-enter the contacts. If a tube is
assigned to a specific track when the Truth mode is toggled or the
track is otherwise dropped either by the weapons coordinator or from
the Nav Map or TMA Station, the weapon remains assigned to the
bearing of the original track number.
Torpedo Control Display
Torpedo Control Panel
Intercept Cursor
Representation of Ownship
Computer Intercept Data and Recommendations
T OR P E D O C O NT R O L D IS PL AY
The Display consists of the following parts:
Compass: The outer circle is a compass that rotates to indicate Ownship
course at the 12:00 position.
Target Track Numbers/Lines: Surface and subsurface tracks overlay the
compass as single lines accompanied by a track number. If no tracks are
listed in the TARGET QUEUE no tracks or lines appear on the Compass.
Intercept Cursor: The triangular cursor moves along the outer edge of the
circle and jumps to the computer intercept bearing of the target selected in
the TARGET QUEUE. The cursor turns a bright orange when Ownship's
course approaches the course recommended in the Course To Steer
readout and the gyro is set to the recommended setting. This indicates that
optimal launch conditions exist.
Ownship: The hull shape at center of the display represents Ownship. The
bow of the ship points to Ownship course on the compass.
Gyro Offsets: Lines radiating inward from the outer circle represent gyro
settings for the port and starboard launchers, and are labeled as either P or
S (for Port or Starboard) followed by the gyro offset.
7-78
Computed Intercept: When a target is selected in the Target Queue, the

Computed Intercept area contains a readout of the computed bearing and
range to the intercept point. If in Manual mode this shows the bearing of the
cursor in the outer compass.
Recommendations: When a target is selected, this area provides a
readout of the computer recommended course to steer, gyro setting and
Run to Enable (RTE). The Run to Enable and gyro settings are entered in
the Torpedo Control Panel. It may be necessary to change to the
recommended course to effectively engage the target.
T OR P E D O C O NT R O L P A NE L
Torpedoes and tubes are selected, presets entered and the weapons are
launched from the Torpedo Control Panel. The panel consists of these
areas, buttons and settings:
Weapon and Tube

Selectors
Targets entered by
the Weapons
Coordinator
Selected Target
Solution Area for

selected target
Torpedo Presets
READY/RELOAD
VAB
SHOOT
Port SVTT/ STRBD SVTT: The Port SVTT and Starboard SVTT buttons list
the weapon currently loaded in the tube. Presets are remembered
individually for each tube.
7-79
Selecting an empty tube begins the half hour reloading process; during
this time the button flashes Reload Time MM:SS and the other tubes
for that side go inactive. (When Weapon Quick Launch is selected in
the Options/Game screen, reload time units are reduced from minutes
to seconds.)
Clicking the Reload button again with greater than 15 minutes
remaining cancels the reload and re-activates the other tubes; under
15 minutes the process cannot be halted.
The weapon to be loaded is not selectable; Mk-50 torpedoes are
automatically chosen first until they are depleted.

Maximum torpedo range as modeled in S.C.S - Dangerous Waters:
Mk-46 Torpedo: 12,000 yd (10,973 m; 6 nm)
Mk-50 Torpedo: 14,177 yd (12,960 m; 7 nm)
TARGET QUEUE: Targets are added to the Target Queue at the Weapons
Coordinator Station [F8]. No air contacts appear in the Torpedo Target
Queue. When targets are in the queue, their track numbers appear in the
compass area of the Torpedo Control Display next to a short line. By default
Manual is selected in the list.
Solution Area: When Manual is selected, the range, course, and speed
fields in the solution area are blank; only the current cursor bearing is
shown. The bearing field in the Computed Intercept area reflects the cursor
bearing.
When a track number is selected in the TARGET QUEUE the solution data
for that target (bearing, range, course and speed) displays in the fields
directly below the Target Queue. Depending on the source of the selected
track, the solution may be determined by the source (Link, FFG Lookout) or
entered by you or your TMA Autocrew at the TMA Station. The solution is
only as good as the source. When the contact selected in the Target Queue
has only a line of bearing, no solution data exists. Only the bearing appears
in the solution area.
Torpedo Preset Area: Here you enter torpedo settings appropriate for the
selected target and weapon. Check the Recommendations in the lower
portion of the Torpedo Display for presets generated by the ships computer.
BClick or right-click to increase or decrease a digit in the preset
area.
Gyro: Click + or to change the Gyro Offset to match that shown in
the Recommendation area in the Torpedo Control Display. When the
correct preset is entered the Intercept Cursor in the display turns a
bright orange color.
RTE (Run to Enable): This number (in yards) sets the distance at
which the torpedo enables and begins searching.
Pattern: Sets search pattern to Snake or Circle. Click button to toggle
pattern selection.
7-80
Mode: Sets Active or Passive mode for the selected Torpedo. Click the
button to toggle mode.
Dep: Sets the maximum depth for the torpedo run. (In feet)
Ceil: Sets the minimum depth (ceiling) for the torpedo run. (In feet)
Spd: Sets torpedo run speed in knots. Speed cannot be set higher
than the maximum speed of the weapon.
Floor: Sets the depth below which the weapon will not go.
F IR IN G
T O R P E DO
Targets are selected for engagement and placed in the Target Queue at the
Weapons Coordinator station. Surface and submarine targets added there
are available for selection in the Torpedo Control Station.
Targets with Solutions

The following steps assume a track number with a solution is selected in
the Target Queue. All such targets have all four elements of a firing
solution: Bearing, range, course and speed. Given this information, the
system easily computes the intercept point for such targets.
1. Select a track number from the target cue. Solution data fills in all fields
in the solution area. The triangular Intercept Cursor snaps to the
projected intercept point on the Torpedo Control Display. The computer
generated intercept bearing and range appear at the bottom of the
display window along with the recommended presets in the Computed
Intercept and Recommendations area of the Torpedo Display Window.
The Intercept cursor turns a bright orange when the ships course
and gyro presets are set to ensure a favorable launch position.
2. In the Presets Area of the Torpedo Control Panel, enter the gyro and
RTE (Run To Enable) settings shown in the Recommendation area on
the Display window.
3. If necessary, change course to that recommended in the Course to

Steer field.
4. Set presets as appropriate. Click or right-click the digits to enter the

desired settings.
5. Click READY. The button flashes until the SHOOT button is enabled.
READY becomes CANCEL. The presets are locked on the current
settings for the selected torpedo.
6. Click SHOOT to fire the torpedo.

BClick CANCEL to return to the presets mode to change a preset or
select a different target for the torpedo.
Manual Mode and Tracks with LOBs

To fire a torpedo on a specific bearing, follow these steps:
7-81
1. Click a tube to select it. In general, it is best to select a tube on the

same side of Ownship as the contacti.e., port tube for a port side
contacts and starboard tube for a starboard side contact.
2. Select Manual in the Target Queue.

3. Click the Torpedo Control Display Compass at the desired intercept
bearing. Only the Bearing field in the solution area contains data.
4. Set the desired settings in the preset area taking into account the
recommendations at the bottom of the Torpedo Display. You may need
to alter course to ensure a successful shot.
5. Click READY. The presets for the weapon in the selected tube are
assigned and locked.
6. Click SHOOT or click CANCEL to free the weapon for a different

assignment.
It is possible for the Weapons Coordinator to assign tracks to the Target
Queue that consist only of a line of bearing, contacts for which no solution
has been entered in TMA. Such tracks are selectable in the Torpedo
Control Target Queue. The above steps apply for a track consisting only of
a line of bearing.
9 Note: When Torpedo Control Autocrew is ON, the only presets you
can alter in Manual Mode are Bearing and Gyro. No presets can be
altered when a numbered target is selected from the Target Queue.
Loading an Empty Tube:

Loading an empty tube takes thirty minutes. All tubes in the bank are
disabled while a tube is reloaded.
Tip: Turning on Weapon Quick Launch in the Options/Game screen
shortens the reload time from thirty minutes to thirty seconds.
1. Click an empty tube to select it. The RELOAD button replaces the
READY button. (The weapon to be loaded is not selectable; Mk-50
torpedoes are automatically chosen first until they are depleted.)
2. Click RELOAD to begin the reload process. The time remaining counts
down in the empty tube location. And other tubes in the tube bank on
that side of the ship are unavailable.
BClicking the RELOAD button with greater than 15 minutes
remaining cancels the reload and re-activates the other tubes.
BWhen time remaining is under 15 minutes the process cannot be
halted.
FFG M ACHINE G UN S TATION [F12]

The two 50-caliber machine gun stations are located in the aft part of the
ship above the Helo Deck. The guns are used to defend Ownship against
hostile small boats and small aircraft. The default view is Free Look.
7-82
From this location it is possible to see the aft portion of the ship not visible
from the bridge wings. Machine Gun and Binocular Views are also available
on both the port and starboard sides of the ship via the appropriate view
buttons.
Machine Gun
View
Port/Starboard
View Selector
Free Look
View (default)
Binoculars
BThe highlighted state indicates the current view. Click a dark state
to select that view.
M AC H I NE G U N V I E W
The starboard machine gun is seen by default when the Machine Gun view
is selected. Click the dark side of the ship profile next to the view control
buttons in lower left of the screen to switch to the other side of the ship. The
compass above the gun depicts the true bearing at the gun sight.
Port/Starboard Selector
Gun Temperature Bullets/Magazine
View buttons
Firing the Machine Gun

1. Click and drag in the view to pan and position the gunsight at the
desired bearing and elevation.
7-83
2. Position the gunsight on the target. When the target is in the center of
the gun sight the reticule becomes a black circle.
3. Right-click to fire the gun.

The gun overheats if fired continually. Watch the temperature gage.
When the gun overheats there is a short cool down period before the
gun can be fired again.
The gun automatically loads a new magazine when 100 shots have
been fired.
The maximum range for this gun as modeled in S.C.S. Dangerous
Waters is 2 nm (4050 yards).
FREE LOOK VIEW

Free Look, the default view, permits an unobstructed look at the 3D view to
the horizon on both the port and starboard sides of the ship. The area aft of
the ship is also visible.
BClick the Free Look view button to access Free Look view.
BClick and drag in the 3D view to adjust the view.
B I N OC U L AR S
The binoculars work nearly the same here as in the Bridge Wings; however,
from this station it is possible to switch directly to the view on the opposite
side of the ship.
BClick the Binocular Icon to access binocular view.
BClick the arrows at the upper left and right of the screen to switch
between the port and starboard views.
BClick and drag in the binocular view to pan and adjust the vertical
view.
BClick the + and buttons next to the Zoom display to change zoom
level.
BClick LLTV or VISUAL to switch between modes. The default is
Visual. Low-light Level TV (LLTV) is available for night scenarios.
FFG A UTOCREW
Below is a recap of all FFG Autocrew functionality. Remember that your
Autocrew is not 100% infallible. Some crewmen are better than others and
in some cases you may be better at a task than he is. In some stations the
Autocrew does everything for you. At other stations you still have tasks to
perform even when the Autocrew is on. These are noted below.
FFG C OU N TE R M E ASU RES A U TO C R E W

When ON the Countermeasure (CM) Autocrew launches Chaff and flares.
The FFGs Countermeasure Autocrew is set via the Autocrew slider in the
upper left corner of the Bridge Station.
7-84
Your Task: You can still launch CMs yourself and reload the tubes even
when the Bridge Countermeasure Autocrew is on.
FFG A C OU S TI C A U TO C R E W
When the Receiver Mode is set to SHIP and buoys are in the water, the
FFGs Acoustic Autocrew sets hot buoys to Directional mode and marks
contacts. He can only mark contacts in Directional Mode. He cannot change
the Receiver Mode. On the FFG, buoys can be set to Directional mode only
in Display Windows (Grams) A - D.
Your Task: You must place buoys in the water so the Autocrew has
something to process. Since the Acoustic stations defaults to AIR/SHIP
Receiver Mode and the AIR mode occupies Grams A D, the Autocrew
cannot mark anything until you first set the Receiver Mode to SHIP.
(Contacts can only be marked in Directional and Active mode.) Omni mode
is used only for detecting and classifying contacts. (You must set DICASS
buoys to Active mode yourself. See Training/Sonar School/Sonobuoys and
FFG Stations/Acoustic Station for information on the display window
requirements for setting buoys to Directional and Active modes.)
FFG EW A U T OC R E W
The EW Autocrew marks contacts but does not classify. You are prevented
from doing anything in the EW station when the EW Autocrew is on.
Your Task: You must turn EW Autocrew off to perform any tasks in the EW
station. It is your task to classify contacts by identifying the probable contact
from the list of classes known to carry the detected emitter. See FFG
Stations/FFG EW Station for information on classifying contacts in EW.
FFG L O O K OU T
The FFG Lookout is always ON. You cannot turn OFF this feature. The
lookout reports all visual contacts providing the relative bearing to the
contact and an estimated range. If the contact is close enough he may also
provide a fairly accurate classification. In S.C.S. Dangerous Waters FFG
lookout reports are sent to the TMA Station to facilitate merging with
passive contacts. This helps clean up the 3D View on the Nav Map.
FFG TMA A U TOC R E W

When ON the TMA Autocrew selects contacts for analysis, merges
contacts, determines probable course, range and speed and enters a
solution for the contact.
Your Task: You are prevented from making any inputs when the TMA
Autocrew is ON. You can select the contact to view. You see updates
appear only for the selected contact. If a contact is merged you see updates
from both reporting sensors when the merged contact is selected.
7-85
FFG T O R P E D O C O N TR OL A U T OC R E W
When ON the Torpedo Control Autocrew enters presets appropriate for the
selected contact.
Your Task: Select the target to attack and the tube to be fired. For Manual
shots you must set both the bearing and the gyro setting. All other presets
are set by the Autocrew and cannot be changed. You may need to alter
Ownships course to ensure a successful shot. You must also ready the
tube, locking in the presets for the selected weapon, and fire it.
FFG T O W E D A R R AY A U TOC R E W
Towed Array Autocrew marks contacts, assigns ATF Trackers and resolves
bearings in broadband; he also cycles through LOFAR data and classifies
contacts in Single Beam. The FFG Towed array always detects Ownship
because the array is dragged so far behind the ship. In order to conserve
trackers and minimize unnecessary clutter Autocrew does not assign a
tracker to the OS detection.
He will not mark or assign an ATF to the towed arrays detection of
Ownship. When Towed Array Autocrew is ON, you can select a beam in
LOFAR for him to examine in Single Beam mode but he may not classify it.
He rotates through all contacts on his own schedule.
Your Task: When the Towed Array Autocrew is ON you need do nothing
more at the Towed Array Station. However, since your Autocrew is not the
speediest, you can mark contacts and assign ATFs yourself. At a later time
the Autocrew may reassign your ATFs to another contact if the array is
detecting many contacts. Be aware that the Autocrew is not the best or the
quickest at classification. The Profile Filter is always ON and disabled when
Autocrew is ON. You can select any class in an available profile list and
apply it yourself.
7-86

6(&7,21
0+567$7,216
8-1
8: MH-60R STATIONS..........................................................................8-4
MH-60R TASK BAR ......................................................................8-4
STATIONS MENU ....................................................... 8-4
ORDERS MENU ......................................................... 8-4
DAMAGE REPORT W INDOW ........................................ 8-7
HISTORY W INDOW ..................................................... 8-7
MANEUVER SHORTCUTS AND GAME READOUTS ........... 8-7
TIME COMPRESSION SCALE ........................................ 8-8
MH-60R: PILOT STATION [F1] .......................................................8-8
MH-60R PILOT STATION FUNCTIONALITY .................... 8-9
PILOTING THE MH-60R WITH A JOYSTICK .................. 8-13
Programming a Joystick.................................. 8-13
Using a Joystick.............................................. 8-14
MH-60R: ATO STATION [F2] .................................................... 8-14
SONOBUOY LAUNCH DISPLAYS ................................. 8-17
To Launch a Sonobuoy................................... 8-18
To Place a Sonobuoy Drop Waypoint............. 8-18
WEAPONS LAUNCH DISPLAY ..................................... 8-19
To Launch a Penguin Missile.......................... 8-19
To Launch a Hellfire........................................ 8-20
To Launch a Torpedo...................................... 8-21
To Place a Torpedo Drop Waypoint:............... 8-22
MH-60R W EAPON PRESETS .................................... 8-23
Hellfire Missile Presets.................................... 8-23
Penguin Missile Presets.................................. 8-23
Torpedo Presets ............................................. 8-24
MH-60R: ACOUSTIC STATION [F3] ............................................. 8-25
ACOUSTIC DATA DISPLAY W INDOWS ......................... 8-25
To Enter a Frequency Alert............................. 8-26
To View Sonobuoy Data ................................. 8-26
Types of Sonobuoy DATA .............................. 8-27
Display Window Requirements by Mode ........ 8-27
Omni Mode Frequency Data........................... 8-27
Classifying a Contact with the Profile Library.. 8-28
Directional Mode Data .................................... 8-29
Active Mode Data ........................................... 8-29
MH-60R: RADAR STATION [F4].................................................. 8-31
DETECTING AND MARKING RADAR CONTACTS ............ 8-31
MH-60R NAVIGATION STATION [F5] .......................................... 8-31
OWNSHIP/ORDERS MENUS....................................... 8-31
CONTACT MENU ...................................................... 8-32
MH-60R MAD/ESM STATION [F6] ........................................... 8-32
MH-60R MAD DISTORTION RECORDER ................... 8-33
Using MAD/SAD Effectively ............................ 8-33
MH-60R ESM PANEL ............................................. 8-34
To Mark a Contact at the ESM Console.......... 8-34
Classifying a Contact at the ESM Console ..... 8-35
8-2
MH-60R DIPPING SONAR [F7] .................................................. 8-35

Deploying the Dipping Sonar: ......................... 8-35
Active Dipping Sonar ...................................... 8-36
Passive Dipping Sonar.................................... 8-37
MH-60R AUTOCREW ................................................................ 8-38
MH-60R ACOUSTIC AUTOCREW ............................... 8-38
MH-60R ATO AUTOCREW ...................................... 8-39
MH-60R AUTO PILOT.............................................. 8-39
MH-60R COUNTERMEASURE AUTOCREW.................. 8-39
MH-60R DIPPING SONAR AUTOCREW ...................... 8-40
MH-60R ESM AUTOCREW ...................................... 8-40
MH-60R RADAR AUTOCREW ................................... 8-40
8-3
8: MH-60R STATIONS
In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters the MH-60R multi-mission helicopter can be
deployed on ASW, ASUW and Strike missions. The MH-60R stations as
modeled are described in this section.
Station. The Navigation Station functions the same on every
controllable platform and is covered only once in the manual. See
Navigation Station. Some Nav Station information unique to the MH60R is contained in MH-60R Navigation Station later in this section.
MH-60R T ASK B AR
The MH-60Rs Task Bar is similar to all task bars but also has wind and
altitude readouts and shortcuts described below.
Stations Menu
Altitude Shortcut
Damage Report
Orders Menu
Course Shortcut
Speed Shortcut

Time Acceleration
Click the Stations Menu button to expand the selection menu. Select an
icon to jump to that station. Selected station icons are white.
Pilot [F1]
Acoustic [F3]
Navigation Map [F5]
[F2] ATO
[F4] RADAR
[F6] MAD/ESM
Dipping Sonar [F7]
O R D E R S M E NU
The Orders Menu provides a means for quickly issuing a variety of
commands. The commands available for the MH-60R are explained below.
8-4
Navigate: The following submenus are available:

Return to Base: When your Ownship is the in-flight helicopter for a
FFG in the mission, select this option to order your Helo to land on your
base platform to reload weapons or to satisfy a goal. (This option does
not appear if the mission designer created the helicopter you are
piloting as a standalone aircraft. A standalone aircraft has no base.)
When this option is selected the Auto Pilot steers the helicopter back to
the parent ship and lands it. The helicopter maneuvers to
approximately a mile behind the launching platform then turns to make
its approach. If you order a change in course, you must reselect Return
to Base to order OS to land. Once OS lands on deck, the MH-60R
Weapon Loadout Screen appears allowing you to reload or change the
weapons currently loaded.
Be warned that once you close the Weapon Loadout window you
cannot open it again. You must wait until you take off and land
again.
BTo take off again after landing: Enter an altitude that is
approximately 100 feet higher than the surface on which you have
landed. Then order a forward speed and a course. (There is a
delay of 3 minutes before you can take off again after landing. If
Aircraft Quick Launch is ON, this delay is reduced to 20 seconds.
A timer appears on the Nav Map displaying the amount of time
remaining until launch is possible.)
Speed: Displays a submenu of options that allow you to quickly set OS
speed to:
High: 127 knots, Medium: 67 knots, Low: 37 knots or Hover: 0
knots. (Wind conditions affect the indicated air speed seen in the
Speed shortcut in the Task Bar.)
Altitude: Displays a submenu of options that allow you to quickly set
OS altitude to High: 8499 feet, Medium: 3,999 ft, Low: 498 ft or Dip: 50
ft, the best altitude for using the dipping sonar.
Autocrew: Displays a submenu of Autocrew options available in the MH60R. A checkmark indicates the Autocrew is ON. Autocrew can also be
turned ON/OFF using the Autocrew slider button in the upper left of every
station that has Autocrew functionality. Complete information on MH-60R
Autocrew is found at the end of this chapter.
Auto-Countermeasures: When ON, Auto-Countermeasures Autocrew
launches Chaff and Flares when a missile is locked on Ownship and
takes evasive maneuvers.
ATO: When ON, ATO Autocrew enters presets for torpedoes.
Acoustic/Sonobuoys: When ON, Acoustic (Sonobuoy) Autocrew sets
buoys to Directional mode and marks contacts. When he is ON, you
are prevented from changing channel numbers. (He will change them
right back.)
8-5
Radar: When ON, Radar Autocrew marks radar contacts as long as

the radar is operational. You are prevented from moving the cursor.
ESM: When ON, ESM Autocrew marks contacts in the ESM Scope. He
does not classify them. You must do that. You are prevented from
moving the cursor or marking a contact while Autocrew is ON. (While
MAD shared the ESM station, MAD contacts are marked automatically
and are not tied to the ESM Autocrew.)
Dipping Sonar: When ON, Dipping Sonar Autocrew marks contacts in
Passive Sonar. He does not classify contacts. Autocrew has no role in
Active Dipping Sonar.
Launch Pylon: This option appears only when a weapon is assigned to a
specific target or bearing at the ATO Station either via the ASSIGN button
or weapon waypoint. Select the desired Pylon option to launch the weapon
immediately. When a Hellfire is assigned the Launch Pylon>Hellfire option
is greyed out until the target is within the Hellfires acquisition cone.
Countermeasures: Displays a menu of available countermeasures. Select
an option to launch a countermeasure of that type. The countermeasure
count in the Countermeasure Launch panel in the Pilot station is decreased
until all countermeasures have been launched.
Sonobuoy: Displays a menu of the remaining sonobuoy stores. Select a
buoy option to drop that sonobuoy immediately. Shallow = 90 feet; Deep =
400 ft.
Data Link: Displays a submenu of Link related Options. The Link provides
a secure method for sharing data with friendly platforms in the area.
Information on contacts detected by OS and friendly platforms is shared
with all other Link participants.
Nav Control: (SHIP/HELO): This feature is only functional in a
Multiplayer game when OS is a deployed Helo from a FFG that is
commanded by a different player. The FFG (SHIP) can request
navigation control of your Helo from you, then enter waypoints for you
to follow. Select SHIP to transfer navigational control to the FFG.
Select HELO to take back waypoint control. See MH-60R Stations/ATO
Station or Multiplayer/Gameplay Differences in Multiplayer/MH-60R
Multiplayer Gameplay Differences for more information.
Link Data: (ACOUSTIC/RADAR): This feature is only functional in a
Multiplayer game when OS is a deployed Helo from a FFG that is
commanded by a different player. When the FFG requests RADAR or
ACOUSTIC data from your sensors, his selection switches this option
automatically. Make sure that your Radar is ON when the FFG
requests Radar data. You need not be tuned to any buoys for you to
pass buoy acoustic data to the FFG.
SENSO: Displays a submenu of Sensor Operator (SENSO) Stations.
Hydrophone: Displays a submenu of commands that control the
deployment of the dipping sonar hydrophone.
Stream/Retrieve/Stop
8-6
MAD Sensor: Displays a submenu of commands that control the

deployment of the MAD sensor.
Stream/Retrieve/Stop
Radar: Turns the radar ON. A checkmark indicates the radar is
radiating.
MAD: Turns the MAD sensor ON. This option is only available when
the MAD sensor is deployed. (This cable is deployed from the ATO
screen or from the MAD sensor option in the Orders or Ownship
menus. A check mark indicates the sensor is ON.)
ESM: Turns the ESM sensor ON. A check mark indicates the sensor is
ON.
The History Window displays the type of history selected by the History
Selection buttons to the left of the window. The window scrolls as
necessary. The oldest history appears at the top of the window.
History type. If there is a new message in any other window, that windows
Radio Traffic History: Lists all radio messages received.
M A N E U V E R S H OR TC U T S
AND
Digits and buttons are green by default. Selected buttons are white and
maneuver shortcut digits change to white while changes are entered.
BTo change course, speed or altitude with a Maneuver Shortcut,
click digits to reflect the desired number. Left click to increment a
digit, right-click to decrement it.
ALT: Shows current altitude. Click digits to change altitude.
WIND: Displays the current wind speed in knots and direction in this
format: Wind Speed Direction.
8-7
SPEED: Displays relative speed through the air in knots. Click digits to
order a change in Ownship speed. The speed you order is speed over
the ground. If your ordered speed is 20 knots and you are flying into a
20-knot headwind, this readout displays 040 knots. If you are flying with
a 20 knot tailwind, it will read 000.
COURSE: Shows current course in degrees. Click digits to change
course.
word PAUSED.
bar.

BPress [.] (period) or [,] (comma) or click/right-click on the scale to
toggle through all the time scales
MH-60R: P ILOT S TATION [F1]

From the MH-60R Pilot Station countermeasures are launched and warning
lights and fuel gauges are monitored. Course can be changed in the station
interface but speed and altitude are changed as described below. The
location of Ownship in relation to other contacts is monitored in the Geoplot
Display. If so desired, the MH-60R can be piloted with a joystick when you
are at the Pilot Station. See Piloting the MH-60R with a Joystick later in this
section.
8-8
The Pilot Station is made up of the following components.

CM Autocrew Slider
CM Panel
Course Indicator/Selector
Warning Indicators
DDI Area
Auto Pilot
HUD View
Geoplot Display
To Change Course: Click on the desired heading in the Course

Indicator/Selector or enter the desired course in the COURSE shortcut field
in the Task Bar. (Click/right-click to increment or decrement a digit.) In the
Navigation Station, press [C] then click the Nav Map to change course to
that direction.
To Change Speed: Enter the desired speed in the SPEED shortcut field in
the TASK bar. Click or right-click to increment or decrement a digit.
Engine RPMs affect speed but speed is not changed with the throttle in
the MH-60R. See Throttle below.

To Change the Altitude: Enter the desired altitude in the ALT shortcut field
in the Task Bar. (Click/right-click to adjust a digit) or select a
Navigate>Altitude command from the Orders Menu. From the Nav Map you
can also use the Ownship Menus Navigate >Altitude commands.
9 Note: Program a joystick to perform all of the above functions. See
MH-60R Stations/Pilot Station/Piloting the MH-60R with a Joystick
later in this section.
MH-60R P I L O T S T A TI O N F U N C T IO N AL I T Y
The buttons, switches, gauges, and other functionality of the MH-60R Pilot
Station starting at the left of the screen are described below:
Countermeasure Autocrew: The Pilot Station Countermeasure Autocrew
controls several matters involving Ownship safety. The Autocrew icon in the
upper left corner of the Pilot Station is linked to the AUTO/MANUAL switch
in the Countermeasure Launch panel. Autocrew is turned on by either
method.
BClick the Autocrew slider to toggle the state of the Pilot Station
Countermeasure Autocrew. When Autocrew is ON, the Autocrew
8-9
icon in the upper left displays the crewman silhouette and the
Countermeasure Launch panel switch is set to AUTO.
9 Note: Autocrew and Auto Pilot perform different functions. Auto Pilot
is described later in this section.
The Autocrew works to ensure Ownship safety by:
Automatically launching chaff and flares when a missile is locked on
Ownship. Chaff and flares can still be launched manually when

Autocrew is ON.
Taking evasive maneuvers when Ownship is under attack.
9 Note: When Autocrew takes evasive maneuvers he ignores course,

speed and altitude changes attempted by the player until the evasive
maneuver is complete.
Countermeasure Launch Panel: The following functions are possible in
this area.
CHAFF and FLARES Buttons: A lit button indicates a
countermeasure of that type is ready to launch.
BClick the desired button to launch the indicated countermeasure.
The button is dark until the tube is reloaded. Countermeasures can
also be launched from the Task Bar Orders Menu or from the Nav
Map using the Ownship Menu.
Auto/Manual Switch: When in AUTO mode, countermeasures are
automatically launched when a weapon lock-on is detected.
Countermeasures can still be launched manually when in Auto-mode.
BClick on AUTO to place countermeasures in auto-mode. This turns
the Pilot Station Autocrew slider to the ON position. Setting
Countermeasure Launch to MANUAL turns off Autocrew as well.
When Autocrew is ON, the Countermeasure Launch control switch
is automatically set to AUTO. The Autocrew makes evasive

maneuvers and automatically launches countermeasures when a
missile is locked on OS.
Throttle: Controls engine revolutions per minute (RPMs). The throttle
position impacts maximum speed achievable, the climb rate, and fuel
consumption. Speed is changed in the Task Bar SPEED field or with a
joystick.
BClick and drag the throttle up or down to increase or reduce RPMs.
IF RPMs are too low you will not be able to maintain altitude.
Warning Lights: The following warning lights illuminate as indicated below.
Lock: Lit when a missile is locked on Ownship.
Collision: Lit when a collision with the ground or water is imminent.
Take evasive measures.
Low Fuel: Lit when 10% fuel remains.
8-10
ROTOR: Lit when retreating blade stall is imminent. This light will
normally appear only when driving with the joystick at a very high
speed. Do what you can to slow down.
MAD: Lit when the Magnetic Anomaly Detector (MAD) senses a
contact.
Speed Indicator: The needle indicates the current speed in knots. Change
speed in the Task Bar with the Speed shortcut or use Orders Menu
commands. Speed can also be changed with a joystick.
Vertical Speed Indicator: Indicates the current rate of rise in knots. Use
full throttle to climb faster, less throttle to climb more slowly.
Course Indicator/Selector: The 12:00 position indicates the current
course. The red arrow indicates the ordered course. A digital readout of the
actual course appears below the Course Indicator/Selector.
BClick on the desired heading to set Ownship on that course.
Fuel Gauge: Indicates current level of fuel.
Horizon Indicator: Provides the pilot with a visual indication of the aircrafts
orientation relative to the horizon.
Altimeter: The Altimeter provides a visual representation of current and
changing altitude. The digital readout indicates the attitude in thousands of
feet. The longer hand indicates hundreds of feet (one sweep of the dial
represents a thousand feet.) The shorter hand indicates thousands of feet
(one sweep of the dial represents 10,000 feet.) The digits count off one unit
per thousand feet of vertical elevation. Clockwise movement indicates
upward movement. Counterclockwise movement indicates downward
movement.
AUTO PILOT: The MH-60R Auto Pilot keeps the helicopter aloft and on
course. He follows the last ordered course, speed and altitude and follows
waypoints as described below.
BClick ENABLE to turn on the Auto Pilot. Auto Pilot is on by default
at game start and whenever a different station is selected.
BWhen using a joystick, click DISABLE to move the switch to that
position then move the joystick to take control of the aircraft. If no
joystick is in use, switching the setting to DISABLE has no effect.
When ENABLED the Auto Pilot follows the last ordered speed, altitude,
and course
Auto Pilot follows assigned waypoints unless a change of course is
entered using the Course Indicator/Selector in the Pilot Station, the

Task Bars Course shortcut, Navigate> Return to Base from either the
Orders or Ownship Menu or the Ownship Menus Navigate>Change
Course option. Once a course change has been issued, Auto Pilot
does not follow waypoints until Navigate>Follow Waypoints is selected
from the Orders or Ownship Menu.
If Auto Pilot is DISABLED when you deviate from assigned waypoints
and has turned on automatically by switching to a different station, Auto
8-11
Pilot does not follow waypoints until Follow Waypoints is selected from
the Orders Menus Navigate option.
If Auto Pilot is DISABLED and the Aircraft is in a dive when Auto Pilot
is again ENABLED, he attempts to level the aircraft and maintain that

altitude and follow the last ordered speed and course. This is not
always possible if the dive is too steep.
Auto Pilot is ENABLED when a different station is selected. Move the
joystick upon re-entering the Pilot Station to DISABLE the Auto Pilot.
If Auto Pilot is ENABLED and the helicopter is over land and hovering,
ordering an altitude of zero (0) causes the helicopter to touch down.

If Auto Pilot is ENABLED and the helicopter is over land but not
hovering, ordering an altitude of zero (0) causes the helicopter to level

off at a safe altitude.
If Auto Pilot is ENABLED and the helicopter is over water, ordering an
altitude of zero (0) causes the helicopter to level off at a safe altitude
regardless of speed.
If a joystick is not installed, setting the Auto Pilot to DISABLE has no
effect. If a joystick is in use, you must set the switch to DISABLE every
time you enter the Pilot Station; however, the Auto Pilot does not truly
disengage until you subsequently move the joystick.
If using a joystick it is possible to land the Helo if over land or at a
designated ship airstrip. It is also possible to drive the helicopter into

the ground or the water when using a joystick.
Heads Up Display (HUD) Access button: When piloting the MH-60R with
a joystick you may prefer the HUD view or Tail view when at the Pilot
Station. Repeated clicks cycle through HUD, tail and Cockpit view.
DDI: This Digital Data Indicator (DDI) occupies the upper portion of the
Geoplot and contains the following information about the track hooked on
the Geoplot:
Track: Track number of selected track.
Source: Displays the source of the selected track (Visual, Link, Truth
etc.).
Range: Displays the range to the selected track.
Bearing: True bearing to selected track.
Class: Link or player designated platform type of the selected track
(Surf, Air, Sub etc.). When Truth is ON actual Class names appear
here. Class name of Ownship and the Launching platform always
appear here when selected.
ID: Link or player designated ID (alliance) of the selected track.
Geoplot Display Controls: The following buttons control the view on the
Geoplot Display. The mouse wheel can also be used to control zoom levels.
ZOOM: Click desired button to zoom in (+) or out (-) on the Geoplot
Display.
8-12
CENTER: Click OS to center Ownship symbol in the Geoplot Display.

Click TRACK to center on the selected track.
Geoplot Display: The rectangular Geoplot Display shows symbols for
contacts detected by Ownship or Link participants. The upper portion of the
Geoplot Display contains the DDI.
BClick and drag in the display to pan in any direction.
BUse the mouse wheel to zoom in and out or use the Zoom buttons
described above.
PLACE WAYPOINT: Waypoints can only be placed and manipulated by
the ATO who shares the cockpit space with the Pilot. This is most apparent
in a Multi-Station game when the waypoint buttons are disabled completely
for the MH-60R Pilot. In Single Player games the buttons are clickable and
serve to move you to the appropriate display in the ATO Station.
From the Pilot Station in a Single Player game:
BClick FLYTO to automatically switch to the ATO Station and place
a flight waypoint on the Geoplot. The waypoint cannot be
manipulated in the Pilot Station Geoplot.
BClick SONOBUOY to automatically switch to the ATO Station and
place a buoy drop waypoint. The Sonobuoy Launch Panel is active
and a buoy of the currently selected type is placed. If a buoy of
that type is not desired, select the waypoint and press [Delete].
Select the desired type of buoy for the waypoint and click
SONOBUOY again.
BClick WEAPON to automatically switch to the ATO Station and
open the ASSIGN TO WAYPOINT window. If no torpedoes are
available, the assignment window does not appear.
Waypoints can only be manipulated in the ATO Geoplot or the Nav
Map.
Flight waypoints are followed only when Auto Pilot is ENABLED. If a
course change is entered, the Auto Pilot follows the last ordered course
and no longer follows the waypoints. To resume following waypoints,
select the Orders Menus Navigate> Follow Waypoints option.
P IL OT I N G
TH E
MH-60R
W ITH A
J OYS T IC K
The MH-60R can be piloted with a joystick whenever the Pilot Station is
selected. The joystick must be programmed to work with S.C.S. Dangerous Waters prior to gameplay as described below.
Programming a Joystick
1. Ensure that the joystick is attached to the computer and any associated
software is installed. Follow the joystick manufacturers instructions for
installation of any software and for connecting the joystick to the
computer.
2. From the Main Menu select OPTIONS.

3. Click CONTROLS.
8-13
4. Click AIR/HELO to select it. A check mark indicates the option is

selected.
no keyboard commands are commands that apply to a joystick only.
No keyboard equivalents exist.
6. Continue until all listed options have been associated with a

movement.
Using a Joystick
Keep in mind the following points when flying the Helo using a joystick:
The joystick must first be programmed as described above to work with
S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters.

The joystick is functional only in the Pilot Station.
Set the Auto Pilot switch to DISABLE. Be aware that he Auto Pilot
remains on even when set to DISABE until you first move the joystick.
The Auto Pilot is ENABLED automatically when a different station is
selected and he maintains the last ordered course, speed and altitude.
When returning to the Pilot Station from any other station, the Auto
Pilot must again be DISABLED. You then take control of the aircraft by
moving the joystick.
Three views are available: Cockpit View, HUD View and Chase View.
Click [V] to change the view.
MH-60R: ATO S TATION [F2]

The Airborne Tactical Officer (ATO) shares the cockpit with the MH-60R
Pilot. The ATO is responsible for targeting contacts and launching weapons
and sonobuoys, deploying the dipping sonar and MAD sensors and for
controlling Link data flow.
8-14
The ATO station is made up of the following areas:

DDI
Link Controls
Warning Lights
Weapons /Sonobuoy Launch Display
Waypoints Panel
Dipping Sonar & Mad Winches

Geoplot Display
Autocrew: When ON the ATO Autocrew sets Penguin missile and torpedo
presets. You must select the weapon to be launched and assign a target or
runout bearing but you cannot enter other presets if ATO Autocrew is ON.
Autocrew makes no entries for Hellfire missiles.
DDI: The ATO and Pilot Station share the same Geoplot Display. The
Digital Display Indicator (DDI) occupies the upper portion of the Geoplot.
The DDI provides information on the track selected in the Geoplot Display.
Geoplot Display: The Geoplot Display shows NTDS symbols for all
detected tracks as well as Link participants and Link detected contacts.
Clicking on a track hooks or selects it. Known data about the selected
contact appears in the DDI in the upper portion of the display. Use the
mouse wheel to zoom in and out or use the Zoom controls in the DDI.
PLACE WAYPOINTS: The Waypoint Panel provides the means for adding
fly-to points and weapon and sonobuoy drop waypoints.
BClick the FLY TO button to place a flight waypoint. Assigning a
sonobuoy or weapon waypoint requires a few more steps. See To
Place a Sonobuoy Drop Waypoint and To Place A Weapon
Drop Waypoint below.
A tiny letter appears next to the waypoint on the Geoplot to
indicate the type of waypoint that has been placed. Sonobuoy=B;

FLY TO=F; Weapon=T (Weapon waypoints can only be assigned
to torpedoes.)
A waypoint is added after Ownship if nothing is selected in the
Geoplot or after the selected waypoint when a waypoint is

selected.
8-15
BTo delete a waypoint, select the waypoint and press [DELETE].

The weapon or sonobuoy count is incremented appropriately.
9 Note: Waypoints are only visible on the Geoplot when Ownship is
selected. Waypoints can only be manipulated in the ATO Geoplot or
the Nav Map. Waypoints are always visible on the Nav Map. All
waypoints can be deleted at once from the Nav Map. Select Ownship
and right-click. Select Navigate>Remove Waypoints.
LINK: The Link provides a secure method for sharing data with friendly
platforms in the area. Information on contacts detected by OS and friendly
platforms is shared with all other Link participants on Ownside. When the
MH-60R is deployed from a player-controlled O.H. Perry (FFG) during a
Multiplayer and/or Multi-Station game, the FFG may request control of your
Helo to place flight, buoy drop or torpedo drop waypoints for you to follow.
As long as he has SYNC with your helicopter, he can download your radar
or acoustic data for processing on his ship.
NAV CONTROL: This feature is only functional in a Multiplayer and/or
Multi-station game when OS is the deployed Helo from a FFG that is
player-controlled. It is disabled in Single Player mode and in a
Multiplayer game if your base FFG is A.I. controlled. The FFG can
request control of the Helo from you and enter waypoints for you to
follow.
When the FFG (SHIP) requests Nav Control to place flight, sonobuoy
drop or weapon drop waypoints for you to follow, both the HELO and
SHIP lights flash.
BClick SHIP, to pass Nav control to the FFG. You do not have to
grant the FFG navigation control and once granted, you do not
have to follow the waypoints he issues. When the FFG has
navigation control, you cannot place waypoints for Ownship from
either the ATO station or the Nav Map. At any time you can flip the
NAV CONTROL switch back to HELO and regain waypoint
capability.
While you are prevented from placing any type of waypoint when
the SHIP has navigation control, you can still drop buoys and
torpedoes before you reach the SHIP assigned drop point (which
may annoy the FFG player since you have a limited number of
torpedoes.)
If you change course, deviating from the SHIP entered waypoints,
you must select FOLLOW WAYPOINTS from the Orders or

Ownship Menus Navigate option before OS will once again return
to the assigned flight path.
DATA LINK: This feature is only meaningful in a Multiplayer or MultiStation game when OS is the deployed Helo from a FFG that is
commanded by a different player. As long as the FFG has SYNC with
your helicopter he can download data from your RADAR or ACOUSTIC
processor. The Data Link switch changes position automatically when
the FFG selects one type of data or the other. Make sure your Radar is
8-16
ON if the ship is requesting Radar data. It is not necessary to tune your

acoustic grams to any channel for the FFG to download data.
HYDROPHONE: This switch controls the winch that DEPLOYS or
RETRIEVES the Dipping Sonar sensor. Deploying the sensor when
traveling at a speed greater than 30 knots damages the sensor. When the
sensor is deployed to the desired length, click STOP to keep from deploying
the entire cable.
Dragging the dipping sensor through the water at too great a speed
damages the sensor. Speeds over 1 knot will degrade reception. If

speed exceeds 8 knots you will not be able to detect anything. Speeds
over 30 knots will break the sensor.
MAD: This switch controls the winch that DEPLOYS or RETRIEVES the
Magnetic Anomaly Detection (MAD) and Submarine Anomaly Detection
(SAD) sensors. When the sensor is deployed to the desired length, click
STOP to keep from deploying the entire cable.
The MAD sensor deploys out behind the helo as it flies. Maintain a
speed of at least 50 knots.

Warning Lights: These lights function the same as described in the Pilot
Station. See MH-60R Stations/Pilot Station/Pilot Station
Functionality/Warning Lights for details.
S O N OB U OY L AU NC H D IS PL A Y S
From this display you can launch sonobuoys immediately or through the
use of waypoints. The Sonobuoy Launch Display and the placement of
Sonobuoy Waypoints are covered here.
# of Buoys Loaded (# of buoys assigned to waypoints follows in parenthesis)
Select
Sonobuoy
Launch
Panel
Select
Buoy
type/depth
Launch
Selected
Buoy
8-17
To Launch a Sonobuoy
1. At the top of the Weapon and Sonobuoy Launch Display, click the
button above the SONOBUOY label to display the Sonobuoy options.
2. At the right or left side of the Sonobuoy Launch Display click the button
next to the type of sonobuoy to be launched. (Deep sets buoy depth at
400 ft, shallow sets buoy depth at 90 feet.) The Stores column
indicates the number of buoys of each type currently aboard the
aircraft. Numbers in parenthesis refers to the number of buoys of that
type currently assigned to a sonobuoy waypoint.
1. Click the button to the right of the Launch label at the lower right of the
Launch Display.
3. The Launch button flashes until the buoy drops. The STORES count is
updated once the buoy is away.
To Place a Sonobuoy Drop Waypoint

By default a buoy of the type currently selected in the Sonobuoy Launch
Display is dropped when the Sonobuoy waypoint button is clicked. To drop
a buoy of a different type:
button above the Sonobuoy label to display the Sonobuoy Options.
2. At the right or left side of the Weapon and Sonobuoy Launch Display
click the button next to the type of sonobuoy to be launched at the
waypoint. (Deep sets buoy depth at 400 ft, shallow sets buoy depth at
90 feet.)
3. In the Waypoint panel under the Geoplot click the SONOBUOY button.
A waypoint with the letter (B) beside it appears on the Geoplot display
after Ownship or after a selected waypoint. The type of buoy selected
in the Sonobuoy Launch Display is assigned to drop at that location.
9 Note: The number of buoys of a given type currently assigned to a
waypoint appears in parenthesis after the stores number. The
parenthetical number is updated appropriately when the buoy is
deployed or when the waypoint is deleted before the buoy is
deployed.
4. Click and drag the waypoint to position it as desired.

5. When a waypoint is selected, waypoint information appears in the
Geoplot DDI.
6. Once a buoy is assigned to a waypoint the type of buoy cannot be

changed. You can delete the waypoint and insert a new one with the
desired type of buoy. When a buoy waypoint is deleted the count is
recalculated and stores are updated appropriately.
TIP: If the size and zoom of the Geoplot Display make viewing multiple
waypoints difficult, switch to the Nav Map and drag the waypoints to the
8-18
desired location there. Since land is not visible on the Geoplot, moving the
buoy drop points on the Nav Map helps you insure that you are not
dropping a buoy over land.
W E AP O N S L AU NC H D I S PL A Y
The MH-60R in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters can carry Penguin and Hellfire
missiles. Penguins can target surface ships but not land targets. Hellfire
missiles can target both surface sips and land targets but has a much
shorter range than the Penguin.
Weapon
on
selected
pylon
Select
Weapons
Launch
Display
Presets
Pylon
Selectors
Assign
selected
Target or
Runout
Bearing
Click to
launch
weapon
on
selected
pylon
To Launch a Penguin Missile

Penguin missiles can target surface ships only. The MH-60 can carry only
one Penguin missile in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
button above the WEAPON label to display the Weapon Launch
Display and the Weapon Presets options.
2. Click the button next to LFT OUTBD (left outboard pylon). Missiles can
only be loaded on the left outboard pylon in S.C.S. Dangerous
Waters.
3. Click a valid contact in the Geoplot. The track number of the selected
contact appears in the Target field.
4. If no contact or an invalid contact is selected, the Runout Brg field

appears instead of the Target label. You must enter the bearing on
which the missile is to travel when launched in the PRESETS panel.
5. Adjust presets as desired then click ASSIGN. Click or right-click on the

digits to increase or decrease values. See MH-60R Weapons Presets
below.
8-19
6. Click the button to the right of LAUNCH LFT OBRD in the lower right of
the Weapon Launch Display.
To jettison the weapon without launching, click the button to the right of
JETTISON LFT OBRD.

When the ATO Autocrew is ON, the only presets available are the
Runout Brg field and the ASSIGN button. Enter the desired bearing or
select a valid contact and click ASSIGN.
To Launch a Hellfire
In S.C.S - Dangerous Waters the MH-60R carries a four-missile pod of
Hellfires. Only one missile can be fired at a time and each missile is
targeted separately as it becomes available. The MH-60R is loaded out with
a Penguin by default. You must change the loadout at the Weapon Loadout
screen accessed from the Brief Screen prior to game start. Once you have
loaded Hellfires, it becomes your default loadout for subsequent games
until you change it at the Weapon Loadout screen. You are provided with
an opportunity to change your loadout when you return to base or land on
an available landing site during gameplay.
1. At the top of the Weapons and Sonobuoy Launch Display, click the
Display and the Weapon Presets options.
2. Click the button next to LFT OUTBD (left outboard pylon). Missiles can
be loaded only on the left outboard pylon in S.C.S. Dangerous
Waters.
3. The two legs of the detection cone appear in front of the Ownship
symbol on the Geoplot. The legs of the cone represent the max range
of the missile. Valid surface and land contacts within the confines of the
cone can be successfully selected and assigned to the next available
Hellfire.
4. Select the desired contact on the Geoplot and click the ASSIGN button.
When a valid target is assigned, its track number appears in the
Assigned Tgt field in the upper portion of the presets area. If the target
is within the detection cone the LFT OBRD label below the LAUNCH
button flashes indicating the weapon is locked on and can be fired. If it
is not flashing, maneuver such that the target is within the detection
cone. When the assigned target enters the cone, the LFT OBRD button
begins to flash.
9 Note: The Hellfire cannot be assigned to an aircraft, sonobuoy or
submarine symbol. If a symbol for one of these is selected, the text
No Assigned Tgt appears in the upper presets area and the launch
button never enables even if the contact is within the cone.
5. Click the LAUNCH button. Once the weapon has launched, the number
of next available Hellfire appears at the top of the Presets area
followed in the next row by No Assigned Tgt appears.
8-20
6. Select the same or a new contact and click ASSIGN to assign the next
available weapon to the target.
When a weapon is assigned to a target that is not inside the cone, the
weapon cannot be launched. Once Ownship maneuvers such that the

cone encompasses the assigned target, the LFT OBRD button flashes
and the weapon can be launched.
Once a weapon is assigned to a target, the assignment stays with that
target, even if another contact is selected in the Geoplot. Be sure to

check the track number in the Presets area to verify the assigned
target. Click ASSIGN again to de-assign a target.
Clicking the JETTISON button jettisons the entire Hellfire pod and any
remaining weapons.
Tip: While you are not prevented from assigning a weapon to a valid target
that is attached to a line of bearing, be aware that in most cases the symbol
at the end of the LOB is at a default range, not the location of the actual
contact. If you want to target a contact on a line of bearing, maneuver to
send the torpedo or missile down the line of bearing, not across it.
To Launch a Torpedo
The MK-46 and MK-50 are lightweight torpedoes and as such are meant to
target submarines. They are not frequently sent out on long-range searches
or used against surface ships, but used to prosecute a known subsurface
contact at short range. However, you are not prevented from assigning a
torpedo to any valid subsurface or surface contact.
Tip: Given the relatively short range of the Mk-46 and Mk-50 torpedoes (6
nm and 7 nm as modeled in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters), the best strategy
is to localize a subsurface contact as precisely as possible before dropping
a torpedo in close proximity to the suspected location. Be sure to reset the
Run To Enable (RTE) distance to an appropriate distance given your
understanding of the contacts location. Be aware that if you are close
enough to an enemy surface ship to reach it with your torpedoes, you are
undoubtedly within range of its missiles. You are much better off targeting a
surface ship with your missiles. In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters, these
torpedoes can be set to runout on a specific bearing or to target specific
contacts.
Display and weapon PRESET options.
2. Click the button next to RGT INBD, LFT INBD and Left OUTBD (right
inboard, left inboard and left outboard pylons) to determine which
pylons are assigned torpedoes. Torpedoes can be loaded out on all
three weapons pylons in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
3. A torpedo can be assigned to a specific bearing or a specific target.

BRunout Bearing: Click the Geoplot surface to deselect any object.
A default bearing of 000 appears after the Runout Brg label near
8-21
the bottom of the presets. Click or right click the digits in the
Runout Brg field to set the desired bearing for the weapon to follow
when it hits the water. Click ASSIGN.
BSpecific Target: Select a contact in the Geoplot. Click ASSIGN.
The Runout Brg label is replaced with the Target label. The track
number of the assigned target appears in the Target field. (You are
not able to assign a torpedo to an invalid target. If such a target is
selected, the Runout Brg label appears instead of the Target label.
You must enter the desired bearing as described above. Invalid
targets are sonobuoys, air contacts, Ownship and your base ship.
4. Click/right-click the digits to adjust the presets as desired.

5. Click the button to the right of the LAUNCH button to launch the
selected weapon.
To jettison the weapon without launching, click the JETTISON
button.
To Place a Torpedo Drop Waypoint:

Only torpedoes can be assigned to a weapon waypoint.
9 Note: When a waypoint is placed, the autopilot immediately
increases speed to 100 knots and flies to the first waypoint, slows to
drop the weapon then increases speed to reach any additional
waypoints. The Helo hovers when it arrives at a final waypoint.
1. Click the WEAPON button in the SONOBUOY WAYPOINTS area

under the Geoplot. The ASSIGN TO WAYPOINT display appears in
the Preset area listing the available weapons for assignment.
If you have no remaining unassigned torpedoes or all torpedoes
have been dropped, the ASSIGN TO WAYPOINT display never

appears when the WEAPON waypoint button is clicked.
2. Click the text of the desired pylon/weapon option in the ASSIGN TO

WAYPOINT display.
3. Click the ASSIGN button in the lower right to assign that weapon to the
weapon waypoint. (Click CANCEL to leave the Assign to Waypoint
area without assigning the waypoint.)
A tiny square waypoint is inserted on the Geoplot at the end of a
flight path. A tiny T (for Torpedo) appears beside the waypoint.

Click the square waypoint marker to select it and drag it to the
desired location.
If other waypoints already exist, the waypoint is inserted after the
selected waypoint. If nothing or the Ownship symbol is selected,

the waypoint is inserted after the Ownship symbol.
Waypoints are only visible in the ATO Geoplot when Ownship is
selected. They are always visible on the Nav Map.
8-22
4. The Weapon Presets area appears showing the presets for the
weapon on the selected pylon. When a weapon waypoint is placed, the
ASSIGN button is activated automatically and the default settings are
assigned including a runout bearing of 000. To change the default
bearing or other presets, click ASSIGN to toggle the button to its OFF
state. Click or right-click the digits in the presets area to set the weapon
presets as desired.
5. If you have clicked ASSIGN to change the presets and runout bearing,
click ASSIGN again to assign the weapon with these new presets to
the waypoint. (The ASSIGN button is ON when the button is solid
green with black letters. The weapon does not drop unless assigned to
the waypoint.)
Tip: Zoom the view to better locate the waypoint. Because of the small
confines of the Geoplot it is sometimes easier to drag the waypoint on the
Nav Map. Using the Nav Map to place weapon waypoints helps insure that
the drop point is over water and not over land. Land is not visible in the
Geoplot.
9 Note: If all torpedoes are already assigned to a target or bearing, no
waypoint can be placed. Unassigning a torpedo on a pylon frees it to
be assigned to a waypoint. If a torpedo is launched manually before
arriving at a weapon drop point, the waypoint is deleted. The
assigned presets remain with the weapon even if the waypoint is
deleted. You will need to unassign the weapon to create a new
waypoint if all torpedoes are currently assigned.
MH-60R W E A P O N P R E S E T S
The presets for weapons available to the MH-60R in S.C.S. Dangerous
Waters are seen below. Presets appear in the center of the Weapon
Launch Panel in the ATO station.
Hellfire Missile Presets

The Hellfire can target both land and surface ship targets:
Max Range: 4.3 nm
ASSIGN (button): The only preset is the ASSIGN button. When the
Hellfire weapon is selected, a cone appears in front of the OS Symbol
on the Geoplot. When a contact is within the confines of the cone,
select the symbol on the Geoplot then click the button to the right of
ASSIGN to lock on the target. The LFT OBRD button enables and
begins flashing. Click the flashing button to launch the missile. After
launching a Hellfire the next Hellfire becomes available and must be
assigned to the desired target.
Penguin Missile Presets

The Penguin can only target surface ships.
Max Range: 22 nm
8-23
When ATO Autocrew is ON he automatically sets presets based on the

contact selected.
Enable: Click or right-click digits to enter the range (in nautical miles)
at which the missile is to enable.
Destruct: Click or right click digits to enter the range (in nautical miles)
at which the missile is to destruct if no target is encountered. (The
maximum destruct range is the maximum range of the missile: 22 nm.)
Seeker: Click in the text field to select WIDE or NARROW search
cone.
Target / Runout Brg: One of these labels appears depending on what
is or is not selected in the Geoplot.
Target: Assigns the Penguin to a specific target and lists the
targets track number in this field. This label appears when a valid
contact is selected in the Geoplot and ASSIGN is clicked. Valid
contacts are surface ships that are not attached to a Line of
bearing. You cannot target your base ship. The Runout Brg field
appears when you have selected an invalid contact and click
ASSIGN.
Runout Brg: Sets the bearing on which the missile heads when
launched. This label appears if nothing or an invalid contacts is
selected in the Geoplot. The runout bearing defaults to 000.
Torpedo Presets
The MH-60R in S.C.S Dangerous Waters can carry Mk 46 and Mk 50
torpedoes.
Mk 46: Maximum range of 6 nm (12,000 yards); maximum speed of 45
knots; maximum depth of 1500 feet (457 meters).
knots; maximum depth of 3,600 feet (1,100 meters).
Both torpedoes have the following presets in the MH-60R. Click/right-click
to adjust the settings.
Acoustics: Sets Active or Passive search mode. Click to toggle
between these two sonar mode options.
Search Pattern: Sets Search pattern to Snake or Circle: Click to
toggle between these two search pattern options.
Floor: Set the depth below which the weapon will not go.
Ceiling: Set the depth above which the weapon will not go.
Depth: Set the depth at which the weapon travels.
Speed: Set the speed at which the weapon travels.
Target / Runout Brg: One of these labels appears depending on what
is or is not selected in the Geoplot.
Target: Assigns the torpedo to a specific target and lists its target
track number in this field. This option automatically sends the
8-24
weapon on the appropriate intercept course to attack the selected

track once the weapon enters the water. This label appears when
a valid contact is selected in the Geoplot. Air contacts, Sonobuoys
your OS Base ship and contacts that have only a line of bearing
and have not yet been assigned a category cannot be assigned as
a target. In the case of the LOB contact, too little information is
known. You can set a runout bearing to attempt to intercept the
contact.
Runout Brg: Sets the bearing on which the torpedo heads after it
enters the water. This option appears when no contact, an air
contact, a sonobuoy, Ownship, your base ship or a contact that is
unknown and/or is attached to a Line of Bearing is selected in the
Geoplot. Click/right-click the digits to enter a specific bearing for
the torpedo to follow once it enters the water. The runout bearing
defaults to 000. Once a new bearing has been entered, that
bearing remains the default bearing for the other torpedo(s) until
you change it again.
Run to Enable: Sets the distance in yards at which the weapon will
enable and begin its search pattern.
MH-60R: A COUSTIC S TATION [F3]

In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters the MH-60R helicopter can carry four types
of sonobuoys: DICAS, DIFAR, VLAD and BT and can process any LOFAR
buoys that may appear in a mission. See Training/Sonar
School/Sonar/Sonobuoys more information on these sonobuoys. In the MH60R sonobuoys are launched from the ATO Station [F2]. Transmitted
sonobuoy data are processed and viewed in the Acoustic Station.
Regardless of which Ownside platform launched the sonobuoy, if a buoy is
hot (detecting a contact) the transmitted data can be processed in the MH60Rs acoustic station if a Acoustic Data Display window (gram) is tuned to
the transmitting channel. The Nav Map sonobuoy symbol for a hot buoy
has a red center.
9 Note: All sonobuoys regardless of who launched them have track
numbers that begin with 0. Contacts that you or your Autocrew mark
in your acoustic station, have track numbers that reflect your own
platform ID (track) number.
A C OU S T I C D AT A D I S P L AY W I ND O W S
If hot buoys are detected at mission start, the four Acoustic Data Display
Windows, also called grams, are tuned to transmitting channels, even if
Acoustic Autocrew is not on. These will all be set to Omni mode if the
Acoustic Autocrew is not on.
If Acoustic Autocrew is not on at mission start and buoys are subsequently
dropped and begin transmitting (are hot), you must tune the display
windows to the desired channel yourself. The parts of the Acoustic Display
are described below.
8-25
Gram Window Number
Gram Window Selectors
Set Channel for Selected Gram window
Acoustic Data Display Window (Gram)

Frequency Alert Field
9 Note: The MH-60R can process 16 buoys at once. Because of ingame screen space restraints only four data display windows are
visible in this acoustic station in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
To Enter a Frequency Alert

To be alerted when a specific frequency is detected by a sonobuoy, enter
the desired frequency into one of the Frequency Alert fields.
BClick or right-click the digits or the thumbwheels in the Frequency
Alert fields to increment or decrement the numbers until the
desired frequency is displayed.
BClick ENABLE to move the alert switch into the on position. When
the designated frequency is detected the alert light flashes.
To View Sonobuoy Data

The following steps allow you to view and process data from transmitting
buoys. A hot buoy has a red center when viewed on the Nav Map.
1. To determine the channel on which a buoy is transmitting, visit the Nav

Map [F5]. The channel in use by a buoy appears on the Nav Map next
to its NTDS symbol and appears in the DDI when the symbol is
selected.
2. At the Acoustic Station [F3], select one of the four Acoustic Data
Display Windows labeled with Roman numerals by clicking the
associated button in the GRAM CONTROL panel.
3. Click or right-click on the CHANNEL SELECT thumbwheels or digits to

increment or decrement the numbers until the desired channel number
8-26
is entered. This tunes the selected window to the data transmitting on

the selected channel. If a buoy is transmitting on the channel, there
may be a short delay until that data appears.
4. Clicking a different Gram Control button moves the CHANNEL

SELECT Thumbwheels to indicate the channel currently entered for the
selected Gram Display Window.
9 Note: Wait until your selection has taken effect before selecting a
different Gram Control button or it will revert to the former setting.
Types of Sonobuoy DATA

What appears in a Gram Display Window depends on the type of buoy
transmitting and the mode selected. See Training/Sonar School/Sonobuoys
for more information on sonobuoys.
DICASS: Omni, Directional and Active modes are possible.
DIFAR: Omni and Directional modes are possible.
VLAD: Omni and Directional modes are possible.
BT: Only Sound Speed Profile (SSP) mode is possible.
LOFAR: Only Omni mode is possible. (LOFAR buoys may appear in a
mission but they are not carried by any controllable platform in S.C.S.
Dangerous Waters.)
Display Window Requirements by Mode

Omni mode requires one Gram Display Window and reports only
frequency data. Omni data indicates only that frequencies are

detected. They cannot be marked, but they can be used to classify
platforms using the Frequency Profile Library.
Directional mode requires two Display Windows, one containing both
bearing and frequency data the other Omni (frequency only) data.
Bearings can be marked in Directional mode and appear on the Nav
Map at a default range.
Active mode requires three windows. One is used to transmit and
receive data the other two appear blank and indicate they are
supporting the active mode channel. Contacts can be marked but the
sound profile library is not available. Both bearing and range data are
reported to the Nav Map when Active contacts are marked.
BT/SSP mode provides the depth of the thermal layer in that location.
See more about the acoustic layer in Training/Sonar

School/Underwater Sound Propagation. Submarines frequently use the
layer to hide. Knowing the depth of the layer in the area helps you
determine a depth for buoys and the dipping sonar.
Omni Mode Frequency Data

Omni mode provides frequency data only. It indicates something is out
there and is emitting the detected frequencies. The frequencies cannot be
marked and there is no indication of the bearing to the contact. Omni is
8-27
useful for comparing the detected sound profile to a library of known sound
profiles. Click the button to the right of the LIBRARY label to access the
Sound Profile Library.
Time Scale (sec)
Select Alternate Buoy Mode
Time at location of cursor
Frequency Scale
Frequency at location of cursor
Frequency Profile Library
Classifying a Contact with the Profile Library

When a Sonobuoy is in ONMI or Directional Mode, search the Sound
Profile Library to find the frequency profile of the class that most closely
matches the frequency profile of the detected contact.
1. Click the Library button to display the Profile Library Controls and data.
The LIBRARY button label becomes BACK and the Filter button and
arrow buttons become active.
Click Arrow Buttons to cycle through Profile List
Selected Class Profile
Profile Frequency Indicators of selected class
Click to Toggle Profile Library Filter
Exit Library
2. Click the FILTER button on the left to reduce the number of profiles in
the list to those that most closely match the profile of the detected
contact.
3. The position of the Profile Frequency Indicators (inverted carets)

depicts the frequency profile for the Class Profile selected in the top
line.
4. Click the right and left arrow buttons to cycle through the profile list until
the Profile Frequency Indicators line up with the detected frequency
profile.
5. Find the same contact on the Nav Map and enter the classification
determined here using the contacts right-click Contact Menu.
9 Note: The Profile Library is more useful in Directional mode since
contacts can be marked and the selected classification is applied to
the selected contact at that time. In Directional mode the Frequency
Indicators line up with the dots on the selected bearing. Click on a
8-28
dot to select the frequencies on that bearing then click MARK. When
the marks line up with the dots and you are satisfied with the
selected classification, click MARK.
Directional Mode Data

Directional mode requires one additional window, which must be set to 00
before Directional mode can be set. Directional Mode provides bearing
information on detected frequencies. Click in the window to move the cursor
to that location. The horizontal line indicates the bearing of the cursor
location; dots indicate frequencies. The following display shows directional
data and Library mode.
Bearing Scale
Bearing/Range Cursor
Class of Selected Profile
Frequency Scale
1. To mark the frequency detected on a specific bearing, click a dot in the

window to move the cursor to that bearing location.
2. Click MARK to send the bearing data to the Nav Map. The contact
symbol appears at a default range on the bearing marked. The
assigned track number appears in the crew report and following the
Channel number in the top row of the display window.
3. Click the LIBRARY button to access the Frequency Profile Library.

Look for dots that line up under the Frequency Profile Indicators
(carets) to identify the probable class of the contact.
9 Tip: You must click carefully to mark in directional mode. Listen for
the crew to insure that the contact was actually marked.
Active Mode Data

A DICASS sonobuoy set to active mode provides both bearing and range
data on the detected contact. Two additional display windows are required
to support a buoy in active mode.
1. Set a gram display window to a channel transmitting DICASS buoy

data. (On the Nav Map the channel on which a buoy is transmitting
appears next to its NTDS symbol and appears in the DDI when the
buoy symbol is selected.)
2. Set two other display windows to Channel 00 (no buoy data). These
are needed to support a buoy in active mode.
3. In the DICASS buoy gram, click the MODE button to cycle modes until
ACTIVE is selected. The selected mode is seen in the top line of the
display window following the buoy name. The two blank grams now
8-29
show information indicating they are supporting the Gram set to Active
mode.
4. Click the XMIT button to begin transmitting continuous active pings.

Bright dots indicate contacts. It may take several returns to see a
contact against the noise.
5. Click the contact to move the cursor to that position.

6. Click the MARK button to send the bearing and range data of the
contact to the Nav Map. The Track number assigned when the contact
is marked appears in the top row following the channel number.
7. After two or more minutes, mark the contact again to update the
contact position on the Nav Map.
8. Click the MODE button to switch to Omni or Directional Mode.

9 Note: If a gram is in use supporting a gram in Directional or Active
mode, its channel cannot be changed. Switch the Gram that is in
Directional or Active mode to OMNI mode to free the supporting
Grams for other purposes. If Acoustic Autocrew is ON, he will
change your channel selections back to those of his own choosing.
Transmit
Click to mark selected contact
Track # Assigned to selected contact
Active mode requires two supporting channels
8-30
MH-60R: R ADAR S TATION [F4]

In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters the MH-60Rs radar detects both surface and
air contacts. Its range depends on Ownships altitude. Marking contacts
with the radar sends bearing and range data to the Nav Map.
D E T E C TI N G
AND
M AR K I N G R A D AR C O NT AC TS
1. Click the POWER switch to ON to activate the radar.

2. In the lower left of the console click the desired range to view in the
scope.
3. If desired, enable range rings in the upper left of the console and select
the scale of the rings.
4. Contacts appear on the scope as bright dots. Click on a contact to

select it.
5. Click MARK on the right of the console to mark the contact.

On the Nav Map a symbol indicating Unknown Platform/Unknown
Alliance appears on the Nav Map at the end of a yellow line of bearing
at the range and bearing where it was detected. When a contact is
initially marked a contact number is assigned. Its position is updated on
the Nav Map with subsequent marks. See the Navigation Station
chapter of this manual for a complete description of track numbering in
S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
9 Note: If Radar Autocrew is ON you are prevented from moving the
cursor or marking contacts.
MH-60R N AVIGATION S TATION [F5]

The Navigation Station functions identically from platform to platform. The
basics of the Nav Station are covered in the Navigation Station chapter of
this manual.
O W NS H I P /O R D E R S M ENU S
Right-click on the Ownship symbol on the Nav Map to display the Ownship
menu. The majority of the functionality contained in the Ownship Menu is
also contained in the Orders Menu. These are described in MH-60R
Stations/ Task Bar/Orders Menu earlier in this chapter. The rest of the
Ownship Options require the use of the Nav Map. These are the same from
platform to platform. See Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Ownship
Menu.
Navigate:
Return To Base: When your MH-60R is deployed from a FFG in the
mission, this option appears in the Ownship Menu. The platform ID for
your FFG base is followed by (Base) on the Nav Map. Selecting this
8-31
option sends Ownship on a track to automatically land on your Base

ship. On the Nav Map you will see your OS symbol transit to
approximately one nautical mile behind your Base ship, then turn and
approach the ship and land. The loadout screen appears. Change your
loadout immediately if desired. Once you close the loadout screen, you
have lost the opportunity to reload until the next time you land. (The
MH-60R may also be launched from a land base in some scenarios. If
your MH-60R was created as a standalone aircraft (not launched from
any platform or airport), the Return To Base option never appears.)
C O N T AC T M ENU
The Contact Menu appears whenever you right-click on a contacts NTDS
symbol on the Nav Map. Most Contact Menu options are the same from
platform to platform. See Navigation Station/2D Nav Map/Contact Menu.
However there are several options that are unique to the MH-60R. The
following Contact Menu options are available when you are commanding
the MH-60R in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters.
Land On: Available only on contacts that have a helicopter landing pad
defined by the mission creators. Select this option to order Ownship to land
on the selected contact. To take off again, order an altitude 100 feet greater
that that of the surface you are on. Current altitude is seen in the ALT field
of the task bar. This is altitude above sea level.
Engage With: The weapons appropriate for the target are enabled as seen
below.
[X] Pylon: Missiles can only be loaded on the Port Outboard (PO) pylon.
Mk 46 or Mk 50 Torpedo: When selected, a torpedo or mine is
dropped with the default presets if you have not changed presets for
the selected weapon at the ATO Weapons Display.
Penguin Missile: Available only when a Penguin missile is loaded out.
Selecting this option launches the Penguin missile at the selected
contact. If the target is out of range (22 nautical miles) the missile fails.
You are not prevented from firing the missile at targets behind you but
if you do the missile will likely acquire something else.
Hellfire Missiles: This option is only available when the Hellfire pod is
loaded at the Weapons Loadout Station. The option is greyed out if the
launch parameters for the missile are not met. The selected contact
must be within a 30-degree cone that extends 4.3 nautical miles in front
of Ownship. The option is enabled and can be selected when the target
is within the detection cone. Four missiles are loaded in the pod. Each
is fired separately.
MH-60R MAD/ESM S TATION [F6]

The magnetic and submarine anomaly detection recorder and the
Electronic Support Measures (ESM) scope share the MAD/ESM station.
The MAD/SAD Recorder provides for passive detection of submerged
8-32
submarines. The ESM scope allows passive detection, marking and

classification of surface and air contacts.
MAD Detection
Alert Light
ESM Scope Emitter detected at cursor location

Signal Strength Indicator
Classes with detected emitter
MH-60R MAD D IS T OR TI O N R EC OR D E R
Large metal objects, like submarines, create disturbances in the earths
magnetic field and these disturbances or anomalies, can be detected from
above. The data from the Magnetic Anomaly Detector (MAD) and
Submarine Anomaly Detector (SAD) are recorded in the top panel of this
station. Distortions detected by these sensors provide a strong indication
that a submarine is in the area. The MAD/SAD plot provides information
only. There is no interaction.
1. Press [F2] to access the ATO station then click DEPLOY in the MAD
panel to lower the MAD sensor or from the Task Bars Orders Menu
select SENSO>Mad Sensor>Stream.
2. Maintain an altitude of 200-250 feet. The MAD Sensor is at the end of a

150-foot cable. It is dragged behind/under the Helo depending on OS
Speed. The sensor should not drag in the water.
3. In the MAD/ESM Station [F6], click the POWER switch to the ON

position in the MAD Distortion Recorder panel.
The NOTIFY alert light is illuminated and a crew report (MAD! MAD!
MAD!) is heard when the MAD sensor detects a contact. The contact
is automatically marked on the Nav Map.
Using MAD/SAD Effectively

The MAD sensor has an effective range of about 1000 yards. At
altitudes above 1000 ft the sensor does not detect anything.
8-33
At an altitude of 500 feet, the sensor detects underwater contacts in the
500 feet directly beneath the helicopter. It also marks surface contacts
in the immediate area.
The thermal layer does not mask a submarine from the MAD sensor.
Going below 500 ft is a submarines best defense against MAD and

SAD.
The SAD sensor is similar to the MAD sensor but has a more limited
range of around 750 yards.

SAD reports submerged contacts only.
BPatrol slowly at a low altitude (approximately 200-250 feet) when

searching with MAD/SAD sensors. Because of their short ranges,
a spike indicates the Helo is directly over the target.
BIf the contact is known to be hostile, drop a torpedo immediately.
BIf the contact is unknown, launch buoys to further localize or
identify the contact. When the contact is determined to be hostile,
drop torpedoes.
9 Note: The MAD sensor has been removed from the MH-60R
helicopters but is retained in the S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters for
gameplay purposes.
MH-60R ESM P A NE L
The ESM sensor detects radio and radar transmissions from other ships
and aircraft. These detections display as red wedges of varying size and
intensity on the ESM scope. The position of the wedge indicates the
bearing on which the transmission is detected. The ESM Panel consists of
the following components.
Signal Strength Indicator: The light scale indicates the strength of the
selected detection. Green lights indicating low signal strength, yellow a
signal of medium strength, and red in the outer positions indicate a strong
signal. A strong signal usually indicates a contact at close range.
BEARING: This field displays the exact bearing at the location of the
cursor.
EMITTER: Displays the name of the detected emitter for the contact
selected in the ESM Scope.
KNOWN CLASSES: A list of ship or air classes known to use an emitter of
the detected type appears here.
To Mark a Contact at the ESM Console

1. Ensure that ESM Autocrew is OFF. The cursor cannot be moved when
ESM Autocrew is ON. Click the Autocrew slider in the upper left of the
station to toggle the state of the Autocrew.
2. Click the power switch to the ON position.

3. Click the desired contact to select it. The position of the red triangle
cursor indicates the bearing of the contact.
8-34
4. Click MARK. The bearing information of the selected contact is sent to

the Nav Map and a track number is assigned to the contact. Contacts
marked by the ESM sensor appear on the Nav Map at the end of a red
line of bearing at a default range of 20 nm.
5. Once the ESM sensor has marked a contact, a track number appears
in front of the emitter name in the Emitter field each time that contact is
selected in the ESM scope.
Classifying a Contact at the ESM Console

The ESM sensor provides information on known classes that have the
detected type of emitter. While it is not always possible to positively identify
the class of the emitter in the ESM station, the Known Classes Library can
help narrow the list of possible classes.
1. Click on a contact in the ESM scope to select it.

2. Click on a contact name in the KNOWN CLASSES list. You may need
to scroll through a long list if many ship or air classes are known to use
the same sensor.
3. With the class name selected, click MARK. The selected class name is
assigned to the selected contact and on the Nav Map the 3D model for
that class name appears when the NTDS symbol for the contact is
selected on the Nav Map.
MH-60R D IPPING S ONAR [F7]

The MH-60R carries the Airborne Low Frequency Sonar (ALFS) AN/AQS22 dipping sonar. This system has a longer range than most dipping
sensors in use by the U.S. Navy. The sensor can be operated in passive or
active mode. In passive mode, frequency profile information is available to
assist with contact classification.
Deploying the Dipping Sonar:

1. Hover between 50 300 feet. The sonar cannot detect anything if
dragged at greater than 8 knots. The sensor breaks if it is dragged
through the water at a speed of 30 knots or greater.
2. At the ATO Station [F2], stream the hydrophone. In S.C.S. - Dangerous

Waters the cable is 400 long when fully deployed. The hydrophone
scope in the Dipping Sonar Station provides a visual indication of how
much of the cable is deployed. It is not necessary to deploy the entire
length of the cable. Click STOP in the ATO Stations HYDROPHONE
panel to stop the winch.
3. In the Dipping Sonar Station [F7] click ACTIVE or PASSIVE at the top
of the screen to select the desired mode.
Tip: You may want to launch a BT to determine the depth of the layer in the
area to help determine how much of the cable to deploy.
8-35
9 Note: In actuality the dipping sonar cable is over 2,000 feet long. For
game play purposes the max length has been shortened in S.C.S.
Dangerous Waters.
Active Dipping Sonar

1. Once the dipping sonar is deployed as described above, click ACTIVE
at the top of the Dipping Sonar station.
2. Click the button indicating the desired range scale at the right of the
console.
3. Click the CONTINUOUS or SINGLE button to select the desired type of

echo ranging transmission (ping.)
4. Click the TRANSMIT button. Contacts appear as larger or brighter dots

against the noise.
5. Click a contact to select it with the cursor.

6. Click the MARK button to send the bearing and range of the selected
contact to the Nav Map. The first time a contact is marked a track
number is assigned, that number is updated with subsequent markings.
Contacts detected with the Dipping Sonar in active mode appear on the
Nav Map at the end of a green LOB.
Transmission Modes
Select Active Mode
Selection Cursor
Click to mark selected contact
MH-60R Dipping Sonar Active Mode
8-36
Passive Dipping Sonar

1. Once the dipping sonar is deployed as described above, click
PASSIVE at the top of the Dipping Sonar station. Contacts appear as
spikes in the background noise in the lower Narrowband Bearing
Search Display. No contacts can be detected if OS speed is greater
than 8 knots.
2. Click and drag the cursor along the Narrowband Bearing Search in the
lower window and center the cursor over the contact.
3. When three or more frequencies are detected on a given bearing, lines

appear in the upper Narrowband Waterfall. Click at the tip of a spike to
see the detected frequencies.
4. Click the MARK button to mark the contact. The default classification
that appears under the Classification label is assigned to the contact.
5. If desired, click the INCREASE or DECREASE frequency button to

change the frequency scale in the display.
To Refine the Classification of a Marked Contact

1. Ensure the Profile filter reads FILTER ON. When on, the filter presents
you with the class names of the profiles that most closely match the
selected contact. The more frequencies (lines) that are detected, the
better your chance of an accurate classification. Five or more lines can
narrow the search to one or two possibilities.
2. Click on a detected contact in the Narrowband Search display then

click the NEXT and PREVIOUS buttons to cycle through the available
profiles. The profile of the selected class is represented by carets that
display at the bottom of the waterfall. Your task is to find a profile that
most closely matches the lines of the detected frequencies.
3. When you find a likely match, click MARK to update the Class assigned
to the contact. (Select the contact on the Nav Map to see the current
classification.)
8-37
Seconds
Frequency range
Narrowband Bearing Search
Passive Mode Selected Class
Narrowband Frequency Waterfall
MH-60R Dipping Sonar - Passive Mode
MH-60R A UTOCREW
The MH-60R has six Autocrew functions. An Autocrew slider in the upper
left corner of a station indicates that an Autocrew function is available.
When an Autocrew is ON, a silhouette of the crewman is visible on the
Autocrew slider. The MH-60R also has an Auto Pilot. This Auto Pilot
function is not associated with an Autocrew slider button but is covered
here.
BClick the text on an Autocrew slider to toggle its state or select
Autocrew from the Orders Menu then the appropriate crewmember
to toggle its state. A checkmark in front of the menu item indicates
the Autocrew is ON. Autocrew can also be selected in the Options
Screen. During gameplay press [Esc] then select Options>Crew.
MH-60R A C OU S TI C A U T OC R E W
When ON, the MH-60R Acoustic Autocrew sets hot sonobuoys to
Directional mode and marks contacts. He can only mark contacts in
Directional mode. He also assigns classification, but he is not speedy.
Your Task: You must set DICASS buoys to ACTIVE Mode and mark active
contacts yourself. You will need to turn Autocrew OFF to complete this task.
When you set windows to channel 00 in anticipation of supporting a
DICASS buoy in Active mode, the Autocrew may tune the empty channels
to something else if he is on. You can also classify contacts in passive
mode more quickly and in some cases more accurately than your Autocrew.
8-38
MH-60R ATO A U TO C R E W
When ON, ATO Autocrew enters Penguin missile and torpedo presets
appropriate for the assigned target or assigned bearing. Presets are greyed
with the exception of the Target/Runout Bearing and the ASSIGN button
Your Task: For torpedoes and the Penguin missile you must click the
desired target in the Geoplot or enter the desired runout bearing and click
ASSIGN. The Autocrew makes no inputs for Hellfire missiles. You must
make all target selections and click ASSIGN when the target is within the
Hellfire target cone. You must launch all missiles and torpedoes yourself.
Torpedoes can be assigned to a weapon drop point. The weapon must be
assigned to a valid target (track number) and the ASSIGN button must be
clicked before the Autocrew can make appropriate enable range settings.
When the selected target is assigned and the preset label remains Runout
Brg, this indicates the target is invalid for the weapon. Invalid targets are
aircraft, sonobuoys, your base ship, and land targets.
MH-60R A U T O P I L O T
The Auto Pilot is not the same as other Autocrew functions. There is no
Autocrew slider associated with this function. Auto Pilot can be turned OFF
only at the Pilot Station when a joystick is in use. It is always ON when you
are not at the Pilot Station. The Auto Pilot keeps the helicopter aloft and
follows your last orders or waypoints while you attend to tasks at other
stations.
You must manually set the Auto Pilot switch to DISABLE then subsequently
move the joystick to take joystick control of the aircraft. If you set Auto Pilot
to DISABLE upon entering the Pilot Station, but the joystick is not moved,
the Auto Pilot is still on until you move the joystick. The Auto Pilot is set to
ENABLE automatically whenever you leave the Pilot Station and must be
disabled again each time you return to the Pilot Station. Setting the switch
to DISABLE when no joystick is installed has no effect. For a full listing of
the MH-60R Auto Pilot functionality see MH-60R Stations/MH-60R Pilot
Station/MH-60 Pilot Station Functionality then Auto Pilot. See also MH-60R
Stations/Pilot Station/Piloting the MH-60R With a Joystick.
MH-60R C OU N T ER M E ASU R E A U TOC R E W

When ON, the Countermeasure Autocrew (Auto-Countermeasures)
launches chaff and flares when a missile is locked on Ownship. He also
takes evasive maneuvers to avoid the incoming missile. In addition to the
Autocrew slider, this function is activated in the Pilot Station by setting the
toggle switch to AUTO in the Countermeasure Launch Panel.
Your Task: You are not prevented from launching chaff and flares as you
see fit. If Ownship is following waypoints when evasive maneuvers are
taken, you must select Navigate>Follow Waypoints from the Orders or
Ownship menu to reassign OS to the designated waypoints.
8-39
MH-60R D I P PI N G S O N AR A U T OC R E W
When ON, the Dipping Sonar Autocrew marks contacts in passive mode.
He does not classify contacts and has no role in active sonar.
Your Task: You must deploy the Dipping Sonar, set the mode to Active or
Passive, and classify contacts in Passive mode. You must also change the
displayed frequency range as desired. Dipping Sonar Autocrew has no
function in Active mode.
MH-60R ESM A U TO C R E W
When ON, the ESM Autocrew marks contacts but does not classify them.
Your Task: You are prevented from doing anything in the ESM console
when the ESM Autocrew is on. You must turn ESM Autocrew off to perform
any tasks in the ESM station. It is your task to classify contacts by
identifying the probable contact from the list of classes known to carry the
detected emitter. See MH-60R Stations/MAD/ESM Station/ESM for
information on classifying contacts in the ESM Display. You are not
prevented from turning the MAD sensor ON or OFF.
MH-60R R AD A R A U T OC R E W
When ON, Radar Autocrew periodically marks all contacts on the radar
screen. This updates the bearing and range data for each radar-detected
contact and marks any new contacts as they appear.
Your Task: The cursor cannot be manipulated manually and the Mark
button is disabled when the Radar Autocrew is ON. If you want to mark
contacts yourself you must turn the Autocrew off using the slider or the
Orders Menus Autocrew>Radar option.
8-40

6(&7,21
3&25,2167$7,216
9-1
9: P-3C ORION STATIONS

9-4
P-3C TASK BAR..................................................................................9-4
STATIONS MENU ............................................................. 9-4
P-3C ORDERS MENU ...................................................... 9-5
DAMAGE REPORT W INDOW .............................................. 9-6
HISTORY W INDOW ........................................................... 9-6
MANEUVER SHORTCUTS AND GAME READOUTS .................. 9-7
TIME COMPRESSION SCALE .............................................. 9-7
P3-C PILOT STATION [F1] ...................................................................9-8
P-3C PILOT STATION FUNCTIONALITY ............................... 9-8
PILOTING THE P-3C WITH A JOYSTICK ............................. 9-11
Programming a Joystick for use with Aircraft ........ 9-12
Using a Joystick.................................................... 9-12
P-3C ACOUSTIC STATION [F2] ......................................................... 9-12
P-3C RADAR STATION [F3] .............................................................. 9-14
MARKING CONTACTS ON THE RADAR SCOPE .................... 9-14
P-3C MAD/ESM STATION [F4] ...................................................... 9-15
MAD/SAD ................................................................... 9-15
Using MAD/SAD Effectively .................................. 9-15
ESM............................................................................ 9-16
To Mark a Contact at the ESM Console................ 9-16
Determining the Class of a Contact with ESM ...... 9-17
P-3C NAVIGATION STATION [F5] ..................................................... 9-17
OWNSHIP/ORDERS MENUS............................................. 9-17
CONTACT MENU ............................................................ 9-17
2D NAV MAP LINES OF BEARING .................................... 9-18
P-3C TACCO [F6] ....................................................................... 9-19
TACCO W EAPONS CONTROL CONSOLE ......................... 9-19
Dropping a Torpedo.............................................. 9-21
Dropping a Mine ................................................... 9-22
Launching an AGM-65 Maverick........................... 9-23
Launching a SLAM-ER ......................................... 9-23
Assigning a Torpedo Waypoint ............................. 9-24
Assigning a Mine Waypoint................................... 9-26
TACCO SONOBUOY CONSOLE ...................................... 9-26
Internal Launch Tubes .......................................... 9-27
External Launch Tube........................................... 9-28
Assigning a Sonobuoy Waypoint .......................... 9-28
P-3C W EAPON PRESETS ............................................... 9-29
Torpedoes............................................................. 9-29
Mines .................................................................... 9-31
Missiles ................................................................. 9-31
P-3C INFRARED CAMERA [F7] ......................................................... 9-32
P-3C AUTOCREW ........................................................................... 9-33
ACOUSTIC AUTOCREW ................................................... 9-33
AUTO PILOT .................................................................. 9-33
9-2
COUNTERMEASURE AUTOCREW ...................................... 9-34

ESM AUTOCREW .......................................................... 9-34
RADAR AUTO CREW ...................................................... 9-34
TACCO AUTOCREW ..................................................... 9-34
9-3
9: P-3C ORION STATIONS

For many years the P-3C Orion was primarily an ASW Maritime Patrol
aircraft. In recent years its role has been expanded to include battlefield
surveillance and its loadout now includes strike weapons in addition to ASW
torpedoes and anti-ship missiles.
Station. The Navigation Station functions the same on every
controllable platform and is covered only once in the manual. See
Navigation Station. Some Nav Station information unique to the P-3C
is contained in the abbreviated P3-C Navigation Station portion of
this section.
P-3C T ASK B AR
The P-3C Task Bar has several unique elements as described below.
Stations Menu
Altitude Shortcut
Damage Report
Orders Menu
Course Shortcut
Speed Shortcut

Time Acceleration
icon to jump to that station or use the associated Hot Key. The default Hot
Keys are seen here.
Pilot [F1]
Radar [F3]
Navigation Map [F5]
[F2] Acoustic
[F4] MAD/ESM
[F6] TACCO
Infrared Camera [F7]
9-4
P-3C O R D E R S M E NU
The Orders menu provides a means for quickly issuing a variety of
commands from any station. The commands available for the P-3C are
explained below.
Navigate:
Return to Base: Select this option to order the plane to return to the
launching airport and land. If the mission creator added the P-3C as a
standalone platform, this option does not appear. When this option is
selected the Auto Pilot steers the aircraft back to the base airport and
lands it. The plane maneuvers to approximately 6 nautical miles
beyond the airport then turns to make its approach. Once OS lands,
the Weapon Loadout Screen appears allowing you to reload or change
the weapons currently loaded. There is a delay of 3 minutes before you
can take off again after landing. If Aircraft Quick Launch is ON, this
delay is reduced to 20 seconds. A timer appears on the Nav Map
displaying the amount of time remaining until launch is possible. Your
controls are disabled until the time to launch has been achieved. (If you
are playing with a joystick, fly the plane to your base and land it
manually.)
Be warned that once you close the Weapon Loadout window you
cannot open it again. You must wait until you take off and land
again.
BTo take off again after landing: Enter a speed of 200 kts and wait.
Once you are airborne order a new course and altitude and change
speed as desired.
Speed: Displays a submenu of options that allow you to quickly set OS
speed to High: 364 kts, Med: 263 kts or Low: 154 kts.
Altitude: Displays a submenu of options that allow you to quickly set
OS altitude to High: 28,989 ft, Medium: 13,598 ft, Low: 677 feet or the
appropriate altitude for a MAD search: ~300 feet.
Autocrew: Displays a submenu of P-3C Autocrew options. Select an option
to toggle its state. A checkmark indicates the Autocrew member is ON. (A
complete description of P-3C Autocrew functionality is found at the end of
this section.)
Auto-Countermeasures: Activated in the Pilot station
Countermeasure Launch Panel. When ON the Autocrew launches
chaff and flares and takes evasive maneuvers when a missile is locked
on OS.
Acoustic/Sonobuoys: When ON Acoustic Autocrew sets gram
displays to available appropriate channels, sets directional mode and
marks contacts.
Radar: When ON Radar Autocrew marks any contacts that appear
consistently.
9-5
ESM: When ESM Autocrew is ON he marks all contacts detected by

the ESM sensor.
TACCO: When ON TACCO Autocrew assigns torpedo presets for
targets you select.
Launch Pylon: This option appears only when a weapon is assigned to a
specific target or bearing at the TACCO Station either via the ASSIGN
button or weapon waypoint. Select the desired Pylon option to launch the
weapon immediately. When a Maverick AGM is assigned to a pylon
the Launch Pylon>Wing Pylon X: AGM 65 option is greyed out until the
target is within the missile's acquisition cone.
Countermeasures: Displays a submenu of available countermeasures.
Select Flare or Chaff as needed to launch that countermeasure from any
station. CMs are automatically reloaded until the supply is depleted. You
can fire CMs even when Auto-Countermeasure crewman is ON.
Sonobuoys: Displays a submenu of available sonobuoys. Select the
desired Buoy type and depth (Shallow = 90 feet; Deep = 400 feet.) The
number of buoys remaining appears in parentheses after the buoy name.
This menu launches all of the buoys in the external launchers first. When
those have been depleted the internal buoys are launched. Internal buoys
must be first loaded into a tube in the TACCO Sonobuoy Station. If the
number of remaining buoys of any type is greater than zero but the option is
greyed out, load out the three internal buoy tubes at the TACCO Sonobuoy
Station with the desired type of buoy to once again enable the Sonobuoy
option in the Orders or Ownship Menus.
Sensors: Displays a submenu of the P-3s sensors. Select an option to
toggle its state. A checkmark indicates a sensor is ON. Select Secure All to
turn off all sensors simultaneously.
Bomb Bay: Select Open or Close to set the Bomb Bay doors to the desired
state. A check mark indicates the selected option.
The History Window displays the type of history selected by the History
Selection buttons to the left of the window. The window scrolls as
necessary, with the oldest history appearing at the top of the window.
9-6

Radio Traffic History: Lists all radio messages received and the initial
tasking message.
M A N E U V ER
SH OR TC U T S A N D
Digits and buttons are orange by default. Selected buttons are yellow and
maneuver shortcut digits change to yellow while changes are entered.
BTo change course, speed or altitude with a Maneuver Shortcut, click
digits to enter the desired number. Click to increment a digit, rightclick to decrease its value.
ALT: Shows/changes current altitude.
WIND: Displays the current wind speed in knots and direction in this
format: Wind SpeedDirection (No user interaction.)
SPEED: Shows relative speed through the air in knots. Click digits to
change OS speed.
COURSE: Shows/changes current course in degrees.
word PAUSED.
bar.

toggle through all the time scales.
9-7
P3-C P ILOT S TATION [F1]

From the Pilot Station the landing gear is raised and lowered, weapons are
jettisoned, the course and speed of the aircraft are controlled and warning
lights and fuel gauges are monitored. The location of Ownship in relation to
other contacts is seen on the Geoplot and either Ownship or a hooked
contact can be centered.
If so desired, the P-3C can be piloted with a joystick when in the Pilot
Station with Auto Pilot OFF. See Piloting the P-3C with a Joystick later in
this section. When using the joystick, two alternate views are available:
Nose view and Tail view. These are accessed via the HUD Display button
in the upper right of the pilot station or by pressing the [V] key.
P-3C P I L O T S T A TI O N F U NC TI O N AL I T Y
The P-3C Pilot Station is made up of the following areas. While the course,
speed and altitude can be changed from any station via the Task Bar
maneuvering shortcuts, course and speed can be adjusted using the
Throttle and Course Indicator/Selector gauge.
CM Autocrew Slider
CM Panel
DDI
Warning Lights
Auto Pilot
HUD Display
Course Indicator/Selector
Geoplot
P-3C Pilot Station

The Pilot Station is made up of the following areas:
Auto Pilot Switch: The Auto Pilot is not like other Autocrew in S.C.S.
Dangerous Waters. This option is not associated with the Pilot Station
Autocrew slider button. (The Pilot Station slider is associated with the
Countermeasure Autocrew.) The Auto Pilot turns on automatically when
you leave the Pilot Station and is always on while you are at the Pilot
9-8
Station except when you are controlling the P-3C with a joystick. If no
joystick is in use, setting Auto Pilot to OFF has no effect.
Auto Pilot switch is ON:
When Auto Pilot is ON he follows course waypoints and maintains
ordered speed and altitude. You can change ordered speed and
altitude without canceling waypoint following.
Changes in ordered course cancel his waypoint following, and
enables the Navigate>Follow Waypoints option in the Orders and

Ownship Menus. Select that option to order the Auto Pilot to
resume following existing waypoints. (Auto Pilot must be ON for
these options to function.)
If there are no waypoints, he maintains ordered course, speed and
altitude.
The Auto Pilot terrain-follows at all times, attempting to maintain
100 ft above the surface (terrain or water).

If the throttle is adjusted, the Auto Pilot may not be able to cope
with unbalanced throttle settings.

Auto Pilot switch is OFF:
The plane can be flown manually using a joystick. See Piloting the
P-3C with a Joystick later in this section. Manually setting the

switch to OFF has no effect until you also move the joystick.
When switched back ON, Auto Pilot tries to maintain current
course, speed, and level off at the current alt. If you have placed
the plane in a steep dive or other extreme maneuver, turning the
Auto Pilot back on may not be enough to save you.
The Auto Pilot automatically switches to ON when a station other
than the Pilot Station is selected. You must reset Auto Pilot to OFF
each time you return to the Pilot Station to fly with the joystick.
Warning Lights: The following warning lights illuminate as indicated below.
Gear: Lit when landing gear is down.
Bomb Bay: Lit when Bomb Bay doors are open.
MAD: Lit when the Magnetic Anomaly Detector (MAD) senses a
contact.
Collision: Lit when a collision with land or water is imminent. Change
altitude.
Stall: Lit when an aircraft stall is imminent. Level out and increase
speed.
Landing Gear Lever: Once the plane is airborne, the landing gear should
be retracted. The Auto Pilot does not perform this duty.
BClick on UP to raise the gear.
9-9
BClick on LANDING GEAR to lower the gear for the landing

sequence.
Altimeter: The Altimeter provides a visual representation of current and
changing altitude. The digital readout indicates the attitude in thousands of
feet. The longer hand indicates 100's of feet (one sweep of the dial
represents 1000 feet). The shorter hand indicates 1000's of feet (one sweep
of the dial represents 10,000 feet). The digits count off one unit per 1000
feet of vertical elevation. Clockwise movement indicates upward movement.
Counterclockwise movement indicates downward movement.
Fuel Gauge: Indicates current level of fuel.
Engine Warning Lights: Lit when designated engine is damaged, stalling,
or out of fuel.
Horizon Indicator: Provides the pilot with a visual indication of the aircrafts
orientation relative to the horizon.
Course Indicator/Selector: The 12:00 position indicates the current
course. The red arrow indicates the selected course.
BClick on the desired heading to set the plane on that course.
Speed Indicator: The needle indicates the current speed in knots. Change
speed with the throttles, the Task Bar maneuver shortcuts or Orders Menu
commands. (Speed can also be changed with a joystick.)
Engine RPM Indicators: Each engines revolutions per minute are shown
in individual scales. The bottom of the scale (green) indicate lowest RPMs,
the top (red) indicates high RPMs. These settings coincide with the position
of the throttle.
Countermeasure Launch Panel: The following functions are possible in
this area.
CHAFF and FLARE Buttons: A lit button indicates the
countermeasure is ready to launch.
BClick desired button to launch the indicated countermeasure. The
button flashes until the tube is reloaded.
Auto/Manual Switch: When in AUTO mode, chaff and flares are
automatically launched and evasive maneuvers initiated when a
weapon is locked on Ownship. Countermeasures can still be launched
manually when in Auto-mode.
BClick on AUTO to place Countermeasures in auto-mode. (The
Autocrew slider button in the upper left corner of the Pilot station also
toggles the state of the switch.)
LOCK Warning Light: Lit when a weapon is locked on Ownship.
DDI: This Digital Data Indicator contains the following information about the
platform track hooked on the Geoplot:
Track: Track number of selected track.
Bearing: True bearing of selected track.
9-10
Range: Range of contact from OS.

ID: Link or player designated alliance of the selected track.
Class/Category: Link or player designated class name or category of
the selected track displays in the bottom row. Given the length of some
class names, there is no label.
Sonobuoy Information: In addition to Track, Bearing and Range the
following information displays when a sonobuoy is selected replacing
the ID and Class lines in the DDI.
Type: Lists the type of buoy selected.
Channel: Lists the channel on which the buoy is transmitting. Set this
channel number in the Acoustic Station to tune to this buoys
transmissions.
Throttle: Controls the Revolutions Per Minute for all four engines, thus
increasing or decreasing the aircrafts speed. The RPM indicators to the left
of the throttle provide a visual display of the current RPMs.
BClick the levers and drag up to increase the RPMs of all engines.
BClick the levers and drag down to decrease the RPMS.
BRight-click and drag an individual throttle lever to change the RPMs
for that engine only.
Jettison Selector Switch: Click the label indicating the location of the
weapons to be jettisoned. (Right Wing, Left Wing or Bomb Bay.)
Jettison Switch: Click to jettison weapons in the location selected with the
Jettison Selector Switch.
HUD Display: The Heads Up Display button provides access to the nose
view and tail view, which are helpful when flying the plane with a joystick.
Geoplot Controls: These buttons, located above the circular Geoplot,
control zoom and centering options.
Zoom: Click desired button to zoom in (+) or out (-) on the Geoplot.
Hooked: Click to center the hooked platform in the Geoplot.
Center OS: Click to center Ownship in the Geoplot.
Geoplot: Displays track symbols for detected contacts. The small circle
attached to the Ownship symbol indicates the location a mine or torpedo
will enter the water if dropped at the current time. Use the mouse wheel to
zoom in and out on the Geoplot or use the buttons above.
P IL OT I N G
TH E
P-3C
W ITH A
J O Y S TI C K
The P-3C can be piloted with a joystick whenever the Pilot Station is
selected. The joystick must be programmed to work with S.C.S. Dangerous Waters prior to gameplay as described below.
9-11
Programming a Joystick for use with Aircraft

1. Ensure that the joystick is attached to the computer. Follow the joystick
manufacturers instructions for installation of any software and for
connecting the joystick to the computer.
2. From the Main Menu select OPTIONS.

3. Click CONTROLS.
4. Click AIR/HELO to select it. A check mark indicates the option is
selected.
no keyboard commands are applicable a joystick only. There is no
keyboard equivalent.
6. Continue until all listed options have been associated with a joystick
movement.
Using a Joystick
Keep in mind the following when flying an aircraft using a joystick.
The joystick must first be programmed as described above to work with
S.C.S - Dangerous Waters.

The joystick is functional only in the Pilot Station.
You must manually set the Auto Pilot switch to OFF then subsequently
move the joystick. When the switch is clicked to the OFF position the
Auto Pilot is still enabled until you move the joystick. If no joystick is
installed, setting the Auto Pilot to OFF has no effect.
The Auto Pilot turns on automatically when a station other than the
Pilot Station is selected and maintains the last ordered course speed
and altitude.
Any existing waypoints are no longer followed once the Auto Pilot is
OFF. To return to following the waypoints, Auto Pilot must be ON and

Navigate>Follow Waypoints must be selected from either the Orders or
Ownship Menu.
Three views are available. Cockpit View, Nose View and Tail View.
Click [V] repeatedly to cycle through the views or click the HUD button
repeatedly in the upper right of the screen to change the view.
P-3C A COUSTIC S TATION [F2]

In its ASW role the P-3C deploys sonobuoys and processes their data to
detect and localize subsurface contacts. Four sonobuoys modeled in S.C.S.
- Dangerous Waters are available for launch from the controllable P-3C. For
information on the Sonobuoys modeled and detailed information on
processing incoming data see Training/Sonar School/Sonar
Systems/Sonobuoys and also Sonobuoy Data Display Windows (Grams).
9-12
Display Selectors
Channel Selector
A description of the P-3Cs Acoustic station follows.

Data Displays Windows (GRAMS): Also called Grams, these windows
display the sonobuoy data being transmitted on the selected channel. Data
from up to sixteen buoys can be displayed using the lettered buttons above
the displays. Buttons A-D and E-H control the data to be viewed in the four
left-side Display Windows. Buttons I-L and M-P control the data to be
viewed in the four right-side display windows.
BClick the desired button and set the associated channels as desired.
BGo to the Nav Map to determine on which channel a buoy is
transmitting. The channel in use appears next to a buoy NTDS
symbol on the Nav Map and appears in the DDI when a buoy symbol
is selected. Assign the desired channel number to a Data Display
Window by clicking (or right-clicking) on a thumb-wheel. The window
displays the data returning on the selected channel.
FREQUENCY ALERTS: The Sonobuoy Processing System can be set to
alert the user when a specified frequency is detected. Four alerts can be
specified.
BClick one of the four buttons labeled I IV.
BClick the individual digits on the thumb-wheel associated with a
Frequency Alert button to designate the desired frequency of
interest. When the specified frequency is detected, the button flashes
and an audible alert is heard.
CHAN: Channel Selectors. Click or right-click the digits on the thumb-wheel
to set the receiving channel for that display.
9-13
9 Note: For Information on how to process and mark contacts in the

sonobuoy Data Display Windows see Training/Sonar School/Sonar
Systems/Sonobuoy Data Display Windows (Grams).
P-3C R ADAR
STATI ON
[F3]
The Radar Station displays radar returns on surface and air contacts.
Contacts marked on the Radar appear on the Nav Map at the detected
range and bearing.
Radar Scope
Power On
Enable Range Rings
Set Scope Range Scale
Set Range Rings Scale when Rings Enabled
M AR K I N G C O NT AC TS
O N TH E
R A D AR S C O PE
To manually mark contacts, the Radar Autocrew must be OFF.
1. Click ON to power up the radar.

2. Click the desired Range Scale number to set switch to that position.
3. Click ENABLE to enable Range Rings on the scope if desired.
4. Click the desired number at the RANGE RINGS switch to set the range
rings to that display on the Scope.
5. Contacts appear as small dots on the scope. If close to shore, contacts

may get lost in the ground clutter. Click on a contact to center the circle
portion of the Bearing-Range Cursor over the contact or click and drag
the cursor to center it. Be aware that the user cannot move the cursor
when the Autocrew is ON.
The bearing and range at the location of the cursor appear as a
readout in the CURSOR thumb-wheels in the lower right of the

console.
9-14
6. Click MARK. The contact appears on the Nav Map at the detected
range and bearing.
P-3C MAD/ESM S TATION [F4]

This station is used for passive detection of submerged submarines with
MAD/SAD detectors. The Electronic Support Measures (ESM) scope allows
passive detection, marking and classification of surface and air contacts.
MAD/SAD
Large metal objects like ships and in particular, submarines create
disturbances in the earths magnetic field and these disturbances or
anomalies, can be detected from above. The data from the P-3s Magnetic
Anomaly Detector (MAD) and Submarine Anomaly Detector (SAD) appear
on a plot located on the right side of the MAD/ESM Console. Distortions
detected by these sensors provide a strong indication that a submarine is in
the area. The MAD/SAD plot on the right side of the MAD/ESM Console
provides information only. There is no user interaction.
BClick ON next to the POWER switch below the MAD/SAD plot.
When the MAD/SAD Plot is activated, the pens draw down the
centerline when no anomalies or submarines are detected.

When the pens draw away from the centerline this is an indication that
something is in the vicinity. A large deviation from the centerline

indicates a strong signal. The strength of the signal is determined by
range and size of the target.
The Notify Button is lit and a verbal crew report is issued when
detections occur. The contact is automatically marked and appears on

the Nav Map. The sensor also detects and marks surface ships in the
immediate area.
Using MAD/SAD Effectively

The MAD sensor has an effective range of about 1000 yds. At altitudes
above 1000 ft the sensor does not detect anything.

At an altitude of 500 feet, the sensor detects underwater contacts in the
500 feet directly beneath the plane.

The thermal layer does not mask a submarine from the MAD sensor.
Going deep is a submarines best defense against MAD and SAD.

The SAD sensor is similar to the MAD sensor but has a more limited
range of around 750 yards.

SAD reports submerged contacts only.
BPatrol at a low altitude (200 feet if conditions permit) when searching

with MAD/SAD sensors. Because of their short ranges, a spike
indicates the plane is directly over the target.
BIf the contact is known to be hostile, drop a torpedo immediately.
9-15
BIf the contact is unknown, launch buoys to further localize or identify

the contact. When the contact is determined to be hostile, drop
torpedoes.
ESM
The ESM sensor detects radio and radar transmissions from other ships
and aircraft. These detections display as orange wedges of varying size
and intensity on the ESM Scope. The position of the wedge indicates the
bearing on which the transmission is detected.
ESM Detections (Contacts)
Detected Emitter
ESM Cursor Mad/Sad Detection
Classes using the Detected Emitter
Signal Strength Indicator
SIGNAL STRENGTH: The light scale indicates the strength of the selected
detection. The lights move from the center outward with the inner green
lights indicating low signal strength. The outer red lights signal a strong
signal. A strong signal usually indicates a contact at close range.
EMITTER: The name of the detected emitter for the contact selected in the
ESM Scope. Once a contact is marked its track number appears in front of
the emitter name.
KNOWN CLASSES: A list of ship and air classes known to use an emitter
of the detected type appears here.
To Mark a Contact at the ESM Console

1. Ensure that ESM Autocrew is OFF. The cursor cannot be moved when
ESM Autocrew is on. Click the Autocrew slider in the upper left of the
station to toggle the state of the Autocrew.
2. Click the power switch to the ON position.

3. Click the desired contact to select it. The position of the solid orange
triangle cursor indicates the bearing of the contact.
9-16
4. Click MARK. The bearing information of the selected contact is sent to

the Nav Map and a track number is assigned to the contact if another
of Ownships sensors has not already assigned a track number.
Once a contact has been marked by one of Ownships sensors, a track
number appears in front of the emitter name in the Emitter field when
the contact is selected in ESM.
Determining the Class of a Contact with ESM

The ESM sensor provides the name of classes known to carry the detected
type of emitter.
1. Click a contact in the ESM display. When a class name or a list of class
names appears in the Known Classes window, click on a name in the
list.
2. Scroll the list if necessary to find a contact that fits any other
information you have on selected contact.
3. Select the desired Class name, then click MARK. The class name in
the list is assigned to the contact track ID.
4. You still need to apply an alliance ID to the contact from the Contact
Menu on the Nav Map. If you determine that the classification you have
applied is in error, you can always change it from the Contact Menus
Classify Contact dialog.
P-3C N AVIGATION S TATION [F5]

The Navigation Station functions identically from platform to platform. The
basics of the Navigation Station are covered in the Navigation Station
section of this manual. Some items on the Ownship Menu are unique to the
P-3. These are described here.
O W NS H I P /O R D E R S M ENU S
Click on the Ownship symbol on the Nav Map to select it then right-click on
the selected symbol to display the Ownship Menu. The majority of the
functionality contained in the Ownship Menu is also contained in the Orders
Menu. See P-3C Stations/P-3C Task Bar/P-3C Orders Menu earlier in this
section. The rest of the Ownship Options require the use of the Nav Map.
These are the same from platform to platform. See Navigation Station/2D
Navigation Map/Ownship Menu.
C O N T AC T M ENU
The Contact Menu appears whenever you select then right-click on a
contacts NTDS symbol on the Nav Map. Most menu items are the same
from platform to platform, however, there are several options that are
unique to the P-3. The following Contact Menu options are available when
you are commanding the P-3C in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters.
9-17
Engage With:
Bomb Bay Pylon [X]: [Weapon Name] Only torpedoes and mines can be
loaded here.
Pylon [X]: [Weapon Name] Mines and missiles can be loaded here.
Torpedoes and Mines: When selected, a torpedo or mine is dropped
with the default presets if you have not changed presets for the
selected weapon at the TACCO station.
AGM-65 Maverick Missiles: (Available only for surface ship and land
contacts.) The range of the AGM-65 Maverick Missile as modeled in
S.C.S. Dangerous Waters is 50 nm. The nose of the plane must be
aimed at the target (within a 30 degree cone) and the plane must be
within 50 nautical miles of the contact before this menu option is
enabled.
SLAM-ER: (Available only for land targets.) A range of 155 nautical
miles is modeled for the SLAM-ER in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
While waypoints can be assigned to the missile in the TACCO Station,
when fired via the right-click Contact Menu, the missile flies on a
straight course to the target. This option is only available from the
Contact Menu when the target is within range of the missile.
2D N A V M AP L I NE S
OF
BEARING
In addition to the sonobuoy, Radar and ESM lines of bearing described in

the Navigation Station section of this manual, the P-3C has an IR camera
that can also be used to mark contacts. Contacts marked with the IR
Camera appear at the actual range of the contact at the time it was marked
at the end of a magenta line of bearing. The LOB helps differentiate
between a visual contact marked by you and one marked automatically by
the visual sensor. The latter has no LOB.
Because the P-3C has no TMA station you cannot determine and enter a
firing solution for contacts with lines of bearing therefore the lines of bearing
remain on the Nav Map for all sonobuoys and most contacts detected by
Ownship sensors. The P-3C receives reports on visual contacts from the
cockpit. These visual contacts appear at the designated range and all Link
participants and the contacts they report appear on the Nav Map at the
location reported by the Link participant. When updated regularly, these
locations are fairly accurate.
Tip: If you determine via buoy triangulation or other method the likely
location of a subsurface contact, place a Manual Solution at the location of
the suspected contacts, change the category and ID to Subsurface Hostile,
then attack that contact with the Engage With command from the Nav Map
or from the Geoplot on the TACCO Weapons Station. To place a Manual
Solution, right click the Nav Map then select Add Manual Solution. This
menu option does not appear when Show Truth is ON.
9-18
P-3C TACCO [F6]

The P-3s Tactical Coordinator (TACCO) is responsible for launching
sonobuoys and weapons. In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters these tasks are
accomplished from separate consoles at the TACCO Station. The Geoplot
and Waypoint controls are available in both the Weapons Console and
Sonobuoy Console views.
TACCO W E AP O N S C O NT R O L C O N S O L E
The default view of the TACCO station is of the Weapons Control Console.
DDI
Geoplot Range Scale Selector Weapon Locations Selectors
Waypoint Controls Geoplot
Selected Weapon Presets
P-3C TACCO Weapons Console

The following areas make up the TACCO Weapons Console.
DDI: Digital Data Indicator. Displays information about the contact hooked
on the Geoplot.
Geoplot: Displays the contact symbols for Ownship and all contacts
reported by Ownship sensors and the Link when Show Link Data is turned
on via the Options >Game menu or the Nav Map right-click menu. (See
Navigation Station.)
Range Scale: Click to select the desired range in thousands of yards (kyds)
visible in the Geoplot.
WAYPOINTS: Controls the placement of available types of waypoints.
Fly-to: Click to place a flight waypoint for Ownship on the Geoplot. A
tiny F appears next to the square waypoint.
Sonobuoy: Click to place a buoy drop point on the Geoplot. The view
is switched to the TACCO Sonobuoy Console and a buoy waypoint [B]
appears on the Geoplot extending from Ownship. The buoy of the type
9-19
currently selected in the External Launch Tube Window is dropped. If

you want a different type of buoy assigned to the waypoint, select a
different type before you click the Sonobuoy button. You cannot
change the buoy type once the waypoint is placed. You must delete the
waypoint and place a new waypoint with the desired type.
Weapon: Click to place a weapon drop point for a torpedo or mine.
The view is switched to the TACCO Weapons Control Console. A
weapon waypoint appears on the Geoplot accompanied by a tiny [T]. A
list of weapons available for assignment appears in the Presets
window. You are prevented from selecting any other waypoint until you
assign a weapon to the current waypoint.
9 Note: When a weapon waypoint is placed the weapon assigned to
the waypoint is automatically assigned the default presets and the
default runout bearing of 000. To change the runout bearing, you
must click ASSIGN to toggle the state of the Assign button, change
the runout bearing or select a valid contact then click ASSIGN again.
CENTER ON: Click the desired button to center the associated symbol in
the Geoplot: Ownship or a hooked contact.
WEAPONS LOADOUT: This window displays the name and pylon number
of weapons located in the Bomb Bay or Wing pylons. The location to be
displayed is selected by the toggle switch below the window.
STATION SELECT: Click a specific number in either the Bomb Bay or a
wing location to see the presets for the weapon loaded at that location.
9 Note: Wing Pylon 12 always loads the ESM Pod so no presets are
visible when that number is selected.
PRESETS: This window displays the presets for the weapon selected in the
STATION SELECT switch above the window. For information on these
Presets, see in P-3C Stations/P-3C TACCO Station/P-3C Weapons Presets
later in this section.
FIRE: Click to fire the selected weapon once presets are entered and
applied. This button is not enabled unless the KILL READY button is
illuminated.
KILL READY: This light illuminates when the selected weapon is ready to
launch. If the weapon is in the Bomb Bay, the Bomb Bay doors must be
open before this light is lit. The Maverick missile must be assigned to a
target and the target must be within the acquisition cone before this light is
illuminated.
BOMB BAY: Click OPEN or CLOSED to set the Bomb Bay orders to the
desired position. Bomb Bay weapons assigned to a weapon waypoint (drop
point) will not deploy unless the doors are open.
9-20
Dropping a Torpedo
A torpedo can be assigned to run at a specific bearing once it enters the
water or to a head for a specific surface or subsurface contact. Torpedoes
can only be loaded out in the Bomb Bay in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
To Assign a Torpedo to a Runout Bearing:
1. Click the Geoplot to deselect all contacts. (If an invalid contact or a

contact with a line of bearing (LOB) is selected, the Runout Brg label
also appears. See Note below.)
2. Click the toggle switch under the WEAPONS LOADOUT window to the
BOMB BAY position. Determine the pylon location for the torpedo you
want to drop.
3. In the STATION SELECT area click the number of the Bomb Bay
location containing the desired torpedo. If the Bomb Bay doors are
open you are alerted if a weapon in a lower pylon blocks the selected
weapon. Select the even numbered (lower) pylons first. The presets for
the weapon appear in the PRESETS window.
4. In the Runout Brg field click/right-click digits to enter the bearing for
the weapon to follow after it enters the water.
5. Click ASSIGN. (The ASSIGN button is solidly lit with black letters when
ON.) This assigns the weapon to the bearing and presets entered. The
system remembers the assignment even if you select a different pylon.)
To change the presets after you have assigned them, click ASSIGN
again to unassign it, change the presets as desired, then click ASSIGN
again.
6. If the Bomb Bay doors are open and the pylon is not blocked by
another weapon, the green KILL READY light is lit and the FIRE button
is enabled. Click FIRE to drop the torpedo.
To Assign a Torpedo to a Specific Contact

1. Select a valid contact in the Geoplot (surface ship or submarine
symbol). (Follow steps 2 and 3 above to select the location of the
desired weapon.)
2. The Target label appears in the Presets area followed by the track
number of the selected contact.
9 Note: You cannot assign a torpedo to an invalid target (Ownship, air,
land or sonobuoy symbol, or the symbol for unknown). When such a
contact is selected in the Geoplot, Runout Brg replaces Target in
the preset list, showing a default bearing of 000. Change the bearing
as desired or select a valid target. (Once you have entered a bearing
for a weapon on a given pylon, the system remembers that bearing
for that pylon until you change it again.) If you are fairly sure that you
know where a subsurface contact is located based on a sonobuoy
returns, place a manual solution on the Nav Map and designate it as
9-21
the assumed category (surface, subsurface.) You are able to select

the solution and assign a torpedo to the solution.
3. Click ASSIGN. The ASSIGN button is solidly lit (green with black
letters) when ON. This assigns the weapon to the selected target with
the presets as entered. The system remembers the assignment even if
you select a different pylon. (To change the assigned target after it has
been assigned, click the enabled ASSIGN button to deselect it, click a
different target in the Geoplot and click ASSIGN again.)
4. Adjust the presets as desired. See P-3C Stations/P-3C TACCO

Station/P-3C Weapons Presets. (With the exception of the Runout Brg,
presets are greyed and cannot be changed if TACCO Autocrew is ON.)
5. Click OPEN next to the BOMB BAY toggle switch below the Presets.
The bomb bay doors must be open before the KILL READY light is
enabled. If a weapon in the lower pylon blocks the selected weapon,
the green KILL READY light does not enable.
6. When the KILL READY light is green, click the FIRE button. The small
circle extending in front of the P-3C symbol on the Geoplot indicates
the approximate location where the torpedo will hit the water if the
weapon is dropped at the current time.
Tip: The default Run to Enable (RTE) for torpedoes in the P-3 is set to 0.
This means that the weapon begins its search pattern as soon as it hits the
water. The snake search pattern is centered on the bearing entered or the
target selected, however, if the weapon detects a contact while it is turning
to center on a specific bearing or target, it will home on the first contact it
detects. To give the weapon a chance to center on a specific bearing or
target before it enables, set the RTE to at least 500 yards.
Dropping a Mine
Mines can be loaded on the wings as well as in the bomb bay.
1. In the STATION SELECT area click the number of the pylon location of
the desired mine.
2. The presets for the mine appear in the PRESETS window.

3. Click the text in the Depth field to set the depth for the mine. See P-3C
Stations/P-3C TACCO Station/P-3C Weapons Presets for more
information on mine depths.
4. If the mine is located in the bomb bay, click the BOMB BAY switch to
OPEN.
5. When the KILL READY light is illuminated, click FIRE. The small circle
extending in front of the P-3C symbol on the Geoplot indicates the
approximate location where the mine will hit the water if the weapon is
dropped at the current time.
Tip: While you are not prevented from assigning a weapon to a valid target
that is attached to a line of bearing, be aware that in most cases the symbol
at the end of the LOB is at a default range, not the location of the actual
9-22
contact. (Contacts marked with the IR Camera appear at the actual range of
the contact is marked.) If you want to target a contact on a line of bearing,
maneuver to send the torpedo down the line of bearing, not across it.
Launching an AGM-65 Maverick

The Maverick is used to target surface ships and land targets. As modeled
in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters the desired target must be a contact
designated as surface or land, within the confines of the acquisition cone in
front of Ownship before the missile can be fired.
1. Select a wing pylon containing an AGM-65 Maverick. A cone appears

in front of the Ownship symbol on the Geoplot. The only preset is the
ASSIGN button.
2. The legs of the cone extend 50 nautical miles, the maximum range of
the weapon.
3. Maneuver OS until the surface contact appears within the confines of

the cone. When a valid contact is within the cone, (surface or land)
select that valid contact in the Geoplot and click ASSIGN. The KILL
READY light enables enabling the FIRE button. If the assigned contact
moves out of the acquisition cone before missile is fired, the KILL
READY button is disabled and the missile cannot be fired. You can
assign the contact to the missile before the contact is in the cone.
When the contact enters the cone, the KILL READY and FIRE button
are enabled.
If an invalid contact is selected, the ASSIGN button is greyed out.
Invalid contacts are air and missile symbols, sonobuoy symbols

and your OS base airport. See the TIP above concerning the
advisability of firing at targets attached to a Line of Bearing.
If a different contact is selected after the missile has been
assigned to a contact the assignment stays with the original

contact. Un-assign the contact by clicking the ASSIGN button,
then ensure that the desired contact is selected and click ASSIGN
again. (ASSIGN is ON when the button is green with black letters.)
9 Note: The Nav Map Contact Menus Engage With >Maverick option
only enables if the selected contact has a surface ship or land
contact symbol and the contact is currently within the detection cone
of the missile. The cone legs only appear in the TACCO Geoplot, not
on the Nav Map. If the option is available, the target is within the
cone. The Engage With command overrides any pylon assignment
made at the TACCO station.
Launching a SLAM-ER
In S.C.S.- Dangerous Waters A Standoff Land Attack Missile Expanded
Response (SLAM-ER) can only be assigned to a land target from either the
TACCO Station or the Nav Map. When the missile is assigned to a land
target in the TACCO Station, the last weapon waypoint is affixed to the
target symbol. Waypoints cannot be affixed to ships and planes. A land
9-23
target appears in the Geoplot as an X. The SLAM-ER has a maximum

range of 155 nm in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters. Make sure that the course
placed with waypoints does not exceed 155 nautical miles.
1. Zoom out as far as possible to see the location of the X on the Geoplot.
The Geoplot has maximum range of 128 kyds (63 nm) when zoomed
out. The missile can strike targets not visible in the Geoplot when
Ownship is visible.
2. If the desired target is not visible, center the view on Ownship in the
Geoplot, go to the Nav Map to determine the location of Ownship
relative to the Land Target (X), then return to the Geoplot and click and
drag the view in the direction of the target until you can see the X.
TIP: To check if the desired target is within range of the missile, check the
range to the target on the Nav Map. Right-click on the target then select
Engage With from the Contact Menu. If the SLAM-ER option is not greyed
out, the target is within the 155 nautical mile range of the missile. If the
SLAM-ER is greyed out in the Engage With menu, the contact is out of
range. The Engage With option assumes a straight-line flight path and
assumes the current location of OS, which changes quickly given your
speed. Be aware that while the contact may be in range given a straight
flight path, it may be out of range if waypoints are dragged to increase the
flight path at the TACCO Station. You are not prevented from assigning the
missile to a contact that is out of range from the TACCO Station.
3. Click on the X in the TACCO Geoplot to select it.

4. Select a WING location containing a SLAMER missile by clicking on
the STATION SELECT dial. Waypoints extend from the P-3C ending at
the location of the land target.
5. If no land target is selected when a SLAM-ER is selected in the

STATION SELECT dial, a set of three waypoints extends from the
missile to a default range directly in front of OS. Click on a land target
and the final waypoint jumps to the selected land target. Adjust the
waypoints as desired. See Note below.
6. The KILL READY light is always lit. Click FIRE to launch the missile.
Assigning a Torpedo Waypoint

Only torpedoes and mines can be assigned to a P-3C weapon drop
waypoint. The OS symbol must be selected to see waypoints. A torpedo
dropped at a waypoint can be assigned to a specific bearing or a selected
contact.
Waypoint for a Torpedo Assigned a Specific Bearing

1. Click the Geoplot to deselect any contact. Click the WEAPON button in
the WAYPOINTS area below the Geoplot. The names of all the
weapons available for waypoint assignment appear in the PRESETS
Window.
2. Click on a weapon name/location in the list to reveal its preset panel.

9-24
3. The Runout Brg field appears in the Presets area showing the default
bearing of 000. The ASSIGN button is already activated. You must
click the activated ASSIGN button to de-activate it if you want to set the
runout bearing to anything other than the default 000. Be sure to click
ASSIGN again to enter your presets into the system. If the bomb bay
doors are open the KILL READY light is lit and the weapon will drop
when the waypoint is reached.
TIP: Click the OS symbol then press [R] and drag the cursor toward the
target. A readout of the range (R) and bearing (B) to the contact appear
near the bottom of the Geoplot. Use those numbers to help determine the
Runout Bearing for the torpedo and the desired Run to Enable.
Waypoint for a Torpedo Assigned a Specific Target

1. Click a valid torpedo target (surface ship or submarine symbol) to
select it in the Geoplot then click the WEAPON waypoint button.
2. Click on a weapon name/location in the list to reveal its preset panel.

3. The Target field appears in the Presets panel followed by the track
number of the selected contact. The ASSIGN Button is already
activated and if the Bomb Bay doors are open, the KILL READY light is
illuminated. The torpedo is ready to drop at the designated waypoint
location.
9 Note: When the waypoint button is clicked you are prevented from
moving any other waypoints until you select a weapon assignment
for the new waypoint. WAITING Appears in the DDI when the
waypoint is selected. If you select a different wing location or a
different station before assigning a weapon to the waypoint, the
waypoint is deleted.
Positioning, Adding and Deleting Waypoints

BClick and drag a waypoint to move it to the desired location but be
aware that Ownship may not be able to reach the waypoint if it is
placed too close to OS or behind OS such that OS cannot maneuver
to the desired position before the waypoint location is reached.
BClick a specific Waypoint to add a waypoint immediately after the
selected waypoint.
BClick a valid contact or the OS symbol to insert a waypoint directly
after Ownship.
BIf no symbol is selected when a waypoint is inserted, the waypoint is
added immediately after the OS Symbol.
BIf waypoints have been assigned and you have ordered OS on a
different course before adding additional weapon (or sonobuoy)
waypoints, you must reassign OS to follow the waypoints using the
Navigate>Follow Waypoints command in the Ownship or Orders
Menu.
9-25
BTo delete a weapon waypoint, select the waypoint on the Geoplot

and press [Delete]. Select the Ownship symbol on the Nav Map then
right-click on it to display the Ownship Menu. Select
Navigate>Remove Waypoints to remove ALL waypoints regardless
of type.
If the waypoint is deleted for any reason, any presets that were
changed remain attached to the weapon. Any assigned target is

replaced with Runout BRG 000.
If no weapon is assigned when the waypoint is reached, the waypoint
is treated as a fly-to waypoint. No weapon is assigned so no weapon is

dropped.
Assigning a Mine Waypoint

Mines are not assigned to a bearing or target. It makes no difference if a
contact is selected.
1. Click WEAPON in the Waypoint area.

2. Select a Mine from the list of available weapon assignments The
Weapon Presets appear.
3. Select the desired depth for the Mine. If the Bomb Bay doors are open,
the KILL READY light is lit and the mine will drop when the waypoint is
reached.
Tip: The Bomb Bay doors must be open before a Bomb Bay weapon can
be dropped at a waypoint. If the KILL READY light is not green, check to be
sure the Bomb Bay Doors are open. Also ensure the ASSIGN button is
activated.
TACCO S O N OB U OY C O N S O L E
The TACCO Sonobuoy Console is reached by clicking the Transition Button
in the lower left of the TACCO Weapons Console.
9-26
Sonobuoy Selection Window
DDI
External Sonobuoy Selection Window

Transition to Weapons Console
P-3C TACCO Weapons Console

The Sonobuoy Console is made up of two areas used to launch internally
loaded sonobuoys and the external buoys that were loaded prior to game
start.
Internal Launch Tubes

Internal tubes can be reloaded as long as stores remain.
TUBE SELECT Buttons: Click a button to select a sonobuoy tube to
load. To change the buoy loaded in the selected tube or load an empty
tube, click the text in the TYPE field in the Sonobuoy Selection Window
to cycle through available sonobuoys. The text in the Type field flashes
until the buoy is loaded.
E Buttons: Click to equalize the pressure in the cabin prior to
launching sonobuoy. Once equalized, the drop button is enabled and
the buoy type cannot be changed. Click E again if you want to change
the buoy loaded.
DROP buttons: Click an illuminated button to drop the designated
buoy. The tube must be equalized before the DROP button illuminates.
Sonobuoy Selection Window and Stores Readout

Directly below the TUBE SELECT buttons is the Sonobuoy Selection
Window. The Window consists of these areas.
TYPE: Click inside the TYPE field to cycle through the available types
of sonobuoys. The buoy name showing in the TYPE field is loaded in
9-27
the selected tube in the TUBE SELECT area in the Internal Launch
Tube window.
Stores Area: The area below the TYPE field displays a running
inventory of available sonobuoy stores.
To Launch An Internal Sonobuoy

1. Click one of the three white TUBE SELECT buttons to select it. The
buoy named there is currently loaded in the tube.
2. Click in the TYPE field below the buttons to select the type of buoy to
load in the selected tube. Continue to click until the desired buoy name
appears in the field. (The text in the selected tubes buoy field flashes
until the buoy is loaded.)
3. Click E to equalize the tube. (The tube need not be selected to

equalize.) Once equalized, the DROP button is enabled.
4. Click DROP as desired to drop the buoy.

9 Note: Buoys are preset to: Deep (400 ft) or Shallow (90 Feet).
External Launch Tube

The buoys in these tubes were loaded prior to game start in the Weapons
Loadout Screen and cannot be reloaded during flight.
DROP: Click to drop a sonobuoy of the type selected in the External
Sonobuoy Selection Window.
External Sonobuoy Selection Window: This window contains a list of
the sonobuoys currently available.
Stores: Displays the number of buoys of that type remaining. Any
number in parentheses following the stores number indicates the
number of buoys of this type currently assigned to a buoy waypoint.
Type: Displays buoy name.
Depth: Displays the default depth for the buoy, either Deep (400 ft) or
Shallow (90 Feet).
To Launch a buoy from an External Tube

1. Click a buoy name and its specified depth to select it.
2. Click DROP. The count is updated in the Stores column.
9 Note: When Sonobuoys are selected for launch from the Ownship or
Orders Menus Sonobuoy option, they are dropped from the external
launchers first, then the Internal launchers. Text in a right-click menu
Sonobuoy option is greyed if all external buoys are launched and no
buoy is loaded in an internal launcher.
Assigning a Sonobuoy Waypoint

To create a drop point where an assigned type of buoy drops automatically,
follow these steps.
9-28
1. From the TACCO Sonobuoy Console, click the name of the desired
type of buoy from the External Launch Tube Window.
2. Click the SONOBUOY button in the WAYPOINTS area below the

Geoplot. A buoy waypoint/drop point (marked by a tiny B) appears on
the Geoplot at the end of a line extending from the OS symbol. The line
indicates the flight path to the buoy drop location.
The number of buoys of each type currently assigned to buoy
waypoints appears in parentheses after the number of buoys

currently onboard. As each buoy is dropped, the number updates
to reflect the current loadout and current buoy assignments.
If all of the buoys of a particular type are currently assigned to
waypoints, no more waypoints of that type can be assigned. Be

aware that the button can still be clicked but no buoy is assigned.
Select a different type of buoy.
3. Click on the waypoint and drag it to the desired location. You may need
to zoom in to see it.
4. You cannot change the type of buoy assigned to a drop point once it
has been entered. You must delete the buoy waypoint and insert a new
one with the correct type of buoy assigned. (Click the waypoint to
select it, and then press [Delete] to delete the waypoint.)
5. To add a waypoint between OS and the waypoint, select the OS

symbol on the Geoplot and click SONOBUOY.
6. To add a drop point after the last drop point, select the last drop point
and click SONOBUOY. The type of buoy to be dropped at a specific
waypoint appears in the DDI when the waypoint is selected in the
Geoplot.
9 Note: If you are in the TACCO Weapons Console when you click the
SONOBUOY button, the view automatically switches to the TACCO
Sonobuoy Console and whatever sonobuoy is currently selected in
the External Launch Tube window is assigned to the waypoint.
P-3C W E A P O N P R E S E T S
The presets for the weapons carried by the P-3C in S.C.S. Dangerous
Waters are described below by type of weapon.
Torpedoes
MK 46 and Mk 50
These are lightweight torpedoes primarily used for subsurface targets.
knots; maximum depth of 1500 feet (457 meters).
knots; maximum depth of 3,600 feet (1,100 meters).
9-29
Both torpedoes have the following presets:

Weapon: Lists the weapon loaded on the selected pylon.
Runout Brg/Target: The label that appears depends on what is
selected (or not selected) in the Geoplot.
Runout Brg: This label appears if no contact, an invalid contact or
a contact attached to a line of bearing is selected in the Geoplot.
Click/right-click the digits to enter the desired bearing for the
torpedo to head once it hits the water. Then click ASSIGN to
assign the weapon to that bearing.
Target: If a contact is selected in the Geoplot, its track number
appears here. Click ASSIGN to assign the weapon to the selected
target. When dropped the torpedo heads on the bearing to the
assigned target. Set other presets as desired. If TACCO Autocrew
is on he sets these presets and you are prevented from making
changes.
RTE: (Run to Enable): Sets the distance (in yards) at which the
torpedo enables and begins its search.
The maximum range of the Mk 46 (as modeled) is 12,152 yards.
The maximum range of the Mk 50 (as modeled) is 14,177 yards.
Depth: Set the depth (in feet) at which the weapon travels.
Speed: Set the speed (in knots) at which the weapon travels
Ceiling: Set the depth (in feet) above which the weapon does not
travel.
Floor: Set the depth (in feet) below which the weapon does not travel.
Search: Set the search options for the weapon as seen below.
Active/Passive: Click to toggle between these two sonar mode
options.
Snake/Circle: Click to toggle between these two search pattern
options.
ASSIGN: Click to assign the selected weapon to the selected target or
bearing. You can then change the presets as desired but the weapon
remembers what target or bearing was assigned and targets that
location when dropped. Click ASSIGN again to remove the
assignment.
When enabled, the ASSIGN button is solid green with black
letters. Click the button to toggle its state.

Depth: Set the depth (in feet) at which the weapon travels.
9-30
Mines
1000 lb, 2000 lb
As modeled in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters these mines can be set for the
following depths.
Surface: Sets Mine depth to just below the surface.
Shallow: Sets Mine depth to 25 meters (~82 feet)
Deep: Sets Mine Depth to 133 Meters (~436 feet)
Bottom: Sets mine to rest on the sea bottom.
Missiles
SLAM-ER (Stand Off Land Attack Missile- Expanded Response)
As modeled in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters the SLAM-ER can be assigned
to land targets only. Three waypoints are provided for the weapon to follow
in the TACCO Geoplot and defined in the Presets area. If the exact
coordinates of the target are known, enter them directly into the bottom
DESTRUCT field. (Otherwise click and drag a waypoint to move it to the
desired location.)
Fly to (Lat/Lon): There are two flight path waypoints. Click on each of
them and drag them to the desired location. The numbers in the
Lat/Lon fields update to reflect the current longitude and latitude of the
selected waypoint.
Destruct (Lat/Lon): The last waypoint represents the target location. If
the missile misses the target it will destruct shortly after it passes this
location.
AGM-65 Maverick
The AGM-65 Maverick is an IR-guided missile. As modeled in S.C.S.
Dangerous Waters the AGM-65 Maverick can attack surface and land
contacts within a 30-degree cone fifty miles ahead of Ownship. The missile
has only one preset.
ASSIGN: Select a valid contact in the detection cone then click
ASSIGN. The KILL READY light illuminates to indicate missile lock-on.
If the target moves out of the detection cone prior to missile launch, the
KILL READY light is disabled. ASSIGN is solid green with black letters
when it is activated. You can assign a target to the missile when it is
not in the cone and when it enters the cone, the KILL READY light
illuminates and the weapon can be fired.
9-31
P-3C I NFRARED C AMERA [F7]

The Infrared camera is used to mark contacts and to fulfill goals requiring
photographing specific targets. The camera views provide excellent views
of the battle space under the aircraft.
P-3C Infrared Camera Station

CAMERA TURRET CONTROL: Camera is retracted by default.
Click EXTEND to move the switch to the lowered position. The camera
must be turned on once it is extended.
CAMERA CONTROL: The camera defaults to OFF. Once the camera is
extended, switch the camera to one of the following modes to enable the
camera.
LLTV: Click to select Low-Light Level TV for night use.
NORMAL: Click to select the camera view with no filtering.
INFRARED: Click to select Infrared Mode.
GREYSCALE: Click to select a greyscale view.
POS CONTROL: This area contains camera controls and provides camera
position information.
Quick POS: Click FWD (Forward) to quickly move the camera to view
the area directly in front of the plane Click REV to quickly position the
camera to view the area directly behind the plane. (To view the other
side of the plane on the return pan, click and drag in the camera view
to move the cursor to the other side of 0 or 180/-180 then click FWD or
REV as desired.)
9-32
AUTO TRACK: Click to quickly pan to and lock the camera on the
track number selected in the TRACKS List. When Auto Track is ON
you cannot click and drag the view.
TRACKS: Lists tracks detected by Ownship sensors and Link
participants.
ZOOM: Controls the camera zoom. Click + to zoom in and to zoom
out.
CAM: TRUE BEARING/AZIMUTH: The true bearing and azimuth of
the current camera view.
IMAGING: This area contains controls for processing contacts.
PHOTO: Click to complete any photography goals. Photos are not
available to the player but button click is logged to determine goal
completion for missions where reconnaissance photos are a
requirement.
MARK: Click to mark the contact that appears in the reticule. The
contact information is sent to the Nav Map and appears at the end of a
magenta colored Line of Bearing at the range and bearing at the
moment it was marked.
P-3C A UTOCREW
Below is a recap of all P-3C Autocrew functionality. Remember that your
Autocrew is not 100% infallible. Some crewmen are better than others and
in some cases you may be better at a task than he is. In some stations the
Autocrew does everything for you. At other stations you still have tasks to
perform even when the Autocrew is on. These are noted below.
BClick the AUTOCREW slider button in the upper left corner of a
station to activate the Autocrew for that station. (Not all stations have
an Autocrew function.) The Autocrew is ON when the crew silhouette
is visible. Click again to toggle the state of that Autocrew.
A C OU S T I C A U T OC R E W
The P-3s Acoustic Autocrew sets hot buoys to Directional mode and marks
contacts. He can only mark contacts in Directional Mode. If you change a
channel, he may change it back. Acoustic Autocrew also classifies contacts
using the Acoustic Profile Library but he is not speedy.
Your Task: You must set DICASS buoys to ACTIVE mode and mark active
contacts yourself. You may need to turn Autocrew OFF to complete this
task.
AUTO PILOT
This option is not the same as other Autocrew functions. There is no
Autocrew slider associated with this function. Auto Pilot can be turned OFF
only at the Pilot Station. Once set to OFF, the Auto Pilot continues to
function until you move the joystick. The Auto Pilot is always ON when you
are not at the Pilot Station. Auto Pilot keeps the plane aloft and follows your
9-33
last orders or waypoints while you attend to tasks at other stations. When
you fly the P-3C with a joystick you must reset Auto Pilot to OFF each time
you enter the Pilot Station. If no joystick is in use, manually setting Auto
Pilot to OFF has no effect. See P-3C Stations/P-3C Pilot Station/Piloting the
P-3C With a Joystick. For a full listing of Auto Pilot functionality see P-3C
Stations/P-3C Pilot Station/P-3C Pilot Station Functionality then Auto Pilot
Switch.
C OU N TE R M E A S U R E A U TOC R E W
When ON the Countermeasure Autocrew launches chaff and flares and
takes evasive maneuvers when a missile is locked on Ownship. This
Autocrew function is set in the Pilot Station.
In addition to the Autocrew slider, you can also activate this function at the
Pilot Station by setting the toggle switch to AUTO in the Countermeasure
Launch Panel. You can change the setting from any station by selecting
Auto-Countermeasures from the Orders Menus Autocrew option in the
Task Bar.
Your Task: You can still launch CMs and maneuver the aircraft when this
Autocrew is on. If the Autocrew has taken evasive maneuvers when
waypoints are assigned, you must select Navigate>Follow Waypoints from
the Orders or Ownship Menus to reassign OS to the designated waypoints.
ESM A U T OC R E W
The ESM Autocrew marks contacts detected by the ESM sensor but does
not classify them.
Your Task: You are prevented from doing anything in the ESM station
when the ESM Autocrew is on. You must turn ESM Autocrew off to perform
any tasks in the ESM station. It is your task to classify contacts by
identifying the probable class of the contact from the list of classes known
to carry the detected emitter. See P-3C Stations/MADP-3C ESM
Station/ESM for information on classifying contacts in the ESM Display.
R A D AR A U TO C R E W
When ON, the Autocrew marks all contacts and continually updates the
contacts as long as the radar is on. The cursor cannot be manipulated
manually when the Radar Autocrew is on.
Your Task: The cursor cannot be manipulated manually and the Mark
button is disabled when the Radar Autocrew is on. If you want to mark
contacts yourself you must turn the Autocrew OFF. (Use the Autocrew
slider or the Orders Menus Autocrew option.)
TACCO A U T OC R E W
When ON, TACCO Autocrew assigns torpedo presets appropriate for a
track you select in the Geoplot and ASSIGN to a torpedo in the Presets
area. All torpedo presets with the exception of the Runout Brg/Target field
and the ASSIGN button are greyed.
9-34
Your Task: When the TACCO Autocrew is on, the weapon is automatically
assigned the default presets. You must change the Runout bearing and
click ASSIGN to assign the Presets to the weapon.
When a waypoint is assigned while TACCO Autocrew is ON, the default
presets are already assigned to the weapon. To change the default Presets
and/or the default runout bearing, click the green ASSIGN button to toggle
the state of the button. Click/right-click the digits in the Runout Brg field to
set the desired bearing or select a valid contact on the Geoplot then click
ASSIGN again. TACCO Autocrew sets all presets when a torpedo is
assigned to a specific target. The Autocrew makes no inputs for missiles or
mines. You must make all target selections and enter presets for missiles. If
the selected contact is beyond the range of the weapon, the Run to Enable
is set to the maximum range of the weapon and the RTE digits do not
update as you fly.
9-35
9-36

6(&7,21
.,/267$7,216
10-1
10: KILO STATIONS .................................................................................10-4

KILO TASK BAR ................................................................................. 10-4
KILO STATIONS MENU .................................................... 10-4
KILO ORDERS MENU ...................................................... 10-5
DAMAGE REPORT W INDOW ............................................ 10-6
HISTORY W INDOW ......................................................... 10-6
MANEUVER SHORTCUTS AND GAME READOUTS ............... 10-6
TIME COMPRESSION SCALE ............................................ 10-7
KILO SHIP CONTROL STATION [F1]..................................................... 10-7
SNORKELING AND CHARGING THE BATTERIES ................... 10-9
CHARGING HIGH-PRESSURE AIR ................................... 10-10
KILO SONAR SUITE [F2]................................................................... 10-10
KILO BROADBAND SONAR STATION ............................... 10-11
Kilo Broadband Circular SSAZ Display ............... 10-11
Assigning Trackers in Kilo Broadband ................ 10-13
KILO NARROWBAND SONAR STATION ............................ 10-13
To Mark a Contact and Assign a Tracker............ 10-16
To Classify a Contact in Narrowband.................. 10-16
KILO DEMON SONAR STATION .................................... 10-17
Using DEMON to Calculate a Contacts Speed .. 10-17
Using DEMON to Determine Category ............... 10-18
KILO ACTIVE SONAR STATION ....................................... 10-19
Medium Frequency (MF) Active Sonar ............... 10-19
Kilo High Frequency Active Sonar ...................... 10-21
KILO ACTIVE INTERCEPT SONAR STATION ...................... 10-22
KILO SSP SONAR STATION .......................................... 10-22
Launching an XBT probe .................................... 10-22
KILO UUV SONAR ....................................................... 10-23
KILO RADAR STATION [F3] ........................................................... 10-23
MARKING CONTACTS WITH RADAR ................................. 10-23
KILO RADIO-ESM STATION [F4]...................................................... 10-24
ELECTRONIC SUPPORT MEASURES (ESM) .................... 10-24
Detecting and Classifying Contacts with ESM .... 10-24
RADIO ROOM .............................................................. 10-25
Receiving Radio Messages and Link Data ......... 10-25
Promoting Contacts to the Link........................... 10-26
KILO NAVIGATION STATION [F5]...................................................... 10-27
KILO OWNSHIP/ORDERS MENUS ................................... 10-27
KILO CONTACT MENU .................................................. 10-28
KILO FIRE CONTROL SUITE [F6]........................................................ 10-28
KILO FIRE CONTROL TARGET DISPLAY .......................... 10-29
Fire Control Map ................................................. 10-29
Fire Control Map Controls................................... 10-30
Fire Control Target Selection List ....................... 10-30
Tube Selection Panel.......................................... 10-31
KILO FIRE CONTROL LAUNCH PANEL ............................. 10-31
Basic Launch Procedure..................................... 10-32
Section 10: Kilo Stations 10-2
Countermeasure Launch Procedure................... 10-33

Tube Reload Procedure...................................... 10-33
TARGETING SEA CONTACTS ......................................... 10-34
Torpedo Wire Guide Controls ............................. 10-34
ATTACKING LAND TARGETS .......................................... 10-35
LAYING A MINEFIELD .................................................... 10-36
DEPLOYING AND W IRE-GUIDING UUVS ......................... 10-36
Wire-Guiding and Enabling UUV Active Sonar ... 10-37
UUV Returns....................................................... 10-37
KILO W EAPON INVENTORY STATION .............................. 10-37
KILO TACTICAL W EAPONS ............................................ 10-38
Weapons on Russian and Chinese Kilos ............ 10-38
Weapons on Russian Kilos Only......................... 10-38
Weapons on Chinese Kilos Only ........................ 10-38
KILO STRATEGIC W EAPONS.......................................... 10-39
Mines .................................................................. 10-39
KILO COUNTERMEASURES ............................................ 10-39
KILO W EAPON PRESETS .............................................. 10-40
Antiship Missile Presets ...................................... 10-40
Mine Presets....................................................... 10-40
Missile-Torpedo Presets ..................................... 10-41
Strike Missile Presets.......................................... 10-41
Torpedo Presets ................................................. 10-41
UUV Presets ....................................................... 10-42
KILO TMA STATION [F7] ................................................................ 10-42
KILO TMA STATION COMPONENTS ............................... 10-42
Kilo TMA Board................................................... 10-43
Kilo Track Selection Area.................................... 10-45
Kilo Trial Solution Area ....................................... 10-46
Kilo View Control Area ........................................ 10-46
Kilo Solution Area ............................................... 10-46
TMA ON RADAR, ACTIVE SONAR, VISUAL CONTACTS ..... 10-47
TMA ON PASSIVE SONAR AND ESM CONTACTS ............. 10-48
TMA ON UUV SENSOR CONTACTS .............................. 10-50
PERISCOPE-STADIMETER STATIONS [F8]............................................. 10-51
DETECTING CONTACTS WITH THE PERISCOPE ................ 10-51
KILO STADIMETER STATION .......................................... 10-52
Determining Course with Stadimeter .................. 10-52
Determining Class/Range with Stadimeter ......... 10-53
KILO SAIL BRIDGE (SAM LAUNCHER) [F9]....................................... 10-54
LAUNCHING SURFACE TO AIR MISSILES ......................... 10-54
KILO AUTOCREW ........................................................................... 10-55
KILO BROADBAND/NARROWBAND SONAR AUTOCREW ..... 10-55
KILO SONAR ACTIVE INTERCEPT AUTOCREW .................. 10-56
RADAR AUTOCREW ...................................................... 10-56
FIRE CONTROL AUTO CREWMAN ................................... 10-56
KILO TMA AUTOCREW ................................................ 10-56
10-3
10: KILO STATIONS

All Kilos regardless of country or version have the same stations and station
functionality in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters. The Kilos differ in noise
generation and in weapons loadout. All Kilos regardless of class (877 or
636) are referred to as Kilos in this manual.
information unique to the Kilo is contained in the abbreviated Kilo
K ILO T ASK B AR
The Task Bar for all submarines functions the same. Differences are
cosmetic. The Kilo Task Bar appears below.
Stations Menu
Damage Report
Orders Menu
Course Shortcut
Depth Below Keel
Depth Shortcut
Speed Shortcut

Time Acceleration
K IL O S T A TI O NS M E NU
icon to jump to that station.
Ship Control [F1]
Sonar Suite [F2]
Radar [F3]
Radio-ESM [F4]
Nav [F5]
TMA [F7]
Fire Control Suite [F6]

Periscope-Stadimeter [F8]
Sail Bridge (SAM Launcher) [F9]
10-4
K IL O O R DE R S M E NU
Navigate: Select various navigation orders. While most are self-explanatory
a few require further information as seen below:
Set Depth: Displays the following submenu.
Go to PD: Orders Ownship (OS) to Periscope Depth (19 meters)
Go Shallow: Orders your ship to 29 meters.
Go Deep: Orders your ship to 254 meters.
Go to Snorkel Depth: Orders a depth of 17 meters
Change Speed: Displays a submenu of engine order shortcuts. Given no
strong currents in the area, selecting one of the following commands results
in the indicated speed if OS is submerged and running on the on battery:
All Ahead Flank: Maximum submerged (battery) speed for the
platform (Kilo 877:17 knots; Improved Kilo 636: 20 knots.)
All Ahead Full: 17 knots
Ahead Standard: 15 knots.
Ahead 2/3: 10 knots.
Ahead 1/3: 5 knots.
All Stop: Orders OD to a full stop.
Back 1/3: 4 knots in reverse.
All Back Full: O 12 knots in a reverse
All Back Emergency: 16 knots in reverse.
9 Note: Ordered speeds are lower if surfaced and using the diesels to
charge the battery.
Masts and Antennas: Raise masts individually or lower all at once. Raising
the masts while submerged can damage them if OS speed exceeds 8-10
knots. See Appendix C: Submarine Max & Mins for information on safe
speeds for extending each mast while submerged. The Snorkel Mast option
is only available when at snorkel depth (17 meters) or shallower.
Diesel: When the snorkel mast is raised these options are enabled. These
turn off automatically if the sub exceeds snorkel depth.
Port Engine Start (or Off): Select to start (or shut down) the port diesel
engine.
Starboard Engine Start (or Off): Select to start (or shut down) the
starboard diesel engine.
Autocrew: Displays a submenu of Autocrew options. Selecting an option
toggles its state. A checkmark indicates that the Autocrew is ON. See Kilo
Stations/Kilo Autocrew for a full description of Autocrew functionality.
10-5
Fire Tube: This menu option only appears when there is a weapon loaded
and ready to shoot. Weapons are loaded in the Fire Control Launch Panel
and presets determined in the Fire Control Target Display.
Arrays/Wires: Displays one submenu (A towed array is not modeled for the
Kilos)
Floating Wire: Displays a submenu allowing you to stream or retrieve
the wire or stop its deployment at its current length.
Countermeasures: Launch either active or passive decoys. From the
Orders Menu a depth of shallow (30 meters) or deep (244 meters) can be
selected.
Lists damage to any station. The text scrolls as necessary. When a station
has damage, the damage indicator in the upper right of a station slides out
to reveal a wrench. When the wrench is present on a screen, check the
Damage Report Window for more specific information on the time required
to repair the damage or notification that the damage cannot be repaired. Be
aware that parts or all of a station will not work when damage has occurred.
The newest report appears at the bottom of the scrolling list.
AND
DEPTH: Keel depth reported in meters. Click/right-click digits to order a

depth change.
KEEL: Readout of the depth of water below the keel in meters.
SPEED: In knots. Click/right-click digits to order a speed change. You
cannot enter a speed that exceeds maximum speed for the class.
COURSE: Current course in degrees. Click/right-click the digits to
enter a new course.
9 Note: Be aware that currents affect Ownship course and speed. It
may not be possible to achieve the order course or speed if the
10-6
currents are strong. Currents can be turned off/on in the

Options>Game page prior to mission start.
word PAUSED.
bar.

K ILO S HIP C ONTROL S TATION [F1]

Because Kilos are diesel instead of nuclear powered, Kilo commanders
must be acutely aware of the ships batteries and ensure that they are
adequately charged. See Kilo Stations/Kilo Ship Control Station/Snorkeling
and Charging the Batteries.
Described below are the dials and gages of the Kilo Ship Control Station.
DEPTH/GROSS DEPTH: Both dials provide a means for viewing and
ordering depth. DEPTH provides finer granularity. The digital ORDERED
depth readout also permits fine-tuning.
BClick either dial to order the indicated depth. The black needle
indicates ordered depth. The red needle indicates actual depth.
BClick or right-click the digits in the ORDERED DEPTH readout to
order the sub to the depth entered.
9 Note: The Kilos have a max depth of 300 meters in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
ROLL: Indicates the subs roll during turns.
10-7
TRIM: Indicates the trim angle of the sub measured from a horizontal axis.
A positive trim angle (to the right of zero) indicates the ship has a bow-up
attitude. A negative trim angle (to the indicates a bow-down attitude.
COURSE: Provides a means for viewing current and ordered course and
for quickly ordering a new course.
BClick on the dial to order the sub to that heading. The grey needle
indicates ordered course, the red needle the current course until
ordered course is achieved.
RUDDER: Provides a means for viewing and changing rudder position.
BClick the desired number in the Rudder Indicator to order a rudder
change.
BClick zero in the Rudder Indicator or click in the Course Indicator
to reset the rudder.
9 Note: The sub will eventually turn in a circle if you do not reset the
rudder to zero or order a specific course.
HIGH PRESSURE AIR: This panel contains the HP Air charge controls and
charge readout.
% HP AIR: Indicates the charge level in the high-pressure air banks.
CHARGE: Initiates a charge of the high-pressure air banks. The charge can
be increased by only 10% when the sub is submerged. You must snorkel to
fully charge the banks. A minimum charge level of 50% is necessary to
successfully launch weapons.
BClick the Charge button to commence charging the air banks. A
red light surrounding the button indicates the charge is in progress.
Click again to secure the charge.
EMERGENCY BLOW: When it is imperative to reach the surface quickly,
initiate an emergency blow of the ballast tanks. Be aware that conducting
an emergency blow and leaving the valves open the entire time reduces the
compressed air charge to zero. It is possible to close the valves after a few
seconds and let momentum take the sub to the surface. This retains a
portion of the charge.
BClick either of the Emergency Blow valves to initiate the blow.
Click again to close the valves.
BOW and STERN PLANES: Indicates current bow and stern plane
positions. No player interaction is possible. Your crew controls the bow and
stern planes automatically when you change depth.
SNORKEL: Raises and lowers the snorkel mast. The mast can only be
raised when at snorkel depth (17 meters) or shallower. The mast retracts
automatically if the sub reaches a depth that is deeper than snorkel depth.
BClick RAISE to raise the snorkel mast. Click LOWER to retract it.
DIESEL ENGINES: The diesel engines must be running to charge the
batteries and are used to power the sub when on the surface or at snorkel
10-8
depth. See Kilo Stations/Kilo Ship Control/Snorkeling and Charging the

Batteries later in this section for complete steps.
BClick START to ignite the engine. The switch moves to the ON
position once the engine has started. (The switch moves to off
automatically if the sub dips below snorkel depth.
ENGINE ORDER: Click the desired setting on the engine order telegraph to
order the associated speed. Flank Speed for Kilo 877 class subs is 17 knots
submerged. Flank speed for the Kilo 636 class subs is 20 knots submerged.
All ordered speeds are lower when snorkeling and using the diesels to
charge the battery.
ORDERED SPEED: Provides a digital readout of the current ordered speed
based on the speed ordered in the Engine Order telegraph.
BATTERY: Indicates the current level of battery charge.
CHARGE STATUS: Indicates which diesel is currently charging the battery.
RATE: Indicates the current rate of battery charge (+) or discharge (-).
S N OR K EL I N G
AND
C H AR GI N G
TH E
B AT TE R I E S
When the Kilo is submerged, it runs with an electric motor powered by two
banks of batteries, 120 cells each. On the surface it runs on diesel powered
engines. The diesel-powered engines not only drive the sub on the surface,
they also are used to charge the batteries.
Snorkeling is necessary not only to charge the battery but also to take in
fresh air for the crew and for charging the high-pressure air banks. Unlike
nuclear powered subs, diesel subs cannot produce their own oxygen. It is
important to keep an eye on the battery charge level to ensure that charge
levels are sufficient to complete the mission. Traveling at high speeds under
the water drains the battery quickly.
9 Note: When on battery power and traveling at slow speeds, the Kilo
is almost undetectable; however, the snorkeling process creates a
great deal of noise that is more easily detected by sonar.
To Snorkel and Charge Batteries:
Until the sub is at snorkeling depth or shallower, it is not possible to raise
the snorkel mast. The diesel engines cannot be started unless the snorkel
mast is raised.
1. Enter a depth of 17 meters in the Task Bar shortcut field or from the
Orders Menu select Navigate>Set Depth>Go to Snorkel Depth.
2. When snorkeling depth is achieved, click RAISE on the Snorkel panel.

The light blinks until the mast is fully raised.
3. In the Diesel Engine Panel click START on the Port and/or Starboard
switch. When the engine turns over the switch moves to the ON
position.
10-9
4. When snorkeling and both diesels are started, the ordered speed
determines if one, both or neither battery is being charged. How long it
takes to charge the battery depends on how fast you are going.
Ordered speed of 0: Neither diesel needed to drive the sub. Both
diesels used to charge batteries.

Ordered speed of 1-6 knots: One diesel used to drive the sub, the
other to charge the battery.

Ordered speed of greater than 7 knots: Both diesels needed to
drive the sub, neither used to charge battery.

Lower speed to less than 5 knots to free one diesel to charge
battery. Both diesels must be on.

9 Note: When both diesels are ON and being used to drive the sub, it
is possible to go faster than 10 knots. Speed in excess of 10 knots
breaks the Snorkel mast.
C H A R G I N G H I GH -P R E S S U R E A IR
High-pressure air is required to launch torpedoes and perform an
emergency blow. A minimum charge of 50% should be maintained to
successfully launch weapons. The sub should be snorkeling to charge the
air banks fully and quickly.
1. Enter a depth of 17 meters in the Task Bar shortcut field or from the
Orders Menu select Navigate>Set Depth>Go to Snorkel Depth.
2. When snorkeling depth is achieved, click RAISE on the Snorkel panel.

The light blinks until the mast is fully raised. The mast cannot be raised
until snorkel depth or shallower has been achieved. If snorkel depth is
exceeded, the snorkel mast lowers automatically.
3. Click the CHARGE button to initiate a charge of the high-pressure air

banks.
4. Click the button again to stop the charge.
K ILO S ONAR S UITE [F2]

See Training/Sonar School for sonar information needed to efficiently use
the sonar stations.
At the Sonar Stations you monitor the most important sensing equipment on
board your submarine. Six displays, each with a specific purpose, help
detect, identify, track, and pinpoint contacts by employing either active or
passive sonar. The sonar suite is composed of these six displays:
Broadband, Narrowband, DEMON, Active, Active Intercept, and Sound
Speed Profile (SSP). All six stations are explained in this section.
While the Kilo lacks the towed array available to the other subs in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters, its very capable bow array is modeled and the Kilo is
also given a conformal array. For gameplay purposes all subs in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters can deploy Unmanned Underwater Vehicles (UUVs)
that act as remote sensors. Information about UUV sensors and their use is
covered in Kilo Fire Control Suite/Deploying and Wire-Guiding UUVs.
Broadband
Narrowband
DEMON
Active Sonar
Active Intercept
K IL O B R O AD B AN D S O N AR S T A TI O N
The Kilo Broadband Sonar station displays input from the cylindrical and
conformal arrays. These inputs are used to detect and track submarines
and surface ships. Here trackers can be assigned to contacts and they are
given an alphanumeric Contact Designation or ID. Contact IDs for all sonar
contacts begin with the letter S. Trackers provide the TMA station with
updates on the contacts bearing at two-minute time intervals.
9 Note: UUV sonar contacts also have Sierra (S) designations, but
their data is not reported in the Sonar Suite. UUV data is available in
TMA and on the Nav and Fire Control maps.
Kilo Broadband Circular SSAZ Display

The broadband display in the Kilo is circular and represents Signal Strength
versus Azimuth (SSAZ). The SSAZ display consists of two concentric
bands extending from an inner circle. Each band represents data from a
different ship sensor. The innermost band displays contacts detected by the
conformal array. The outer band displays contacts detected by the
cylindrical bow array.
Bearing Indicator
Inner Band (Conformal Array)
Outer band (Cylindrical Array)
Stern Cursor
Click inside a specific circular band to select that array. The outer edge of
that band brightens and enlarges slightly indicating that the band and array
are selected and the name of the selected array appears in the Array
window.
The 360-degree Bearing Indicator rims the outer edge of the Circular
Display. A narrow jagged ring near the inner edge of each band indicates
background noise on that sensor. Contacts on the arrays appear as spikes
emerging from the background noise at a specific bearing and extending
toward outer edge of the band; the stronger the signal, the taller the spike.
On the SSAZ Display, a thin line extending from the center to the outer
edge represents Ownship. The line ends with an arrow indicating the
direction Ownships stern is pointing.
Each sensor display has its own cursor. A cursor appears as a short line
extending into the array from each arrays outer edge. Click inside the array
to move the cursor to that location on that arrays bearing indicator or click
the cursor and drag it to a new location. The cursor is used to identify the
contact you want to mark.
Ship speed greatly interferes with the ability of the Kilo sensors to detect
and display contacts. Excessive speed results in the inability to detect any
contacts at all. Only background noise is visible and that appears as a thick,
jagged band at the outer edges of each array.
AUDIO Switch: Click the AUDIO switch to ON to hear broadband audio
returns when a contact is selected.
MARK: Select a contact on the display and click MARK to assign a contact
ID to the contact and send the bearing information to TMA and the Nav and
Fire Control maps. The contact ID assigned to the marked contact appears
in the window above the MARK Button.
Assigning Trackers in Kilo Broadband

Kilo has two automatic trackers designated A and B. Each is assigned
separately.
1. Select the sonar array you want to view in the broadband display. Click
inside the desired circle to select it. The outer circle represents the
Cylindrical Array; the inner circle represents the Conformal array.
2. Click on the spike point of the desired contact. A vertical cursor

appears on the bearing indicator. You can click and drag this cursor
along the bearing indicator.
3. Click the appropriate ASSIGN button to assign either Tracker 1 or

Tracker 2 to the selected target.
A tracker letter is placed at the base of the spike. A total of two
trackers are available and are shared by both broadband and

narrowband displays.
If the cylindrical array already has two contacts assigned to the
two trackers (A and B) and you designate a new contact, the

oldest tracker is unassigned from its current contact and
reassigned to the new contact.
As each contact is marked or assigned a tracker, a sequential
Sierra number is assigned: S01, S02, S03, etc. The Sierra

number, also called a Contact ID or Track ID, and all available
data on the contact are automatically sent to TMA and the Nav
Map.
K IL O N AR R OW B A ND S O N AR S T A TI O N
Each ship class has a unique sound frequency signature. The Narrowband
function is used to help classify sonar contacts by comparing the frequency
signature of the selected contact against a database of known frequency
signatures. The ships computer narrows the search by presenting only
those signatures that have similarities to the signature of the selected
contact.
Selected Array
Selection Overlay
Selected profile
Kilo Narrowband FRAZ Display

The components and functioning of the Kilos Narrowband Circular display
Narrowband Circular Display: The Kilos Narrowband Display is a
Frequency vs. Azimuth (FRAZ) display. Lines seen on the FRAZ display
represent signals received at specific frequencies and bearings. Signals
that appear as lines or dots centered on a specific bearing are contacts.
The Selection Overlay wedge is used to select contacts. The distance from
the center of the display represents the frequency of the signal. The length
of each line represents the bearings at which the same frequency signal is
received. This length corresponds to the width of the base of a peak on the
broadband display.
Selection Overlay: The Selection Overlay wedge acts as a cursor for
selecting and designating contacts and for displaying the sound signature
profiles of ships or weapons with similar signatures.
An imaginary line through the exact center of the wedge is the precise
bearing indicator. The bearing at the location of the center of the overlay is
seen in the Cursor Bearing readout.
The Selection Overlay is divided into thee parts or wedges. The center
wedge is used to select contacts. When a contact is selected, the outer
wedges display the sound signature for whatever ship class or weapon is
selected in the Classification window. When no contact is selected nothing
appears in the outer wedges.
Selection
Overlay
Signature
(profile)
components
for class
selected in the
Classification
Window
BClick on any contact line or dot on the circular display to center the
Selection Overlay at that location.
See Kilo Stations/Kilo Sonar suite/Kilo Narrowband Station/To Mark a
Contact and Assign a Tracker and To Classify a Contact.
The labeled areas and buttons of the Kilo Narrowband Station are
described below.
FREQUENCY SCALE: Frequency scale on the FRAZ display runs from the
center to the outer edge where the center is zero and the outer edge is
whatever scale is selected on the Frequency Scale selector. The default
frequency range is zero to 2000.
BClick the desired number to switch to that frequency range in the
FRAZ display.
ARRAY: The array buttons represent the cylindrical array in the bow and
the conformal array on midsection of the sub.
BClick the desired button to select that array. The selected button is
depressed and lit and the name of the selected array appears in
the ARRAY window. Data from the selected array appear in the
FRAZ display.
CURSOR FREQUENCY: This readout displays the frequency at the
location where the mouse is clicked
BClick the FRAZ display to see the frequency at that cursor location
in the Cursor Frequency window.
CURSOR BEARING: Displays the bearing at the center of the Selection
Overlay.
CLASSIFICATION: The names of ship classes with sound frequency
profiles similar to that of the selected contacts sound signature are
presented one at a time in this window. When a class name is selected
here, its sound profile is displayed on the outer wedges of the Selection
Overlay when a contact is selected on the circular display. See Selection
Overlay below.
BClick the right and left facing arrows to move forward and
backward through the list of available profiles in the Classification
window. Use the information in the window to classify the contact

on the Nav Map.
FILTER: When ON this feature filters the available profiles to those that
most closely match the one selected with the Selection Overlay.
TRACKER 1 and 2: The Kilos two trackers can be assigned in Narrowband
Sonar. If these trackers are already assigned to other contacts in
Broadband the oldest tracker will be reassigned to the new contact. The
tracker designations (A and B) assigned in Narrowband are also visible in
the Broadband display, but tracker designations assigned in Broadband are
not visible in the Narrowband display. Trackers assigned to contacts
detected by the conformal array may not be visible when the cylindrical
array is selected.
ASSIGN: Click to assign a tracker to the selected contact. You must click
on a line in the selected profile before a Tracker can be assigned.
MARK: Click MARK to send bearing and Contact ID information on the
selected contact to the Nav Map and the TMA and Fire Control Stations.
The Contact ID for the marked contact appears in the window above the
MARK button.
To Mark a Contact and Assign a Tracker

1. Select a contact by clicking on it or by dragging the wedge shaped
Selection Overlay and positioning the center section over the contact.
To move the overlay, click the edge of the overlay and drag it to the
desired location.
2. Click on one of the selected contacts frequency lines (or dots) inside
the wedge to select it.
3. Click Mark or ASSIGN. You may have to click several times if the
signal is weak.
To Classify a Contact in Narrowband

When a contact is selected in the Narrowband Display, its sound signature
displays in the center wedge of the Selection Overlay and the sound
signature profile of the ship class named in the Classification window
appears in the outer wedges of the Selection Overlay.
1. Click on a frequency dot or line and compare the frequency lines of the
selected contact in the center wedge to that of the profile in the outer
wedges.
2. Adjust the Frequency Scale selector to see distinct ranges more

clearly.
3. Click the FILTER toggle switch to the ON position if it is not already

there. When the filter is on, only ships or weapons that have a profile
similar to that of the selected contact are available. All platforms and
weapons in the game are available for review if the filter is off.
4. Click the left and right facing arrows on either side of the Classification
window to view any other profiles that the ships computer has selected
from the profile database.
5. When you decide which profile most closely matches that of the
selected contact, leave that class name in the Classification window
and click MARK. The contact is marked and the classification showing
in the window is assigned to the contact. You will still need to assign an
ID and a level of confidence to the contact from the right-click Contact
Menu on the Nav Map.
K IL O DEMON S O N A R S T A TI O N
DEMON is an acronym for Demodulated Noise. The DEMON function is
used primarily to determine the contacts speed. This is important
information when establishing an accurate firing solution and once
determined here the value can be entered in the speed field in your TMA
solution.
The main component of the DEMON Station is the DEMON Waterfall
Display. The waterfall display separates the selected signal into
demodulated components. On the display, the horizontal axis represents
frequency and the vertical axis represents time. When a contact is selected
its signal appears as parallel vertical lines in the waterfall. The lines
represent sound generated by the contacts propeller blades.
Select the first line
Speed of contact given the specified TPK
Using DEMON to Calculate a Contacts Speed

1. First determine the class of the contact in Narrowband, ESM or the
Stadimeter. In the USNI Browser, find the entry for the ship or subs
class and make note of the turns per knot number listed in the TPK
field.
2. Ensure that there is a tracker assigned to the desired contact in

Broadband sonar.
3. Select the contact you want to analyze by clicking the button below the
desired contact ID in the Tracker display. (Sonar trackers must be
assigned to contacts in Broadband before their frequency data are
available in DEMON.)
9 Note: If the game is paused, no lines appear in the waterfall display.
4. If necessary, adjust the frequency scale to better view the signal. If the
lines in the display seem to blur together adjust the FREQUENCY
SCALE until the lines are distinct. To adjust the scale, click the desired
number in the FREQUENCY SCALE panel at the right.
5. Click and drag the cursor over the line farthest left.
6. If you have not already done so, look up the class information for the
class of the selected contact in the USNI Reference Browser.
BPress [ESC] and select USNI Reference. Find the suspected or
determined country and class name of the selected contact and
look for the TPK number in the Text file. Press [ESC] again to
return to the DEMON display.
7. Click the + or - buttons in the Turns Per Knot panel to enter the turns
per knot as noted in the USNI Reference file. The speed of the target
appears in the Speed readout below the waterfall.
8. When you have determined the speed of the contact, enter that speed
in the TMA display for the same contact ID.
Using DEMON to Determine Category

By determining the number of blades on a contacts propeller, listening to
the sounds it emits and observing the contacts behavior you can make an
educated guess as to the contacts category or type. (Surface or
subsurface, warship or civilian.)
1. Select the contact you want to analyze by clicking the button below the
desired contact ID in the Tracker display. (Sonar trackers must be
assigned to contacts in Broadband before their frequency data are
available in DEMON.)
The first line on the left indicates the shaft rotation speed. The other
lines indicate individual blades on the propeller.
2. If necessary, adjust the frequency scale until the lines display clearly
and individually on the waterfall.
3. Use the following criteria to classify the selected contact:

Merchant Vessels/Tankers: Typically three or four blades; noisy;
often maintains predictable course.
Warships: Typically four or five-bladed propellers; quieter, smoother
sound than merchant ships; possibly unpredictable course changes.
Submarines: Five, six or seven-bladed propellers; very quiet when

submerged and at low speed; unpredictable course changes.
Fishing Vessels/Trawlers/Pleasure Craft: Three- or four-bladed
propellers; noisy; erratic courses and speeds, frequently stopping and
starting.
9 Note: Turns per knot for military and civilian ships are found in USNI
Reference. Click CIVILIAN in the Country column then the name of
the ship type to find TPK information on Civilian ships.
K IL O A C T I VE S O NA R S T AT I O N
Active sonar should be used only when absolutely necessary since it
provides the enemy with a wealth of information. S.C.S. - Dangerous
Waters models both medium and high frequency active sonar for all classes
of Kilos.
Medium Frequency (MF) Active Sonar

The cylindrical array in active mode is used to detect and track contacts.
Echoes from a single ping or a series of pings are used to determine an
objects bearing and range. Information from a medium frequency active
search is sent to the TMA station for use in plotting a firing solution for the
given contact. While this information is very useful, it comes at a price.
Using active sonar gives away Ownships bearing and alerts any ship in the
area to your presence. The ship may well assume you have hostile
intentions since active sonar is used primarily for targeting.
Kilo MF Active Sonar Display

The display shows the results of active sonar echo ranging. Speckled areas
represent echoes from the ocean background, reverberation, in general.
The area of blank space represents the active sonar baffles. Since the
signals transmitted from the bow array cannot reach the area behind the
ship, no echoes are returned from that area.
In the Kilos circular Active Sonar display the area closest to the center
represents objects closest to the ship. The circle represents bearing. The
screen updates from the center out. Each subsequent ping replaces the
oldest data with the newest. The Kilos Active Display is seen below:
Active Sonar Bearing-Range Cursor
Contacts appear as brighter spots on the active display. A high-pitched

metallic ring or ping is heard as each contact displays. In continuous mode
the active display shows a four-ping history, which is useful in detecting
contacts with weak signal strength
The Bearing-Range Cursor on the active display consists of a circle
attached to a vertical line that indicates a specific bearing. The distance of
the circle cursor from the center of the circle represents its range from
Ownship. The position of the vertical line on the Bearing Indicator
represents the bearing of the cursor.
To Mark a Contact with Active Sonar

1. Click the number of the desired range on the Range Scale (KM)
selector. Longer ranges are appropriate for the initial search. Once a
contact is detected, you can adjust the range scale of subsequent
transmissions to improve the accuracy.
Selecting a new range halts continuous transmissions. You must
click transmit again to resume transmissions.
2. Select transmission mode: Single or Continuous pings. If Single is

selected, only one active sonar ping is transmitted. When Continuous
is chosen, active sonar pings are transmitted at a set interval until the
switch is reset to Single or you change the range scale.
3. Click TRANSMIT to send signals of the type selected in the toggle

switch above.
9 Note: To stop the transmission of continuous pings on any of the
submarines, click again on the TRANSMIT button.
A valid contact gives consistent visual returns that are brighter
than background noise or reverberations. The audio return will

have a distinctive metallic ring to it and will be distinguishable from

the background noise.
4. Click on a contact to select it with the Bearing Range cursor or click

and drag the cursor to center it on the contact. The contacts range and
bearing display on the left side of the screen in the Range (M) and
Bearing windows. Range is in meters.
5. Click MARK to assign an alphanumeric Contact ID to the selected

contact. Once a selected contact has been marked, selecting it and
clicking MARK again sends an update of the contacts range and
bearing to TMA and the Nav Map. Contacts marked with Active Sonar
appear on the Nav Map on the detected bearing and at the detected
range at the end of a green line of bearing (LOB)
Kilo High Frequency Active Sonar

High Frequency active sonar (HFAS) has a shorter range and can detect
smaller objects than medium frequency active sonar. When you must
navigate a minefield, HFAS can be used to locate and mark mines near
your sub. Once a mine is located, maneuver quickly to avoid it by the
largest possible margin. Driving slowly provides the best reaction time.
Marking the mines helps you keep track of the location of the mines should
you need to traverse the field again when you leave the area. One method
to find a safe route is to follow another ships path.
The Kilos High Frequency Active Sonar (HFAS) can only be reached from
the Periscope Station. The Kilos HFAS has a range of 3500 yards.
To View and Mark Kilos HF Sonar Returns

1. Press [F8] or select the periscope icon button in the Stations Menu to
move to the Periscope Station.
2. At the top of the Periscope screen click the transition button to move to
the High Frequency Sonar Display.
Transition button to High-Frequency Active Sonar Display
3. The HFAS is always on when the station is accessed. Depending on its

range from OS, a contact appears as a dot or a 3D outline of the
contact. Click the HFAS Display to place a marker on the Nav Map for
all contacts detected by the sensor. No contact IDs are assigned to
HFAS contacts and no information is sent to TMA.
K IL O A C T I VE I NT ERC E PT S O N AR S T A TI O N
The Active Intercept Display alerts you to when another ship, sub, dipping
sonar or sonobuoy is transmitting an active sonar ping. It provides the
bearing of the transmitting entity as well as the frequency of the detected
emission, the age of the last signal and the strength of the signal. Knowing
the signal strength can assist you in determining the relative proximity of the
active sonar source.
When Active Intercept detects an active sonar ping, a line is seen on the
active intercept display on the bearing of the contact.
FREQUENCY (HZ): Displays the frequency of the intercepted signal.
(Active Sonar Frequency ranges can be found in the USNI Browser in the
SENSORS entry.)
BEARING: Displays the bearing of the intercepted signal.
IINTERVAL (SEC): Displays the time interval (in seconds) between the last
two intercepted signals.
AGE (SEC): Displays the time in seconds since the last intercepted signal.
MARK: Assigns a Contact ID to the selected signal and sends the bearing
information to TMA and the Fire Control and Nav Maps. Each time a
previously marked contact is marked again the current bearing of that
contact is sent to TMA.
BTo select a signal, click on the signal line in the Active Intercept
Display. The cursor moves to select the signal on that bearing.
BWhen the signal is selected, click MARK.
ACTIVE INTERCEPT DISPLAY: A line or wedge emanating from the
center of the circular display to its outer edge indicates the bearing of an
intercepted signal. A thicker wedge indicates a strong contact.
K IL O SSP S O N AR S T A TI O N
The Sound Speed Profile (SSP) Station displays the speed at which sound
is transmitted at various water depths in the area around Ownship. Ocean
water typically forms distinct layers of density that can profoundly affect
sonar transmissions. Warmer, less dense water forms the upper surface
ductbelow this, temperatures fall off sharply and density increases. The
effect of this process is sound generated in one layer doesnt tend to
transmit easily to the other layer, and vice versa. At the beginning of any
mission, always check the depth at which the surface duct separates from
the lower thermal. (See Training/Sonar School/Underwater Sound
Propagation for more information on thermal layers.)
The Sound Speed Profile is created from information returned from an
Expendable Bathythermograph (XBT) probe. When launched, the probe
reports depth and sound speed information in both graph and table form.
Launching an XBT probe

The results of the last XBT probe are visible in the display window and on
the tablet when the SSP station is first entered.
BClick the XBT button. The previous results are cleared from the
display and the tablet when a new XBT is launched.
Updated information does not appear instantly on the screen. The XBT
probe rises to the surface and then descends before it begins

reporting. This may result in a delay before the SSP updates. The layer
depth is noted at the bottom of the tablet.
BTo change the depth scale in use on the graph, click the desired
number in the Depth Scale Panel.
9 Note: Due to varying water temperatures at locations around the
world, a distinct thermal layer is not always present. The mission
designer designates the type of layer for the mission.
K IL O UUV S O N AR
In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters all submarines are given Unmanned
Underwater Vehicles (UUVs). These UUVs act as remote sonar sensors.
Merging TMA bearing information provided by a remote sensor with data
from your ship sensors can provide a fairly accurate assessment of the
range to the contact. UUVs are particularly useful when navigating minefield
and can be operated in Passive or Active mode.
The UUV itself appears as a contact in the Broadband and Narrowband
Displays but UUV sonar returns are not viewed in the Sonar Suite. UUV
sonar contacts display on the Nav and Fire Control maps and in TMA.
UUVs are launched from the Fire Control Station and are wire-guided like
torpedoes from there. See Kilo Stations/Kilo Fire Control Suite/Deploying
and Wire-Guiding UUVs for complete information.
K ILO RADAR S TATION [F3]

Submarine radar should be used with caution and only when the situation
mandates its use. When you use radar you communicate your presence,
your bearing, your proximity and who you are if the other platform is
equipped with EW or ESM equipment.
M AR K I N G
C ON T AC TS W I TH R A D AR
1. Ensure that you are at radar depth (17 meters) or shallower and
moving at 8 knots or less if the sail is submerged. (The sail may broach
if you order a depth shallower than 17 meters.)
2. Click RAISE in the lower right of the station to raise the mast. The
READY light glows when the radar mast is extended and radiating.
3. Set Range Scale as desired and turn on Range Rings in the upper right
of the station if desired.
4. Contacts show up as brighter spots on the display. Click a contact to

select it with the Bearing-Range Cursor.
5. Click MARK to send the contacts bearing and range to TMA and the
Nav Map.
9 Note: Radiating while submerged destroys the radar.
K ILO R ADI O -ESM S TATION [F4]

In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters the ESM (Electronic Support Measures)
station and the Radio Room are combined. ESM allows you to detect and
classify contacts when at periscope depth. The radio is used to receive
intelligence and tasking updates and share Link data while underway.
Radio Message Window
E L E C TR O NI C S U PP OR T M E AS U R E S (ESM)
The ESM mast is designed for the passive detection of radar emissions.
This sensor detects any platform in your area that is employing radar.
Because you must have the ESM mast exposed, you make your ship
vulnerable to detection when using ESM.
The ESM sensor provides a bearing to detected contacts. The ships
computer analyses the detected transmission and compares it to those in
its database thus providing the class of the transmitting platform.
Detecting and Classifying Contacts with ESM

1. Come to ESM mast depth (18 m) or shallower and maintain a speed of
10 knots or less if the sail is submerged before raising the ESM mast.
2. Click the ESM ANTENNA switch to the ON position to raise the mast.
When the triangular cursor appears in the ESM Display, the ESM is in
detection mode. Contacts appear as lines emanating from the center of
the display on a specific bearing.
3. Click a contact signal in the ESM Display to determine contact bearing

and to view the source of the signal. (The name of the detected emitter
appears in the SOURCE field.) The bearing to the contact appears in
the Bearing readout.
4. Take note of the intensity of the contact on the ESM Display and the
number of ESM Signal Strength Indicator lights that are lit. A strong
signal can indicate that the contact is relatively close. (Green indicates
a weaker signal, red a strong one.)
5. Click a contact signal to select it then click MARK. This assigns an

alphanumeric contact ID to the contact and sends it to TMA and the
Nav Map. ESM contacts have E designations (E01, E02, etc.). Once
marked the Contact ID appears in front of the Emitter name in the
SOURCE field.
When MARK is clicked, the contact selected in the ESM display is
automatically assigned a classification determined by the ships

computer. This classification is based on platforms known to carry
the detected emitter shown in the SOURCE field. When the
contact is selected on the Nav Map the DDI will list that class
name in the CLASS field. You must still assign an ID (Hostile,
Friendly etc.) from the Contact Menu on the Nav Map.
R A D I O R O OM
The lower portion of the Radio/ESM console represents the Radio Room.
Here messages containing important intelligence and tasking information
are received and contact positions are downloaded from any platforms in
the area that are part of your Link network. (The link is modeled for all
controllable platforms in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters. Any platforms on
Ownside are part of your Link.)
When your submarine starts a mission submerged, you see no Link data on
the Nav Map even though Show Link Data is on by default. To determine if
there are Ownside platforms (members of the Link) in your area you must
come to communications depth (comms depth) and follow the steps below.
When Link information is downloaded any surface and air Link participants
and any contacts they have detected appear on the Nav Map. You may
never see the symbol for any submerged Link participant that is in the
mission.
Receiving Radio Messages and Link Data

To receive messages you must come to communications depth (comms
depth: 19 meters) or shallower and raise the radio mast, or stream the
floating wire antenna. There are advantages and disadvantages to both
modes. The radio mast receives messages more quickly but exposing the
mast leaves you vulnerable to detection. The floating wire receives
messages far more slowly but you do not need to expose a mast or go as
shallow to receive messages. Follow these instructions to deploy the radio
mast or floating wire.
1. Select either the floating wire antenna or the radio antenna mast to
receive the message.
Radio Mast: Take the ship to 19 meters and set ship speed to 8 knots
or less when the sail is submerged to avoid damaging the mast when it
is raised. When the depth and speed prerequisites are met, click
RAISE under Radio Antenna to extend the radio mast.
Streaming Wire: You do not have to come to comms depth but it helps
to be fairly near the surface. Set ships speed to 18 knots or less to
avoid damaging the wire. Slower speeds allow the wire to float up more
quickly. If speed exceeds 5 knots, the wire may never reach the
surface of the water. Make sure the wire is streamed to at least half of
its length in order to ensure message reception. In the Streaming Wire
panel click STREAM. The readout below the switch indicates the length
of the wire that is currently deployed. Click STOP when the desired
length has been deployed.
2. Look at the message screen for incoming messages. A scroll bar

appears in the message window if there are more messages than can
be displayed at one time. The newest message traffic is always at the
bottom of the scrolling text. Message traffic may not appear
immediately. When a message is received, the INCOMING MESSAGE
light glows briefly.
3. Look at the Nav Map if you are waiting for Link Data to determine when
the information has been downloaded.
Single player mode: If another Ownside platform in the mission is
a submarine, you must both be at comms depth with a mast or the

antenna deployed before you see him as part of your Link Data.
Since it is unlikely that these conditions will be met, you may never
see an Ownside sub in your Link download.
Multiplayer mode: If another Ownside sub is player driven, you
both must be at comms depth with the radio mast extended at the
same time before you will see each other. If you have your radio
mast extended and he has his floating wire out, he will see you but
you will not see him. The radio mast is needed to transmit position
data.
4. After the desired information has been received, click LOWER to lower
the Radio Mast or RETRIEVE to retrieve the streaming wire.
9 Note: Radio message text also appears in the Radio History Window
on the Task Bar. When a new message is received, the radio history
selection button (the green square) on the Task Bar flashes until the
button is selected. You can raise and lower the radio mast from the
Task Bars Orders Menu from any screen provided you are at a safe
depth and speed.
Promoting Contacts to the Link

In some cases the Link participants in your area could be unaware of a
contact that you have detected if the contact is out of range of their
combined sensors. In this case you may want to promote your contact to
the Link to share it with other link participants in your area. (Your contacts
are not automatically shared with the Link participants as theirs are shared
with you in single player games.)
During Multiplayer games contacts detected by Ownside platforms

controlled by other players do not share data across the Link automatically
as the AI Ownside platforms do. Part of your task in Multiplayer games is to
promote your contacts to the Link so that other Ownside Link players can
see your contacts. Other players must promote their contacts before you
are able to see them on the Nav Map. You are only able to see them when
Show Link Data is on.
Just as you must raise your radio antenna or float the wire to download Link
updates, you must also come to communications depth (comms depth) and
raise the radio antenna before you can to promote your contacts to the Link.
1. Come to comms depth (19 meters) and raise the radio antenna.
2. From the Nav Map, select the contact you want to promote. From its
Contact Menu (right-click menu) classify the contact as surface or
subsurface if known and apply any alliance or class information that
you have to the contact.
3. If possible determine an accurate firing solution and enter it at the TMA

station.
4. From the Contact Menu select Promote to Link. In the DDI a new field
appears labeled Promoted. This field displays the time in the mission
at which you promoted the contact to the Link.
The contacts symbol appears on the Nav Map of any players in a
multiplayer game that are part of Ownside and have access to the Link.
A 4-digit track ID is assigned based on your Platform ID. This 4-digit
number is seen in parentheses following the time of promotion in the
Promoted field. In single player games, AI platforms attack contacts
that you have promoted as hostile. The AI investigates contacts
promoted as Unknown. See Navigation Station/2D Navigation
Map/Contact Menu/Promoting a Contact to Link for more information.
9 Note: If the only other player in your Link is a submarine, you must
both be at comms depth with your Radio Masts extended in order to
share data across the link.
K ILO N AVIGATI ON S TATION [F5]

The Navigation Station, with its Nav Map and 3D View is the default view
when entering a mission. The Navigation Station functions the same
regardless of controllable platform and is covered only once in this manual
in Navigation Station.
K IL O O W N S H I P /O R DE R S M E NU S
Click the Ownship NTDS symbol on the Nav Map to select it, then right-click
on the selected symbol to display the Ownship Menu. The majority of the
functionality contained in the Ownship Menu is also contained in the Orders
Menu. These are described in Kilo Stations/ Task Bar/Orders Menu earlier
in this section. The rest of the Ownship options require the use of the Nav
Map. These are the same across platforms and are described in Navigation
Station/2D Navigation Map/Ownship Menu. Several options are unique to

the submarines in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
target is assigned to a tube and the tube is readied to fire in the Fire Control
Station. When all that is left to do is fire the tube, this option is available.
Select it to fire the designated tube.
K IL O C O N T AC T M E NU
The Contact Menu appears whenever you right-click on a selected contacts
NTDS symbol. Most Contact Menu items are the same across platforms
and these are covered in Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Contact
Menu. Several options are unique to the subs in S.C.S. Dangerous
Waters.
Engage With: The weapons you see in the Engage With option are
described in the Kilo Stations/Kilo Fire Control Suite/ Kilo Tactical Weapons
and Kilo Strategic Weapons portions of this section. Only weapons
appropriate to the selected target are available. Others are greyed out.
Spec Ops: This option is only visible when the mission designer has
included the Deep Submergence Rescue Vehicle or a Special Forces team
in the mission. It displays a submenu of Special Operations. Follow tasking
messages in the mission for specifics on deploying the special ops units in
the game. (The Kilo is given the Russian DSRV for gameplay purposes.)
Rescue Vehicle to travel to the selected contact. This option is only
selectable when the following conditions are met:
The DSRV is present on the subs hull. (The DSRV is only

Ownship speed is 3 knots or less.
depth requirements are met. It is available only in the Contact Menu
only under these conditions:
The selected contact is a surface ship or landbased target
(Category: Stationary) such as a building or the floating Oil Rig.

Ownship has Special Forces aboard.
Ownship is traveling at periscope depth or shallower and at 3
knots or less.
K ILO F IRE C ONT ROL S UITE [F6]

The Kilos Fire Control Suite consists of three stations: the Target Display,
the Launch Panel and the Weapons Inventory. These stations are reached
by clicking one of the navigation buttons at the bottom right of the Kilos Fire
Control Stations. Target Display is seen as default at game start.
Launch Panel
Target Display
Weapons Inventory
K IL O F I R E C ON TR OL T AR GE T D I S PL AY
The Kilo Target Display consists of the Fire Control map, the Target
Selection List, the Tube Selection Panel and the Map Control Panel. These
areas are described here. See Kilo Stations/Kilo Fire Control Suite/Basic
Launch Procedures for information on how to use the displays and panels
to launch weapons, mines and countermeasures.
Fire Control Map
Target Selection List
Map Control Panel Tube Selection Panel Navigation Buttons
Fire Control Map

All sensor contact symbols seen on the Nav Map are also seen on the Fire
Control map. If you have Show Link Data on, Link participant symbols and
Link contact symbols also appear. The TMA or Link solution data for a
selected contact appears in the upper left corner of the map in the Fire
Control DDI area. This solution data is constantly updated assuming the
course and speed designated when the solution was entered in TMA or
provided by the Link. This information is used by the Fire Control System to
predict the location of the target so the weapon can steer an intercept
course until it is close enough to detect the target and begin homing.
You are allowed to target Link contacts as well as Link participants from the
Fire Control Station, however the latter is not recommended. Link contacts
are only available if you have first downloaded Link data. Link contact
positions are not updated once you lose radio contact. See Kilo
Stations/Kilo ESM/Radio Station.
9 Note: If Show Truth is ON, no Contact IDs appear in the Target
Selection List. Only Snapshots (bearing only) can be assigned to a
weapon.
Fire Control Map Controls

Below the Fire Control Map are several buttons used to help narrow the
view or display only the data that you wish to see.
PAN: When the map is zoomed in, click the PAN buttons or click and
drag on the map or use the keyboard arrow keys to adjust the map
view.
ZOOM: Click + in the ZOOM controls or press [CTRL] and click the
map to zoom in on the clicked location. Click in the ZOOM controls or
press [CTRL] and right-click to zoom out.
WEAPON TRACKS: When this button is ON (lit) all waypoints
assigned to any land attack missile or mine display on the map. When
this option is OFF only the waypoints for the weapon assigned to the
selected contact show on the map. Click to toggle the state of this
button.
CENTER ON OWNSHIP: When this button is ON (lit) the Ownship
symbol is centered in the Fire Control map when the map is zoomed.
Keyboard Controls: When the cursor is in the map, press [SHIFT] + X
to toggle the display of the Longitude and Latitude and depth display.
Select [SHIFT] + Z to toggle the display of the range scale.
Fire Control Target Selection List

At the top of the Tube Selection Panel area is the Target Selection
dropdown list. This drop-down list contains all of the contacts currently
marked by Ownship. A Contact ID selected in this list is available for
assignment to a specific tube as described below with the following
caveats.
Contact with a LOB: Contact IDs for contacts with a line of bearing
(no TMA solution) cannot be assigned to a tube. They can be targeted
with a snapshot.
BCreate a TMA solution for the contact to make it available for tube
assignment.
Unknown Category Contacts: Contact IDs for contacts that have a
TMA solution but have not yet been classified as either a surface or
sub surface platform type cannot be assigned to a tube. See Note In
Tube Selection Panel below. A snapshot can be assigned.
BSelect the contact in the Nav Map and from its right-click menu
designate it as surface or subsurface to make it assignable.
Link Contacts: Link contact IDs and Link participant IDs appear in the
Target Selection list when Show Link Data is ON.
Tube Selection Panel

From the Tube Selection Panel contacts are assigned to specific tubes and
weapon presets are entered. Torpedoes and UUVs can be wire guided from
tubes 5 and 6 only. Wire guide controls for these tubes are accessed from
the Tube Selection Panel by Clicking the W once the weapon is launched.
A number represents each of the Kilos six 53 cm torpedo tubes.
BSelect a contact ID from the Target Selection List.
BClick the number of the desired tube to assign the weapon in that
tube to the selected target.
9 Note: Certain weapons can only be used against submarines. You
are not able to assign a sub-only weapon to a target designated as a
surface contact. Until a contact is classified as surface or subsurface,
it cannot be assigned to any tube.
K IL O F I R E C ON TR OL L AU NC H P A NE L
From the Launch Panel weapons selected in the Target Display are
launched. Prior to launching a weapon the tube must be flooded, the
pressure equalized and the muzzle door opened. Once these steps have
been completed, the weapon can be fired. Once the launch procedure is
initiated for a tube, the name of the weapon in the window is greyed out and
the weapon cannot be changed until the launch procedure is halted and the
steps reversed.
Tube Number Interlock Indicator Light
Name of Weapon loaded
Launch Panel Selected
Basic Launch Procedure

1. Assign a target to a tube in the Target Display and assign Preset
values, then find the corresponding tube number in the Launch Panel.
2. Click F to flood the tube.

3. Click E to equalize the water pressure in the tube.
4. Click M to open the muzzle door. The tube number and the interlock (I)
lights are illuminated indicating that the weapon is ready to fire.
5. Click FIRE to lift the cover; click again to fire the weapon.
9 Note: If you have not yet assigned a target to the tube, the FIRE
button is disabled and the tube number does not illuminate. Once a
target is assigned in the Target Display the tube number illuminates
and the FIRE button is enabled.
6. To wire-guide a torpedo with that capability from tube 5 or 6, return to

the Target Display screen and click the W next to the number of the
tube you fired. W stands for wire guidance. See Kilo Stations/Kilo Fire
Control Suite/Targeting Sea Contacts /Torpedo Wire Guide Controls.
Tip: If a tube number does not light up and the Fire button does not
respond check to make sure there is a target assigned to the tube. Also
check the High-Pressure Air bank in Ship Control. A weapon launch
requires a charge of at least 50% in your air banks. Air banks are charged
at the Ship Control Station.
To Reverse the Launch Process Prior to Firing:

Until the weapon is actually fired, the launch process can be reversed. In
this situation the steps must be manually reversed, one step at a time. The
muzzle doors must be closed and the tube re-pressurized and drained
allowing a different weapon to be loaded.
BClick the buttons in the reverse order (M then E then F) to prepare
the tube for reload. The button flashes and goes dark indicating
the next button can be clicked. Reload the tube as described
below.
Countermeasure Launch Procedure

1. Determine the type of countermeasure needed. Change loadout if
necessary.
2. Click FIRE to open the cover, and click again to fire the
countermeasure.
3. To select a different countermeasure or load an empty tube, click the

name of the countermeasure. Continued clicks cycle through the
available options.
Tube Reload Procedure

The Kilos automated torpedo reload system requires only two minutes to
reload an empty tube. To remove a weapon from a tube and replace it
takes about twice as long.
The text appears red in the Weapon Name Display Window if the weapon
can be changed. If the text is grey, the tube is locked and the weapon
cannot be changed until the tube is drained.
BClick the red text in the Weapon Name Display Window to cycle
through weapons available for that tube until the desired weapon
name appears. The tube number flashes until the weapon is
loaded.
If the tube is empty because a weapon has been fired, the tube cannot be
reloaded until the tube is drained.
BClick M to close the muzzle door and the process reverses
automatically. Remember that closing the muzzle door cuts the
wire on torpedoes and UUVs.
9 Note: A torpedo or a UUV can no longer be wire-guided once the
muzzle door of the tube that fired it has been closed. Closing the
muzzle door cuts the guidance wire.
BIf the tube is flooded and the weapon has not been fired, the
buttons must be clicked in reverse order (M, E, F) to prepare the
tube for a weapon change.
9 Note: The unload/load process takes approximately four minutes.
Loading an empty tube takes 2 minutes. If the Fire Control Quick
Launch option is selected in the Options>Game screen the length of
time it takes to unload then reload a tube is cut to 35 seconds and
loading an empty tube takes 20 seconds.
T AR G ET I N G S E A C O N T AC TS
1. To assign a contact to a tube, select the desired Contact ID from the
Target Selection List or click a contact symbol on the Fire Control map
to automatically select it in the list.
To send a weapon down a specific line of bearing, select Snapshot
from the Target Selection List.
2. Click the number of a tube containing a weapon appropriate for the

target. The contact ID appears below the tube number indicating this
contact is now assigned to this tube.
See Kilo Stations/Akula Fire Control Suite/Akula Fire Control
Target Display/Fire Control Target Selection List above for

instances that prevent a contact from being assigned to a tube.
3. Click P below a tube number to display the presets for the weapon. For
information on all presets see Kilo Stations/Kilo Fire Control Suite/Kilo
Weapon Presets.
If your Fire Control Auto Crewman is on, he enters the presets for
you.
For a Snapshot, enter the desired LOB along with other desired
presets.
4. When presets are entered click the Launch Panel icon and initiate the
launch procedure for the desired tube. See Kilo Stations/Kilo Fire
Control Suite/Kilo Fire Control Launch Panel/Basic Launch Procedures.
5. Once a wire-guided torpedo is launched from tube 5 or 6, click the W

button to display its Wire Guide Controls.
Torpedo Wire Guide Controls

Only tubes 5 and 6 on the Kilo can fire wire-guided torpedoes. Once a
torpedo is fired, its symbol appears on the Fire Control map. When the
weapon enables, two red lines extend from the torpedo symbol indicating
the weapons search cone. Until a torpedo enables, it can be wire-guided.
BClick W below the desired tube to wire guide the torpedo from that
tube. The W is only selectable if the tube has fired a torpedo that
can be wired guided.
Heading: Click the right facing arrow to increment the weapons
ordered heading. Click the left facing arrow to decrease the ordered
heading.
Enable: Click to enable the weapon before it reaches the enable
distance set in the Run To Enable preset and start the weapon in its
search mode.
Pre-Enable: Click to return an enabled weapon to its pre-enabled state
without shutting the weapon down entirely. If you want to wire guide a
weapon that has already enabled and started its search, click this
option. The red enable cone disappears. Once the weapon detects a
contact and begins homing, it can no longer be pre-enabled. It can only

be shutdown.
Shutdown: Click to shut down the weapon entirely. The weapon
cannot be enabled again if this option is selected.
9 Note A torpedo is searching as long as it is snaking or circling (as
set in the presets). If the weapon heads on a straight path, it is
homing.
A TT AC KI N G L A ND T AR GE TS
Only the Chinese Improved Kilo Hull 368 is capable of firing the 3M-14E
Klub Land Attack Missile. To attack a land target from Fire Control, the
latitude and longitude coordinates of the site must be fed into the fire control
system and a series of waypoints defined for the missile to follow. The
coordinates are usually defined in a tasking message.
1. Set Ownship depth to 100 meters or less and a speed of 6 knots or

less. Do not fire the missile until this depth and speed have been
achieved or the missile will fail.
2. Select a tube containing a land attack missile. Click P to open the

Preset Panel for the tube.
3. Click DEFINE TARGET WAYPOINTS then click the Fire Control map
to place four weapon waypoints. The number next to the last waypoint
indicates the tube number.
BClick a waypoint to enter exact coordinates in the Latitude and
Longitude presets or click and drag the waypoint to the desired
location. Watch the latitude and longitude readout in the lower left
corner of the Fire Control map as you drag the waypoint to
determine its current location.
The outermost waypoint should be placed at the exact latitude and
longitude of the target as specified in your orders.

If a landfall waypoint is directed in your tasking make sure that one
of the earlier waypoints is placed at that latitude and longitude.
4. Set the destruct range for the missile. This is the range at which the
missile will self-destruct if it has not encountered a target.
5. Initiate the launch procedure for the tube in the Launch Panel.
9 Note: Land sites with Link Contact IDs can be targeted from the Nav
screen using the Contact Menus Engage With command.
LAYING
MINEFIELD
The steps for laying a minefield are seen below.
1. Check your tasking or determine the exact latitude and longitude for
each mine to be placed.
2. Determine which tube will fire the mine destined for each specific
location. From the Launch Panel, load the desired tubes with mines.
3. In the Target Display Panel select each tube individually and place a
waypoint for that mine to follow. Click P then click DEFINE TARGET
WAYPOINT and click the Fire Control map to place the waypoint.
4. Select the waypoint and drag it to the desired location using the lat/long
readout at the bottom of the Fire Control map. You can also enter the
desired latitude and longitude in the waypoint presets.
The waypoint presets appear below the Define Target Waypoint button
in the preset panel as soon as the waypoint is placed on the map.

Tip: Once mines are loaded and presets are entered, you can fire the tube
from the Nav Map using the Ownship or Orders Menus Fire Tube
command. Map markers can be placed on the Nav Map indicating the mine
location and a launch point for the mine designated for that location. Using
this method you can better tell when to fire the tube. See Navigation
Station/2D Navigation Map/Map Menu.
5. After firing the mine, reload the tube with a new mine or weapon.
D E PL OY I N G
AN D
W I R E -G U I DI N G UUV S
Because a UUV is a sensor, not a weapon, it need not be assigned a target

in the Target Display to be fired.
1. Set Ownship speed to 4 knots or less. Do not launch the UUV until that
speed has been achieved.
2. To launch a UUV to a depth other than Ownship depth, first select the
tube containing the UUV in the Target Display and click P to display its
presets.
3. Click the checkmark to deselect Use OS Depth and display the Depth
preset. Click a digit to increment its value. Right-click to decrease the
value.
4. Select the desired tube in the Launch Panel and initiate the launch
procedure as for a torpedo. (Only tubes 5 and 6 can launch UUVs
since they require wire guidance.)
5. From the Target Display click W below the tube that fired the UUV to
display the wire guide controls.
If a UUV is in a tube it can be launched from the Orders or Ownship
Menus using the Fire Tube command without visiting the Fire Control
Station. It will be launched at Ownships depth.
Wire-Guiding and Enabling UUV Active Sonar

1. From the Target Display select W below the tube that fired the UUV to
display the wire-guide controls.
2. Click the Ordered Course arrows to adjust the course of the UUV.
Passive sonar mode is on by default when a UUV is launched but
active sonar mode can be enabled at any time as long as the wire
is still attached and the 30-minute battery is functioning. Be aware
that capable ships and subs in the area can detect UUV active
sonar. However, active sonar may be necessary when traversing a
minefield. Follow these steps to enable UUV active sonar.
3. Click ENABLE to initiate active sonar.

4. Click PRE-ENABLE to de-activate active sonar and return to passive
mode.
9 Note: Closing the muzzle door after launching the UUV cuts the
guidance wire. Once the wire is cut the UUV no longer sends sonar
returns.
UUV Returns
Sonar returns from the UUV are automatically assigned a Contact ID and
can be found in the TMA SELECTED TRACK drop-down list and on the
Nav and Fire Control maps. UUV sonar returns do not show up on any of
the screens of the Sonar Suite although the UUV itself displays as a contact
in Broadband and Narrowband Sonar. Depending on its course, the UUV
may provide returns on Ownship.
A contact detected by a UUV in passive mode appears on the Nav Map
as a yellow Unknown symbol at the end of a white line of bearing that

extends from the location of the UUV at a default range of 10 nm.
A contact detected by a UUV in active mode appears as a yellow
Unknown symbol at the end of a green line of bearing. The length of

the LOB indicates the range of the contact from the UUV.
9 Note: UUVs cannot be retrieved. Once the battery is expended you
need only close the muzzle door to cut the wire and jettison the UUV.
The tube can then be re-loaded. Altering Ownships course by more
than 90 cuts the wire. Once the wire is cut the UUV no longer sends
sonar returns
K IL O W E A P ON I N VE N T OR Y S T AT I O N
The Weapon Inventory simply displays the current type and number of
weapons on board your sub. No interaction is possible. The total of
available weapons is updated as weapons and countermeasures are
dispensed.
K IL O T AC T IC AL W E A P O NS
Kilos in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters have been assigned weapons capable
of targeting surface ships, submarines and land targets. The Kilos also
carry a shoulder SAM launcher for targeting helicopters and low flying
maritime patrol aircraft. Available weapons are described briefly below. The
Kilo loadouts vary by country and Hulls.
Weapons on Russian and Chinese Kilos

TEST-71M / TEST-71ME Torpedo: This weapon can target submarines
only. It has a maximum speed of 40 knots (74 km/h) and a maximum range
of 20 km (10.8 nm). It carries a 205 kg (452 lb) warhead and is effective to a
depth of 400 m (1,312 ft).
53-65 K / 53-65 KE Torpedo: This wake homing torpedo works best
against surface ships, although it can also be used with limited success
against submarines. It has a maximum speed of 55 knots, a range of 7.5
nm and carries a 300 kg warhead.
SA-N-8 Gremlin SAM (All Russian Kilos and Chinese Improved Kilos):
Fired from a shoulder-launcher from a position in the aft of the sail, these
Surface to Air Missiles have a maximum range of 4.7 km (2.5 nm), can
reach a maximum altitude of 3,505 meters, and carry a 2 kg (4.4 lb)
warhead. (Press [F8] when the Kilo is surfaced to access the SAM
launcher.)
Weapons on Russian Kilos Only

SS-N-15 Starfish: This primarily anti-submarine weapon flies as a missile
on an assigned course then drops a UMGT-1 Torpedo. In the game the
torpedo begins homing as soon as it hits the water. The missile has a range
of 19 nm (35 km). The torpedo it drops has a range of 8 km (4.3 nm) and a
warhead of 100 kg. It can also be used against surface targets.
9 Note: For successful in-game launch of the SS-N-15 Starfish missile
Ownship depth must be between 50 and 150 meters. Ownship
speed must be 6 knots or less.
USET-80 Torpedo: This multipurpose active/passive homing torpedo has a
maximum range of 20 km (10.7 nm) and a maximum speed of 50 knots (8393 km/h). A maximum depth of 500 m (1,641 ft) is modeled.
Weapons on Chinese Kilos Only

SET-53 ME Torpedo: While generally thought to be a passive weapon,
there is speculation that the M version of this weapon may have
incorporated pirated British MK 20 active/passive technology. For gameplay
purposes both active and passive capabilities are modeled for this weapon.
Max depth in gameplay is set at 1,200 ft (365 m). A maximum range of 14
km (7.5 nm) and a maximum speed of 29 knots (54 km/h) are modeled for
this torpedo.
TEST-71ME-NK (All Kilo 636 hulls): This torpedo can be used against
surface and subsurface targets. It can be wire-guided, has both active and
passive acoustic modes and can wake home. It has a warhead of 205 kg
(452 lb), can travel at speeds up to 40 knots, and has a maximum range of
20 km (10.8 nm.)
SA-N-5 Grail SAM (All Kilo 877 hulls): The shoulder-launched version of
this weapon is modeled in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters. The Grail has a
maximum speed of 972 knots (1,800 km/h), can reach a maximum altitude
of 7,800 ft (2,377 m) and has a maximum range 4.4 km (2.4 nm). (Press
[F9] when the Kilo is surfaced to access the SAM launcher.)
Klub-S Series: Carried by the Chinese Improved Kilo Hull 368 only. These
weapons are also seen in the game as the SS-N-27 series missiles carried
by the Russian Akulas.
9 Note: to successfully launch any of the Klub weapons Ownship
depth must be at 100 meters or less and speed must be at 6 knots or
less.
3M-54E ASCM: This missile resembles the American TASM. It has a
range of 220 km (119 nm), is low flying and has a warhead of 200 kg.
(Equivalent to SS-N-27 ASM.)
91RE1 ASW: In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters this antisubmarine
weapon drops a Type 40 torpedo that enables as soon as it enters the
water. The missile has a range of 19 nm; the torpedo has a maximum
speed of 65 knots, a range of 13 km (7 nm) and a 150 kg warhead.
(Equivalent to SS-N-27 ASW.)
3M-14E LAM (Land Attack Missile): This weapon resembles the
American Tomahawk. It has a ballistic trajectory and a range of 162 nm
and carries a 400 kg warhead. This weapon is added for gameplay. It
is not known if the land attack version of this weapon has been
exported to China. (Equivalent to SS-N-27 LAM.)
K IL O S TR A TE G IC W E A P ON S
Mines
Mobile Mine: The Kilos mobile mine is a modified version of the 53-65K
torpedo. Launched via a 53 cm torpedo tube it can travel up to 18.5 km (10
nm) after leaving the ship. The mobile mine is effective in depths from 4
150 meters and has a 450 kg warhead.
K IL O C OU N TE R M E ASU RES
Countermeasures are defensive weapons used to prevent an enemys
torpedo from destroying your sub. The Kilo carries Active and Passive
torpedo decoys that can be launched from the Fire Control Launch Panel,
or via the Ownship or Orders Menus Countermeasure option.
Passive Decoy: Used against passive homing torpedoes, this decoy emits
sound (noise) across a broad spectrum of frequencies in an attempt to
deceive the torpedo into homing in on the decoy.
Active Decoy: Used against active homing torpedoes this decoy is a

bubble generator that creates an area of bubbles in an attempt to provide a
false echo to the torpedo.
Decoy Depth: Decoys fired from the Fire Control Launch Panel are
launched at Ownship Depth. Countermeasures fired via the Ownship or
Orders Menus Countermeasures option can be launched at either a
Shallow (30 m) or Deep (244 m) depth.
K IL O W E A P ON P R E S E T S
Presets are instructions that tell a weapon or UUV what to do. All presets
are presented here alphabetically by weapon type. Not all weapons are
available on every Kilo. See Kilo Stations/Kilo Fire Control Suite/Kilo
Tactical Weapons for information on which weapons are carried on each
class of Kilo.
Antiship Missile Presets

3M-54E Klub ASCM (Chinese Improved Kilo Hull 368 Only)
Seeker Pattern: Sets the area to be searched to either a wide or
narrow pattern. This can be used to help discriminate against other
shipping in congested waters.
BClick the Wide/Narrow button to toggle the selection.
Destruct Range: Sets the range at which the missile self-destructs if a
target is not encountered. Use this to avoid hitting neutral and friendly
ships in the area. (Defaults to 50 nm.)
Seeker Range: Sets the range at which the missile begins to search.
(Defaults to 0 nm.) This can be used to help discriminate against other
9 Note: Your ship must be at 100 meters or less and at 6 knots or less
to successfully launch one of these antiship weapons.
Mine Presets
Mobile Mine
Mines display the following presets:
Define Target Waypoints: Click DEFINE TARGET WAYPOINTS then
click the Fire Control map to place a single waypoint.
Latitude/Longitude: Click the waypoint to display presets for setting
the precise latitude and longitude for the waypoint. These coordinates
define the final destination of the mine. Click the digits in the preset
panel to set the desired value. You can also click a waypoint and drag
it to the desired location. Watch the Latitude/Longitude readout in the
lower left of the Fire Control map when dragging a waypoint to
determine the waypoints current location.
Missile-Torpedo Presets
SS-N-15 Starfish and 91RE1 ASW Missile
Snapshot Bearing (deg): The weapon is fired on the bearing entered
here. This preset only appears if Snapshot is assigned to the tube
from the Target drop-down list.
Run To Enable: Sets the distance (in meters) at which the missile
drops its torpedo payload. The torpedo falls to the water and enables at
once.
Strike Missile Presets

3M-14E LAM
This missile has the following presets.
click the Fire Control map to place four waypoints for the weapon to
follow.
Destruct Range (nm): Sets the range at which the missile selfdestructs if a target is not encountered. Use this to avoid hitting neutral
and friendly ships in the area. (Defaults to 50 nm.)
Latitude/Longitude: Once the waypoints are on the map the Lat/long
presets appear. Click a waypoint to display presets for setting the
precise Latitude and Longitude for the waypoint. Click the preset digits
to increment the value. Right-click to decrease the value. You can also
click a waypoint and drag it to the desired location. Watch the
Latitude/Longitude readout in the lower left of the Fire Control map
when dragging a waypoint to determine the waypoints current location.
to successfully launch one of these Land Attack Missiles.
Torpedo Presets
53-65K, (53-65KE), SET-53ME, Test-71, (Test-71ME, Test-71MENK), USET-80
The following presets are available for torpedoes:
here. (This preset only appears if Snapshot is assigned to the tube
from the Target drop-down list.)
Ceiling: Set the depth above which the weapon does not travel.
Floor: Set the depth below which the weapon does not travel.
Acoustic: Chose Active or Passive sonar mode. Active mode
transmits active pings and follows the returns. In passive mode the
weapon does a passive sonar search.
9 Note: The 53-65K/53-65KE torpedoes are wake homers. They have

no Acoustic setting.
Run To Enable: Set the distance the weapon travels before it enables
and starts its active search. Enabling the weapon too soon can alert
the target in time to take evasive measures. Enabling too late can
mean the weapon runs past the target.
UUV Presets
Use OS Depth: Set the depth at which the UUV travels to that of
Ownship. Use Os Depth is selected by default. Deselect the option to
display the Depth option.
Depth: Enter the desired depth for the UUV to travel. Click a digit to
increment the value. Right-click to decrease the value.
K ILO TMA S TATION [F7]

At the Target Motion Analysis (TMA) station, data from the Kilos sensors
are used to determine a contacts bearing, range, course and speed. This
information, called a target solution or simply a solution, is necessary to
accurately target a contact with your ships weapons.
Performing TMA is not easy and without at least a rudimentary
understanding of TMA functionality it is highly unlikely that TMA can be
performed successfully. Since the FFG and all submarine classes in S.C.S.
- Dangerous Waters have a TMA station, the TMA basics are described just
once in this manual. See Training/TMA Basics for information on how to
perform target motion analysis. Refer back to that section while learning to
perform target motion analysis at the Kilos TMA station.
K IL O TMA S TA TI O N C OM P O NE N TS
As with all TMA stations in controllable submarines, the Kilos TMA station
is composed or several distinct areas: The TMA board, the View Controls
and Cursor Readouts, the Track Selection Area, Trial Solution Area and the
Solution Area. These areas are described briefly below. See Training/TMA
Basics for additional information about these areas.
TMA Board
Track Selection Area
Cursor Readouts View Controls
Trial Solution Area

Solution Readout
Kilo TMA Board

The board displays a representation of Ownship, a history of bearing data
for a selected contact, a TMA ruler and an error dot stack. These tools are
used to analyze sensor inputs.
Bearing lines (LOBs)

When a sensor sends a bearing report to TMA a history of each report is
maintained. When a contact is selected the bearing report history for that
contact appears on the TMA board. The lines extend indefinitely for
contacts reported by sensors that report only a bearing. The ruler is found
at the default range of 10,000 yards.
The ruler is found at the end of the LOB (the reported range) when it is
reported by Active sonar, Radar or the Stadimeter. The color of the bearing
lines indicates the sensor that is detecting it.
Cylindrical (bow) array:
White
Conformal (hull) array:
Blue
Active sonar:
Green
Active Intercept:
Yellow
Periscope or ESM:
Red
Radar:
Yellow
UUV passive sonar:
White
UUV active sonar:
Green
Time History Right-Click Menu

Right-click the TMA Board to change the bearing return history on the TMA
Board. As long as a tracker is tracking, bearing information is sent to TMA
in two-minute intervals. If the screen gets too cluttered, change the number
of lines that are displayed. History options available are 10 minutes, 20
minutes (default), 1 hour and 4 hours. A check mark indicates the selected
option.
Kilos TMA Dot Stack
TMA Ruler
Ruler Handle
Course Direction Arrowhead

Kilo TMA Board
The TMA Ruler

The TMA ruler is used to generate your best estimate of the contacts
course and speed. Its location on the board relative to Ownship indicates
your estimate of the range of the contact. With each new bearing line an
additional tick mark is added to the ruler and another dot is added to the top
of the dot stack.
The ruler components are described below.
contacts estimated range.

sonar update with every sweep or ping.) The mark at the end of the

9 Note: All of the current estimates represented by the ruler appear in
numerical form in the Trial Solution Area to the right of the TMA
Board.
Manipulating the Speed Strip Ruler
The speed strip ruler is adjusted as follows.
S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters Tip: Center on the ruler and zoom in to better
manipulate the ruler and access the handle. If you have difficulty dragging
the ruler to get the arrowhead pointed in the desired direction, enter the
desired course number in the course field.
The Dot Stack

The dot stack in the upper left corner is a graphical representation of the
error between tick marks and bearing lines. The dot at the top of the stack
is associated with the most recent bearing line. Moving the ruler and
adjusting the location of the tick marks allows you to line up the dots along
the center vertical line in the dot stack. The analysis is probably most nearly
correct when the top most dots are on the centerline. This process is called
stacking the dots.
Kilo Track Selection Area

The area at the upper right of the Kilos TMA station is used to select a
contact to analyze, merge, split or drop. These functions are described
here.
SELECTED TRACK drop-down list: This dropdown lists the
alphanumeric Contact IDs for designated contacts. Selecting a Contact
ID from the list displays on the TMA board the available history of
bearing lines for that contact. The first letter of the contact designation
represents the source of the data: S for Sonar, R for Radar, V for visual
(Periscope and Stadimeter), and E for ESM. M indicates a merged
contact.
SPLIT: Click button to split the merged (M) contact selected in the
SELECTED TRACK drop-down list into its two original contact
components.
DROP: Click to permanently drops the contact selected in the Selected
Merge: Click to merge the contact selected in the Selected Track dropdown list with the contact selected in the Merge Track drop-down list.
MERGED TRACK: This dropdown lists all contacts except the contact
selected in the SELECTED TRACK drop-down list.
Kilo Trial Solution Area

The area to the right of the TMA Board is used to create and fine-tune a
firing solution for the selected contact and to enter the solution into the
ships fire control system.
BEARING, COURSE, RANGE, and SPEED Fields: Represent the trial
solution for the selected contact. The current position and size of the
TMA ruler is reflected in these fields. These numbers are altered by
dragging and resizing the ruler or by entering values directly into these
fields. The ruler moves to reflect the entered values.
Lock Buttons: Click the red button to the left of each field to lock the
value in that field. The ruler reflects the locked value. An illuminated
button indicates a locked value.
ENTER SOLUTION: Enters the values in the trial solution fields into
the system. These values are now the system firing solution for this
target. The NTDS symbol for this contact is located on the Nav and
Fire Control maps at the designated bearing and range and moves on
the course and speed entered here.
9 Note: The ruler position for selected Contact A is not retained when
you select Contact B unless a solution has been entered for Contact
A prior to selecting another contact. That means that unless you
enter your solution, the ruler you have carefully positioned on
Contact A will be in a different position when Contact A is reselected.
Dont lose your work. Enter your solution. You can always fine-tune it
later.
Kilo View Control Area

Other than the zoom controls the view controls are not labeled.
BClick the red center on ruler button to place the ruler in the center
of the TMA Board.
BClick + to zoom in on the TMA Board view and to zoom out.
BClick the arrows to pan the view on the TMA Board.
Kilo Solution Area

The TMA SOLUTION area in the lower right of the station displays the
current solution in use by the Fire Control system for the selected contact.
There is no user interaction in the TMA SOLUTION area. These fields
display zeros until you have clicked ENTER SOLUTION in the TMA
Solution Input Area.
BTo change the solution in use by the system for the selected
contact, alter the ruler to the desired position on the TMA board or
enter numbers directly into the trial solution area fields, then click
the ENTER SOLUTION button again.
TMA
ON
R A DA R , A C TI VE S O N AR , V ISU AL C O N T AC T S
Contacts marked in Active Sonar, Radar and the Stadimeter appear as a

bearing/range pair on the TMA Board. The bearing line ends with a tiny
triangle positioned at the range of the contact. If the targets bearing and
range are known at two different times, as is the case with active sonar and
radar, the solution can be found by connecting dots and drawing a line with
the ruler for course and speed.
A UUV in active mode provides returns from the location of the UUV in TMA
and on the Nav and Fire Control maps.
9 Note: Marking a contact with the periscope does not provide an
automatic range. But using the Stadimeter to manipulate a photo of
the visual contact can provide you with a range that is fairly accurate.
See Kilo Stations/Periscope-Stadimeter Stations/Kilo Stadimeter
Stations. When visual or periscope contacts are referred to in this
section, it is assumed that you have determined a range for the
contact and marked it in the Stadimeter Station. The Periscope and
Stadimeter Stations work hand in glove.
To determine a target solution for Active Sonar, Periscope or

Radar Contacts:
1. Select a Contact ID from the SELECTED TRACK dropdown list.
Radar contacts have an R designation, visual contacts have a V
designation, active sonar contacts have an S designation the same as

passive sonar contacts.
A bearing line appears on the TMA board. A tiny triangle at the end of
the bearing line indicates the targets range at time the contact was
marked.
2. After a short interval return to the Active Sonar or Radar Station

(whichever you are using) and mark the contact again. (When ON
Radar Autocrew automatically marks contacts as long as the Radar is
radiating.)
BFor visual contacts, take another photo of the contact from the
periscope and manipulate it in Stadimeter, then mark the contact
again from the Stadimeter Station.
BContinue to mark the contact at two-minute intervals to accumulate
several bearing lines. Toggle back and forth between the TMA and
your chosen sensor.
3. Adjust the view on the TMA Board to get a clear view of the ruler and
the range triangle.
BMove the ruler to the location of the range triangle, click the red
button at the center of the display control arrows to center the ruler
in the TMA Board, and then click the zoom buttons to better adjust
the view. If you lose site of the ruler, zoom all the way out or click
the red center on ruler button again.
4. Drag the arrowhead or tail of the ruler to adjust the tick marks along the
bearing lines until the dots line up in the dot stack indicating a good
solution.
5. Click the ENTER SOLUTION button to send the trial solution to the Fire
Control system.
TMA
ON
P AS SI V E S O N AR
AND
ESM
C O NT A C TS
Determining a plausible solution is more complex when only a bearing is

known, as is the case with passive sonar and ESM contacts. It takes more
time and changes to Ownship course may be necessary to determine an
accurate solution.
Passive sonar contacts with assigned trackers are updated automatically on
the TMA board. ESM contacts must be updated manually by repeatedly
marking the contact at the ESM Station. Contacts detected by a UUV in
passive sonar mode are displayed on a LOB from the location of the UUV
on the TMA board and in the Nav and Fire Control maps.

1. Select a Contact ID from the SELECTED TRACK dropdown list. The
ruler appears at the default range of 10,000 yards on the most recent
LOB with the arrowhead facing Ownship (or the UUV sensor if it is a
UUV contact) with a default speed of 10 knots. These default values
appear in the trial solution fields directly to the right of the TMA board.
9 Note: No contacts appear in the drop-down lists if no contacts have
been designated. Link contacts do not appear in the TMA track list.
2. Adjust the ruler position to estimate the contact solution.

BPosition the end tick of the ruler on the oldest bearing line. (The
end tick is on the oldest bearing line when the bottom dot is on the
centerline of the dot stack.)
BClick the red button at the center of the view control arrows to
center the ruler in the TMA Board, and then click the zoom buttons
to better adjust the view.
BIf you lose site of the ruler, zoom all the way out or click the red
center on ruler button again.
9 Note: The circular ruler handle is only visible when the ruler contains
more than one tick mark or a speed of greater than 1 knot (kt) is set
in the Speed field in the trial solution area. You must zoom way in on
the ruler to see it at that speed. You can also set the speed to 10
knots or more temporarily. This will expand the ruler and reveal the
handle.
3. Enter any known data in the trial solution fields.

If you have additional data on the contacts range, or course, for
example from an intelligence message, enter it in the appropriate

solution field. If you have determined the contacts speed using
DEMON, enter that speed in the speed field. See Kilo Stations/Kilo
Sonar Suite/DEMON Sonar Station. Click the digits to cycle
through the values.
If you are sure about one aspect of the solution (e.g. range) enter
that value directly into the Range field then lock the field. That
keeps you from dragging the ruler to a different range.
BTo lock a field, click the red button associated with the field. Lock
buttons are located to the right of each trial solution label. These
buttons are lit when the field is locked.
Trial Solution Area
Trial Solution Fields
Lock field
Enter the solution into the ships

fire control system
4. Adjust the ruler on the display until the tick marks align well with the
contact bearing lines and the dots appear to line up along the
centerline of the dot stack.
BClick the handle in the middle of the ruler to drag the entire ruler.
BClick and drag on either end of the ruler to move just that end or to
adjust the length of the ruler.
5. When a good match between the tick marks, the bearing lines and the
dot stack has been achieved, click ENTER SOLUTION to send this
information to the Fire Control system. The system tracks the
estimated position of the contact based on this system solution and
uses that estimated location when targeting the contact.
The entered system solution displays in the SOLUTION panel at
the lower right of the TMA station. To update the contacts system
solution, adjust the ruler or directly input information in the trial

solution fields and click ENTER SOLUTION again.
6. Change Ownships course and/or speed to refine the TMA solution.

After steadying on the new course and/or speed, adjust the ruler to
achieve the best fit.
and/or speed (a contact zig.) Attempt to achieve a better fit of the
ruler by disregarding some of the earlier bearing lines and looking
only at recent bearings.
Merging, Splitting and Dropping Contacts

If the same contact is tracked by more than one sensor (e.g., a contact
tracked by passive sonar and radar), the data can be merged into a
master contact. (Master contacts have alphanumeric designations that
begin with the letter M.) This can be very useful if you have a good range
from one sensor (radar or active sonar) and a good bearing history from
another (passive sonar).
1. Click the SELECTED TRACK drop-down and select the one of the
contacts to be merged.
2. From the MERGED TRACK drop-down select the track to be merged

with the contact selected in the SELECTED TRACK drop-down list.
3. Click the MERGE button.

BTo undo a merge, select the master contact (e.g. M01) from the
SELECTED TRACK drop-down list and click the SPLIT button.
BTo drop the selected contact altogether, click the DROP button.
Dropping a contact cannot be undone.
9 Note: If the TMA Autocrew is activated, he does everything for you.
You can make no TMA inputs yourself. For more information on see
Kilo Stations/Kilo Autocrew/TMA Autocrew at the end of this section.
TMA
ON
In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters all controllable submarines can carry

Unmanned Underwater Vehicles (UUVs). These UUVs have sonar
capabilities only and cannot launch weapons. For information on launching
UUVs see Kilo Stations/Kilo Fire Control Suite/Deploying And Wire-Guiding
UUVs.
The lines of bearing for contacts detected by a UUV are drawn from the
location of the UUV at the time of the report, not from Ownships location.
TMA on UUV contacts is performed as for any other sonar contact in active
or passive mode.
P ERISCOPE -S TADIM ETER S TATIONS [F8]

The Kilo Periscope Station in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters merges the
functionality of the Periscope with that of the Stadimeter and also provides
access to the High-Frequency Sonar Display, which is useful for navigating
minefields.
The Stadimeter is only accessible from the Periscope Station.
BClick the Stadimeter icon button to the right of the mast switch to
move to the Stadimeter Station.
BClick the transition button at the top of the screen to move to the
High-Frequency Sonar Display.
Raise and Lower Periscope Mast
To Stadimeter Station
To High-Frequency Sonar Display
D ET EC TI N G C O N T AC T S
WITH THE
P ER ISC O PE
1. Ensure the ship is at periscope depth (19 m) or shallower and at 10

knots or less if the sail is submerged.
2. Click on the right side of the RAISE switch to raise the periscope.
3. Rotate the periscope to look for contacts. Click the grey arrows on the
left and right periscope handles, or click and drag in the periscope view
to rotate the periscope 360.
4. Make use of the periscopes ESM sensor as you rotate the scope. This
sensor can alert you to the presence of a contact before you can see it
in the periscope view. The ESM indicator light flashes when a radar
emitter is detected. The intensity of the associated sound is an
indication of the strength of the signal.
5. Zoom and adjust your view. Center the view on the contact of interest.
Zoom in and adjust the elevation as needed.
BClick the upper half of the Zoom crank to zoom in. Click the lower
half of the crank to zoom out.
BClick the upper half of the Elevation crank to lower the elevation.
Click the lower half to raise it.
6. With a contact centered in the periscope reticule click MARK to assign

it an alphanumeric designation and send the bearing information for the
visual sighting to the Target Motion Analysis station and the Nav Map.
Visual contacts have a V designation. (V01, V02 etc.)
7. Center the contact in the middle of the periscope view. Align the
horizontal line with the waterline before you take the picture. Click the
PHOTO button to send a photo of the contact to the Stadimeter.
K IL O S T A DI M E T E R S T A TI O N
The Stadimeter Station is accessible only from the Periscope Station by
clicking the Stadimeter icon button. The Stadimeter is used to manipulate a
photo of a contact taken through the periscope to determine the contacts
range. The Stadimeter can also be used to compare the photo to the ships
database of ship silhouettes to determine its class and course.
Click and drag to manipulate photo
Class of Silhouette
To Periscope Station
Determining Course with Stadimeter

1. Take a photo of a contact in the Periscope Station [F9].
2. Click the Stadimeter button to the right of the Periscope mast switch.
When the Stadimeter Station appears, the last photo taken through the
periscope appears in the upper window.

Names of ship classes that are close in length to the photographed
contact are can be selected one at a time and their silhouettes viewed
and rotated in the Silhouette Window.
3. Click the right and left facing arrows on either side of the COUNTRY
and CLASSIFICATION fields to display ship silhouettes for classes of
similar length in the lower window. When a match is determined, leave

the selected name in the CLASSIFICATION field.
4. Rotate the silhouette by clicking the A.O.B. arrow buttons to closely

match the aspect of the ship in the photo to help match the silhouette
to the photo. Matching the aspect provides the Angle on the Bow
(AOB) needed to determine the contacts course. Course is a piece of
information needed in developing a firing solution in TMA.
5. Determine the reciprocal of the bearing to the contact shown in the

Bearing readout. (If the value in the bearing readout is 0 to 180, add
180. If the value in the Bearing readout is 180 to 360 subtract 180.
6. If the contact has a port aspect, add the number in the AOB window to
the reciprocal. If the contact has a starboard aspect, subtract the
number in the AOB window from the reciprocal.
7. If the resulting number is greater than zero and less than 360, this
number is a good approximation of the course of the contact.
If the number is greater that 360, subtract 360. The resulting number
is a good approximation of the contacts course.

If the number is less than zero, add 360 to it. The resulting number is a
good approximation of the contacts course. Enter that number in the

Course field in TMA when this contact is selected.
Determining Class/Range with Stadimeter

1. Click the Country arrows to select the desired Country.
2. Click the arrows on either side of the CLASSIFICATION field to cycle
through possible class matches in the selected countrys order of
battle. A 3-D silhouette of the selected ship class appears in the
Silhouette window.
3. Rotate the silhouette model by clicking the A.O.B. arrows. Click the
Zoom buttons to alter the size of the silhouette in the window. When a
match is determined, leave the selected name in the
CLASSIFICATION field.
4. Click the side of the photo containing the contacts highest mast and
drag that side of the photo such that the top of the highest mast is even
with the waterline on the other half of the photo. The estimated range
to the ship is displayed in the Range readout.
5. Click MARK. This sends the contacts bearing and range to TMA and
the Nav Map.
The class name showing in the Stadimeter CLASSIFICATION field
when the contact was marked is assigned to the contact.

9 Note: The photo must be manipulated to determine the contacts
range before the contact is marked in Stadimeter or no contact is
created on the Nav Map and no range is sent to TMA.
6. Click the Periscope icon button to return to the Periscope Station.

9 Note: The Kilo High-Frequency Sonar Display is accessed via the

screen transition button at the top of the screen. See Kilo
Stations/Kilo Sonar Suite/Active Sonar Station/Kilo High Frequency
Active Sonar for information on using the HFAS to navigate
minefields.
K ILO S AIL B RIDGE (SAM L AUNCHER ) [F9]

The Sail Bridge is only accessible when the Kilo is surfaced. The Sail
Bridge provides three views: Free Look, Shoulder Mounted SAM Launcher
and Binoculars.
BClick the desired icon button to switch to that mode.
SAM Launcher
Free Look
Binoculars
Free Look: The default view in the Sail Bridge provides a 360q naked-eye
view of the area. Click and drag to pan the view.
Binoculars: Zoom to 8X by clicking the thumb wheel at the top of the
screen. Click and drag to pan the view. VISUAL mode is selected by
default. LLTV mode is available for night vision.
SAM Launcher: The Kilos carry either an SA-N-5 Grail Launcher or an SAN-8 Gremlin SAM launcher to attack helicopters and low flying airplanes.
The SAM launcher view provides a first-person shooter aspect to engage
aircraft within range:
SA-N-5 Grail: Max Range: 4.4 km (2.4 nm); Max Altitude: 7,800 ft (2,377 m)
SA-N-8 Gremlin: Max Range: 4.7 km (2.5 nm); Max Altitude: 11,500 ft
(3,505 m)
L AU NC H I N G S U R F AC E
TO
AIR MISSILES
1. Surface the ship.

2. Press [F9] to access the Sail Bridge. This button is not enabled until
the ship is on the surface or the sail is mostly exposed.
3. Click the SAM Launcher icon button.

4. Click and drag in the view to position the reticule on the target.
5. The interior Target Indicator bars turn red when there is a valid target
centered in the reticule. Right-click to fire the weapon. It automatically
reloads.
9 Note: If you submerge the ship or heavy seas submerge the sail for
long periods of time, the view moves to the Nav Map. The Sail
Bridge is not accessible until the ship resurfaces.
K ILO A UTOCREW
The Kilo has five Autocrew who perform parts of or all tasks at given
stations. The Autocrew available on the Kilo are described below.
K IL O B R O AD B AN D /N AR R O W B A N D S O N AR A U T OC R E W
When ON, the Broadband/Narrowband Autocrew searches Narrowband for
contacts. Because they share trackers, contacts marked in Narrowband
also display in Broadband. He also assigns trackers, classifies all marked
contacts in Narrowband and assigns a Low, Medium, or High level of
confidence in his classification. The level of confidence displays in the
Navigation Stations DDI and above the 3D model when that contact is
selected.
Low level of Confidence: Crewman has narrowed the possible
classes to 4 or more and picks one at random.
Medium Level of Confidence: Crewman has narrowed the possible
classes to 2 or 3 and picks one at random.
High Level of Confidence: Crewman has narrowed the possible
classes to one.
When the Broadband/Narrowband Autocrew is ON you can still mark
contacts yourself and select different arrays and contacts for the crewman
to analyze.
On the Nav Map: Each contact marked by your Sonar Auto Crewman
appears on the Nav Map as a colored line of bearing ending with a

symbol. This is usually the symbol for Unknown
(platform/category)/Unknown (ID) and is accompanied by its contact
designation number (S01, S02, etc). As soon as your Sonar Auto
Crewman has classified the contact, the symbol changes to that of the
specified class. (See Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/NTDS
Symbols.) Clicking on the contact designation displays information
about the class in the DDI and the 3D model of that class appears in
the 3D view surrounded by a bounding yellow bounding box and a level
of confidence bar.
Your task: Your Sonar Auto Crewman can classify a contact as a
specific class, but he cannot determine its ID (alliance). You must do

that yourself on the Nav Map.
BOn the Nav Map, right-click the contacts symbol to display the
Contact Menu.
BSelect Designate Category/ID>ID and drag your cursor to select
the presumed alliance ID for the contact.
K IL O S O N A R A C TI V E I NT ERC E PT A U T OC R E W
When ON this Autocrew marks all contacts detected in Active Intercept.
You have no additional responsibilities in this station when Active Intercept
Autocrew is on. The Autocrew does not prevent you from marking contacts.
R A D AR A U TOC R E W
You must raise and lower the radar mast. When ON, your Radar Auto
Crewman performs the following task as long as the radar is on:
Marks contacts and re-marks them every minute that the contact can
be detected. Contact range and bearing is sent to TMA and is reported

on the Nav screen DDI when that contact is selected.
9 Note: The Radar Auto Crewman is not speedy. It takes a minute or
two before he begins to mark contacts. When Radar Autocrew is ON,
you cannot move the Radar cursor.
F I R E C O N TR OL A U T O C R E W M A N
When ON the Fire Control Autocrew performs the following duties:
Uses information sent from the TMA station to establish presets for the
selected weapon that are appropriate for the designated target.

Your Task: It is still your responsibility to select a target, assign a tube,
and fire the weapon from the Fire Control Launch Panel or by using the
Contact Menus Engage With command from the Nav Map. Your Fire
Control Autocrew uses the contacts classification when determining
presets. If you classify a contact as a surface ship when in actuality it is
a submarine, your Auto Crewman enters presets appropriate for a
surface ship.
9 Note: When the Fire Control Autocrew is ON you can set only
Snapshot bearings and place waypoints in the presets. All other
presets are greyed out.
K IL O TMA A U TOC R E W
Accurate TMA takes time. Your TMA Auto Crewman requires data from
several sensors and/or a change in Ownships course to generate an
accurate firing solution. When ON, the TMA Autocrew performs the
following duties:
Uses information reported from all sensors to determine a firing
solution. This solution is his best estimate of the course, bearing, range
and speed of a contact.
Merges contacts that represent the same track reported by different
sensors.
Keeps track of the movement of each contact and updates the solution
on the Nav and Fire Control Maps with every new sensor input. The
solution is updated immediately with his best guess whenever a
contact is selected from the drop-down list in the TMA station.
Once the Autocrew enters a solution for a contact, the contact then
appears as a symbol on the Nav Map at the designated range and

bearing and the solution is also sent to Fire Control for use in targeting.
The symbol for Unknown (platform category)/Unknown (ID) is
displayed until you or the Sonar Auto Crewman classifies it.
The Nav Map symbol for the contact moves on the map according to
the course and speed set in the solution.

9 Note: When TMA Autocrew is on, you can select specific contacts to
view on the TMA board, but you are not able to manipulate the ruler
or the settings.

6(&7,21
$.8/$67$7,216
11-1
11: AKULA STATIONS

AKULA TASK BAR
AKULA STATIONS MENU
AKULA ORDERS MENU
DAMAGE REPORT W INDOW
HISTORY W INDOW
MANEUVER SHORTCUTS AND GAME READOUTS
TIME COMPRESSION SCALE
AKULA SHIP CONTROL STATION [F1]
AKULA SONAR SUITE [F2]
AKULA BROADBAND SONAR STATION
Akula Broadband Circular SSAZ Display
Assigning Trackers
Towed Array Contacts
Akula Broadband Station Components
AKULA NARROWBAND SONAR
Akula Narrowband Display
Selection Overlay
Designating Contacts in Narrowband Sonar
Classifying Contacts in Narrowband
Akula Narrowband Station Components
AKULA DEMON SONAR STATION
Using DEMON to Calculate Speed
AKULA ACTIVE SONAR STATION
Akula High Frequency Active Sonar (HFAS)
AKULA ACTIVE INTERCEPT SONAR STATION
AKULA SSP SONAR STATION
AKULA UUV SONAR
AKULA RADAR STATION [F3]
MARKING CONTACTS WITH RADAR
AKULA RADIO-ESM STATION [F4]
ELECTRONIC SUPPORT MEASURES (ESM)
Detecting/Classifying Contacts with ESM
RADIO ROOM
AKULA NAVIGATION STATION [F5]
AKULA OWNSHIP AND ORDERS MENUS
AKULA CONTACT MENU
AKULA FIRE CONTROL SUITE [F6]
AKULA FIRE CONTROL TARGET DISPLAY
Fire Control Map
11-5
11-5
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-7
11-7
11-8
11-8
11-10
11-10
11-11
11-12
11-12
11-13
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-15
11-15
11-16
11-17
11-17
11-18
11-19
11-19
11-21
11-22
11-23
11-23
11-24
11-24
11-24
11-25
11-25
11-25
11-26
11-26
11-28
11-29
11-29
11-29
11-30
11-30
11-31
11-31
11-2

AKULA FIRE CONTROL LAUNCH PANEL
TARGETING SEA CONTACTS
ATTACKING LAND TARGETS
LAYING A MINEFIELD
DEPLOYING AND W IRE-GUIDING UUVS
Wire-Guiding/Enabling UUV Active Sonar
UUV Returns
AKULA W EAPON INVENTORY STATION
AKULA TACTICAL W EAPONS
STRATEGIC W EAPONS
Mines:
AKULA COUNTERMEASURES
AKULA W EAPON PRESETS
Land Attack Missile Presets
Mine Presets
Rocket Torpedo Presets
Torpedo Presets
UUV Presets
AKULA TMA STATION [F7]
AKULA TMA STATION COMPONENTS
Akula TMA Display
Akula Track Selection Area
Akula Trial Solution Area
Akula View Control Area
TMA Solution Area
TMA ON RADAR/ACTIVE SONAR/VISUAL CONTACTS
TMA ON PASSIVE SONAR AND ESM CONTACTS
TMA ON UUV SENSOR CONTACTS
AKULA PERISCOPE-STADIMETER STATIONS [F8]
DETECTING CONTACTS WITH THE PERISCOPE
AKULA STADIMETER STATION [F8]
Determining Class/Range with the Stadimeter
AKULA UNDER ICE DISPLAY [F8]
Signal Strength Indicator Lights
High Frequency Active Sonar (HFAS)
To Surface and Submerge Under the Ice
AKULA SAIL BRIDGE (SAM LAUNCHER) [F9]
LAUNCHING SURFACE TO AIR MISSILES
AKULA AUTOCREW
11-32
11-32
11-33
11-33
11-34
11-34
11-35
11-36
11-36
11-37
11-37
11-38
11-38
11-39
11-39
11-41
11-41
11-41
11-41
11-41
11-42
11-42
11-42
11-42
11-43
11-43
11-43
11-44
11-44
11-46
11-47
11-47
11-48
11-48
11-49
11-51
11-52
11-52
11-53
11-54
11-54
11-55
11-56
11-56
11-56
11-57
11-57
11-58
11-3
AKULA BROADBAND/NARROWBAND AUTOCREW

AKULA SONAR ACTIVE INTERCEPT AUTOCREW
RADAR AUTOCREW
AKULA FIRE CONTROL AUTOCREW
AKULA TMA AUTOCREW
11-58
11-59
11-59
11-59
11-59
11-4
11: AKULA STATIONS

All Akulas regardless of country or version have the same stations and
station functionality in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters. The Akulas differ in
noise generation and in weapons loadout. Both the Akula-I Improved and
the Akula-IIs are referred to in this manual as Akula.
information unique to the Akula is contained in the abbreviated Akula
A KULA T ASK B AR
cosmetic. The Akula Task Bar appears below.
Stations Menu
Damage Report
Orders Menu
Course Shortcut
Depth Below Keel
OS Depth
Speed Shortcut

Time Acceleration
A K U L A S T A TI O NS M E N U
icon to jump to that station or use the appropriate function key.
Ship Control [F1]
Sonar Suite [F2]
Radar [F3]
Radio-ESM [F4]
Nav [F5]
TMA [F7]

11-5
A K U L A O R DE R S M E NU
Navigate: Select various navigation orders.
Set Depth: Displays a menu orders of depth shortcuts
Surface: Orders a normal surfacing of the sub.
Go to PD: Orders OS to Periscope Depth (20 meters).
Go Shallow: Orders a depth of 51 meters.
Go Deep: Orders a depth of 442 meters.
Go to Snorkel Depth: Orders a depth of 18 meters.
Change Speed: Change Speed: Displays a submenu of engine order
shortcuts. Given no strong currents in the area, selecting one of the
following commands results in the indicated speed:
All Ahead Flank: Maximum speed for platform (Max submerged
speed: Akula-I Improved: 33 knots; Akula-II 35 knots)
All Ahead Full: 20 knots.
Ahead 1/3: 5 knots.
All Stop: Orders OS to a full stop.
All Back Full: 12 knots in reverse.
Arrays/Wires: Displays a submenu permitting you stream, retrieve or stop
the winch deploying the Towed Array and the Floating Wire.
speeds for extending each mast while submerged. The Snorkel Mast is only
available when at snorkel depth (18 meters) or shallower. Raising the mast
initiates ventilation. The ventilation process is secured from this menu or
from the Ship Control Station via the VENT button, automatically lowering
the mast.
toggles its state. A checkmark indicates that the Autocrew is ON. See Akula
Stations/Akula Autocrew for a full description of Autocrew functionality.
in a tube and ready to shoot. Weapons are loaded in the Fire Control
Launch Panel and presets determined in the Fire Control Target Display.
11-6

Orders Menu a depth of shallow (30 meters) or deep (244 meters) can be
selected.
AND
DEPTH: Keel depth reported in meters. Click/right-click digits to order a

depth change.
KEEL: Readout of the depth of water below the keel in meters.
COURSE: Current course in degrees. Click/right-click digits to enter a
new course.
currents are strong. Currents can be turned off/on in the
word PAUSED.
11-7
bar.

A KULA S HIP C ONTROL S TATION [F1]

The Akulas Ship Control Station features are described below.
AIR REMAINING: Indicates the charge level in the high-pressure air banks.
AIR: CHARGE: Initiates a charge of the high-pressure air banks. The
charge can be increased by only 10% when the ship is submerged. You
must ventilate to fully charge the banks. A minimum charge level of 50% is
necessary to successfully launch weapons.
BClick the CHARGE button to commence charging the air banks. A
red light surrounding the button indicates the charge is in progress.
Click again to secure the charge.
AIR: VENT: (Ventilate) In order to fully charge the high-pressure air banks
you must be at snorkel depth (18 meters) or shallower and ventilating as
well as charging.
BOnce at snorkel depth, click the VENT button. The button is ringed
in red when ventilating is in progress. Click the VENT button again
to secure ventilation. The snorkel mast lowers automatically.
TRIM ANGLE: Indicates the trim angle of the ship measured from a
horizontal axis. A positive trim angle indicates that the ship has a bow-up
attitude. A negative trim angle indicates a bow-down attitude. Your
helmsman automatically controls the trim angle whenever you order a depth
change.
11-8
TOWED ARRAY: The Akula has one towed sonar array. The length of the
array currently deployed is displayed in the LENGTH readout. The Akulas
towed array is fully deployed at 304 meters (approximately 1000 feet).
BClick STREAM to deploy the towed array. Click OFF to stop
streaming. Click RETRIEVE to retrieve the towed array.
MBT VENTS: When on the surface, click OPEN to open the main ballast
tank vents and submerge the ship. The vents close automatically once the
ship is submerged and cannot be opened again until the ship has
resurfaced.
9 Note: The sub dives/surfaces automatically when an appropriate
depth change is ordered by means of the taskbar depth shortcut, the
ORDERED DEPTH window from the Ship Control Station, or by
means of an Orders Menu Navigate>Set Depth option. It is not
necessary to manually open the MBT Vents.
COURSE: On this Course Indicator, the red needle indicates current
course. The grey needle indicates ordered course.
BClick the desired heading on the Course Indicator to order that
course.
ENGINE ORDER: The Engine Order Telegraph orders engine speed. See
Akula Stations/Task Bar/Orders Menu for more information. Flank
(maximum) speed for the Improved Akula-I is modeled at 33 knots. Flank
Speed for the Akula-II is modeled at 35 knots.
BClick the desired option to order that Engine Speed.
DEPTH: Actual and ordered depth is shown here in meters.
BRight/left click the digits in the ORDERED field to order a new
depth.
SPEED: Actual and ordered speed is shown here in knots.
BRight/left click the digits in the ORDERED field to order a new
speed.
PLANES: The bow and stern planes and the rudder move automatically
when you change depth but you can control the Rudder if you so desire.
change. The grey needle indicates the ordered rudder position.
Orange the actual position.
BClick 0 in the Rudder indicator or click in the Course indicator to
reset the rudder.
9 Note: The ship will eventually turn in a circle if you do not reset the
SOUNDING: This readout shows the depth under the keel in meters.
11-9
EMERGENCY BLOW: Blows high-pressure air into your ballast tanks to

emergency surface your ship. Remember to recharge your air banks
following an Emergency Blow.
A KULA S ONAR S UIT E [F2]

the sonar stations.
detect, identify, track, and localize contacts by employing either active or
Speed Profile (SSP). All six stations are explained in this section. For
information about UUV (Unmanned Underwater Vehicle) sensors and their
use see Akula Stations/Akula Fire Control Suite/Deploying and WireGuiding UUVs.
On all sonar stations six buttons are always visible and permit you to
navigate between Sonar Stations.
Broadband
Narrowband
DEMON
Active Sonar
Active Intercept
A K U L A B R O AD B AN D S O N AR S T A TI O N
The Broadband Sonar Station displays input from the cylindrical bow,
conformal and towed arrays. These inputs are used to detect and track
submarines and surface ships. Here trackers can be assigned to contacts
and they are given an alphanumeric Contact Designation or ID. Contact IDs
for all sonar contacts begin with the letter S. Trackers provide the TMA
station with updates on the contacts bearing at specified time intervals.
Section 11: Akula Stations 11-10
9 Note: UUV sonar contacts also have Sierra (S) designations, but
their data are not reported in the Sonar Suite. UUV returns are
available in TMA and on the Nav and Fire Control maps.
Akula Broadband Circular SSAZ Display

The broadband display in the Akula is circular and represents Signal
Strength versus Azimuth (SSAZ). The SSAZ display consists of concentric
bands extending from an inner circle. Each band represents data from a
different ship sensor.
Bearing Indicator
Selected Array
Cursor
Ownship Indicator/Stern Cursor
Akula SSAZ Display

Data from three sensors are reported on the Akulas SAZZ display. The
innermost band, displays contacts detected on the conformal array. The
second, or middle band, displays towed array contacts while the outermost
band displays contacts on the cylindrical array.
9 Note: In the Akulas the towed array must be deployed before any
contacts can appear in the Towed Array band on the SSAZ Display.
The 360-degree Bearing Indicator rims the outer edge of the Circular
Display. A narrow jagged ring near the inner edge of each band indicates
background noise on that sensor. Contacts on the arrays appear as spikes
emerging from the background noise at a specific bearing and extending
toward the outer edge of the band; the stronger the signal, the taller the
spike.
Clicking inside a specific band selects that array. The outer edge of that
band brightens and enlarges slightly indicating that the band and the array it
displays are selected and the name of the selected array appears in the
Array window.
On the SSAZ Display, a thin line extending from the center to the outer
edge represents Ownship. The line ends with an arrow indicating the
direction Ownships stern is pointing.
Each sensor display has its own cursor. A cursor appears as a short line
extending into the array from each arrays outer edge. Click inside the array
to move the cursor to that location on that arrays bearing indicator or click
the cursor and drag it to a new location. The cursor is used to identify the
contact you want to mark.
Ship speed greatly interferes with the ability of the Akulas sensors to detect
and display contacts. Excessive speed results in the inability to detect any
contacts at all. Only background noise is visible and that appears as a thick,
jagged band at the outer edges of each array.
Assigning Trackers
1. Click inside the desired circle to select that array. Outer ring: Cylindrical
array, Middle ring: Towed array, Inner ring: Conformal array.
2. Click the desired contact spike. A vertical cursor appears on the

bearing indicator. You can click and drag this cursor along the bearing
indicator.
3. Click a spike extending toward the outer edge of the selected array.
4. Click TRACK ASSIGN to designate the target and assign a tracker. (If
the signal is faint, you may have to click more than once.)
A tracker letter is placed below the spike. Four trackers are available
for each sonar array.

A, B, C, and D: Assigned to Cylindrical contacts.
E, F, G, and H: Assigned to Conformal contacts.
I, J, K, and L: Assigned to Towed array contacts.
If the cylindrical array already has four contacts assigned to trackers
(A-D) and you designate a new contact, the oldest tracker is

unassigned from its current contact and reassigned to the new contact.
This is also true for the hull and towed arrays. To unassign a specific
tracker, click on the letter and drag it into the Display and release it.
(This can be tricky.)

Unless the towed array is deployed no contacts appear in the Towed Array
Display. Towed array contacts do not appear immediately when the array is
deployed. If the towed array is not already deployed at mission start, stream
it from the Ship Control Station [F1] or from the Task Bars Orders Menu
using the Arrays/Wires option.
Because of the physics of the towed array construction, an ambiguous
contact, a mirror image of each true contact, appears on the display along
with the true contact. If you have a contact at a bearing on your bow array,
you can be fairly certain a contact at the same or nearly the same bearing
on your towed array display is on the contacts actual bearing.
If the contact is not visible on another array, changing the course of
Ownship allows you to determine which bearing is the actual and which is
its mirror image on the display. After you maneuver, one contact remains at
a consistent bearing and one appears to move in the display. The contacts
actual bearing is that of the contact that remains constant.
9 Note: Be aware that when you turn Ownship your towed array does
not begin to turn until it reaches the point in the ocean where the ship
began its turn. As a result, Ownship appears as a contact on the
towed array during turns.
Akula Broadband Station Components

The buttons, fields and other components of the Akula broadband station
BROADBAND DISPLAY: This circular Signal Strength versus Azimuth
display (SSAZ) shows contacts from the Akulas cylindrical, towed and
conformal arrays and allows for marking these contacts. See Akula
Stations/Akula Sonar Suite/Akula Broadband Circular SSAZ Display for a
description of the display and information on assigning trackers in this
display.
AUDIO: Toggles Contact Sound ON and OFF. When ON placing the cursor
on a contact in the SSAZ display emits only the sound generated by that
contact. Defaults to ON.
TRACKER: Displays the tracker letter for a contact selected on the display
if it has a tracker assigned or for the contact selected when CYCLE
CONTACTS is clicked.
CURSOR BEARING: Displays the bearing at the cursor location or the
bearing of a tracked contact when CYCLE CONTACTS is clicked.
SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO: Displays the SNR at the location of the cursor.
CYCLE CONTACTS: Click this button repeatedly to cycle through all
assigned trackers in the selected array. Information on the selected tracker
displays at the left of the screen in the Tracker, Cursor Bearing and Signal
to Noise fields as well as in the Track ID field below the SSAZ display.
ARRAY: Displays the name of the array selected in the SSAZ display.
TRACK ID: Displays the Track ID of the contact at the location of the cursor
if it has been assigned an ID or the ID of the tracker selected when Cycle
Contacts is clicked.
ASSIGN TRACK: When the cursor is on a contact in the selected array,
click this button to assign a tracker to the contact and send all sonar
information to TMA.
Sonar Navigation Slider: Click the appropriate icon to move the slider and
switch your view to that Sonar Station.
A K U L A N AR R OW B A ND S O NA R
function is used to classify sonar contacts by comparing the frequency
signatures. The ships computer narrows your search by presenting only
those signatures that have similarities to the signature of the selected
contact.
Akula Narrowband Display

The Akulas Narrowband Display is a Frequency vs. Azimuth (FRAZ)
display. Lines seen on the FRAZ display represent signals received at given
frequencies and bearings. Signals centered on a specific bearing are
contacts. These can be selected with the Selection Overlay. The distance
from the center of the display represents the frequency of the signal. The
length of each line represents the bearings at which the same frequency
signal is received. This length corresponds to the width of the base of a
peak on the broadband display.
Selection Overlay
The Selection Overlay wedge acts as a cursor for selecting and designating
contacts and for displaying the sound signature profiles of ships or weapons
with similar signatures. An imaginary line through the exact center of the
wedge is the precise bearing indicator and its position on the circular
display is seen in the OVERLAY BEARING window.
The Selection Overlay is divided into thee parts or wedges. The center
wedge is used to select contacts.
BClick on a signal dot or line to select it. Clicking on a contact or any
part of the FRAZ display centers the Selection Overlay on that
contact or position.
When a contact is selected, the outer wedges display the sound signature
for whatever ship class or weapon is selected in the Classification window.
When no contact is selected nothing appears in the outer wedges.
Sound Signature for class in CLASSIFICATION window
Selection Overlay
Class of the Sonar Signature seen in Overlay
Designating Contacts in Narrowband Sonar

1. Select a contact by dragging the wedge shaped selection overlay and
positioning the center section over the contact. To move the overlay,
click the edge of the overlay and drag it to the desired location or
simply click on display surface.
2. Place your cursor on one of the selected contacts frequency lines

inside the wedge and click to select it.
3. Click Mark. You may have to click several times if the signal is weak. A
tracker letter appears near the frequency line and the contacts
alphanumeric track ID appears in the Track ID window when the
frequency line is selected. The contact information is sent to the TMA
screen, Nav map and the Fire Control Station.
Classifying Contacts in Narrowband

When a contact is selected, its sound signature displays in the center
wedge of the Selection Overlay and the sound signature profile of the ship
class named in the Classification window appears in the outer wedges of
the selection overlay.
1. Compare the frequency lines of the selected contact in the center to

that of the profile in the outer wedges.
2. Adjust the Frequency Scale Dial to see distinct ranges more clearly.
3. Click the left and right facing arrows next to the CLASSIFICATION
window to select other ship profiles for comparison.
4. Click FILTER to narrow the search to the most likely profiles. (A red
ring around the filter button indicates it is on.) . When the filter is on,
only ships or weapons that have a profile similar to that of the selected
contact are available. All platforms and weapons in the game are
available for review if the filter is off.
5. Click MARK. Note the Track ID of the selected contact in the TRACK
ID window.
6. On the Nav Map, select the symbol of the Track ID that you just
identified in Narrowband. In the DDI the class name visible in the
Narrowband CLASSIFICATION window is now assigned to the contact
and the NTDS symbol on the map is appropriate for that category of
platform. You must still assign an ID (Friendly, Hostile, etc.)
Akula Narrowband Station Components

The buttons and areas of the Akula Narrowband Station are described
briefly below.
NARROWBAND DISPLAY: Displays frequency signals at specific bearings
and the Selection overlay used to select and mark them.
CLASSIFICATION: The names of ship classes with sound frequency
profiles similar to that of the selected contact are presented one at a time in
this window. When a class name is selected here, its sound profile is
displayed on the outer wedges of the selection overlay when a contact is
selected on the circular display. See Selection Overlay above.
BClick the left and right facing arrows on either side of the
Classification window to cycle through the list of available profiles.
ARRAY SELECT: Selects the array signals to be displayed in the FRAZ
display. The cylindrical button is on by default and located on the bow of the
sub outline. The conformal button is in the middle of the outline and the
Towed Array button at the rear of the submarine outline.
BClick the desired rectangle to select that array. A raised ridge
appears around the rectangle of the selected array.
FREQ. SCALE: Frequency scale on the FRAZ display runs from the center
to the outer edge where the center is zero and the outer edge is whatever
scale is selected on the Frequency Scale selector dial.
BClick the desired number to switch to that frequency range in the
circular display. The dial moves to indicate the frequency selected.
CURSOR FREQ: Displays the frequency at the location of the cursor.
BClick the FRAZ display to see the frequency at that location in the
display in the Cursor Frequency window.
OVERLAY BEARING: Displays the bearing at the end of an imaginary line
drawn through the exact center of the Selection Overlay.
TRACK ID: Selecting a frequency line that has been assigned a tracker
displays the alphanumeric designation for that contact in this window.
A K U L A DEMON S O N AR S TA T IO N
used primarily to determine a contacts speed. This is important information
when establishing an accurate firing solution and once determined at the
DEMON Station the value can be entered in the speed field in the TMA trial
solution field.
represent sound generated by the contacts propellers.
Selected Tracker

field.

Broadband sonar.
3. In ARRAY SELECT click the desired sensor button in the submarine

outline. The button on the bow of the outline selects the Cylindrical
Array. The aft button selects the Towed Array. A raised ridge rims the
selected button.
4. Under DEMON DISPLAY click the round silver button associated with
the desired contact ID. A red ring around the button indicates that
button is selected.
5. If necessary, adjust the frequency to better view the signal. If the lines
in the display seem to blur together, switch to a lower frequency range.
If the lines run off the right edge of the display, increase the frequency
range. To adjust the frequency range, click the desired number on the
FREQ. SCALE Dial.
6. Determine the Turns Per Knot (TPK) for the known target. The TPK
information for all ships in the game can be found in the U.S. Naval
Institute Reference entry for the platform class.
7. Place the waterfall cursor over the line farthest left.

8. Click the + or - buttons in the Turns Per Knot panel to set the desired
value for the known contact. The speed of the target appears in the
Speed field below the buttons.
in the TMA field for the selected contact.

educated guess as to the category of the contact.
1. Select a sonar array as described above.

2. Select a sonar contact by clicking on a tracker button as described
above. Vertical lines appear in the waterfall. The first line on the left
indicates the shaft rotation speed. The other lines indicate individual
blades on the propeller.
Use the following criteria to help categorize the selected contact:

starting.
A K U L A A C T I VE S O NA R S T AT IO N
Waters models medium and high frequency active sonar for all classes of
Akulas.

The cylindrical array in active mode is used to detect and track contacts.
Echoes from a single ping or a series of pings are used to determine an
objects bearing and range. Information from a medium frequency active
search is sent to the TMA station for use in plotting a firing solution for the
given contact. While this information is very useful to you, it comes at a
price. Using active sonar gives away your bearing and alerts any ship in the
area to your presence. The ship may well assume you have hostile
intentions since active sonar is used primarily for targeting.
MF Active Sonar Display

In the Akulas circular display the area closest to the center represents
objects closest to your ship. The circle represents bearing. The screen
updates from the center out. Each subsequent ping replaces the oldest data
with the newest.
The area of blank space represents the area behind your ship, active sonar
baffles. Since the signals transmitted from your bow array cannot reach the
area behind your ship, no echoes are returned from that area.
Click to transmit. Click again to stop continuous transmission.
Active Sonar Contacts: Contacts appear as brighter spots on the active

display. A metallic ping is heard as each contact displays. The active
display shows a four-ping history, which is useful in detecting contacts with
weak signal strength.
The Bearing-Range Cursor: The cursor in the active display consists of a
circle attached to a vertical line that indicates a specific bearing. The
position of the vertical line on the Bearing Indicator represents the bearing
of the cursor The distance of the circular cursor from the center of the
display represents its range from Ownship.
To Mark a Contact with Active Sonar

1. Click the number of the desired range on the Range Scale (KM)
Selecting a new range halts continuous transmissions. You must
click transmit again to resume transmissions.
2. Select transmission mode: Single or Continuous pings. If Single is

selected, only one active sonar ping is transmitted. When Continuous
is chosen, active sonar pings are transmitted at a set interval until the
switch is reset to Single or you change the range scale.
3. Click TRANSMIT or TRANSMIT CONTINUOUS to send transmission s

of that type.
9 Note: To stop the transmission of continuous pings on any of the
submarines, click again on the TRANSMIT button.
A valid contact gives consistent visual returns that are brighter
than background noise or reverberations. The audio return will

have a distinctive metallic ring to it and will be distinguishable from
the background noise.
4. Click on a contact to select it with the Bearing-Range cursor or click

bearing display on the left side of the screen in the Range (M) and
Bearing windows. Range is in meters.
5. Click MARK to assign an alphanumeric Contact ID to the selected

contact. Once a selected contact has been marked, selecting it and
clicking MARK again sends an update of the contacts range and
bearing to TMA and the Nav Map. Contacts marked with Active Sonar
appear on the Nav Map on the detected bearing and at the detected
range at the end of a green line of bearing (LOB)
9 Note: The cylindrical array has only four trackers. If you have all four
trackers assigned in Broadband or Narrowband and designate a
target in Active Sonar, the oldest tracker is removed from a
Broadband or Narrowband contact for use in Active.
Akula High Frequency Active Sonar (HFAS)

your ship. Once a mine is located, maneuver quickly to avoid it by the
largest possible margin. Driving slowly will give you the best reaction time.
to find a safe route is to follow another ships path. HFAS is also useful for
avoiding dangerous ice ridges during under ice operations.
High Frequency Active Sonar Display

The Akulas High Frequency Active Sonar (HFAS) Display can only be
reached from the Periscope Station. The HFAS screen has two modes:
forward looking for traversing minefields and upward looking for under ice
missions. The Akulas HFAS has a range of 3500 yards.
To View and Mark Contacts with High Frequency Sonar:

1. Press [F8] or select the periscope icon button in the Stations Menu to
move to the Periscope Station.
2. Click the HFAS/Ice Display button to move to the HIGH FREQUENCY

Display.
HFAS / Ice Display Button
3. Click FORWARD LOOKING in the Alignment Panel. HFAS returns

from in front of the ship appear in the display screen. Click UPWARD
LOOKING to use sonar returns to judge ice thickness above your ship.
See Akula Stations/Akula Periscope-Stadimeter Stations/Akula Under
Ice Display.
Select Forward Looking for Mine Avoidance
Back to Periscope Station
4. Click the HFAS Display to place a marker on the Nav Map for all
contacts detected by the sensor. No contact IDs are assigned to HFAS
contacts and no information is sent to TMA. The marks appear on the
Nav Map are useful for navigating a minefield.
9 Note: For information on using the HFAS Display for Under Ice
Operations see Akula Stations/Periscope-Stadimeter Stations/Akula
Ice Display.
A K U L A A C T I VE I NT ER C E P T S O N A R S T AT I O N
The circular Active Intercept Display alerts you to when another ship, sub,
dipping sonar or sonobuoy is transmitting an active sonar ping. It provides
the bearing of the transmitting entity as well as the frequency of the
detected emission, the age of the last signal and the strength of the signal.
Knowing the signal strength can assist you in determining the relative
proximity of the active sonar source.
active intercept display on the bearing of the contact. The strength of the
signal is represented as a bank of colored lights directly below the display
that glow from green to red as the signal grows in strength.
In addition to the circular Active Intercept Display the Active Intercept
Station contains the following fields and buttons.
FREQUENCY (HZ): Displays the frequency of the intercepted signal.
(Active Sonar Frequencies for platforms and torpedoes as modeled in
S.C.S. Dangerous Waters can be found in the USNI Browser in the
SENSORS entry.)
BEARING (DEG): Displays the bearing of the intercepted signal.
INTERVAL (SEC): Displays the interval between the last two signals.
AGE (SEC): Displays the time in seconds since the last signal.
MARK: Assigned a Contact ID on the selected signal and sends the
bearing information to TMA. Each time MARK is clicked when the signal is
selected, the current bearing of that contact is sent to TMA, and the Nav
and Fire Control maps.
BClick the signal lines in the Active Intercept Display to select it,
then click MARK.
SIGNAL STRENGTH: Indicates the strength of the selected signal. Green
indicates a weaker signal, red a stronger one.
Active Intercept Display: A line from the center of the circular display to its
outer edge indicates the bearing of an intercepted signal. Thick lines
indicate strong contacts.
A K U L A SSP S O N AR S T AT I O N

the tablet when the SSP station is first entered.
display and the tablet when a new XBT is launched.

depth is noted at the bottom of the tablet.
BTo change the depth scale in use on the graph, click the desired
number in the Depth Scale Panel.
A K U L A UUV S O N AR
range to the contact. UUVs are particularly useful when navigating minefield
and can be operated in passive or active mode.
sonar contacts display on the Nav and Fire Control maps and in the TMA
station.
torpedoes from there. See Akula Stations/Akula Fire Control
Suite/Deploying and Wire-Guiding UUVs for complete information.
A KULA R ADAR S TAT ION [F3]

M AR K I N G
1. Ensure that Ownship is at Radar Depth (19 meters) or less and moving
at 8 knots or less if the sail is submerged. (This is shallower than
periscope depth.)
2. Click RAISE in the lower right of the station to raise the mast. The
READY light glows when the radar mast is extended and radiating.
3. Set Range Scale as desired and turn on Range Rings in the upper right
of the station if desired.
4. Contacts show up as brighter spots on the display. Click a contact to

select it with the Bearing-Range Cursor.
Nav Map.
9 Note: Radiating while the mast is submerged destroys the radar. Be
sure you are at 19 meters or less before raising the Radar mast.
A KULA R ADI O -ESM S TATION [F4]

In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters the ESM (Electronic Support Measures)
station and the Radio Room are combined. ESM allows you to detect and
classify contacts when submerged with your ESM mast extended above the
surface of the water. The radio is used to receive intelligence, tasking and
Link position updates while underway and send position and contact
updates to members of your Link.
E L E C TR O NI C S U PP OR T M E AS U R E S (ESM)
Because you must have your ESM mast exposed, you make your ship
computer analyzes the detected transmission and compares it to those in
its database thus providing the class of the transmitting platform.

1. Come to a depth of 19 meters or less and maintain a speed of 10 knots
or less if the sail is submerged before raising the ESM mast.
2. Click the ESM ANTENNA switch to the RAISE position to raise the
mast. When the triangular cursor appears in the ESM Display, the ESM
is in detection mode. Contacts appear as lines emanating from the
center of the display on a specific bearing.

and to view the source of the signal (The name of the detected emitter
appears in the SOURCE field.) The bearing to the contact appears in
a weaker signal, red a stronger one.)

alphanumeric contact ID to the contact and sends it to TMA and the
Nav Map. ESM contacts have E designations (E01, E02, etc.). Once
marked the Contact ID appears in front of the Emitter name in the
SOURCE field.

computer. This classification is based on platforms known to carry the
detected emitter shown in the SOURCE field. When the contact is
selected on the Nav Map the DDI will list that class name in the CLASS
field. You must still assign an ID (Hostile, Friendly, etc.) from the
Contact Menu on the Nav Map.
R A D I O R O OM
The right side of the ESM-Radio console represents the Radio Room. Here
messages containing important intelligence and tasking information are
received and contact positions are downloaded from any platforms in the
area that are part of your Link network. (A Link network is modeled for all
controllable platforms in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters. Any platforms on your
current Ownside are part of your Link.)
there are Ownside platforms in your area follow the steps below. When Link
information is downloaded, any surface or air Link participants and any
contacts they have detected appear on the Nav Map. You may never see
the symbol for any submerged Link participant that is in the mission since
he must be at comms depth with his mast extended for you to see him.

To receive messages you must come to communications depth (comms
depth) and raise the radio mast or stream the floating wire antenna. There
are advantages and disadvantages to both modes. The radio mast receives
messages more quickly but exposing the mast leaves you vulnerable to
detection. The floating wire receives messages far more slowly but you do
not need to expose a mast to receive messages.
Radio Mast: Take the ship to 20 meters or shallower and set ship
speed to 10 knots or less when the sail is submerged to avoid
damaging the mast when it is raised. When the depth and speed
prerequisites are met, click RAISE under Radio Antenna to extend the
radio mast.
Streaming Wire: You do not have to come to periscope depth but it
helps to be fairly near the surface. Set ships speed to 18 knots or less
to avoid damaging the wire. Slower speeds allow the wire to float up
more quickly. If speed exceeds 5 knots, the wire may never reach the

3. Look at the Nav Map if you are waiting for Link data to determine when

data.
depth and speed.

controlled by other players do not share data across the link automatically
updates, you must also come to Communications Depth (Comms depth)
and raise the Radio antenna before you can to promote your contacts to the
Link.
1. Come to Comms Depth (20 meters) and raise the radio antenna. Do
not exceed 10 knots while the sail is submerged or the mast will break.
3. If possible determine an accurate firing solution and enter it at the TMA

station.
The contacts symbol appears on the Nav Map of any players in a
promoted as unknown. See Navigation Station/2D Navigation
Map/Contact Menu/Promoting a Contact to Link for full information on
promoting a contact to Link.
A KULA N AVIGATI ON S TATION [F5]

regardless of controllable platform and is covered only once in this manual.
See Navigation Station.
The Navigation Station section covers how to play from the Nav, what is
seen on the Nav Map and the 3D View and information on NTDS symbols
and colors as well as what is seen when various filters are applied.
A K U L A O W N SH I P
AND
O R DE R S M E NU S
Map to select it, then right-click on the Ownship symbol. The majority of the
Akulas Ownship Menu items are identical to those in the Task Bar Orders
Menu. See Akula Stations/Akula Task Bar/Orders Menu. The rest of the
Ownship Options require the use of the Nav Map. These are the same from
platform to platform and are described in Navigation Station/2D Navigation
Map/Ownship Menu.
A K U L A C O N T AC T M E NU
NTDS symbol. Most menu items are the same from platform to platform and
these are covered in Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Contact Menu.
Engage With: The weapons that appear in the Akulas Engage With option
are found in Akula Stations/Akula Fire Control Suite/Akula Tactical
Weapons and the Akula Strategic Weapons. Only weapons appropriate to
the selected target are available. Others are greyed out.
the game.
Deploy DSRV: Select this option to deploy the Deep Submergence
Rescue Vehicle to the selected contact. This option is only selectable
when the following conditions are met:
The DSRV is present on the Subs hull. (The DSRV is only

The selected contact is a submerged submarine

depth requirements are met. It is available only in the Contact Menu
under these conditions:
(Category: Stationary) such as a building or the floating Oil Rig)

Ownship is traveling at periscope depth or less and at 3 knots or
less.
A KULA F IRE C ONT ROL S UITE [F6]

The Akulas Fire Control Suite consists of three stations: the Target Display,
the Launch Panel and the Weapons Inventory. These stations are reached
by clicking one of the navigation buttons at the bottom right of the Akulas
Fire Control Stations. Target Display is seen as default at game start.
Launch Panel
Target Display
Weapons Inventory
A K U L A F I R E C ON TR OL T AR GE T D I S P L A Y
The Akula Target Display consists of the Fire Control Map, the Target
areas are described here.. See Akula Stations/Akula Fire Control Launch
Panel /Basic Launch Procedures for information on how to use the displays
and panels to launch weapons, mines and countermeasures.
Fire Control Map
Map Control Panel
Fire Control Map

Link contacts symbols also appear. The TMA or Link solution data for a
positions are not updated once you lose radio contact.
weapon.

PAN: When the map is zoomed in, click the PAN buttons (or click and
drag on the map or use the keyboard arrow keys) to adjust the map
view.
ZOOM: Click + in the ZOOM controls (or press [CTRL] and click the
map) to zoom in on the clicked location. Click in the ZOOM controls
(or press [CTRL] and right-click) to zoom out.
assigned to any land attack missile or mobile mine display on the map.
When this option is OFF only the waypoints for the weapon assigned to
the selected contact show on the map. Click to toggle the state of this
button.

At the top of the Tube Selection Panel area is the Target Selection
dropdown list. This drop-down list contains all of the contacts currently
marked by Ownship or by the Link if Show Link is ON. A Contact ID
selected in this list is available for assignment to a specific tube as
described below with the following caveats.
with a snapshot.
assignment.
Unknown Category Contacts: Contact IDs for contacts that have a

weapon presets are entered. The torpedo wire guide controls for the
Internal Tubes are also accessed from this panel.
A number represents each of the Akulas eight internal torpedo tubes and
six external torpedo tubes.
9 Note: The Akula has a double-hull construction. The tubes
designated as external tubes are external to the pressure hull and
cannot be reloaded when the sub is underway. The internal tubes
are accessed from within the pressure hull and can be reloaded.
The eight internal tubes consist of four 65 cm tubes numbered 1- 4 and four
53 cm tubes numbered 5 8 and occupy the upper portion of the Tube
Selection Panel. The six external tube selectors are numbered 1 through 6
and are located in the lower portion of the panel.
tube to the selected target. If the weapon in the selected tube is
not appropriate for the contact, it cannot be assigned to the tube.
9 Note: Certain weapons can only be used against submarines. You
are not able to assign a sub-only weapon to a target designated as a
surface contact. Until a contact is classified as surface or subsurface,
it cannot be assigned to any tube. You can shoot a snapshot down
the bearing to the contact.
A K U L A F I R E C ON TR OL L AU NC H P A NE L
pressure equalized and the muzzle door opened. Once these steps have
been completed, the weapon can be fired. Once the launch procedure is
initiated for a tube, the name of the weapon in the window is greyed out and
the weapon cannot be changed until the launch procedure is halted and the
steps reversed.
Tube Number
Number lights up to indicate interlock
Name of Weapon in Tube
Launch Panel Selected

1. Assign a target to a tube in the Target Display and assign preset
values as described above, then find the corresponding tube number in
the Launch Panel.

4. Click M to open the muzzle door. The tube number and the interlock
lights illuminate indicating the weapon is ready to fire.
5. Click FIRE to lift the cover; click again to fire the weapon. When the
tube is empty, the red interlock light to the left of the weapon name
window goes dark and the word EMPTY appears in the window.
target is assigned in the Target Display panel, the tube number
illuminates and the FIRE button is enabled.
6. To wire-guide a torpedo with that capability return to the Target Display

screen and click the W under the tube number. W stands for wire
guidance. See Akula Stations/Akula Fire Control Suite/Targeting Sea
Contacts/Torpedo Wire Guide Controls.
respond, check to make sure there is a target assigned to the tube. Also
requires a charge of at least 50% in your air banks. See Akula
Stations/Akula Ship Control Station for information on charging the air
banks.

below. (This process happens automatically when M is clicked
after a weapon has been fired.)

needed.

available options. The name flashes while loading and the tube cannot
be fired until flashing stops.
countermeasure.

Only internal torpedo tubes can be reloaded when underway.
BIf the weapon name display reads EMPTY, click to load a weapon.
Repeated clicks cycle through available weapons.
If you click an empty tube and the weapon names do not cycle, the
muzzle door for that tube is still open. Click M to close the muzzle door
and wait until the tube is no longer flooded, and then reload the tube.
Remember that closing the muzzle door cuts the wire on torpedoes
and UUVs and they can no longer be wire-guided.
BTo change the weapon loaded in a tube click the weapon name
until the desired weapon name appears.
9 Note: The unload/load process takes approximately seventeen
minutes. Loading an empty tube takes 8.5 minutes. If the Fire
Control Quick Launch option is selected in the Options>Game
page the time it takes to unload then load a tube is cut to 40 seconds
and loading an empty tube takes 20 seconds.
The red interlock light to the left of the weapon name flashes until the
weapon reload is complete.
1. To assign a contact to a tube, select the desired Contact ID from the
Target Selection List in the Target Display or click a contact symbol on
the Fire Control map to automatically select it in the list.

target. The contact ID appears below the tube number indicating this
See Akula Stations/Akula Fire Control Suite/Akula Fire control
Target Display/ Fire Control Target Selection List for instances that
prevent a contact from being assigned to a tube.
information on all presets see Akula Stations/Akula Fire Control
Suite/Akula Weapon Presets.
If your Fire Control Autocrew is on, he enters the presets for you.
presets.
launch procedure for the desired tube. (See Akula Stations/Akula Fire
Control Launch Panel/Basic Launch Procedure.)
5. Once a wire-guided torpedo is launched, return to the Target Display

and click the W button associated with the proper tube to display its
Wire Guide Controls for a wire-guided torpedo.

Any Akula interior tube can fire wire-guided torpedoes. Once a torpedo is
fired, its symbol appears on the Fire Control map. When a wire-guidable
torpedo enables, two red lines extend from the torpedo symbol indicating
the weapons search cone. Until a torpedo enables (begins its search), it
can be wire-guided.
heading.
search mode.
be shutdown.
homing.
In S.C.S. Dangerous Waters all Akulas can carry the SS-N-27 Land
Attack Missile (LAM) missile. To attack a land target from Fire Control, the
latitude and longitude coordinates of the site must be fed into the fire control
system and a series of waypoints defined for the missile to follow. The
coordinates are usually defined in a tasking message.
1. Set Ownship depth to 100 meters or less and a speed of 6 knots or

less. Do not fire the missile until this depth and speed have been
achieved or the Missile will fail.
2. Select a tube containing a land attack missile. Click P to open the

Preset Panel for the tube.

If a landfall waypoint is directed in your tasking make sure that one
of the earlier waypoints is placed at that latitude and longitude.
9 Note: Land sites with Contact IDs can be targeted from the Nav Map
using the Contact Menus Engage With command.
LAYING
MINEFIELD
Occasionally you may be instructed to lay a minefield.
WAYPOINT and click the Fire Control map top place the waypoint.
The waypoint presets appear below the Define Target Waypoint
button in the preset panel a soon as the waypoint is placed on the

map.
from the Nav Map using the Ownship or Orders Menus. Map Markers can
be placed on the Nav Map indicating the mine location and a launch point
for the mine designated for that location. Using this method you can better
tell when to fire the tube. See Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Nav
Map Menu.
D E PL OY I N G
AN D

presets.
value.
procedure as for a torpedo.
If a UUV is in a tube it can be launched from the Orders or
Ownship Menus using the Fire Tube command without visiting the
Fire Control Station. It will be launched at Ownships depth.
Wire-Guiding/Enabling UUV Active Sonar

To guide the sensor to the desired location and to enable active searching,
follow these steps.
active sonar mode can be enabled at any time as long as the wire
is still attached and the 30-minute battery is functioning. Be aware
that capable ships and subs in the area can detect UUV active
sonar. However, active sonar may be necessary when traversing a
minefield. Follow these steps to enable UUV active sonar.

mode.
returns.
UUV Returns
Sonar returns from the UUV are automatically assigned a Contact ID and
can be found in the TMA Selected Track drop-down list and on the Nav and
Fire Control maps. UUV sonar returns do not show up on any of the
screens of the Sonar Suite although the UUV itself displays as a contact in
Broadband and Narrowband Sonar. Depending on its course, the UUV may
provide returns on Ownship.


than 90 cuts the wire.
A K U L A W E A P ON I N VE NT O R Y S T A TI O N
The Weapon Inventory Station simply displays the current type and number
of weapons on board your sub. No interaction is possible. The total of
dispensed.
A K U L A T AC T IC AL W E A PO N S
The Akula can be assigned weapons capable of targeting surface ships,
submarines and land targets. The Akulas also carry a shoulder SAM
launcher for targeting helicopters and low flying maritime patrol aircraft.
Available weapons are described briefly below.
SS-N-16 Stallion: This anti-submarine weapon flies as a missile on an
assigned course then drops a UMGT-1 Torpedo. In the game the torpedo
begins homing as soon as it hits the water. The missile has a range of 100
km (54 nm). The torpedo it drops has a range of 8 km (4.3 nm) and a
warhead of 100 kg. A torpedo with a maximum depth of 500 meters (1,640
ft) is modeled. It can also be used against surface targets.
9 Note: For successful in-game launch of the SS-N-16 Stallion missile,
Ownship depth must be between 50 and 350 meters and at a speed
of 6 knots or less.
53-65 K Torpedo: This wake homing torpedo works best against surface
ships, although it can also be used with limited success against
submarines. It has a maximum speed of 55 knots, a range of 19 km (10 nm)
and carries a 300 kg warhead. A maximum depth of 300 meters (657 feet)
is modeled.
53 cm Torpedo: Primarily an anti-submarine torpedo, it can also be used
against surface targets. This weapon has active/passive sonar and wire
guidance, a maximum range of 18.5 km (10 nm), a maximum speed of 40
knots and a warhead of 205 kg. It has a max depth of 1,500 feet (~457
meters.)
65 cm Torpedo: This multipurpose torpedo can be used against both
surface and sub-surface targets. It has an active and passive sonar
guidance system and a range of 50 km (27 nm.) It has a maximum speed of
50 knots and a 900 kg warhead. It has a maximum depth of 914 meters
(3,000 ft).
9 Note: The above three torpedoes can be launched at depths up to

240 meters.
SA-N-8 Gremlin SAM: Fired from a shoulder-launcher from a position in
the aft of the sail, these Surface to Air Missiles have a maximum range of
4.7 km (2.5 nm), can reach a maximum altitude of 3,505 meters, and carry
a 2 kg (4.4 lb) warhead. (Press [F9] when the Kilo is surfaced to access the
SAM launcher.)
Gameplay Weapons
SS-N-27 Weapons: The three types of SS-N-27 weapons the Akula carries
in the game are based on the SS-NX-27 Novator Alfa (3M54/3M51E) class
of weapons. While it not known if the Russians have these weapons on
their own submarines, they are exporting versions to other countries for
submarine use.
For gameplay purposes the Akulas are given these additional weapons.
The SS-N-27 weapons are replacements for the SS-N-21 Sampson
missiles. The SS-N-21s have nuclear warheads and it is believed that they
have been removed from the fleet. It is reported that the SS-N-27 weapons
are compatible with the SS-N-21 launch system.
9 Note: For successful in-game launch of the SS-N-27 missiles,
Ownship must be at a depth of 100 meters or less and at a speed of
6 knots or less.
SS-N-27 ASM: This antiship weapon is based on the 3M51E missile
and resembles the American TASM. It has a range of 220 km (119
nm), is low flying and has a warhead of 200 kg.
SS-N-27 ASW: This antisubmarine weapon is based on the SS-N-X-27
Novator Alfa (3M54) missile designated 91RE1. In gameplay the
missile drops a Type 40 torpedo that enables as soon it hits the water.
The missile has a range of 35 km (19 nm); the torpedo has a maximum
speed of 65 knots, a range of 13 km (7 nm) and carries a 150 kg
warhead. The torpedo has a maximum depth of 600 meters.
SS-N-27 LAM: Based on the 3M14E land attack missile this weapon
also resembles the American Tomahawk. It has a ballistic trajectory
and a range of 300 km (162 nm) and carries a 400 kg warhead.
VA-111 Shkval: (NATO Nickname: Squall) This high-speed underwater
torpedo operates on the principles of supercavitation which allow it to reach
speeds of 200 knots. It has a range of 6 nm in the game and carries a 210
kg conventional warhead. For gameplay the weapon is modeled as a
straight running torpedo with a magnetic influence detonator. The weapon's
run to enable range (minimum range) is 2000 yards. The Shkval is not a
subtle weapon. Its use alerts all in the area to your presence. When using
this weapon the hope is it will reach its target before the target can respond.
It is known that the Russians have this weapon, it is not known if it is
actually carried by the Akulas.
S TR A TE GI C W E AP O N S
Mines:
Mobile Mine: The Akulas mobile mine is a modified version of the 53-65K
torpedo. Launched via a 53 cm torpedo tube it can travel up to 18.5 km (10
nm) after leaving the ship. The mobile mine is effective in depths from 4
150 meters and has a 450 kg warhead.
A K U L A C OU N TE R M E AS U R ES
torpedo from destroying your sub. The Akula carries Active and Passive
torpedo decoys that can be launched from Fire Control Launch Panel, or via
the Ownship or Orders Menus Countermeasure option.
Orders Menus Countermeasure option can be set to either Shallow (30
meters) or Deep (244 meters.)
A K U L A W E A P ON P R E S E T S
Everything that can be launched from the Fire Control Station has at least
one preset. Presets are instructions that tell the weapon, countermeasure
or UUV what to do. All presets are presented here alphabetically by type.
BClick/right-click on the digits to increase or decrease the value.

SS-N-27 ASM
ships in the area. Defaults to 50 nm (~62 km.)
Seeker Range: Sets the range at which the missile begins to search.
This can be used to help discriminate against other shipping in
congested waters. Defaults to 0 nm.
narrow pattern. This can be used to help discriminate against other
shipping in congested waters. Click the Wide/Narrow button to toggle
the selection.
9 Note: Your ship must be at 100 meters or less and at a speed of 6
knots or less to successfully launch one of these antiship weapons.

SS-N-27 LAM
follow.
Latitude/Longitude: Click a waypoint to display presets for setting the
precise Latitude and Longitude for the waypoint. Click/right-click the
preset digits to increment or decrement the number. You can also click
a waypoint and drag it to the desired location. The current location of
the selected waypoint appears in the Latitude/Longitude readout in the
lower left of the Fire Control map.
and friendly ships in the area. Defaults to 50 nm (~62 km.)
to successfully launch one of these Land Attack Missiles.
Mine Presets
Mobile Mine
it to the desired location. The current location of the selected waypoint
appears in the Latitude/Longitude readout in the lower left of the Fire
Control map.
SS-N-16 Stallion and SS-N-27 ASW
Run To Enable: Sets the point in yards at which the missile drops its
torpedo payload. The torpedo falls to the water and enables at once.
Rocket Torpedo Presets

Shkval
Depth: Sets the depth at which the weapon travels.
Run To Enable: Sets the distance the weapon travels before its
sensor enables. (The minimum RTE for this weapon is 2000 yards.)
Torpedo Presets
53-65K, 53 cm, 65 cm Torpedoes
Acoustic: Click to chose Active or Passive sonar mode. Active mode
transmits active pings and follows the returns. In passive mode the
weapon does a passive sonar search.
9 Note: The 53-65K torpedo is a wake homing torpedo. It has no
Acoustic setting.
Run To Enable: Set the distance the weapon travels before it enables
and starts its active search. Enabling the weapon too soon can alert
the target in time to take evasive measures. Enabling too late can
mean the weapon runs past the target.
UUV Presets
Ownship. Use OD Depth is selected by default. Deselect the option to
A KULA TMA S TATI ON [F7]

At the Target Motion Analysis (TMA) station, data from the Akulas sensors
perform target motion analysis at the Akulas TMA station.
A K U L A TMA S TA TI O N C O M P O N E NT S
The Akulas TMA station is composed or several distinct areas: The TMA
Display, the view controls and readouts, the track selection area, trial
solution area and the solution area. These areas are described briefly
below. See Training/TMA Basics.
TMA Display
Cursor Readouts
Trial Solution Area
View Controls
Track Selection Area
Solution Area
Akula TMA Display

The TMA Display presents a representation of Ownship, a history of
These tools are used to analyze sensor inputs.

When a sensor sends a bearing report to TMA a history of each report is
maintained. When a contact is selected the bearing report history for that
contact appears on the TMA Display. The lines extend indefinitely for
reported by active sonar, radar or the stadimeter. The color of the bearing
Cylindrical sonar array:
White
Conformal sonar array:
Blue
Towed array:
Purple
Active sonar:
Green
Active Intercept:
Yellow
Periscope or ESM:
Red
Radar:
Yellow
UUV passive sonar:
White
UUV active sonar:
Green

Right-click the TMA Display to change the bearing return history on the
TMA Display. As long as a tracker is tracking, bearing information is sent to
TMA in two-minute intervals. If the screen gets too cluttered, change the
number of lines that are displayed. History options available are 10 minutes,
20 minutes (default), 1 hour and 4 hours. A check mark indicates the
selected option.
Akulas TMA Dot Stack
TMA Ruler
Ruler Handle
Lines of Bearing (LOBs).
Ownship
The TMA Ruler

of the dot stack.


numerical form in the Trial Solution Area below the TMA Display.
desired course number in the course field.
The Dot Stack

stacking the dots.
Akula Track Selection Area

The area at the center right of the Akulas TMA station is used to select a
contact to analyze, merge, split or drop. These fields function as described
here.
alphanumeric Contact IDs for designated contacts. Selecting a Contact
ID from the list displays on the TMA Display the available history of
bearing lines for that contact. The first letter of the contact designation
represents the source of the data: S for Sonar, R for Radar, V for visual
(Periscope and Stadimeter), and E for ESM.
MERGE TRACK: This dropdown lists all contacts except the contact
MERGE: Click to merge the contact in the SELECTED TRACK dropdown list with the contact selected in the MERGE TRACK drop-down
list.
SPLIT: Click to split the merged (M) contact selected in the
components.
DROP: Click to permanently drops the contact selected in the
DELECTED TRACK dropdown list
Akula Trial Solution Area

The area below the TMA Display is used to create and fine-tune a firing
solution for the selected contact. From this area the solution is entered into
the ships fire control system.
TMA ruler is reflected in these fields These numbers are altered by
Lock Buttons: Click the red button to the right of each field to lock the
value in that field. The ruler reflects the locked value. A depressed,
illuminated button indicates a locked value. (If a value is locked for one
contact it is locked for all. Unlock the field when analyzing other
contacts.)
9 Note: The ruler position for selected contact A is not retained when
A prior to selecting another contact. This means that unless you
enter your solution, the ruler you have carefully positioned on contact
A will be in a different position when Contact A is reselected. Dont
lose your work. Enter your solution. You can always fine-tune it later.
Akula View Control Area

The upper right area of the TMA station contains the view controls for the
TMA Display. Click the PAN and ZOOM controls as needed to adjust the
view. In addition to the zoom control the following keyboard and mouse
commands are useful for adjusting the view:
BPress [CTRL] + click to zoom out. Press [CTRL] + Right-click to

zoom in.
BRoll the mouse wheel forward to zoom in. Roll the wheel backward
to zoom out.
BClick the CENTER ON RULER button below the TMA Display
before zooming in for the clearest view.
TMA Solution Area

The TMA Solution area in the lower left of the station displays the current
solution in use by the Fire Control system for the selected contact. There is
no user interaction in the TMA Solution area. These fields display zeros
until you have clicked ENTER SOLUTION in the TMA Trial Solution Area.
contact, alter the ruler to the desired position on the TMA Display
or enter numbers directly into the trial solution area fields, then
click the ENTER SOLUTION button again.
TMA
ON
R A DA R /A C T IV E S O N AR /V ISU AL C O NT AC TS
Contacts marked with active sonar, radar and the Stadimeter appear as a
bearing/range pair on the TMA Display. The bearing line ends with a tiny
See Akula Stations/Periscope-Stadimeter Stations/Akula Stadimeter
Station. When visual or periscope contacts are referred to in this
To determine a target solution for Active Sonar, Periscope or Radar
Contacts:
1. Select a Contact ID from the SELECTED TRACK dropdown list

designation, active sonar contacts have an S designation the same as

passive sonar contacts.
A bearing line appears on the TMA Display. A tiny triangle at the end of
marked.
2. After a short interval return to the active sonar or radar station

radiating.)
your chosen sensor.
3. Adjust the view on the TMA Display to get a clear view of the ruler and
the range triangle.
in the TMA Display, and then click the zoom buttons to better
adjust the view. If you lose site of the ruler, zoom all the way out or
click the red center on ruler button again.
solution.
Control system.
TMA
ON
AND
ESM
C O NT A C TS

accurate solution.
the TMA Display. ESM contacts must be updated manually by repeatedly
on the TMA Display and in the Nav and Fire Control maps.

1. Select a Contact ID from the SELECTED TRACK dropdown list. A line
of bearing appears on the TMA Display. The ruler appears at the
default range of 10,000 yards on the most recent LOB with the
arrowhead facing Ownship (or the UUV sensor if it is a UUV contact)
with a default speed of 10. These default values appear in the trial
solution fields directly to the right of the TMA Display.

BClick CENTER ON RULER then click the zoom buttons to adjust
the view.
BIf you lose site of the ruler, zoom all the way out or click CENTER
ON RULER button again.
the ruler to see it at that speed. You can also set the speed to 10
knots or more temporarily. This will expand the ruler and reveal the
handle.


DEMON, enter that speed in the speed field. See Akula
Stations/Akula Sonar Suite/Akula DEMON Sonar Station. Click the
digits to cycle through the values.
If you are sure about one aspect of the solution (e.g. range) enter
that value directly into the Range field then lock the field. That
keeps you from dragging the ruler to a different range.
Trial Solution Area
Lock field
Click to enter the solution into the fire control system
centerline off the dot stack.

The entered system solution displays in the TMA SOLUTION panel at
solution, adjust the ruler or directly input information in the trial solution
fields and click ENTER SOLUTION again.
6. Changing Ownships course and/or speed can refine the TMA solution.
and/or speed (a contact zig). Attempt to achieve a better fit of the
ruler by disregarding some of the earlier bearing lines and looking
only at recent bearings.

1. Click the SELECTED TRACK drop-down and select one of the

2. From the MERGE TRACK drop-down select the track to be merged


SELECTED TRACK dropdown and click the SPLIT button.
B To drop the selected contact altogether, click the DROP button.
You can make no TMA inputs yourself. For more information on your
TMA Autocrew see Akula Stations/Akula Autocrew.
TMA
ON
UUV S E N S O R C O N T AC TS

UUVs see Akula Stations/Akula Fire Control Suite/Deploying and WireGuiding UUVs.
or passive mode.
A KULA P ERISCOPE -S TADIMETER S TATIONS [F8]

The Akula Periscope Station in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters merges the
access to the High-Frequency sonar useful for navigating minefields.
BClick the Stadimeter icon button to the lower right of periscope
view to enter the Stadimeter station
BClick ice icon button at the lower left of the periscope view to move
to the High-frequency Sonar screen
High-Frequency Sonar Display
Stadimeter Station
Periscope View Selected
WITH THE
P ER ISC O PE
1. Ensure the ship is at periscope depth (20 meters) and at a speed of 10

knots or less if the sail is submerged. (Sea state affects periscope
depth. If the seas are rough you may have to go shallower.)
2. Click RAISE to raise the periscope mast.

3. Rotate the periscope to look for contacts. Click the red arrows on the
left and right periscope handles, or click and drag in the periscope view
to rotate the periscope 360.
in the periscope view. The ESM indicator lights illuminate from the
bottom up when a radar emitter is detected. (Green indicates a weak

signal, red a strong one.)
5. Zoom and adjust the view. Center the view on the contact of interest.
6. Click the upper half of the Zoom crank to zoom in. Click the lower half
of the crank to zoom out.
7. Click the upper half of the Elevation crank to lower the elevation. Click
the lower half to raise it

Visual contacts have a V designation. (V01, V02 etc.) When marked by
the periscope the contact symbol appears on a line of bearing at a
default distance.
A K U L A S T A DI M E T E R S T AT I O N [F8]
The Stadimeter Station is accessible only from the Periscope station by
Click and drag to manipulate photo Silhouette in 3-D window
Silhouette of ship in Ship Classification field
Periscope Station

2. Click the Stadimeter icon button to switch to the Stadimeter Station.
When the Stadimeter Station appears, the last photo taken
through the periscope appears in the upper window.

In the SHIP CLASSIFICATION fields the ships computer provides
the names of those ship classes within the selected country that
are similar in length to the photographed contact. Each class name
can be selected individually and the 3D silhouette for that class
compared to the photo in the upper window.
3. Under COUNTRY click the right and left facing arrows to select a
different countrys platforms to view.
4. Under SHIP CLASS click the right and left facing arrows to cycle
through the names in the SHIP CLASSIFICATION window to display
the 3D silhouette for each available class. When a match is
determined, leave the selected name in the SHIP CLASSIFICATION
field.
5. Click the ZOOM arrows to match the size of the 3D silhouette with that
of the photographed contact.
6. Rotate the silhouette by clicking the A.O.B. arrow buttons to closely

match the aspect of the ship in the photo to help match the silhouette
to the photo. Matching the aspect provides the Angle on the Bow
(AOB) needed to determine a close approximation of the contacts
course. Course is a piece of information needed in developing a firing
solution in TMA.

If the number is greater that 360, subtract 360. The resulting
number is a good approximation of the contacts course.

If the number is less than zero, add 360 to it. The resulting
number is a good approximation of the contacts course. Enter that

number in the Course field in TMA when this contact is selected.

The following steps allow you to assign a classification to a contact and
determine its range from Ownship.
1. Under COUNTRY click the right and left facing arrows to select the
desired countrys platform class names to view.
2. Under SHIP CLASS click the right and left facing arrows to cycle
the 3D silhouette for each available class.
3. Rotate the silhouette model by clicking the A.O.B. arrows. Click the
match is determined, leave the selected name in the SHIP
CLASSIFICATION field.
the Nav Map.
The class name showing in the Stadimeter CLASSIFICATION field
when the contact was marked is assigned to the contact.

9 Note: The photo must be manipulated to determine a range when
the contact is marked or no contact is created on the Nav Map or
TMA.
6. Click the Periscope icon button to return to the Periscope Station view.
A K U L A U ND ER I C E D IS PL AY [F8]
The Akulas Ice Display is only accessible from the Periscope station. In
S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters the Akulas are capable of operating and
surfacing when under the ice. In order to surface under the ice it is
necessary to locate an area of thin ice or open water called a polynya.
Surfacing or attempting to surface in ice that is too thick can cause damage
to your ship.
The Akulas High Frequency Display utilizes an upward looking High
Frequency Acoustic Sensor and a Signal Strength Indicator to help
determine ice thickness. When the display is set to Upward Looking mode,
red indicates ice and black indicates no ice. The display is never a solid red
when ice is present but has a mottled look displaying various shades of red.
The darker areas are locations of thinner ice. The representation of ice at
the center of the display indicates the ice directly over Ownship.
The row of colored lights beneath the display window is the Signal Strength
Indicator. The strength of the signal returning from your acoustic sensor
indicates the thickness of the ice directly above Ownship. Signal strength is
represented as a color indicating ice thickness as shown below.

Ownship cannot penetrate ice with a thickness greater than 10 feet. The
lights in the Signal Strength Indicator represent the following ice depths and
damage expectations.
Green: 0-4 feet thick; no Damage to Ownship.
Yellow: 4-8 feet thick; minor damage, may lose ice sensors.
Red: 8-10 feet or more; moderate to serious damage; may lose masts,
flooding possible.
High Frequency Active Sonar (HFAS)

The Akulas forward looking High Frequency Active Sonar (HFAS) shares
this display screen.
BClick UPWARD LOOKING in the Alignment Panel to view the Ice
Display/
BClick FORWARD LOOKING to view HFAS returns. For
information on marking contacts with the HFAS see Akula
Stations/Akula Sonar Suite /Akula Active Sonar Station/ High
Frequency Active Sonar.

Use the following procedure for surfacing and submerging under the ice
1. Use your ships Ice Thickness display to locate a polynya in the ice as
described above.
2. At a slow speed (1 2 knots) position the sub under the polynya then
bring the sub to a complete stop.
3. From the Task Bars Orders Menu select Navigate>Set Depth>Surface

or set your depth at the Akulas surfaced depth of 11 meters.
You can tell that the ship has surfaced by selecting Ownship and
looking in 3D view. The ships sail emerges through the ice.

For those who prefer not to use the 3D view, check the depth
readout to determine that you have achieved surfaced depth.

Once surfaced you can raise the periscope and view the ice field.
Be sure to lower your periscope again before submerging to avoid

damaging it.
4. To submerge the ship again, maintain a speed of zero and order a

depth well below the thickness of the ice. Be sure to first retract any
masts you may have raised!
A KULA S AIL B RIDGE (SAM L AUNCHER ) [F9]

The Sail Bridge is only accessible when the Akula is surfaced. The Sail
Bridge provides three views: Shoulder Mounted SAM Launcher, Free Look
and Binoculars.
SAM Launcher
Free Look
Binoculars
Binoculars: Zoom to 16X by clicking the thumb wheel at the top of the
screen. Click and drag to pan the view. VISUAL mode is selected by
default. LLTV mode is available for night vision.
SAM Launcher: The Akulas carry SA-N-8 Gremlin surface-to-air missiles.
A shoulder mounted SAM launcher is modeled in S.C.S. - Dangerous
Waters and can be used to attack helicopters and low flying airplanes. The
SAM launcher view provides a first-person shooter aspect to engage
SA-N-8 Gremlin: Max Range: 4.7 km (2.5 nm); Max Altitude: 11,500 ft
(3,505 m)
TO
AIR MISSILES


5. The interior Target Indicator bars turns red when there is a valid target
reloads.
A KULA A UTOCREW
The Akula has five Stations with Autocrew assistants. This section
describes what each crew does as well as what they dont do.
A K U L A B R O AD B AN D /N AR R OW B A N D A U T OC R E W
When ON, the Broadband/Narrowband Sonar Autocrew searches
Narrowband for contacts. Because they share trackers, contacts marked in
Narrowband also display in Broadband. He also assigns trackers, classifies
all marked contacts in Narrowband and assigns a Low, Medium, or High
level of confidence in his classification. The level of confidence displays in
the Navigation Stations DDI and above the 3D model when that contact is
selected.
classes to 4 or more and picks one at random
classes to 2 or 3 and picks one at random
classes to one
When this Autocrew is ON you can still mark contacts yourself and select
different arrays and contacts for the crewman to analyze.
On the Nav Map: Each contact marked by your Sonar Autocrew

symbol. This is usually a yellow symbol for Unknown indicating both
the category and ID for the contact is unknown. A contact designation
number (S01, S02, etc) appears beside the symbol. As soon as your
Sonar Autocrew has classified the contact, the symbol changes to that
of the specified class. See Navigation Station/2D Navigation
Map/NTDS Symbols. Selecting the contact symbol displays information
about the suspected class in the DDI and the 3D model of that class
appears in the 3D view surrounded by a bounding yellow bounding box
and a level of confidence bar.
Your task: Your Sonar Auto Crewman can classify a contact as a
specific class, but he cannot determine its alliance. You must do that
yourself on the Nav Map.
BOn the Nav Map, click the contact to select it, then right-click the
contacts symbol to display the Contact Menu.
A K U L A S O N A R A C TI V E I N TE R C E PT A U T OC R E W
Autocrew is on.
You must raise and lower the radar mast. When ON, your Radar Autocrew
performs the following task as long as the radar is on:

9 Note: The Radar Autocrew is not speedy. It takes a minute or two
before he begins to mark contacts. When Radar Autocrew is ON,
A K U L A F I R E C ON TR OL A U T OC R E W
When ON, the Fire Control Autocrew performs the following duties:
selected weapon that are appropriate for the assigned target.

Contact Menus Engage With command from the Nav. Your Fire
Control Auto Crewman uses the contacts classification when
determining presets. If you classify a contact as a surface ship when in
actuality it is a submarine, the Autocrew enters presets appropriate for
a surface ship.
From the stations of the Fire Control Suite [F6] weapons are selected,
contacts are targeted, weapons are launched and countermeasures are
deployed.
A K U L A TMA A U TOC R EW
accurate firing solution. When ON, the TMA Autocrew performs the
following duties.
BClick the AUTOCREW slider button in the upper left corner of the
screen to toggle the state of the TMA Autocrew. Autocrew is ON
when the silhouette is visible
sensors.
Once the crewman enters a solution for a contact, the contact then

The yellow symbol for Unknown (platform category) and Unknown (ID)
is displayed until you or the Sonar Auto Crewman classifies it.

view on the TMA Display, but you are not able to manipulate the
ruler or the settings.

6(&7,21
6($:2/)67$7,216
Seawolf Stations
12-1
12: SEAWOLF STATIONS .........................................................................12-5

SEAWOLF TASK BAR .......................................................................... 12-5
SEAWOLF STATIONS MENU ............................................ 12-5
SEAWOLF ORDERS MENU .............................................. 12-6
HISTORY W INDOW ......................................................... 12-7
SEAWOLF SHIP CONTROL STATION [F1].............................................. 12-8
SEAWOLF ICE THICKNESS DISPLAY ............................... 12-11
Under Ice Operations.......................................... 12-12
SEAWOLF SONAR SUITE ................................................................... 12-13
SEAWOLF BROADBAND SONAR STATION ........................ 12-13
Seawolf Broadband Waterfall Displays ............... 12-14
Assigning Trackers in Broadband ....................... 12-15
Towed Array Contacts ........................................ 12-15
Seawolf Broadband Data Display/Button Matrix . 12-16
SEAWOLF NARROWBAND SONAR .................................. 12-17
Seawolf Narrowband Displays ............................ 12-18
Seawolf Narrowband Data Display ..................... 12-18
Seawolf Narrowband Button Matrix .................... 12-19
Classifying Contacts in Seawolf Narrowband ..... 12-20
SEAWOLF DEMON SONAR STATION ............................ 12-21
Using DEMON to Calculate a Contacts Speed .. 12-22
Seawolf DEMON Display .................................... 12-23
Seawolf DEMON Button Matrix........................... 12-23
SEAWOLF ACTIVE SONAR STATION ............................... 12-24
Marking Contacts with MF Active Sonar ............. 12-25
Seawolf Active Sonar Data Display .................... 12-26
Seawolf MF Active Sonar Button Matrix.............. 12-26
Seawolf High Frequency Active Sonar ............... 12-27
Marking Contacts with HF Active Sonar.............. 12-27
SEAWOLF ACTIVE INTERCEPT SONAR STATION ............... 12-28
Seawolf Active Intercept Display......................... 12-28
Seawolf Active Intercept Data Display/Matrix ..... 12-28
SEAWOLF SSP STATION (SOUND SPEED PROFILE) ........ 12-29
SEAWOLF UUV SONAR................................................ 12-29
SEAWOLF RADAR STATION [F3] .................................................... 12-30
SEAWOLF RADIO-ESM STATION [F4] ............................................... 12-30
SEAWOLF ELECTRONIC SUPPORT MEASURES (ESM) ..... 12-31
Detecting and Classifying Contacts with ESM .... 12-31
RADIO ROOM .............................................................. 12-32
Seawolf Stations
12-2
RECEIVING RADIO MESSAGES AND LINK DATA................ 12-32

PROMOTING CONTACTS TO THE LINK ............................. 12-33
SEAWOLF NAVIGATION STATION [F5]............................................... 12-34
SEAWOLF OWNSHIP/ORDERS MENUS ............................ 12-34
SEAWOLF CONTACT MENU ........................................... 12-35
SEAWOLF FIRE CONTROL SUITE [F6] ................................................. 12-36
SEAWOLF TARGET DISPLAY .......................................... 12-36
Fire Control Map ................................................. 12-37
Seawolf Tube Selection Panel ............................ 12-37
Target Designation and Presets Panel ............... 12-37
Assigning a Target to a Tube.............................. 12-38
Firing A Snapshot ............................................... 12-39
Assigning Waypoints to a TLAM or SLMM.......... 12-39
Assigning a UUV Sensor a tube ......................... 12-39
SEAWOLF LAUNCH PANEL ............................................ 12-40
Launcher Control Panel ...................................... 12-41
Tube and Weapon Selection Panel .................... 12-41
Presets Panel ..................................................... 12-41
Reloading/ Changing the Weapon in a Tube ...... 12-42
Wire-Guiding and Enabling UUV Active Sonar ... 12-44
UUV Returns....................................................... 12-45
SEAWOLF COUNTERMEASURE LAUNCH PANEL ............... 12-45
External CM Tubes Launcher Controls ............... 12-46
Launching a Countermeasure:............................ 12-46
Reloading an Internal CM Tube .......................... 12-47
SEAWOLF W EAPON INVENTORY .................................... 12-47
SEAWOLF TACTICAL W EAPONS ..................................... 12-47
SEAWOLF STRATEGIC W EAPONS .................................. 12-48
SEAWOLF COUNTERMEASURES ..................................... 12-48
SEAWOLF PRESETS ..................................................... 12-48
Land Attack Missile Presets................................ 12-49
Mine Presets....................................................... 12-49
Torpedo Presets ................................................. 12-49
Countermeasure and UUV Presets .................... 12-50
SEAWOLF TMA STATION [F7] ......................................................... 12-50
SEAWOLF TMA STATION COMPONENTS ........................ 12-50
Seawolf TMA Display.......................................... 12-51
Seawolf TMA Data Display ................................. 12-53
Seawolf TMA Button Matrix ................................ 12-54
Seawolf TMA Trial Solution Area ........................ 12-55
Seawolf Stations
12-3

SEAWOLF PERISCOPE-STADIMETER STATIONS [F8] .............................. 12-59
SEAWOLF STADIMETER STATION ................................... 12-60
Determining Course with Stadimeter .................. 12-61
Determining Class/Range with the Stadimeter ... 12-62
SEAWOLF SAIL BRIDGE (SAM LAUNCHER) [F9] ................................ 12-62
LAUNCHING SURFACE TO AIR MISSILES ......................... 12-63
SEAWOLF AUTOCREW..................................................................... 12-63
SEAWOLF BROADBAND/NARROWBAND AUTOCREW ......... 12-63
SEAWOLF SONAR ACTIVE INTERCEPT AUTOCREW........... 12-64
SEAWOLF RADAR AUTOCREW ....................................... 12-64
SEAWOLF FIRE CONTROL AUTOCREW ........................... 12-65
SEAWOLF TMA AUTOCREW ......................................... 12-65
Seawolf Stations
12-4
12: SEAWOLF STATIONS

The station and matrix button functionality of the Seawolf Class submarines
in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters is covered in this section. The Seawolfs five
Autocrew features are covered at the end of the Seawolf section of the
manual.
information unique to the Seawolf is contained in the abbreviated
Seawolf Navigation Station section later in this section.
S EAWOLF T ASK B AR
The Task Bar for all submarines function the same. The differences are
cosmetic. The Seawolfs Task Bar appears below.
Stations Menu
Depth Shortcut
Damage Report
Orders Menu
Course Shortcut
Depth Below Keel
Speed Shortcut

Time Acceleration
S E AW OL F S T A TI O NS M ENU
icon to jump to that station or use the appropriate function key. Selected
menu items are orange.
Ship Control [F1]
Radar [F3]
Sonar Suite [F2]

Radio - ESM [F4]
Nav [F5]
TMA [F7]
Periscope-Stadimeter
[F8]
Seawolf Stations
12-5
S E AW OL F O R D E R S M E NU
Navigate: Select various navigation orders for Ownship (OS.)
Left Full Rudder: Sets OS on a hard turn to port.
Right Full Rudder: Sets OS on a hard turn to starboard
Rudder Amidships: Sets the rudder back in the zero position.
Set Depth:
Go to PD: Brings OS to Periscope Depth (61 feet). If seas are
high you may need to adjust the depth.
Go Shallow: Orders depth of 195 ft.
Go Deep: Orders depth of 1,671 ft.
Go to Snorkel Depth: Orders a depth of 54 feet.
Change Speed: Displays a submenu of engine order shortcuts. Given no
strong currents in the area, selecting one of the following commands results
in the indicated speed:
All Ahead Flank: Maximum speed for platform (40 knots.)
All Ahead Full: 20 knots.
Ahead 1/3: 5 knots.
Back 1/3: 4 knots in a reverse.
Back 2/3: 8 knots in a reverse.
All Back Full: 12 knots in reverse.
Arrays Wires: Displays a submenu permitting you to stream, retrieve or
stop the winch deploying the Port and Starboard Towed Arrays and the
Floating Wire.
is only available when at snorkel depth (54 feet) or shallower. Raising the
mast initiates ventilation. The ventilation process is secured from this menu
or from the Ship Control Station via the VENTILATE button, automatically
lowering the mast.
toggles its state. A checkmark indicates that the Autocrew is ON. See
Seawolf Stations
12-6
Seawolf Stations/Seawolf Autocrew for a full description of Autocrew

functionality.
Orders Menu a depth of shallow (100 feet) or deep (800 feet) can be
selected.
Crew Report History: Lists all orders as acknowledged by crewmembers
AND
DEPTH: Keel depth reported in feet. Click/right-click digits to order a

depth change.
KEEL: Readout of the depth of water below the keel in feet.
new course.
currents are strong. Currents can be turned OFF/ON in the
Seawolf Stations
12-7

word PAUSED.
bar.

the time scales
S EAWOLF S HIP C ONTROL S TATI ON [F1]

The Seawolfs Ship Control Station is divided into two halves. The left half
of the station provides mostly information. Only the Course Indicator and
the Rudder Indicator allow for user interaction. The right side contains the
Trim and Ice Display, the Engine Order Telegraph and the controls for the
towed array and several ship systems.
Seawolf Stations
12-8
Course Indicator
Rudder Control
Trim and Ice Indicator
Engine Order Telegraph
Seawolfs Ship Control Station employs the following conventions.

A green outline (or green needle) and a finger cursor indicate that user
input is possible in that location.

Button text indicates what happens when you next click the button.
Button text changes to facilitate this feature. The only exception is the
Emergency Blow button. That button text is green when a blow is in
progress and orange when it is OFF. The text does not change.
An orange outline around a box or feature indicates no user input is
possible. The two exceptions to this are the Rudder and Course
Indicators.
Orange text on a button indicates that ship system is OFF or closed.
Green text indicates that the system is ON or functioning.
In the Engine Order Telegraph the selected button is green.
Seawolfs Ship Control Station features are described briefly below.

ORDERED DEPTH: Displays the last ordered depth.
ORDERED HEADING: Displays the last ordered course.
ORDERED SPEED: Displays the last ordered speed.
The Engine Order Telegraph: Click the desired button to order engine
speed. Engine speeds translate to ship speeds as defined in Seawolf
Stations/Seawolf Task Bar/Orders Menu. Flank (maximum) speed for the
Seawolf is modeled at 40 knots.
HEADING: Displays the subs actual heading.
Seawolf Stations
12-9
SPEED: Displays the subs current speed.

AIR %: Displays the current charge level in the high-pressure air banks.
DEPTH: Displays the subs current depth.
SOUNDING: Displays the current depth of the water under your keel.
Course Indicator: The orange needle indicates the ordered course. The
green needle indicates the current course until ordered course is achieved.
BClick the desired heading on the dial to order a new course.
STERN/RUDDER/BOW: Indicates the positions of the respective control
surfaces of the ship. Zero represents a neutral setting for the bow/stern
planes and the rudder. No user interaction is available in the Stern and Bow
planes.
BClick the desired number in the Rudder Indicator to order a rudder
change.
ICE THICKNESS/TRIM ANGLE: Shows the ice thickness profile when
under the ice, displays the ships current trim angle and displays the current
depth beneath the hull when in shallow water.
The submarine profile adjusts in the display window to match the ships
trim angle.
When operating under the ice a profile of the ice thickness above
Ownship appears across the top of the Trim Display. Any course
change immediately redraws the profile. The Ice Thickness Readout in
the lower left of the display reports the thickness of the ice directly
above the sail. If you change your course, the display instantly updates
to display the ice thickness on the new course See Seawolf
Stations/Seawolf Ship Control Station /Seawolf Ice Thickness
Display/Under Ice Operations below.
When the ship is traveling close to the bottom, an orange line indicates
the depth directly under the Ownships midpoint.

EMERGENCY BLOW: Click this button to perform an emergency main
ballast tank blow to quickly surface the ship. The button text changes to
green when a blow is in progress. Click the button again to return to the
OFF (orange) position.
OPEN MBT VENTS/CLOSE MBT VENTS: When surfaced, click Open
MBT Vents to open the main ballast tank vents and submerge your ship.
The vents close automatically once the ship is submerged to a shallow
depth. The vents cannot be opened again until the ship has resurfaced.
Seawolf Stations 12-10
9 Note: The ship dives/surfaces automatically when an appropriate

means of an Orders Menu Navigate>Set Depth option. It is not
necessary to manually open the MBT Vents.
VENTILATE/SECURE VENTILATE: Click Ventilate to commence
ventilation. Click Secure Ventilate to stop ventilating. Ventilation is only
necessary when you need to recharge the high-pressure air banks. (See
Charge Air/Secure Air below.) The ship must be a snorkel depth (54 feet) or
shallower to ventilate.
CHARGE AIR/SECURE AIR: Click Charge Air to start the charging the
High Pressure Air Banks. Click Secure Charge to stop charging. You can
charge the banks by only 10 % when submerged and not ventilating. You
must be ventilating to fully charge the banks.
RIG IN BOW PLANES/RIG OUT BOW PLANES: The ships bow planes
are out by default. If you plan to surface when under the ice, you should rig
in (retract) the bow planes as a precaution against damage. Click Rig in
Bow Planes to retract the bow planes. Click Rig Out Bow Planes to return
the planes to their normal position.
Towed Array Controls:
The Seawolf has two towed arrays the TB-29 and the TB-16. In general, the
TB-29 is longer and more sensitive than the TB-16, but the TB-16 remains
effective at higher speeds.
Select the Starboard Towed Array to deploy the TB-29 array.
Select the Port Towed Array to deploy the TB-16.
Starboard Towed Array/Port Towed Array Toggle: The visible name is

the selected array.
BClick the array name to toggle between the array options.
BClick the right facing double arrows to deploy the selected towed
array.
BClick the left facing double arrows to retrieve the selected array.
BClick the orange square to stop streaming or retrieving.
Scope: The scope progress bar illustrates the relative length of the array
currently deployed.
S E AW OL F I C E T H I C K N E S S D IS PL A Y
The Seawolf Ice Thickness Indicator is located in the Ship Control Station
as part of the Trim display when ice is present. The line at the top of the
display indicates the presence of ice and a general depth. The Ice
Thickness readout in the lower left of the display indicates the Ice
Thickness directly above the sail.
In order to surface safely through the ice you must locate a polynya, an
open or thin area in the ice, and surface the ship there. Following proper
procedures the sub can break through relatively thin ice. The Ice Thickness
Indicator alerts you to ice that is too thick to break through. You must also
be aware of ice keels, large slabs of ice that project downwards for many
feet. With the High Frequency Active Sonar ice keels can be located and
marked.
Seawolf in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters cannot penetrate ice with a
thickness greater than 10 feet. Possible damage when attempting to
surface under ice following proper procedure is shown below:
0-4 feet thick:
No Damage to Ownship.
4-8 feet thick:
Minor damage; may lose ice sensors.
8-10 feet thick:
Moderate to serious damage; may lose masts; flooding

possible.
Do not attempt to surface under ice greater than 10 feet thick.
Under Ice Operations

Follow these steps to safely surface and submerge when operating under
the ice:
1. Set Ownship speed to 1 or 2 knots.

2. Using the Seawolfs Ice Thickness display on the Ship Control Station,
locate a polynya.
3. Position the sub under the polynya then bring the sub to a complete
stop.
4. From the Orders Menu, select Navigate>Set Depth>Surface or set your

depth at 27 feet.

For those who prefer not to use the 3D view, check the depth readout
to determine that you are surfaced (27 feet).

Once surfaced, raise the periscope and view the ice field. Be sure to
lower the periscope again before submerging to avoid damaging the

scope.

masts that have been raised.
S EAWOLF S ONAR S UITE

the sonar stations.
detect, identify, track, and localize contacts by employing either active or
Speed Profile (SSP). All six stations are explained in this section.
Information about UUV sensors and their use is covered in Seawolf
Stations/Seawolf Fire Control Suite/Deploying and Wire-Guiding UUVs.
navigate from one Sonar station to another.
Broadband
Active
Narrowband
Active Intercept
DEMON
SSP
S E AW OL F B R OA D B A N D S O N AR S T AT I O N
The Broadband Sonar Station displays input from the spherical bow and
towed arrays. These inputs are used to detect and track submarines and
surface ships. Here trackers can be assigned to contacts and they are
given an alphanumeric contact ID. Contact IDs for all sonar contacts begin
with the letter S. Trackers provide the TMA station with updates on the
contacts bearing at specified time intervals.
9 Note: UUV sonar contacts also have S designations, but their data is
not reported in the Sonar Suite. UUV data is available in TMA and on
the Nav and Fire Control maps.
Broadband Waterfall Displays

Bearing Indicator
Broadband Data Display
Broadband Button Matrix
Seawolf Broadband Waterfall Displays

The Seawolf uses dual waterfall displays to track sonar information. In the
waterfall display, sonar information cascades down over time giving a
sense of the contacts movement. Bearing is displayed on the horizontal
axis with either north (000) or south (180) in the center. Time is displayed
on the vertical axis, with the most recent information at the top.
Contacts appear as orange lines in the waterfall. A faint orange line
represents a weak contact while a strong contact appears as a brighter,
thicker line. The speckled background represents background noise
interference. The amount of interference increases as background noise
increases. The thin orange line beneath the Vindicator indicates the
direction your subs stern is pointing (your baffles for the spherical and hull
arrays.)
Both the upper and lower waterfall displays show broadband sonar data. It
is a good idea to have one display set on Short Time Average (160
seconds) and the other on Intermediate (030 minutes) or Long Time
Averaging (02 hours). The longer the time averaging that is employed the
better the sonar detection processing. However, the longer the time
averaging, the longer the time between updates. Both the spherical sensor
and the towed array pick up broadband data. The information displayed
depends on which sensor is selected.
Ship speed greatly interferes with the ability of the sensors to detect and
display contacts. Excessive speed results in the inability to detect any
contacts at all. Only background noise is visible.
Assigning Trackers in Broadband

1. Click SELECT ARRAY. From the resulting button matrix click SPHERE
or TOWED to select the sonar array you want to view in the broadband
display. Click BACK.
2. When a contact appears in the waterfall click on it to select it. A vertical

cursor appears over the contact in the bearing indicator. You can click
and drag this cursor along the bearing indicator.
3. Click Assign Tracker to designate the target and assign a tracker. (If
the signal is faint, you may have to click more than once.)
A tracker letter is placed above the contact line. Four trackers are
available for each sonar array.

A, B, C, and D: Spherical contacts.
E, F, G, and H: Hull contacts. (These trackers can only be
assigned in Narrowband)
I, J, K, and L: Towed array contacts.
If the spherical array already has four contacts assigned to trackers (A-
D) and you designate a new contact, the oldest tracker is unassigned

from its current contact and reassigned to the new contact. This is also
true for the hull and towed arrays. To unassign a specific tracker, click
on the letter and drag it into the waterfall display and release it.
Each contact you designate is assigned a sequential Sierra number:
S01, S02, S03, etc. The Sierra number, also called a Contact ID or
Track ID, and all available data on the contact are automatically sent to
TMA and the Nav Map.

If the towed array is not already deployed at mission start, stream it from
the Ship Control Station [F1]. No towed array contacts appear if the towed
array is not streamed. Be aware that towed array contacts do not appear
immediately when you deploy the array
Because of the physics of the towed array construction, an ambiguous
contact, a mirror image of each true contact, appears on the display along
with the true contact. If you have a contact at a bearing on your bow array,
you can be fairly certain a contact at the same or nearly the same bearing
on your towed array display is on the contacts true bearing.
true bearing is that of the contact that remains constant.
When numerous contacts are present or the contacts are close together,
this process can be very challenging.
Seawolf Broadband Data Display/Button Matrix

The components of the Seawolfs Broadband Data Display and Button
Matrix functionality are covered here.
Broadband Data Display Fields

Crsr Brg: Indicates the bearing at the location of the cursor in the
Broadband Search Display or of the tracker when a tracker is selected
with the Tracker Review button.
Sensor: Indicates which sensor is currently selected: Sphere or
Towed.
Tracker: Displays the tracker letter assigned to the selected contact.
Contact: Displays the Contact ID assigned to the selected tracker or
contact.
SNR: Displays the Signal to Noise Ratio at the location of the cursor.
SNR indicates the relatve strength of the signal.
WAA RNG: If acoustic conditions are favorable. Seawolfs Wide
Aperture Arrays (WAA) can provide limited range information for
contacts within 15,000 yds of Ownship.
BDrag the cursor over a broadband contact in the Broadband
Display to display a readout of the range to the contact as
determined by the WAA. If the contact is out of range nothing
appears here.
Seawolf Broadband Button Matrix

DISPLAY CENTER: Displays button options for setting the center of
the waterfall display to North (000 degrees) or South (180 degrees).
SELECT ARRAY: Displays button options for selecting which sensor
data will be displayed in the waterfall: Towed or Sphere.
ASSIGN TRACKER: Clicking here assigns a tracker to the contact at
the location of the cursor.
TRACKER REVIEW: Displays contact information in the Data Display
for each assigned tracker. Repeated clicks cycles through all trackers.
RAP LOC: Rapid Localization. Click to send any available WAA range
information on the selected sonar contact to TMA. A tracker must be
assigned to the contact. The range information appears on the next
TMA bearing line for the contact.
Seawolfs Wide Aperture Arrays (WAA) can provide limited range
information for contacts that are within 15,000 yards when

conditions permit.
AUDIO: Displays buttons to toggle the broadband audio ON and OFF.

When ON, the sound produced by a broadband contact is audible
when it is selected in the Broadband Display.
TIME SCALE TOP: Displays button options for setting the time
average in the upper Waterfall Display: Select STA, ITA, LTA (see
below).
TIME SCALE BOTTOM: Displays button options for setting the time
interval in the bottom Waterfall Display: Select STA, ITA, LTA (see
below).
STA = Short Time Average
ITA = Intermediate Time Average
LTA = Long Time Average
Sonar Selection Buttons: Click the button of the sonar station you want to
visit. Hold your cursor over a button to display the name of the station it
represents.
S E AW OL F N A R R OW B A N D S O N AR
signatures.
The ships computer narrows your search by presenting only those
signatures that have similarities to the signature of the selected contact.
Narrowband Search Display Narrowband DDI Button Matrix
Narrowband Waterfall Ship Classification Window
Seawolf Narrowband Displays

On the left side of the Narrowband station are three display windows. These
are (from top to bottom): the Narrowband Search, the Narrowband Waterfall
Display and the Ship Classification window. Each is described below.
NARROWBAND SEARCH DISPLAY: On the Narrowband Search Display
signals from the selected array display in an A-scan format. A contacts
signal displays as a spike at the bearing where it is detected. The height of
the spike represents signal strength. High peaks indicate strong signal
strength.
9 Note: Ownships speed can affect your ability to detect contacts in
Narrowband. When the entire signal line is near the top of the display
this indicates that background noise is very high. This usually
happens when your speed is over 5 knots for hull array contacts or
over 15 knots for towed array contacts. Decrease your speed to
reduce water flow over the array.
NARROWBAND WATERFALL DISPLAY: The Narrowband Waterfall
Display separates a signal from the bearing selected in the Narrowband
Search Display into discrete frequencies. The horizontal axis represents the
range of frequencies and the vertical axis represents time in seconds. The
frequency range is adjustable using the frequency scale as described
below. Vertical lines represent specific frequencies in the sound signal
emitted by the selected contact. Together all of the frequency lines
represent that contacts sonar signature.
9 Note: Straight lines indicate a consistent signal. Curved or wavy
vertical lines represent distortions or variations in the signal.
SHIP CLASSIFICATION WINDOW: This window displays the sound
signature of the class or weapon named in the Profile Selector. Click
DISPLAY SIGNATURE in the Button Matrix to access the Profile Selection
Panel and the Profile Selector. See Display Signature in the Narrowband
Button Matrix section below.
Seawolf Narrowband Data Display

Freq Scale: Displays the frequency scale currently set in the
Narrowband Waterfall Display and the Ship Classification Window. This
range is selected using the Frequency Scale button in the Narrowband
Button Matrix.
Crsr Freq: Displays the frequency at the location of the cursor in the
Narrowband Waterfall Display.
BTo select a signal, click the desired line in the Narrowband
Waterfall display. The cursor moves to that location in the
horizontal frequency display above the waterfall and the frequency
at the cursor location displays in this field.
Sensor: Displays the name of the selected array. Use the Select Array
button in the Button Matrix to select a different sensor.
Crsr Brg: Displays the location of the cursor in the bearing indicator at
the top of the Narrowband Search Window.
Tracker: Displays the assigned tracker letter of the selected contact
when the Tracker Review button is clicked on the Button Matrix.
Contact: Displays the contact ID of the contact selected when the
Tracker Review button is clicked on the button Matrix.
SNR: (Signal to Noise Ratio) This field displays the SNR of the
selected contact. A high number indicates a strong signal.
Seawolf Narrowband Button Matrix

The Seawolf utilizes a button matrix on many ship stations. Buttons
containing a down arrow display a second panel providing options related to
the button text. Buttons with no down arrows perform the described function
when clicked. Click BACK to return to the previous matrix.
DISPLAY CENTER: Displays a panel for setting the center of the
Narrowband Search Window to either North (000) or South (180).
SELECT ARRAY: Displays a panel for selecting which sensors
signals are displayed in the Narrowband Search window. (Sphere,
Towed, Hull.)
9 Note: The towed array must be deployed before any towed array
signals can be detected. The Towed Array is deployed in the Ship
Control Station.
TRACKER ASSIGN: Click to assign a tracker to the frequency line
selected in the Narrowband Waterfall Display.
9 Note: If the signal is weak you may have to click more than once to
designate the contact and assign the tracker. You cannot assign a
tracker while the game is paused.
TRACKER REVIEW: Click this button to cycle through all trackers
assigned in Narrowband on the chosen array. Information on each
tracker is viewed in the Data Display in the Cursor Frequency, Cursor
Bearing, Tracker, Contact, and SNR fields.
FREQUENCY SCALE: Displays a panel for selecting one the following
frequency ranges: 0 to 2000 (default), 1000, 500, 300, 150 and 50.
DISPLAY SIGNATURE: Displays the Profile Selection Panel. See
below.
Profile Selection Panel: The ships computer queries its
database and provides you with the names of ship classes or
weapons that have signatures similar to the currently selected
contact. The names of these ship classes or weapons can be seen
one at a time in the Profile Selector. The sound signature for the
class named in the Profile Selector displays in the Ship
Classification Window below the Narrowband Waterfall Display.
Profile Selection Panel
Database Filter ON
Profile Selector
Profile Selection Arrows
Classifying Contacts in Seawolf Narrowband

1. Click on a contact in the Narrowband Search Display. Detected
frequencies appear in the Narrowband Waterfall Display.
2. Click DISPLAY SIGNATURE to reveal the Profile Selection Panel. The

profile of the class name that appears in the Profile Selector is
displayed in the Ship Classification window below the Narrowband
Waterfall Display.
When the Profile Selector is set to FILTER ON it creates a list of
platforms known to have a similar sound signature profile to that of the

detected contact. When FILTER OFF is selected, all the ship and
weapon profiles are available to view. This is a long list!
If the detected signal is not strong enough the profile list may say
NONE.
3. Click the left and right facing profile selector arrows to cycle through
the available profiles.
4. Compare each ships signature in the Ship Classification window to the

signature of the selected contact in the Narrowband Waterfall display.
BTo change the frequency range displayed in the Waterfall Display
and the Ship Classification window, click the BACK then
FREQUENCY SCALE. Select a range to compare the frequencies
in that range.
5. When you find the profile that most closely matches the selected
contacts sound signature, leave that name selected in the Profile
Selector. Click BACK.
6. Click on one of the contacts frequency lines in the Narrowband

Waterfall Display then click TRACKER ASSIGN. You may need to click
more than once if the contact is weak.
The contact is assigned a contact ID and the class name selected in
the Profile Selector is assigned to the contact. (The class name

appears in the Navigation Station DDI when the contact is selected and
the 3D object for that class appears in the 3D view.)
You must still assign an alliance ID and a level of confidence to the
contact using right-click Contact Menus Designate Category/ID option

or the Contact Menus Classify Contact option.
Sonar Station Navigation Buttons: Click the desired button to move to
that Sonar Station.
S E AW OL F DEMON S O N AR S T A TI O N
when establishing an accurate firing solution and once determined at the
DEMON Station the value can be entered in the speed field in the TMA trial
solution field.
To determine a contacts speed accurately you must have classified the

contact in Narrowband, ESM or Stadimeter. The number of turns per knot
produced by a specific class is listed in the USNI Information for that class.
The steps for using DEMON to determine a contacts speed and how to use
DEMON to determine a contacts category are shown below.
Using DEMON to Calculate a Contacts Speed

1. First determine the class of the contact in the Narrowband, ESM or the
Stadimeter Station. In the USNI Browser, find the entry for the ship or
subs class and make note of the turns per knot number listed in the
TPK field.

Broadband sonar.
3. Click SELECT ARRAY. A panel containing array buttons appears.

Select the TOWED or SPHERE array. The selected button is green.
Click BACK.
4. Click TRACKER REVIEW until the Contact ID and tracker letter for the
contact you want to analyze appear in the DEMON Data Display. Lines
appear in the DEMON Waterfall Display
range.
BTo adjust the frequency range, click FREQUENCY SCALE in the
button matrix. A panel with frequency options appears. Click the
desired scale. Click BACK.
6. Click above the line farthest left in the Waterfall display to select it. A
vertical line above the contact indicates the line is selected.
7. Click TURNS PER KNOT in the button matrix.

8. In the panel that appears, click either INCREASE T.P.K. or
DECREASE T.P.K. as necessary to set the desired TPK value. The
TPK value entered is seen in the Data Display in the Turns Per Knot
field. The speed for the designated TPK is displayed in the Speed field
in the Data Display.
in the TMA SPEED field for the selected contact on the TMA Station.


2. Click TRACKER REVIEW to select the desired contact. Vertical lines
appear in the waterfall if a tracker is assigned and still reporting. The
first line on the left indicates the shaft rotation speed. The other lines
indicate individual blades on the propeller.
starting.
Seawolf DEMON Display

Seawolfs DEMON Data Display fields are described below
Turns Per Knot: Displays the number of turns currently set using the
Turns Per Knot button in the DEMON button matrix.
Speed: Displays the speed of the contact as calculated using the
Turns Per Knot button in the DEMON button matrix.
Tracker: The tracker letter of the selected contact appears in this field
when the Tracker Review button is clicked in the DEMON button
matrix.
Contact: The alphanumeric Contact ID displays in this field when the
Tracker Review button is clicked in the DEMON button matrix.
Crsr Freq: Displays the frequency at the location of the cursor in the
DEMON waterfall display.
Bearing: Displays the bearing of the selected contact when the
Tracker Review button is clicked in the DEMON button matrix.
SNR: Signal to Noise ratio of the selected contact.
Seawolf DEMON Button Matrix

SELECT ARRAY: Displays a panel for selecting which sensors
signals are displayed in the DEMON Waterfall when the Tracker
Review is clicked (Sphere or Towed.)
TRACKER REVIEW: Clicking this button cycles through the contacts
that have trackers assigned in the Broadband Station. Contact
information displays in the DEMON Data Display in the Tracker,
Cursor, Bearing and SNR fields.
FREQUENCY SCALE: Displays a panel for selecting the frequency

scale in use in the DEMON Waterfall. (20, 50 or 120)
TURNS PER KNOT: Displays a panel for adjusting the Turns Per Knot
setting for the selected contact. (Increase T.P.K. and Decrease T.P.K.)
S E AW OL F A C T I V E S ON AR S TA T I O N
Waters models both medium and high frequency active sonar for the
Seawolf class submarines

The bow array in active mode is used to detect and track contacts. Echoes
from a single ping or a series of pings are used to determine an objects
bearing and range. Information from a medium frequency active search is
sent to the TMA station for use in plotting a firing solution for the given
contact. While this information is very useful to you, it comes at a price.
Using active sonar gives away your bearing and alerts any ship in the area
to your presence. The ship may well assume you have hostile intentions
since active sonar is used primarily for targeting.

In the Seawolf s rectangular Active Sonar Display, the area at the bottom of
the display represents objects closest to your ship. The horizontal line
across the top represents bearing. The display updates from the bottom up.
In continuous mode each subsequent ping replaces the oldest data with the
newest.
baffles. Since the signals transmitted from the bow array cannot reach the
Active Sonar Contacts: Contacts appear as bright green spots on the
active display. A metallic ring is heard as each contact displays. The active
weak signal strength
square attached to a vertical line that indicates a specific bearing. The
distance of the cursor from the bottom of the display represents its range
from Ownship. The position of the vertical line on the Bearing Indicator
represents the bearing of the cursor. To move the cursor, click the desired
location on the display.
To determine a contacts bearing and range without marking the
contact, simply center the bearing-range cursor on the contact. The

contacts bearing and range appear directly below the active display in
the Crsr Brg and Crsr Rng fields. Range is given in yards.
Marking Contacts with MF Active Sonar

1. Click RANGE SCALE then in the resulting matrix panel click number of
the desired range to use in the active search: 5,10, 20, 40, or 80
(Ranges are in thousands of yards.) Longer ranges are appropriate for
the initial search. Once a contact is detected, you can adjust the range
scale of subsequent transmissions to improve the accuracy.
Selecting a new range halts continuous transmissions. You must click
transmit again to resume transmissions.
2. Click DISPLAY CENTER then select NORTH or SOUTH to center the

display on a bearing of either 000 or 180 degrees. Click BACK.
3. Click TRANSMIT TYPE then select SINGLE or CONTINUOUS pings. If

Single is selected, only one active sonar ping is transmitted. When
Continuous is chosen, active sonar pings are transmitted at a set
interval until the switch is reset to Single or you change the range
scale.
4. Click TRANSMIT to send transmissions of the selected type. The name

of the selected transmission type displays in the Active Sonar DDI in
the Transmit field. It may take a few seconds for the first returns to
appear.
9 Note: To stop the transmission, click again on the TRANSMIT button.
A valid contact gives consistent visual returns that are brighter than
background noise or reverberations. The audio return will have a

distinctive metallic ring to it and will be distinguishable from the
background noise.

bearing display in the Crsr Brg and Crsr Rng at the bottom of the Active
Sonar display. Range is in yards.
6. Click MARK to assign alphanumeric Contact ID to the selected contact.

Once a selected contact has been marked once, marking it again
sends an update of the contacts range and bearing to TMA and the
Nav Map.
7. The NTDS symbol for contacts marked with Active Sonar appear on
the Nav Map on the detected bearing and at the detected range at the
end of a green line of bearing (LOB)
8. If desired, click DESIGNATE TARGET to assign a Contact ID and a

tracker to the contact. The tracker automatically sends updated
information for the contact to TMA as long as there is a continuous
active sonar transmission. The ID and tracker are not assigned until
after the next ping.
9 Note: The spherical array has only four trackers. If you have all four

Seawolf Active Sonar Data Display

The fields of the Data Display above the Button matrix are briefly described
here.
Tracker: Displays the tracker letter of the selected contact when the
(tracker) Review button is clicked in the button matrix.
Contact ID: Displays the Contact ID of the selected tracker when the
(tracker) Review button is clicked in the button matrix.
Trkr Brg: Displays the bearing of the contact that is assigned to the
selected tracker when the (tracker) Review button is clicked in the
button matrix.
Trkr Rng: Displays the range of the contact that is assigned to the
selected tracker when the (tracker) Review button is clicked in the
button matrix.
Frequency: Displays the type of frequency selected with the
FREQUENCY button on the button matrix: Medium or High. Medium is
selected by default.
Transmit: Displays the type of transmission to be produced when the
Transmit button is clicked: Single or Continuous. The type of
transmission is selected via the TRANSMIT TYPE button on the button
matrix.
Seawolf MF Active Sonar Button Matrix

The functionality of the active sonar button matrix is described briefly below.
DISPLAY CENTER: Click to display options for setting the center of
the Active Display. Select NORTH to center the display at 000. Select
SOUTH to center the display at 180.
FREQUENCY: Displays options for selecting either MEDIUM or HIGH
frequency sonar transmission.
DESIGNATE TARGET: When the cursor is over a valid contact,
clicking this button assigns a tracker to the contact and also assigns it
an alphanumeric contact ID (S01, S02 etc.) Data on the contact is sent
to TMA and the tracker automatically sends updates to TMA as they
are received.
REVIEW: Cycles through all assigned trackers. Information pertaining
to the selected tracker appears in the Data Display.
MARK: Assigns a contact ID and sends data on the selected contact to
TMA and the Nav Map. No tracker is assigned.
Ensure that the cursor is centered on the most recent return from the
contact and click MARK. If you are in single ping mode it makes more
sense to use the Mark function rather than the Designate Target
feature so as not to waste a tracker.
RANGE SCALE: Displays options for setting the maximum range in

the Active Display. Numbers are in thousands of yards (5, 10, 20, 40,
80).
TRANSMIT TYPE: Displays options for selecting the type of
transmission you want to send: Single ping or continuous ping.
Continuous transmissions continue to ping until you stop it. This selects
only the type of transmission. It does not transmit the signal.
TRANSMIT: Click to transmit a signal of the type selected with the
Transmit Type Button. The type of transmission that is selected
displays in the Transmit field in the Active Sonar Data Display. To stop
a continuous ping, click Transmit, again.
Seawolf High Frequency Active Sonar

largest possible margin. Driving slowly will give you the best reaction time.
to find a safe route is to follow another ships path. HFAS is also useful for
avoiding dangerous ice ridges during under ice operations.
A single ping is not appropriate for mine avoidance therefore high frequency
active sonar transmits continuous pings. Always keep in mind that many
ships and submarines can detect any active sonar transmissions.
The Seawolfs HFAS is accessed from the Active Sonar station via the
FREQUENCY button. Fewer functions are available in High Frequency
mode. Marking contacts in this mode places markers on the Nav Map but
does not assign a Contact ID or send information to TMA. Marking any
contact in the HFAS Display marks ALL contacts detected within range.
You may need to zoom in on the Nav Map to see all of the contacts that
were marked.
Seawolf can detect contacts up to 5000 yards with the HFAS sensor. High
frequency returns provides an outline of ice keels making it a valuable tool
for under ice operations as well as navigating mine fields. The Ice
Thickness silhouette in the Ship Control Station is also helpful when
operating under the ice.
Marking Contacts with HF Active Sonar

1. Click FREQUENCY in the Active Sonar button matrix. The frequency
options appear in the matrix.
2. Click HIGH then BACK. The HFAS button matrix appears.

9 Note: Continuous pings are transmitted as soon as HIGH is selected
and any detected contacts appear in the Active Display immediately.
You must click BACK to access the HFAS button matrix and the
MARK button.
3. Click MARK once. A marker is placed on the Nav Map for each contact
detected by the sensor
9 Note: It is not necessary to select contacts with the Bearing/Range
cursor to mark them or to click more than once.
4. To return to the Medium Frequency Button Matrix, click FREQUENCY

on the button matrix to display the Frequency options.
5. Click MEDIUM then BACK.
S E AW OL F A C T I V E I NT E R C E PT S O N AR S T A TI O N
The Active Intercept function alerts you to the presence of active sonar
transmissions from another ship, sub, dipping sonar or sonobuoy in the
area. It provides the bearing of the transmitting entity as well as the
frequency of the detected emission, the age of the last signal and the
strength of the signal. Knowing the signal strength can assist you in
determining the relative proximity of the active sonar source.
Active Intercept Display on the bearing of the contact. The strength of the
signal is represented as a continuum of colored lights directly below the
display that move from green to red as the signal grows in strength.
Seawolf Active Intercept Display

The circular Active Intercept Display shows a representation of all detected
active sonar signals. A line from the center of the circular display to its outer
edge indicates the bearing of an intercepted signal. The thicker the line, the
stronger the contact.
Signal Strength: Indicates the strength of the selected signal. Green
indicates a weaker signal, red a stronger one.
Seawolf Active Intercept Data Display/Matrix

The fields of the Active Intercept Data Display are described here.
Frequency: Displays the frequency of the intercepted signal. (Active
Sonar Frequency ranges can be found in the USNI Browser in the
SENSORS entry.)
Bearing: Displays the bearing of the intercepted signal.
Age: Displays the time in seconds since the last signal.
SNR: Displays the Signal to Noise ratio for the selected contact.
Interval: Displays the interval between the last two signals.
MARK: The only button in the Active Intercept Button Matrix is the
MARK button.
BClick a contact line in the Active Intercept display to select the

contact then click MARK.
A Contact ID is assigned to the contact and the bearing information is
sent to the Nav Map and TMA. Each time that the signal is selected
and marked again the current bearing of that contact is sent to TMA.
S E AW OL F SSP S T A TI O N (S OU N D S P EE D P R O F I L E )
mission, always check the depth of the layer at your location. See
Training/Sonar School/Underwater Sound Propagation for more information
on thermal layers.
reports depth and sound speed information in both graph and table format

When you enter the SSP station the last received results are available. This
step clears the existing profile and initiates a new XBT reading.
BClick LAUNCH in the button matrix. The layer depth is reported in
the Data Display

reporting. This may result in a delay before the SSP updates. Wait for
the XBT to reach the surface and drop
To change the range seen in the graph, click Change Depth Scale,
click the desired number then click BACK.

world, a distinct thermal layer is not always present.
S E AW OL F UUV S O NA R
range to the contact. UUVs are particularly useful when navigating a
minefield and can be operated in Passive or Active mode.
torpedoes from there. See Seawolf Station/Seawolf Fire Control
S EAWOLF RADAR S TATION [F3]

M AR K I N G
1. Ensure that Ownship is at Radar depth (51 feet) or less and moving at
8 knots or less if the sail is submerged.
2. Click RAISE in the RADAR MAST Panel in the upper right of the
station to raise the mast. The READY light glows continuously when
the radar mast is extended and radiating.
3. Click the desired button in the RANGE SCALE to set the radar sweep
to that range.
4. If range rings are desired on the Radar display, click the desired button
under RANGE RINGS to set the ring scale to that distance. Below the
Radar Display click RANGE RINGS to ON.
5. Contacts show up as bright orange spots on the display. Click on a

contact to select it with the Bearing-Range Cursor or click and drag the
cursor to center it on a contact.
Nav Map.
9 Note: Radiating while the mast is submerged destroys the radar.
S EAWOLF R ADIO -ESM S TATION [F4]

In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters the Radio Room and the ESM (Electronic
Support Measures) stations and are combined. The radio is used to receive
intelligence and tasking updates and update Link data while underway. The
ESM console allows you to detect and classify contacts when the ESM
console is extended.
Radio Message window
Seawolf Radio-ESM Station
S E AW OL F E L E C TR O NIC S U PP OR T M E A S U R E S (ESM)
Because you must have the ESM mast is exposed, you make your ship
The left half of the Radio-ESM Station contains the ESM Display and
controls. The ESM sensor provides a bearing to detected contacts. The
ships computer analyses the detected transmission and compares it to
those in its database thus providing the class of the transmitting platform.
Detecting and Classifying Contacts with ESM

1. Come to 58 feet (or less) and maintain a speed of 10 knots or less if
the sail is submerged before raising the ESM mast.
2. Click the ESM ANTENNA switch to the RAISE position to raise the
mast. When the triangular cursor appears in the ESM Display, the ESM
is in detection mode. Contacts appear as a narrow wedge of lines
emanating from the center of the display on a specific bearing.

and to view the source of the signal. The name of the detected emitter
appears in the SOURCE field. The bearing to the contact appears in
the BEARING readout.
Take note of the intensity of the contact on the ESM Display and the
number and color of ESM Signal Strength Indicator lights that are lit. A
strong signal can indicate that the contact is relatively close. (Green
indicates a weaker signal, red a strong one.)
4. Click a contact signal to select it then click Mark. This assigns an

alphanumeric Contact ID to the contact and sends the bearing
information to TMA and the Nav Map. ESM contacts have E
designations (E01, E02, etc.) Once marked the Contact ID appears in
front of the emitter name in the SOURCE field.

field. You must still assign an ID (Hostile, Friendly etc.) from the
R A D I O R O OM
The right side of the Radio-ESM console represents the Radio Room. Here
messages containing important intelligence and tasking information are
received and contact positions are downloaded from any platforms in the
mission that are part of your Link network.
When Link information is downloaded any surface and air Link participants
mission.
R EC E I VI N G R AD I O M E S S A GE S
AND
L I NK D A T A
To receive messages you must come to Communications Depth (Comms

Depth) and raise the radio mast or stream the floating wire antenna. There
not need to expose a mast to receive messages. Follow these instructions
to deploy the radio mast or floating wire.
Radio Mast: Take the ship to 59 ft and set ship speed to 10 knots or
less when the sail is submerged to avoid damaging the mast when it is
raised. In the Radio Antenna panel click RAISE to extend the Radio
Mast.
Streaming Wire: You do not have to come to comms depth but it helps
to be fairly near the surface. Set ships speed to 18 knots or less to
avoid damaging the wire. Slower speeds allow the wire to float up more
quickly. If speed exceeds 5 knots, the wire may never reach the
its length in order to ensure message reception. Click right-facing
double arrows to stream the floating wire. A progress bar indicates how
much of the wire is currently deployed. Click the square (Stop) button
to stop the winch. Click the left-facing arrows to retrieve the array.

3. Look on the Nav Map if you are waiting for Link data to determine when

data.
depth and speed.
T O TH E
L I NK

the Link to share it with other Link participants in your area. (Your contacts
updates, you must also come to comms depth and raise the radio mast
before you can promote your contacts to the Link.
1. Come to comms depth (59 ft) and raise the radio antenna.
3. If possible, determine an accurate firing solution and enter it at the

TMA station.
The contacts symbol appears on the Nav Map of all players in a
S EAWOLF N AVIGAT ION S TATION [F5]

regardless of controllable platform and is covered only once in this manual
in Navigation Station.
seen on the Nav Map and the 3D View and information on what is seen
when various filters are applied. The Seawolfs Task Bar is covered in this
section. See Navigation Station. Several options are unique to the
submarines in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
S E AW OL F O W NS H I P /O R D E R S M E NU S
Seawolfs Ownship Menu items are identical to those in the Task Bar
Orders Menu. See Seawolf Stations/Seawolf Task Bar/Orders Menu for a
description of those menu items. The rest of the Ownship Options require
the use of the Nav Map. These are the same from platform to platform. See
Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Ownship Menu for complete

information.
S E AW OL F C O N T AC T M E NU
NTDS symbol. Most menu items are the same from platform to platform.
See Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Contact Menu. Several options
are unique to the subs in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
Engage With: The weapons you will see in the Engage With menu are
found in Seawolf Stations/Seawolf Fire Control Suite/Seawolf Tactical
Weapons and the Seawolf Strategic Weapons. Only weapons appropriate
to the selected target are available. Others are greyed out.
the game.
Rescue Vehicle (DSRV) to travel to the selected contact. This option is
only selectable when the following conditions are met:

depth requirements are met. It is available only in the Contact Menu for
surface ships and landbased (Category: Stationary) targets such as
buildings or the floating Oil Rig, and only under these conditions:
The selected contact is a surface ship or a landbased target
(Category: Stationary) such as a buildings or the floating Oil Rig.

less.
S EAWOLF F IRE C ONTROL S UITE [F6]

deployed.
Seawolf has four stations in its Fire Control Suite: The Target Display,
Launch Panel, Countermeasure Launch Panel and the Weapons Inventory.
These are reached by clicking one of the navigation buttons at the bottom
left of each of the Seawolfs Fire Control Stations.
Launch Panel
CM Launch Panel
Fire Control
Navigation Buttons
Target Display
Weapon Inventory
S E AW OL F T A R G E T D IS PL AY
Seawolfs Target Display consists of the Fire Control map, the Tube
Selection Panel and the Target Designation and Preset Panel. From the
Target Display the weapon in a specific tube is targeted at a specific
contact and weapon presets appropriate for the target are entered.
Fire Control Map
Fire Control Map View Controls
Target
Designation
and Presets
Panel
Fire Control Navigation Buttons
Fire Control Map

weapon.
Seawolf Tube Selection Panel

The lower left of the Target Display contains the Tube Selection Panel. A
number represents each of the Seawolfs eight torpedo tubes. Following
each number are two small display windows. The lower window, the
Weapon Window, displays the name of the weapon loaded in the tube. The
upper window, the Target Window, displays the Contact ID or target
assigned to the weapon. Dashes indicate that no target is assigned to the
weapon in that tube.
BClick a tube number to select it.
9 Note: TLAMS and SLMMs are not assigned Contact IDs. Waypoints
are placed on the map for the weapon to follow. WYPT appears in
the Target Window when waypoints have been assigned to TLAMS
or SLMMs. A UUV is a sensor and cannot be assigned a target.
Tube Number
Target Window
Weapon Window
Target Designation and Presets Panel

The right side of the Target Display contains Target Designation and
Presets Panel. The panel is divided into functional areas. The upper portion
of the panel contains the Map View Controls Target Designation area. The
following options are available.
Center OS: When this option is selected the map symbol for Ownship is
always centered in the Fire Control map when the map is zoomed in.
Weapon Waypoints: When ON, all waypoints assigned to any land attack
missile or mine display on the map. When this option is OFF only the
waypoints for the weapon in the selected tube show on the map.
Designate Target: This drop-down list contains all of the Track IDs
currently marked by Ownship and Link participant and Link contact Track
IDs if Show Link is ON. A Track ID selected in this list is available for
assignment to a specific tube as described below with the following
caveats.
with a snapshot. See Seawolf Stations/Fire Control Station/Seawolf
Target Display/Firing A Snapshot. Create a TMA solution for the
contact to make it available for tube assignment.
Unknown Category Contacts: Track IDs for contacts that have a
sub surface platform type cannot be assigned to a tube. A snapshot
can be assigned.
9 Note: No Contact IDs appear in the Designate Target list if Show
Truth is on or if you have not yet marked any contacts with one of
your sensors and no Link contacts have been downloaded.
Assign Target: Click this button to assign the contact selected in the
Designate Target drop-down list to the tube selected in the Tube Selection
Panel. The Contact ID appears in the Target Window for the selected tube.
9 Note: Certain weapons can only be used against specific types of
contacts. For example, you are not able to assign a sub-only weapon
to a target designated as a surface contact. Until a contact is
assigned a category (surface or subsurface), it cannot be assigned
to any tube. Assign a category from the Nav Map by right-clicking the
selected contacts symbol and selecting Designate
Category/ID>Platform Category.
The lower portion of the panel displays the presets for the weapon in the
selected tube. Presets vary depending on the weapon. See Seawolf
Stations/Fire Control Suite/Presets.
Assigning a Target to a Tube

1. Click the desired contact symbol on the Fire Control map or select the
contact ID from the Designate Target drop-down list.

target. (If the weapon you need is not loaded in a tube, go to the
Launch Panel and load the desire weapon. See Seawolf
Stations/Seawolf Fire Control Suite/Seawolf Launch Panel.
3. Click Assign Target. The Contact ID appears in the Target Window of

the selected tube in the Tube Selection Panel.
4. Presets for the weapon in the selected tube appear in the lower portion
of the Target Designation and Preset panel. Click or right-click on digits
as needed to adjust the settings. For information on preset settings see
Seawolf Stations/Seawolf Fire Control Suite/Seawolf Presets.
Firing A Snapshot
When a contact does not yet have a TMA solution or has not yet been
categorized as surface or subsurface, it can only be targeted with a
snapshot. A snapshot is simply a weapon fired down the line of bearing to
the contact. Since you have no range information you fire and hope that the
weapon will home on the contact.
1. In the Tube Selection Panel click the number of the tube containing the
desired weapon.
2. From the Designate Target Dropdown list, select SNAPSHOT

3. Click Assign Target. The Snapshot (Deg) preset appears above the
other weapon presets.
4. Click or right-click the digits in the SNAPSHOT preset to enter the

bearing to the contact. (Select the contact symbol on the Fire Control
map to read the current bearing to the contact in the map DDI.)
Assigning Waypoints to a TLAM or SLMM

1. Select a tube containing a TLAM or SLMM.
2. Click Define Target Waypoints in the preset area.
3. Click the Fire Control map to place the waypoints.
4. Click and drag a waypoint as needed to adjust its location and enter a
destruct range for the weapon.
Assigning a UUV Sensor a tube

Because the UUV is a sensor it is not assigned a target
1. Select a tube containing a UUV.

2. If a depth other than Ownship depth is desired, deselect Use OS Depth
in the Preset Panel and enter the exact depth you want in the Depth
preset that appears..
3. Launch the UUV from the Launch Panel

Once targets and presets are assigned, click the Launch Panel icon and fire
the weapon from the Launch Panel.

Once a torpedo is fired, its symbol appears on the Fire Control map. When
the weapon enables, two red lines extend from the torpedo symbol
indicating the weapons search cone. Until a torpedo enables, it can be wireguided.
BClick the torpedos symbol on the Fire Control map.
The following Wire Guide Controls appear in the Preset area.
heading.
distance set in the Run To Enable preset and start the weapon in
search mode
be shutdown.
homing.
S E AW OL F L AU NC H P A NE L
The Launch Panel is composed of the Launcher Control Panel, the Tube
and Weapon Selection Panel and the Presets Panel.
Tube Status Bar
Launcher Control Panel
Presets Panel
Tube and Weapon Selection Panel
Launcher Control Panel

The Launcher Control Panel displays Launcher Controls for the two
selected tubes. Above each Launcher Control is the Tube Status Bar
containing the tube number, the name of the weapon loaded and the
assigned target. The two tubes that display here are selected by clicking on
a pair of tube numbers in the Tube and Weapon Selection Panel below.
Tube and Weapon Selection Panel

Clicking on a tube number in the Tube and Weapon Selection Panel selects
that tube number as well as the one above or below it and displays the
Launcher Controls for the selected tubes in the Launch Panel. From the
Tube and Weapon Selection Panel you can also change the weapon
loaded in a specific tube. The name of the weapon currently loaded in the
tube displays in green following each tube number.
Presets Panel
Adjacent to each Launcher Panel is a Preset Panel containing the presets
currently assigned to the weapon in the Launcher Control Panel. Presets
entered from the Target Display are viewed here and can be adjusted if
desired prior to weapon launch.

1. In the Target Display, assign a contact to a tube and set presets as
appropriate.
2. In the Launch Panel, click the number of the desired tube in the Tube
and Weapon Selection to select it. The tubes Launcher Controls
display in the Launch Panel. Adjust presets in the preset panel to the
right of the Launcher Control if desired.
9 Note: Only rectangular buttons are selectable at various stages in
the launch procedure. A green outline around a rectangular button
indicates it can be selected at this stage of the launch sequence.
Selected buttons flash until the indicated process is complete.
3. Click FLOOD. This button initiates the process that floods and
equalizes the tube. When the tube is flooded the FLOOD button text is
green. Reselecting this button at this point reverses the process.
4. Click MUZZLE DOOR to open the muzzle door. The button flashes
until the door is open. The SYSTEM READY buttons turns green and
the LAUNCH button is selectable.
5. Click LAUNCH to fire the weapon

To Wire Guide a torpedo return to the Target Display and select the
torpedo symbol on the Fire Control map.

9 Note: If the Launch button is not selectable make sure there is a
target assigned to the tube. Also check the High-Pressure Air bank in
Ship Control. A weapon launch requires a charge of at least 50% in
your air banks. If you have fired numerous weapons or performed an

emergency main ballast tank blow, your air bank may be depleted
and must be recharged. See Seawolf Stations/Ship Control Station.
Reversing the Launch Process

If the launch procedure has started but the weapon has not yet been
launched, the launch procedure must be reversed before the weapon in the
tube can be changed. At this stage the MUZZLE DOOR outline and text is
green. The LAUNCH button is outlined in green.
1. Click MUZZLE DOOR to start the reverse the process. The button
flashes until both button and outline are orange.
2. FLOOD now appears with both green text and outline. Click FLOOD to
reverse this step and drain the tube.
3. Once the FLOOD text is orange the tube can be reloaded.

9 Note: When the weapon has been fired the reverse procedure
happens automatically when you click MUZZLE DOOR. Be aware
that closing the MUZZLE DOOR cuts the wire for any wire-guided
weapon.
Reloading/ Changing the Weapon in a Tube

The unload/load process takes 16 minutes. Loading an empty tube takes 8
minutes. If Fire Control Quick Launch option is selected in the
Options>Game page, the Unload/load time is cut to 35 seconds and loading
an empty tube is cut to 20 seconds.
1. In the Launch Panels Tube and Weapon Selection Panel, click the
name of the weapon in the tube you want to reload. (If the tube has
been fired, click Empty.) Repeated clicks cycle through all the weapons
available for loading in this tube.
2. Stop clicking when you see the name of the weapon or UUV you want
to load.
If you click an empty tube and the weapon names do not cycle, the
muzzle door for that tube is still open. Click MUZZLE DOOR of the
empty tube. This closes the muzzle door and automatically drains the
tube in preparation for reload. If the tube has not been fired, the
reverse steps must be done manually.
9 Note: Closing the muzzle door cuts the wire on the torpedo or UUV
launched from the tube. Wire guiding is no longer possible and you
no longer receive sonar reports from the UUV once the wire is cut.
The Unload/Load Process

If the tubes number is selected while it is being reloaded, you notice the
WEAPON STOWED indicator blinks in the tubes Launcher Control Panel.
The name of the weapon originally loaded in the tube displays in the Tube
Status Bar while the name of the weapon to be loaded appears in the Tube
and Weapon Selection Panel.
Once the original weapon is unloaded the name of the weapon being
loaded displays in the Tube Task Bar and the Target Assignment is cleared.
(You must reassign a target to the new weapon from the Target Display.)
The presets for the new weapon appear in the Presets Panel. The reload
process is not complete until the Weapon Stowed indicator stops blinking.
Tip: Be very careful where you click in the Tube and Weapon Selection
Panel. If you intend to select the tube number but click the weapon name
instead, you start a reload of that tube. A reload is time consuming!
The Seawolf can carry Tomahawk Land Attack Missiles (TLAMs). To attack
a land target from Fire Control, the latitude and longitude coordinates of the
site must be fed into the fire control system and a series of waypoints
defined for the missile to follow. The coordinates are usually defined in a
tasking message.
1. Set Ownship depth to 150 ft or less and a speed of 6 knots or less. Do

not fire the missile until this depth and speed have been achieved or
the missile will fail on launch.
2. From the Target Display Station click the number of a tube containing a
land attack missile. The DEFINE TARGET WAYPOINTS option
appears in the Presets Panel.

If a landfall waypoint is directed in your tasking make sure that one of
the earlier waypoints is placed at that latitude and longitude.
LAYING
MINEFIELD
Follow these steps to lay a minefield.
3. Set Waypoints for each mine to follow. In the Target Display Panel click
the tube number to select. Click DEFINE TARGET WAYPOINT in the
Preset Panel then click the Fire Control map to place the waypoint.
readout at the bottom of the Fire Control map or enter the desired
latitude and longitude in the waypoint presets.
tell when to fire the tube. See Navigation Station/2D Map/Map Menu.
5. When all mines are ready to fire, launch the mines in the planned order
from the Launch Panel or with the Fire Tube command in the Orders
Menu.
D E PL OY I N G
AN D

2. In the Launch Panel click the number of a tube containing a UUV. The
UUV presets appear in the Launch Panel Presets Panel.
3. To launch a UUV to a depth other than Ownship depth, click the

checkmark to deselect USE OS DEPTH and display the DEPTH
preset. Click or right-click a digit to increase or decrease the value.
Menus using the FIRE TUBE command without visiting the Fire Control
Wire-Guiding and Enabling UUV Active Sonar

1. From the Target Display select the UUV symbol on the Fire Control
map. The UUV has a U in the center of the symbol. The wire-guide
controls appear in the Preset Panel
2. Click the ORDERED HEADING arrows to adjust the course of the

UUV.
active sonar mode can be enabled at any time as long as the wire is
still attached and the 30-minute battery is functioning. Be aware that
capable ships and subs in the area can detect UUV active sonar.
However, active sonar may be necessary when traversing a minefield.
Follow these steps to enable UUV active sonar.

mode.
5. Click SHUTDOWN to stop sonar reports.

returns.
UUV Returns
Sonar returns from the UUV are automatically assigned a Track ID and can
be found in the TMA Selected Track drop-down list and on the Nav and Fire
Control maps. UUV sonar returns do not show up on any of the screens of
the Sonar Suite although the UUV itself displays as a contact in Broadband
and Narrowband Sonar. Depending on its course, the UUV may provide
returns on Ownship.


S E AW OL F C OU N TE R M E ASU R E L AU NC H P A NE L
Active and passive decoys are available in external and internal tubes. The
loadout in the Seawolfs external countermeasure tubes can only be
changed from Weapons Loadout Screen prior to starting a mission. Internal
tubes can be loaded during gameplay as long as countermeasures are
available.
The Seawolfs Countermeasure Launch Panel consists of The External
Tubes Launch Controls, the Internal Tubes Launch Controls, the Presets
Panel, the External Tube Presets Selector, and the Internal Tube Preset
and Countermeasure Selector.
External Tubes Launcher Controls
External Tubes Presets Selector
Presets Panel
Internal Tubes Launcher Controls
Internal Tubes Presets and CM Selector
External CM Tubes Launcher Controls

Each external tube can contain two countermeasures. In S.C.S.
Dangerous Waters you can launch each of these separately. The upper and
lower Launch buttons correspond to the upper and lower countermeasures
named above the Launch buttons.
Launching a Countermeasure:
1. In the Internal or External Tubes Presets Selector click the number of
the tube you want to fire. (The tube number above or below the
selected tube is also selected.) The presets for the selected tubes
appear in the Presets Panel.
2. Use OS Depth is selected by default. To enter an exact depth for the

countermeasure, deselect Use OS Depth to display the Depth preset.
Click or right-click the digits in the Depth preset to adjust the number
values.
3. Find the desired tube number in the Countermeasure Launch Controls

Panel and click LAUNCH. Launch buttons outlined in green can be
fired. An orange outline indicates that the tube is empty.
4. If the tube fired was an internal tube, reload the tube.
Reloading an Internal CM Tube

Only the internal countermeasure tubes can be reloaded.
BIn the Internal Tubes Presets and Countermeasure Selector click
EMPTY or the name of the countermeasure you want to change
and continue to click to cycle though the available options.
S E AW OL F W E A PO N I N VE N T OR Y
The Weapons Inventory simply displays the current type and number of
weapons on board your sub. No interaction is possible. The numbers
decline as appropriate each time a weapon or countermeasure is
dispensed.
S E AW OL F T AC T IC A L W EA P O NS
The Seawolf Class submarines carry weapons capable of targeting surface
ships, submarines and land targets. For gameplay purposes the Seawolf
can also target helicopters and low-lying planes from the sail bridge with a
shoulder mounted SAM launcher when surfaced. Available weapons are
described briefly below.
Mk 48 Torpedo ADCAP (Advanced Capability): This weapon can be
used against both surface and submarine targets and can be wire-guided. It
has a maximum range of 27 nm, a maximum speed of 55 knots and a
maximum depth of 2,394 feet,
TLAM (Tomahawk Land Attack Missile): The Tomahawk is the standard
sub-launched strike weapon for use against land targets. It has a range of
approximately 1400 nm For successful launch of this weapon during
gameplay, Ownship depth must not exceed 150 feet and speed must not
exceed 6 knots.
Gameplay Weapons
TASM (Tomahawk Antiship Missile): For gameplay purposes TASMs
are assigned to the Seawolf and 688(I) class submarines. In actuality,
these weapons have been removed from the fleet and are being
converted to Tomahawk Land Attack Missiles. The TASM has a
warhead of 500 kg and a range of 250 nm. For successful launch of
this missile during gameplay, Ownship depth must not exceed 150 feet
and speed must not exceed 6 knots.
Harpoon: (Anti-Ship Missile): Seawolf and 688(I) class subs no
longer carry Harpoons. They are available for gameplay purposes in
the loadout screen but they are not loaded by default. The Harpoon
has a range of 70 nm. For successful launch of this missile during
gameplay, Ownship depth must not exceed 150 feet and speed must
not exceed 6 knots.
S E AW OL F S TR A TE G IC W E AP O N S
Mk 67 SLMM: The submarine-launched mobile mine is a modified Mk 37
torpedo whose warhead was replaced by a Mk 13 mine warhead. The
torpedos propulsion system is used to maneuver the mine to the
coordinates programmed into its guidance system. The SLMM has a 235 kg
warhead, a maximum speed of 26 knots and a maximum range of 11.5 nm
S E AW OL F C OU N TE R M E ASU R E S
torpedo from destroying your sub. The Seawolf carries Active and Passive
the Ownship or Orders Menus Countermeasure option.
Orders Menus Countermeasures option can be launched at either a
Shallow (100 feet) or Deep (800 feet) depth.
S E AW OL F P R E S E T S
Everything that can be launched from the Fire Control Station has at least
one preset. Presets are instructions that tell the weapon or UUV or
countermeasure what to do. All presets are presented here alphabetically
by type.
BClick/right-click on the digits to increase or decrease the value.

Harpoon and TASM
ships in the area.
Seeker Activate: Sets the range in nautical miles at which the missile
begins to search. This can be used to help discriminate against other
Wide Seeker Pattern: When checked the search pattern is set to wide.
When deselected the search pattern is narrow. This can be used to
help discriminate against other shipping in congested waters.
9 Note: Your ship must be at 150 ft or less and at 6 knots or less to
successfully launch one of these antiship weapons.

TLAM
follow.
precise Latitude and Longitude for the waypoint. Click or right-click the
preset digits to increase or decrease the value. You can also click a
waypoint and drag it to the desired location. Watch the
Latitude/Longitude readout in the lower left of the Fire Control map
when dragging a waypoint to determine the waypoints current location.
and friendly ships in the area.
9 Note: Your ship must be at 150 ft or less and at 6 knots or less to
successfully launch one of these Land Attack Missiles. Waypoints
must be assigned before the missile can be launched.
Mine Presets
SLMM
it to the desired location. Watch the Latitude/Longitude readout in the
lower left of the Fire Control map when dragging a waypoint to
determine the waypoints current location.
Torpedo Presets
Mk 48 ADCAP
Search Pattern: Set the search pattern for the weapon (Circle or
Snake)
RTE (yds): (Run To Enable) Set the distance (in yards) the weapon
travels before it enables and starts its active search. Enabling the
weapon too soon can alert the target in time to take evasive measures.
Enabling too late can mean the weapon runs past the target.
Active: When Checked the weapon is launched in Active sonar mode.
Deselect to launch the weapon in Passive mode.
Countermeasure and UUV Presets

Ownship. Use OD Depth is selected by default. Deselect the option to
S EAWOLF TMA S TATION [F7]

At the Target Motion Analysis (TMA) station, data from the Seawolfs
sensors are used to determine a contacts bearing, range, course and
speed. This information, called a target solution or simply a solution, is
necessary to accurately target a contact with your ships weapons.
perform target motion analysis at the Seawolfs TMA station.
S E AW OL F TMA S T A TI O N C O M PO N E NT S
The Seawolfs TMA station is composed or several distinct areas: The TMA
solution input area and the solution area. These areas are described briefly
below. See the Training Section on TMA for additional information about
these areas.
TMA Display
Cursor Readouts
Lock Button
TMA Data Display
Track Selection Options

Enter Solution into System
Seawolf TMA Display

The TMA Display, sometimes called the TMA Board, presents a
representation of Ownship, a history of bearing data for a selected contact,
a TMA ruler and an error dot stack. These tools are used to analyze sensor
inputs.
Bearing Lines (LOBs)

When a sensor sends a bearing report to the TMA a history of each report
is maintained. When a contact is selected the bearing report history for that
Spherical (bow) array:
White
Blue
Towed Array:
Purple
Active sonar:
Green
Active Intercept:
Yellow
Periscope or ESM:
Red
Radar:
Yellow
UUV passive sonar:
White
UUV active sonar:
Green

Right-click the TMA Display to change the bearing return history on the
TMA Display. As long as a tracker is tracking, bearing information is sent to
TMA in two-minute intervals. If the screen gets too cluttered, change the
number of lines that are displayed. History options available are 10 minutes,
20 minutes (default), 1 hour and 4 hours. A check mark indicates the
selected option.
TMA Dot Stack
Ruler Handle
TMA Ruler
Line of Bearing (LOB) history.
Ownship
The TMA Ruler

of the dot stack.


numerical form in the Solution Input Area under the TMA Display.
Tip: Center on the ruler and zoom in to better manipulate the ruler and
access the handle. If you have difficulty dragging the ruler to get the
arrowhead pointed in the desired direction, enter the desired course
number in the course field. You can also press [SHIFT] and click and drag
the TMA Display where you want to place the end of the ruler or press
[SHIFT] and right-click and drag to place the arrowhead.
The Dot Stack

stacking the dots.
Seawolf TMA Data Display

The upper right corner of the TMA station contains the TMA Data Display.
The named fields in the Data Display are described briefly here.
Contact: The upper Contact field displays the contact ID that is selected in
the SELECT drop-down list and the second instance displays the contact ID
that is selected in the MERGE drop-down list. See Select Tracks below.
Source: The upper Source field displays the sensor source (e.g. Sphere or
Towed) of the contact selected in the SELECT drop-down list and the
second instance of the word displays the sensor source of the contact
selected in the MERGE drop-down list. See TMA Button Matrix/Select
Tracks below.
Firing Solution: Also called the system solution, the values seen here
represent the current solution in use by the Fire Control system for the
selected contact. These fields display zeros until you have clicked ENTER
SOLN in the TMA Trial Solution Area.
click the ENTER SOLN button again.
Seawolf TMA Button Matrix

In the lower left of the TMA station is the main TMA button Matrix. Buttons
with downward pointing arrows display additional controls.
SELECT TRACKS: Click to display the contact selection matrix and the
following options:
MERGE: Merges the contacts selected in the Select and Merge dropdown lists.
SPLIT: Splits the merged contact (M01, M02 etc) selected in the
SELECT drop-down list into its two original components.
DROP: Permanently drops the contact selected in the SELECT dropdown list.
SELECT Drop-down list: Displays the Contact IDs of all contacts
marked by OS sensors. When a contact is selected here its bearing
history is displayed on the TMA board.
MERGE Drop-down list: Displays all Contact IDs except that of the
contact selected in the SELECT drop-down list. When a contact is
selected here, its bearing history appears on the TMA board along with
that of the contact selected in the SELECT drop-down list.
BACK: Returns to the main button matrix.
TIME: Click to display the numbered buttons that control the minutes of
bearing history to be displayed on the TMA Board. As long as a tracker is
tracking, bearings are plotted every 2 minutes, therefore 10 min = up to 5
bearing lines, 20 min = up to 10 bearing lines, etc. Options are 10, 20, 60
and 240 minutes.
TMA Display View Controls: The buttons in the lower three-quarters of the
main TMA button Matrix contain controls for adjusting the view on the TMA
Display board.
CENTER ON OWNSHIP: Click to center the OS symbol in the TMA
Display.
Arrows: Click to move the view in the direction of the arrow.
ZOOM IN/ZOOM OUT: Click to zoom the view as indicated or use

these keyboard/mouse
BPress [CTRL] and click to zoom out. Press [CTRL] and right-click
to zoom in.
BRoll the mouse wheel forward to zoom in, backward to zoom out.
Seawolf TMA Trial Solution Area

Lock Buttons: Click the button to the above of each field to lock the
contacts.)
CENTER ON RULER: Click to bring the ruler to the center of the TMA
Board.
ENTER SOLN: Click to enter the values in the trial solution fields into
the fire control system. The NTDS symbol for this contact is located on
the Nav and Fire Control maps at the designated bearing and range
and moves on the course and speed entered here.
A prior to selecting another contact. This means that unless you
TMA
ON

See Seawolf Stations/Seawolf Periscope-Stadimeter
Stations/Seawolf Stadimeter Station. When visual or periscope
contacts are referred to in this section, it is assumed that you have
determined a range for the contact and marked it in the Stadimeter
Station. The Periscope and Stadimeter Stations work hand in glove.
To determine a target solution for Active Sonar, Periscope or

Radar Contacts:
1. Click SELECT TRACKS. From the SELECT dropdown list select a
contact ID.
designation, and active sonar contacts have an S designation the same

as passive sonar contacts.
marked.

radiating.)
your chosen sensor.
the range triangle.
BMove the ruler to the location of the range triangle, click CENTER
ON RULER then click the zoom buttons to better adjust the view. If
you lose site of the ruler, zoom all the way out or click the red
center on ruler button again.
solution.
5. Click ENTER SOLN to send the trial solution to the Fire Control
system.
TMA
ON
AND
ESM
C O NT A C TS

accurate solution.

1. Click SELECT TRACKS. From the SELECT dropdown list select a
contact ID.
A line of bearing appears on the TMA Display. The ruler appears at the
with a default speed of 10 knots. These default values appear in the
trial solution fields directly to the right of the TMA Display.

BClick CENTER ON RULER then click the zoom buttons to better
adjust the view.
ON RULER again.
the ruler to see it at that speed. You also can set the speed
temporarily to 10 knots or more. This will expand the ruler and reveal
the handle.


DEMON, enter that speed in the speed field. See Seawolf
Stations/Seawolf Sonar Suite/Seawolf DEMON Sonar Station. Click the
digits to cycle through the values.
If you are sure about one aspect of the solution (e.g. range) enter that
from dragging the ruler to a different range.
dot stack has been achieved, click ENTER SOLN to send this
The entered system solution displays in the Firing Solution fields in the
TMA Data Display. To update the contacts system solution, adjust the
ruler or directly input information in the trial solution fields and click
ENTER SOLN again.
and/or speed (a contact zig.). Attempt to achieve a better fit of the
ruler by disregarding some of the earlier bearing lines and looking only
at recent bearings.

1. Click SELECT TRACKS. From the SELECT drop-down list select one
of the contacts to be merged.
2. From the MERGE drop-down list select the track to be merged with the
contact selected in the SELECT drop-down list.

SELECT drop-down and click the SPLIT button.
9 Note: If the TMA Autocrew is activated you cannot move the TMA
ruler. Seawolf Autocrew/Seawolf TMA Autocrew
TMA
ON

UUVs see Seawolf Stations/Seawolf Fire Control Suite/Deploying and WireGuiding UUVs.
or passive mode.
S EAWOLF P ERISCOPE -S TADIMETER S TAT IONS

[F8]
The Seawolf Periscope Station in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters merges the
functionality of the Periscope with that of the Stadimeter. The Stadimeter is
only accessible from the Periscope Station. It is explained later in this
section.
BClick the Stadimeter icon button to the left of the SIGNAL
STRENGTH indicator to enter the Stadimeter Station.
To Stadimeter
Click to Raise Periscope Mast
View Controls
WITH THE
P ER ISC O PE
1. Ensure the ship is at periscope depth (61 feet) and at a speed of 10


3. Rotate the periscope to look for contacts. Click the green arrows on the
left and periscope handles, or click and drag in the periscope view to
rotate the periscope 360.
in the periscope view. The ESM indicator lights illuminate from left to
right when a radar emitter is detected. (Green indicates a weak signal,
red a strong one.)
BClick the green + arrows on the right-side periscope grip to zoom
in. Click the green - arrow on the grip to zoom out.
BClick the upper half of the Elevation crank to lower the elevation.
Click the lower half to raise it.

Visual contacts have a V designation. (V01, V02 etc.). When marked
by the periscope the contact symbol appears on a line of bearing at a
default distance.
horizontal line with the waterline before you take the picture. Click
PHOTO to send a photo of the contact to the Stadimeter.
S E AW OL F S T A DI M E TE R S T AT I O N
Stadimeter Window
3D Silhouette Window
3D Silhouette Controls
Class viewed in 3D Silhouette Window

periscope appears in the STADIMETER window.
3. In the CLASS field the ships computer provides the names of ship
classes similar in length to the photographed ship. Click the left and
right facing arrows on either side of the Country and Class windows to
cycle through the filtered names. A 3D ship silhouette of the selected
class displays in the 3D silhouette for each available class in the 3D
SILHOUETTE WINDOW.
5. Rotate the silhouette by clicking the right and left facing arrow buttons
on either side of the AOB window until the aspect of the 3D model
matches that of the ship in the photo. Viewing the 3D object from a
similar angle to the ship in the photo helps you identify the correct
class. When the aspect matches the photo, a close approximation of
the contacts course appears in the in the COURSE window. Course is
a piece of information needed in developing a firing solution in TMA.

1. Click the right and left facing arrows on either side of the COUNTRY
and CLASS windows and compare each 3D Silhouette to the ship in
the photo.
2. Rotate the silhouette model by clicking the AOB arrows. Click the
ship class is matched to the photo, leave the selected class name in
the CLASS field.
the Nav Map and assigns the class name showing in the CLASS
window to the contact. You must still assign an ID (Friendly, Hostile,
Neutral etc) to the contact using the contacts right-click Contact Menu
on the Nav Map.
TMA.
S EAWOLF S AI L B RIDGE (SAM L AUNCHER ) [F9]

The Sail Bridge station is only accessible when the submarine is surfaced.
The Sail Bridge provides three views: Free Look, Shoulder Mounted SAM
Launcher and Binoculars.
SAM Launcher
Free Look
Binoculars
Binoculars: Zoom from 2X to 16X by clicking the right side of the thumb
wheel at the top of the screen. Click the left side to decrease zoom. Click
and drag to pan the view. VISUAL mode is selected by default. LLTV mode
is available for night vision.
SAM Launcher: The Seawolf in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters carries FIM-92
Stinger Surface to Air Missiles. A shoulder mounted SAM launcher is
modeled and can be used to attack helicopters and low flying airplanes.
FIM-92 Stinger: Range: 4.3 nm (8,000 meters)
TO
A I R M I SS IL E S


reloads
S EAWOLF A UTOCREW
This section describes the Autocrew features available on the Seawolf class
submarine during gameplay. In some cases when an Autocrew feature is
ON you are prevented from making any input to the station. Check the
descriptions below to determine what if any input is needed from you when
the Autocrew is ON at a given station. Stations that have an Autocrew have
an Autocrew slider button in the upper left corner of the station interface.
BClick the Autocrew slider button to toggle the state of that
Autocrew. The Autocrew is ON when the crew silhouette is
showing.
S E AW OL F B R OA D B A N D /N A R R OW B A N D A U T OC R E W
When ON, the Broadband-Narrowband Sonar Autocrew marks contacts in
Broadband and searches Narrowband for contacts. Because they share
trackers, contacts marked in Narrowband also display in Broadband.
Autocrew also assigns trackers, classifies all marked contacts in
Narrowband and assigns a Low, Medium, or High level of confidence in his
classification. The level of confidence displays in the Navigation Stations
DDI and above the 3D model when that contact is selected.

classes to one

symbol. This is usually the symbol for Unknown/Unknown (Unknown
platform category/Unknown alliance ID) and is accompanied by its
Contact ID number (S01, S02, etc). As soon as your Sonar Autocrew
has classified the contact, the symbol changes to that of the specified
category. See Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/NTDS Symbols.
Clicking on the Contact ID displays information about the class in the
DDI and the 3D model of that class appears in the 3D view surrounded
by a bounding yellow bounding box and a level of confidence bar.
Your task: Your Sonar Autocrew can classify a contact as a specific
class, but he cannot determine its alliance (ID). You must do that
BOn the Nav Map, right-click the contacts symbol to display the
Contact Menu.
S E AW OL F S O N AR A C T IV E I N T E R C E P T A U T OC R E W
When ON, the Active Intercept Autocrew marks contacts. You are not
prevented from marking contacts but the Autocrew is likely to mark them
faster than you can.
S E AW OL F R A D AR A U T OC R EW
performs the following task as long as the radar is on.

S E AW OL F F I R E C O N TR OL A U T OC R E W

Contact Menus Engage With command from the Nav. Your Fire
Control Autocrew uses the contacts classification when determining
presets. If you classify a contact as a surface ship when in actuality it is
a submarine, you Autocrew enters presets appropriate for a surface
ship.
S E AW OL F TMA A U T O C R EW
accurate firing solution. When ON, the TMA Autocrew performs the duties
mentioned below.
TMA station to toggle the state of the TMA Autocrew. Autocrew is
ON when the silhouette is visible.
sensors.

A yellow symbol for Unknown is displayed until you or the Sonar Auto
Crewman categorizes it.

view on the TMA board, but you are not able to manipulate the ruler
or the settings.

6(&7,21
,67$7,216
13-1
13: 688(I) STATIONS ...............................................................................13-5

688(I) TASK BAR ............................................................................. 13-5
688(I) STATIONS MENU ................................................. 13-5
688(I) ORDERS MENU ................................................... 13-6
HISTORY W INDOW ......................................................... 13-7
688(I) SHIP CONTROL STATION [F1]............................... 13-8
688(I) SONAR STATIONS [F2] ......................................................... 13-10
688(I) BROADBAND SONAR (PBB) ............................... 13-10
688(I): Broadband Waterfall Displays ................. 13-11
Assigning Trackers in Broadband ....................... 13-12
Towed Array Contacts ........................................ 13-12
688(I) Broadband Controls Panel ....................... 13-13
688(I) NARROWBAND SONAR (PNB) ............................ 13-14
688(I) Narrowband Displays ............................... 13-14
Designating Tracks/Assigning Trackers in PNB.. 13-15
Classifying Contacts In Narrowband ................... 13-16
688(I) DEMON SONAR STATION ................................. 13-17
Using DEMON to Calculate Speed ..................... 13-17
688(I) ACTIVE SONAR STATION .................................... 13-19
Marking Tracks with MF Active Sonar................. 13-20
688(I) High Frequency Active Sonar (HFAS) ...... 13-21
ACTIVE INTERCEPT SONAR STATION.............................. 13-22
688(I) SSP SONAR STATION ....................................... 13-23
688(I) UUV SONAR .................................................... 13-23
688(I) RADAR STATION [F3] ........................................................ 13-24
688(I) RADIO-ESM STATION [F4]................................................... 13-24
RADIO ROOM .............................................................. 13-25
RECEIVING RADIO MESSAGES AND LINK DATA................ 13-25
PROMOTING CONTACTS TO THE LINK ............................. 13-26
688(I) ELECTRONIC SUPPORT MEASURES (ESM) .......... 13-27
Detecting/Classifying Contacts with ESM ........... 13-27
688(I) NAVIGATION STATION [F5] .................................................. 13-28
688(I) OWNSHIP/ORDERS MENUS ................................ 13-28
688(I) CONTACT MENU ............................................... 13-29
688(I) FIRE CONTROL SUITE [F6] .................................................... 13-29
688(I) FIRE CONTROL TARGET DISPLAY ........................ 13-30
Fire Control Map ................................................. 13-30
Fire Control Map Controls................................... 13-31
Fire Control Target Selection List ....................... 13-31
13-2
Tube Selection Panel.......................................... 13-32

688(I) FIRE CONTROL LAUNCH PANEL .......................... 13-32
VLS Tube Launch Procedure.............................. 13-34
Countermeasure Launch Procedure................... 13-34
Tube Reload Procedure...................................... 13-34
TARGETING SEA CONTACTS ......................................... 13-35
Wire-Guiding UUV/ Enabling Active Sonar ......... 13-38
UUV Returns....................................................... 13-38
688(I) WEAPON INVENTORY STATION ........................... 13-38
688(I) TACTICAL W EAPONS ......................................... 13-39
688(I) STRATEGIC W EAPONS ....................................... 13-39
Mines: ................................................................. 13-39
688(I) COUNTERMEASURES ......................................... 13-39
688(I) PRESETS.......................................................... 13-40
Land Attack Missile Presets................................ 13-40
Mine Presets....................................................... 13-41
Torpedo Presets ................................................. 13-41
UUV Presets ....................................................... 13-41
688(I) TMA STATION [F7] ............................................................. 13-42
688(I) TMA STATION COMPONENTS ............................. 13-42
688(I) TMA Display ............................................. 13-42
688(I) Cursor Readouts and Plot Control Area ... 13-45
688(I) Track Selection Area ................................ 13-45
688(I) Solution Input Area ................................... 13-46
TMA Solution Area.............................................. 13-47
688(I) PERISCOPE /STADIMETER STATIONS [F8] ................................ 13-50
688(I) STADIMETER STATION ....................................... 13-52
Determining Course with the Stadimeter ............ 13-52
Determining Class/Range with the Stadimeter ... 13-53
688(I): ICE THICKNESS DISPLAY [F8] ............................ 13-54
Signal Strength Indicator Lights .......................... 13-54
To Surface and Submerge Under the Ice ........... 13-54
688(I) SAIL BRIDGE (SAM LAUNCHER) [F9] ................................... 13-55
LAUNCHING A SURFACE TO AIR MISSILE (SAM).............. 13-55
688(I) AUTOCREW ........................................................................ 13-56
688(I) BROADBAND/NARROWBAND SONAR AUTOCREW .. 13-56
688(I) SONAR ACTIVE INTERCEPT AUTOCREW ............... 13-57
RADAR AUTOCREW ...................................................... 13-57
13-3
688(I) FIRE CONTROL AUTOCREW ................................ 13-57

688(I) TMA AUTOCREW .............................................. 13-57
13-4
13: 688(I) STATIONS

The station functionality of the Improved Los Angeles Class submarines is
covered in this section. The Improved Los Angeles class is referred to as
688(I) in this S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters manual.
information unique to the 688(I) is contained in the abbreviated
688(I) Navigation Station section later in this section.
688(I) T ASK B AR
cosmetic. The 688(I)s Task Bar appears below.
Stations Menu
Damage Report
Orders Menu
Course Shortcut
Depth Below Keel
Depth Shortcut
Speed Shortcut

Time Acceleration
688(I) S T A TI O NS M E NU
icon to jump to that station or use the appropriate function key. Selected
menu items are orange.
Ship Control [F1]
Sonar Suite [F2]
Radar [F3]
Radio-ESM [F4]
Nav [F5]
TMA [F7]

13-5
688(I) O R DE R S M E N U
Navigate: Displays a submenu of navigation shortcuts
Left Full Rudder: Sets OS on a hard turn to port.
Right Full Rudder: Sets OS on a hard turn to starboard
Rudder Amidships: Sets the rudder back in the zero position. If you
do not set the rudder back to zero the ship eventually turns in a circle.
Setting a specific course automatically resets the rudder once the
course change is completed.
Set Depth: Displays a submenu of shortcuts to specific depths.
Surface: Orders a normal surface of the ship. (Emergency surface
is only available from the Ship Control Station.)
Go to PD: Orders the ship to Periscope Depth (63 feet).
Depending on sea state you may need to order a shallower depth
to clear the scope.)
Go Shallow: Orders a depth of 147 ft.
Go Deep: Orders a depth of 1,254 ft.
Go to Snorkel Depth: Orders a depth of 56 ft.
Change Speed: Displays a submenu of engine order shortcuts. Given
no strong currents in the area, selecting one of the following
commands results in the indicated speed:
All Ahead Flank: Maximum speed for platform (35 knots)
All Ahead Full: 20 knots
Ahead Standard: 15 knots
Ahead 2/3: 10 knots
Ahead 1/3: 5 knots.
Back 1/3: 4 knots in reverse
Back 2/3: 8 knots in reverse
All Back Full: 12 knots in reverse
All Back Emergency: 16 knots in reverse
Arrays/Wires: Displays a submenu permitting you stream, retrieve or stop
the winch deploying the Port and Starboard Towed Arrays and the Floating
Wire.
13-6
is only available when at snorkel depth (56 feet) or shallower. Raising the
mast initiates ventilation. The process is secured from this menu or from the
Ship Control Station via the VENTILATE button, automatically lowering the
mast.
toggles its state. A checkmark indicates that the Autocrew is ON. See 688(I)
Stations/688(I) Autocrew for a full description of Autocrew functionality.
Orders Menu a depth of shallow (100 feet) or deep (800 feet) can be
selected.
The damage report window lists damage to any station. The text scrolls as
necessary. When a station has damage, the damage indicator in the upper
right of a station slides out to reveal a wrench. When the wrench is present
on a screen, check the Damage Report Window for more specific
information on the time required to repair the damage or notification that the
damage cannot be repaired. Be aware that parts or all of a station will not
work when damage has occurred.
Crew Report History: Lists all orders as acknowledged by crewmembers
AND
DEPTH: Keel depth reported in feet. Click/right-click digits to order a

depth change.
KEEL: Readout of the depth of water below the keel in feet.
13-7

new course.
9 Note: Currents affect Ownship course and speed. It may not be
possible to achieve the exact ordered course or speed if the currents
are strong. Currents can be turned OFF/ON in the Options>Game
page prior to mission start.
word PAUSED.
bar.

the time scales
688(I) S H I P C O NTR O L S TA T I O N [F1]

688(I)s Ship Control Station features are described below:
TRIM ANGLE: Indicates the trim angle of the ship measured from a
horizontal axis. A positive trim angle indicates the ship has a bow-up
attitude. A negative trim angle indicates a bow-down attitude. The
helmsman automatically controls the trim angle whenever a depth change
is ordered.
HP AIR: This panel is used to monitor the current charge level in the highpressure air banks and to charge the banks when they are depleted. A
charge of 50% is necessary for successful weapon launches. The charge
can be increased by only 10% when the ship is submerged. You must come
to snorkel depth (56 feet) or shallower and ventilate while you charge to
fully charge the banks.
13-8
BClick the unlit CHARGE button to commence charging your highpressure air banks. The button is lit when a charge is in progress.
BClick the lit CHARGE button to secure the charge.
TOWED ARRAY: From this panel you select and deploy the desired towed
sonar array (Port or Starboard). The SCOPE field indicates the length or
percentage of the array currently streamed.
BClick PORT or STARBOARD to select that array to be streamed.
Only one towed array can be deployed at a time.
BClick STREAM to deploy the array.
BTo stop streaming or retrieving the array, click OFF.
BTo retrieve the towed array, click RETRIEVE.
COURSE: On this Course Indicator, the red needle indicates current
course. The black needle indicates ordered course
BClick the desired heading on the Course Indicator to order that
course.
HIGH FREQUENCY SONAR: The toggle switch activates the High
Frequency Active Sonar (HFAS), which is used to detect objects (e.g.,
mines, icebergs, submarines) at short range. The High Frequency Sonar
screen shows the location of any object near your submarines bow.
BClick ON to activate HFAS.
BTo designate targets (such as mines or icebergs), click on the
contact in the HFAS screen. A mark is placed on the Nav Map
indicating each return received by the HF sonar.
VENTILATE: Ventilation is only necessary when you need to recharge the
high-pressure air banks. See HP Air above. The ship must be at snorkel
depth (56 ft.) or shallower to ventilate.
BClick the unlit VENTILATE button to commence ventilating.
BClick the lit VENTILATE button to secure ventilating.
STERN/BOW/RUDDER: Your crew controls the bow and stern planes
automatically when you change depth but you can control the Rudder.
change.
ENGINE: This dial, known as an Engine Order Telegraph, orders engine
speed. Engine speeds translate to ship speeds as defined in 688(I) Ship
Stations/688(I)Task Bar/Orders Menu. Flank (maximum) speed modeled for
the 688(I) is 35 knots.
BClick the desired option to order that Engine Speed.
13-9
EMERGENCY BLOW VALVE: To surface your ship quickly in an

emergency situation, click the red handle to initiate the Emergence Blow
procedure. Click again to secure the blow. Remember to recharge your air
banks following an Emergency Blow.
DEPTH: Actual and ordered depth is shown in feet.
BClick/right-click the digits in the ordered field to order a new depth.
SPEED: Actual and ordered speed is shown in knots.
BClick/right-click the digits in the ordered field to order a new speed.
MBT VENTS: When on the surface, click the unlit MBT VENTS button to
open the main ballast tank vents and submerge the ship. The vents close
automatically once the ship is submerged and cannot be opened again until
the ship has resurfaced.
9 Note: The ship dives/surfaces automatically when an appropriate
means of one of the Orders Menus Navigate>Set Depth options. It is
not necessary to manually open the MBT Vents.
688(I) S ONAR S TATIONS [F2]

See Training/Sonar School for sonar information needed to effectively use
the sonar stations.
board your sub. Six displays, each with a specific purpose, help detect,
identify, track, and localize contacts by employing either active or passive
sonar. The sonar suite is composed of these six displays: Broadband,
Narrowband, DEMON, Active, Active Intercept, and Sound Speed Profile
(SSP). All six stations are explained in this section. For information about
UUV sensors and their use see 688(I) Fire Control Suite/Deploying and
Wire-Guiding UUVs.
navigate from one Sonar station to another.
Broadband
Narrowband
DEMON
Active Intercept
Active Sonar
SSP
688(I) B R O AD B AN D S O N AR (PBB)
The Passive Broadband Sonar Station displays input from the spherical
bow and towed arrays. These inputs are used to detect and track
submarines and surface ships. Here trackers can be assigned to contacts
Section 13: 688(I) Stations 13-10
and they are given an alphanumeric Contact Designation or ID. Contact IDs
for all sonar contacts begin with the letter S. Trackers provide the TMA
station with updates on the contacts bearing at specified time intervals.
9 Note: UUV sonar contacts also have S designations, but their data is
not reported in the Sonar Suite. UUV data is available in TMA and on
the Nav and Fire Control Maps.
Broadband Waterfall Display
Bearing Indicator
Sonar Navigation Buttons
Broadband Controls Panel
688(I): Broadband Waterfall Displays

The 688(I) uses dual waterfall displays to track sonar information. In the
waterfall display, sonar information cascades down over time giving a
sense of the contacts movement. Bearing is displayed on the horizontal
axis with either north (000) or south (180) in the center. Time is displayed
on the vertical axis, with the most recent information at the top.
Contacts appear as green lines in the waterfall. A faint green line
represents a weak contact while a strong contact appears as a brighter,
thicker line. The speckled background represents background noise
interference. The amount of interference increases as background noise
increases. The thin green line beneath the Vindicator indicates the
direction your submarines stern is pointing (your baffles for your hull and
spherical array.)
Both the upper and lower waterfall displays show broadband sonar data. It
is a good idea to have one display set on Short Time Average (160
seconds) and the other on Intermediate (030 minutes) or Long Time
Average (02 hours). The longer the time averaging that is employed the
better the sonar detection processing. However, the longer the time
averaging, the longer the time between updates. Both the spherical sensor
and the towed array pick up broadband data. The information displayed
depends on which sensor is selected.
Ship speed greatly interferes with the ability of the sensors to detect and
display contacts. Excessive speed results in the inability to detect any
contacts at all. Only background noise is visible.
Assigning Trackers in Broadband

1. Click the desired array on the submarine outline in the SELECTED
ARRAY panel to display data from that sensor in the broadband
waterfall display.
2. When a contact appears in the waterfall click on it to select it. A vertical

cursor appears over the contact in the bearing indicator. You can click
and drag this cursor along the bearing indicator.
3. Click DESIGNATE TARGET to designate the target and assign a

tracker. (If the signal is faint, you may have to click more than once.)
A tracker letter is placed above the contact line. Four trackers are
available for each sonar array.

A, B, C, and D: Spherical contacts.
E, F, G, and H: Hull contacts. (These trackers can only be
assigned in Narrowband)
I, J, K, and L: Towed array contacts.
If the spherical array already has four contacts assigned to trackers (A-
D) and you designate a new contact, the oldest tracker is unassigned

from its current contact and reassigned to the new contact. This
behavior is also true for the hull and towed arrays. To unassign a
specific tracker, click on the letter and drag it into the waterfall display
and release it.
Each contact you designate is assigned a sequential Sierra number:
S01, S02, S03, etc. The Sierra number, also called a Contact ID or
Track ID, and all available data on the contact are automatically sent to
TMA and the Nav Map.

If the towed array is not already deployed at mission start, stream it from
the Ship Control Station [F1]. No towed array contacts appear if the towed
array is not streamed. Be aware that towed array contacts do not appear
immediately when you deploy the array
Because of the way the physics of the towed array construction, an
ambiguous contact, a mirror image of each true contact, appears on the
display along with the true contact. If you have a contact at the same
bearing on your bow array, you can be fairly certain a contact at a bearing
on your towed array display is on contacts true bearing.
true bearing is that of the contact that remains constant.
When numerous contacts are present or the contacts are close together,
this process can be very challenging!
688(I) Broadband Controls Panel

The buttons and switches of the 688(I)s Broadband Controls Panel are
described here:
Sonar Navigation Buttons: Click the icon button of the sonar station you
want to visit. Hold your cursor over a button to display the name of the
station it represents.
AUDIO: When ON, a cursor placed on a sonar contact emits the sound
produced by the contact. When OFF, no sound is emitted.
NORTH CENTER: Click to center the waterfall display at 000 degrees.
SOUTH CENTER: Click to center the waterfall display at 180 degrees.
TIME AVERAGE (Upper Waterfall): Click the desired text (SHORT,
INTERMEDIATE or LONG) to select the time average setting for the upper
waterfall display.
TRACK ID: Displays the alphanumeric Track ID (also called the Contact ID
in this manual) of the selected track.
DESIGNATE TARGET: To place a tracker on a contact and assign a Track
ID click the contact in the waterfall display then click Designate Target. A
Track ID number (S01, S02, S03, etc.) is assigned to the contact and the
sensor data is sent to TMA and the Nav Map.
TRACKER REVIEW: Click to cycle through all assigned trackers for the
selected array. The Track ID is displayed in the Track ID field.
CURSOR POSITION: Indicates the bearing at the location of the vertical
cursor in the Bearing Indicator section of the waterfall display or cursor
location of the tracker when a tracker is selected with the Tracker Review
button.
TIME AVERAGE (Lower Waterfall): Click the desired text (SHORT,
INTERMEDIATE or LONG) to select the time average setting for the lower
waterfall display.
SELECT ARRAY: The two buttons represent the spherical array (in the
bow) or the towed array (aft). Click the desired button to display that
sensors input in the waterfall display.
688(I) N AR R OW B A ND S O NA R (PNB)
signatures.
The ships computer narrows your search by presenting only those
signatures that have similarities to the signature of the selected contact.
Detected frequencies
Contact in Narrowband Search
Sound Profile of selected class
688(I) Narrowband Displays

On the left side to the Narrowband station are three display windows:
Narrowband, Ship Classification and Narrowband Search. Each is
described below followed by the other components on the right side of the
Narrowband Station.
NARROWBAND: The Narrowband Waterfall display in the upper left of the
station separates a signal on the bearing selected in the Narrowband
Search Display into discrete frequencies. The horizontal axis represents the
range of frequencies and the vertical axis represents time in seconds. The
frequency range is adjustable using the frequency scale dial as described
below. Vertical lines represent specific frequencies in the sound signal
emitted by the selected contact. Together these lines represent the
contacts sonar signature or profile.
9 Note: Straight lines indicate a consistent signal. Curved or wavy
vertical lines represent distortions in the signal. Faint lines indicate a
weak signal.
SHIP CLASSIFICATION: This window displays the sound signature of the
class or weapon named in the CLASSIFICATION field. Compare the profile
of the selected contact to profiles in the ships profile database. Use the
PROFILE selector to cycle through the available signatures.
NARROWBAND SEARCH: Signals from the selected array display in an Ascan format on the Narrowband Search Display. A contacts signal displays
as a spike at the bearing where it is detected. The height of the spike
represents signal strength. High peaks indicate strong signal strength. Click
the peak of a contact to select the contact and display its profile in the
Narrowband waterfall display.
9 Note: Ownships speed can affect your ability to detect contacts in
Narrowband Search. When the entire signal line is near the top of
the display this indicates that background noise is very high. This
usually happens when ships speed is over 5 knots for hull array
contacts or over 15 knots for towed array contacts. Decrease your
speed to reduce water flow over the array.
The right side of the Narrowband station contains the following buttons and
functionality.
Sonar Navigation Buttons: Click the desired button to switch to that
station in the 688(I)s Sonar Suite.
FREQUENCY SCALE: Click the desired number to switch to that frequency
range in the waterfall display.
FREQUENCY: Click the desired line in the Narrowband Waterfall display.
The cursor moves to that location in the frequency indicator.
CURSOR POSITION: Click in Narrowband Search to display the precise
bearing at that location.
TRACK ID: The alphanumeric Track ID (also called Contact ID) displays in
the Track ID window when a tracker is designated in the Waterfall Display.
TRACKER REVIEW: Click to cycle through any Track IDs that are
assigned Trackers for the selected array. The cursor jumps to that contact
DESIGNATE TARGET: Click to assign a Target ID (Track ID) and tracker
to the contact line selected in the Narrowband Waterfall Display.
Designating Tracks/Assigning Trackers in PNB

1. Find a contact in the Narrowband Search Display and click on the peak
of the contact. When a contact is selected lines indicating detected
frequencies appear in the Narrowband Waterfall Display.
2. Click one of the vertical frequency lines in the Narrowband Waterfall

Display. The vertical cursor appears on the bearing indicator at the
location of the line.
3. Click DESIGNATE TARGET. A tracker letter appears on the bearing

indicator, and an alphanumeric tag appears in the TRACK ID window.
Tracking data is sent automatically to TMA. Assigning a tracker here
may un-assign a tracker from a contact in broadband if all trackers are
currently assigned.
9 Note: If the signal is weak you may have to click more than once to
designate the contact and assign the tracker. You cannot assign a
tracker while the game is paused.
PROFILE: The ships computer compares the sonar signature in the
Narrowband Waterfall display against those in its sound profile database.
Only those signatures that are similar to that of the selected contact are
presented for review when FILTER ON is selected.
BClick the PREV/NEXT rocker switch to view the signature profiles.
If FILTER ON is selected, only ships or weapons that have a
profile similar to that of the selected contact are available. All
platforms and weapons in the game are available for review if
FILTER OFF is selected.
CLASSIFICATION: This window displays the name of the class or weapon
selected with the PROFILE selector. The sound signature profile of the
class name selected here appears in the Ship Classification Display.
NORTH CENTER: Click to place bearing 000 at the center of the
Narrowband Search Display.
SOUTH CENTER: Click to place bearing 180 at the center of the
Narrowband Search Display.
SELECTED ARRAY: Click the appropriate button to display data from the
selected array in the Narrowband Search. The button in the bow of the sub
outline represents the Spherical array, the button in the middle in
represents the Hull array, and the aft button represents the Towed array.
9 Note: The towed array must be deployed before any towed array
signals can be detected.
Classifying Contacts In Narrowband

1. Select a contact in the Narrowband Search window by clicking on the
highest point of the peak. Detected frequencies appear in the
Narrowband Waterfall.
2. Set the filter toggle to FILTER ON below the Classification field.

3. Click NEXT or PREVIOUS to select a class or weapon name in the
Classification field and view its sound signature profile in the Ship
Classification window.
4. Compare the frequencies of the selected contact in the Narrowband

Waterfall Display to those of the class selected in the Ship
Classification window. Adjust the frequency range to better see distinct
ranges.
5. When you decide which ships signature best matches that of the
selected contact, simply leave that class name selected in the
Classification window, and click Designate Target. The name showing
in the Classification field is assigned to the contact in the Nav Map.
You must still assign an alliance ID and a level of confidence from
the Nav Map using the right-click Contact Menu>Classify

Contact option.
688(I) DEMON S O N AR S TA T IO N
when establishing an accurate firing solution. Once contact speed is
determined at the DEMON Station the value can be entered in the speed
field in the TMA trial solution field for the appropriate contact.
To determine a contacts speed accurately you must have classified the

contact in Narrowband, ESM or Periscope. The number of turns per knot
(TPK) produced by a specific class is listed in the USNI Information for that
class. The steps for using DEMON to determine a contacts speed and how
to use DEMON to determine a contacts type are shown below. The
DEMON Station Interface and button description for each sub class follows
the instructions.

field.

Broadband sonar.
3. In SELECTED ARRAY click the desired sensor button in the submarine

outline. The button on the bow of the outline selects the Bow Array.
The aft button selects the Towed Array.
4. Under AVAILABLE TRACKERS click the button associated with the

desired track ID. As long as the tracker is still tracking lines appear in
the waterfall display.
range. To adjust the frequency range, click the desired number in the
FREQUENCY SCALE switch.
6. Determine the Turns per Knot (TPK) for the contact by looking up the
U.S. Naval Institute Reference entry for the known platform class.
7. Place the waterfall cursor over the line farthest left.

8. Click the + or - toggle in the Turns Per Knot panel to set the desired
value for the known contact as determined in USNI Reference. The
speed of the target appears in the SPEED field below the buttons.
in the TMA SPEED field for the selected contact on the TMA Station.


2. Select a sonar contact by clicking on a tracker button as described
above. Vertical lines appear in the waterfall. The first line on the left
indicates the shaft rotation speed. The other lines indicate individual
blades on the propeller.

starting.
688(I) A C T I VE S O NA R S T AT IO N
Waters models both medium and high frequency active sonar for the 688(I)
class submarines

The bow array in active mode is used to detect and track contacts. Echoes
from a single ping or a series of pings are used to determine an objects
bearing and range. Information from a medium frequency active search is
sent to the TMA station for use in plotting a firing solution for the given
contact. While this information is very useful to you, it comes at a price.
Using active sonar gives away your bearing and alerts any ship in the area
to your presence. The ship may well assume you have hostile intentions
since active sonar is used primarily for targeting.
In the 688(I) s rectangular Active Sonar Display, the area at the bottom of
the display represents objects closest to your ship. The horizontal line at the
top represents bearing. The display updates from the bottom up. In
continuous mode each subsequent ping replaces the oldest data with the
newest.
baffles. Since the signals transmitted from your bow array cannot reach the
Active Sonar Contacts: Contacts appear as bright green spots on the

active display. A metallic ring is heard as each contact displays. The active
weak signal strength
square attached to a vertical line that indicates a specific bearing. The
distance of the cursor from the bottom of the display represents its range
from Ownship. The position of the vertical line on the Bearing Indicator
represents the bearing of the cursor. To move the cursor, click the desired
location on the display.
Marking Tracks with MF Active Sonar

1. Click the number of the desired range on the Range Scale (KYDS)
2. Selecting a new range halts continuous transmissions. You must click

transmit again to resume transmissions.
3. Click NORTH CENTERED or SOUTH CENTERED to center the

display on a bearing of either 000 or 180 degrees.
4. In ECHO RANGING select SINGLE or CONTINUOUS pings. If Single

is selected, only one active sonar ping is transmitted. When
Continuous is chosen, active sonar pings are transmitted at a set
interval until the switch is reset to Single or you change the range
scale.
5. Click TRANSMIT to send transmissions of the selected type with the

toggle switch.
9 Note: To stop the transmission of continuous pings, click again on

the TRANSMIT button.
A valid contact gives consistent visual returns that are brighter than
background noise or reverberations. The audio return will have a

distinctive metallic ring to it and will be distinguishable from the
background noise.

bearing display in the RANGE/BEARING panel. Range is in yards.
7. Click MARK to assign an alphanumeric Track ID to the selected

contact. Once a selected contact has been marked once, select it and
click MARK again to send an update of the contacts range and bearing
to TMA and the Nav Map. The NTDS symbol for contacts marked with
Active Sonar appear on the Nav Map on the detected bearing and at
the detected range at the end of a green line of bearing (LOB)
9 Note: The bow array has only four trackers. If you have all four
688(I) High Frequency Active Sonar (HFAS)

High Frequency Active Sonar (HFAS) has a shorter range and can detect
largest possible margin. Driving slowly provides the best reaction time.
you need to traverse the field again when you leave the area.
In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters, the High Frequency Sonar screen shows the
location of any object near your submarines bow. If an object is close
enough, clicking on it designates it and any other object detected by the
sonar as a HF sonar contact on the Nav Map. The 688(I)s High Frequency
sonar interface is located on the Ship Control Station. The 688(I) also has
an Ice Thickness detector accessible from the Periscope Station. See
688(I) Stations/688(I) Periscope-Stadimeter Stations/Ice Thickness
Indicator for information for more information.
To View and Mark Contacts with High Frequency Sonar
1. Press [F1] or select the Ship Control Station from the pop-up Stations
Menu to move to the Ship Control Station.
The HFAS system is located in the center portion of the station. The
toggle switch activates the High Frequency Sonar System (HFSS),

which is used to detect small objects and ice keels at short range.
9 Note: To locate a polynya, an area of thin ice or open water, during

under ice operations it is necessary to use the Ice Thickness
indicator accessible from the Periscope Station.
2. Click ON to activate the High Frequency Sonar,

3. Click the HFAS Display to place a marker on the Nav Map for all
contacts detected by the sensor. No Track IDs are assigned to HFAS
contacts and no information is sent to TMA. But these marks on the
Nav Map are very useful for navigating and returning back through a
minefield.
A C TI V E I N T E R C E P T S O N AR S T A TI O N
The Active Intercept function alerts you to the presence of active sonar
transmissions from another ship, sub, dipping sonar or sonobuoy in the
area. It provides the bearing of the transmitting entity as well as the
frequency of the detected emission, the age of the last signal and the
strength of the signal. Knowing the signal strength can assist you in
determining the relative proximity of the active sonar source.
True Bearing Indicator display on the bearing of the contact. The strength of
the signal is represented as a continuum of colored lights directly below the
display that move from green to red as the signal grows in strength.
The 688(I)s Active Intercept Station is made up of the following
components:
TRUE BEARING INDICATOR: A line from the center of this circular display
to its outer edge indicates the bearing of an intercepted signal. Thicker lines
indicate a strong signal. A triangular cursor is used to select a signal on a
specific bearing.
SIGNAL STRENGTH: Indicates the strength of the selected signal. Green
indicates a weaker signal, red a stronger one. In general, assume the
source of a red signal is nearby.
FREQUENCY: Displays the frequency of the intercepted signal. (Active
Sonar Frequencies for platforms and torpedoes as modeled in S.C.S.
Dangerous Waters can be found in the USNI Browser in the SENSORS
entry.)
BEARING: Displays the precise bearing of the intercepted signal.
INTERVAL: Displays the interval between the last two signals.
AGE: Displays the time in seconds since the last signal.
MARK: When a contact is detected and visible on the Active Intercept
Display, clicking the Mark button assigns a Contact ID to the signal and
sends the bearing information to TMA. Each time that you click mark when
the signal is selected, the current bearing of that contact is sent to TMA.
BClick on a signal line in the True Bearing Indicator display. The
cursor moves to select that bearing. When the contacts signal is
selected, click MARK.
688(I) SSP S O N AR S TA T I O N

the clipboard when the SSP station is first entered.
display and the clipboard when a new XBT is launched.

depth is noted at the bottom of the clipboard.
Depth scale cannot be changed in the 688(I) SSP graph.

688(I) UUV S O N AR
range to a contact. UUVs are particularly useful when navigating a minefield
and can be operated in Passive or Active mode.
torpedoes from there. See 688(I) Stations/688(I) Fire Control
688(I) RADAR S TATION [F3]

M AR K I N G
1. Ensure that Ownship is at 54 feet or less and moving at 8 knots or less

if the sail is submerged.
2. Click RAISE in the RADAR MAST Panel in the upper right of the
station to raise the mast. The RADAR READY light glows continuously
when the radar mast is extended and radiating.
3. Set RANGE SCALE as desired and set the RANGE RING toggle
switch to ON if range rings are desired on the radar display.
4. Contacts show up as brighter orange spots on the display. Click on a

contact to select it with the Bearing-Range Cursor or click and drag the
cursor to center it on a contact.
Nav Map.
9 Note: Radiating while the radar is submerged destroys your radar.
688(I) R ADIO -ESM S TATION [F4]

In S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters the Radio Room and the ESM (Electronic
Support Measures) stations are combined. The radio is used to receive
message traffic and send position updates while underway. The ESM
console allows you to detect and classify contacts when the ESM mast is
extended.
R A D I O R O OM
The upper portion of the Radio-ESM console represents the Radio Room.
Here messages containing important intelligence and tasking information
are received and contact positions are downloaded from any platforms in
the mission that are part of your Link network.
When Link information is downloaded, any surface and air Link participants
mission since he must be at comms depth with his mast extended at the
same time you are downloading data for you to see him
R EC E I VI N G R AD I O M E S S A GE S
AND
L I NK D A T A
To receive messages you must come to Communications Depth (Comms

Depth) and raise the radio mast or stream the floating wire antenna. There
not need to expose a mast to receive messages. Follow these instructions
to deploy the radio mast or floating wire.
Radio Mast: Take the ship to 63 ft and set ship speed to 10 knots or
less when the sail is submerged to avoid damaging the mast when it is
raised. In the Radio Antenna panel click RAISE to extend the Radio
Mast.
Streaming Wire: You do not have to come to Comms Depth but it
helps to be fairly near the surface. Set ships speed to 18 knots or less
to avoid damaging the wire. Slower speeds allow the wire to float up
more quickly. If speed exceeds 5 knots, the wire may never reach the

3. Look on the Nav Map if you are waiting for Link data to determine when

data.
depth and speed.
T O TH E
L I NK

During Multiplayer games, contacts detected by Ownside platforms
as the AI. Ownside platforms do. Part of your task in Multiplayer games is to
updates, you must also come to comms depth and raise the radio mast
before you can to promote your contacts to the Link.
1. Come to comms depth (63 ft) and raise the radio antenna.
3. If possible, determine an accurate firing solution and enter it at the

TMA station.
The contacts symbol appears on the Nav Map of all players in a
688(I) E L E C T R O NI C S U PP OR T M E A S U R E S (ESM)
Because you must have the ESM mast exposed, you make your ship
computer analyses the detected transmission and compares it to those in
its database and provides the class name of the transmitting platform.

1. Come to 58 feet and maintain a speed of 10 knots or less if the sail is
submerged before raising the ESM mast.
2. Click the ESM ANTENNA switch to the RAISE position. When the
triangular cursor appears in the ESM Display, the ESM is in detection
mode. Contacts appear as lines emanating from the center of the
display on a specific bearing.

and to view the source of the signal. (The name of the detected emitter
appears in the SOURCE field.) The bearing of the contact appears in
a weaker signal, red a strong one.)

alphanumeric Track ID to the contact and sends the bearing
information to TMA and the Nav Map. ESM contacts have E
designations (E01, E02, etc.) Once marked the Contact ID appears in
front of the emitter name in the SOURCE field.

field. You must still assign an ID (Hostile, Friendly etc.) from the
688(I) N AVIGATION S TATION [F5]

regardless of controllable platform and the basics are covered only once in
this manual in Navigation Station.
seen on the Nav Map, how contacts are numbered, the 3D View and
information on what is seen when various filters are applied. The 688(I)s
Task Bar is covered in this section. Several options relative to the
Navigation Station are unique to the submarines in S.C.S. Dangerous
Waters. These are described below.
688(I) O W N S H I P /O R DE R S M E NU S
688(I)s Ownship Menu items are identical to those in the Task Bar Orders
Menu. See 688(I) Stations/688(I) Task Bar/Orders Menu for a description of
those menu items. The rest of the Ownship Options require the use of the
Nav Map. These are the same from platform to platform. See Navigation
Station/2D Navigation Map/Ownship Menu. The following item is seen only
on the submarines and the FFG in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
Select it from the Orders Menu to fire the designated tube from any station.
688(I) C O N T AC T M E NU
NTDS symbol. Most menu items are the same from platform to platform.
See Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Contact Menu. Several options
are unique to the subs in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters.
Engage With: For information on the weapons that appear in the Engage
With menu See 688(I) Stations/688(I) Fire Control Suite/ 688(I) Tactical
Weapons and 688(I) Strategic Weapons. Only weapons appropriate to the
selected target are available. Others are greyed out. If the launch
parameters are not met for a specific weapon it is unavailable until Ownship
is at the appropriate depth and speed for launching the weapon.
included the Deep Submergence Rescue Vehicle (DSRV) or a Special
Forces team in the mission. It displays a submenu of Special Operations.
Look for tasking messages in the mission for specifics on deploying the
special ops units during gameplay.
Rescue Vehicle to travel to the selected contact. This option is only
selectable when the following conditions are met:

Deploy Special Forces: Select this option to deploy Special Forces

against the selected contact. This menu item is greyed out until the
following requirements are met:
(Category: Stationary) such as a building or the floating Oil Rig.)

less.
688(I) F IRE C ONT ROL S UITE [F6]

deployed.
The 688(I)s Fire Control Suite consists of three stations: the Target
Display, the Launch Panel and the Weapons Inventory. These stations are
reached by clicking one of the navigation buttons at the bottom right of the
688(I)s Fire Control Stations. Target Display is seen as default at game
start.
Weapons Inventory
Target Display
Launch Panel
688( I ) F I R E C O NTR OL T AR GE T D I S P L A Y
The 688(I) Target Display contains the Fire Control map, the Target
areas are described briefly here. See 688(I) Stations/688(I) Fire Control
Suite/688(I) Launch Panel/Basic Launch Procedure for information on how
to use the displays and panels to launch weapons, mines and
countermeasures.
Fire Control Map
Map Control Panel
FC Navigation Buttons
688(I) Fire Control Target Display
Fire Control Map

weapon.

PAN: When the map is zoomed in, click the PAN buttons (or click and
drag on the map or use the keyboard arrow keys) to adjust the map
view.
ZOOM: Click + in the ZOOM controls (or press [CTRL] and click the
map) to zoom in on the clicked location. Click in the ZOOM controls
(or press [CTRL] and right-click) to zoom out.
assigned to any land attack missile or mine display on the map. When
this option is OFF only the waypoints for the weapon assigned to the
selected contact show on the map. Click to toggle the state of this
button.

At the top of the Tube Selection Panel area is the Target Selection list. This
drop-down list contains all of the contacts currently marked by Ownship or
by the Link if Show Link is ON. A Track ID selected in this list is available
for assignment to a specific tube as described below with the following
caveats.
Contact with a LOB: Track IDs for contacts with a line of bearing (no
TMA solution) cannot be assigned to a tube. They can be targeted with
a snapshot.
assignment.
Unknown Category Contacts: Track IDs for contacts that have a

BSelect the contact in the Nav Map then right-click on the contact to
bring up the Contact Menu. From the Designate
Category/ID>Platform Category option designate it as surface or
subsurface to make it assignable.

weapon presets are entered. The torpedo wire guide controls for the
internal tubes are also accessed from this panel.
A numeral represents each of the 688(I)s four internal torpedo tubes and
twelve vertical launch tubes.
9 Note: The 688(I)s Vertical Launch System (VLS) tubes cannot be
reloaded while underway.
The four internal tubes are numbered 1 through 4; the twelve VLS tubes are
5 through 16. The internal tubes occupy the lower portion of the Tube
Selection Panel.
tube to the selected target.
9 Note: Certain weapons can only be used against specific types of
contacts. For example, you are not able to assign a sub-only weapon
to a target designated as surface. Until a contact is classified as
surface or subsurface, it cannot be assigned to any tube.
688(I) F I R E C ON TR OL L AU NC H P A NE L
pressure equalized and the muzzle door opened. The weapon can now be
fired. Once the launch procedure is initiated for a tube, the name of the
weapon in the window is greyed out and the weapon cannot be changed
until the launch procedure is halted and the steps reversed.
Tube Number
Interlock Indicator Light
Name of Weapon loaded
688(I) Fire Control Launch Panel

1. Assign a target to a tube in the Target Display and assign Preset
values as described above, then find the corresponding tube number in
the Launch Panel.

4. Click M to open the muzzle door. The tube number and the interlock
lights illuminate indicating the weapon is ready to fire.
5. Click FIRE to lift the cover; click again to fire the weapon. When the
tube is empty, the red interlock light to the left of the weapon name
window goes dark and the word EMPTY appears in the window.
target is assigned in the Target Display the tube number illuminates
and the FIRE button is enabled.
6. To wire-guide a torpedo with that capability return to the Target Display

screen and click the W under the tube number. W stands for wire
guidance. See 688(I) Stations/688(I) Fire Control Suite /Targeting Sea
Contacts /Torpedo Wire Guide Controls.
respond check to make sure there is a target assigned to the tube. Also
requires a charge of at least 50% in your air banks. See 688(I) Ship Control
for information on charging the air banks.
below.
9 Note: This reverse process happens automatically when M is clicked
after a weapon has been fired.
VLS Tube Launch Procedure

In the 688 TLAMs and TASMs can be fired from the Vertical Launch Tubes.
1. Assign waypoints for a TLAM or assigned a target to a tube containing

a TASM; locate that tube number in the Launch Panel.
2. Click P to pressurize the tube.

3. Click M to open the muzzle door. The I lights up, indicating that the
inter-locks have been met to fire the weapon and the tube number
lights up.
4. Click FIRE once to lift the cover, then click again to fire the weapon.

Countermeasures are launched from the two tubes in the
COUNTERMEASURES panel.

needed.
countermeasure.

available options. The tube number light flashes while the tube is
reloaded. When the tube number light is continuously lit the tube is
ready to fire.

Only internal torpedo tubes can be reloaded when underway.
BIf the weapon name display reads EMPTY, click to load a weapon.
Repeated clicks cycle through available weapons.
When the text color of the word EMPTY is grey, the weapon names do
not cycle. Grey text means that the muzzle door for that tube is still
open. Click M to close the muzzle door and wait until the tube is no
longer flooded, and then reload the tube. Remember that closing the
muzzle door cuts the wire on torpedoes and UUVs and they can no
longer be wire-guided.
BTo change the weapon loaded in a tube click the weapon name
until the desired weapon name appears.
The red interlock light to the left of the weapon name flashes until the
weapon reload is complete.

9 Note: The unload/load process takes approximately seventeen
minutes. Loading an empty tube takes 9 minutes. If the Weapon
Quick Launch option is selected in the Options>Game screen, the
time it takes to unload then reload a tube is cut to forty seconds and
loading an empty tube takes 20 seconds.
1. To assign a contact to a tube, select the desired Track ID from the
Target Selection List or click a contact symbol on the Fire Control map
to automatically select it in the list.

target. The Track ID appears below the tube number indicating this
See Fire Control Selection List above for instances that prevent a
contact from being assigned to a tube.
information on all presets see 688(I) Stations/688(I) Fire Control
Suite/688(I) Weapon Presets.
If your Fire Control Autocrew is on, he enters the presets for you.
presets.
launch procedure for the desired tube. See 688(I) Stations/688(I) Fire
Control Suite/688(I) Launch Panel/Basic Launch Procedure.
5. Once a wire-guided torpedo is launched, click the W button to display

its Wire Guide Controls.

Any interior torpedo tube can fire wire-guided torpedoes. Once a torpedo is
fired, its symbol appears on the Fire Control map. When a wire-guidable
torpedo enables, two red lines extend from the torpedo symbol indicating
the weapons search cone. Until a torpedo enables, it can be wire-guided.
heading.
search mode.
be shutdown.
homing.
The 688(I)s can carry Tomahawk Land Attack Missiles (TLAMs). To attack
a land target from Fire Control, the latitude and longitude coordinates of the
site must be fed into the fire control system and a series of waypoints
defined for the missile to follow. The coordinates are usually defined in a
tasking message.
1. Set Ownship depth to 150 ft or less and a speed of 6 knots or less. Do

not fire the missile until this depth and speed has been achieved or the
Missile will fail.)
2. In the Target Display select a tube containing a land attack missile.

Click P to open the Preset Panel for the tube.

If a landfall waypoint is directed in your tasking make sure that one of
the earlier waypoints is placed at that latitude and longitude.

LAYING
MINEFIELD
Follow these steps to lay a minefield.
WAYPOINT and click the Fire Control map to place the waypoint.
The waypoint presets appear below the Define Target Waypoint button
in the preset panel as soon as the waypoint is placed on the map.

tell when to fire the tube. See Navigation Station/2D Navigation Map/Nav
Map Menu.
D E PL OY I N G
AN D
Because a UUV is a sensor, not a weapon, it can be fired without being

assigned a target in the Target Display.
presets.
value.
Menus using the Fire Tube command without visiting the Fire Control
Wire-Guiding UUV/ Enabling Active Sonar

active sonar mode can be enabled at any time as long as the wire is
still attached and the 30-minute battery is functioning. Be aware that
capable ships and subs in the area can detect UUV active sonar.
However, active sonar may be necessary when traversing a minefield.
Follow these steps to enable UUV active sonar.

mode.
returns.
UUV Returns
Sonar returns from the UUV are automatically assigned a Track ID and can
be found in the TMA Selected Track drop-down list and on the Nav and Fire
Control maps. UUV sonar returns do not show up on any of the screens of
the Sonar Suite although the UUV itself displays as a contact in Broadband
and Narrowband Sonar. Depending on its course, the UUV may provide
returns on Ownship.


688(I) W E A P ON I N VE NT O R Y S T A TI O N
The Weapon Inventory Station simply displays the current type and number
of weapons on board your sub. No interaction is possible. The total of
dispensed.
688(I) T AC T IC AL W E A PO N S
The 688(I) Class submarines carry weapons capable of targeting surface
ships, submarines and land targets. For gameplay purposes the 688(I)s can
also target helicopters and low-lying planes from the sail bridge with a
shoulder mounted SAM launcher when surfaced. Available weapons are
described briefly below.
Mk 48 Torpedo ADCAP (Advanced Capability): This weapon can be
used against both surface and submarine targets and can be wire-guided. It
has a maximum range of 27 nm, a maximum speed of 55 knots and a
maximum depth of 2,394 feet,
TLAM (Tomahawk Land Attack Missile): The Tomahawk is the standard
sub-launched strike weapon for use against land targets. It has a range of
approximately 1400 nm. For successful launch of this weapon during
gameplay, Ownship depth must not exceed 150 feet and speed must not
exceed 6 knots.
Gameplay Weapons:
TASM (Tomahawk Antiship Missile): For gameplay purposes TASMs
are assigned to the Seawolf and 688(I) class submarines. In actuality,
these weapons have been removed from the fleet and are being
converted to Tomahawk Land Attack Missiles. The TASM has a
warhead of 500 kg and a range of 250 nm. For successful launch of
Harpoon: (Anti-Ship Missile): While the Seawolf and 688(I) class
subs no longer carry Harpoons, they maintain the ability to launch
them. They are available in the loadout screen but they are not loaded
by default. The Harpoon has a range of 70 nm For successful launch of
688(I) S TR A TE G IC W EA P O NS
Mines:
Mk 67 SLMM: The submarine-launched mobile mine is a modified Mk 37
torpedo whose warhead was replaced by a Mk 13 mine warhead. The
torpedos propulsion system is used to maneuver the mine to the
coordinates programmed into its guidance system. The SLMM has a 235 kg
warhead, a maximum speed of 26 knots and a maximum range of 11.5 nm
688(I) C OU N TE R M E A S U R E S
torpedo from destroying your sub. The 688(I) carries Active and Passive
the Ownship or Orders Menus Countermeasures option.
Orders Menus Countermeasures option can be set to either a Shallow (100
feet) or Deep (800 feet) depth.
688(I) P R E S E T S
With the exception of countermeasures, everything that can be launched
from the Fire Control Station has at least one preset. Presets are
instructions that tell the weapon or UUV what to do. All presets are
presented here alphabetically by type.
BClick or right-click on the digits to increase or decrease the value.

Harpoon and TASM
ships in the area.
Seeker Range: Sets the range at which the missile begins search.
narrow pattern. Click the Wide/Narrow button to toggle the selection.
This can be used to help discriminate against other shipping in
congested waters.
9 Note: Your ship must be at 150 feet or less and at 6 knots or less to
successfully launch one of these antiship weapons.

TLAM
follow.
precise Latitude and Longitude for the waypoint. Click/right-click the
preset digits to set a specific value or click a waypoint and drag it to the
desired location. Watch the Latitude/Longitude readout in the lower left
of the Fire Control map when dragging a waypoint to determine the
waypoints current location.
and friendly ships in the area.
9 Note: Your ship must be at 150 feet or less and at 6 knots or less to
successfully launch one of these Land Attack Missiles.
Mine Presets
SLMM
panel to set the desired value or click a waypoint and drag it to the
desired location. Watch the Latitude/Longitude readout in the lower left
of the Fire Control map when dragging a waypoint to determine the
waypoints current location.
Torpedo Presets
Mk 48 ADCAP
Acoustics: Click to choose Active or Passive sonar mode.
Run To Enable (yds): Set the distance (in yards) the weapon travels
before it enables and starts its active search. Enabling the weapon too
soon can alert the target in time to take evasive measures. Enabling
too late can mean the weapon runs past the target.
Speed: Set the speed at which the weapon travels before it acquires a
target.
UUV Presets
Ownship. Use OS Depth is selected by default. Deselect the option to
688(I) TMA S TATION [F7]

At the Target Motion Analysis (TMA) station, data from the 688(I)s sensors
perform target motion analysis at the 688(I)s TMA station.
688(I) TMA S TA TI O N C OM P O NE N TS
The 688(I)s TMA station is composed or several distinct areas: The TMA
solution input area and the solution area. These areas are described briefly
below. See Training/TMA Basics for additional information about these
areas.
TMA Display
Trial Solution Input Area
Track Selection Area Solution Area
688(I) TMA Display

The TMA Display presents a representation of Ownship, a history of
These tools are used to analyze sensor inputs.
Bearing Lines (LOBs)
When a sensor sends a bearing report to the TMA a history of each report
is maintained. When a contact is selected the bearing report history for that
Spherical (bow) array:
White
Blue
Towed array:
Purple
Active sonar:
Green
Active Intercept:
Yellow
Periscope or ESM:
Red
Radar:
Yellow
UUV passive sonar:
White
UUV active sonar:
Green

Right-click the TMA Display to change the bearing history on the TMA
Display. As long as a tracker is tracking, bearing information is sent to TMA
in two-minute intervals. If the screen gets too cluttered, change the number
of lines that are displayed. History options available are 10 minutes, 20
minutes (default), 1 hour and 4 hours. A check mark indicates the selected
option.
688(I)s TMA Dot Stack

TMA Ruler
Ownship
Ruler Handle
Line of Bearing (LOB) history.
The TMA Ruler

of the dot stack.


numerical form in the Solution Input Area under the TMA Display.

desired course number in the course field. You can also press [SHIFT] and
click and drag the TMA Display where you want to place the end of the ruler
or press [SHIFT] and right-click and drag to place the arrowhead.
The Dot Stack
stacking the dots.
688(I) Cursor Readouts and Plot Control Area

The upper right area of the TMA station contains the plot controls that
adjust the view in the TMA Display. The Cursor readouts give the bearing
and range at the cursor location whenever the cursor is in the TMA Display.
Click the PAN and ZOOM controls as needed to adjust the view. In addition
to the zoom control the following keyboard and mouse commands are
useful for adjusting the view:
BPress [CTRL] + click to zoom out. Press [CTRL] + Right-click to
zoom in.
BRoll the mouse wheel forward to zoom in, backward to zoom out.
688(I) Track Selection Area

The area at the center right of the 688(I)s TMA station is used to select a
contact to analyze, merge, split or drop.

alphanumeric Track IDs for designated (marked) contacts. Select a
Track ID from the list to display the available history of bearing lines for
that contact. The first letter of the contact designation represents the
source of the data: S for Sonar, R for Radar, V for visual (Periscope
and Stadimeter), and E for ESM.
MERGE: Click to merge the contact in the SELECTED TRACK dropdown list with the contact selected in the MERGE TRACK drop-down
list. This is useful when the same contact is reported by more than one
sensor.
SPLIT: Click to split the merged (M) contact selected in the
components.
DROP CONTACT: Click to permanently drop the contact selected in
the SELECTED TRACK dropdown list.
MERGE TRACK: This dropdown lists all contacts except the contact
688(I) Solution Input Area

Lock Buttons: Click the button to the right of each field to lock the
contacts.)
A prior to selecting another contact. That means that unless you
TMA Solution Area

The TMA SOLUTION area in the lower right of the station displays the
current solution in use by the Fire Control system for the selected contact.
There is no user interaction in the TMA SOLUTION area. These fields
display zeros until you have clicked ENTER SOLUTION in the TMA
Solution Input Area.
click the ENTER SOLUTION button again.
TMA
ON
See 688(I) Stations/Periscope-Stadimeter Stations/688(I)Stadimeter
Station. When visual or periscope contacts are referred to in this
To determine a target solution for Active Sonar, Periscope or Radar
Contacts:
1. Select a Track ID from the SELECTED TRACK dropdown list

designation, and active sonar contacts have an S designation the same

as passive sonar contacts.
marked.

radiating.)

your chosen sensor.
the range triangle.
in the TMA Display, and then click the zoom buttons to better
adjust the view. If you lose site of the ruler, zoom all the way out or
click the red center on ruler button again.
solution.
Control system.
TMA
ON
AND
ESM
C O NT A C TS

accurate solution.
1. Select a Contact ID from the SELECTED TRACK dropdown list. A line

of bearing appears on the TMA Display. The ruler appears at the
with a default speed of 10. These default values appear in the trial
solution fields directly to the right of the TMA Display.
been designated. Link contacts never appear in the TMA track list.

BClick CENTER ON RULER then click the zoom buttons to better
adjust the view.
ON RULER button again.
the ruler to see it at that speed. You also can set temporarily the
speed to 10 knots or more in the Speed field. This expands the ruler
and reveals the handle.


DEMON, enter that speed in the speed field. See 688(I) Stations/688(I)
Sonar Suite/688(I) DEMON Sonar Station. Click the digits to cycle
through the values.
If you are sure about one aspect of the solution (e.g. range) enter that
from dragging the ruler to a different range.
Lock field button
Click to enter the solution into the ships fire control system
The entered system solution displays in the TMA SOLUTION panel at
solution, adjust the ruler or directly input information in the trial solution
fields and click ENTER SOLUTION again.
and/or speed (a contact zig.). Attempt to achieve a better fit of the
ruler by disregarding some of the earlier bearing lines and looking only
at recent bearings.
1. Click the SELECTED TRACK drop-down and select one of the

2. From the MERGE TRACK drop-down select the track to be merged


SELECTED TRACK dropdown and click the SPLIT button.
You can make no TMA inputs yourself. For more information on your
TMA Autocrew see 688(I) Stations/688(I) Autocrew.
TMA
ON

UUVs see 688(I) Stations/688(I) Fire Control Suite/Deploying and WireGuiding UUVs.
or passive mode.
688(I) P ERISCOPE /S TADIMETER S TATIONS [F8]

The 688(I) Periscope Station in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters merges the
access to the Ice Thickness display useful for navigating ice fields and
surfacing under the ice.
BClick the Stadimeter icon button to the lower right of periscope
view to enter the Stadimeter station
BClick ice button at the lower left of the periscope view to move to
the Ice Thickness display.
To Ice Thickness Display
To Stadimeter Station
Periscope View Selected
WITH THE
P ER ISC O PE
1. Ensure the ship is at periscope depth (63 feet) and at a speed of 10


3. Rotate the periscope to look for contacts. Click the PAN arrows on the
left-side periscope handle, or click and drag in the periscope view to
rotate the periscope view 360.
in the periscope view. The ESM indicator lights illuminate from the
bottom up when a radar emitter is detected. (Green indicates a weak
signal, red a strong one.)
BClick the ZOOM and ELEV buttons as needed.

Visual contacts have a V designation. (V01, V02 etc.) When marked by
the periscope the contact symbol appears on a line of bearing at a
default distance.
688(I) S T A DI M E T E R S TA T IO N
range, course and class.
Click and drag to manipulate photo
Silhouette seen in 3-D window
Silhouette of Class in Ship Silhouette field

Determining Course with the Stadimeter

Follow these steps to determine the approximate course of the contact.

periscope appears in the VIDEO CAPTURE WINDOW.
3. In the SHIP SILHOUETTE field the ships computer provides the

names of all ship classes and weapons in the game. Click the BACK or
NEXT arrow buttons below the SHIP SILHOUETTE field to cycle

the 3D silhouette for each available class in the SILHOUETTE
WINDOW. When a match is determined, leave the selected name in
the SHIP SILHOUETTE field.
5. Rotate the silhouette by clicking the PORT and STBD (Starboard)

arrow buttons to closely match the aspect of the ship in the photo to
help match the silhouette to the photo. Matching the aspect provides
the Angle on the Bow (AOB) needed to determine a close
approximation of the contacts course. Course is a piece of information
needed in developing a firing solution in TMA.

If the number is greater that 360, subtract 360. The resulting number
is a good approximation of the contacts course.

If the number is less than zero, add 360 to it. The resulting number is a
good approximation of the contacts course. Enter that number in the

Course field in TMA when this contact is selected.

1. Under the SHIP SILHOUETTE field click the right and left facing BACK
and NEXT arrows to cycle through the class and weapon names in the
SHIP SILHOUETTE window to display the 3D silhouette for each
available class in the SILHOUETTE WINDOW.
2. Rotate the silhouette model by clicking the PORT and STRB arrows.
Click the Zoom buttons to alter the size of the silhouette in the window.
When a match is determined, leave the selected name in the SHIP
SILHOUETTE field.
with the waterline on the other half of the photo or use the UP and
DOWN arrows in the IMAGE ADJUST panel; to manipulate the photo.
The estimated range to the ship is displayed in the Range readout.
the Nav Map.
The class name showing in the Stadimeter SHIP SILHOUETTE field
when the contact is marked is assigned to the contact.


TMA.
688(I): I C E T H I C K N E S S D IS PL A Y [F8]
The 688(I)s Ice Thickness Display is only accessible from the Periscope
Station.
BClick the Ice Keel Icon Button below the Periscope view to access
the display. Click the Periscope reticule to return to the Periscope
station.
The 688(I) utilizes an upward looking television camera to assist in locating
suitable locations for surfacing when under the ice. Suitable areas appear
brighter while areas where the ice is very thick appear dark. Because the
TV relies on differences in brightness it is not helpful at night. The Signal
Strength Indicator uses colored lights to indicate the thickness of ice directly
over Ownship as follows.

Ownship cannot penetrate ice with a thickness greater than 10 feet. The
lights in the Signal Strength Indicator represent the following ice depths and
damage expectations.
Green: 0-4 feet thick; no Damage to Ownship.
Yellow: 4-8 feet thick; minor damage, may lose ice sensors.
Red: 8-10 feet or more; moderate to serious damage; may lose masts,
flooding possible.

Use the following procedure for surfacing and submerging under the ice
1. Us your ships Ice Thickness display to locate a polynya in the ice as

described above.
2. At a slow speed (1 2 knots) position the sub under the polynya then
bring the sub to a complete stop.
3. From the Task Bars Orders Menu select Navigate>Set Depth>Surface

or set your depth at the 688(I)s surfaced depth of 32 feet.

For those who prefer not to use the 3D view, check the depth readout
to determine that you have achieved surfaced depth.

Once surfaced you can raise the periscope and view the ice field. Be
sure to lower your periscope again before submerging to avoid

damaging it.

masts you may have raised!
688(I) S AIL B RIDGE (SAM L AUNCHER ) [F9]

The Sail Bridge station is only accessible when the submarine is surfaced.
The Sail Bridge provides three views: Free Look, Shoulder Mounted SAM
Launcher and Binoculars.
SAM Launcher
Free Look
Binoculars
Binoculars: Zoom from 2X to 16X by clicking the right side of the thumb
wheel at the top of the screen. Click the left side to decrease zoom. Click
and drag to pan the view. VISUAL mode is selected by default. LLTV mode
is available for night vision.
SAM Launcher: The 688(I)s in S.C.S. - Dangerous Waters carry FIM-92
Stinger Surface-to-Air Missiles. A shoulder mounted SAM launcher is
modeled and can be used to attack helicopters and low flying airplanes.
FIM-92 Stinger: Range: 4.3 nm (8,000 meters)
L AU NC H I N G
SURFACE
TO
A IR M I S S I L E (SAM)


reloads.
688(I) A UTOCREW
The 688(I) has five Autocrew available to assist with both the mundane and
the difficult aspects of gameplay. The 688(I)s Autocrew functions are
explained below.
688(I) B R O AD B AN D /N AR R OW B A N D S O NA R
A U T OC R E W
When ON, the Broadband/Narrowband Sonar Autocrew searches
Narrowband for contacts. Because they share trackers, contacts marked in
Narrowband also display in Broadband. Autocrew also assigns trackers,
classifies all marked contacts in Narrowband and assigns a Low, Medium,
or High level of confidence in his classification. The level of confidence
displays in the Navigation Stations DDI and above the 3D model when that
contact is selected.
classes to one

symbol. This is usually the symbol for Unknown (platform
category)/Unknown (ID (alliance)) and is accompanied by its Contact
ID number (S01, S02, etc). As soon as your Sonar Autocrew has
classified the contact, the symbol changes to that of the specified
class. Clicking on the Contact displays information about the class in
the DDI and the 3D model of that class appears in the 3D view
surrounded by a bounding yellow bounding box and a level of
confidence bar.
Your task: Your Sonar Autocrew can classify a contact as a specific
class, but he cannot determine its alliance (ID). You must do that
BOn the Nav Map, click the contact to select it then right-click on the
contacts symbol to display the Contact Menu.
BSelect Designate Category/ID>ID and select the presumed
alliance ID for the contact.
688(I) S O N A R A C TI V E I N TE R C E PT A U T OC R E W
Autocrew is on.
performs the following task as long as the radar is on:

688(I) F I R E C ON TR OL A U T OC R E W

Contact Menus Engage With command from the Nav Station. Your
Fire Control Autocrew uses the contacts classification when
determining presets. If you classify a contact as a surface ship when in
actuality it is a submarine, you Autocrew enters presets appropriate for
a surface ship.
BClick the Autocrew slider button at the upper left of the Target
Display to toggle the state of the Fire Control Autocrew. The
Autocrew is ON when the crew silhouette is visible.
688(I) TMA A U TOC R EW

accurate firing solution.
TMA station to toggle the state of the TMA Autocrew. Autocrew is
ON when the silhouette is visible.
When ON, the TMA Autocrew:

sensors.

The symbol for Unknown displays until you or the Sonar Autocrew
classifies it.

9 Note: When TMA Autocrew is ON, you can select specific contacts
to view on the TMA board, but you are not able to manipulate the
ruler or the settings.

$33(1',&(6
APPENDIX A: ACRONYMS
Acronym
Complete Term
Additional Info
ADT
Air Detector Tracker
This button on the FFGs

Weapons Coordinator
Station toggles the state
of the Air Search Radar.
ASTAC
ASW/ASUW Tactical Air

Controller
ASUW
Anti-surface Warfare
(Helicopter role)
In an ASUW mission the

helicopter provides eyes
and sensors that extend
beyond the reach of the
parent ships sensors.
When the helicopter has
classified and localized
the threat platform, data is
sent via Link to the parent
ship for a surface-tosurface prosecution. If the
helicopter is equipped with
appropriate weapons it
can also engage the
target.
ASW
Anti-Submarine Warfare
In an ASW mission a
platform is tasked to
classify, localize, and
potentially attack a
suspected threat detected
by Ownships sensors or
by sources external to
Ownship.
ASWO
Anti-Sub Warfare
Officer
ATF
Automatic Tag Follow
One of eight trackers that

can be assigned to
broadband contacts (tags)
in the FFG-7s Towed
Array Station.
A-1
Acronym
Complete Term
Additional Info
ATO
Airborne Tactical Officer
The ATO is responsible

for the tactical situation,
deciding what assets will
be used to prosecute the
target and handling the
coordination of other
assets on scene.
ATT
Automated Target
Tracker
The only tracker that can

be assigned to an active
sonar contact in the FFG7s Active (Hull Sonar)
Station. Once assigned it
marks a new bearing and
range with each return.
Not available in the hull
sonars passive mode.
BT
Bathythermograph
Sonobuoy
CAS
Combined Antenna
System
Used with FFG Gun and

SM2 Missile in S.C.S.Dangerous Waters.
CPA
Closest Point of
Approach
CWI
Continuous Wave
Illumination
Used to guide missiles on

the FFG.
CWIS
Close-In Weapons
System
Used on the FFG.
DDI
Digital Data Indicator
DDI
Data Display Indicator
DICASS
Directional CommandActivated Sonobuoy
DIFAR
Directional Frequency
Analysis and Recording
LOFAR
Low-Frequency
NTDS
Naval Tactical Display

System
OTS Buoy
Over The Side
Displays known or
suspected information
about a hooked platform
Sonobuoys launched by
FFG
A-2
Acronym
Complete Term
Additional Info
REMRO
Remote Radar Operator
This button on the FFG

Weapons Coordinator
Station is available when
the helo is aloft, SYNC is
established and Incoming
LINK data is set to
RADAR in the ASTAC
Station.
RPM
Revolutions Per Minute
SDT
Surface Detector
Tracker
This button on the FFG

Weapons Coordinator
Station toggles the state
of the Surface Search
Radar
SENSO
Sensor Operator
The SENSO is the person

who operates the radar
and magnetic anomaly
detection (MAD)
equipment, and processes
returns from sonobuoys
and the dipping sonar.
STIR
Separate Track
Illumination Radar
Used to guide the FFGs

SM2s in S.C.S.
Dangerous Waters.
VAB
Variable Action Button
VLAD
Vertical Line Array

Directional Frequency
A-3
A-4
APPENDIX B: TERMS
Term
Definition
Game Info
688(I)
Any controllable U.S.

Improved Los
Angeles class nuclear
submarine.
Akula
Any controllable
Akula I Improved or
Akula 2 nuclear
submarine.
All Akula game

interfaces are the
same. Their
weapons, top speed
and noise levels
differ.
Category
Refers to a type of a
platform (e.g.,
surface, subsurface,
airplane (air) and
helicopter.)
Any Ownship contact

that is not assigned a
category cannot be
targeted with a right
click menu or from
the Submarine Fire
Control Stations. The
system needs to
know if a weapon is
appropriate for the
selected target before
it will fire anything.
Cavitation
The sudden formation

and collapse of lowpressure bubbles
resulting from rotation
of a the ships
propeller.
Cavitation is noisy
and easily detected
by sonar.
Confidence
This refers to how

confident you are that
your classification of
a given contact is
accurate.
Listed as Low,
Medium or High This
is user assigned for
contacts detected by
Ownship sensors and
Link assigned for Link
contacts. The
designation appears
graphically above the
selected contact in
3D View and in the
DDI at the Navigation
Station.
Appendix B: Terms
B-1
Term
Definition
Game Info
Contact
Anything detected
visually or by one of
your ships sensors. A
contact is sometimes
referred to as a
Track.
Controllable Platform
A ship, sub or aircraft

that can be player
controlled in the
game.
FFG-7 or FFG
Any controllable U.S.

Oliver Hazard Perry
(FFG-7) class
platform.
Geoplot
The round CRTs on

the FFG used in
ASTAC and other
screens and the
rectangular screens
seen in the MH-60R
that display NTDS
symbols.
Symbols are not

colored in the Geoplot
as they are on the
Nav Map and there is
no map overlay. Click
on a symbol to select
(hook) it.
Gram
Any of the small,

rectangular digital
displays windows
found in the FFG-7,
MH-60R or P-3C
platforms that display
narrowband and SSP
data from sonobuoys.
Generic term for

Sonobuoy Data
Display Windows and
any data displayed
therein regardless of
data type.
Hook
To select a track
symbol on the Nav
Map or Geoplot
screens.
Clicking on a track
symbol hooks or
selects it.
Ice Keel
Large chunks of ice

the descend deep
under the ice floe
Hitting an ice keel can

damage the ship
during under ice
operations. Only the
Seawolf, the 688(I)
and Akula
submarines have
Under Ice capability
in SCSDangerous
Waters.
Appendix B: Terms
B-2
Term
Definition
Game Info
ID
When seen alone,

this word refers to the
presumed alliance of
a contact (Friendly,
Hostile, Neutral,
Unknown etc.)
Contact ID or Track
ID refers to the
contacts track/ID
number.
Kilo
Any controllable Kilo

Project 877 or Kilo
636 (Russian or
Chinese) nuclear
submarine. All Kilo
station interfaces are
the same. Their
weapons, top speed
and noise levels
differ.
Link
A network of
platforms (ships and
aircraft) that provide
position reports and
sensor contact
information via secure
two-way UHF or HF
radio transmissions.
Link is modeled for all

any side that has
controllable platforms
regardless of country.
(All Ownside A.I.
platforms and other
Ownside players in a
Multiplayer game are
members of the same
Link regardless of
country affiliation.)
Link Contact
A contact reported by
a Link Participant
Contact symbols and

Track IDs appear on
the Nav Map and in
Fire control Stations
for Ownside platforms
and any contacts they
detect when Show
Link Data is ON.
Link Participant
All Ownside platforms

(and land bases)
reporting in the Link.
NTDS Symbols for all

Link participants
appear when Show
Link Data or Show
Allies is on. Track
numbers only appear
when Show Link Data
is ON.
Local Contact
A contact marked by
Ownship.
Appendix B: Terms
B-3
Term
Definition
MH-60R or MH-60 or
Helo
Any controllable U.S

MH-60R helicopter.
The FFGs embarked
MH-60R helo is also
referred to as helo
even when it is not
player controlled.
Ownship
Refers to the current

controllable platform
regardless of
category.
(Controllable aircraft
are referred to as
Ownship.)
Ownside
All platforms and land

bases on your side.
P-3C or P-3

P-3C Orion Update III
AIM airplane.
Platform
A ship, sub or aircraft.
Platform ID
The track number

assigned to a
controllable platform.
In a Multiplayer
game, each playercontrolled platform
has a unique Platform
ID starting with 1001.
The next player
platform ID is
incremented by 300.
(1301, 1601, 1901
etc.) up to 30 players.
Relative bearing
The direction
expressed as a
horizontal angle
normally measured
clockwise from the
forward point of the
longitudinal axis of
Ownship.
Game Info
All Ownside platforms

are part of your Link
and report to you their
position to you as well
as data on any
contacts they hold.
Tracks marked by
each Ownship start
with the next number
following the Ownship
Platform ID up to 298
contacts per
Ownship.
Appendix B: Terms
B-4
Term
Definition
Seawolf

Seawolf (SSN 21)
class nuclear
submarine.
Game Info
Snapshot
A torpedo shot down

a specific line of
bearing.
Tag
A number assigned
by the FFG towed
array system to
detected frequencies.
Track
Anything detected
visually or by one of
your ships sensors. A
track is sometimes
referred to as a
contact
These numbers are

internal to the Towed
Array and are not the
same as a Track
number (Track ID.)
Track ID
An alphanumeric or
4-digit numeric
designation assigned
to a contact when it is
marked by an
Ownship Sensor or
reported by the Link.
Sometimes referred
to as a Contact ID.
When commanding a
sub, track IDs consist
of is a letter with a
number appended
(e.g. S01, E01, R01,
V01). When
commanding an
aircraft or the FFG,
Track IDs consist of a
4-digit designation
based on Ownships
Platform ID.
Tracker
A device used to
automatically follow a
sonar signal to which
it is assigned.
When a tracker is
assigned to a sonar
contact, periodic
updates on the
contacts bearing are
sent to TMA and/or
Nav Map
True bearing
The direction to an
object from a point,
expressed as a
horizontal angle
measured clockwise
from true north.
Appendix B: Terms
B-5
Appendix B: Terms
B-6
APPENDIX C: SUBMARINE MAX & MINS

This table shows important depth and speed information as modeled for all
controllable Submarine classes in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters. These
depths indicate the ordered depth necessary to place the indicated
deployed mast approximately one meter above the surface of water. These
depths are valid at sea state one. Depths will vary in heavier sea states.
Depth on U.S. submarines is measured and ordered in feet. Depth on the
Russian and Chinese submarines is measured and ordered in meters.
9 Note: Traveling at speeds in excess of those listed following a mast
depth will break the indicated mast unless the sail is out of the water.
1
688(I)
Akulas
Sail
breaks
surface:
46 ft
Sail
Breaks
surface:
49 ft
Sail
breaks
surface:
18 - 17 m
Sail
breaks
surface:
15 m
Fully
Surfaced:
27 ft
Fully
surfaced:
32 feet
Fully
Surfaced:
9 meters
Fully
Surfaced:
7 m.
Max Operating
2
Depth modeled
1,968 ft
1,476 ft
520 m
300 m
(600m)
(450 m)
(1,707 ft)
(984 ft)
Periscope Depth
61 ft
63ft
20 m
19 m
10 kts
10 kts
10 kts
10 kts
51ft
54 ft
19 m
17 m
8 kts
8 kts
8 kts
8 kts
Radio Mast Depth
59 ft
63 ft
20 m
19 m
(Comms Depth)
10 kts
10 kts
10 kts
10 kts
ESM Mast Depth
58 ft
61 ft
19 m
18 m
10 kts
10 kts
10 kts
10 kts
54 feet
56 feet
19 m
17 m
10 knots
10 kts
10 kts
10 kts
Towed Array
breaks at speeds =
or >
40 kts
Does not
break at
Max
speed
Does not
break at
Max
speed
NA
Floating wire
breaks at speeds =
or >
18 kts
18 kts
18 kts
18 kts
Surfaced Depth
Radar Depth
Snorkel/Ventilation
Depth
4
Kilo
Seawolf
Appendix: C Submarine Max and Mins
C-1
The Akulas and Kilos measure depth in meters. These depths are not as
precise as those measured in feet. The actual depth at which the mast or
sail breaks the surface may be somewhere in the distance between the
stated depth and one meter above the stated depth. This difference will be
very noticeable in heavy sea states.
2
Maximum operating depth is the maximum depth at which you can

routinely operate. Crush depth is always below this stated number. How
much below that will be slightly different every time you play. You can go
below the stated operating depth without imploding. You will never know
your exact crush depth.
3
Radiating while the radar mast is submerged destroys the Radar. Be sure
you are at Radar depth before raising the Radar Mast.
4
Backing up or extreme turns and depth changes may cut the towed array.
Appendix: C Submarine Max and Mins
C-2
APPENDIX D: IN-GAME SENSORS

This table shows the names for sensors as modeled for the controllable
platforms in S.C.S. Dangerous Waters. These sensor names appear in
the DDI in the Source field.
Seawolf SSN 21
Sensor
Description
Seawolf SSN 21
BSY-2 Act
Medium Frequency Active

Sonar
Seawolf SSN 21
WLQ-4
ESM Sensor
Seawolf SSN 21
BSY-2 PNB
Passive Hull Sonar
Seawolf SSN 21
BSY-2 PBB
Passive Sphere Sonar
Seawolf SSN 21
WLR-9
Active Intercept
Seawolf SSN 21
TB-16
Towed Array (Port)
Seawolf SSN 21
TB-29
Towed Array (Starboard)
Seawolf SSN 21
BSY-2 WAA
Wide Aperture Array
Seawolf SSN 21
AN/BPS-16
Radar
688(I) SSN
Sensor
Description
688(I) SSN
BQQ-10 Act

Sonar
688(I) SSN
BLQ-10
ESM Sensor
688(I) SSN
BQQ-10 PNB
Passive Hull Sonar
688(I) SSN
BQQ-10 PBB
Passive Sphere Sonar
688(I) SSN
WLY-1
Active Intercept
688(I) SSN
Port TB-16
Towed Array (Port)
688(I) SSN
Stbd TB-16
Towed Array (Starboard)
688(I) SSN
AN/BPS-15
Radar
Akula SSN
Sensor
Description
Akula SSN
MGK-503 Act

Sonar
Akula SSN
Bukhta
ESM Sensor
Akula SSN
MGK-503 PNB
Conformal Array (Passive

Narrowband)
Akula SSN
MGK-503 PBB
Cylindrical Array (Passive

Broadband)
Akula SSN
Pelamida TA
Towed Array
Akula SSN
MRK-50
Radar
D-1
Kilo SS
Sensor
Description
Kilo SS
MGK-400 Act

Sonar
Kilo SS
MRM-25EM
ESM Sensor
Kilo SS
MGK-400 PNB
Conformal Sonar
Kilo SS
MGK-400 PBB
Cylindrical Sonar
Kilo SS
MRK-50
Radar
MH-60R
Sensor
Description
MH-60R
AQS-22 Act
Dipping Sonar (Active)
MH-60R
AQS-22 Pass
Dipping Sonar (Passive)
MH-60R
ALQ-210
ESM Sensor
MH-60R
AN/APS-147
Radar
O.H. Perry FFG
Sensor
Description
O.H. Perry FFG
SQS-56 Act
Hull Sonar (Active)
O.H. Perry FFG
SLQ-32
ESM Sensor
O.H. Perry FFG
SQS-56 PBB
Hull Sonar (Passive)
O.H. Perry FFG
SQR-19
Towed Array
O.H. Perry FFG
AN/SPS-49
Air Search Radar
O.H. Perry FFG
AN/SPS-55
Surface Search Radar
P-3C Orion
Sensor
Description
P-3C Orion
ALR-66
ESM Sensor
P-3C Orion
AVX-1
Infrared Sensor
P-3C Orion
AN/APS-137
Radar
D-2
APPENDIX E: CREDITS
S ONALYSTS T EAM
Producer: Kim Castro
Associate Producer: James Carlson
Programmers: Renee Anderson, Keith Aubin, Dave Capizzano, James
Carlson, Rob Costello, Mel Davey, John Hazard, Michael Kolar, Cindy
Spellman, Tod Swain
Game Design: Keith Aubin, James Carlson, Michael Kolar, Tod Swain
Scenario Design: Keith Aubin, Christopher Beall, James Carlson, Kim
Castro, Chester Helms, Bill McConnell
Graphic Design And Animation: Michael Bailey, Brian Barnes, Teresa
Bonillo, Christopher Conway, Stephen Freitas, Michele Granville,
Christopher Ilvento, Kattie Konno-Leonffu, Jay Nilsen
Graphic Interns: Will Cook, Ben Insler, Rory Panagotopulos, David Strick
Original Music Composition: Curt Ramm
Sound Design: James Carlson, Robert Costello, Curt Ramm
Voice Talent: Keith Aubin, Michael Bailey, Robert Banker, Brian Barnes,
David Capizzano, Jamie Carlson, Kim Castro, Steve Cerilli, Simon Chan,
Robert Costello, Duncan Dickson, Stephen Featherston, Val Grozak,
Ronald Hayden, John Hazard, Jake Kahn, Michael Kolar, Robert Kurzawa,
Donald LaForce, Evgenia Neff, Edward Noyes, Curt Ramm, Kenneth
Richters, Floyd Rogers, Jonas Sanchez, Paul Santamaria, Ronit Smidt,
Brian Van Volkenburg, Seth Zowader
Additional Programmers: Christopher Cyr, Kyle Kolva, Michael Young
Research And Database: Sue McConnell
Documentation:
Writer: Sue McConnell
Editing and Support: Stephen Featherston, Stephen Freitas, Chester
Helms, Robert Price, Cindy Spellman
Subject Matter Experts: Robert Banker, Dave Bartholomew, Geary
Boulrice, Daniel Bowdler, David Coleman, Tony Cowden, Charles Dye,
Michael Giannelli, Lance Hamilton, Michael Hewitt, Dick Hodges, CC
Johnson, Terry Jones, Robert Kurzawa, Jeffrey Lemmon, Frederick Litty,
Bill McConnell, Jerome Provencher, Mark Tarantelli, Jack Wayne,
Raymond Woolrich
Legal And Contracts: Lawrence Clark, Lisa Estabrooks, Mirek Fal,
Suzanne Lemmon, A. Lisa Mackie, Evgenia Neff, Diane Rogoff, David
Samuelson, Greg Vymola, Lyle Watkinson
BETA Phase Project Management: Jodi Imms
Appendix E: Credits
E-1
Testers: Keith Aubin (Lead), Geary Boulrice, George McCullen, Jerome

Provencher, John Smalley, Bence Strickland, Basha Wynne
B ATTLEFRONT T EAM
Martin van Balkom, Fernando J. Carrera Buil, Matt Faller, Steve Grammont,
Charles Moylan, Dan Olding
B ETA T ESTERS
Wyatt WWB Barnett, Marco Bergman, Rob jrcar Carpenter, Martin
Ramius Gibson, Tim TimmyG00 Grab, Tim CaptainX Graham, Craig
Harv Harvey, David Diemos King, Rob Mace Knight, Frank Smuook
Loethen, Bill "Subguru" Nichols, Dan Kwazydog Olding, Chris "little evil"
Orosz, Tim Rune Orosz, Willem Fish Peschier, Marc OKO Rannou,
John jsteed Steed, Neal Subsim Stevens, Raul Furia Ortiz de Urbina,
Bill Actor Valencia, Tom Thomasew Watt, Jonathan Ritual Watters
3 RD P ARTY S UPPORT
Hardware Testing: iBeta
Original Music Composition: Chad Kelly, Aberrant Sound
Marketing And Public Relations: Lone Star P.R.
S PECIAL T HANKS T O
The Sonalysts Partnership
TerrainBase: National Geophysical Data Center (NGDC) of the National
Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)
Gtopo30: Earth Resources Observation Systems (EROS) Data Center, of
the United States Geological Survey (USGS)
Walsh's Arctic and Antarctic Sea Ice Concentration Analyses: National
Snow and Ice Data Center (NSIDC), of the University of Colorado (Special
thanks to Diana Starr for all her help.)
Global Ecosystems: Earth Resources Observation Systems (EROS) Data
Center, of the United States Geological Survey (USGS)
U.S. Naval Institute:
Naval Institute Press: Frederick Rainbow, Editor
Combat Fleets Of The World: U.S. Naval Institute
World Naval Weapon Systems: Norman Friedman
U.S. Naval Institute Archive Photos: Susan Brook, Ronald
Chambers, Jennifer Till
(c) 2004 Sonalysts, Inc. All rights reserved.
Appendix E: Credits
E-2

SCS - Dangerous Waters - Manual - PC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SCS - Dangerous Waters - Manual - PC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SCS - Dangerous Waters - Manual - PC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sonalysts Combat Simulations

Section 1: Install Guide

Section 2: Welcome/Getting Started

Section 3: Main Menu

Section 6: Navigation Station

Section 7: FFG Stations

Section 8: MH-60R Stations

Section 9: P-3C Orion Stations

Section 10: Kilo Stations

Section 11: Akula Stations

Section 12: Seawolf Stations

Section 13: 688(I) Stations

Appendix C: Submarine Max and Mins

Appendix D: In-Game Sensors

MATERIALS ARE LICENSED AS IS. IN NO EVENT WILL SONALYSTS OR

Section 1: Installation Guide

T O I NSTALL S.C.S. D ANGEROUS W ATERS

2. The Dangerous Waters Setup Wizard appears. Click NEXT to proceed

3. The Choose Destination Location window appears. Click NEXT to

Section 1: Installation Guide

6. The Start Copying Files Window appears providing you with an

9. You are prompted to add an icon to the desktop. Click YES or NO as

14. The InstallShield Wizard Complete window appears. Click FINISH.

Section 1: Installation Guide

Section 1: Installation Guide

Section 2: Welcome / Getting Started

2: WELCOME/GETTING STARTED .............................................................2-3

Section 2: Welcome / Getting Started

Section 2: Welcome / Getting Started

combatant is capable of engaging and destroying targets on land, in the air,

MH-60R Multi-mission Helicopter

Seawolf (SSN 21) Class

Los Angeles Improved (SSN 688(I)) Class

Akula 1 Improved SSN & Akula II SSN Classes

Section 2: Welcome / Getting Started

This manual is divided into the following sections. (A separate Mission

Section 2: Welcome / Getting Started

Seawolf Stations: Explains all Seawolf (SSN 21 Class) stations and

Specific Options Settings

Crew Options Settings

Section 2: Welcome / Getting Started

Game Options Settings

Section 2: Welcome / Getting Started

Default Keyboard Controls Settings

controlled in the game.

category. (Controllable aircraft are also referred to as Ownship.)

Ownside: All platforms assigned to your side by the mission creator.

class surface ship.

embarked MH-60R helo is also referred to as Helo even when it is not

subsurface, airplane (air) and helicopter (Helo.) Also refers to

confident you are that your classification of the contact is accurate.

contact is sometimes referred to as a track. A contact, or track, should

7, MH-60R or P-3C platforms that display narrowband and SSP data

Clicking on a track symbol hooks or selects it.

contact (Friendly, Hostile, Neutral, Unknown etc.)

reports and sensor contact information via secure two-way UHF or HF

Section 2: Welcome / Getting Started

Link Participant: All platforms (and land bases) reporting in your

detected frequencies. These numbers are internal to the Towed Array

track is sometimes referred to as a contact. A contact, or track should